MF8200 Series SM 019640

Workshop service manual N 3378177 M1
CONTENTS
1
Introduction
Splitting
the tractor
Engine
Clutch
Gearbox
Rear axle
Power Take-Off
Front Axle
Hydraulics
10
11
12
Electrical
equipment
Electronics
13
14
Accessories
Service tools
Cab and
Equipement
8200 SERIES TRACTORS
1 . INTRODUCTION
Contents
1A01
INTRODUCTION
Issue 1
May 2001
Introduction
1A01.1
1 A01 Introduction
CONTENTS
A.
Reading the manual
B.
General specifications
C.
Safety instructions
19
D.
Practical advice
20
E.
Instructions for putting the tractor in service
23
F.
Conversion tables
24
G.
Locking compounds and sealants
32
H.
Tightening torques
33
Issue 2
May 2002

1A01.2
Introduction
The aim of this manual is to assist Distributors and

Dealer to put AGCO tractors into service and ensure their
efficient maintenance and repair.
By following the methods outlined in the manual and
where necessary by using the specialised service tools
indicated, the necessary maintenance operations can be
carried out within the times specified in the Repair Times
Schedule.
In certain countries, the legislation actually forbids the

fitting of parts that do not comply with the tractor
manufacturers specifications. All tightening torques
indicated in the manual must be scrupulously complied
with.
At specific locations, locking devices are fitted. If any
locking device is damaged during disassembly, a new
locking device must be fitted.
Fitting spare parts other than AGCO original spare parts
voids the warranty of the tractor since all AGCO parts are
guaranteed by the manufacturer. AGCO Distributors and
Dealers are required to supply original spare parts only.
Page numbering
Repair Times Schedule
Example: 7C01.3
This manual is divided into chapters and sections, with
each page providing the following information:
7 = Chapter
C = Section
01 = Sequence number in the section
3 = Page number in the section.
The chapters in the Repair Times Schedule are identical

to those found in this Workshop Manual.
A . Reading the manual

General
At the bottom of the page is shown the issue number and

date.
Using the manual

To facilitate searching, at the beginning of each chapter
is an index showing the different sections contained in
the chapter. Then, at the beginning of each section, is a
list of contents.
Meaning of symbols
circle (..) : identifies the component part only
Amendments
Amended pages are issued using precisely the same
numbering system as the previous pages: only the issue
number and the date are changed.
The old pages should be removed from the manual and
destroyed.
Service tools
During operations where a specific service tool needs to
be used, the tool reference number is specified.
Repairs and replacement of parts

When replacing parts, it is essential that only AGCO
original spare parts are used.
Special attention should be paid to the following facts
concerning the carrying out of repairs and the fitting of
spare parts and replacement accessories.
The fitting of spare parts, other than AGCO original spare
parts can compromise the safety of the tractor.
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.3
B . General specifications
Engine
Specifications
8210
8220 /
8220 Xtra
PERKINS ENGINE
1006
1006
8240 /
8240 Xtra
8250 /
8250 Xtra
620
634
VALMET ENGINE
Number of cylinders
Turbocharger
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Air / Air intercooler

Bore (mm)
100
100
108
108
Stroke (mm)
127
127
120
134
Capacity (l)
6.6
7.4
Rated power (ISO Kw)
113
119.5
125 / 142
136 / 159
At engine speed (rpm)
2200
2200
2200
2200
Maximum torque (ISO Nm)
620
663
727 / 855
797 / 920
Engine speed at maximum torque
1400
1400
1400
1400
Idle speed
950
950
950
950
Maximum power speed (rpm)
2200
2200
2200
2200
Maximum speed at no load (rpm)
2354
2354
2354
2354
Lubrication: By gear pump - suction strainer and interchangeable external cartridge filters
Valves: Overhead valves operated by pushrods
Rocker arm clearance (cold)
- Inlet - mm (inches)
0.20
0.20
0.35
0.35
- Exhaust - mm (inches)
0.45
0.45
0.35
0.35
Engine oil cooler
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8210
8220 /
8220 Xtra
8240 /
8240 Xtra
8250 /
8250 Xtra
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No. of elements
Injection pump
Lucas
Lucas
Stanadyne/Bosch
Bosch
Injectors and nozzle holder
Lucas
Lucas
Stanadyne
Stanadyne
Injection and air filter
Fuel filter
Two-stage air filter, a dry filter element with a filter-clogging indicator.

Start up in cold weather
Thermostart
Issue 2
May 2002

1A01.4
Specifications
Introduction
8260 / 8260 Xtra
8270 / 8270 Xtra
8280 / 8280 Xtra
634
645
645
Yes
Yes
Yes
Air / Water intercooler
Yes / No
Yes / No
Yes / No
Air / Air intercooler
No / Yes
No / Yes
No / Yes
Bore (mm)
108
111
111
Stroke (mm)
134
145
145
Capacity (l)
7.4
8.4
8.4
162 / 172
181 / 192
200 / 212
2200
2200
2200
878 / 980
1002 / 1120
1150 / 1260
Engine speed at maximum torque
1400
1400
1400
Idle speed
950
950
950
Maximum power speed (rpm)
2200
2200
2200
Maximum speed at no load (rpm)
2354
2354
2354
VALMET ENGINE
Number of cylinders
Turbocharger
Rated power (ISO Kw)

At engine speed .
Maximum torque (ISON Nm)
Lubrication: By gear pump - suction strainer and interchangeable external cartridge filters
Valves: Overhead valves operated by pushrods
Rocker arm clearance (cold)
- Inlet - mm (inches)
0.35
0.35
0.35
- Exhaust - mm (inches)
0.35
0.35
0.35
Engine oil cooler
Yes
Yes
Yes
8260 / 8260 Xtra
8270 / 8270 Xtra
8280 / 8280 Xtra
Yes
Yes
Yes
No. of elements
Injection pump
Bosch
Bosch
Bosch
Injection and air filter
Fuel filter
Injectors and nozzle holder
Stanadyne
Stanadyne/Bosch Stanadyne/Bosch
Two stage air filter, dry filter element with filter clogging indicator.
Start up in cold weather
Issue 2
Thermostart
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.5
Road speeds at 2200 rpm - Dynashift transmission with creeper unit - Heavy Duty
reduction drive units - 20.8R38 tyres.
RANGE
2
TORTOISE
HARE
FORWARD
Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty
reduction drive
reduction drive
unit km/h
unit km/h
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
2.36
2.76
3.26
3.81
3.58
4.19
4.94
5.79
5.11
5.98
7.06
8.27
6.96
8.14
9.61
11.25
7.77
9.09
10.73
12.56
11.79
13.80
16.29
19.06
16.84
19.71
23.27
27.23
22.92
26.83
31.67
37.06
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.5
1.7
2.0
1.7
2.0
2.3
2.7
1.9
2.2
2.6
3.1
2.9
3.4
4.0
4.7
4.1
4.8
5.7
6.6
5.6
6.5
7.7
9.0
Issue 2
REVERSE
Heavy Duty
reduction drive
unit km/h
Heavy Duty
reduction drive
unit km/h
2.30
2.70
3.19
3.74
3.51
4.10
4.84
5.67
5.01
5.86
6.92
8.10
6.82
7.98
9.42
11.02
7.61
8.91
10.51
12.30
11.55
11.55
15.95
18.67
16.50
19.31
22.79
26.68
22.45
26.28
31.02
36.31
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.4
1.7
2.0
1.7
1.9
2.3
2.7
1.9
2.2
2.6
3.0
2.8
2.8
3.9
4.6
4.0
4.7
5.6
6.5
5.5
6.4
7.6
8.9
May 2002

1A01.6
Introduction
Road speeds at 2200 rpm - Full Powershift transmission AG150, sealed Heavy Duty
reduction drive units - 20.8R38 tyres.
RANGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Issue 2
FORWARD
(km/h)
2.28
2.94
3.80
4.32
4.91
5.59
6.33
7.21
8.18
9.31
10.54
12.01
13.62
15.52
17.57
22.69
29.28
37.82
May 2002
REVERSE
(km/h)
2.28
3.80
4.32
6.33
7.21
10.54
12.01
17.57
Introduction
1A01.7
Road speeds at 2200 rpm - Full Powershift transmission AG150, sealed Heavy Duty
reduction drive units with creeper unit - 20.8R38 tyres.
RANGE
FRONT
(km/h)
REAR
(km/h)
1
2
3
4
0,6
0,7
0,9
1,1
0,6
0,9
1,1
1,5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1,2
1,4
1,5
1,8
2,0
2,3
2,6
2,9
3,3
3,8
4,3
5,5
7,1
9,2
1,8
2,6
2,9
4,3
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.8
Road speed at 2200 rpm - AG250 Full Powershift Transmission, double drive units
- 650 / 85R38 tires
RANGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Issue 2
FRONT
(km/h)
REAR
(km/h)
2.40
3.10
4.00
4.60
5.10
5.90
6.70
7.60
8.60
9.80
11.10
12.70
14.30
16.30
18.50
23.90
30.90
39.80
2.40
4.00
4.60
6.70
7.60
11.10
12.70
18.50
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.9
Road speed at 2200 rpm AG250 Full Powershift Transmission, double drive units
- 650 / 85R38 tires with gearbox
RANGE
FRONT
(km/h)
REAR
(km/h)
1
2
3
4
0.60
0.80
1.00
1.10
0.60
1.00
1.10
1.60
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1.30
1.40
1.60
1.90
2.10
2.40
2.70
3.10
3.50
4.00
4.50
5.80
7.50
9.70
1.90
2.70
3.10
4.50
Issue 2
May 2002

1A01.10
Introduction
Electrical circuit
Voltage :
Batteries :
Alternator :
Starter safety :
Headlights :
Parking lights :
Direction indicators :
Number plate light :
Work lights :
Dials and signal lamp lighting :
Roof light:
12 volt, negative to ground

2 maintenance-free batteries
120 Amp.
Controlled by clutch pedal
European dipped beam 40/45 W
5W
21 W
10 W
55 W - H3
3 W - 2 W - 1,2 W
10 W
Cooling system
Mode :
Fan:
Water pump :
Fan belt tension :
Thermostat controlled, open temperature: 82 C.

Viscostatic releasable type
- gear-driven in 8210 / 8220 / 8270 / 8280 tractors
- belt-driven in 8240 / 8245 / 8250 / 8260 tractors
15 mm (0.6") to 20 mm (0.8") on the longest run
Transmission
Dynashift gearbox with mechanical
reverse shuttle
Clutch :
- wet clutch : 8210 / 8220 : 6 plates

8240 : 7 plates
8250 : 8 plates
- 48 forward speeds
- 48 reverse speeds
Creeper gearbox :
32 forward speeds
32 reverse speeds
four ratios selectable without declutching
synchromesh reverse shuttle
Filtering
- 1 x 60 micron suction strainer
Dynashift gearbox with power shuttle
8210 - 8220 power shuttle
- clutch controlled
- 6 forward speed discs
- 5 reverse speed discs
8240 power shuttle
- clutch controlled
8250 power shuttle
- clutch controlled
Creeper gearbox :
- 48 forward speeds
- 48 reverse speeds
Filtering
- 1 x 60 micron suction strainer
Issue 2
32 forward speeds
32 reverse speeds
four ratios selectable without declutching
power shuttle
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.11
Full Powershift gearbox :
- 17 or 18 forward speeds (depending on 30 km/h or 40 km/h version)

- 8 reverse speeds
Clutches :
9 clutches controlled by solenoid valves
ratio creeper gearbox :
- 34 or 36 forward speeds (depending on 30 km/h or 40 km/h version)

- 16 reverse speeds
Hydraulics :
1 "Gerotor" pump - Capacity 110 l/min at 2200 rpm provides (for lubrication and supply of clutches, cooling system and boosting of)
the master cylinders.
1 x 150 micron suction strainer, located inside the housing.
External 15-micron filter, 3-way filter protects solenoid valves
from particles.
Filtering :
Final reduction drive units

Reduction drive units:
Reduction ratios:
Epicyclical, located in rear axle housings.

8210 / 8220 Heavy duty ......................................
8220/8240/8245 Heavy duty sealed compartment
8240 / 8245 / 8250 / 8260 Composite ........
8260 / 8270 / 8280 Dual .............................
6.21:1
6.21:1
7.14:1
9.47:1
Front axle with 2-wheel drive

Optional in 8210 to 8260 tractors
Front axle with 4-wheel drive

Suspension :
Clutch mechanism:
Differential lock:
Gear ratios:
Option available on models Carraro 20.29 and 20.43 (8210 to 8250) only
Electro-hydraulically controlled from a button on the armrest
inside the cab.
Differential lock coupling is electro-hydraulically controlled.
Lock :
- oil-bath clutch on Carraro (20.29 and 20.43) and Dana AG280 front axles
- hydromechanical dog coupling on Dana AG155 and AG200 front axles.
8210 / 8220 / 8240 ..... AG155
20,872/1
up to K137012
8210 / 8220 / 8240 ..... 20.29
20,769/1
from K137013
8240 /8245 /8250 /8260 AG200
20.475/1
8250 ........................... 20.43
20.769/1
From K116015
8250 Xtra .................... 20.48
20.945/1
8270 / 8280 ................ APL5052
8270 : 8280 ................ AG280
20.475/1
20.363/1
Up to L074008
From L074009
Power take-off
interchangeable shaft :
Shiftable :
750 rpm economy PTO :
540 (6 splines) or 1000 rpm (21 splines) at engine speed

of 2000 rpm.
with 540 rpm or 1000 rpm interchangeable end
750 rpm at engine speed of 2000 rpm
6 splines, shaft 35 mm
20 splines shaft 44.5 mm or
21 splines shaft 35 mm
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.12
Hydraulic circuit
Closed centre hydraulic circuit with flow and pressure regulation.

2 possible circuits :
- 110 l/min at 200 bar
- 150 l/min at 200 bar, optionally available on 8200 tractors only if they are equipped with a Full Powershift
gearbox
Booster pump: maximum flow 150 l/min or 215 l/min (o 150 l/min hydraulic circuit) at 2200 rpm guaranteeing a
constant 5 bar boost for the variable displacement pump, also provides lubrication for the rear axle.
Low-pressure circuit (17 bar) supplies the following functions :
4 WD clutch
Engine clutch (mechanical reverse shuttle)
Differential lock
Power shuttle
Power take-off clutch
Hare / Tortoise range (Heavy Duty gearbox)
Low pressure circuit for Full Powershift gearbox
- the Full Powershift gearbox has its own low pressure pump that ensures lubrication of the transmission and operation
of these clutches at a 17 bar pressure
High-pressure circuit: maximum pump flow 110 l/min or 150 l/min (optionally) at 2200 rpm, maximum pressure 200
bar that supplies:
the steering
the 17 bar valve
the auxiliary spool valves
the hydraulic lift system
Filtering :
1 x 150 micron suction strainer located on the left-hand side of the

transmission housing.
Main external high-pressure 15-micron oil filter, located on the righthand side of the transmission housing.
Hydraulic lift
Type: 3-point, category 3
Lift rams: dia. 95 (8210, 8220, 8240, 8250) quantity 2 - capacity (see table)
Position of lift
rod on drawbar
(mm)
Length
of lift rod
(mm)
Horizontal
drawbar
(Kg)
Drawbar in
transport position
(Kg)
547.5
824
7149
9365
918
7373
8627
824
7769
9865
918
7927
9109
600.0
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.13
Lift rams: dia. 105 (8260 to 8280) quantity 2 - capacity (see table)
Position of lift
rod on drawbar
(mm)
Mini 530.4
Maxi 580.9
Length
of lift rod
(mm)
Horizontal
drawbar
(Kg)
Drawbar in
transport position
(Kg)
838
8741
11387
915
8994
10656
838
9475
12001
915
9667
11252
Brakes
Type
Lining internal dia.
Operation
Parking brake
Park lock
: disc brakes, two discs per wheel with double reduction unit constant flow
lubrication, external dia. 313 mm.
: 239 mm.
: Hydraulic, using two master cylinders.
: operates on intermediate shaft of drive pinion.
: mechanically locks the intermediate shaft of the drive pinion.
Rear differential lock

Type :
- 8210 to 8250 : Hydro-mechanical , standard torque
- 8210 to 8250 : 5'' or 7'' multidisc (according to version) in oil bath, standard torque
- 8260 to 8280 : 7'' Multi-disc in oil bath, hypoid torque
Control: Electrically controlled hydraulics.
Issue 2
May 2002

1A01.14
Introduction
Steering
Type: Hydrostatic, telescopic or fixed tilting steering column double action steering ram (8200 with Dana or
Carraro front axle), two double action steering rams (8270 and 8280 with APL5052 front axle only).
Wheels
Front (4 wheel drive): adjustable steel rims
Rear: steel rims (fixed or adjustable), manually adjustable pressed steel rim with cast iron disc.
Capacities
Fuel tank with additional reserve : ............................................ 8210/8220/8240/8250/8260 :
......................................................................................................................... 8270/8280 :
410 l
456 l
Cooling system ................................................................................................. 8210/8220 :

..................................................................................................................... 8240 to 8280 :
28,5 l
34 l
Engine sump ..................................................................................................... 8210/8220 :

.................................................................................................................................. 8240 :
........................................................................................................ 8250/8260/8270/8280 :
15,6 l
20 l
19 l
Transmission / rear axle Dynashift gearbox (Heavy Duty) ................................. 8210/8220 :
123 l
Transmission / rear axle Full Powershift gearbox(Heavy Duty) .......................... 8210/8220 :
157 l
Transmission / rear axle Dynashift gearbox (Heavy Duty sealed) ...................... 8220/8240 :
120 l
Transmission / rear axle Full Powershift (Heavy Duty sealed) ........................... 8220/8240 :
150 l
Transmission / rear axle Dynashift gearbox (Composite) .................................. 8240/8250 :
114 l
Transmission / rear axle Full Powershift gearbox (Composite) ......... 8240/8245/8250/8260 :
147 l
Transmission / rear axle Full Powershift gearbox (double drive unit) ......... 8260/8270/8280 :
156 l
Note: Transmission/rear axle assembly filling tolerances 5 l.
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.15
AG155 and AG200 front axle assembly .................................................................. 8210 to 8260
10.2 l
APL5052 front axle assembly .................................................................................... 8270/8280
10 l
AG280 front axle assembly ........................................................................................ 8270/8280
16 l
20.29ACP and 20.43ACP fixed front axle assembly ............................................... 8210 to 8250
6l
20.29S and 20.43S suspension front axle assembly .............................................. 8210 to 8250
8.6 l
20.48ACP fixed front axle assembly ........................................................................... 8250 Xtra
10 l
20.48S suspension front axle assembly ...................................................................... 8250 Xtra
10 l
AG 155H front final drive unit (each) ............................... .................................... 8210 to 8240
1.6 l
20.29 or 20.43 front final drive unit (each) .............................................................. 8210 to 8250
1.3 l
20.48 front final drive unit (each) ................................................................................. 8250 Xtra
1.9 l
AG 200 front final drive unit (each) ..................... ..................................... 8240/8245/8250/8260
1,8 l
APL 5052 front final drive unit (each) ................................................................. ... 8270/8280
4l
AG280 front final drive unit (each) .............................................................................. 8270/8280
2.7 l
Heavy Duty Sealed Rear final drive unit (each) .................................................. .... 8220/8240
3,6 l
Composite rear final drive drive units (each) ......................... .................. 8240/8245/8250/8360
4,5 l
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.16
Tightening torque
Wheel to rear axle

Standard final drive
- rim to disc ...........................................................................
- rim to axle hub: ...................................................................
Straight shaft
- disc to single conical hub (shaft dia. 95) ..............................
- half conical hub to hub (shaft dia. 95) ..................................
- half conical hub to hub (shaft dia. 110) ................................
- disc to half conical hub ........................................................
- rim to disc ...........................................................................
350 - 460 Nm
350 - 460 Nm
500 - 600 Nm
640 - 680 Nm
250 - 350 Nm
Wheel to front axle

- 4 WD wheel to hub (dry M22 studs) ......................................
640 - 680 Nm
250 - 350 Nm
400 - 450 Nm
Miscellaneous
- Extending arms .......................................................................
- Power take-off shaft ...............................................................
- Steering rams .........................................................................
- Engine oil drain plug ................................................................
- Fuel tank drain plug .................................................................
400 - 600 Nm
100 - 130 Nm
75 - 80 Nm
80 Nm
15 - 18 Nm
Noise levels (Dba) reaching the driver's ears

- Measured according to EEC instruction 77/311 Appendix II
CEE 77/311
Appendix II
CEE 77/311
Appendix II
Type
Type
Windows
closed
Windows
open
78
80
8240 Xtra
75
80
77
83
8250 Xtra
74
79
8240
74
80
8260 Xtra
77
81
8250
77
84
8270 Xtra
76
81
8270
76
81
8280 Xtra
76
81
8280
77
82
8210
8220 / 8220 Xtra
Issue 2
May 2002
Windows
closed
Windows
open
Introduction
1A01.17
Dimensions and weights

SPECIFICATIONS
mm - kg
8210
A Wheelbase
B Overall length (with 3PT, without front weights)
C Height to roof (cab tractor)
D Overall width (1)
E Ground clearance
Min. weight (with full tank, without extra
weight steel wheels).
2825
2825
2985
3075
3075
4949/4951 4949/4951 5111/5109 5111/5201 5251
2980
2980
3042
3042
3038
2854
2854
2880
2998
3007
453
453
453
453
453
6750/6925 6885/7160 7580/7665 8295
8850
Front tyres
Rear tyres
G Distance between flanges

Short straight shaft :
Long straight shaft:
H Stud distance
L Centring diameter
8220
8240
8250
8260
4RM. Dynashift/Powershift
16.9R28
20.8 R38
16.9R30
20.8 R42
Dynashift /Full Powershift

rear front axle
Flanged
Straight shaft
shaft
95
110 20.29 /20.43
1900
1940
2334
2494
2990
2990
203,2
335
335
280
149,35
280,80
280,8
335
I Stud length (according to rim)

63
J Stud diameter
M18 x 1,5
K Number of studs
8/10 x 2
40
M22 x 1,5
10 x2
87 / 110
M22 x 1,5
10 x 2
480/70
620/70 R42
Front axle
20.48
1890
AG155
1892
AG200
1892
280
335
280,8
335
280,8
335
40
40
40
M22 x 1,5 M22 x 1,5 M22 x 1,5
10 x2
10 x2
10 x2
(1) These dimensions are for max. track (without straight shaft).
V
V
V
V642
G
D
A
B
e
V
V639
I
J
J
K
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.18
SPECIFICATIONS
mm - kg
8270
8280
4RM. Powershift
A Wheelbase
3075
3075
B Overall length (with 3PT, without front weights)

C Height to roof (cab tractor)
D Overall width (1)
E Ground clearance
Min. weight (with full tank, without extra weight
steel wheels).
5251
3117
3032
432
9250
5251
3117
3030
432
9250
600/70R28
650/85R38
600/70R28
650/85R38
Front tyres
Rear tyres
Front axle
APL 5052
1875
-
AG 280
1892
-
H Stud distance
L Centring diameter
425
370
425
370
I Stud length (according to rim)
40
47
M22 x 1.5
12
M22 x 1,5
12
G Distance between flanges
J Stud diameter
K Number of studs
(1) These dimensions are for maxi track (without straight shaft).
V
V
I
J
Issue 2
V642
G
D
A
B
e
V
V639
J
K
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.19
C. Safety instructions
See Operator Instruction Book
Issue 2
May 2002

1A01.20
Introduction
D . Practical advice
Safety
When working on machinery, of whatever type, the first
concern must always be the safety of oneself and
others. To work in complete safety it is necessary to fully
understand the nature of the work that has to be carried
out, to use the appropriate tools and various equipment
correctly and to employ common sense in all situations.
Troubleshooting
Using the information supplied in the workshop manual,
the following method enables problems on the tractor to
be pinpointed with accuracy.
The method consists of following a certain number of
logical steps to identify the problem, to locate it and then
to correct it:
1. Define the problem
2. List the possible causes for the problem
3. Discriminate between the causes
4. Carry out checks in logical order in order to
discover the exact cause
5. Evaluate the remaining life of components, the
price of the components and the cost of labour.
6. Carry out the repair thus judged necessary
7. Check for the correct operation of the system and
functions that were affected.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
B
C
D
Lifting heavy components and assemblies

Unless specified otherwise, all disassembly should be
carried out using adjustable lifting tackle. The slings
bearing the weight must all be parallel to each other and
as near as possible vertical in relation to the object being
lifted. However, it is permitted where the slings are of a
much greater strength than the load being lifted that
slings may be used in a triangle (2, 3 or 4 loops from a
single ring beneath the pulley-block hook).
To remove a tilted component, it is necessary to bear in
mind that the capacity of a lifting ring diminishes when
the angle formed by the elements supporting the object
is less than 90 (good and bad lifting methods).
Lifting rings and their supports must never be bent and
they must only be used in tension. A short length of
tubing and a washer can be used to reduce side forces
on lifting rings.
Issue 2
May 2002
Support for a forged lifting ring

A: Load B: Lifting shackle C: Shackle support plate
(3 mm thick) D: Sleeve (preferably welded to the plate).
In certain cases, lifting accessories can be obtained to
provide the required equilibrium for lifting without danger.
Consult the section concerned in the workshop manual.
Note: Where difficulties are encountered on removing a
component, first check that all the retaining nuts and
bolts have actually been removed and that neighbouring
components are not hindering its removal.
Introduction
1A01.21
Cleanliness
To ensure a long life cycle to any machine, it is important
that its moving parts are protected from dust and foreign
bodies. Precautions must be taken against such danger.
Sealed compartments, seals and filters ensure the cleanliness of air, fuel and lubricating oil. None of these
protection systems should be removed.
When disconnecting piping, whether it be hydraulic, fuel,
lubricating or air lines, clean both the connecting points
and the surrounding area. As soon as the piping is
disconnected insert a plug, a cover or fasten adhesive
tape over the opening to prevent foreign bodies from
entering.
In the same way, clean and cover all access covers and
inspection plates when they are removed. Clean and
check all components. Take care that all passageways
and holes are unobstructed. Cover all components so
that they remain clean. Ensure that all components are
clean at the time of reassembly. Leave new parts in their
packaging up until the time that they are actually used.
Assembly
To reassemble a piece of equipment, complete each
step in turn. Never partially assemble one subassembly
and then begin to assemble another. Carry out all the
recommended adjustments. Always recheck the work
that has been carried out to ensure that nothing has been
forgotten.
Check the various adjustments again before putting the
equipment back into service.
Note: Before fitting new parts, remove the anti-rust
compound from all machined surfaces (usually a peel-off
material).
Lubrication
According to recommendations, fill the compartments of
the repaired or replaced elements with the correct quantity of clean oil of the type recommended in the maintenance section of the Operator Instruction Book.
Shims
Whenever shims are removed, they should be attached
together and their location marked. Ensure that distance
pieces are clean and take care that they are not bent in
any way when refitting.
4
5
Seals
Take care that the holes in seals match exactly the
lubricating channels in the corresponding components. If
gaskets need to be made, select the thickness and type
of material carefully. Take care that the seal is correctly
shaped and cut. Badly cut and fitting seal can cause
major breakdowns.
SPY type lip seals
Before fitting, lubricate the lips of SPY type seals with oil.
Do not use grease on seals, unless they are grease
seals.
The main components of SPY type seals are the envelope (1), oil tightness element (2) and annular spring (3).
The cross section shows the heel (4) and the pivot (5),
these impart the dimensions to a single element seal.
With one or two exceptions, the pivot of a lip seal faces
the lubricant side. Some seals also have an auxiliary lip
without a spring.
Cables and wires

When removing or disconnecting a group of cables or
wires, they must be identified and labelled in order to
ensure that they are refitted correctly later.
Issue 2
May 2002

1A01.22
Introduction
Locking devices on nuts and bolts

To avoid the accidental loosening of nuts and bolts, lock
washers, tab washers and split pins are used. In addition
to such mechanical means, compounds of the Loctite
type are also used.
To be efficient, the flat locking tabs must be correctly
fitted. Bend one end of the locking tab over the edge of
the part. Bend the other end to fit flush against one of the
flats on the head of the nut or bolt.
Always fit new locking tabs in compartments that house
moving parts. When fitting a lock washer on aluminium
housings, place a flat washer between the lock washer
and the housing.
Note:
1) Never fit a lock washer (Grower washer, lock washer,
spring washer, etc.) beneath a nut or the head of a bolt
to which a recommended torque must be applied to (see
section H).
2) When using locking compounds of the Loctite type,
always degrease the components before application.
Correct and incorrect use of folded metal locking tabs
Lubricating bushes and force fitting

Do not fit bushes using a hammer only. Use an appropriate tool in addition to a hammer, and where possible use
a press.
When using a press, take care that the pressure being
exerted is in exactly the same direction as the bore.
Where a lubricating bush has an oil hole, carefully align
it with the hole on the matching part.
When force fitting one component within another, lubricate the corresponding surfaces. Adjust tapered parts
without lubricating. Before fitting, ensure that the cones
are clean, dry and have no burs.
Correct and incorrect methods of fitting and bending
the flat locking tabs
Fitting bolts in blind holes

Select a bolt of the correct length. Too long a bolt may
come to a halt before its head is in contact with the part
that it is intended to hold; the threads may then be
damaged when trying to tighten it further.
If the bolt is too short, there may not be sufficient thread
engaged to efficiently hold the part.
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
E . Instructions for putting the
tractor in service
General
To ensure the regular servicing of the tractor during the
twelve-month warranty period, the AGCO supplying
Distributor or Dealer must carry out the first 50-hour and
250-hour servicing operations.
These periods are calculated so as to provide maximum
efficiency of the tractor throughout the warranty period,
and thus ensure later reliability of the tractor.
Checks before delivery

The Distributor, before delivery to a Dealer; and the
Dealer before delivery to a Customer or driver, must carry
out the following operations:
1. General installation
- Clean the top of the battery and coat the battery
terminals with Vaseline grease.
- Charge the battery if necessary.
- Check all electrical connections, cable attachments,
piping and warning lights.
- Check and top-up the oil in the engine and transmission
housings.
- Grease all grease points.
- Check and adjust where necessary the tension of belts
(alternator, fan, auxiliary pump and air-conditioning
compressor).
- Flush the cooling circuit and fill it with soft water,
unless it contains anti-freeze.
- Ensure that the tank contains enough fuel of the correct
type.
- Check the tightening of the cylinder head bolts and nuts
to the correct torque. Check the tightness of the inlet
pipe and the exhaust manifold.
- Check and adjust the rocker arm clearance and visually check the valve springs.
- Check the injectors, bleed the fuel circuit and tighten all
fuel supply connections.
- Check the fitting of the engine air filter hoses.
- Check the adjustment of the engine control linkage and
ensure that it is operating freely.
- Run the engine.
1A01.23
- Check the correct operation of all control instruments

and signal and warning lights.
- Check the engine speed on the tachometer, using both
foot and hand throttles.
- Hitch an implement and check the correct operation of
the tractors hydraulic accessories.
- Check and adjust tyre pressures (road or field work).
- Check the tightness of all nuts, bolts, studs, piping
connections and attachment points.
- Check that there are no hose or piping leaks.
- Check that the headlights are correctly adjusted.
- Carry out a road test on the tractor and check the
correct operation of the brakes, instruments and accessories.
2. Electronic systems
- Check the correct operation of the electronic linkage
control. Carry out the quick check procedure detailed in
Chapter 11C01.
- Check the various functions of the Autotronic, carry out
test procedure 11A01 or 11B01 depending on the
version.
- Check the installation of the onboard computer in
accordance with procedure 11D01.
3. Tightening torques
- Check the tightening torques on all chassis attachment
nuts and bolts:
. Front axle / Engine
. Engine / Gearbox
. Gearbox / Rear axle
. Trumpet housings / Rear axle.
- Check the tightening torque on nuts or studs fitted on
wheels and wheel webs.
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.24
Instructions for the driver
The following instructions must be provided to the

Customer or driver:
1. Safety precautions to be taken when starting the
engine
2. Location and meaning of the tractor and engine
serial numbers
3. Controls control instruments
4. Running-in instructions
5. Starting and stopping the engine
6. Selection of gears, use of gear shift and reverse
shuttle levers
7. Dangers of towing downhill without engine braking
and correct use of the gearbox
8. Use and adjustment of the brakes and the coupling
and locking of the pedals
9. Use of the tractors clutch
10. Use of the hydraulic differential lock
11. Use of the hydraulic PTO - clutch and brake
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Operation of the hydraulic lift control

Hitching and unhitching towed implements
Grease points
Changing of oil grades
Replacing the engine and transmission oil filters
Operation of the fuel supply circuit bleeding of
supply circuit and injectors air filter filterclogging indicator
Cooling circuit. Anti-freeze precautions. Tension of
the two fan belts
Maintenance of electrical equipment (batteries).
Negative earthed circuit
Adjustment of front and rear track
Tyre pressures
Tightness of nuts, bolts and screws
Storing and handling fuel
Use of auxiliary hydraulic equipment
Marking of the tractor serial number and engine
serial number in the Operator Instruction Book
Reading of the Operator Instruction Book.
F . Conversion tables
Units of Pressure
1 PSI = 1 lbf/in2 = 0.0689 bar
1 bar = 14.512 lbf/in2 = 14.512 PSI
Issue 2
Bar
lbf / in2
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
7.256
14.510
21.770
290.00
36.280
43.540
50.800
58.800
65.300
72.600
79.800
87.100
94.300
101.600
108.800
116.100
123.400
130.600
Bar
9.5
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
30.0
May 2002
lbf / in2
Bar
137.9
145.0
159.6
174.0
189.0
203.0
218.0
232.0
247.0
261.0
276.0
290.0
309.0
319.0
334.0
348.0
368.0
435
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
lbf / in2
508
588
653
726
871
1029
1161
1306
1451
2903
4354
5805
7257
8708
10160
11611
13235
14514
Introduction
1A01.25
Units of torque
1 Nm = 0.7376 lbf/ft
1 lbf/ft = 1.3558 Nm
Nm
lbf/ft
Nm
lbf/ft
Nm
lbf/ft
1.3558
0.7376
46.0972
34
25.0784
90.8396
67
49.4912
2.7116
1.4752
47.4530
35
25.8160
92.1944
68
50.1568
4.0674
2.2128
48.8088
36
26.5536
93.5502
69
50.8944
5.4232
2.9504
50.1646
37
27.2912
94.9060
70
51.6320
6.7790
3.6880
51.5204
38
28.0288
96.2618
71
52.3696
8.1348
4.4256
52.8762
39
28.7664
97.6176
72
53.1072
9.4906
5.1632
54.2320
40
29.5040
98.9734
73
53.8448
10.8464
5.9008
55.5878
41
30.2416
100.329
74
54.5824
12.2022
6.6384
56.9436
42
30.9792
101.685
75
55.3200
13.5580
10
7.3760
58.2994
43
31.7168
103.041
76
56.0576
14.9138
11
8.1136
59.6552
44
32.4544
104.397
77
56.7952
16.2696
12
8.8512
61.0110
45
33.1920
105.752
78
57.5328
17.6254
13
9.5888
62.3668
46
33.9296
107.108
79
58.2704
18.812
14
10.3264
63.7226
47
34.6672
108.464
80
59.0080
20.3370
15
11.0640
65.0784
48
35.4048
109.820
81
59.7456
21.6928
16
11.8016
66.4342
49
36.1424
111.176
82
60.4832
23.0486
17
12.5392
67.7900
50
36.8800
112.531
83
61.2208
24.4044
18
13.2768
69.1458
51
37.6176
113.887
84
61.9584
25.7602
19
14.0144
70.5016
52
38.3552
115.243
85
62.6960
27.1160
20
14.7520
71.8574
53
39.0928
116.600
86
63.4336
28.4718
21
15.4896
73.2132
54
39.8304
117.955
87
64.1712
29.8276
22
16.2272
74.5690
55
40.5680
119.310
88
64.9088
31.1834
23
16.9648
75.9248
56
41.3056
120.666
89
65.6464
32.5392
24
17.7024
77.2806
57
42.0432
122.022
90
66.3840
33.8950
25
18.4400
78.6364
58
42.7808
123.378
91
67.1216
35.2508
26
19.1776
79.9992
59
43.5184
124.734
92
67.8592
36.6066
27
19.9152
81.3480
60
44.2560
126.089
93
68.5968
37.9624
28
20.6528
82.7038
61
44.9936
127.445
94
69.3344
39.3182
29
21.3904
84.0596
62
45.7312
128.801
95
70.0720
40.6740
30
22.1280
85.4154
63
46.4688
130.157
96
70.8096
42.0298
31
22.8656
86.7712
64
47.2064
131.513
97
71.5472
43.3856
32
23.6032
88.1270
65
47.9440
132.868
98
72.2848
44.7414
33
24.3408
89.4828
66
48.6816
134.224
99
73.0224
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.26
Units of Capacity
1 litre = 0.2199 imperial gallon
1 imp. gallon = 4.5459 litres
Imp. gal.
Litres
Imp. gal.
Litres
Litres
Imp. gal.
0.2199
4.5459
7.4766
34
154.561
14.7330
67
304.575
0.4398
9.0918
7.6965
35
159.107
14.9532
68
309.121
0.6597
13.6377
7.9164
36
163.652
15.1731
69
313.667
0.8796
18.1836
8.1363
37
168.198
15.3930
70
318.213
1.0995
22.7295
8.3562
38
172.744
15.6129
71
322.759
1.3194
27.2754
8.5761
39
177.290
15.8328
72
327.305
1.5393
31.8213
8.7960
40
181.836
16.0527
73
331.851
1.7592
36.3672
9.0159
41
186.382
16.2726
74
336.397
1.9791
40.9131
9.2358
42
190.929
16.4925
75
340.943
2.1990
10
45.4590
9.4557
43
195.474
16.7124
76
345.488
2.4189
11
50.0049
9.6756
44
200.019
16.9323
77
350.034
2.6388
12
54.5508
9.8955
45
204.566
17.1522
78
354.580
2.8587
13
59.0967
10.1154
46
209.111
17.3721
79
359.126
3.0786
14
63.6426
10.3353
47
213.657
17.5920
80
363.672
3.2985
15
68.1885
10.5552
48
218.203
17.8119
81
368.218
3.5184
16
72.7344
10.7751
49
222.749
18.0318
82
372.764
3.7383
17
77.2803
10.9950
50
227.295
18.2517
83
377.310
3.9582
18
81.8262
11.2149
51
231.841
18.4716
84
381.856
4.1781
19
86.3721
11.4348
52
236.387
18.6915
85
386.402
4.3980
20
90.9180
11.6547
53
240.933
18.9114
86
390.947
4.6179
21
95.4639
11.8746
54
245.479
19.1313
87
395.493
4.8378
22
100.0090
12.0945
55
250.025
19.3512
88
400.039
5.0577
23
104.5560
12.3144
56
254.570
19.5711
89
404.585
5.2776
24
109.1020
12.5343
57
259.116
19.7910
90
409.131
5.4975
25
113.6480
12.7542
58
263.662
20.0109
91
413.677
5.7174
26
118.1930
12.9741
59
268.209
20.2308
92
418.223
5.9373
27
122.7390
13.1940
60
272.754
20.4507
93
422.769
6.1572
28
127.2850
13.4139
61
277.299
20.6706
94
427.315
6.3771
29
131.8310
13.6338
62
281.846
20.8905
95
431.861
6.5970
30
136.3770
13.8537
63
286.392
21.1104
96
436.406
6.8169
31
140.9230
14.0736
64
290.938
21.3303
97
440.952
7.0368
32
145.4690
14.2935
65
295.483
21.5502
98
445.498
7.2567
33
150.0150
14.5134
66
300.029
21.7701
99
450.044
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.27
Units of Capacity
1 litre = 1.7599 imperial pints
1 imp. pint = 0.5682 litres
Imp. pt.
Litres
Imp. pt.
Litres
Imp. pt.
Litres
1.7599
0.5682
59.8366
34
19.3188
117.913
67
38.0694
3.5198
1.1364
61.5965
35
19.8870
119.673
68
38.6376
5.2797
1.7046
63.3564
36
20.4552
121.433
69
39.2058
7.0396
2.2728
65.1163
37
21.0234
123.193
70
39.7740
8.7995
2.8400
66.8762
38
21.5916
124.953
71
40.3422
10.5594
3.4902
68.6361
39
22.1598
126.713
72
40.9104
12.3193
3.9774
70.3960
40
22.7280
128.473
73
41.4786
14.0792
4.5456
72.1559
41
23.2962
130.233
74
42.0468
15.8391
5.1138
73.9158
42
23.8644
131.993
75
42.6150
17.5990
10
5.6820
75.6757
43
24.4326
133.752
76
43.1832
19.3589
11
6.2502
77.4356
44
25.0008
135.512
77
43.7514
21.1188
12
6.8184
79.1955
45
25.5690
137.272
78
44.3196
22.8787
13
7.3866
80.9554
46
26.1372
139.032
79
44.8878
24.6386
14
7.9548
82.7153
47
26.7054
140.792
80
45.4560
26.3985
15
8.5230
84.4752
48
27.2736
142.552
81
46.0242
28.1854
16
9.0912
86.2351
49
27.8418
144.312
82
46.5924
29.9183
17
9.6594
87.9950
50
28.4100
146.072
83
47.1606
31.6782
18
10.2276
89.7549
51
28.9782
147.832
84
47.7288
33.4381
19
10.7958
91.5148
52
29.5464
149.592
85
48.2970
35.1980
20
11.3640
93.2747
53
30.1146
151.351
86
48.8652
36.9579
21
11.9322
95.0346
54
30.6828
153.111
87
49.4334
38.7178
22
12.5004
96.7945
55
31.2510
154.871
88
50.0016
40.4770
23
13.0686
98.5544
56
31.8192
156.631
89
50.5698
42.2376
24
13.6368
100.3140
57
32.3874
158.391
90
51.1380
43.9975
25
14.2050
102.0740
58
32.9556
160.151
91
51.7062
45.7574
26
14.7732
103.8340
59
33.5238
161.912
92
52.2744
57.5173
27
15.3414
105.5940
60
34.0920
163.671
93
52.8426
49.2772
28
15.9096
107.3540
61
34.6602
165.431
94
53.4108
51.0371
29
16.4778
109.1140
62
35.2284
167.191
95
53.9790
52.7970
30
17.0460
110.8740
63
35.7966
168.950
96
54.5472
54.5569
31
17.6142
112.6340
64
36.3648
170.710
97
55.1154
56.3168
32
18.1824
114.3940
65
36.9330
172.470
98
55.6836
58.0767
33
18.7506
116.1530
66
37.5012
174.230
99
56.2518
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.28
Units of Length
1 m = 3.2808 feet
1 foot = 0.3048 metres
ft
ft
ft
0.3048
3.2808
10.3632
34
111.549
20.4216
67
219.816
0.6096
6.5617
10.6680
35
114.829
20.7264
68
223.097
0.9144
9.8425
10.9728
36
118.110
21.0312
69
226.378
1.2192
13.1234
11.2776
37
121.391
21.3360
70
229.659
1.5240
16.4042
11.5824
38
124.672
21.6408
71
232.940
1.8288
19.6850
11.8872
39
127.953
21.9456
72
236.220
2.1336
22.9659
12.1920
40
131.234
22.2504
73
239.501
2.4384
26.2467
12.4968
41
134.514
22.5552
74
242.782
2.7432
29.5276
12.8016
42
137.795
22.8600
75
246.063
3.0480
10
32.8084
13.1064
43
141.076
23.1648
76
249.344
3.3528
11
36.0892
13.4112
44
144.357
23.4696
77
252.625
3.6576
12
39.3701
13.7160
45
147.638
23.7744
78
255.906
3.9624
13
42.6509
14.0208
46
150.919
24.0792
79
259.186
4.2672
14
45.9318
14.3256
47
154.199
24.3840
80
262.467
4.5720
15
49.2126
14.6304
48
157.480
24.6888
81
265.748
4.8768
16
52.4934
14.9352
49
160.761
24.9936
82
269.029
5.1816
17
55.7743
15.2400
50
164.042
25.2984
83
272.310
5.4864
18
59.0551
15.5448
51
167.323
25.6032
84
275.591
5.7912
19
62.3360
15.8496
52
170.604
25.9080
85
278.871
6.0960
20
65.6168
16.1544
53
173.885
26.2128
86
282.152
6.4008
21
68.8976
16.4592
54
177.165
26.5176
87
285.433
6.7056
22
72.1785
16.7640
55
180.446
26.8224
88
288.714
7.0104
23
75.4593
17.0688
56
183.727
27.1272
89
291.995
7.3152
24
78.7402
17.3736
57
187.008
27.4320
90
295.276
7.6200
25
82.0210
17.6784
58
190.289
27.7368
91
298.556
7.9248
26
85.3018
17.9832
59
193.570
28.0416
92
301.837
8.2296
27
88.5827
18.2880
60
196.850
28.3464
93
305.118
8.5344
28
91.8635
18.5928
61
200.131
28.6512
94
308.399
8.8392
29
95.1444
18.8976
61
203.412
28.9560
95
311.680
9.1440
30
98.4252
19.2024
63
206.693
29.2608
96
314.961
9.4488
31
101.7060
19.5072
64
209.974
29.5656
97
318.241
9.7536
32
104.9870
19.8120
65
213.255
29.8704
98
321.522
10.0584
33
108.2680
20.1168
66
216.535
30.1752
99
324.803
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.29
Units of Weight
1 kg = 2.2046 lb
1 lb = 0.4536 kg
kg
lb
kg
lb
lb
kg
0.4536
2.2046
15.4224
34
74.9564
30.3912
67
147.708
0.9072
4.4092
15.8760
35
77.1610
30.8448
68
149.913
1.3608
6.6138
16.3296
36
79.3656
31.2984
69
152.117
1.8144
8.8184
16.7832
37
81.5702
31.7520
70
154.322
2.2680
11.0230
17.2368
38
83.7748
32.2056
71
156.527
2.7216
13.2276
17.6904
39
85.9794
32.6592
72
158.731
3.1752
15.4322
18.1440
40
88.1840
33.1128
73
160.936
3.6288
17.6368
18.5976
41
90.3886
33.5664
74
163.140
4.0824
19.8414
19.0512
42
92.5932
34.0200
75
165.345
4.5360
10
22.0460
19.5048
43
94.7978
34.4736
76
167.549
4.9896
11
24.2506
19.9584
44
97.0024
34.9272
77
169.754
5.4432
12
26.4552
20.4120
45
99.207
35.3808
78
171.958
5.8968
13
28.6598
20.8656
46
101.412
35.8344
79
174.163
6.3504
14
30.8644
21.3192
47
103.616
36.2880
80
176.368
6.8040
15
33.0690
21.7728
48
105.821
36.7416
81
178.573
7.2576
16
35.2736
22.2264
49
108.025
37.1952
82
180.777
7.7112
17
37.4782
22.6800
50
110.230
37.6488
83
182.982
8.1648
18
39.6828
23.1336
51
112.435
38.1024
84
185.186
8.6184
19
41.8874
23.5872
52
114.639
38.5560
85
187.391
9.0720
20
44.0920
24.0408
53
116.844
39.0096
86
189.596
9.5256
21
46.2966
24.4944
54
119.048
39.4632
87
191.800
9.9792
22
48.5012
24.9489
55
121.253
39.9168
88
194.005
10.4328
23
50.7058
25.4016
56
123.458
40.3704
89
196.209
10.8864
24
52.9104
25.8552
57
125.662
40.8240
90
198.414
11.3400
25
55.1150
26.3088
58
127.867
41.2776
91
200.619
11.7936
26
57.3196
26.7624
59
130.071
41.7312
92
202.823
12.2472
27
59.5242
27.2160
60
132.276
42.1848
93
205.028
12.7008
28
61.7288
27.6696
61
134.481
42.6384
94
207.232
13.1544
29
63.9334
28.1232
62
136.685
43.0920
95
209.437
13.6080
30
66.1380
28.5768
63
138.889
43.5456
96
211.642
14.0616
31
68.3426
29.0304
64
141.094
43.9992
97
213.846
14.5152
32
70.5472
29.4840
65
143.299
44.4528
98
216.051
16.9688
33
72.7518
29.9376
66
145.504
44.9064
99
218.255
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.30
Conversion table of English Measurements

LENGTHS
1 inch = 25.4 mm
TEMPERATURES
Inches in mm
mm in inches
Fahrenheit to Celsius
Fractions
inches
Decimal
1/64
.015625
0.3969
- 20
- 28.9
- 30
- 22
1/32
.031250
0.7937
- 15
- 26.1
- 28
- 18.4
3/64
.468750
1.1906
- 10
- 23.3
- 26
- 14.8
1/16
.062500
1.5875
0.0001
0.00254
0.004
0.00015
- 5
- 20.6
- 24
- 11.2
5/64
.078125
1.9844
.0002
.00508
0.005
.00019
- 17.8
- 22
- 7.6
3/32
.093750
2.3812
.0003
.00762
0.006
.00023
- 17.2
- 20
- 4
7/64
.109375
2.7781
.0004
.01016
0.007
.00027
- 16.7
- 18
- 0.4
1/8
.125000
3.1750
.0005
.01270
0.008
.00031
- 16.1
- 16
3.2
9/64
.140625
3.5719
.0006
.01524
0.009
.00035
- 15.6
- 14
6.8
5/32
.156250
3.9687
.0007
.01778
0.010
.00039
- 15.0
- 12
10.4
11/64
.171875
4.3656
.0008
.02032
0.020
.00079
10
- 12.2
- 10
14
3/16
.187500
4.7625
.0009
.02286
0.030
.00118
15
- 9.4
- 8
17.6
13/64
.203125
5.1594
.001
.02540
0.040
.00157
20
- 6.7
- 6
21.2
7/32
.218750
5.5562
.002
.05080
0.050
.00197
25
- 3.9
- 4
24.8
15/64
.234375
5.9531
.003
.07620
0.060
.00236
30
- 1.1
- 2
28.4
1/4
.250000
6.3500
.004
.10160
0.070
.00276
35
1.7
32
17/64
.265625
6.7469
.005
.12700
0.080
.00315
40
4.4
35.6
9/32
.281250
7.1437
.006
.15240
0.090
.00354
45
7.2
39.2
19/64
.296875
7.5406
.007
.17780
0.100
.00394
50
10.0
42.8
5/16
.312500
7.9375
.008
.20320
0.200
.00780
55
12.8
46.4
21/64
.328125
8.3344
.009
.22860
0.300
.01181
60
15.6
10
50
11/32
.343750
8.7312
.01
.25400
0.400
.01575
65
18.3
12
53.6
23/64
.359375
9.1281
.02
.50800
0.500
.01969
70
21.1
14
57.2
3/8
.375000
9.5250
.03
.76200
0.600
.02362
75
23.9
16
60.8
25/64
.390625
9.9219
.04
1.01600
0.700
.02756
80
26.7
18
64.4
13/32
.406250
10.3187
.05
1.27000
0.800
.03149
85
29.4
20
68
27/64
.421875
10.7156
.06
1.52400
0.900
.03543
90
32.2
22
71.6
7/16
.437500
11.1125
.07
1.77800
1.900
.03937
95
35.0
24
75.2
29/64
.453125
11.5094
.08
2.03200
2.900
.07874
100
37.8
26
78.8
15,32
.468750
11.9062
.09
2.28600
3.900
.11811
105
40.6
28
82.4
31/64
.484375
12.3031
.10
2.54000
4.900
.15748
110
43.3
30
86
1/2
.500000
12.7000
.20
5.08000
5.900
.19685
115
46.1
32
89.6
33/64
.515625
13.0969
.30
7.62000
6.900
.23622
120
48.9
34
93.2
17/32
.53125
13.4937
.40
10.16000
7.900
.27559
125
51.7
36
96.8
Issue 2
mm
Inches
mm
mm
May 2002
Inches
Introduction
1A01.31
LENGTHS
1 Pouce (inch) = 25.4 mm
Fractions
of inches
Decimal
mm
Inches in mm
Inches
TEMPERATURES
Fahrenheit to Celsius
mm in inches
mm
mm
Inches
35/64
.546875
13.8906
0.5
12.70
0.31496
130
54.4
38
100.4
9/16
.562500
14.2875
.6
15.24
.35433
135
57.2
40
104.0
37/64
.578125
14.6844
.7
17.78
10
.39370
140
60.0
42
107.6
19/32
.593750
15.0812
.8
20.32
11
.43307
145
62.8
44
112.2
39/64
.609375
15.4781
.9
22.86
12
.47244
150
65.6
46
114.8
5/8
.625000
15.8750
25.40
13
.51181
155
68.3
48
118.4
41/64
.640625
16.2719
50.80
14
.55118
160
71.1
50
122.0
21/32
.656250
16.6687
76.20
15
.59055
165
73.9
52
125.6
43/64
.671875
17.0656
101.60
16
.62992
170
76.7
54
129.2
11/16
.687500
17.4625
127.00
17
.66929
175
79.4
56
132.8
45/64
.703125
17.8594
152.40
18
.70866
180
82.2
58
136.4
23/32
.718750
18.2562
177.80
19
.74803
185
85.0
60
140.0
47/64
.734375
18.6531
203.20
20
.78740
190
87.8
62
143.6
3/4
.750000
19.0500
228.60
21
.82677
195
90.6
64
147.2
49/64
.765625
19.4469
10
2540.0
22
.86614
200
93.3
66
150.8
25/32
.781250
19.8437
11
279.40
23
.90551
205
96.1
68
154.4
51/64
.796875
20.2406
12
304.80
24
.94480
210
98.9
70
158.0
13/16
.812500
20.6375
13
330.20
25
.98425
212
100.0
75
167.0
53/64
.828125
21.0344
14
355.60
26
1.02362
215
101.7
80
176.0
27/32
.843750
21.4312
15
381.00.
27
1.06299
220
104.4
85
185.0
55/64
.859375
21.8281
16
406.40
28
1.10236
225
107.2
90
194.0
7/8
.875000
22.2250
17
431.80
29
1.14173
230
110.0
95
203.0
57/64
.890625
22.6219
18
457.20
30
1.18110
235
112.8
100
212.0
29/32
.906250
23.0187
19
482.60
31
1.22047
240
115.6
105
221.0
59/64
.921875
23.4156
20
5080.0
32
1.25984
245
118.3
110
230.0
15/16
.937500
23.8125
21
533.40
33
1.29921
250
121.1
115
239.0
61/64
.953125
24.2094
22
558.80
34
1.33858
31/32
.968750
24.6062
23
584.20
34
1.37795
63/64
.984375
25.0031
24
609.60
36
1.41732
1.000000
25.4000
25
635.00
37
1.45669
26
660.40
38
1.49606
39
1.53543
40
1.57480
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.32
G . Locking compounds and sealants

The Loctite compounds mentioned in this manual are
referred to by their industrial names.
For repairs, use the brands or AGCO references shown
in the following table:
Loctite
industrial name
Brand
AGCO
reference
242 - 241 - 542
Frenetanche
3 930 904 M1
270
Frenbloc
3 405 352 M5
510 - 221
Formajoint
3 900 613 M2
638 - 648
Scelbloc
1 633 268 M2
Silicomet
Auto-joint clair
3 405 423 M2
Note: Use the product Form A Gasket 2 in cases where

sealing is required between plastic and steel or cast-iron.
For example: PTO sensor, forward speed sensor
These products can be ordered from the following address:
LOCTITE
10 Avenue Eugne Gazeau
Zone Industrielle
6034 SENLIS
France
Application method for Loctite products

1. Remove all traces of the old sealing product and
corrosion
- by rubbing with a cloth or brushing
- by chemical action: DECAPLOC 88. Leave to
act, then scrape off and dry.
2. Degrease the parts in solvent
- preferably, use Super Solvent Sec LOCTITE 706
Issue 2
May 2002
3. Evaporate off the solvent

4. Smear the parts with the recommended grade of
LOCTITE:
- for blind tapped holes, place a small quantity of
the product on the last of the tapped threads.
- for cylindrical fitting components, place the product on both areas using a clean brush.
- for mating faces, apply a bead of product on one
of the two faces, forming rings around any communicating holes and tighten the parts together as
quickly as possible.
Note:
a) Apply the minimum quantity of product required in
order to avoid sticking adjacent parts.
b) Do not further tighten or loosen bolts after 5 minutes
of polymerisation in order not to break the film.
c) If the ambient temperature is less than +10 C and
in order to speed up the process (except with
SILICOMET), after operation 2 use LOCTITE T 747
quick setting on at least one of the parts. Any excess
of product outside the sealed area will not harden
(anaerobic product polymerises only in the absence of oxygen).
Grease
When grease is used in components that are in contact
with transmission oil, employ a miscible grease to avoid
clogging the hydraulic filters.
Use Amber Technical grease, supplied by WITCO
76320 Saint-Pierre les Elbeuf.
Introduction
1A01.33
H . Tightening torques
Use the recommended tightening torques for nuts and
bolts in accordance with tables:
- 1 and 2: for metric threads
- 3 and 4: for non-metric threads
Where a particular torque is required, it is mentioned in
the text.
Tables 1 and 3 indicate the normal values of the tightening torques applicable with zinc-plated threaded elements with normal nuts, coarse or fine threads, with or
without flat or lock washers, and weld nuts having a
height greater than 0.8 d.
Tables 2 and 4 indicate the lower torque values applicable to threaded elements in assemblies using selflocking safety nuts, zinc-plated, phosphate coated nuts
and bolts, flat nuts, and weld nuts having a height less
than 0.8 d.
These values apply to all dry assemblies. If the threads
are lubricated, reduce the tightening torques in consequence.
Note: Read the strength classification on the head of

the bolt and determine the corresponding torque to
be applied.
Example:
8,8
Issue 2
May 2002
Introduction
1A01.34
Table 1
Tightening torque values: zinc-plated metric threads
Nominal
dimension d.
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
Strength classification
ISO 8,8 (SAE 5, BS S)
ISO 10,9 (SAE 8, BS V)
Torque Nm
Torque Nm
Max
Min
1.7
4.1
8.7
14.7
35.7
70.7
120.7
260.7
560.7
960.7
1800.7
3300.7
1.3
3.1
6.7
10.7
25.7
50.7
90.7
200.7
420.7
720.7
1400.7
2500.7
Min
Max
2.4
5.7
11.5
20.7
46.7
96.7
160.7
400.7
800.7
1300.7
2800.7
4800.7
1
4
8
14
36
72
120
300
600
1000
2100
3600
Table 2
Reduced tightening torque values: metric threads
Nominal
dimension d.
ISO 8,8 (SAE 5, BS S)
ISO 10,9 (SAE 8, BS V)
Torque Nm
Torque Nm
Max
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
Issue 2
1.4
3.3
6.4
11.7
28.7
56.7
96.7
210.7
450.7
770.7
1400.7
2600.7
Min
1
2.5
4.8
8.7
20.7
40.7
72.7
160.7
340.7
570.7
1100.7
2000.7
May 2002
Max
1.9
4.6
9.2
16.7
37.7
77.7
130.7
320.7
640.7
1040.7
2200.7
3800.7.7
Min
1
3
6
12
29
57
100
240
480
800
1700
2900
Introduction
1A01.35
Table 3
Tightening torque values: zinc-plated non-metric threads
Nominal
dimension d.
#6
#8
#10
1/4
5/16
3/8
7/16
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 1/2
SAE 5 ( ISO 8,8 BS S)
SAE 8 (ISO 10,9 BS V)
Torque Nm
Torque Nm
Max
Min
2.4
4.4
6.3
15.7
30.7
53.7
86.7
130.7
260.7
460.7
760.7
1120.7
1390.7
2000.7
3400.7
1.8
3.4
4.7
11.7
22.7
39.7
64.7
100.7
200.7
350.7
560.7
840.7
1050.7
1500.7
2600.7
Min
Max
3.3
6.3
8.9
22.7
43.7
75.7
120.7
180.7
370.7
660.7
1060.7
1600.7
2200.7
3200.7
5400.7
2
4
6
16
31
55
90
140
280
490
800
1200
1700
2400
4100
Table 4
Tightening torque values: zinc-plated non-metric threads
Nominale
dimension d.
#6
#8
#10
1/4
5/16
3/8
7/16
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 1/2
SAE 5 ( ISO 8,8 BS S)
SAE 8 (ISO 10,9 BS V)
Torque Nm
Torque Nm
Max
Min
1.9
3.5
5.7
12.7
24.7
42.7
69.7
104.7
210.7
370.7
610.7
900.7
1100.7
1600.7
2700.7
1.5
2.7
3.8
8.8
18.7
31.7
51.7
80.7
160.7
280.7
450.7
670.7
840.7
1200.7
2100.7
Max
Issue 21
Issue
2.6
5.6
7.1
18.7
34.7
60.7
96.7
140.7
300.7
530.7
850.7
1280.7
1760.7
2560.7
4320.7
Min
2
3.
5
13.
25
44
72
110
220
390
640
960
1360
1920
3280
May 2002
2002
May
2 . SPLITTING THE TRACTOR
Contents
2A01
SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN FRONT FRAME / ENGINE
2B01
SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN ENGINE / GEARBOX
2C01
SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN GEARBOX / INTERMEDIATE HOUSING
2D01
SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN INTERMEDIATE HOUSING / CENTRE

HOUSING
2E01
SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN PTO HOUSING / CENTRE HOUSING
2F01
CHASSIS REINFORCEMENTS
2G01
REAR WHEELS / HUBS
Issue 1
May 2001
Splitting - Front Frame / Engine
2A01.1
2 A01 Splitting the tractor between front frame /

Engine
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Preliminary operations __________________________________
B.
Disassembling __________________________________________
C.
Reassembling __________________________________________
D.
Final operations ________________________________________
E.
Version with Carraro front axle ___________________________
F.
Service tools ___________________________________________
11
Issue 12
May 2001
2002

2A01.2
Splitting - Front frame / Engine
General
This section presents a general disassembly procedure.
Due to the diversity of the hydraulic or mechanical
options available on the 8200 series tractors, mention
will only be made of those pipes or main connections to
be disconnected.
For this reason, before and when disassembling the
tractor, ensure no connections remain between the fixed
assembly and the moving assembly.
Disassembling the front frame and the engine allows
working on the mechanical parts located at the front of
the engine.
A . Preliminary operations
1. Remove the side panels. Unlock and hinge open the
bonnet, or remove (if necessary).
Position of locks:
- tractors 8210 8220 and 8240 to 8260: below the
front nose assembly;
- tractors 8270 and 8280: below the front nose
assembly, on the rear left-hand side of the bonnet.
Disconnect the battery terminals.
2. Disconnect the front differential-locking control pipe
at both ends (front axles AG155H and AG200) (blank
the pipe).
Remove the transmission guard and shaft (4 WD)
(all tractor types).
3. Remove the guards located either side of the radiator.
4. Disconnect the horn wiring harness located inside
the nose assembly.
5. Mark then disconnect the steering hoses from the
side pipes fitted on the engine mount. Blank the
pipes.
6. Disconnect the vacuum-gauge harness. Remove
the suction pipe from the air cleaner above the
radiator.
7. Drain the cooling system.
8. On the radiator, disconnect:
- the hoses (lower and upper),
- the hose connecting the radiator and the expansion
tank.
9. Remove the cleat above the radiator.
10. Mark the position then disconnect the following
hoses:
Full Powershift gearbox
- the hoses from the cooler to the thermostatic
valve.
Heavy Duty gearbox
- the cooler hoses routed to the right-hand hydraulic
cover.
Issue
Issue 12
May
May 2002
2001
Fig. 1
11. Disconnect the air conditioning intakes at the front
left of the cab. Fit blanking plugs.
12. Remove the compressor from its mounting and tilt
forward without disconnecting the hoses.
13. If necessary, remove the steering cylinder (front
axles AG155H and AG200H) to gain access to the
screws securing the frame to the engine.
14. Remove the chassis reinforcements located either
side of the engine (if installed) (see section 2F01).
Set the handbrake and block front axle (1), using
suitable chocks "C" (Fig. 1). Chock the rear wheels.
15. Remove one screw (3) (Fig. 2 - 3) on each front
engine mount, replacing by two guide studs of
sufficient length.
2A01.3
2
3
1
A : Perkins engine
B : Valmet engine
Issue 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
May 2001

2A01.4
B
A : Front axles AG155H or AG200H
B : Front axle ZF5052
C : 2 WD axle
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 3
2A01.5
B . Disassembling (Fig. 4)
D . Final operations
Note: Remove the front weights and belly weights (if

installed).
22. Remove the shims between the frame and the front
axle.
If necessary, reinstall the chassis reinforcements (s
2F01) and the front weights.
23. If disassembled, reinstall the steering cylinder. Apply a light coating of Loctite 270 then torque the
screws to 180 - 200 Nm and torque ball nuts to 140
- 155 Nm. Lock the nuts using new pins.
24. Tilt the compressor towards the rear and rest it on the
support.
25. Remove the blanking plugs. Reconnect the air conditioning intakes.
26. Reconnect the hoses, reverse operation 10.
27. Reinstall the cleat above the radiator.
28. On the radiator, reconnect:
- the hoses (lower and upper),
- the hoses connected to the radiator seat and the
expansion tank.
29. Service the cooling system and the expansion tank.
30. Reinstall the suction pipe on the air cleaner above the
radiator.
16. Position a fixed axle stand under the engine sump.

17. Position a movable axle stand under the front axle (2
or 4 WD), in the longitudinal axis of the tractor, or use
suitable lifting equipment.
18. Finish removing the other attachment screws (1) (2)
(3) (Fig. 2 - 3) from the front engine frame.
19. Assisted by an operator, separate the assemblies.
Danger
- Ensure there is no risk of accidental tipping of the front
frame assembly during the disassembly operation.
C . Reassembling
20. Assemble the frame with the engine.
21. Remove the guide studs. Install and torque the
screws as follows (Fig. 2 - 3) :
- (1) : 670 - 900 Nm
- (2) : 520 - 640 Nm
- (3) : 300 - 400 Nm
Fig. 4
Issue 12
May 2002
2001

2A01.6
31. Reconnect the steering hoses on the side pipes fitted

on the engine mount.
32. Reconnect the horn wiring harness.
33. Reinstall the guards located either side of the radiator.
34. Reassemble the transmission shaft and guard. Reconnect the front differential-locking control pipe (4
WD) (Front axles AG155H and AG200H).
35. Reconnecting the battery terminals. Close the bonnet.
36. Start the engine.
37. Perform a road test.
38. Check the following points:
- leaktightness of hydraulic circuits,
- operation of electrical circuits,
- coolant level.
If required, complete servicing of the circuit in
question.
Tightening torques (if required)

- Front wheel nuts : 640 - 680 Nm
- Belly weight screws (if fitted) 300 - 350 Nm, Loctite 270.
Issue 1
May 2001
2A01.7
E. Version with Carraro front axle

Note
- 8210 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors are now equipped
with Carraro front axle.
- The front frame (axle support) has a different shape to
that with a Dana front axle. However, it can be fitted
with a Dana front axle (optional).
- The procedure applied to split the front frame with
Carraro front axle is practically identical to that used for
Dana front axles. However, a few differences in layout
and number of parts to be removed should be noted.
Preliminary operations
1
Fig. 5
39. Set the handbrake and immobilize the front axle (5)
using triangular chocks C (Fig. 5). Chock the rear
wheels.
40. Remove the front weights (if fitted).
41. Remove the side panels. Unlock the bonnet and
hinge it open. Use a rope to hold the bonnet open and
disconnect the lower clamps on the holding cylinders.
42. Disconnect the negative terminals on the batteries on
the right-hand side of the tractor.
43. Remove the guards (2) (2A) and the universal drive
shaft (see section 8F03).
44. Remove the guards located either side of the radiator.
45. Remove the clamp that holds the tubes, hoses and
harnesses above the radiator.
46. Remove the chassis reinforcements on either side of
the engine (if fitted).
47. Mark and disconnect all the hydraulic or electric
unions connected to the frame / front axle and
steering cylinder unit, but leave the air conditioning
hoses in place.
Note
- These links are located above the radiator and on
the right- and left-hand sides of the tractor.
48. Remove the air filter intake pipe above the radiator.
49. Drain the cooling system.
Issue
Issue 11
May
May 2001
2002

2A01.8
50. On the radiator, partially disconnect:

- hoses (upper and lower)
- the linking hoses between the radiator and the
expansion tank.
51. Tilt the air conditioning condenser housed in the front
nose assembly to the front and rear of the engine
without disconnecting the hose involved.
52. Remove the steering cylinder to access the adjusting screw that attaches the frame on the engine.
53. Remove a screw (3) (Fig. 6 - 8) from each square at
the front of the engine, replacing it by a long guide
stud of sufficient length.
57. Assisted by an operator, separate the assemblies

(Fig. 7).
Danger
- Ensure there is no risk of accidental tipping of the
front frame assembly during the disassembly
operation.
Disassembling
Danger
- Remove the belly weight (if fitted).
54. Position a fixed axle stand under the engine sump.
55. Position a movable axle stand under the front axle in
the longitudinal axis of the tractor, or use a suitable
lifting fixture.
56. Finish removing the other attachment screws (1) (2)
(3) (Fig. 6 - 8) from the engine frame.
Fig. 7
Issue 11
May 2001
2002
2A01.9
B
3
A : Perkins engine - 8210 - 8220 tractors

B : Valmet engine - 8240 - 8250 tractors
Fig. 6
Issue
Issue 1
May
May 2002
2001

2A01.10
Reassembling
58. Assemble the frame with the engine.
59. Remove the guide studs. Fit screws and torque to
(Fig. 8):
- (1) : 670 900 Nm
- (2) : 520 640 Nm
- (3) : 300 400 Nm
1
3
2
Issue 11
May 2002
2001
Fig. 8
2A01.11
Final operations
60. Refit the steering cylinder.
61. Refit the condenser.
62. Reconnect all the cooling hoses.
63. Refit the air filter intake pipe.
64. Reconnect the hydraulic and electric unions.
65. Refit the clamp above the radiator.
66. Reinstall the radiator side guards.
67. Refit the universal drive shaft and the guards (2) (2A).
68. Reconnect the negative terminals to the batteries.
69. Top up the fluid level in the cooling system and the
expansion tank.
70. Start the engine. Check the electrical equipment for
proper operation and check for hydraulic tightness:
- of hydraulic hoses and unions
- of hoses.
Fig. 9
Front axles with a suspension system

- Activate front axle suspension system several times
making it move from low position to high position and
vice versa in order to check it and detect leaks, if any.
- In case of dysfunction, use the calibration procedure
(see section 11 Electronics).
Front axles fixed or with a suspension system
71. Close the bonnet and reinstall the side panels.
72. Carry out a road test.
Tightening torques (if necessary)

- Front wheel nuts: 640 680 Nm.
- Belly weight screw: 420 560 Nm, Loctite 270.
F. Service tools
Tools available in the AGCO network
- 3376935M91 Set of plugs for air conditioning
unions (Fig. 9).
Issue 11
May 2002
2001
Splitting - Engine / Gearbox
2B01.1
2 B01 Splitting the tractor betwwen Engine /

Gearbox
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Disassembling __________________________________________
C.
Reassembling __________________________________________
D.
10
E.
Service tools ___________________________________________
11
Issue 2
May 2002

2B01.2
Issue 2
May 2002

General
Due to the diversity of the hydraulic and mechanical the
options available on the 8200 series tractors, mention
will only be made of those the pipes or main connections
to be disconnected.
The 8200-Series tractors may be equipped either with a
Full Powershift gearbox or a Heavy Duty gearbox. Disassembly remains basically identical for both versions.
Available equipment fits

- Tractors 8210-8220 and 8240: Full Powershift gearbox
AG150
- Tractors 8250 to 8280: Full Powershift gearbox AG250,
- Tractors 8210-8220 and 8240-8250: Heavy Duty gearbox.
The cab remains attached to the rear axle.
Disassembling the engine and gearbox allows working
on the mechanical parts located to the rear of the engine
and principally in front of the Heavy Duty gearbox.
bonnet, or remove (if necessary).
Position of locks:
- tractors 8210-8220 and 8240 to 8260: below the front
nose assembly,
- tractors 8270 and 8280: below the front nose assembly, on the rear left-hand side of the bonnet.
2. Remove the front weights. Disconnect the battery
terminals.
3. Remove the turbocharger guard.
4. Remove the vertical exhaust assembly, the pipe
sleeve-fitted on the turbo, and the flexible sleeve
connected to the air cleaner.
5. Disconnect the front differential lock control pipe at
both ends (if fitted). Blank the pipe. Remove the
transmission guard and shaft (4 WD) (all tractor
types).
2B01.3
6. Mark the position then disconnect the following

hoses:
- the charge and return hoses to/from the brake
master-cylinders,
- the hoses to the thermostatic valve.
Heavy Duty gearbox
- Mark and disconnect the hoses coming from the
right-hand hydraulic cover towards the cooler. Blank
the hoses and ports,
- the charge and return hoses to/from the brakemaster-cylinder tank.
7. Disconnect the harness and remove the starter.
8. Disconnect the gas-oil supply and return hoses. If
necessary, drain the fuel tanks, disconnect the
gauge harness and remove the side tank.
9. If required, remove the guards located either side of
the radiator.
10. Disconnect the throttle control at the fuel injection
pump.
11. Disconnect:
- the heating hoses under the right-hand floor of the
cab, or on the engine, ensuring their positions are
identified. Blank the hoses and ports in order to
prevent complete drainage of the cooling system,
- the air conditioning intakes at the front left of the
cab. Fit blanking plugs (see E),
- the main harness connections above and to the left
of the engine.
12. Mark then disconnect the steering hoses on the
Orbitrol steering unit.
13. Remove the engine oil filter (Valmet only), to gain
access to the hidden screw securing the gearbox.
Issue 2
May 2002

2B01.4
14. Set the handbrake and block front axle (1) using
appropriate chocks "C" (Fig. 1). If necessary, remove
the chassis reinforcements (see section 2F01).
15. If required, raise the cab slightly and wedge in place.
Note: If the side tank was not removed, check
the condition of the flexible unions between the
tanks and the filler pipe hose connection.
On Heavy Duty gearboxes, check the condition
of the gear control and reverser lifting arm and
the selector cover. If the gear lifting arm interferes with raising of the cab, disconnect it (see
sections 5C01 - 5C02 and 5C03 depending on
option).
16. Remove screws (3) placed either side of the engine
(1) and gearbox (2) (Fig. 2 or 3 depending on version).
Replace with two guide studs of suitable length.
Note: If necessary, remove the access door set in
the inner floor of the cab, to gain easier access
to the upper screws fixing the engine to the
gearbox.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 2
May 2002
Fig. 3
2B01.5
17. Position the disassembly tooling.
18. Finish removing the other attachment screws securing the engine on the gearbox.
19. Assisted by an operator, separate the assemblies.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Heavy Duty gearbox
8210 - 8220 and 8240 to 8260 bonnet
8270 and 8280 bonnet
4
2
Fig. 4
Issue 2
May 2002

2B01.6
C . Reassembling
Fig. 5
On the Full Powershift gearbox

20. Coat one seat of spring (2) with adhesive (Loctite 401
or equivalent). Slide the spring on shaft (1) (Fig. 6),
the Loctited seat pointed towards the shoulder of the
shaft. Allow the Loctite to dry a few seconds. Lightly
lubricate the splines of main shaft (1) (Fig. 6) with
grease (type GN + Molycote) or equivalent.
On the Heavy Duty gearbox

- Lightly lubricate the splines of main shaft (1) (Fig. 5)
using the type of grease mentioned previously.
Version with mechanical shuttle
Version with Power shuttle
Issue 2
May 2002
2B01.7
Fig. 6
Issue 2
May 2002

2B01.8
21. Clean the mating surfaces:

- of the engine and gearbox.
Heavy Duty gearbox
- of the engine and spacer.
22. Coat the mating face of the gearbox or the spacer
with a sealing product (Loctite 510 or equivalent).
23. Screw two guide studs of suitable length onto the
gearbox or spacer (depending on option).
24. Check the presence of the two locating pins (10) on
the engine (Fig. 8).
25. Assemble the engine to the gearbox or the spacer.
In order to facilitate engagement of the main-shaft
splines with those in the hub of the damper, manually rotate the crown wheel on the engine flywheel,
inserting a suitable tool in the hole provided for fixing
the starter.
Full Powershift gearbox AG250 (Fig. 7)

26. Remove the two guide studs. Install screw (1),
washers (2), spacers (4) and nuts (3).
Apply a light coating of Loctite 270 then torque the
screws to 480-640 Nm.
Full Powershift (AG150) and Heavy Duty

gearboxes (Fig. 8)
- Remove the two guide studs. Fit washers (8). Apply a
light coating of Loctite 270, then torque the screws as
follows:
. (1) : 240 - 320 Nm
. (2) : 300 - 400 Nm
. (3) : 400 - 540 Nm
. (4) : 100 - 130 Nm
. (5) : 300 - 400 Nm
. (6) : 790 - 1050 Nm
. (7) (9) : 630 - 840 Nm
Issue 2
May 2002
2B01.9
Fig. 7
1
2
F
AG150
3
4
5
6
9
Heavy Duty
F
7
F
10
Fig. 8
Issue 2
May 2002

2B01.10
27. If the cab was raised, reposition it on its front
supports. On tractors fitted with the Heavy Duty
gearbox, monitor the behaviour of the gear control
lifting arm during refitting of the cab. If necessary,
reinstall and adjust the gear lifting arm (see section
5C01 - 5C02 or 5C03 depending on option). Install
and screws in silent blocks and torque to 200 270 Nm.
28. Remove the disassembly tooling.
29. Remove the chocks from the front axle. Reinstall
and if necessary adjust the chassis reinforcements
(see section 2F01).
30. Reinstall the engine oil filter (Valmet only).
Special point:
- The filter must be in contact with its support;
tighten it through an extra quarter-turn approximately.
31. Reconnect the steering-cylinder hoses.
32. Reconnect the main harness connections.
33. Assemble the air conditioning intakes.
34. Reconnect the heating hoses under the cab or on the
engine (depending on option).
35. Reconnect the throttle control at the fuel injection
pump.
If necessary, reinstall the guards located either side
of the radiator.
36. If disassembled, reinstall the side tank and reconnect the gauge harness, the gas-oil supply and the
return hoses.
37. Reinstall the starter. Tighten the screws. Reconnect
the harness.
38. Reconnect the hoses, reversing operation 6.
39. Reinstall the transmission shaft and guard. Reconnect the differential lock control pipe (4 WD)(if fitted).
40. Reinstall the flexible pipe connection, the tube on the
turbocharger and the vertical exhaust assembly.
Install the Guard.
41. Reconnecting the battery terminals.
42. Check the setting of the throttle control.
43. If the side tank was removed, pour fuel into the
tanks. Service the cooling system and the expansion tank.
Issue 21
May 2002
44.
45.
46.
47.
Start the engine.

Close the bonnet.
Perform a road test.
Check the following points:
- operation of electrical circuits,
- coolant level. If required, complete servicing of the
circuit in question.
2B01.11
E . Service tools
- 3376935M91 - Set of plugs for air conditioning
couplings (Fig. 9).
Fig. 9
Issue 21
May 2002
Splitting - Gearbox / Intermediate Housing
2C01.1
2 C01 Splitting the tractor between Gearbox /

Intermediate housing
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Disassembling __________________________________________
C.
Reassembling __________________________________________
D.
E.
Service tools ___________________________________________
F.
Heavy Duty Version _____________________________________
Issue 12
May 2002
2001

2C01.2
General
Due to the diversity of the hydraulic and mechanical the
options available on the 8200-Series tractors, mention
will only be made of those the pipes or main connections
to be disconnected.
The 8200-Series tractors may be equipped with either a
Full Powershift gearbox, or a Heavy Duty gearbox.
Disassembly remains basically identical for both versions.
Available equipment fits

- Tractors 8210-8220 and 8240-8250: Full Powershift
gearbox AG150
- Tractors 8250 to 8280: Full Powershift gearbox AG250
- Tractors 8210-8220 and 8240-8250: Heavy Duty gearbox.
The cab remains attached to the rear axle.
Disassembling the gearbox and the intermediate housing allows working on the Gerotor hydraulic pump (Full
Powershift gearbox) or on the output shaft (Heavy Duty
gearbox), located respectively on the rear of the stated
gearboxes.
1. Position the rear wheels in wide tread.
bonnet and remove (if necessary).
Position of locks:
- tractors 8210-8220 and 8240 to 8260: below the front
nose assembly,
- tractors 8270 and 8280: below the front nose assembly, on the rear left-hand side of the bonnet.
3. Disconnect the battery terminals.
4. Remove the battery compartment and the right footstep.
5. Remove the turbocharger guard.
6. Disconnect the front differential-locking control pipe at
both ends ((if fitted). Blank the pipe.
7. Remove the guard and the 4 WD transmission shaft
(all tractor types).
Issue 1
May 2001
8. Disconnect the charge hose from the brake-mastercylinder tank.

9. Mark then disconnect the steering hoses from the
Orbitrol steering unit.
10. Remove the radiator guards (depending on option).
11. Disconnect the heating hoses under the right floor of
the cab or on the engine (depending on option);
identify their positions. Blank the hoses and ports to
prevent complete drainage the cooling system.
12. Remove the left footstep.
13. Drain the fuel tanks.
14. Mark then disconnect:
- the harness to the side-tank gauge,
- the gas-oil supply and return hoses.
15. Remove the side tank.
16. Slightly raise the front of the cab and wedge in place
per Fig. 2, using suitable axle stands.
17. Mark positions of following parts then disassemble from the gearbox:
- solenoid valves (if necessary, remove the access
door in cab floor to access the upper solenoid
valves),
- sensors (intermediate speeds, engine speeds, road
speed, gearbox temperature and pressure),
- connectors to receptacles A, B, C, D, E, F of the
TC unit installed on the right-hand side of the
gearbox.
18. Drain the intermediate housing.
19. Disconnect the gearbox return hoses (Orbitrol steering unit, power-assisted braking).

20. Disconnect the return hose from the brake-mastercylinder tank on the intermediate housing.
21. Disconnect hose (17 bar) towards the power-assisted braking on the right-hand hydraulic cover.
22. Remove suction pipe (1) (Fig. 1) at the Gerotor pump,
and the elbow unions fitted on the intermediate
housing and the Full Powershift gearbox.
23. Disconnect:
- the creeper-speed control on the right-hand side of
the intermediate housing (depending on option, all
tractor types)
cab. Fit blanking plugs (see E)
of the engine.
24. Disconnect the throttle control on the injection pump.
25. Block front axle (1), using suitable chocks - "C" (Fig.
1A).
26. Chock the rear wheels.
2C01.3
AG 250
AG 150
Fig. 1
Fig. 1A
Issue 1
May 2001

2C01.4
Separating the gearbox from the intermediate housing (Fig. 2)
27. In order to free lower shaft (2) (Fig. 3 - 3A), turn the
special screw on the Park lock control unit clockwise until a hard point is felt (see section 6F01, Full
Powershift gearbox only).
28. Install the disassembly tooling (see E).
29. Remove the screw attaching the gearbox to the
housing.
30. Assisted by an operator, separate the assemblies,
taking care to identify the position of the coupling
sleeves on connection shafts (1) and (2) (Fig. 3).
2
Fig. 3
1
Fig. 3A
(1) Full Powershift gearbox
Fig. 2
Issue 12
May 2002
2001
2C01.5
C . Reassembling
Assembling the gearbox and the intermediate housing
31. Clean the mating surfaces of the gearbox and the

housing.
32. Coat the mating face of the housing with sealing
product Loctite 510 or equivalent.
33. Check the presence of the locating pins on the
housing.
34. Check the presence of connection shafts (1) and (2)
and sleeves (3) (4) (Fig. 3).
Note: Position the machined groove on the
outside diameter of each sleeve towards the
gearbox (optional).
Special point:
- On 8200 series tractors without creeper speeds,
fitted with the Full Powershift transmission, spring
(1) located at the front of shaft (2) maintains the
latter in position (Fig. 3A).
35. Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs into
the gearbox.
36. Assemble gearbox (8) onto housing (19).
37. Remove the guide studs. Install screw (1) (Fig. 4)
and torque to 240 - 320 Nm.
19
8
1
1
Section Y Y
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

2C01.6
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
Remove the chocks from the front axle.

Reconnect the throttle control on the injection pump.
Reinstall the left-hand radiator guard (if fitted).
Reconnect:
of the engine,
cab.
Reinstall:
- the creeper control (if fitted). For setting instructions, see section 6H01
- the Gerotorpump sleeves and suction pipe.
Reconnect the power-assisted braking hose (17 bar)
on the right-hand hydraulic cover.
Reconnect the return hose from the brake mastercylinder tank.
Reconnect the return hoses for the Orbitrol steering
unit and power-assisted braking on the gearbox.
Reconnect following items to gearbox:
- connectors for receptacles A, B, C, D, E, F of the
TC unit,
- sensors,
- solenoid valves.
Position the cab on its front supports (Fig. 5). Install
screws (1) in silent blocks and torque to 200 270 Nm.
Reinstall the side tank.
Reconnect the following items:
- the gas-oil supply and return hoses,
- the tank-gauge harness.
Reinstall the left footstep.
Reconnect the heating hoses.
Reinstall the right-hand radiator guard (if fitted).
Reconnect the steering hoses on the Orbitrol steering unit.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 5

54. Reconnect the charge hose to the brake-mastercylinder tank.
55. Reinstall the transmission shaft and guard.
Reconnect the differential-locking control pipe (4
WD) (front axles AG155H and AG200).
56. Reinstall the battery compartment and right footstep.
57. Reconnect the battery terminals.
58. Reinstall the turbocharger guard.
59. Check the setting of the throttle control.
60. Service the oil system and check the level in the
transparent tube on the left of the centre housing.
Note: The drain plug in the intermediate housing
is special. It has a cylindrical part which the
other plugs do not. It is therefore essential to
check its position during reassembly.
61. Pour fuel into the tanks.
62. Service the cooling system and the expansion tank.
63. Reset the special screw on the Park lock control unit
to its initial position (see section 6F01) (Full Powershift
gearbox only).
64. Close the bonnet.
65. Align the wheels to their initial position. Torque
screws or nuts to values shown (see section 2G01).
66. Road test all the controls.
- sealing of mating face between gearbox and intermediate housing,
- operation of electronic and electrical circuits,
- coolant level. If required, complete servicing of the
circuit in question.
2C01.7
Fig. 6
E . Service tools
Tools available in the AGCO network:
- 3376935M91 - Set of plugs for air-conditioning couplings (Fig. 9)
Issue 12
May 2001
2002

2C01.8
F . Heavy Duty Version

On tractors fitted with the Heavy Duty gearbox, the
disassembly method remains basically identical to that
used on the version employing the Full Powershift
gearbox. Only special points concerning the Heavy Duty
gearbox will be covered in this chapter.
Note: The contour of the intermediate housing is
different. The drain plugs have the same special
feature as mentioned for the one on the intermediate
housing, Full Powershift gearbox) (see operation
60).
Special point
68. Mark then disconnect the hoses coming from the
right-hand hydraulic cover to the cooler. Blank the
hoses and ports.
69. On the gearbox, mark then demate the connectors
on the solenoid valves at the Dynashift valve (version with mechanical reverse shuttle) or at the clutch
control unit (version with power shuttle).
side of the gearbox (if installed, see section 2F01).
Remove:
- the pipes near the clutch control valve and remove
latter, without disconnecting the hose coming
from the master-cylinder (version with mechanical
reverse shuttle).
- the pipes near the clutch control unit (version with
power shuttle).
71. Remove clutch lube pipe (17) located between
intermediate housing (19) and spacer (16) (Fig. 7 7B).
72. Remove the 17-bar pipe coming from the right-hand
hydraulic cover to the selector cover and the 17-bar
hose feeding to the power-assisted braking.
73. Disconnect the end of the gearbox lube pipe fitted on
the outlet of the right-hand hydraulic cover.
Issue 12
May 2002
2001
74. Remove or disconnect the following items on the

selector cover:
- harness of temperature sensor and Hare/Tortoise
electro-valve,
- return hose from brake-master-cylinder tank,
- return hoses from Orbitrol steering unit and powerassisted braking,
- gear control lifting arm (see section 5C01 - 5C02 or
5C03 depending on version)
- control cables of the mechanical reverse shuttle
(see section 5C01)
- creeper unit control (depending on option).
75. Drain the fuel tanks. Remove the side tank.
2C01.9
Version with mechanical reverse shuttle
19
16
17
Fig. 7
(2) Heavy Duty gearbox
Fig. 7A
Version with power shuttle
19
16
17
Fig. 7B
Issue
Issue 12
May
May 2002
2001

2C01.10
Separating the gearbox from the intermediate housing (Fig. 7A)

Special point
76. To access screws (7) (Fig. 9), remove the closing
plate under the gearbox. During separation, mark the
direction of assembly of sleeve (1) on output shaft
(47) on gearbox housing "C" (Fig. 8).
47
Fig. 8
Issue 12
May 2002
2001

19
2C01.11
19
5
1
6
5
8
1
8
19
(8) Gearbox
(19) Intermediate housing
Fig. 9
Issue 12
May 2001
2002

2C01.12

Special point
77. Check the presence of locating pins (4) (Fig. 9) on the
gearbox.
78. Check that the undercut part of the PTO shaft (2) is
pointing towards hydraulic-pump drive gear (1)
(Fig. 10).
Note: Before assembling, coat one seat of spring
(3) with Loctite 401 adhesive. Slide the spring on
shaft (2), the Loctited seat pointed towards the
shouldered part of the shaft.
79. Clean the mating surfaces of the gearbox and the
intermediate housing.
80. Coat the jointing surface of the housing with a sealing
product Loctite 510 or equivalent.
81. Screw two studs diametrically opposite into the
82. Check the presence of sleeve (1) on output shaft (47)
(Fig. 8).
Note: The internal unsplined part of sleeve (1)
must be pointed towards the rear axle.
Special point
- In order to facilitate assembly of the gearbox with the
intermediate housing on 8200 tractors fitted with creeper
speeds, point the reducer link located on the right of the
intermediate housing upwards. If resistance is noted
during assembly of the various parts (gearbox - intermediate housing), avoid forcing, and find the reason.
83. Assemble the gearbox to the housing.
84. Remove the guide studs. Install the following screws
and nuts and torque as shown (Fig. 9) :
- (1) : 240 - 320 Nm
- (3) : 300 - 400 Nm
- (5) : 240 - 320 Nm
- (7) : 300 - 400 Nm
Notes:
- Studs (2) and (6) (Fig. 9) are lightly coated with
Loctite 270 and locked into the intermediate housing,
- Locating pins (4) (Fig. 9) are hard-sleeved into the
gearbox housing.
Issue 12
May 2002
2001
Fig. 10
2C01.13
Final operations
Special point
85. During positioning of the cab, check the behaviour of
the gear control lifting arm. Reinstall and adjust the
gear lifting arm (see section 5C01 - 5C02 or 5C03
depending on version).
86. Reconnect and adjust the control cables of the
mechanical reverse shuttle (see section 5C01).
87. Reinstall or reconnect the following items on the
selector cover:
- creeper control, if fitted (see section 5K01),
- return hose from power-assisted braking and return
hose from Orbitrol steering unit,
- return hose from brake master-cylinder tank,
- harness of temperature sensor and Hare/Tortoise
solenoid valve.
88. Perform the following operations:
- reconnect the transmission lube pipe,
- reinstall the 17-bar pipe on the selector cover, and
the 17-bar hose feeding to the power-assisted
braking,
- reinstall lube pipe (17) (Fig. 8),
- clean the mating surfaces of the clutch valve or of
the clutch control unit (depending on version) and of
the housing.
- coat the mating face of the housing with sealing
product Loctite 510 or equivalent,
- reinstall the clutch control valve (version with
mechanical reverse shuttle) or the clutch control
unit (version with power shuttle).
Torque the screws to 25 - 35 Nm. Reconnect the
pipes and the solenoid valve connectors on the
Dynashift valve or on the clutch control unit (depending on version).
- Fit the solenoid-valve connectors onto the of
Dynashift valve.
- Reconnect the cooler hoses, observing the markings made during disassembly.
89. Reinstall the side tank. Reinstall and adjust the
chassis reinforcements (see section 2F01).
Issue 1
Issue
May 2002
2001
May
8200 SERIES-TRACTORS
Splitting - Intermediate housing / Centre housing
2D01.1
2 D01 Splitting the tractor between Intermediate

housing / Centre housing
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Disassembling __________________________________________
C.
Reassembling __________________________________________
D.
Issue 2
May 2002

2D01.2
Splitting - Intermediate housing /Centre housing
General
This Section presents a general disassembly procedure.
Due to the diversity of the hydraulic or mechanical
options available on the 8200-Series tractors, mention
will only be made of those pipes or main connections
requiring to be disconnected.
The 8200-Series tractors may be equipped with either a
Full Powershift gearbox, or a Heavy Duty gearbox.
Disassembly remains basically identical for both versions.
Available equipment fits:

- Tractors 8210-8220 and 8240: Full Powershift gearbox
AG150
- Tractors 8250 to 8280: Full Power-shift gearbox AG250
- Tractors 8210-8220 and 8240-8250: Heavy Duty gearbox
The cab will remain integral with the gearbox.
Disassembling the intermediate housing from the centre
housing allows working on the following items: drive
pinion, ring gear, differential and housings.
1. Set the lifting arm to the fully DOWN position.
2. Position the rear wheels in wide tread.
bonnet.
Position of locks:
- Tractors 8210-8220 and 8240 to 8260: below the
front nose assembly;
- Tractors 8270 and 8280: below the front nose assembly, on the rear left-hand side of the bonnet.
4. Disconnect the battery terminals;
5. Disconnect the front differential-locking control pipe at
both ends (if fitted). Blank the pipe. Remove the guard
and (4 WD) transmission shaft (all tractor types).
6. Remove the left footstep and if necessary, the right
footstep and battery compartment.
7. Drain the fuel tanks.
Issue 2
May 2002

- the harness on the side-tank gauge,
- the gas-oil supply and return hoses.
9. Remove the side tank.
10. Mark then disconnect the control cables and hoses
of the compensating spool valves on the auxiliary
spool valves.
Important: During the Removal of the cables, it
is essential to avoid turning the main spool of
the valves through a half-turn , to avoid accidental connecting of the service and pilot-pressure
pipes.
11. Remove the rear cab attachments and slightly raise
the cab, ensuring there is no interference with the
vertical exhaust assembly or windshield. During the
operation, also check the behaviour of the speed
control and of the mechanical reverse shuttle (if
fitted), on the selector cover (Heavy Duty gearbox).
If the gear lifting arm interferes with lifting of the cab,
disconnect it (see section 5C01 - 5C02 or 5C03
depending on option).
Chock the cab using suitable axle stands (Fig. 4).
- the return hose from the brake tank on the intermediate housing (Full Powershift gearbox),
- the hoses of the left and right brake pipes located
above the intermediate housing (blank hoses and
tubes),
- the hose (17 bar) towards the power-assisted
braking on the right-hand hydraulic cover,
cover (Heavy Duty gearbox),
- the pipe (17 bar) on the right-hand hydraulic cover
(Heavy Duty gearbox),
- the supply and pilot-flow hoses on the Orbitrol
steering unit on the priority block(s).
13. Drain the intermediate housing and Centre housing.
Note the contour of the plugs.

14. Remove suction pipe (1) (Fig. 1) from the Gerotor
pump, and the elbow unions fitted in the intermediate housing and Full Powershift gearbox.
side of the Heavy Duty gearbox (if installed, see
section 2F01). Remove clutch lube pipe (17) located
between the intermediate housing (19) and spacer
(16) (Fig. 2 - 2A) (Heavy Duty gearbox).
16. Disconnect the handbrake control cable above the
intermediate housing and creeper-speed control on
the right-hand side of the intermediate housing (depending on option, all tractor types).
- the harness to the solenoid valves on the right-hand
hydraulic cover, and the harness to the Park lock
transmission lock located on the right-hand side of
the intermediate housing (if the tractor is fitted with
this device),
- the harness to the low-pressure switch and the one
to the clogging switch on the main filter (15 microns),
- the harnesses to the load sensors,
- the connectors to the (MoveUp-MoveDown) solenoid valves of the lift control valve,
- the harnesses to the position sensors on the righthand lift bearing and the drive sensor on the centre
housing,
- the PTO sensors (dual driving pinion and output
shaft) on the rear housing.
18. Block the front axle (1), using suitable chocks - "C"
(depending on the type of front axle Dana - ZF 5052
or Carraro) (Fig. 3).
2D01.3
AG 250
AG
150
Fig. 1
Issue 2
May 2002

2D01.4

19
16
17
Fig. 2
Version with power shuttle
19
16
17
Fig. 2A
Issue 2
May 2002
2D01.5
B . Disassembling
Separating the gearbox from the intermediate housing
19. For tractors fitted with Park lock transmission locking, free lower shaft (2) (see section 2C01, Fig. 3) by
turning the special screw on the unit located on the
right-hand side of the intermediate housing clockwise until a hard point is felt (see section 6F01).
20. Install the disassembly tooling.
21. Remove the screws securing the gearbox to the
Issue 2
Fig. 3
May 2002

2D01.6
22. Assisted by an operator, separate the assemblies

(Fig. 4).
Note: On the tractors fitted with a Heavy Duty
transmission with creeper unit, monitor the
separation at the gearbox output shaft and drive
pinion.
Separating the intermediate housing and

the centre housing
23. Remove the right- and left-hand covers in order to
access hidden screws (2) (Fig. 5) (see respective
sections 9G01, 9G02 or 9H01).
24. Remove and unstick cover (3) from 4 WD unit (if
installed (Fig. 7). Identify positions of screws (2)
securing intermediate housing (19) to centre housing.
25. Disconnect any hoses or pipes that may have
remained connected to the various assemblies.
26. Chock the rear wheels. Place a fixed axle stand
under the centre housing.
27. Sling the intermediate housing using suitable lifting
equipment.
Fig. 5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Heavy Duty gearbox
Bonnet 8210-8220-8240 to 8260
Bonnet 8270 and 8280
1
Fig. 4
Issue 2
May 2002

28. Remove housing attachment screws (2). Install
guide studs of sufficient length then start the separation (Fig. 7).
Note: In the event of resistance being felt during
separation, screw two screws of suitable length
into tapped holes "T" located on the right and
left attachment flanges of intermediate housing
(Fig. 6). Continue the extraction until the sumps
are completely apart.
Shaft (28) (Fig. 7) located between the drive
bearing of the pumps and the PTO clutch comes
out with the intermediate housing.
efore setting down the shaft, if required visually
mark land "D" to allow passage of the crown
wheel (Fig. 7).
2D01.7
Fig. 6
C . Reassembling
Assembling the intermediate housing and
the centre housing
29. Clean the mating surfaces of the housings.
30. Coat the mating face of the centre housing with
sealing product - Loctite 510 or equivalent.
31. Check for presence and position of locating pin (1)
sleeve- itted into the centre housing (Fig. 7).
Note: The stud has two flats positioned parallel
with the centre line of the housing (Fig. 7).
32. If removed, reposition PTO shaft (28), checking the
position of land "D" (Fig. 7).
33. Screw two guide studs at diametrically opposite
positions on the centre housing.
34. Assemble the intermediate housing to the centre
housing. Turn the pump driving pinion in order to
mate the splines of shaft (28) with the splines on the
PTO clutch.
35. Remove the guide studs. Install screws (2) and
torque to 300 - 400 Nm.
36. Clean the mating surfaces of intermediate housing
(19) and cover (3) (Fig. 7).
Issue 2
May 2002
2D01.8
37. Coat the mating face of the housing Loctite 510.

Reinstall the cover. Torque screws (4) to 50 - 70 Nm
(Fig. 7).
38. Reinstall the right- and left-hand covers (see respective sections 9G01 - 9G02 or 9H01, depending on
hydraulic equipment fit).

With the Full Powershift gearbox:
39. Assemble the gearbox and intermediate housing
(see section 2C01, C).
With the Heavy Duty gearbox:
40. Assemble the gearbox and intermediate housing
(see section 2C01, F).
19
28
Fig. 7
Issue 2
May 2002
2D01.9
41. Reconnect the following items:
- PTO sensors
- position and status sensors
- solenoid valves (MoveUp - MoveDown) on lift
control valve
- load sensors
- switch harnesses (low pressure and clogging)
- solenoid-valve harness on the right-hand hydraulic
cover and Park lock transmission locking on intermediate housing (if installed)
- clutch lube pipe (17) (Fig. 2 - 2A) on Heavy Duty
gearbox
- suction pipe (1) at Gerotor pump and sleeves (Full
Powershift gearbox) (Fig. 1)
- creeper-speed control (if fitted) - for adjustment
instructions, see section 5K01 or 6H01, depending
on version)
- the supply and pilot-flow hoses to the Orbitrol
steering unit on the priority block(s)
- the 17 bar pipe on the right-hand hydraulic cover
(Heavy Duty gearbox),
cover (Heavy Duty gearbox)
- the 17-bar hose to the power-assisted braking on
the right-hand hydraulic cover
- the hoses on the brake pipes
- the return hose from the brake tank on the intermediate housing (Full Powershift gearbox)
42. Rest the cab on its rear supports (Fig. 8). Install the
screws in the silent blocks. Torque nuts (1) to 27 35 Nm and locknuts (2) to 13 - 20 Nm (installed with
Loctite 270). Reinstall and if necessary adjust the
chassis reinforcements (see section 2F01).
43. Reconnect the hoses of the compensating spool
valves and the control cables of the auxiliary spool
valve units (see section 9D01 B).
44. Reinstall the side tank.
45. Reconnect:
- the gas-oil supply and return hoses,
- the tank-gauge harness.
46. Reinstall the transmission shaft and guard.
47. Reconnect the front differential-locking control pipe
(if fitted).
2
Fig. 8
Issue 2
May 2002

2D01.10
48. Reinstall the left footstep. If disassembled, reinstall

the battery compartment and the right footstep.
Reconnect the battery terminals.
49. Align the wheels to their initial position. Torque
screws or nuts to values shown (see section 2G01).
Service the oil system and check the level in the
transparent tube located on the left of the centre
housing.
is special. It has a cylindrical part which the
other plugs do not. It is therefore essential to
check its position during reassembly.
50. Pour fuel into the tanks.
51. If the tractor is equipped with "Park lock" transmission locking, return the special screw on the control
panel to its initial position (see section 6F01).
53. Bleed the main brake system (see section 9I01).
54. Close the bonnet.
55. Road test all of the controls.
- leaktightness of hydraulic circuits
- leaktightness of the mating surfaces between
gearbox / intermediate housing, intermediate hou
sing / centre housing, and cover (3) of the 4 WD
system (if installed) (Fig. 7)
- presence of electronic and electrical functions
- hydraulic functions (low and high pressure)
Issue 12
May 2002
Splitting - PTO housing / Centre housing
2E01.1
2 E01 Separating PTO housing / Centre housing
CONTENTS
A.
B.
Disassembling __________________________________________
C.
Reassembling __________________________________________
D.
Issue 1
May 2001

2E01.2
1. Drain the centre housing.

2. Mark the position of the hoses (1) and disconnect
hydraulic couplers (2) (Fig. 1).
3. Disconnect the clutch pipes (low pressure and lubrication) located on the right-hand side of the PTO housing.
4. Disconnect PTO sensors (1) and (3) (Fig. 2) on the
driving gear and the output shaft.
5. Remove the right- and left-hand guards over the
harnesses connected to the load sensors.
6. On housing (4), remove two diametrically opposite
screws (2) (Fig. 2), and replace with two guide studs
of sufficient length (230 mm approximately) (local
manufacture).
7. Assisted by an operator, or using a suitable sling,
remove support hook (1) (Fig. 3).
Fig. 1
2
2
2
1
4
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 3
2E01.3
C . Reassembling (Fig. 4)
8. Remove the remaining screws. Unstick and disengage the PTO housing from the centre housing by
levering, then remove using suitable lifting equipment.
Note:
- The PTO housing comes out complete with the
clutch and driving/driven pinions. Shaft (28) remains
in the intermediate housing and centre housing.
9. Clean the mating surfaces of the housings.

10. Coat the mating face of the centre housing with
sealing product - Loctite 510 or equivalent.
28
4
12
24
20
7
18
12
1
7
18
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

2E01.4
11. Check the presence of the locating pins on the centre

housing.
Note: The insertion dimension for the studs is
11.40 mm in relation to the surface of the centre
housing. The studs are coated with Loctite 638
or equivalent before fitting.
12. Check that piston (1) in the PTO brake slides freely.
Place the piston in abutment on cylinder (3) (Fig. 4)
to allow passing the PTO clutch during reassembly
of the housing.
13. Coat friction washer (20) with miscible grease and
apply against bearing (24) (removable-shaft PTO
only).
14. Ensure that driven pinions (7) and (18) are correctly
positioned on shaft (12) and that they rotate normally
(PTO all types).
15. Position complete housing (4) (Fig. 4) on the guide
studs installed previously.
16. Progressively slide the housing onto the studs in
order to engage the splines of shaft (28) in the clutch
splines, and those on end of shaft (12) inside bearing
(24).
17. Offer up the PTO housing to the centre housing.
Install the support hook (1) (Fig. 3). Remove the
guide studs. Install screws (2) (Fig. 3 and 4) and
torque to 480-640 Nm (apply Loctite 542).
18.
19.
20.
21.
Reinstall the side guards.

Connect pipes and sensors (1) and (3) (Fig. 2).
Fix the hoses to the hydraulic couplers.
Service the oil system and check the level on the
transparent tube located on the left of the centre
housing.
- leaktightness of mating face of PTO housing:
leaktightness of hydraulic unions,
- operation of PTO clutch, including PTO brake (all
types).
Issue 1
May 2001
Splitting - Chassis reinforcements
2F01.1
2 F01 Chassis reinforcements
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Installation and setting of the reinforcements (Heavy Duty

gearbox) ________________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

2F01.2
Issue 1
May 2001
2F01.3
3
A . General
The side-rails placed either side of the engine reinforce
the tractor chassis.
Different sections of side-rails are used (see

Fig. 1)
a : Type 8210-8220 tractors
- Perkins engine
- Full Powershift AG150 or Heavy Duty gearbox
Note: The side-rails are installed only on tractors having the "Front lifting arm" option.
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Perkins engine
Valmet engine
Heavy Duty gearbox
Cab support
Crossbeams or side-rails
Torque values
Screw (7): 420-560 Nm
Screw (8): 480-640 Nm, plus Loctite 270 or equivalent
1
Fig. 1
b : Type 8240 tractors

- Valmet engine
- Full Powershift AG150 or Heavy Duty gearbox
Tractors 8250
- Valmet engine
- Heavy Duty gearbox
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
4
c : Tractors 8250-8260
- Valmet engine
- Full Powershift AG250 gearbox
2
5
d : Tractors 8270-8280
- Valmet engine
- Full Powershift AG250 gearbox
Danger
- The chassis reinforcements are heavy items. They must
be handled with care, with presence of an operator
and possibly suitable lifting equipment.
8
b
c
8
6
d
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 1
2F01.4
Notes:
Tractors 8240-8250 (Valmet engine) fitted with a Heavy
Duty transmission have additional reinforcements located of each side of the gearbox (Fig. 2).
These comprise two crossbeams maintained as follows:
- at the front, on the gearbox spacer,
- at the rear, on the intermediate housing of the rear axle.
Tractors 8210-8220 (Perkins engine) may be fitted with
the type of reinforcements described previously, provided that the "Front lifting arm" option is envisaged.
Left side view
Tractors 8270 and 8280 are fitted with side-rails whose

cross-section allows the fitting of adjustable thrust
bearings used during oscillating of the ZF 5052 front axle.
If access to screw (8) (Fig. 1) proves difficult, remove the
left footstep and support, and the side fuel tank.
2
1
6
7
3
F
2
10
11
19
11
9
10
7
2
8
1
6
3
Bottom view
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Parts list
Fig. 1
Parts list
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
2F01.5
B . Installing and adjusting the reinforcements (Heavy Duty gearbox)

(Fig. 2 - 3)
Note:
See Danger at A.
- Pre-assemble crossbeams (6) with screws and washers (1) and (7), spacers (4) and the nut,
- Coat the threads of screws (2) and (3) and nut (5) with
Loctite 270. Torque the screws as follows:
. Screw (2): 630 - 840 Nm
. Screw (3): 790 - 1050 Nm
- Pre-tighten screw (8) to 20 Nm
- Position the tensioner screws (9) in contact with curved
washers (10) and loosen so as to obtain a pressure
equivalent to a torque of 100 Nm on housing (19),
- Torque blocking screw (11) to 36 - 46 Nm
- Final torque screw (8) to 240 - 320 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001
Splitting - Rear wheels / Hubs
2G01.1
2 G01 Rear wheels / Hubs
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Presentation of the main assemblies and torque values ____
B.
Changing track _________________________________________
11
C.
Replacing a wheel stud __________________________________
15
Issue 1
May 2001

2G01.2

Parts list (Figs 2 to 5)
General
The 8200 tractors are fitted with quite different stub axles
whose specifications vary depending on the type of
trumpet (Figs. 1 to 8) and the transmissible torque:
- Flange shaft (3): 82 mm (Fig. 1),
- Long straight shaft (3) (smooth), short or long: 95 or
110 mm (Fig. 2 to 8).
Allocations
Tractors 8210 and 8220:
- Flange shafts: 82 mm or
- Long straight shafts: 95 mm
Tractors 8240 and 8250:
- Long straight shafts: 95 mm or 110 mm
Tractors 8260 to 8280:
- Long straight shafts: 110 mm
Changing tread is obtained:
- either by driving then locking the taper-fitting (long
straight shaft),
- or by turning over the rim and/or the disk (flange shaft).
The material used for making the rim disk may be steel
or cast iron.
The contour of the disk is also different depending on the
buyers option.
Issue 1
May 2001
(3)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Stubshaft
Circlip
Plastic plug
Single cone
Washer
Spline
Spline
Adaptor
Washer
2G01.3
A . Presentation of the main assemblies and torque values

- Trumpet: Heavy Duty,
- Flange shaft: 82 mm,
- "Steel" disc.
Tightening torque
- Nuts (1): 400 - 450 Nm
3
1
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

2G01.4
Type of trumpets used
Tightening torque
- Nuts (4): 640 - 680 Nm

- Screws (5): 350 - 460 Nm
Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty sealed
with composite reducer
Long straight shaft (smooth): 95 mm with single cone
and adaptor
- "Steel" disc
13
4
9
5
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

Tightening torque
- Nuts (4): 640 - 680 Nm

- Screws (5): 350 - 460 Nm
Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty sealed
Long straight shaft (smooth): 95 mm with single cone
and adaptor
- "Steel" disc.
2G01.5
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
2G01.6
- Trumpet: with composite reducer

- Long straight shaft (smooth): 95 mm with single cone
and adaptor
- "Cast iron" disc.
Tightening torque
- Nuts (2): 250 - 350 Nm
- Nuts (4): 640 - 680 Nm
- Screws (5): 350 - 460 Nm
3
2
4
5
6
8
10
11
12
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

-
Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty sealed
Long straight shaft (smooth): 95 mm with single
cone
- "Cast iron" disc
2G01.7
Note: The section of cone (8) is identical for figures

2, 4 and 5.
Tightening torque
- Nuts (2): 250 - 350 Nm
- Screws (5): 350 - 460 Nm
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
2G01.8
Parts list (Figs. 6 to 8)
(3)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(10)
(11)
(12)
Tightening torque
Stubshaft
Circlips
"Plastic" plug
Single cones
Spline
Spline
Adaptor
- Nuts (2): 250 - 350 Nm

- Nuts (4): 640 - 680 Nm
- Screws (5): 500 - 600 Nm
Note: The section of the single cones (8) is identical

for Figures 7 and 8.
Trumpet with dual reducer

- Long straight shaft (smooth): 110 mm with single
cones and adaptor
- "Cast iron" disc.
10
11
7
8
12
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

Tightening torque
- Long straight shaft (smooth): 110 mm and with single

cones and adaptor
- "Steel" disc
- Nuts (4): 640 - 680 Nm

- Screws (5): 500 - 600 Nm
2G01.9
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

2G01.10

- Long straight shaft (smooth): 110 mm with single
cones and adaptor
- "Steel" disc
Tightening torque
- Nuts (4): 640 - 680 Nm
- Screws (5): 500 - 600 Nm
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
2G01.11
B . Changing track
1. Immobilise the tractor. Set the handbrake.
2. Chock the front wheels.
Setting and positioning the wheels

Flange shaft (Fig. 1)
3. Loosen nuts (1). Using a trolley jack of suitable
capacity, lift the appropriate side of the tractor. Complete removal of the nuts.
4. Change the rim or the disc in order to obtain the
required track.
A
V
12
6
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001

2G01.12
Long straight shaft (Fig. 2 to 8)

5. Unblock screws (5). Using a trolley jack of suitable
capacity, lift the appropriate side of the tractor. Finish
slackening the screws by a few turns.
6. Take the "V" screw from the tractor toolbox (see Fig.
9), this is a special device for changing the tread.
7. Remove the push-on "plastic" protectors from the
tapped holes in male single cones (8), adaptor (12) or
the "cast iron" disk (depending on option).
8. Lubricate, install and tighten the "V" screw uniformly
and alternately to extract taper-fitting (Fig. 9).
9. Remove any traces of mud or dried earth on the
stubshaft (3). Assisted by an operator, pull or push on
the wheel in order to slide the cone or the male single
cones on the shaft to obtain the sought position.
Note: Circlip (6), installed on the end of the shaft,
is to limit the axial travel of the taper fitting.
Special point:
- The tapered part of male single cones (8), adaptor (12)
or the "cast iron" disk (depending on option) must not be
greased. Before assembly, clean and dry the parts. On
the other hand, the stubshaft must be lightly coated
with "Antiseize" grease or equivalent, along the full
length, in order to avoid any corrosion spots and thus
facilitate travel movement of the wheel during treadchanging.
Danger
- When removing tractor wheels, use lifting equipment
and a suitable sling.
Issue 1
May 2001
With the wheel in the required position, fix as

follows:
Flange shaft
10. Tighten nuts (1) (see tightening torque A).
Long straight shaft

11. Remove "V" screw (Fig. 9). Tighten original screws
(5) uniformly and alternately. During tightening, ensure that male single cones (8) remain aligned on "A"
(Fig. 9).
12. Tighten screws (5) to the torque recommended in
A.
13. Grease the tapped holes in the "V" screws and install
the "plastic" protectors.
Final operation
14. Remove the chocks from the front wheels, and
release the handbrake.
2G01.13
Steel wheels, reinforced axle, hub 203 mm

Theoretical treads (mm)
1
1600
2
1804
3
2100
4
2304
Theoretical treads (mm)

- A (M18)=40 to daNm
Fixed steel wheels, long straight shaft

Short shaft
Min.
Max.
Long shaft
Min.
Max.
Theoretical tread 1
reinforced axle
sealed trumpet
composite 95
1636
1658
1702
2006
2020
2124
1636
1658
1702
2600
2664
2624
Theoretical tread 2
reinforced axle
sealed trumpet
composite 95
1960
1982
2026
2330
2344
2448
1960
1982
2026
2924
2988
2948
Theoretical tread 3
composite 110
Dual reductions
1632
1674
2054
2052
1632
1664
2554
2552
Theoretical tread 4
composite 110
Dual reductions
1954
2004
2376
2382
1954
1994
2876
2882
Tightening torques
- B = 35 to 46 daNm
- C = 64 to 68 daNm
Tightening torques
- C = 64 to 68 daNm
- D = 50 to 60 daNm
10951.4
10951.3
C
B
Issue 1
C
D
May 2001
2G01.14
Wheels fitted with cast-iron disk, hub with two single cones
Short shaft
Min.
Max.
Long shaft
Min.
Max.
1490
1810
1962
2294
1912
2232
2384
2716
1490
1810
1962
2294
2412
2732
2884
3216
Theoretical tread 5
composite 110
Dual reductions
1418
1460
1840
1838
1418
1450
2340
2338
Theoretical tread 6
composite 110
Dual reductions
1744
1785
2166
2163
1744
1776
2666
2664
Theoretical tread 7
composite 110
Dual reductions
1896
1938
2318
2316
1896
1928
2818
2816
2222
2264
2644
2642
2222
2254
3144
3142
Straight shaft 95
Theoretical treads1
2
3
4
Theoretical tread
- B = 35 46 daNm
- C = 64 68 daNm
- E = 25 35 daNm
Theoretical tread 8
composite 110
Dual reductions
Tightening torques
- C = 64 to 68 daNm
- D = 50 to 60 daNm
- E = 25 to 35 daNm
10951.5
10951.2
C
1
Issue 1
May 2001
2G01.15
C . Replacing a wheel stud

15. Drive out the bad stud.
16. Clean the new stud and its housing in the hub.
17. Coat the splined part of the replacement stud lightly
with Loctite 270 or equivalent.
18. Fit the new stud using a bronze drift and a suitable
hammer.
Issue 1
May 2001
3 . ENGINE
Contents
3 A01
GENERAL
3 B01
FLYWHEEL AND DAMPERS
3 C01
SPACER
3 C02
SPACER - POWER SHUTTLE
Issue 2
May 2002
Engine - General
3A01.1
3 A01 General
CONTENTS
A.
Introduction ____________________________________________
B.
Main specifications _____________________________________
C.
Viscostatic fan __________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

3A01.2
Issue 1
Engine - General
May 2001
Engine - General
3A01.3
A . Introduction
This section is limited to providing general information on
the engines fitted in the 8200 range.
To obtain all information about technical data, adjustments, disassembly and assembly procedures, refer to
the following publications:
1. Perkins engines
- Workshop manual covering all Perkins diesel engines
in the 4.41, 900 and 1000 series for all Massey Ferguson
tractors and published by AGCO with the following
reference numbers:
. 1857075 M1 in English
. 1857076 M1 in French
. 1857077 M1 in Spanish
. 1857078 M1 in German
. 1857243 M1 in Italian
2. Valmet engines
- Workshop manual covering all 620 DS and 634 DS type
engines published in English by Valmet, reference
number 836 640 364.
- Workshop manual specific to the 645 engine published
in English by Valmet, reference number 836 841 000.
Issue 1
May 2001

3A01.4
Engine - General
B . Main characteristics
Tractors fitted with Perkins engine
Type of engine
Perkins engine list no.
No. of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Capacity (litre)
Compression ratio
DIN (kw) at 2200 rpm
Max. torque (Nm)
at (rpm)
Idle speed (rpm)
Nominal speed (rpm)
Max. speed at no load (rpm)
Injection pump
Make and type
Boost control
Reference
Code
Pump code letter
Governor spring code
Rotation
Static timing angle
Engine position
Pump / engine check angle
Injectors
Make
Code
Nozzle holder
Nozzle
New and service calibration
Suction system
Min. boost pressure at

2200 rpm at full load (mm Hg)
(Kpa)
(PSI)
Valve spring
Valve seat insert (inlet / exhaust)
Valve angle (degree) (in / ex)
Valve clearance (mm) (in / ex)
Oil cooler
No. of thermostats
Opening temp. (begin / full)
Fan
Piston cooling nozzle
Oil filter
Fuel filter
Issue 1
May 2001
8210
1006-60TWG
YH31441
6
100
127
6
17.25/1
145 (107)
620
1400
950
2200
2354
8220
1006-60TWG
YH31441
6
100
127
6
17.25/1
155 (114)
663
1400
950
2200
2354
Lucas DP203
Yes
8921A512T
2644K622
FH
1
Clockwise
7
TDC
Timing (using a
measuring gauge)
Lucas DP203
Yes
8921A283T
2644D133
DH
1
Clockwise
6
TDC
Timing (using a
measuring gauge)
Lucas
KP
2645A318
2645A636
294 atm
Turbowastegate
Lucas
KH
2645A314
2645A630
294 atm
Turbowastegate
intercooler
1035
138 5
20.03
1035
138 5
20.03
Single
Yes
45 / 45
0.2 / 0.45
Yes
2
82 / 96
Viscostatic
Yes
2
2
Single
Yes
30 / 30
0.2 / 0.45
Yes
2
82 / 96
Viscostatic
Yes
2
2
Engine - General
3A01.5
Tractors fitted with Valmet engine

Type of engine
Perkins/Valmet engine list no.
No. of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Capacity (litre)
Compression ratio
Max. torque (Nm)
at (rpm)
Idle speed (rpm)
Nominal speed (rpm)
Injection pump
Make and type
Boost control
Reference
Code
Pump code letter
Rotation
Static timing angle
Engine position
Injectors
Make
Code
Nozzle holder
Nozzle
Suction system
(Kpa)
(PSI)
Valve spring
Valve seat insert (inl / ex)
Oil cooler
No. of thermostats
Fan
Oil filter
Fuel filter
8240
620DSRAE
V620DSRAE
6
108
120
6.6
16.5 / 1
170 (125)
744
1400
950
2200
2354
8250
634DWE
V634DSBAE
6
108
134
7.4
16.5 / 1
185 (136)
811
1400
950
2200
2354
Stanadyne DB4
Yes
DB4629/5347
5347 or 5535
A
Clockwise
16
TDC
Timing (using a
measuring gauge)
Bosch type P
Yes
PES6P
3382
G
Clockwise
13
TDC
Timing (using a
measuring gauge)
Stanadyne
446
M34446
M34447
270 atm
Turbo intercooler
Stanadyne
876
M33876
M33877
270 atm
Turbo intercooler
900
120
17.42
900
120
17.42
Single
Yes
35 / 45
0.35 / 0.45
Yes
2
82 / 96
Viscostatic
Yes
2
2
Single
Yes
35 / 45
0.35 / 0.45
Yes
2
82 / 96
Viscostatic
Yes
2
2
Issue 1
December 2000

3A01.6
Engine - General
Type of engine
No. of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Capacity (litre)
Compression ratio
Max. torque (Nm)
at (rpm)
Idle speed (rpm)
Nominal speed (rpm)
Injection pump
Make and type
Boost control
Reference
Code
Pump code letter
Rotation
Static timing angle
Engine position
Injectors
Make
Code
Nozzle holder
Nozzle
Suction system
(Kpa)
(PSI)
Valve spring
Oil cooler
No. of thermostats
Fan
Oil filter
Fuel filter
1
Issue 2
December
2000
May 2002
8260
634DSBIE
V634DSBIE
6
108
134
7.4
16.5 / 1
210 (154)
897
1400
950
2200
2354
8270
645DSBIE
V645DSBIE
6
108
145
8.4
16.5 / 1
230 (169)
1002
1400
950
2200
2354
Bosch type P
Yes
PES6P
3382
C
Clockwise
13
TDC
Timing (using a
measuring gauge)
Bosch type P
Yes
PES6P120D
3382
A
Clockwise
14
TDC
Timing (using a
measuring gauge)
Stanadyne
876
M33876
M33877
270 atm
Turbo intercooler
Bosch
DLLA143P45
P495
250 atm
Turbo intercooler
1275
170
24.67
1125
150
21.77
Single
Yes
35 / 45
0.35 / 0.45
Yes
2
82 / 96
Viscostatic
Yes
2
2
Single
Yes
35 / 45
0.35 / 0.35
Yes
2
82 / 96
Viscostatic
Yes
2
2
Engine - General
Type of engine
No. of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Capacity (litre)
Compression ratio
Max. torque (Nm)
at (rpm)
Idle speed (rpm)
Nominal speed (rpm)
8280
645DSBIE
V645DSBIE
6
111
145
8.4
16 / 1
260 (191)
1150
1400
950
2200
2354
Injection pump
Make and type
Boost control
Reference
Code
Pump code letter
Rotation
Static timing angle
Engine position
Bosch type P
Yes
PES6P120A
3382
Clockwise
14
TDC
Timing (using a measuring gauge)
Injectors
Make
Code
Nozzle holder
Nozzle
Suction system
2200-rpm at full load (mm Hg)
Bosch
DLLA143P455
P495
250 atm
Turbo intercooler
(Kpa)
(PSI)
Valve spring
Oil cooler
No. of thermostats
Fan
Oil filter
Fuel filter
3A01.7
1275
170
24.67
Single
Yes
35 / 45
0.35 / 0.35
Yes
2
82 / 96
Viscostatic
Yes
2
2
Issue
Issue 21
May 2002
December
2000

3A01.8
Engine - General
C . Viscostatic fan
Description
The engines are fitted with a cooling fan equipped with a
viscostatic coupling. This device permits a gain in power
in the order of 2 to 3 horsepower.
The viscostatic coupling comprises three main parts:
- the driving part driven by the engine and composed of
a shaft (1) integral with a plate (2) fitted with annular
grooves,
- the driven part constituted by a hub (6) receiving the fan
and the body (7) and equally fitted with annular grooves,
- the regulating section comprising a thermostatic spring
(3) that controls valve (4).
The centre of the device contains a tank (5) filled with a
viscous silicone fluid.
Operation
When the temperature of the air passing through the
radiator reaches a preset value, thermostatic spring (3)
acts upon valve (4) which opens port a. The liquid is
directed by centrifugal force to the annular grooves of hub
(2) and body (7). The torque is transmitted through the
internal friction of the extremely viscous liquid and its
adherence to the inner walls. The fan is thus driven and
permits a better air cooling of the radiator.
The speed of the fan varies continuously over the whole
range of regulation depending on the temperature.
When the temperature of the air passing through the
radiator drops, the spring closes the valve and stops the
liquid from reaching the friction area. The fluid gradually
returns to the tank (5) via channel b, the fan thus
becomes de-clutched, leaving only residual resistive
torque.
Issue 1
December 2000
Engine - Flywheel
3B01.1
3 B01 Flywheel and dampers
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Removing and refitting the damper _______________________
C.
Removing and refitting the flywheel and bearing __________
D.
Replacing the starter ring gear ___________________________
E.
Service tools ___________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001
8200-ERIES TRACTORS
3B01.2
Engine - Flywheel
A . General
The Luk type damper (3) installed on the flywheel is
secured by splines onto main shaft (6). It provides a
flexible connection between the engine and gearbox and
damps any vibrations caused by the transmission. It is
installed on 8200-Series tractors fitted with the Full
Powershift (AG150 - AG250) and Heavy Duty gearboxes
AG 150 - AG250 versions (Fig. 1)

- Bearing (1) fit in the flywheel is sealed on both faces.
The seal is to give better reliability. The bearing supports
main shaft (6) and does not itself rotate. Its position in
the flywheel remains variable depending on the type of
gearbox and the engine type. It may be bearing on a
shoulder of the flywheel, or on a circlip.
- Spring (5) maintains the main shaft in position.
- The damper, the main shaft and the bearing form an
assembly rotating at the speed of the flywheel.
Heavy Duty version (Fig. 2)

- The principle of installation and operation remain similar.
Note, however, that:
. the spring is excluded, since the main shaft installation differs from that shown for the previous version;
. the bearing has one position only, and is in contact
with the shoulder of the flywheel.
Note
The part number of damper (3) differs according to the
version.
Issue 1
May 2001
B . Removing and refitting the damper (Figs 1 - 2)

Removal
1. Split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox
(see section 2B01).
2. Remove screws (4).
3. Remove damper (3).
Refitting
4. Check the parts and replace any that are faulty.
Special point
If the operation consists in changing the damper, also
replace the bearing (see C).
5. Lightly coat the splines of the damper hub with GN
grease + Molycote. Refit and centre the damper using
service tool, P/N 3378262M1 (see E) , the offset on
the hub pointing towards the gearbox (Figs. 1 - 2).
6. Lightly coat the threads of screws (4) with Loctite 270
and torque to following values:
- Full Powershift gearbox (AG150-AG250):
. M10 screws: 68 - 92 Nm.
- Heavy Duty gearbox:
. M12 screws: 102 - 138 Nm
7. Reassemble the tractor between the engine and
gearbox (see section 2B01).
Engine - Flywheel
Full Powershift gearbox AG150
Flywheel
Parts list
(1) Bearing
(2) Starter ring gear
(3) Damper
(4) Screw
(5) Spring
(6) Main shaft
(7) Gearbox
3B01.3
Distance btw.
Perkins
centres of
attachment holes "T"
Valmet
A
86 mm
107,95 mm
T
A
1
T
B
T
Full Powershift gearbox AG250
Parts list
(1) Bearing
(3) Damper
(4) Screw
(5) Spring
(6) Main shaft
(7) Gearbox
(8) Circlip
Flywheel
Distance btw. centres Valmet

of attachment holes "T"
86 mm
94 mm
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
Engine - Flywheel
3B01.4
Heavy Duty gearbox
Parts list
(1) Bearing
(3) Damper
(4) Screw
(6) Main shaft
(7) Spacer / Gearbox
Flywheel
Perkins
Valmet
A-B
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
Engine - Flywheel
3B01.5
C . Removing and refitting the flywheel and the bearing

Removal
(see section 2B01).
9. Lock the flywheel using a suitable fixture.
10. Remove the damper (see B).
11. Remove the flywheel.
12. Drive out bearing (1) (Figs. 1 - 2)
Remarks
- On certain types of installation (Figs. 1 - 2) , extraction of the bearing is possible without removing the
flywheel, using a slide hammer.
- If installing a type A flywheel and a Full Powershift
gearbox AG250, replace circlips (8) and the bearing
(Fig. 1)
Refitting
13. Check the parts, replacing any that are defective.
14. Screw two guide studs opposite one another into the
holes used for attaching the flywheel on the crankshaft.
15. Refit the flywheel.
Note: Depending on the type of fixture, fit bearing (1) before or after refitting the flywheel, using
a suitable mandrel (dia. 62 mm, corresponding
to the hole in the external cage of the bearing).
16. Remove the guide studs. Torque the screws to
140 Nm (Perkins engine). For the screw torquing
values on Valmet flywheels, refer to the engine
repair manual.
17. Refit the damper (see B).
Issue 1
May 2001
8200-ERIES TRACTORS
3B01.6
Engine - Flywheel
D . Replacing the starter ring gear

Disassembly
19. Split the tractor between the engine and gearbox
(see section 2B01).
20. Remove the damper (see B).
21. Remove the flywheel (see C).
22. Using a suitable-strength drill bit, drill a hole ( 5) to
the same depth as the width of ring gear (2) to avoid
touching the flywheel. Use a suitable cold chisel to
split the ring gear (Fig. 3).
Note: When breaking the ring gear, provide
some protection to stop splinters of material.
2
Reassembly
23. Heat a new ring gear to 245 C in a furnace only.
24. Install ring gear (2) on the flywheel, with the teeth
opening pointing towards the starter, and fit rapidly
into abutment. Allow to cool slowly.
25. Refit the flywheel (see C) and the damper (see
B).
Fig. 3
E . Service tools
Tool available in the AGCO network
- 3378262M1 - Damper centring tool (Fig. 4)
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
Engine - Spacer
3C01.1
3 C01 Spacer
CONTENTS
A.
Removing and refitting the spacer ________________________
B.
Service tools ___________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

3C01.2
Engine - Spacer
A . Removing and refitting the spacer
General
Type-8210 - 8220 -8240 and 8250 tractors may be fitted
with either a Heavy Duty gearbox or a Full Powershift
gearbox.
This section is limited to parts concerning the Heavy
Duty gearbox. The Heavy Duty gearbox comprises two
casings:
- the main housing which encloses the pinions, the
shafts and the input unit,
- the spacer, providing the connection with the engine.
10
1. Split the tractor between the engine and gearbox (see
section 2B01).
2. Disassemble the four screws (dia. 10 mm) on each
front Silent Block on the right- and left-hand engine
bearers.
Note: If the side fuel tank was not removed during
the separation operation, drain the gas-oil and
remove the footstep in question then the fuel
tank.
3. Raise and block the cab. Remove the cab supports
(right and left) and any adjacent parts likely to obstruct
removal of the spacer. Drain the gearbox.
4. Install protector, P/N 3378012M2 (see B) on main
shaft (7) (Fig. 1).
5. Remove screws (5) (62) in order to facilitate unsticking
of closure disk (10) (Fig. 1). Use the tapped holes and
two screws of sufficient length to extract and maintain the disk before removing it.
6. Scrap seal (8) (Fig. 6).
7. Remove lube tube (17) from the engine clutch located
under the gearbox between spacer (16) and intermediate housing (19) (Fig. 4).
8. Remove tubes (20) (65) (70) and union (66) (Figs. 2 3).
9. Remove the clutch using locally procured tooling (see
section 4A01).
62
16
Fig. 1
66
Fig. 2
70
65
20
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
Engine - Spacer
3C01.3
Loctite 5206
1
16
16
17
19
A
A -A
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

3C01.4
Issue 1
Engine - Spacer
May 2001
Engine - Spacer
3C01.5
Removing the spacer (Fig. 4)

Note
The cab inner floor contains an access door. If necessary, use the latter for accessing the top screws securing
the spacer to the gearbox.
10. Remove screws (1) (4) (5) (7) and nuts (8) on spacer
(16). Remove washers (3).
11. Assisted by an operator, unstick and remove the
spacer.
12. If necessary, extract studs (9) from the gearbox
housing.
Refitting
13. Clean the parts and replace any that are defective.
14. Remove all traces of old Loctite from the mating
surfaces. Coat the mating face of the spacer (gearbox side) with Loctite 5206 or equivalent.
15. Ensure presence of locating pins (6) (Fig. 4).
Note: Studs (9) are smeared with Loctite 270
and locked into the gearbox.
16. Refit the spacer. Coat the screws and nuts with
Loctite 270 and torque to following values:
- screws (1) and nuts (2): 150 - 200 Nm,
- screws (4) (5) (7) and nuts (8): 100 - 130 Nm.
17. Coat union (66) with Loctite 542 then screw onto the
spacer (Fig. 2).
P
Fig. 5
12
Final operations
18. Refit the clutch and tubes. Reverse operations 7 to
9.
19. Ensure the presence of centring pins on the closure
disk, and shims on the clutch assembly. Replace
Orings (8) (Fig. 6).
20. Coat surrounds P of the tapped holes with
Loctite 5206. (Fig. 5).
21. Grease the lip of the seal. Fit the shaft with the
protector used during disassembly. Screw two guide
studs in opposing locations on the spacer, and
reinstall closure disk (10) and finger (63) in the slot in
pump body (12) (Fig. 6).
Install long screws (62) in the same holes as those
provided for the centring pins. Install screws (5) (Fig.
1). Torque all screws to 25 - 35 Nm.
63
8
10
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

3C01.6
Engine - Spacer
22. Refit the cab supports and any neighbouring parts

that were removed. Coat the screws for the supports
with Loctite 270 then insert and torque to 200260 Nm. If it was removed, reinstall the access door
in the cab floor. Service the oil in the sumps and
check level on sightglass located on left of centre
housing.
23. Remove the props and set back the cab. Torque up
the screws ( 10 mm) on each Silent Block support
to 50 - 70 Nm.
25. Check the following:
- leaktightness of hydraulic connections and the
mating face;
- operation of the engine clutch.
Fig. 7
B . Service tools
- 3378012M2 - Protector (Fig. 7)
Issue 1
May 2001
Engine - Spacer
3C02.1
3 C02 Spacer - Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A.
Removing and refitting the spacer ________________________
B.
Service tool ____________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

3C02.2
Engine - Spacer
A . Removing and refitting the spacer
General
8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 series tractors equipped
with a Power Shuttle are fitted with a spacer (16) (Fig.
1) inserted between the engine and the gearbox. The
design of this spacer is similar to that fitted on the 8200
equipped with a mechanical reverse shuttle (see section 3C01).
However, it should be noted that its closure disk has a
different profile so that it can be fitted with the
hydromechanical assembly of the power shuttle.
section 2B01).
2. Disassemble the four screws (dia. 10 mm) on each
front Silent Block on the right- and left-hand cab
bearers.
Note: If the side fuel tank was not removed during
the separation operation, drain the gas-oil and
remove the footstep in question then the fuel
tank.
3. Raise and block the cab. Remove the cab supports
(right and left) and any adjacent parts likely to obstruct
removal of the spacer. Drain the gearbox.
4. Install protector 3378012M2 (see B) on main shaft
(19) (Fig. 1).
5. Remove screws (1) (2) (Fig. 1).
Special point
- In order to facilitate unsticking of closure disk (4)
(Fig. 1), use the tapped holes and two screws of
sufficient length to extract and maintain the disk
before removing it.
6. Scrap seal (3) (Fig. 6).
7. Remove lube tube (78) from the power shuttle clutches
located under the gearbox between spacer (16) and
intermediate housing (19) (Fig. 4).
8. Remove tubes (31) (86) (optional) and (74) (87) (94)
and finally union (66) (Figs. 2 - 3).
9. Remove the clutch from the power shuttle (optional)
using the locally-made tool (see section 5B06).
10
62
16
Fig. 1
66
Fig. 2
70
65
20
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
Engine - Spacer
3C02.3
Loctite 5206
1
16
16
17
19
A
A -A
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

3C02.4
Issue 1
Engine - Spacer
May 2001
Engine - Spacer
3C02.5
Removing the spacer (Fig. 4)

Note
The cab inner floor contains an access door. If necessary, use the latter for accessing the top screws securing
the spacer to the gearbox.
10. Remove screws (1) (4) (5) (7) and nuts (8) on spacer
(16). Remove washers (3).
11. Assisted by an operator, unstick and remove the
spacer.
12. If necessary, extract studs (9) from the gearbox
housing.
Refitting
13. Clean the parts and replace any that are defective.
14. Remove all traces of old Loctite from the mating
surfaces. Coat the mating face of the spacer (gearbox side) with Loctite 5206 or equivalent.
15. Ensure presence of locating pins (6) (Fig. 4).
Note: Studs (9) are smeared with Loctite 270 and
locked into the gearbox.
16. Refit the spacer. Coat the screws and nuts with
Loctite 270 and torque to following values:
- screws (1) and nuts (2): 150 - 200 Nm,
- screws (4) (5) (7) and nuts (8): 100 - 130 Nm.
17. If necessary, coat union (96) with Loctite 542 then
screw it onto the spacer (Fig. 2).
P
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001

3C02.6
Engine - Spacer
Final operations
18. If necessary, refit the front clutch of the power
shuttle. Reconnect the tubes. Refit the clutch and
tubes. Reverse operations 7 to 9.
19. Ensure the presence of centring pins G (Fig. 1) on the
closure disk (4) and of shims lubricating pump cover.
Replace O'ring (3) (Fig. 6).
20. Coat surrounds P of the tapped holes with
Loctite 5206. (Fig. 5).
21. Grease the lip of the seal fitted on the closure disk.
Fit the shaft with the protector used during disassembly.
Screw two guide studs in opposing locations on the
spacer, and reinstall closure disk (4) and finger (2) in
the slot in pump body (1) (Fig. 6).
Install long screws (2) in the same holes as those
provided for the centring pins. Install screws (1) (Fig.
1). Torque all screws to 36 - 46 Nm.
22. Refit the cab supports and any neighbouring parts
that were removed. Coat the screws for the supports
with Loctite 270 then insert and torque to 200260 Nm. If it was removed, reinstall the access door
in the cab floor. Service the oil in the sumps and
check level on sightglass located on left of centre
housing.
23. Remove the props and set back the cab. Torque up
the screws ( 10 mm) on each Silent Block support
to 50 - 70 Nm.
25. Check the following:
- tightness of hydraulic unions and mating face.
- operation of the power shuttle.
Fig. 6
B . Service tool
- 3378012M2 - Protector (Fig. 7)
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
4 . CLUTCH
Contents
4 A01
PRESSURE LOADED CLUTCH
Issue 1
May 2001
Clutch - Pressure loaded
4A01.1
4 A01 Pressure loaded clutch
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the closing plate and replacing

the lip seal and the O'ring _______________________________
B.
Removing and refitting the clutch ________________________
C.
Adjusting the clutch ____________________________________
10
D.
Disassembling and reassembling the clutch _______________
11
E.
Removing and refitting the control valve __________________
13
F.
Service tools ___________________________________________
13
Issue 1
May 2001

4A01.2

Operation
General
Description
The engine clutch system installed on the Heavy Duty
gearboxes equipping type 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250
tractors is of the oil-immersed multidisc type.
The hydraulic clutch - which transmits the movement is similar to a Direct-drive clutch but is larger.
This clutch is controlled by an hydraulic valve mounted
on the right-hand side of the gearbox, itself actuated by
the clutch master-cylinder.
Construction
The clutch assembly is installed between the flywheel
and the transmission shaft of the Dynashift unit.
Main shaft (7) penetrates closing plate (10) which separates the flywheel from the transmission fluid. Shaft (7)
is in constant engagement with the damper fixed on the
flywheel.
Due to the splines, it is rotates together with clutch
housing (23) which includes intermediate plates (45) and
which houses piston (46).
Drive hub (37) comprising discs (44) is integral with
clutch shaft (33).
Fixed unit (12) has two functions:
- it receives the 17-bar pressure,
- it serves as the lubrication and cooling pump body
(30 l/min, rated pressure 0.4 bar).
The pump supply is obtained from the centre housing via
a 500-micron strainer (replaceable), tube (17) placed
under the transmission, and a second tube (20).
Depending on the type, the clutch assembly comprises
a different number of discs and intermediate plates:
- 8210 and 8220: 6 discs, 6 intermediate plates
- 8240: 7 discs, 7 intermediate plates
- 8250: 8 discs, 8 intermediate plates.
Discs (44) have a paper lining for smoother engagement
and reduced noise.
Issue 1
May 2001
Clutching
When the clutch pedal is released, the hydraulic valve
located on the right-hand side of the gearbox delivers a
pressure of 17 bar which moves piston (46); the latter in
turn compresses intermediate plates (45) against discs
(44), entraining clutch shaft (33).
The valve monitors the smoothness and progressive
engagement of the clutch, and modulates the pressure
applied on the piston.
Release
Once the pressure is no longer applied, piston (46) is
pushed back by Belleville washers (42), and intermediate plates (45) are no longer in contact with the discs.
The lubrication and cooling flow to the discs is interrupted
in the declutched position to avoid driving the discs by
drag effect. For the same reason, the discs have a face
curved to facilitate disengagement.

Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
Orings
Backup washers
Splined bush
Locking ring
Screw
Washer
Main shaft
Oring
Shim(s)
Closing plate
Pump cover
Pump body
Dynashift cover
Oring
Orings
Spacer
Tube
Screw
Flange
Tube
Spacer casing
Screw
Clutch housing
Pin
Flange
Screw
Dust shield
Oring
Oring
Seal holder
Screw
Direct-drive shaft
Clutch shaft
Circlip
Washer
Bearing
Drive hub
Screw
Clutch cover
Bearing
Belleville washers
Circlip
Disks
Intermediate plates
Piston
Clutch assembly
Seal
Seal
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
(69)
(70)
(71)
(72)
(73)
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)
4A01.3
Bearing
Bush
Seal rings
Lubricating pump
Screw
Bearing
Circlip
Lip seal
Circlip
Centring pin
Screw
Finger
Union
Tube
Union
Diagnostic connector
1.5-bar valve
Oring
Tube
Oring
Union
Plug
500 micron strainer
Oring
Plug
Indexing port
Overall view
68
69
64
70
65
67
73
66
71
Fig. 1
72
Fig. 1A
30
26
30
29
28
Fig. 2
17
25
74
27
75
31
A-A
76
Parts list
Fig. 1A
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

Overall view
4A01.4
58
56
11
56
55
54
12
53
77
23
46
39
18
42
21
58
43
47
40
7
37
34
4
33
32
3
57
52
10
24
9
35
36
23
A
44
10
61
51
50
C
12
63
62
16
15
17
38
19
20
22
14
48
49
45
13
10
Fig. 1A
Issue 1
May 2001
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 2

Exploded View
4A01.5
21
35
13
16
18
32
63
33
34
10
39
61
36
37
62
44
45
73
68
69
57
67
58
66
64
2
1
65
70
71
72
58
27
6
5
40
42
25
14
52
20
50
15
51
17
43
7
46
48
19
38
49
29
31
54
55
22
56
30
24
23
74
12
53
75
11
9
28
26
Issue 1
May 2001
Parts list
Fig. 1
76
Fig. 2
Fig. 1A

4A01.6
Issue 1
May 2001
4A01.7
A . Removing and refitting the closing plate and replacing lip seal (57)
and Oring (1)
Removal
(Section 2B01).
2. Drain the gearbox.
3. In order to facilitate unsticking of closing plate (10),
install two jacking screws of sufficient length in the
tapped holes in the closing plate, then remove the
disc.
4. Remove front circlips (58) and remove splined bush
(3), backup washers (2) and seal (1).
5. Extract seal (57).
P
Fig. 3
Refitting
6. Fit seal (57) using a suitable fixture.
7. Place Oring (1) between rings (2). Reinstall splined
bush (3). Replace front circlip (58) and position
correctly in the groove.
8. Ensure presence of centring pins (61) and shims (9).
9. Replace Oring (8).
10. Coat tapped-hole surrounds P with Loctite 5206 (Fig.
3).
11. Grease the lip of seal (57). Place protector P/N
3378012M2 (see F) on shaft (7). Screw two guide
studs in opposing locations on the spacer and
reinstall closing plate (10), with finger (63) in the slot
of pump body (12) (Fig. 4).
12. Install long screws (62) in the same holes as those
provided for centring pins (61). Install screws (5),
13. Service the oil in the sumps and check on the
sightglass located on the left of the centre housing.
gearbox (see section 2B01) and check adjustment of
the chassis reinforcements (if installed) (see section
2F01).
12
63
10
Fig. 4
1
Issue 2
2001
May 2002
4A01.8
B . Removing and refitting the clutch

Removal
(see section 2B01).
16. Drain the gearbox and the intermediate housing.
Note: Visually identify the contour of the plugs.
17. If the tractor is fitted with chassis reinforcements, it
may be necessary to remove the right-hand reinforcement.
18. Remove tube (17).
19. Remove closing plate (10). Repeat operation 3.
20. Remove tube (20).

21. Remove union (72) and tubes (70) and (65).
22. Remove clutch (47) using the locally manufactured
tool (Fig. 5 and F).
Refitting
23.
24.
25.
26.
Replace Orings (14) and (69).

Replace Orings (15) and (71).
Refit tubes (20) (65) (70) and union (72).
Coat feeler gauges (9) used at operation 45 with
miscible grease, and place on pump cover (11).
27. Refit feed tube (2) (Fig. 11).
32
47
32
7
33
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001

28. If disassembled, coat finger (63) with Loctite 270
and screw into closing plate (10).
29. Ensure presence of centring pins (61). Replace
Oring (8).
30. Clean and coat hole surrounds P with Loctite 5206
(Fig. 3).
31. Refit the closing plate. Repeat operation 11.
32. Fit screws (5) (62) with washers (6) then insert and
Note: The two long screws (62) are installed
with centring pins (61).
33. Replace Orings (28) (29). Reinstall seal holder (30).
Install screws (31) and torque to 14 -20 Nm.
34. Replace dust shield (27). Reinstall tube (17) and
flanges (19) and (25), ensuring that groove G in
flange (25) is aligned with the face of seal holder (30)
(Fig. 7). Tighten screw (26). Torque screws (31) and
(38) to 25 -3 5 Nm. If disassembled, reinstall and
adjust the right-hand chassis reinforcement (see
section 2F01).
35. Service the oil in the sumps and check on the
is special. It has a cylindrical part that is missing
on the other plugs. It is therefore essential to
observe the position during reassembly.
gearbox (Section 2B01).
37. Bleed the clutch control valve (see section 9I01) and
check the clutch lubrication pressure (see section
9N01).
38. Check the operation of the direct-drive clutch.
39. Road-test the engine clutch.
40. Check the leaktightness of flange (19) and seal
holder (30).
10
11
4A01.9
36
13
J1 = 0,60 / 0,80 mm
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
G
26
29
28
17
25
30
Issue 1
27
May 2001

4A01.10
C . Adjusting the clutch

41. Remove the clutch (see B) and Direct-drive shaft
(32).
42. Temporarily refit clutch assembly (47) onto clutch
shaft (33), using the tool used at operation 22 (and
temporarily excluding the direct-drive shaft). Place 2
mm feeler gauge (9) on cover (11).
43. Grease the lip of seal (57). Slide protector 3378012M2
(see F) over the splines of shaft (7) to protect the
seals. Screw two studs in opposing locations on the
spacer and reinstall closing plate (10). Install and
tighten a few of the screws.
Adjustin
g
Note: This operation consists in obtaining an axial
clearance of J1 = 0.60 to 0.80 mm between pump
cover (11) and closing plate (10) (Fig. 6)
44. Install a dial-gauge comparator on the end of shaft (7)
and check the play by moving the clutch assembly
sideways.
Note: Ensure bearing (36) in the clutch assembly
is fully abutted against cover (13) before pulling
on the shaft (Fig. 6)
45. Remove closing plate (10); depending on the measured clearance, select thickness of feeler gauges (9)
to obtain a clearance J1 of between 0.6 and
0.8 mm.
Final operations
46. Remove the clutch and reinstall Direct-drive shaft
(32), turning the undercut part (designed to receive
spring R towards the rear axle (Fig. 5).
47. Proceed to final refitting of the clutch assembly (see
B).
Issue 1
May 2001

D . Disassembling and reassembling
the clutch
4A01.11
Disassembly
48. Remove the clutch (see B) and place in the vertical
position, that is, cover (39) resting on a suitable
fixture.
49. Remove front circlip (58). Remove bush (3), rings (2)
and seal (1).
50. Remove circlip (56). Remove pump cover (11) and
bearing (55).
51. Extract lubrication pump (53) from pump body (12).
Separate the pump body from clutch housing (23).
52. Remove seal rings (52).
53. If necessary, extract bush (51) and disassemble 1.5bar valve (68).
54. Separate clutch housing (23) from cover (39). Remove discs (44) and intermediate plates (45).
55. Remove drive hub (37).
56. If necessary, extract bearing (36).
57. Using a suitable fixture (see F) , compress Belleville
washers (42). Remove rear circlip (58) (Fig. 8).
Remove locking ring (4). Untension the Belleville
washers.
58. Separate clutch housing (23) from shaft (7). Remove
the Belleville washers.
59. Remove piston (46). If necessary, extract bearing
(50).
60. If necessary, remove circlip (43) and bearing (40).
Reassembly
61. Ensure presence of pin (24).
62. If it was removed, refit bearing (50), using a suitable
fixture.
63. Install seals (48) (49).
64. Install piston (46).
Note: The angular position of the piston depends on that of the lubrication ports of clutch
housing (23). Align the indexing holes drilled in
the unit and piston (Fig. 9). Proceed by inserting
a suitable diameter pin.
Finish refitting the piston by progressively tapping around the edge, using a plastic hammer.
Ensure no seal fragment remains after assembly.
65. If it was removed, refit bearing (40), using a suitable
fixture, the sealed face pointing towards the Dynashift.
Fit circlip (43).
23
58
42
Fig. 8
23
46
Fig. 9
Remark
On type 8210 -8220 -8240 and -8250 tractors fitted with
the Heavy Duty gearbox, the hydraulic engine clutch
comprises six Belleville washers.
66. Fit Belleville washers (42) on shaft (7) (Fig. 8).
Issue 1
May 2001
4A01.12
67. Slide clutch housing (23) onto clutch shaft (7).

68. Compress the Belleville washers using the tool used
at operation 57. Locate bush (4) by aligning the two
flats with those on clutch housing (23). Replace rear
circlip (58) and properly position in bottom of groove.
69. If it was removed, fit bearing (36) using a suitable
fixture; ensure the sealed face is facing the Dynashift.
70. Install the hub and the bearing inside cover (39).
71. Soak the discs in a bath of transmission fluid for
approximately one hour. Check they are totally
impregnated. Depending on the type, the number of
discs and intermediate plates is different (see General), as well as the length of the splines on drive hub
(37) and the thickness of cover (39).
72. Position intermediate plates (45) and discs (44) on
drive hub (37), by aligning the respective recesses.
73. Place clutch housing (23) assembly on cover (39).
Torque screws (22) to 25.5 - 34.5 Nm.
74. Check by hand that drive hub (37) is free to rotate.
75. Check that seal rings (52) turn correctly in their
grooves. Coat the seal rings with miscible grease
then install, ensuring that they do not project beyond
the contour of the unit.
76. If it was removed, torque-tighten the 1.5-bar valve to
47 - 54 Nm. Next coat the outside diameter of bush
(51) with Loctite 270 then fit the bush using a
suitable fixture. Ensure chamfer C is oriented as
shown in Fig. 10.
77. After fitting the bush, check that the oil pressure
ports are not blocked with Loctite. Clean and lubricate the bush. Assemble pump body (12) to clutch
housing (23).
78. Lubricate pump (53) and set it by orienting the flats
with those of clutch housing (23). Manually check
the angular travel of the rotor against the flats on
clutch housing (23).
79. Refit pump cover (11). Fit bearing (55). Fit circlip (56).
Torque screws (54) to 36 -46 Nm.
80. Fit Oring (1) and rings (2). Repeat operation 7.
Reinstall the clutch (see B).
Issue 2
1
May 2002
2001
51
Fig. 10

E . Removing and refitting control
valve (Fig. 11)
4A01.13
Removal
82. Remove any neighbouring parts likely to hinder
removal of the valve. Disconnect tubes (1) and (2),
hose (3), and the connectors to solenoid valves EV1
and EV2 (mark connector positions).
83. Remove the valve.
Refitting
84. Clean the mating surfaces. Coat the one on the
gearbox housing with sealing compound.
85. Replace the Orings on the 17-bar transfer tubes.
Reinstall the valve. Coat screws (5) with sealing
compound, install, and torque to 25-35 Nm.
86. Reconnect the tubes, the hose and the connectors.
87. Service the oil in the sumps and check the level on
the sightglass located on the left-hand side of the
centre housing.
88. Bleed the clutch control valve (see section 9I01).
89. Check the valve regulating pressure (see section
9N01 - Hydraulic Tests).
90. Reinstall any items previously removed from around
the valve.
91. Check the sealing of the mating face and the couplings, and operation of the Dynashift.
EV1
EV2
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
F . Service tools
1 . Tool available in the AGCO network
- 3378012M2 - Protector (Fig. 12)
Issue 1
May 2001
4A01.14
2 . Locally manufactured tools

- Compression tool for Belleville washers (Fig. 13)
(1) Channel section: 60
(2) Threaded rod: . = 8
(3) Round iron to be machined depending on the following
dimensions:
= 36
L = 60
A -A
180
A
60
248
286
Fig. 13
- Sleeve for removal & refitting of clutch assembly (Fig. 14)

(1) Tube: Tu52B - O.D. 42.4 Th.= 5
(2) Tube: Tu52B - O.D. 48.3 Th.= 2.9
86
1
23
80
86
2
100
165
Fig. 14
Issue
Issue21
May
May2002
2001
5 . GEARBOX
Contents
5 A01
GENERAL - OPERATION GEARBOX WITH MECHANICAL REVERSE SHUTTLE
5 A02
5 B01
GENERAL - OPERATION GEARBOX WITH POWER SHUTTLE

INPUT UNIT WITH MECHANICAL REVERSE SHUTTLE
5 B02
5 B03
5 B04
5 B05
INPUT UNIT WITH POWER SHUTTLE

DYNASHIFT WITH MECHANICAL REVERSE SHUTTLE
DYNASHIFT WITH POWER SHUTTLE
MECHANICAL REVERSE SHUTTLE
5 B06
5 C01
5 C02
POWER SHUTTLE
SELECTOR COVER - GEARBOX WITH MECHANICAL REVERSE SHUTTLE
SELECTOR COVER - GEARBOX WITH POWER SHUTTLE
5 C03
SELECTOR COVER OPTIMISED HARE/TORTOISE FUNCTION - GEARBOX WITH

POWER SHUTTLE
SELECTOR RAILS - GEARBOX WITH MECHANICAL REVERSE SHUTTLE
SELECTOR RAILS - GEARBOX WITH POWER SHUTTLE
OUTPUT SHAFT
MAINSHAFT - GEARBOX WITH MECHANICAL REVERSE SHUTTLE
MAINSHAFT - GEARBOX WITH POWER SHUTTLE
LAYSHAFT
FULL POWERSHIFT GEARBOX - GENERAL
FULL POWERSHIFT GEARBOX - TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
FULL POWERSHIFT GEARBOX - TRANSMISSION/REPAIR
CREEPER UNIT
5 D01
5 D02
5 E01
5 F01
5 F02
5 G01
5 H01
5 I01
5 J01
5 K01
Issue 2
May 2002
Gearbox - General
5A01.1
5 A01 General - Operation
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Operation ______________________________________________
C.
Specifications __________________________________________
11
Issue 1
May 2001

5A01.2
Issue 1
Gearbox - General
May 2001
Gearbox - General
A . General
Various types of transmissions are available:
- Type 8210 -8220 -8240 tractors: Heavy Duty gearbox or
Full Powershift AG 150
- Type 8250 tractors: Heavy Duty gearbox
- Type 8250 to 8280 tractors: Full Powershift gearbox
AG250.
This section covers only the Heavy Duty version. For the
Full Powershift version, refer to section 5H01.
The Heavy Duty gearbox comprises 32 forward speeds
and 32 reverse. The transfer shafts and output shafts are
supported by tapered roller bearings and are drilled as
necessary to pressure-lubricate the bearings, the idler
gears and the Hare/Tortoise synchronisation system.
The layshaft is supported at the front by a cylindrical roller
bearing and at the rear, by two tapered roller bearings.
The main gearbox comprises four synchronised gears.
An idler gear on the output shaft positively connected via
a double cone synchromesh doubles the four synchronised gears, to give the eight basic speeds.
All pinions are helically cut and in constant engagement.
The drive shaft of the direct-drive clutch traverses the
layshaft.
The input unit assembly located at the front (see section
5B01) provides four input ratios into the main box.
Description
The gearbox drive is provided by input gear (1) integral
with transfer shaft (7). The two hubs of synchromesh
gears (16) and (27), as well as gear (1) are hard-mounted
to transfer shaft (7) by splines. First gear (19) and fourth
gear (24) are idler gears on shaft (7). Second gear (13) is
an idler gear on bush (8), which is hard-mounted to shaft
(7) by splines. Third gear 3rd (35) is installed on tapered
roller bearings.
All the pinions on layshaft (51) are splined to and rotate
with the latter. The gear teeth on shaft (51) mesh with
tortoise gear (40) which idles on the output shaft.
5A01.3
Low range (Tortoise)

A synchronised gear is engaged by moving of one of the
slides of synchromesh gears (16) or (27) for engage
transfer shaft (7) in one of the four idling pinions. Irrespective of the speed selected, the movement is transmitted
to layshaft (51). Output shaft (47) is driven by the gear
teeth machined on the layshaft intermeshing with tortoise gear (40), engaged to output shaft (47), by moving
the slide of synchromesh gear (69) rearwards.
High range (Hare)

This range is selected by forward movement of the slide
of synchromesh gear (69), which establishes a direct
drive between third gear (35) and output shaft (47).
Consequently in 3rd gear, layshaft (51) is passive. The
other gears are obtained by moving the slides of synchros
(16) or (27) as for the Low range.
Lubrication
The lube oil is supplied from tube (4) connected to the
input unit. It circulates in a series of axial channels, one
of which crosses the transfer shaft while the other is
blind, machined in the output shaft. Radial channels feed
the various pinions, the bearings and the Hare/Tortoise
synchromesh.
Needle roller bearings (67) are lubricated by an oil film
circulating between the direct-drive shaft and the layshaft.
The shaft-end bearings on shaft (51) are lubricated by an
additional oil flow from the drive bearing of the hydraulic
pumps located on the rear-axle intermediate housing, via
radial ports drilled respectively in shim (53) and the shaft.
Issue 1
May 2001

5A01.4
Gearbox - General
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
(69)
Input gear
Belleville washers
Special screw
Lube tube
Snap ring
Spring
Transfer shaft
Bush
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Thick shim
Driving pinion (2nd)
Synchromesh cone (2nd)
Synchro ring (2nd)
Synchro (1st - 2nd)
Synchro ring (1st
Synchromesh cone (1st )
Driving pinion (1st )
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Driving pinion (4th)
Synchromesh cone (4th)
Synchromesh ring (4th)
Synchro (3rd - 4th)
Seal ring
Snap ring
Synchromesh ring (3rd)
Special washer
Synchromesh cone (3rd)
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Driving pinion (3rd) (Hare)
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Shim(s)
Thick shim
Tortoise gear
Centring pin
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Rear bearing
Output shaft
Screw
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Layshaft
Nut
Shim
Bearing cone
Issue 1
Bearing cup
Circlip
Driven pinion (3rd)
Spacer
Driven pinion (4th)
Spacer
Driven pinion (1st)
Spacer
Shim(s)
Driven pinion (2nd)
Washer
Snap ring
Needle roller bearings
Gearbox housing
H/T synchromesh (double cone)
Legend:
G : Groove
Fig. 1
May 2001
Overall view
Gearbox - General
64
5A01.5
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
69
51
54
55
53
49
68
50
65
1
2
3
66
52
67
41
48
46
45
44
47
43
36
E
6
7
37
8
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
25
26
27
27
28
30
29
32
35
40
75
74
72
34
24
12
22
38
10
35
Issue 1
70
39
11
May 2001
71
23
C
31
33
73
Fig. 1
Parts list

5A01.6
Issue 1
Gearbox - General
May 2001
Gearbox - General
5A01.7
B . Operation
Notes
- On Heavy Duty gearboxes, the synchromesh gears for

1st and 2nd (16) and 3rd and 4th (27)) are single-cone.
- The Hare/Tortoise range has another synchromesh
version (69) employing double cones.
Synchromesh gears (16) (27) (single cone)

(Fig. 2)
Locking position
Axial displacement of slide A presses synchronisation
brake B against friction cone C through the action of balls
D and pressure system E. The speed difference existing
between the parts being coupled causes a radial rotation
limited by pressure system E resulting in turn in a
pressure causing the chamfered teeth of synchronisation brake B to move against slide A, opposing all relative
movement of the latter. The pressure exerted by slide A
and the angular difference of synchronisation brake B
create an axial pressure between the friction cones of
synchronisation brake B, and cone C, due to the chamfers of the gear teeth; this axial pressure establishes
synchronism by progressive reduction of the speed
difference of the parts to connect.
Once synchronism is established, the persistent pressure exerted by slide A against synchronisation brake B
returns the latter backwards until the teeth of slide A are
opposite the recess in synchronisation brake B. At this
moment, the resistance applied till this point preventing
movement of slide A during gear-changing is overcome
and slide A can thus mesh without noise in the gear teeth
of cone C on the gear to be brought into drive. The rigid
connection between the shaft and the gear is now
established, and the gears change. If during gear-changing both gears end up tooth-on-tooth, the chamfers
machined on the tooth flanks displace the arriving gear
until each tooth is opposite a recess.
F
C
D
B
E
16
27
E
D
F
B
C
Fig. 2
Neutral position
Slide A is in the central position. The balls are pushed
back into the groove at V on slide A by pressure springs
F. The pinions are free to turn on the shaft. In this neutral
position, slide A is locked by three balls G maintained by
springs H.
Issue 1
May 2001

5A01.8
Gearbox - General
Overhaul
In the event of removal of the synchromesh gears, check
the wear of synchronisation brakes B (Fig. 2).
Place Cone C on a flat surface and position brake B in
abutment by rotating it a few turns under finger pressure
(Fig. 3).
Measure dimension X at several points using a set of
feeler gauges (Fig. 2 and 3): if a value of less than 0.8 mm
is found, check the cone and install a new brake B.
Value of dimension X with brake and new synchromesh cone
- synchro (1st - 2nd) (16): 0.9 to 1.5 mm
- synchro (3rd - 4th) (27): 0.9 to 1.5 mm
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox - General
5A01.9
Synchromesh gears (69) (double cone) (Fig.

4)
Locking position
Axial displacement of slide A provides a thrust against
ring K, which in turn bears on synchronisation brake B,
pushing it towards Cone J through the action of balls D,
spring F and pressure system E.
When the corresponding pinions are at the required
speed, the slide meshes with the coupling flange C of the
candidate gear.
Remark
Locking of the synchromesh in position (and the neutral
position) employ the same principle as for single-cone
synchromesh gears.
Advantages of the double cone synchromesh
- better reliability
- increased stress strength
69
E
D
F
A
K
B
J
C
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

5A01.10
Gearbox - General
Overhaul (double cone)

- If needing to disassemble synchromesh (69), check
the wear on synchronisation brakes B.
- Proceed by stacking coupling flange C, cone J, synchronisation brake B and ring K.
- Position brake B correctly by alternately rotating it
through a few turns and applying finger pressure.
- Using a set of feeler gauges, measure dimension X
(Fig. 5) at three equidistant points. Take the average of
the three readings.
Remark
Value of dimension X (Fig. 5)
- on a new synchromesh gear, dimension X must be
1.6 mm minimum;
- after operation, if this dimension is less than or equal to
0.60 - 0.80 mm, replace the synchronisation brake B.
- Repeat the measurement of X using the same process.
- If dimension X remains incorrect, also replace ring K
and cone J or the complete synchromesh if required.
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
C . Specifications
Gearbox - General
5A01.11
J1 = 0,02 / 0,31
25 - 35 Nm
31 - 35 Nm
29 - 37 Nm
13 - 15 Nm
25 - 32 Nm
A
J = 0,60 / 0,80
241
241
8,60 / 8,68
72 - 96 Nm
31 - 35 Nm
100 - 150 Nm
270
603
638
510
P2 = 0,01 / 0,05
5206
5206
F =1,25 / 1,75
40 - 56 Nm
25 - 35 Nm
25,5 - 34,5 Nm
241
320 - 360 Nm
J = 0,05 / 0,18
270
P1 =0,10 / 0,20 maxi
P =0,10 / 0,20
57- 67 Nm
270
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox with Power shuttle - General
5A02.1
5 A02 General - Operation
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Operation ______________________________________________
C.
Specifications __________________________________________
D.
Tightening torques ______________________________________
11
Issue 1
May 2001

5A02.2

Description
A . General
Various types of transmissions are available:
- Type 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors: gearbox
with Power shuttle
- Type 8210 - 8220 and 8240 tractors: Full Powershift
AG150 gearbox
- Type 8250 to 8280: Full Powershift AG250 gearbox.
This section only covers the version with Power shuttle.
For the Heavy Duty version with mechanical reverse
shuttle or the Full Powershift versions, refer to section
5B05 or 5H01 respectively.
The Heavy Duty gearbox with Power shuttle comprises
32 forward speeds and 32 reverse. The transfer shafts
and output shafts are supported by tapered roller bearings and are drilled as necessary to pressure-lubricate
the bearings, the idler gears and the Hare/Tortoise synchronisation system.The layshaft is supported at cylindical
roller bearing and at the rear, by twotapered roller bearings.
On gearboxes with a Power shuttle, 1st and 2nd gear
synchromesh gears (16) and 3rd and 4th gear synchromesh gears (27) are double cone type as well as the
Hare/Tortoise range one.
When the Hare/Tortoise synchromesh gear (69) is moved
to the rear, it makes the Tortoise pinion rotate and
doubles the four speeds to give the eight basic speeds.
All pinions have rectified teeth and are helically cut. They
are in constant engagement. The drive shaft of the directdrive clutch traverses the layshaft.
The input unit assembly located at the front (see section
5B02) provides four input ratios into the main box.
Issue 1
May 2001
The gearbox drive is provided by input gear (1) integral

with transfer shaft (7). The two hubs of synchromesh
gears (16) and (27), as well as gear (1) are hard-mounted
to transfer shaft (7) by splines. First gear (19) and fourth
gear (24) are idler gears on shaft (7). Second gear (13) is
an idler gear on bush (8), which is hard-mounted to shaft
(7) by splines. Third gear 3rd (35) is installed on tapered
roller bearings.
All the pinions on layshaft (51) are splined to and rotate
with the latter. The gear teeth on shaft (51) mesh with
tortoise gear (40) which idles on the output shaft.
Low range (Tortoise)

A synchronised gear is engaged by moving of one of the
slides of synchromesh gears (16) or (27) for engage
transfer shaft (7) in one of the four idling pinions. Irrespective of the speed selected, the movement is transmitted
to layshaft (51). Output shaft (47) is driven by the gear
teeth machined on the layshaft intermeshing with tortoise gear (40), engaged to output shaft (47), by moving
the slide of synchromesh gear (69) rearwards.
High range (Hare)

This range is selected by forward movement of the slide
of synchromesh gear (69), which establishes a direct
drive between third gear (35) and output shaft (47).
Consequently in 3rd gear, layshaft (51) is passive. The
other gears are obtained by moving the slides of synchros
(16) or (27) as for the Low range.
5A02.3
Lubrication
The lube oil is supplied from tube (4) connected to the
input unit (Fig.1).
It circulates in a series of axial channels, one of which
crosses the transfer shaft while the other is blind,
machined in the output shaft. Radial channels feed the
various pinions, the bearings and the Hare/Tortoise
synchromesh.
Needle roller bearings (67) are lubricated by an oil film
circulating between the direct-drive shaft and the layshaft.
An oil deflector "C" maintains the oil near the bearing
mounted at the back of the input unit.
The shaft-end bearings on shaft (51) are lubricated by an
additional oil flow from the drive bearing of the hydraulic
pumps located on the rear-axle intermediate housing, via
radial ports drilled respectively in shim (53) and the shaft.
Issue 1
May 2001

5A02.4
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(27)
(28)
(30)
(31)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(40)
(41)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
(69)
(71)
(72)
(75)
Input gear
Washer
Nut
Lube tube
Snap ring
Spring
Transfer shaft
Bush
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Thick shim
Driving pinion (2nd)
Synchromesh cone (2nd)
Synchro ring (2nd)
1st - 2nd synchro (double cone)
Driving pinion (1st )
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Driving pinion (4th)
3rd - 4th synchro (double cone)
Seal ring
Synchromesh ring (3rd)
Special washer
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Driving pinion (3rd) (Hare)
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Tortoise gear
Locating pin
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Rear bearing
Output shaft
Screw
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Layshaft
Nut
Shim
Bearing cone
Issue 1
Bearing cup
Circlip
Driven pinion (3rd)
Spacer
Driven pinion (4th)
Spacer
Driven pinion (1st)
Spacer
Shim(s)
Driven pinion (2nd)
Washer
Snap ring
Needle roller bearings
Gearbox housing
Hare / Tortoise synchromesh (double cone)
Progressive sensor
Nut
Cover
Legend
G : Groove
May 2001

Overall view

68
64
63
62
71
5A02.5
72
61
60
59
58
57
56
69
51
54
55
53
65
49
66
50
3
67
52
41
C
48
D
45
2
47
5
43
R
41
44
F
F
46
36
13
16
19
20
21
24
24
27
28
29
34
27
35
40
75
48
37
46
16
27
69
12
45
44
47
43
B
10
Issue 1
D
11
22
May 2001
23
A
31
33
35
Parts list
Fig. 1

5A02.6
Issue 1
May 2001
5A02.7
B . Operation
Notes
- On gearboxes with Power shuttle, all gears are synchronised including the Hare/Tortoise function. The
synchromesh gears are all double cone items.
Hare/Tortoise synchromesh gears (69) (double cone) (Fig. 2)

Locking position
Axial displacement of slide A provides a thrust against
ring K, which in turn bears on synchronisation brake B,
pushing it towards Cone J through the action of balls D,
springs F and pressure system E.
When the corresponding pinions are at the required
speed, the slide meshes with the coupling flange C of the
candidate gear.
The operating principle is identical for 1st - 2nd (16)
synchromesh gears and 3rd - 4th synchromesh gears
(27).
69
Advantages of the double cone synchromesh

- better reliability
- increased stress strength
E
D
F
A
K
B
J
C
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

5A02.8
Overhaul (double cone)

- If needing to disassemble synchromesh gears (16) (27)
and (69), check the wear on synchronisation brakes B.
- Proceed by stacking coupling flange C, cone J, synchronisation brake B and ring K.
- Position brake B correctly by alternately rotating it
through a few turns and applying finger pressure.
- Using a set of feeler gauges, measure dimension X
(Fig. 3) at three equidistant points. Take the average of
the three readings.
Remark
Value of dimension X (Fig. 3)
- on a new synchromesh gear, dimension X must be
1.6 mm minimum;
- after operation, if this dimension is less than or equal to
0.60 - 0.80 mm, replace the synchronisation brake B.
- Repeat the measurement of X using the same process.
- If dimension X remains incorrect, also replace ring K
and cone J or the complete synchromesh if required.
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
D : Semi set-right adjustment

G : Groove oriented towards the Hare / Tortoise synchromesh gear
O : Port for synchromesh lubrication (Tortoise side)
C . Spcifications
Gearbox with Power shuttle - Generall
A and B : Dtails
C : to turn adjustment
5A02.9
P= 0/0,10mm
C
J1= 0,02/0,31mm
X= 8,60/8,68mm
VALMET
PERKINS
P2= 0,01/0,05mm
J= 0,60/0,80mm
P1 = 0,10/0,20mm maxi
B
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2002

5A02.10
Issue 1
May 2002
D . Tightening torques

M6 12 - 16Nm
M8 20 - 28Nm
36 - 46 Nm
47 - 57Nm
242
5A02.11
A : Tighten at 30 - 70 Nm progressively. Rotate the shaft a few turns. Then, complete tighten at 100 - 150 Nm, with Loctite 270
plus mechanical lock.
B : Selector rail support.
31 - 35Nm
13 - 15Nm
12 - 16Nm
242
242
242
5 - 7Nm
577
29 - 37Nm
36 - 46Nm
242
221
grade 10,9 - 140Nm

grade 12,9 - 160Nm
5206
B
36 - 46Nm
A
57- 67Nm
102 - 138Nm
110 - 140Nm
270
270
25,5 - 34,5Nm
47 - 68Nm
12,5 - 13Nm
510
13 bar
F
36 - 46Nm
549
5206
648
47 - 68Nm
85 - 120Nm
130 - 170Nm
270
40- 48Nm
47 - 54Nm
29 - 37Nm
29 - 37Nm
10- 14Nm
1,5 bar
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002
Gearbox Input unit with mechanical reverse shuttle
5B01.1
5 B01 Input unit with mechanical reverse shuttle
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the unit __________________________
B.
Service tools ___________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001
5B01.2
General
1
The input unit transmits the movement from the engine

to the transmission via the clutch (Pressure loaded). It is
in the form of an interchangeable module installed on the
gearbox inlet. It comprises two quite distinct parts: the
Dynashift and the reverse shuttle.
The Dynashift is fixed to the front of the input unit. For
details of operation, see section 5B03.
The reverse shuttle is located in the rear cavity of the
input unit. For details of operation, see section 5B05.
Fig. 1
A . Removing and refitting the unit

Remark
Type 8210 -8220 -8240 and 8250 tractors may be fitted
with a Heavy Duty gearbox comprising an input unit with
a Dynashift and a reverse shuttle.
Removal
3376883M1

section 2B01).
3. Remove the selector cover (see section 5C01).
4. Remove selector (1) (Fig. 1).
5. Remove the clutch assembly (see section 4A01).
6. Remove the direct drive shaft.
7. Remove the clutch control valve without disconnecting the hose coming from the master-cylinder (see
section 9J01) as well as the transfer tubes connected
to the unit (lubrication and 17-bar pressure).
8. Install adapter plate, P/N 3378013M1 on cover (13),
using four screws A of the correct length, then fix sling,
P/N 3376883M1, on the plate as shown in Fig. 2.
3378004M1
13
3378013M1
21
B
DANGER
- It is essential to use screws A of suitable length in order
to positively secure the sling and unit assembly.
B
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

9. Remove the screws fixing the unit to the gearbox.
10. Unstick and pull the input unit towards the front.
Assisted by an operator, open the selector cover and
check that the selector rails come free of their front
support. Tilt the unit fully downwards (Fig. 4) to allow
the support to pass through the bore in the gearbox.
11. Retrieve locating pin (1) (Fig. 3).
12. Place the unit on a work bench in the vertical
position.
Special points (Fig. 2)
A : Attachment of adapter plate on front cover
B : Avoid removing screws
5B01.3
Refitting
Special point
- To facilitate engagement of input unit end bearing (1)
into the gearbox layshaft (Fig. 4), coat the bearing rollers
with miscible grease to stick them in place.
13. Insert locating pin (1) (Fig. 3).
14. Screw two guide studs (L = 80 mm) in opposing
locations on the gearbox housing (optional). Using
sling, P/N 3376883M1 and adapter plate, P/N
3378013M1, engage the input unit in the clutch
housing. Tilt it fully downwards to allow the selector
rail support to pass through the front bore of the
gearbox.
Fig. 3
3376883M1
1 - Pull
2 - Tilt
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

5B01.4
15. Assisted by an operator, check through the opening

in the selector cover that the selector rails correctly
engage in the front support. Use sleeve, P/N
3378004M11 (Fig. 2) to turn shaft (7) in order to
facilitate meshing of the pinions.
16. Position the unit on the locating pin. Remove the
guide studs (if installed). Torque the screws securing
the unit to the gearbox housing, to a value of 39 54 Nm. Remove the sling then proceed to assembly
of the Dynashift front cover: coat the four original
screws (temporarily replaced by screws "A", Fig. 2)
with Loctite 241, then install and torque to 29 37 Nm. Reinstall the clutch control valve and the
transfer tubes (lubrication and 17-bar) (see section
9J01).
17. Refit the direct-drive shaft. Refit the clutch (see
section 4A01).
18. Refit reverse-gear selector (1). Coat the screws with
Loctite 221 and torque to 35 Nm (Fig. 1).
19. Refit the selector cover (see 5C01).
21. Service the oil in the sumps and check the level in the
22. Bleed the clutch control if necessary (see section
9I01).
23. Proceed to road-test of all Dynashift controls and
gear ranges A, B, C and D.
24. Check for leaktightness at couplings and mating
face of selector cover.
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
B . Service tools
1 . Tools available in the AGCO network
- 3376883M1 - Sling for front unit (Fig. 5)
- 3378013M1 - Adapter plate (Fig. 6)
- 3378004M1 - Sleeve (Fig. 7)
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
5B01.5
2 . Locally manufactured tooling

- Handling bar (Fig. 8))
2500
5x7
75
75
75
180
32
80
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox with power

shuttle - Input unit
5B02.1
5 B02 Input unit with power shuttle
CONTENTS
.
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Removal ________________________________________________
C.
Refitting ________________________________________________
D.
Adjusting of the progressive sensor ______________________
E.
F.
Service tools ___________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2002

5B02.2
Gearbox with power

General
The power unit with power shuttle is in the form of an
interchangeable module on which a reverse shuttle is
assembled that can power the forward or reverse gear.
It is mounted at the input of the gearbox and is fitted on
tractors 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250.
It is made of two distinct parts: the power shuttle (see
section 5B06) and the Dynashift.
Dynashift
The Dynashift electro-hydraulically controls four
powershift ratios using a lever mounted to the left under
the steering wheel.
It is located between the power shuttle and the driving
gear mounted in the rear housing.
The Dynashift function is performed by two epicyclic
gear trains associated with two hydraulic clutches. For
information on operation, see section 5B04.
Issue 1
May 2002
Gearbox with power

5B02.3
A. Preliminary operations
Special points
- A removable flange (2) supports the front end of the
selector rails (Fig. 1).
- This assembly enables easy horizontal removal of the
input unit (Fig. 2).
1. Uncouple the tractor between the engine and the

3. Remove the selector cover (see section 5C02 or 5C03
according to version) and through the opening, over
the gearbox, remove the screw (1) attaching the
flange (2) (Fig. 1).
2
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002

5B02.4
Gearbox with power

4. Move the flange away from the housing by making it

slide along the selector rails.
Note
- The flange (2) is positioned on the rear housing of the
input unit by means of two cotter pins (3) (Fig. 3).
5. Remove the clutch cover plate (see section 3C02).
6. Remove the power shuttle control unit (see section
9K01). Remove and mark the position of the hydraulic
pipes connected to the following functions:
- gearbox lubrication
- Dynashift low pressure
- power shuttle rear clutch low pressure
3
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2002
Gearbox with power

5B02.5
B . Removal
7. Remove the power shuttle front clutch (see section

5B06).
8. Take out the PTO shaft (1) from the gearbox (Fig. 2)
and mark its position.
9. Disconnect and remove the progressive sensor (2)
located above the gearbox (Fig. 2 and 4).
10. Sling the input unit using tool ref. 3378225M11, a
locally made handling bar (see F) and a lifting
device adapted as per Fig. 2.
Note
- Before using the sling, remove the four screws (64)
(L = 145 mm) unless removed beforehand they will
not be accessible to the "U" profile of the tool.
11. Remove the remaining screws (64A) (L = 145 mm)
securing the input unit to the gearbox (Fig. 5).
Reminder
Do not intervene on the short screws (70) (L =
25 mm) so as to avoid splitting the unit (Fig. 5).
12. With the help of an assistant, carefully pull the unit
forward and disengage it from the gearbox to proceed with removal.
13. Remove the handling bar and tool.
14. Place the unit in vertical position on a workbench.
15. Separate the rear clutch from the input unit (see
section 5B06).
Fig. 4
64
64A
70
64
64
64
64A
64A
70
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002

5B02.6
Gearbox with power

C . Refitting
16. Install the previously removed rear clutch on the
input unit (see section 5B06).
17. If necessary, screw a guide stud (L = 55 mm) on the
gearbox housing, through the opening revealed by
the removal of the power shuttle control unit.
18. Place the locating pin (1). Check presence of the
flange (2), lubrication tube (4) (Fig. 6) and the locating
pins (3) (Fig. 3).
19. With the help of an assistant and using the tools used
during removal, position the input unit in the gearbox
housing taking the same safety precautions as
previously.
20. Push and position the input unit on the housing
mating face. Remove the guide stud (if used).
21. Remove the sling. Tighten the screws (64) (64A)
(Fig. 5) of the input unit to a torque of 47 - 57 Nm.
Note
- the thread of each screw should be cleaned and
lightly coated with Loctite 542 or equivalent. If new
screws are used, they should not be coated with
Loctite or equivalent since they are coated with a
locking product in the factory.
22. Reinstall and adjust the progressive sensor (see D).
23. Adjust the turned section of the PTO shaft to the rear
and insert the shaft into the upper shaftline of the
gearbox.
24. Refit the front clutch (see section 5B06).
D . Adjusting of the progressive sensor

25. Lightly coat the sensor with Loctite 577 (Sensor
Sealing or equivalent). Install and adjust the sensor.
26. Fully screw home the sensor (2) (Fig. 7) without
forcing. Make sure that its end is in contact with the
driving pinion mounted in the rear housing (see
section 5B06).
27. Unscrew the sensor by approximately a half or threequarter turn, then torque the nut to a value of 5 to 7
Nm.
Note: For details on operation, see section 11 Electronics
Issue 1
May 2002
4
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Gearbox with power

5B02.7
E . Final operations
F . Service tools
28. Refit the power shuttle control unit (see section

9K01) and the hydraulic pipes according to the
positions previously marked.
29. Fit the clutch cover plate (see section 3C02).
30. Check presence of the locating pins (3) and apply the
flange (2) to the rear part of the housing (Fig. 3). Clean
screw thread (1) and apply a light coating of Loctite
221 or equivalent (Fig. 1) and torque to 36 - 46 Nm.
31. Refit the selector cover (see section 5C02 or 5C03
according to version).
32. Top up housings with oil and check the level on the
sight-glass on left at rear of central housing.
33. Couple the tractor between the engine and the
34. Carry out a road test with the power shuttle, testing
gears A, B, C, D of the Dynashift
35. Check the oil tightness of the selector cover mating
face and of hydraulic unions.
1. Tool available in AGCO network

- 3378225 M11 - Sling for power shuttle housing
(Fig. 8)
2. Locally made tool

- Handling bar (Fig. 9)
Fig. 8
2500
5x7
75
75
75
180
32
80
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2002
Gearbox - Dynashift
5B03.1
5 B03 Dynashift
CONTENTS
-
General _____________________________________________
Theory of Operation __________________________________
A.
Preliminary operations _______________________________
B.
Removing and disassembling the cover, housing,

front clutch and brake ________________________________
Removing and separating the planet

pinion cage assembly ________________________________
10
D.
Disassembling the rear clutch and brake _______________
10
E.
Assembling the planet pinion cages ___________________
11
F.
Reassembling the rear clutch and brake _______________
11
G.
Reassembling the cover, front clutch,

brake and housing ___________________________________
12
H.
Shimming the planet pinion cage _____________________
14
I.
Assembling the input unit ____________________________
15
J.
Final operations _____________________________________
16
K.
Service tools ________________________________________
16
C.
Issue 1
May 2001

5B03.2
Gearbox - Dynashift
General
The Dynashift is fixed on the front of the input unit. It is
an hydraulically controlled gear shifting device that provides four gearbox input ratios. This function is provided
by two epicyclic gear trains associated with two hydraulic clutches.
The design of the Dynashift allows selecting the four
ratios while moving, without needing to disengage the
clutch, using a lever located under the steering wheel.
The Dynashift unit is controlled by two solenoid valves
installed on the low-pressure hydraulic line (17 bar). Both
solenoid valves are monitored by the tractors electronic
system.
Theory of Operation
When not actuated, piston (22) is drawn backwards by

twelve springs (20) and cup washer (4) via thrust plate
(16).
When it is actuated under pressure from the 17-bar
circuit, piston (22) moves forwards, blocking brake discs
(15) and pushing plate (16), which compresses cup
washer (4).
The speed of the secondary ring gear stabilises as
follows:
- speed equal to the engine speed when the front piston
is not actuated,
- speed null when the front piston is actuated.
Secondary sun gear (61) is either:
- locked on the secondary shaft by means of four clutch
discs (50) and two cup washers (52) located on the rear
part of the unit, or
- immobilised in relation to the unit by means of three
brake discs (41) and piston (37).
The Dynashift input unit includes two epicyclic trains:

- the primary epicyclic train, the main part of the input
unit, used to transfer movement from the engine to the
gearbox
- the secondary epicyclic train, for controlling the speed
of the primary sun gear.
When not actuated, piston (37) is pushed forwards by the

cup washers and six springs (65).
Under the effect of the 17-bar pressure, piston (37)
moves towards the rear and blocks brake discs (41). It
compresses cup washers (52) through the action of
thrust plate (45), which frees the clutch discs on the
secondary shaft.
Primary epicyclic train
By immobilising secondary ring gear (34) or secondary

sun gear (61), the speed of secondary planet-pinion cage
(39) is modified. The secondary planet-pinion cage drives
primary sun gear (64), which establishes the reduction
ratio of the box.
The movement comes in via primary ring gear (31) which

is splined onto transmission shaft (7). This turns at the
same speed as the engine.
The movement exits via planet pinion cage (28) which is
splined onto secondary shaft (53). Primary sun gear (64)
is driven by the secondary epicyclic train. The speed of
this sun gear determines the reduction ratio of the box.
Secondary epicyclic train

This epicyclic train is controlled by hydraulic clutches
and brakes.
Secondary ring gear (34) is:
- either locked to transmission shaft (7) by three clutch
discs (3) and cup washer (4) located in the front part of
the unit,
- or locked in relation to the unit by three brake discs (15)
and piston (22).
Issue 1
May 2001
Parts list (Fig. 1)

Secondary ring gear carrier
Intermediate plates
Clutch discs
Cup washer
Splined hub
Transmission shaft
Friction washer
Front cover
Clutch housing
Front brake discs
Thrust plate (clutch - brake)
Clutch plate
Screw
Springs
Spacer housing
Piston
Rivet
Oring
Screw
Oring
Ball bearing
Primary planet pinion cage
Rivet
Screw
Primary ring gear
Oring
Screw
Secondary ring gear
Oring
Oring
Rear piston
Clutch plate
Secondary planet pinion cage
Reverse shuttle unit
Rear brake discs
Housing
Screw
Clutch plate
Thrust plate (clutch-brake)
Screw
Cover
Intermediate plates
Retaining ring
Rear clutch discs

Friction washer
Cup washers
Secondary shaft
Splined hub
Circlip
Spacer
Ball bearing
Ball bearing
Rear clutch housing
Retaining ring
Secondary sun gear
Retaining ring
Needles
Primary sun gear
Springs
Screw
Oring
Circlip
Stop
Shim(s)
Retaining ring
Oring
Plug
Oil splasher
Stud washer
Spring washer
Washer
Circlip
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Overall view
18
20
21
23
25
24
27
26
28
29
30
32
31
33
35
36
34
37
38
, ,
,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,

,

,

,,,,,,,,

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(10)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(68)
(69)
(70)
(71)
(72)
(73)
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)
(79)
(80)
5B03.3

,
,

,

,

,

,

,
,

,

,

,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,

,

,

,

,

,

,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
, ,,,,,,,,,

Gearbox - Dynashift
15
39
17
41
16
40
15
42

,
14
13
10
79
80
7
76
69
43
44
45
46
48
49
51
47
52
50
77
53
70
71
72
54
55
59
56
57
61
58
73
22
75
64
62
68
66
63
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
60
Fig. 2
65
Fig. 1
Gearbox - Dynashift
5B03.4
Exploded view
69
10
27
79
25
13
1
36
18
37
7
35
80
32
50
29
48
23
22
59
20
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,,,,
38
17
54
15
77
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,,,,
,
,
,
,,,,,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,,,,,,
,
,
,,,,,,,,
,
,
,, ,,,
73
71
74
49
61
53
16
39
21
30
26
66
24
62
42
63
64
43
75
51
28
47
71
52
76
41
72
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,
,
,, ,
55
70
57
56
,
,
,,,,,,,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,,,,,,,,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,,,,,
,,
15
,
,
,
,,,,,,
,,,,,,,
,
,
,
,
31
14
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,
33
34
60
58
68
40
65
46
Parts list
45
44
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox - Dynashift
Explanation of gearbox ratios
Ratio A : 1/1.620 reduction (Fig. 3)
Pistons (22) and (37) simultaneously receive the pressure of the 17-bar circuit.
Secondary ring gear (34) is locked to the housing by the
action of the front brake. Secondary sun gear (61) is
locked to the housing by the action of the rear brake.
Consequently, the secondary epicyclic train is locked.
Primary sun gear (64) is blocked.
5B03.5
The reduction ratio is determined by the primary epicyclic

train only. The kinematics are conventional, the movement entering via the ring gear and exiting via the planet
pinion cage, with the sun gear remaining fixed.
37
34
22
64
61
Lubrication
Transmission of engine power to gearbox
17-bar low pressure

Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox - Dynashift
5B03.6
Ratio B : 1/1.386 reduction (Fig. 4)

Front piston (22) is under pressure.
Secondary ring gear (34) is locked to the housing by the
front brake.
Rear piston (37) is not under pressure.
Secondary sun gear (61) rotates with secondary shaft
(53) (clutch engaged).
Secondary planet-pinion cage (39) turns at low speed,
driving primary sun gear (64).
The reduction effect is therefore lower.
37
34
22
39
64
61
53
Lubrication
17-bar low pressure
Driving of primary sun gear
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox - Dynashift
5B03.7
Ratio C : 1/1.1704 reduction (Fig. 5)

Rear piston (37) receives the pressure.
Secondary sun gear (61) is locked to the housing by the
effect of the rear brake.
Front piston (22) is not under pressure.
Secondary ring gear (34) rotates with transmission shaft
(7) (clutch engaged), giving a speed higher than that of
secondary planet-pinion cage (39).
Primary sun gear (64) is driven by secondary planetpinion cage (39), at a speed greater than for ratio B. The
reduction effect is therefore lower still.
37
22
34
39
64
61
Lubrication
Transmission of engine power to

gearbox
17-bar low pressure
Driving of primary sun gear (64)

Fig. 5
Issue 1
December 2000
Gearbox - Dynashift
5B03.8
Ratio D : Ratio 1/1 (Fig. 6)
Neither piston is actuated. Both clutches are therefore

engaged.
Secondary ring gear (34) rotates with transmission shaft
(7).
Secondary sun gear (61) is locked to secondary shaft
(53), resulting in mechanical locking of the complete
system.
The ratio is consequently 1:1 (direct transmission).
34
61
53
Lubrication
17-bar low pressure
Mechanical locking
Fig. 6
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002
Gearbox - Dynashift
5B03.9
(see section 2B01).
4. Remove the reverse shuttle selector (see section
5B01).
5. Remove the clutch assembly (see section 4A01).
6. Remove the direct drive shaft.
7. Remove the clutch control valve (see section 9J01)
as well as the transfer tubes connected to the unit
(lube and 17-bar pressure).
8. Remove the input unit (see section 5B01) and place
on a work bench in the vertical position.
13
21
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
34
B . Removing and disassembling

the cover, housing, front clutch and
brake
9. Using two locally manufactured lugs or rings, remove the assembly comprising shaft (7), cover (13)
and housing (21) (Fig. 7).
10. Retrieve stop (70). Compress spring washer (77) by
pressing on ring gear (31). Remove circlip (69) and
withdraw shaft (7).
11. Withdraw piston (37) from housing (21).
12. Use tool, P/N 3376888 M1 to lock ring gear (34).
Remove screws (25) (Fig. 8).
13. Extract the assembly comprising ring gear (34),
crownwheel carrier (1), ring gear (31) and bearing
(27).
14. Separate ring gear (34) from crownwheel carrier (1).
Remove spring washer (77) and bearing (27).
15. Remove housing (21) and piston (22).
16. Remove discs (3) and (15), intermediate plates (2),
and clutch plate (17), drive hub (5), springs (20) and
thrust plate (16).
17. Extract cup washer (4) and unit (14).
25
Issue 1
May 2001

5B03.10
Gearbox - Dynashift
C . Removing and separating the

planet pinion cage assembly
18. Compress the planet pinion cage assembly using
tool, P/N 3376920 M2 (Fig. 9).
19. Remove ring (72). Remove stud washer (76), the
planet pinion cage assembly and shims (71) installed against the front and rear faces of planet
pinion cage (28).
20. Remove secondary sun gear (61) and retaining ring
(49) (if necessary).
21. Remove circlip (55). Remove bearing (57) and spacer
(56).
22. Separate secondary planet-pinion cage (39) from
primary planet-pinion cage (28).
23. Remove retaining ring (60) and bearing (58).
24. Set the secondary planet-pinion cage in the vertical
position. Tap the cage lightly on a wooden block in
order to extract needles (63) (Fig. 10). Separate the
planet pinion cage from primary sun gear (64),
complete with ring (62) and oil splasher (75).
D . Disassembling the rear clutch

and brake
25. Remove clutch plate (38), springs (65), discs (41)
separated from clutch plate (44).
26. Remove the assembly comprising housing (59),
thrust plate (45) and last disc (41). Remove friction
washer (51).
27. Remove screws (46). Remove cover (47) and cup
washers (52). Separate thrust plate (45), discs (50)
and intermediate plates (48). Remove drive hub (54).
28. Remove screws (43). Unstick and remove unit (42)
take care to mark its position.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 9
63
Fig. 10
Gearbox - Dynashift
E . Assembling the planet pinion
cages
29. Clean and check the parts, replacing any that are
faulty.
30. Ensure that the lube ports in the planet pinion cage
shafts are not blocked.
31. Manually check the axial play and rotation of each
sun gear.
32. Install primary sun gear (64) fitted with ring (62) and
oil splasher (75), in secondary planet-pinion cage
(39).
33. Insert three needles (63) through holes in primary
sun gear, so that they abut on bottom of groove in
secondary planet-pinion cage.
34. Fit bearing (58), install ring (60).
35. Assemble the secondary planet-pinion cage on primary planet-pinion cage (28). Turn the sun gears in
order to facilitate meshing.
36. Fit spacer (56) and bearing (57); install circlip (55).
37. Check manually for normal backlash between the
primary sun gears.
38. Install ring (49) (if it was removed) on secondary sun
gear (61).
5B03.11
42
Fig. 11
54
59
F . Reassembling the rear clutch and

brake
39. Clean and check the parts, replacing any that are
faulty.
40. Blast compressed air into the tube of the reversedrive idling gear to ensure it is not blocked.
41. Coat the mating face of unit (42) with sealing
compound around the lube line (Fig. 11) and install.
42. Coat screw (43) with Loctite 241, install and torque
to 31 - 35 Nm.
43. To access screws (46), turn the planet pinion cage
upside down. Install secondary sun gear (61), housing (59) and hub (54), the inside splines facing
downwards (Fig. 12).
Install discs (50), intermediate plates (48), thrust
plate (45) and cup washers (52) per Fig. 1, and cover
(47).
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001
5B03.12
Gearbox - Dynashift
44. Centre housing assembly (59), using tool, P/N

3376887M1 (Fig. 13). Coat screws (46) with Loctite 241 and torque to 13 - 15 Nm. Remove the tool.
Separate the housing assembly from the planetpinion
cage.
45. Coat washer (51) with miscible grease and apply to
cover (47).
46. Install one disc (41) inside unit (42).
47. Place housing assembly (59) and washer (51) on
shaft (53). Install drive hub (54), the inside splines
facing upwards (Fig. 14).
48. Install the other two discs (41), separated by clutch
plate (44).
Fig. 13
G . Reassembling the cover, front

clutch, brake and housing
54
Special point
If replacement of front cover (13) proves to be necessary,
degrease washer (79) and its mating face on the cover.
Lightly smear one face of this washer with Loctite 648 or
similar then stick on the cover. Leave to dry for a few
moments.
49. Ensure presence of rivets on cover.
50. Place the cover on a suitable support.
51. Check for presence of washer (79). Coat friction
washer (10) with miscible grease and apply to
housing (14). Install transmission shaft (7) and
housing.
52. Position cup washer (4) per Fig. 1, fit one disc (15)
and thrust plate (16).
53. Fit drive hub (5) with internal splines facing upwards
on transmission shaft (7) (Fig. 15). Install discs (3)
and intermediate plates (2).
54. Install the other two discs (15), separated by clutch
plate (17).
55. Refit springs (20). Fit Oring (73).
56. Ensure presence of rivets (23) and (29). Ensure that
the pipes to pistons (22) and (37) in housing (21) are
not blocked.
57. Lubricate seals (24) and (26) and install respectively
on piston (22) and inside housing (21).
58. Position the piston in the housing and fit using a
plastic hammer to tap progressively and alternately
around the edge.
59. Screw two guide studs into housing (21) and position
on cover (13). Check that the lube pipe in the housing
corresponds to the one on the cover.
53
59
Fig. 14
5
7
Fig. 15
Issue 22
1
Issue
March
2002
December
2000
May 2002
Gearbox - Dynashift
5B03.13
Special point
Replacing cover (13) on housing (21) or reverse-shuttle
housing (40) requires checking and if necessary readjusting the clutch (see section 4 A01).
60. Remove the guide studs. Coat screw (18) with Loctite 241, install, and torque to 29 - 37 Nm.
Leaktightness test of piston (22)

- Connect a pressure gauge fitted with a sealed valve and
a suitable fixture on the port of the front piston. Ensure
piston and seals are correctly seated by pressurising
the system several times to two or three bar, then feed
the circuit with compressed air at 0.3 bar. Close the
valve and check that no pressure drop occurs for one
minute.
61. Refit bearing (27) on ring gear (31) and place inside
crown-wheel carrier (1) together with spring washer
(77). Install ring gear (34). Apply Loctite 241 to
screws (33), install the screws and torque to 13 15 Nm.
Fit the crownwheel assemblies onto transmission
shaft (7).
Lock ring gear (34) per Fig. 8. Apply Loctite 241 to
screws (25) and torque to 31 - 35 Nm.
62. Compress spring washer (77) by pressing ring gear
(31). Install circlip (69). Coat stop (70) with miscible
grease and install.
63. Lubricate and install seals (35) and (36). Position the
piston in the housing and fit by tapping progressively
around the edges with a plastic hammer.
Leaktightness test of piston (37)

- Maintain the piston using a suitable fixture. Check
sealing of the joints, as for the front piston.
Issue 1
May 2001

5B03.14
Gearbox - Dynashift
,,, ,
,,,,,,,,,,,,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
H . Shimming the planet pinion cage
,,,,
,
,
,
,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,
,,,,,,
,
Adjusting J1 clearance (Fig. 16)
J1 = 0,50 / 0,70 mm
Note: For adjusting clearances J1 and J2, springs

(65) and clutch plate (38) must be removed.
Operations on rear clutch housing (Fig. 18):
64. Use a depth gauge to measure dimensions b and c

at two opposing points. Take the average of the two
readings.
Calculate dimension: A = b - c
Operations on the planet pinion cage assembly (Fig. 17)
71
47
Fig. 16
,,,,,,,,,, , ,

,
,
,

,

,

,

,

,

,

,

,

,

,

,

,
,,,,,,,,,,,

,

,
,,,,
,

,,,
,,,,,,

,

,

,

,

,

,
,

,

,,, ,,,,,,
, ,,,,,
,,

,
,
65. Install secondary sun gear (61) complete with retaining ring (49) on ball bearing (57).
66. Measure dimension D using a depth gauge.
67. Determine gap E between primary planet-pinion
cage (28) and hub (54) (Fig. 19) according to the
formula: E = A + D
68. Fill space E with shims (71) having a value of E +0.50
mini to + 0.70 maxi, to give a clearance of :
J1 = E + 0.50 to 0.70 mm
J2 = 0 / 0,20 mm
61
49
57
Fig. 17

,
Issue 1
May 2001
42
Fig. 18

,,,

,

, ,,,,,

,
,,,

Gearbox - Dynashift
5B03.15
Adjusting J2 clearance(Fig. 16)
69. Place sun gear (61) on housing (59) and the planet
pinion cage assembly on shaft (53). Install washer
(76) and ring (72).
70. Position the feeler of a dial gauge per Fig. 20 and
check the clearance by moving the planet pinion
cage assembly vertically.
71. Depending on the measured clearance, select the
thickness of shims (71) to obtain J2 = 0 / 0.20 mm.
72. Remove the planet pinion cage assembly.
73. Install springs (65). Position clutch plate (38), ensuring that the notches align with the tabs of unit (42).
74. Ensure presence of shims (71) defined at operation
68.
75. Refit sun gear (61) and the planet pinion cage
assembly, and compress the parts using tool, P/N
3376920M2.
76. Set shims (71) selected at operation 71 against planet pinion cage (28). Install washer (76) and ring (72)
(Fig. 20).
77. Check manually for normal backlash between the
secondary sun gears.
28
54
Fig. 19
,,, ,,
,, ,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,
72
76
,
,
,,,,
28
I . Assembling the input unit
78. Fit new Orings (32) and (68) on reverse shuttle

housing (40). Screw in two guide studs at opposing
locations.
79. Use a sling to reinstall the assembly comprising
transmission shaft (7), cover (13) and housing (21)
(Fig. 7), ensuring the lube pipe is aligned.
80. Rotate the shaft in order to mesh the sun gears in the
ring gears.
81. Remove the guide studs. Install screws (30) and
82. Check for proper rotation of the shaft.
28
71
Fig. 20
Issue 1
May 2001

5B03.16
Gearbox - Dynashift
J . Final operations
83. Refit the input unit (see section 5B01) and the PTO
drive line.
84. Reassemble the front clutch (see section 4A01).
85. Refit the reverse shuttle (see section 5B01).
86. Refit the selector cover (see section 5C01).
89. Bleed the clutch control if necessary (see section
9I01).
90. Proceed to road-test of all Dynashift controls and
gear ranges A, B, C and D.
91. Check for leaktightness at couplings and mating
face of selector cover.
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,,,,,
,, ,,
Fig. 21
K . Service tools
Tools available in the AGCO network:
- 3376887M1 - Centring tool (Fig. 21)
- 3376888M1 - Secondary planet-gear cage holding
tool (Fig. 22)
- 3376920M2 - Planet-gear cage compression tool
(Fig. 7)
Fig. 22
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox Dynashift with power shuttle
5B04.1
5 B04 Dynashift
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
Operating principle _____________________________________
A.
B.
Removing and disassembling the cover, front clutch casing

and brake ______________________________________________
C.
Removing and splitting the planet carrier unit _____________
11
D.
Disassembling the rear clutch and brake __________________
12
E.
Assembling the planet carriers ___________________________
12
F.
Refitting the rear clutch and brake _______________________
13
G.
Refitting the cover, front clutch, brake and casing _________
14
H.
Shimming the planet carriers ____________________________
15
I.
Assembling the input unit _______________________________
17
J.
17
K.
Service tools ___________________________________________
18
Issue 1
May 2002

5B04.2

Primary epicyclic gear train
General
- On tractors 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250, the Dynashift
can also be mounted on an input unit fitted with a
mechanical reverse shuttle.
- This section only describes the Dynashift with power
shuttle. For the Dynashift with mechanical reverse
shuttle, see section 5B03.
- The operating principles of the two Dynashift versions
are similar.
- However, housing profile of the Dynashift with power
shuttle is different because of the location of the power
shuttle rear clutch and the driving gear located at the
rear end of the housing.
- The Dynashift is located between the rear clutch and
the driving gear of the power shuttle (see section 5B06).
- It is a hydraulically controlled gear shift mechanism and
provides the gearbox with four input ratios.
- The function is ensured by two epicyclic gear trains
associated with two hydraulic clutches. Dynashift
design enables selection of each of the four ratios while
driving, and under load, without de-clutching, using a
lever mounted to the left under the steering wheel.
- The Dynashift housing is controlled by two solenoid
valves mounted on the clutch unit located on the front
right hand side of the gearbox.
- The two solenoid valves are controlled by the tractors
electronic system.
Operating principle
The Dynashift input unit comprises two epicyclic gear
trains:
- the primary epicyclic gear train is the input units main
component and transmits the movement of the engine
to the gearbox,
- the secondary epicyclic gear train controls the speed of
the primary sun gear.
Issue 1
May 2002
- The movement comes in via the primary ring gear (31)

which is splined onto the transmission shaft (7). The
ring gear turns at the same speed as the engine.
- The movement exits via the planet carrier (28) which is
splined onto the secondary shaft (53). The primary sun
gear (64) is driven by the secondary epicyclic train. The
speed of this sun gear determines the reduction ratio of
the gearbox.
Secondary epicyclic gear train

- This epicyclic gear train is controlled by two hydraulic
clutches and brakes.
- The secondary ring gear (34) is:
. either locked onto the transmission shaft (7) by the
three clutch discs (3) and the Belleville washer (4)
located in the front part of the housing,
. or immobilised in relation to the housing by three
brake discs (15) and a piston (22).
- When there is no pressure, the piston (22) is pulled back
by the twelve springs (20) and the Belleville washer (4)
by means of the thrust plate (16).
- When the 17 bar pressure is built up in the circuit, the
piston (22) moves forward and blocks the brake discs
(15) while pushing the thrust plate (16) that compresses the Belleville washer (4).
- Speed of the secondary ring gear is established as
follows:
. speed equals engine speed if the front piston is not
under pressure.
. speed nil when the front piston is under pressure.
- The secondary sun gear (61) is:
. either locked onto the secondary transmission shaft
by means of four clutch discs (50) and two Belleville
washers (52) located on the rear section of the
housing,
. or immobilised in relation to the housing by means of
three brake discs (41) and a piston (37).
- When there is no pressure, the piston (37) is pushed
forward by the Belleville washers and the six springs
(65).
- The 17 bar pressure moves the piston (37) back and
locks the brake discs (41). The piston compresses the
Belleville washers (52) by means of the thrust plate (45)
that releases the secondary transmission shaft clutch
discs.
- Immobilisation of either the secondary ring gear (34) or
the secondary sun gear (61) modifies the speed of the
secondary planet carrier (39). The latter drives the
primary sun gear (64), and this establishes the gearbox
reduction ratio.

Parts list (Fig. 1 - 2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
Secondary ring gear carrier

Intermediate plates
Front clutch discs
Belleville washer
Splined hub
Needle bearing
Transmission shaft
Ring restrictor
Screw
Friction washer
Bearing
Washer
Front cover
Clutch housing
Front brake discs
Clutch plate
Screw
Springs
Spacer casing
Front piston
Rivet
Oring
Screw
Oring
Ball bearing
Primary planet carrier
Rivets
Screw
Primary ring gear
Screw
Secondary ring gear
Oring
Oring
Rear piston
Clutch plate
Secondary planet carrier
Cover
Rear brake discs
Screw
Clutch plate
Screw
Cover
Intermediate plates
Retaining ring
Rear clutch discs
Friction washer
Belleville washers
Secondary shaft
Splined hub
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(69)
(70)
(71)
(72)
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)
(78)
(79)
5B04.3
Circlip
Spacer
Ball bearing
Ball bearing
Rear clutch housing
Retaining ring
Secondary sun gear
Retaining ring
Needles
Primary sun gear
Springs
Circlip
Stop
Shim(s)
Retaining ring
Rivets
Oil splasher
Stud washer
Spring washer
Washer
Locating pin
Overall view
17
18
13
11
12
10
14
42
23
25
29
20
16
15
22
24
77
27
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
26
37
31
21
33
74
70
69
71
72
79
1
28
64
75
76
53
50
58
63
34
39
62
35
56
61
60
36
57
49
55
59
65
48
30
38
44
45
40
41
47
51
54
78
52
46
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
5B04.4
Exploded view
42
9
20
18
25
1
37
16
36
35
15
33
79
34
14
72
10
70
12
69
54
11
22
50
31
13
48
39
23
50
27
29
48
77
50
48
74
50
21
59
78
63
38
24
46
26
71
28
49
15
61
17
39
15
5
55
53
57
30
56
40
60
65
58
51
62
47
64
75
52
28
41
71
45
76
41
44
41
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 1
Fig. 2

Explanation of the ratios
Ratio A : Reduction 1/1.620 (Fig. 3)
- The two pistons (22) (37) are simultaneously under
pressure from the 17 bar circuit.
- The secondary ring gear (34) is locked onto the casing
by means of the front brake.
- The secondary sun gear (61) is locked onto the casing
by the rear brake.
5B04.5
- Consequently:
. the secondary epicyclic gear train is locked
. the primary sun gear (64) is locked
. the reduction ratio is only set by the primary epicyclic
gear train.
- This is standard kinematics, movement comes in via
the ring gear and exits via the planet carrier; the sun gear
does not move.
37
22
34
64
61
Transmission of movement to the gearbox
Lubrication
17 bar low pressure
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2002
5B04.6
Ratio B : Reduction 1/1.386 (Fig. 4)

- Front piston (22) is under pressure
- Front brake locks the secondary ring gear (34) onto the
casing.
- Rear piston (37) is not under pressure.
- The secondary sun gear (61) rotates with the secondary
transmission shaft (53) (clutch engaged).
- The secondary planet carrier (39) is rotating at a low
speed, driving the primary sun gear (64).
- The rotational speed of the primary planet carrier (28)
corresponds to the speed difference between the primary ring gear (31) and the primary sun gear (64).
- Reduction effect is therefore minor.
37
22
34
39
31
64
28
61
53
Lubrication
17 bar low pressure
Pilot flow to the primary sun gear (64)

Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2002
5B04.7
Ratio C : Reduction 1/1.1704 (Fig. 5)

- Rear piston (37) is under pressure
- The rear brake locks the secondary sun gear (61) onto
the casing.
- The front piston (22) is not under pressure.
- The secondary ring gear (34) rotates with the transmission shaft (7) thereby transmitting a higher speed to the
secondary planet carrier (39).
- The primary sun gear (64) is driven by the secondary
planet carrier (39) at a higher speed than in ratio B.
- Reduction is therefore lower.
22
37
34
39
7
64
61
Lubrication
17 bar low pressure
Pilot flow to the primary sun gear (64)

Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002
5B04.8
Ratio D : Reduction 1/1 ratio (Fig. 6)

- The two pistons are not under pressure. The two
clutches are therefore engaged.
- The secondary ring gear (34) rotates with the transmission shaft (7).
- The secondary sun gear (61) is locked on the secondary
shaft (53) thereby mechanically locking the entire
system.
- The ratio is therefore 1:1 (direct transmission).
34
61
53
Lubrication
Mechanical locking
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002
5B04.9
1.Uncouple the tractor between the engine and the
3. Remove the selector cover (see section 5C02)
4. Remove the clutch cover plate (see section 3C02),
hydraulic control unit and front clutch from the power
shuttle (see sections 9K01 and 5B06 respectively).
Remove the input unit (see section 5B02).
5. Place the housing in vertical position and split the
power shuttle rear clutch from the input unit (see
section 5B06).
13
21

the cover, front clutch casing and
brake (Fig. 7 - 8)
Removal
6. Using two locally made lugs or rings, remove the shaft
(7), cover (13) and casing (21) assembly (Fig. 7)
recover both the stop (70) and the locating pin.
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2002
5B04.10
Disassembly (Fig. 8)
7. Remove the piston (37) from the casing (21). Scrap

the Orings (35) (36).
8. Place the cover and casing assembly vertically on a
workbench in which a hole ( approximately 65
mm) has been drilled in order to accommodate the
transmission shaft.
9. Immobilise the transmission shaft (7) with the help
of an assistant, using tool ref. 3378004M1 (see K)
and a locally made spindle. Remove the screws (33)
and split the secondary ring gear (34) from the
secondary ring gear carrier (1).
10. Remove the circlip (69), pressing on the center of the
primary ring gear (31) in order to compress the spring
washer (77). Remove the primary ring gear (31) and
ball bearing (27). Recover the spring washer.
11. Hold the transmission shaft (7) and remove the

screws (25). Take out the secondary ring gear
carrier (1).
12. Remove the casing (21) along with the piston (22).
Remove the piston and scrap the Orings (24) (26).
13. Remove the discs (3) (15), intermediate plates (2),
clutch plate (17), hub (5), springs (20) and the thrust
plate (16).
14. Extract the Belleville washer (4), clutch housing
(14) and transmission shaft (7) taking care to draw
them towards the inside face of the cover (13) as
shown by the arrow in Fig. 8 and recover the friction
washer (10).
3378004M1
37
69
27
34
31
33
35
77
26
36
24
21
16
22
20
25
10
14
17
15
13
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2002
5B04.11
C . Removing and splitting the planet

carrier unit
63
Removal (Fig. 9)
15. Using tool ref. 3376920M2 (see K) gently compress the planet carrier assembly (Fig. 9).
16. Remove the retaining ring (72). Remove the stud
washer (76), planet carrier assembly and the shims
(71) mounted along the mating faces of the primary
planet carrier (28).
17. Remove the secondary sun gear (61) and the retaining ring (49) (if necessary).
18. Remove the circlip (55). Remove the bearing (57)
and the spacer (56).
Fig. 10
Splitting
19. Split the secondary planet carrier (39) from the
primary planet carrier (28).
20. Remove the retaining ring (60) and bearing (58).
21. Place the secondary planet carrier in vertical position. Remove the needles (63) (Fig. 10) by hitting the
planet carrier gently against a wooden shim. Split the
planet carrier from the primary sun gear (64) along
with the retaining ring (62) and oil splasher (75).
28
60
39
28
76
71
72
58
56
57
55
61
39
49
3376920M2
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2002

5B04.12
D . Disassembling the rear clutch

and brake
22. Remove the clutch plate (38), springs (65) and discs
(41) (the latter should be separated from the clutch
plate (44)).
23. Remove the rear clutch housing assembly (59),
thrust plate (45) and the last disc (41). Remove the
friction washer (51).
24. Remove the screws (46). Remove the cover (47)
and the Belleville washers (52). Separate the thrust
plate (45), discs (50) and intermediate plates (48).
25. Remove the hub (54).
E . Assembling the planet carriers

26. Clean and check parts, replace any defective ones.
27. Make sure the lubrication holes on the planet carrier
axes are not obstructed.
28. Check the axial clearance and rotation of each pinion
gear by hand.
29. Assemble the primary sun gear (64), complete with
retaining ring (62) and oil splasher (75), on the
secondary planet carrier (39).
30. Into each hole of the primary sun gear, slide a needle
(63) home in the groove of the secondary planet
carrier.
31. Fit the bearing (58), mount the retaining ring (60).
32. Assemble the secondary planet carrier on the primary planet carrier (28). Turn the pinion gears to
ensure they mesh correctly.
33. Position the spacer (56), bearing (57) and fit the
circlip (55).
34. Check the primary pinion gears backlash by hand.
35. Assemble the retaining ring (49) (if it was removed)
on the secondary sun gear (61).
Issue 1
May 2002
5B04.13
F. Refitting the rear clutch and brake

36. Clean and check parts, replace any defective ones.
37. Turn the planet carriers over in order to access the
screws (46) (Fig. 11).
38. Fit the secondary sun gear (61), the housing (59) and
the hub (54), with its internal grooves pointing downwards (Fig. 11).
39. Assemble: discs (50), intermediate plates (48), the
thrust plate (45), the Belleville washers (52) as
indicated in Fig. 1 and refit the cover (47).
40. Center the housing assembly (59) using tool ref.
3376887M1 (see K and Fig. 12).
41. Smear the screws (46) with Loctite 242 and torque
them to 12 - 16 Nm (Fig. 12). Remove the tool.
Separate the housing unit from the planet carriers.
42. Coat the washer (51) with miscible grease and fit it
on cover (47).
Note: Type 648 Loctite or equivalent should be used
to make the washer (78) glue to the cover (40).
43. Fit a disc (41).
44. Fit the housing assembly (59) and the washer (51)
on the transmission shaft (53). Assemble the hub
(54), making sure its internal grooves face upwards
(Fig. 13).
45. Fit the two other discs (41) separated by the thrust
plate (44). Refit the springs (65) (Fig. 13).
54
59
61
Fig. 11
46
Fig. 12
54
53
65
59
Issue 1
51
41 44
Fig. 13
May 2002

5B04.14
G . Refitting the cover, front clutch,

brake and casing
46. Check presence of rivets (23) on the cover (13).
Special points
- If it proves necessary to replace the bearing (11),
force fit a new bearing (6) with its face flush with
the back end of the bearing.
- Degrease the mating faces of the bearing and of the
washer (12). Apply a light coating of Loctite 648 or
equivalent to one of the washer faces. Make the
washer adhere to the bearing and leave to dry for a
few minutes.
47. Place the bearing on the front cover (13) making sure
to align the lubricating channels. Lightly coat the
screws with Loctite 242 and torque them as follows:
- M6 screw (9) : 12 - 16 Nm
- M8 (42) : 20 - 28 Nm
48. Place the cover on a suitable fixture.
49. Assemble the transmission shaft (7) via the inside
surface of the cover (13) and the housing (14) together with the washer (12) (Fig. 14).
50. Fit the Belleville washer (4) as indicated in Fig. 1, a
disc (15) and the thrust plate (16).
51. Place the hub (5) on the transmission shaft (7) with
the internal grooves facing upwards (Fig. 14). Assemble the discs (3) and the intermediate plates (2).
52. Fit the two remaining discs (15) one on each side of
the clutch plate (17).
53. Refit the springs (20).
54. Check presence of the rivets (74) on the spacer
casing (21). Make sure the channels in the pistons
(22) (37) within the casing (21) are not blocked.
55. Lubricate the Orings (24) (26) and assemble them
on the piston (22) and in the casing (21) respectively.
56. Position the piston in the casing and fit it using a
small plastic mallet to hit progressively round the
edge.
57. Fit the casing (21) on the cover (13). Check that the
casing lubricating channel aligns with that of the
cover.
Special point
- If either the cover (13) or the casing (21) is replaced it
is necessary to check and possibly renew the shimming of the power shuttle front clutch (see section
5B06).
Issue 1
May 2002
5
14
7
12
13
Fig. 14
58. Fit the screws (18) and torque to 29 - 37 Nm.

Piston (22) hydraulic test
Connect a pressure gauge fitted with a valve and
suitable fixture to the front piston port. Feed the
circuit with compressed air at 0.3 bar. Close the
valve and check that pressure does not drop over a
period of approximately 60 seconds.
59. Fit the bearing (27) on the primary ring gear (31).
60. Refit the ring gears (31) (34), secondary ring gear
carrier (1), bearing (27) and spring washer (77).
Carry out operations 8 to 11 in reverse order.
Note: In order to avoid any difficulties during assembly, refit the primary ring gear (31) before tightening
the screws (25).
Torque as follows:
- screw (25) : 31 - 35 Nm, Loctite 242
- screw (33) : 13 - 15 Nm, Loctite 242
61. Lubricate and assemble new Orings (35) (36). Place
the piston (37) in the casing (21) and force fit it using
a small plastic mallet to hit progressively round the
edge.
Piston (37) hydraulic test
- Use a suitable fixture to hold the piston.
- Check seal tightness as for the front piston.
5B04.15
H . Shimming the planet carriers

Note: For adjusting clearances J1 and J2, springs
(65) and clutch plate (38) must be removed.
On rear clutch housing (Fig. 17)

62. Use a depth gauge to measure dimensions B and C
at two opposing points. Take the average of the two
readings.
Calculate dimension: A = B - C
On the planet carrier assembly (Fig 16)

63. Install secondary sun gear (61) complete with retaining ring (49) on ball bearing (57).
64. Measure dimension D using a depth gauge.
65. Determine gap E between primary planet carrier
(28) and hub (54) (Fig. 18) according to the formula:
E=A+D
66. Fill space E with shims (71) having a value of E +
0.50 min. to + 0.70 max., to obtain a clearance of:
J1 = E + 0.50 to 0.70 mm
J2 = 0/0,20 mm
J1 = 0,50/0,70 mm
71
Fig. 15
61
49
57
D
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2002

5B04.16

67. Place secondary sun gear (61) on housing (59) and
the planet carrier assembly on the shaft (53). Install
washer (76) and ring (72).
68. Position the feeler of a dial gauge as per Fig. 19 and
check the clearance by moving the planet carrier
assembly vertically.
69. Depending on the measured clearance, select the
thickness of shims (71) to obtain J2 = 0 to 0.20 mm
70. Remove the planet carrier assembly.
71. Install springs (65). Position clutch plate (38),
ensuring that the notches align with the tabs of the
cover (40).
72. Ensure presence of shims (71) defined at operation
66.
73. Refit secondary sun gear (61) and planet carrier
assembly and compress using tool ref. 3376920M2
(see Fig. 9 and K).
74. Set shims (71) selected at operation 69 against the
primary planet carrier (28). Install washer (76) and
ring (72) (Fig. 19).
75. Check the secondary sun gear backlash by hand.
28
54
Fig. 18
28
72
76
28
71
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2002
5B04.17
I . Assembling the input unit

76. Screw two guide studs on the casing (21) (Optional).
Check presence of positioning pin and oil splasher on
cover (40).
77. Use a sling (Fig. 7) to reinstall the transmission shaft
assembly (7), cover (13) and casing (21) aligning the
positioning pin with its housing on the cover (40).
78. Turn the shaft in order to engage the planet carriers
in the ring gears.
79. Remove the guide studs (if used). Install the screws
(30) and torque to 29 - 37 Nm, having lightly coated
the threads with Loctite 242 beforehand.
80. Check shaft rotation.
81. In case the cover (13) has been replaced, position
the ring restrictor (8) having first lightly coated it with
Loctite 648. Check that the product does not block
the lubricating ports.
J . Final operations
82. Reinstall the power shuttle rear clutch (see section
5B06).
83. Refit the input unit (see section 5 B02) and the power
shuttle hydraulic unit (see sections 5B06 and 9K01
respectively).
Refit the clutch cover (see section 3C02).
85. Top up housings with oil and check the level on the
sight-glass on left at rear of central housing.
87. Check the oil tightness of the hydraulic unions and of
the selector cover mating face.
Issue 1
May 2002

5B04.18
K . Service tools
3376887 M1

- 3376887 M1 - Center punch (Fig. 20)
- 3376920 M2 - Planet carrier compression tool
(Fig. 21)
- 3378004 M1 - Transmission shaft sleeve (Fig. 22)
Fig. 20
3376920 M2
Fig. 21
3378004 M1
Fig. 22
Issue 1
May 2002
Gearbox - Mechanical reverse shuttle
5B05.1
5 B05 Mechanical reverse shuttle
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
Operation ______________________________________________
A.
B.
Disassembling and reassembling the reverse shuttle ______
C.
Preparing and shimming the secondary shaft _____________
D.
Preparing and shimming the reverse-drive idling gear ______
E.
Issue 1
May 2001

5B05.2

Parts List
General
Type 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors may be fitted
with a Heavy Duty gearbox featuring a mechanical
reverse shuttle.
The reverse shuttle transmits movement commanded at
the Dynashift into the transfer shaft installed at the front
of the main gearbox, by the action of the dual gear (see
section 5A01).
The reverse shuttle assembly is located in the rear cavity
of the input housing behind the Dynashift. It includes:
- two helically cut pinions (19) and (28) installed on two
needle bearings (4) and (5). These pinions are respectively in constant engagement with the dual gear at the
box main input drive and reverse-drive idling gear (17)
- twin-cone synchromesh assembly (34), the hub is
locked by the splines on secondary shaft (2)
- a synchromesh-control selector rail and fork assembly
(see section 5D01)
- secondary shaft (2) installed on two tapered roller
bearings supported by two bearings in the input housing
- reverse drive idling gear (17) rotating on two tapered
roller bearings installed on shaft (14) mounted in two
bores in the housing.
The latter gear is in constant engagement with the front
teeth of the gearbox dual input gear.
Operation
Forward drive
When the synchromesh slide is over on the right, it
transmits movement to forward drive gear (19) in direct
connection with the rear teeth of the gearbox dual input
gear.
Reverse drive
Forward-drive gear (28) is in constant engagement with
idling gear (17) which meshes with the front teeth of the
gearbox dual input gear.
Issue 1
May 2001
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
Shim(s)
Secondary shaft
Bearing cone
Needle roller bearing
Needle roller bearing
Bush
Washer
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Roller bearing
Screw
Bearing cone
Bearing cone
Idling gear shaft
Bearing cup
Spacer ring
Reverse-drive idling gear
Bearing cup
Forward drive gear
Synchromesh slide
Rings
Rings
Cones
Synchromesh flanges
Locking device
Shoes
Synchromesh hub
Reverse-drive gear
Washer
Bearing cup
Screw
Retaining plate
Housing
Synchromesh assembly
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
5B05.3
Overall view
33
29
28
19
31
30
32
34
10
9
4
16
18
17
26
15
25
27
20
21
22
11
12
13
23
24
19
14
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
May 2001
5B05.4
Exploded view
14
13
15
16
10
17
33
18
6
12
11
2
9
8
3
7
30
5
1
19
32
24
23
31
22
21
26
27
25
20
21
22
23
24
28
34
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 1
29
May 2001
Fig. 2
5B05.5
(see section 2B01).
2. Drain the gearbox and the intermediate housing.
Note: Visually identify the contour of the plugs.
3. Remove the hydraulic clutch (see section 4A01).
5. Remove the input housing (see section 5B01).
6. Disassemble the locking device, the selector rail and
the reverse shuttle fork (see section 5D01).
7. Place the housing on a work bench in the vertical
position. Remove the sling.
8. Disassemble the Dynashift (see section 5B03).
7
19
28
34
Fig. 3
B . Disassembling and reassembling

the reverse shuttle
Disassembly
9. Remove screws (11), extract shaft (14). Remove
gear (17) and bearing cones (12) and (13).
10. Drive out cups (15) and (18). Remove spacer ring
(16).
Note: Pair the cones and cups if they are to be reused.
11. Remove screws (31). Remove retaining plate (32),
shims (1) and cup (30).
12. Extract secondary shaft (2).
13. Remove the assembly comprising pinions (19) and
(28), synchro (34) (Fig. 3) and washer (7).
14. Remove cone (8) and cup (9).
15. Separate the following parts on the pinion / synchromesh assembly:
- gear (19), bush (6), needle roller bearings (5), cones
(23), rings (21), rings (22), synchromesh flanges
(24), gear (28) and needle roller bearings (4).
16. If necessary, withdraw cone (3) from the shaft,
remove washer (29), and drive out roller bearing (10).
Issue 1
May 2001

5B05.6
Reassembly
17. Clean and check the parts and replace any that are
faulty.
18. Check that the pipes and ports in secondary shaft
(2), shaft (14), housing (33), synchromesh (34) and
bush (6) are not blocked.
19. Ensure that the plug (rivet) is crimped into the
housing, on the end of the lube pipe to the reversedrive idling gear.
20. If necessary, overhaul synchromesh (34) (see General and operation, section 5A01).
21. If it was removed, refit washer (29) on shaft (2) then
fit cone (3) in abutment on the washer, using a press
and a suitable fixture.
22. Lubricate the shaft, the cones and the bearing cups.
23. Assemble gear (19) and bush (6) by positioning the
inner recess towards drive hub (27) of the assembly
comprising (34), needle roller bearings (5), cones
(23), rings (21), rings (22), synchromesh flanges
(24), gear (28) and needle roller bearings (4).
31
32
24. Refit the assembly comprising pinions (19) and (28),

synchro (34) and washer (7) (Fig. 3).
25. Centre the washer. Insert secondary shaft (2) through
the front bore in the housing, into the pinion / synchro
assembly.
26. Install shaft (2), with shoulder E in contact with the
synchromesh hub (Fig. 4).
Note: If shimming of the secondary shaft proves
to be necessary, see C, otherwise continue the
assembly operation.
30
2
28
34
19
7
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

27. Fit cup (30), shims (1) and retaining plate (32) (Fig. 4).
28. Coat screw (31) with Loctite 241 or equivalent;
install and torque to 25 - 32 Nm (Fig. 4).
29. Manually check the axial play and rotation of pinions
(19) and (28) and shaft (2).
Note: If shimming of the reverse-drive idling
gear proves to be necessary, see D otherwise
continue the assembly operation.
30. Fit idling gear (17) fitted with spacer ring (16), bearing
cones (12) (13) and shaft (14).
31. Apply a light quantity of Loctite 241 or equivalent to
screw (11); install and torque to 40 - 56 Nm.
32. Check with fingers for for normal backlash of gear
(17) and rotation of the complete gear train.
33. Fit roller bearing (10).
5B05.7
Fig. 5
C . Preparing and shimming the secondary shaft
P1 = 0,10 / 0,20 mm
34. Position the housing in a vice.
Preliminary steps
35. Calculate shim thickness E (1) to obtain a temporary
clearance of 0.10 to 0.20 mm maximum.
36. Position cup (30), shims (1) as calculated earlier, and
retaining plate (32).
37. Install and provisionally tighten screw (31) without
Loctite to 25 - 32 Nm.
Shimming (Fig. 5 and 6)

38. Place the feeler of a dial gauge on the extremity of
shaft (2).
39. Exert a hard pull on the shaft, rotating it alternately
right and left in order to correctly seat the cones in the
bearing cups.
40. Adjust the dial gauge pointer to zero.
41. Repeat operation 39, this time pushing on the shaft.
42. Depending on the clearance value J obtained, select
a new thickness of shims C (1) to obtain a preload:
P1 = 0.10 to 0.20 mm
According to the formula: C = E + J + P1
Note: If possible, set at the top value of the
tolerance.
43. Remove screw (31), remove retaining plate (32).
44. Fit final shims (1) selected at operation 42, on cup
(30). Reinstall the retaining plate. Install and torque
screw (31) as described at operation 28.
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

5B05.8
D . Preparing and shimming the reverse drive idling gear
14
45. Position the housing in a vice.
Preparation
46. Install minimum spacer ring (16) in the groove of
gear (17) then fit cups (15) and (18) in abutment on
the segment.
47. Position gear (17) per Fig. 7 and cones (12) and (13)
on the housing. Slide shaft (14).
48. Install screw (11) (Fig. 7) without Loctite, and torque
to 40-56 Nm.
49. Adjust shims (Fig. 8) to obtain a clearance:
J2 = 0.05 to 0.18 mm.
13
17
12
11
Fig. 7
Shimming
50. Apply the feeler of a dial gauge to gear (17) (Fig. 7).
51. Exert a hard push on the gear, alternately rotating to
right and left in order to seat the cones correctly in the
cups.
52. Adjust the dial gauge to zero.
53. Repeat operation 51, this time pulling on the shaft.
54. Depending on the value read on the dial gauge, select
the definitive spacer ring (16) to obtain J2.
55. If necessary, remove gear (17). Drive out cups (15)
and (18). Remove spacer ring (16).
Fit the spacer ring selected at operation 54.
Fit the cups. Reinstall the gear. Repeat operation 30.
56. Coat screw (11) with Loctite 241 or equivalent,
install and definitively torque to 40 - 56 Nm.
57. Check with fingers for normal backlash at gear (17)
and rotation of the gear train.
Issue 1
May 2001
0,05 //0,18
J2J2==0,05
0,18mm
mm
Fig. 8
5B05.9
58. Reassemble the Dynashift (see section 5B03).
59. Reassemble the reverse shuttle fork, the selector
rail and the locking device (see section 5D01).
60. Refit the input housing (see section 5B01).
62. Refit the hydraulic clutch (pressure loaded) (see
section 4A01).
64. Service the oil in the sumps and check the level on
the sightglass located on the left of the centre
housing.
65. If necessary, bleed the hydraulically controlled clutch
(see section 9I01).
66. Proceed to road test of all Dynashift controls (reverse
shuttle and ratios A, B, C, D).
67. Check the leaktightness of the hydraulic connections and the mating face of the selector cover.
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox Power Shuttle
5B06.1
5 B06 Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the front clutch ___________________
11
B.
Disassembling and reassembling the front clutch _________
12
C.
Shimming the front clutch _______________________________
15
D.
Disassembling and reassembling the rear clutch __________
16
E.
Disassembling and reassembling the driving pinion Shimming the shaft _____________________________________
20
Service tools ___________________________________________
23
F.
Issue 1
May 2002

5B06.2
Issue 1
May 2002

General
- The power shuttle, also called I.S.C., consists of two
electro-hydraulically controlled clutches. It is so designed as to allow for reverse direction under load and
can be fitted in parallel to the mechanical reverse
shuttle to all 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors
equipped with Heavy Duty transmission.
- The power shuttle transmits the movement from the
engine to the layshaft mounted on the front of the main
gearbox by means of pinions located respectively to the
rear of the input unit and at the gearbox input.
- A lever, mounted to the left under the steering wheel,
controls both the power shuttle and A, B, C, D gear
range of the Dynashift. It is also fitted with a position
especially used for manual de-clutching of the transmission.
- Depending on the position selected by the operator
(forward, neutral, reverse or manual de-clutching), the
lever manages the progressive solenoid valves of the
front and rear clutches by means of the electronic
system of the tractor.
- The solenoid valves are located to the front and to the
right of the gearbox on a clutch unit integrating the
Dynashift hydraulic control system. A filter (60 microns) located under the right-hand selector cover,
upstream of the clutch units, provides additional filtering for oil supplying the solenoid valves (Dynashift
clutches).
- A progressive sensor, screwed to the top of the box
housing, sends shaft rotational speed information to the
electronic system.
- Shifting of any forward gear to the corresponding
reverse gear, or vice versa, is easy without de-clutching or stopping the tractor. This assisted gear reversal enables gradual changing of the operating direction, even at high travel speeds without abrupt changes
in speed. The clutches slow down tractor movement
until the required speed is reached so that the direction
of operation can be reversed.
- The traditional hydraulically operated clutch pedal is
replaced by an electro-hydraulic action maneuvering
pedal. This pedal modulates the pressure in the front or
rear clutches through the electronic system of the
tractor and thus facilitates precise movements such as
hitching tools.
5B06.3
Design
The front and rear clutches of the Power Shuttle are of
different design.
The front clutch consists of:
- a conventional type oil-bath multi-disc clutch consisting of a cover (33), the rear side of which is splined to
assemble the input sun gear (53),
- an input shaft (19) passing through the clutch cover
plate (4) that separates the engine flywheel from the
transmission oil. The shaft is constantly meshed with
the damper secured to the engine flywheel. It is splined
so as to rotate with the clutch unit (18) comprising the
intermediate plates (30) and the discs (29) in which
piston (28) moves,
- a drive hub (27) comprising the discs (29) and integral
with the primary shaft (55). The front clutch is centered
in the cover (38) of the rear clutch by ball bearing (32).
The rear clutch consists of :
- an epicyclic gear train consisting of three double pinion
gears (52) and three single pinion gears (59),
- a hydraulic braking device for planet carrier (49),
- a cover (38) supporting the front clutch and with an inner
side machined to assemble hydraulic parts.
- The double and single pinion gears (52) (59) of the
epicyclic gear train mesh respectively on the input and
output sun gears (53) (58). The pins (50) are mounted
idle and held in the planet carrier by plates (63). A central
drilled channel and radial ports supply lubrication to
needle bearings (60).
- The planet carrier braking device consists of an annular
piston (39) and a plate (43) that is loaded by springs (62)
and discs (47) integral with the planet carrier through
splines.
- The intermediate plates (46) are immobilised by the
pins (71).
- The fixed unit (1) performs two functions:
. it receives the low pressure supplying the front clutch
via pipe (74),
. it acts as the body of the clutch lubricating and cooling
pump.
Issue 1
May 2002

5B06.4
The pipes (31) (86) connecting the pump unit (1) and
cover (38) lubricate the rear clutch braking device. The
pipe (87) provides the hydraulic link to the lubrication
diagnostics connector.
The shims (3) located between clutch cover plate (4) and
the fixed pump unit (1) provide the axial clearance for the
front clutch.
Drive from the power shuttle is transmitted to a mechanical unit located in the rear compartment of the input box.
This unit comprises:

- a secondary shaft (1) and helical pinion (2) machined
in one piece (Fig. 1).
The shaft is mounted on two taper roller bearings having
different cross-sections and is carried by two bearings
(Fig. 1).
The shims (3) (Fig. 1) fitted between bearing cup (16) and
the rear casing (5) are used to preload the bearings.
16
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2002

Operating principle
Front clutch
When the lever under the steering wheel is in the Forward
position, the solenoid valve is activated and supplies a
pressure that moves piston (28). This, in turn, compresses the intermediate plates (30) and the discs (29)
against cover (33). The movement from the engine to the
gearbox complies with the following kinematics:
- input shaft (19) splined to unit (18)
- front clutch unit (18)
- intermediate plates (30)
- discs (29) compressed by the piston (28)
- hub (27)
- primary shaft (55)
- main box layshaft via the input pinion.
Simultaneously, the pressure applied behind piston (39)
of the braking device drops and the planet carrier assembly (discs (47), intermediate plates (46) and epicyclic
gear train) rotate freely.
Remark: When the control lever is pulled towards the
steering wheel, a "manual de-clutching" position of the
front clutch is produced.
Lubrication
During forward operation, the oil flow from the centre
housing via the pump (14) is directed towards the
intermediate plates (30) and the discs (29) via the ports
of the front clutch unit (18) opened by movement of
piston (28).
At the same time, lubrication of the braking device of the
planet carrier (discs (47) and intermediate plates (46)) of
the rear clutch is interrupted.
Rear clutch
When the previously mentioned lever is moved from the
Forward to Reverse position, the solenoid valve concerned is activated and supplies the piston (39) of the
braking device of the planet carrier. The piston then
presses on plate (43) which compresses discs (47) and
the intermediate plates (46) against the front cover of the
input unit and stops the rotation of the planet carrier. The
movement from the engine is directly transmitted to
cover (33) that is integral with the input sun gear (53) via
splines, without passing through the discs and intermediate plates of the front clutch. Simultaneously, the
pressure of oil in piston chamber (28) drops and frees
discs (29) and intermediate plates (30).
5B06.5
The input sun gear then drives the double pinion gears
(52) freely mounted on the pins (50) which, in turn, drive
the single pinion gear (59), integral with primary shaft (55)
thus reversing rotation of the output sun gear (58) splined
to the primary shaft (55). The primary shaft then sends
the movement from the engine to the layshaft of the main
gearbox via the input pinion.
Remark: As with Forward operation, simply pull the
control lever towards the steering wheel to obtain the
manual de-clutching of the rear clutch. A valve screwed
to the top of cover (38) ensures a small permanent bleed
starting from 13 bar to provide an automatic bleed of the
hydraulic supply of piston (39).
Lubrication
As piston (39) moves, it operates spools (44) that act as
valves and compress springs (45) via plate (43). The
spools have a drilled center channel and radial ports,
allowing oil to flow to the channels in cover (38) and the
channels in the front cover of the input unit, thus lubricating the discs (47) and the intermediate plates (46).
Lubrication of the mechanical parts of the epicyclic gear
train is via the lubricating system of the input unit.
At the same time, the lubricating oil flow to discs (29) and
intermediate plates (30) of the front clutch is stopped,
thus halting any possible driving of the discs through a
drag effect.
Neutral position
In neutral position, the supply to the solenoid valves is
cut, placing the front and rear clutches at rest and
eliminating transmission of the engine movement to the
gearbox.
The oil flow is also interrupted. The pressure in the circuit
opens the valve (1) (Fig. 17) and directs the oil to the
housing.
Note: After replacement of a solenoid valve or solenoid, power shuttle hydraulic unit or one of the
components of the transmission control unit, it is
necessary to carry out clutch calibration again (see
section 11).
Issue 1
May 2002

5B06.6
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
(69)
(70)
(71)
(72)
(73)
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)
(78)
(79)
(80)
(81)
(82)
(83)
(84)
(85)
(86)
(87)
(88)
(90)
(91)
(93)
(94)
(95)
(96)
(97)
(98)
(99)
Pump unit
Pump cover
Shim(s)
Clutch cover plate
Locking ring
Splined ring
Oring
Anti-extrusion ring
Snap ring
Seal
Circlip
Ball bearing
Screw
Lubricating pump
Sealing rings
Ring
Centering pin
Front clutch unit
Input shaft
Pin
Circlip
Ball bearing
Snap ring
Seal
Belleville washers
Indexing ports
Drive hub
Front clutch piston
Front clutch discs
Front clutch intermediate plates
Lubricating pipe
Ball bearing
Front clutch cover
Planet carrier cover
Rivets
Seal
Rear clutch cover
Rear clutch piston
Rivets
Seal
Seal
Plate
Spools
Springs
Rear clutch intermediate plates
Rear clutch discs
Ring restrictor
Planet carrier
Pinion gear pin
Spacers
Double pinion gear
Input sun gear
Snap ring
Issue 1
Primary shaft
Snap ring
Ball bearing
Output sun gear
Single pinion gear
Needle bearings
Snap rings
Springs
Stop plates
Screw
Snap ring
Screw
Oring
Ball bearing
Seal
Screw
Pin
Unions
1.5 bar valve
Pipe
Orings
Pipe (17 bar rear clutch)
13 bar valve
Pipe (shuttle lubrication)
Screw
Flange
Seal
500 micron strainer
Union
Plug
Seal
Lubricating pipe
Pipe
Union
Diagnostics connector (lubrication)
Union
Union
Pipe
Orings
Union
Screw
Snap ring
Screw
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
May 2002
5B06.7
Overall view
38
33
70
32
72
35
34
36
38
40
42
43
45
44
64
46
A
47
48
49
B
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
50
18
86
51
10
30
52
29
53
28
54
26
55
19
56
24
61
31
20
3
2
25
57
18
98
69
58
68
59
C
67
60
21
23
22
66
27
65
71
41
39
63
54
Fig. 3
38
43
62
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 2

5B06.8
Overall view
73
31
72
86
76
72
75
88
74
75
89
83
91
Lubrication Dynashift
96
90
75
95
97
94
67
87
93
78
82
Hydraulic control unit
79
80
81
85
84
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 4
5B06.9
Exploded view
Front clutch
Rear clutch
65
45
33
44
27
54
77
53
32
29
30
46
62
47
71
49
6
17
9
57
43
56
42
98
41
63
36
25
52
39
15
60
38
40
51
70
60
50
63
21
34
19
99
22
2
28
13
59
24
23
60
69
51
18
12
60
66
11
50
20
61
68
58
16
61
1
14
Fig. 2
73
Fig. 4
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2002

5B06.10
Issue 1
May 2002
5B06.11
Final operations
A . Removing and refitting the front

clutch
10. Replace the pipe seals (74) (94).

11. Refit the pipes, carry out operation 5 in reverse order.
12. Replace the pipe seals (78) and refit them the pipe.
Tighten the flange holding screw at each end of the
pipe to a torque of 25 Nm - 35 Nm.
13. Refit the gearbox clutch cover plate (see section
3C02).
14. Top up the housing oil level and check it with the
sight glass located at the rear left of the centre
housing.
16. Carry out a road test using the power shuttle and
using ratios A, B, C and D of the Dynashift.
17. Check oil tightness of the mating faces and hydraulic
unions.
(see section 2B01).
2. Drain the gearbox and the centre housing.
3. Remove the clutch cover plate from the gearbox (see
section 3C02).
4. Remove the flange from each end of the pipe (78) and
remove it (Fig. 3).
5. Remove pipes (31) (74) (86) (87) and (94).
Removal
6. Remove the front clutch (2) (Fig. 5) and pull it from the
housing using a locally made tool (see F).
Refitting
7. Clean the parts. Replace any defective ones.
Remark: If front clutch shimming is necessary,
refer to C.
8. Check that PTO shaft (1) is installed (Fig. 5).
9. Refit the clutch using the tool used for removal.
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002
5B06.12

the front clutch
Disassembly
18. Separate cover (33) from unit (18). Remove the discs
(29) and the intermediate plates (30).
19. Remove the front snap ring (9). Remove the splined
ring (6), the anti-extrusion rings (8) and seal (7).
20. Remove circlip (11), take off cover (2) from the pump
(14) complete with bearing (12).
21. Pull the lubricating pump out of the pump unit (1) and
take it apart from the clutch housing (18).
22. Remove seal rings (15). If necessary, extract ring
(16) and remove the 1.5 bar valve (73).
23. Place the partially disassembled clutch on a suitable
locally made fixture (Fig. 6) (see F).
24. Compress the Belleville washers (25) and remove
the rear snap ring (9) (Fig. 6).
25. Remove locking ring (5). Gradually release the
Belleville washers.
26. Split unit (18) fitted with piston (28) from shaft (19).
27. Remove the Belleville washers.

28. Remove snap ring (23). Pull out the shaft (19)
complete with bearing (22) from hub (27).
29. Remove the circlip (21). Extract the bearing (22) from
shaft (19).
30. Remove the piston. Remove seals (24) (69) and
discard them. If necessary, extract the bearing (68)
from unit (18).
31. If necessary, remove snap ring (54) and remove the
input sun gear (53). Remove snap ring (65). Extract
bearing (32).
Reassembly
32. Make sure that pin (20) is fitted.
33. If removed, fit the bearing (32) on cover (33), using
a press and a suitable tool. Install snap ring (65).
34. If disassembled, refit bearing (68).
40. Lubricate the new seals (24) (69) and fit them on the
piston.
25
F
F
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002

36. Fitting piston (28).
Remark: The angular position of the piston depends
on the position of unit (18) lubricating ports. Align the
indexing holes drilled in the unit and the piston (Fig. 7).
To align, use a pin of a suitable diameter. Complete
the installation of the piston by gradually and alternately striking around its top rim with a plastic
mallet. Check that there are no fragments of the seal
after assembly.
37. Using a suitable tool, force fit bearing (22) on shaft
(19), the seal side facing towards the rear clutch. Fit
circlip (21).
38. Put the assembly (shaft, bearing, circlip) in the hub
(27). Fit the snap ring (23).
39. Refit the Belleville washers as shown in Fig. 8.
Remark: 8200 series tractors are fitted with six
Belleville washers.
40. Assemble unit (18) fitted with the piston (28) on shaft
(19).
41. Compress the Belleville washers using the tool used
in operation 23. Position ring (5), aligning two of the
flats with the flats on unit (18). Replace the rear snap
ring (9) and correctly position it in the bottom of the
groove.
42. Remove the fixture.
43. Check that the seal rings (15) turn freely in their
grooves. Fit the seal rings, lightly coated with miscible grease, making sure that they do not protrude
beyond the rim of unit (18).
44. If necessary, fit the 1.5 bar valve (73) and tighten to
a torque of 47 - 54 Nm. Insert ring (16) using a
suitable fixture, with the chamfer C in the direction
shown in Fig. 9.
45. Lubricate the bush. Assemble pump unit (1) on unit
(18).
46. Lubricate pump (14) with transmission oil and position it aligning the flats of the rotor with those on the
unit (18).
47. Manually check the angular movement of the rotor
on the flats of unit (18).
48. Fit bearing (12) on cover (2) of the pump. Fit the
cover. Install circlip (11) and screws (13) and tighten
to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm.
49. Lubricate and install a new assembly (Oring (7) and
anti-extrusion ring (8)). Slide on the splined bush (6).
Fit a new front snap ring (9).
50. Soak the discs (29) in a transmission oil bath for
approximately 1 hour. Check that they are correctly
saturated.
5B06.13
18
28
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
16
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2002

5B06.14
51. Position the intermediate plates (30), aligning the

tabs and the discs (29) on hub (27) according to the
type of tractor (see remark and Fig. 10).
Remarks:
- 8210 to 8220 tractors: 6 discs and 6 intermediate plates.
- 8240 tractors: 7 discs and 7 intermediate plates.
- 8250 tractors: 8 discs and 8 intermediate plates.
52. Lightly smear the mating face of the clutch cover
(33) on the unit (18) with Loctite 549 or its equivalent.
Place the cover on the unit, the tabs of the intermediate plates lodged in the cut out notches on the
clutch cover.
Fit and tighten screws (66) to 25.5 - 34.5 Nm.
53. Manually check the rotation of the hub (27).
54. If necessary, refit the input sun gear (53) and fit snap
ring (54).
Issue 1
May 2002
29
27
30
Fig. 10
5B06.15
C . Shimming the front clutch

This operation consists in obtaining an axial clearance J1
of 0.60 to 0.80 mm between the pump cover (2) and
clutch cover plate (4) (Fig. 11).
Remark
To carry out this operation, remove the PTO shaft so as
to remove the effect of the spring fitted at the rear end of
the shaft to alow the clutch assembly to move.
55. Refit the clutch on cover (38) of the rear clutch, using
a locally made tool as in Fig. 5, A.
56. Place a approx. thick 2 mm shim (3) on cover (2)
(Fig. 11).
57. Lubricate the lip of the cover plate seal . Protect the
lip of the seal by fitting a protective material (see
section 3C02) over the splines of the shaft (19). Fit
two guide studs on opposite sides of the gearbox
housing and temporarily install the clutch cover plate
(4) without using Loctite. Gradually tighten several screws.
58. Place a dial gauge at the end of shaft (19) and check
the clearance by moving the shaft sideways (Fig. 11).
Note: Check that the snap ring (65) of bearing (32)
is correctly in contact with cover (38) (Fig. 11) by
pushing the shaft (19) back as far as possible.
59. Remove clutch cover plate (4). Depending on the
reading previously obtained with the dial gauge,
define a new thickness for shim(s) (3) in order to
obtain a J1 clearance of between 0.60 mm and
0.80 mm (Fig. 11).
65
38
4
3
19
32
J1 = 0,60/0,80 mm
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002

5B06.16

the rear clutch
60. Remove the front clutch (see A).
61. Remove the input unit (see section 5B02).
64. Remove the thick springs (62) and the pins (71).
65. On cover (38), remove:
- the plate (43)
- the seal (42) and discard it
- the piston (39)
- the seals (36) (41) and discard them
- the unions (72), the 13 bar valve (77) (Fig. 17) and
seal (75) on the 17 bar supply port (Fig. 3).

62. Remove the screws (70) and remove the cover (38).
63. Recover the spools (44) and the springs (45).
61
70
38
58
99
56
34
17
98
61
44
62
45
71
55
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2002

66. Immobilise planet carrier (49) with tool ref.
3378240M1 (see fig. 12A and F).
67. Remove screws (99) securing the cover (34) (Fig. 12
-12A) and remove it.
68. Remove the discs (47) and the intermediate plates
(46).
69. Separate the output sun gear (58), held by the snap
rings (61), from the primary shaft (55) (Fig. 12).
70. Remove snap ring (98) (Fig. 12).
71. Remove the planet carrier (49) with the double and
single pinion gears (52) (59).
72. On the planet carrier (49), remove:
- the plates (63)
- the double pinion gears (52) and the pins (50). Note
and mark their location.
- the single pinion gears (59) and pins (50). Note and
mark their location.
- the snap ring (56) and bearing (57).
Remarks:
- rotation of pinion gears around the pins (50) is
on two rows of needle bearings (60), joined and
separated by a spacer (51).
Important:
- if the pinion gears and the pins are to be
removed, check that no unwanted needle or
spacer remains in the planet carrier after refitting.
5B06.17
99
34
49
Fig. 12A
59
49
52
Reassembly
73. Clean and check all parts. Replace any defective
ones.
74. Check that the ports in the pinion gear pins and the
channels in the planet carriers are not clogged.
75. Where necessary, fit the pinion gears with two rows
of needle bearings coated with miscible grease and
separated by a spacer.
76. On the planet carrier, refit:
- bearing (57) and position snap ring (56 ),
- the double and single pinion gears (52) (59) positioned as shown in Fig. 13,
- pins (50), with the lubricating ports placed facing
those in the planet carrier (49).
Fig. 13
Special points
Each end of the pins (50) contains:
- a port, one of which is closed off by a rivet (35) while
the other is used for pinion gear lubrication,
- a flat and a shoulder that stop any pin rotation or any
side movement.
Issue 1
May 2002

5B06.18
77. Install the partially assembled planet carrier. Fit the

snap ring (98) and the rear snap ring (61) on the output
sun gear (58).
78. Position marks "R" (punch marks) on the double
pinion gears (52) (Fig. 14) so that they pass through
a centerline meeting at "O" (Fig. 14).
Remark : The mark on the front side of the planet
carrier corresponds to the alignment of the two
splines. It is mandatory to respect these positions of the punch marks during assembly of the
output sun gear (58).
79. Slide the output sun gear (58), correctly oriented as
shown in Fig. 2, on to the primary shaft (55), making
sure that the punch marks of each pinion gear remain
in the required position.
80. Fit the front snap ring (61).
81. Soak the discs (47) in a transmission oil bath for
approximately 1 hour. Check that they are correctly
saturated.
82. Fit the discs (47) and the intermediate plates (46)
depending on the type of tractor (see Remark and
Fig. 15).
Remark:
- 8210 - 8220 tractors: 5 discs - 4 intermediate
plates
- 8240 and 8250 tractors: 6 discs - 5 intermediate
plates.
83. Check that the centering pin (17) is fitted (Fig. 12).
84. Refit cover (34). Check that it is correctly positioned
on the pins (50) of the pinion gears and in the
centering pin (Fig. 12).
85. Immobilise the planet carrier, using the same method
as used during disassembly.
86. Fit and tighten screws (99) (Fig. 12) to a torque of
36 - 46 Nm with the threads previously lightly
smeared with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
87. On cover (38), check for the presence of rivets (40)
at the end of the channels and refit:
- piston (39) with new lubricated seals (36) (41),
gradually and alternately striking around the piston
rim with a plastic mallet. Check that no fragments
of the seal remain after assembly,
- plate (43) with a new lubricated seal (42), aligning
the holes of the plate with those in the cover (38).
Insert the plate using the same method as used for
piston (39).
Remark : The thickness of the plate (43) differs
according to the number of discs and intermediate plates.
Issue 1
May 2002
R
52
52
"0"
Fig. 14
62
47
46
71
Fig. 15

88. Refit pins (71) and springs (62) (Figs. 15 -16) in their
respective locations on the input unit.
89. Coat the spools (44) and the springs (45) with miscible grease. Fit and stick the spools in each compartment of cover (38), with the points towards the
unions (72) (Fig. 2). Slide and stick a spring (45) in
each spool.
90. On the outside face of the cover (38), place three
sufficiently long and equally spaced studs in the
holes provided for screws (64).
91. Fit and position the cover, with the 13 bar valve port
(77) turned upwards (Fig. 17).
Important : Before fitting screws (70), check that
the spools (44) slide freely in each compartment
of the front cover on the input unit.
To do this, compress the springs (45), using a
screwdriver passed through the tapped holes of
the unions (72).
Remark: If the springs cannot be compressed, it
is important to find the reason.
92. Pre-tighten screws (70).
93. During pre-tightening, check that the spools (44) still
slide freely. Also check that each end of the (thick
section) springs (62) are correctly housed in their
bases.
94. Definitively tighten the screws (70) (Fig. 12) to a
torque of 29 - 37 Nm. After completing the tightening, check the sliding movement again and return of
each spool to its initial position.
Remark: A spool that is blocked open may limit
or interrupt lubrication to the front clutch.
95. Install the 13 bar valve (77) with its seal on cover (38)
and tighten to a torque of 12.5 Nm - 13.5 Nm maximum. (Fig. 17). Fit and tighten the unions (72).
5B06.19
38
P
44
45
71
Final operation
62
Fig. 16
96. Install the input unit (see section 5B02) and the front
clutch (see A).
77
38
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2002

5B06.20
E . Disassembling and reassembling

the driving pinion - Shimming the
shaft
Special point
The rearward position of the Dynashift, caused by the
presence of the rear shuttle clutch in the housing of the
unit, limits the space available at the rear of the input unit.
This is why the secondary shaft (1) and the pinion (2) are
machined as a single component (Fig. 19).
97.
98.
99.
100.
Remove the front clutch (see A).

Remove the input unit (see section 5B02).
Remove the rear clutch (see D).
Remove the Dynashift device (see section 5B04).

Reminder:
- Pair bearing cones and bearing cups together if they are
to be re-used.
101. Remove screws (13) and casing (5). Recover the
locating pin (4).
102. Where necessary, remove bearing cup (16) and
shims (3).
103. Take out the secondary shaft (1), pinion and bearing
cones (7) (9) assembly from cover (14).
104. Remove bearing cup (8).
105. Where needed, separate the bearing cones from
the shaft.
106. Drive out the roller bearing (1), the gearbox front
intermediary shaft support (see section 5G01).
Take off oil deflector (2) and discard it if necessary
(Fig. 18).
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2002
5B06.21
Preparation for shimming
Reassembly (Fig. 19)

107. Check that the ports of the secondary shaft are not
clogged and check for the presence of lubrication
restrictor "R"
108. Clean and check parts. Replace any defective
ones.
109. Lubricate the bearing cones and cups with transmission oil before assembly.
110. Insert bearing cones (7) (9) in contact with pinion (2)
using a suitable press and fixture.
111. Place the bearing cup (8) in cover (14).
112. Refit the secondary shaft (1), pinion and bearing
cones assembly inside the cover.
13
113. Determine the thickness of shims (3) required in

order to obtain a temporary clearance of 0.10 mm
to 0.15 mm approximately. For the definitive shimming with pre-loading, see the following paragraphs.
114. Place the previously determined shims in casing
(5) followed by the bearing cup (16).
115. Place the locating pin (4) and the unit on cover (14).
Tighten screws (13) to a torque of 29 - 37 Nm.
116. Place the unit in a vice with jaw protectors, and
carry out a definitive shimming of the shaft.
16
9
8
14
R
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2002

5B06.22
Shimming the shaft (1) (Figs. 19 - 20)

Remark:
- The principle consists in determining a thickness of
shims (3) to fit between the bearing cup of bearing (16)
and casing (5) (Fig. 19).
Reminder:
- It is recommended to remove oil deflector (2) (Fig. 18)
in order to avoid any interference between it and the
shaft (1) (Fig. 19).
117. Position the feeler of the dial gauge on the end of the
shaft.
118. Pull hard on shaft (1), alternately turning it from left
to right in order to correctly seat the cones in the
bearing cups.
119. Set the needle of the dial gauge to zero.
120. Repeat operation 118 this time while pushing.
121. Depending on the clearance measured (Fig. 20),
select a new shim thickness (3) to provide a P1 preloading of:
P1 = 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm
Note:
- Where possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.
122. Remove screws (13). Remove casing (5).
123. Position the definitive shims (3) selected during
operation 121 along with bearing cup (16) in the
casing (5).
124. Refit the casing, shim(s) and bearing cup assembly on cover 14, first checking for the presence of
locating pin (4).
125. Fit and definitively tighten screws (13) to a torque
of 29 - 37 Nm, the threads previously smeared
126. Manually check the rotation of the shaft.
127. Turn the oil deflector (2) in accordance with Fig. 18
and insert the roller bearing (1) in thrust against the
unit housing.
Final operations
128.
129.
130.
131.
Refit the Dynashift device (see section 5B04).

Refit the rear clutch (see D).
Refit the input unit (see section 5B02).
Refit the front clutch (see A).
Issue 1
May 2002
1
3
P1=0,05 / 0,15mm
Fig. 20
5B06.23
F . Service tools
1. Tools available in the AGCO network
- 3378240 M1 - Planetary carrier immobilizing tool
(Fig. 21)
2. Locally made tools

- Sleeve for removing and refitting the clutch assembly (Fig. 22)
(1) - Pipe: Tu52B, external 42.4, thickness 5
(2) - Pipe: Tu52B, external 48.3, thickness 2.9
- Belleville washer compression tool (Fig. 23)
(1) U iron profile: 60
(2) Threaded rod: 8
(3) Round iron machined with the following dimensions:
= 36, L = 60.
Fig. 21
86
1
23
80
86
2
100
165
Fig. 22
180
248
60
286
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2002
Gearbox - Selector cover
5C01.1
5 C01 Selector cover
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Operation ______________________________________________
B.
Removing and refitting the cover _________________________
C.
Replacing the Hare/Tortoise piston seals _________________
12
D.
Disassembling and reassembling the selector mechanisms
12
E.
Installing and adjusting the gear linkage and reverse shuttle

control cables (tractors with cabs) _______________________
14
F.
Version for tractors with platforms _______________________
18
G.
Adjusting the Hare/Tortoise range ________________________
22
H.
Service tools ___________________________________________
23
Issue 1
December 2000

5C01.2
General
8200-series tractors with a mechanical reverse shuttle
are equipped with either a cab or a platform and a selector
cover of similar construction. For the version with the
footstep, see F.
The selector cover, installed on the right-hand side of the
housing on the Heavy Duty gearbox, has two separate
levers providing two different functions:
- front lever - for controlling the reverse shuttle,
- rear lever - for selecting the four basic speeds and the
two Hare / Tortoise ratios (Hi - Lo).
Tractors with cab

- Control lever (1) (Fig. 3) mounted on the left-hand part
of the instrument panel fascia actuates the reverse
shuttle via a control cable.
- Control lever (2) (Fig. 3) located above and to the right
of the console selects the four basic speeds and also
acts on the Hare/Tortoise function, via a rod and cable.
Special point
When the tractor is stopped, cell C mounted on a
bracket on the selector cover (Fig. 3) informs the user
that a gear has remained engaged, and that the handbrake is on.
The warning is issued by a buzzer located under the
instrument panel surround.
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
Return ports
Grounding lug
Screw
Temperature probe with seal.
Seal
Shouldered ring
Selector cover
Finger-pin assembly (reverse shuttle)
Finger-pin assembly (speeds)
Grid
Screw
Spring
Spring cup
Spring cup
Spring
Spring cup
Seal
Shouldered ring
Seal(s)
Hare / Tortoise switch
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 21
May 2002
December
2000
5C01.3
Overall view
12
13
14
15
16
20
1.2
19
11
10
18
17
3.4
20
7
8
3
1
S
5
7
3
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
5C01.4
Exploded view
9
12
13
11
10
14
15
16
7
1
18
17
6
2
1
3
4
19
20
5
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
5C01.5
1/2
2
1
Z
9
1
3/4
C
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001

5C01.6
Issue 1
May 2001
5C01.7
A . Operation
Reverse / Forward lever
On tractors with cabs, lever (1) (Fig. 3) has the following
positions:
- upwards (forward drive)
- downwards (reverse drive)
Moving lever (1) (Fig. 3) results in rotation of the pin which
is hard-mounted to finger (8); the follower moves selector S (Fig. 1).
Gear lever
Selecting 1st / 2nd gear
- Gear lever (2) pushes lever L (Fig. 3) and engages
finger (9) in the 1st / 2nd gear selector fork (Fig. 1).
- The first ratio is obtained by moving lever L upwards,
and the second ratio by moving it downwards.
Selecting 3rd / 4th gear
- In this configuration, gear lever (2) (Fig. 3) is in the
intermediate position; finger (9) integral with shaft A
is engaged in the 3rd / 4th gear selector fork (Fig. 1).
- The third ratio is obtained by moving lever L upwards,
and the fourth ratio by moving it downwards.
Safety interlock (see section 5D01)

- A locking system located on the rear face of the gearbox, on the end of the selector rails, prohibits accidental
gearshifting.
Issue 1
May 2001
5C01.8
Hare / Tortoise function
Tortoise position (Fig. 4)

Moving switch (20) (Fig. 1) again causes opening of
solenoid valve (1) (Fig. 4).
Oil pressurised at 17 bar arrives in chamber "B". Since the
pressure acting on the large diameter of the piston is
greater than that acting on the annular face, it forces the
piston to retract, driving selector "S" and fork "F1" towards
the Tortoise position. The oil contained in chamber "A"
returns to the 17 bar circuit.
Identification of components (Fig. 4)

(1) Solenoid valve
(2) Oring
(3) Piston
(4) Bearing
(5) Orings
(6) Circlip
(7) Selector cover
Selecting the Hare / Tortoise range is done with the gear
lever in the neutral position, by pulling lever "L" towards
the outside of cover (Fig. 3). Finger (9) presses the end
of switch (20) (Fig. 1) which informs the electronic
system that the Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve can be
switched.

The Hare/Tortoise selector rail is also locked in each of
its positions (Hare or Tortoise) for the first to fourth gear
positions, under the same system as stated previously.
Hare position (Fig. 4)

Solenoid valve (1) mounted on selector cover (7) is
closed, which causes a pressure drop in chamber "B".
The constant pressure (17 bar) in chamber "A"is applied
to the annular face of piston (3), which moves forward
and entrains fork "F1" towards the Hare position under the
action of selector "S".
The oil contained in chamber "B" returns to the sump via
the solenoid valve.
P
F1
S
A
B
Issue 1
May 2001
17 bar
Fig. 4
5C01.9
B . Removing and refitting the cover

12
2
11
1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the left rear wheel. Set

the handbrake.
2. Place chocks between the frame and the front axle.
3. Remove the right rear wheel or set to wide tread.
Install an axle stand if necessary.
4. Pivot the footstep assembly and battery chest or
remove any neighbouring parts likely to impede
removal of the selector cover (depending on version).
6. Disconnect the electrical harnesses on the cover.
7. Unscrew the tube and hose unions.
6
4
11
5
3
Fig. 5
Removal
Tractors with cabs
Gear control (Fig. 5)
8. Disconnect the harness from cell "C" (Fig. 3). Remove ball joint (4). Remove screw (3).
9. Remove pins (11). Disconnect ball joint (5).
10. Note the adjustment of cable (6). Slightly loosen
upper nut (12) and separate the cable from bracket
(2).
Issue 1
May 2001

5C01.10
Reverse shuttle control (Fig. 6)

11. Remove clips (1). Note the adjustment of cables (2).
Loosen nuts (3). Separate the cables from bracket (4).
Note: On tractors fitted with a creeper unit, disconnect control cable (1) (Fig. 7).
12. Remove screws (3), taking care to identify the
position of grounding lug (2).
Note: If installed, remove bracket (2) supporting
the creeper control cable (Fig. 7).
13. Release and remove the selector cover.
3
Refitting
14. Clean the mating faces on the gearbox and cover.

15. Install the following parts:
On the cover: the Hare / Tortoise piston in the "Hare"
position
On the gearbox: the Hare / Tortoise fork in the "Hare"
position, the 1st / 2nd gear and 3rd / 4th-gear selector
forks and the reverse shuttle fork in the neutral position.
16. Coat the mating face of the gearbox housing with
sealing compound (Masterjoint 510 Loctite or equivalent).
2
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

17. Turn the gear and reversing control linkage on the
cover to engage them in their respective selectors
(Fig. 8) during positioning of the cover on the gearbox.
Note: Refit the bracket for the creeper control
cable (if installed).
18. Position lug (2). Install screw (3) and torque to 34 51 Nm.
Note: Depending on the option, reconnect and
adjust the creeper gear control (see section
5K01).
19. Reassemble the gear control. Reverse operations 8
to 10.
20. Reassemble the reverse shuttle control. Reverse
operation 11.
21. Use a grease gun to grease the joints of the gear
control on the selector cover.
5C01.11
Fig. 8
Final operations
22. Refit any items previously removed around the
cover.
23. Replace the wheel and torque the screws or nuts
depending on the version (see section 2G01).
sightglass located on the left-hand of the centre
housing.
25. Remove the chocks between the frame and front
axle. Release the handbrake.
26. With the engine running, check passage of all gears
and the reverse shuttle. Also check the Hare/Tortoise position. If necessary, and with the engine
stopped, adjust the controls (see E).
27. Check that the buzzer of the safety cell vibrates
correctly (contact set, handbrake on and gear engaged).
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002

5C01.12
C . Replacing the Hare/Tortoise piston seals (Fig. 4)

Disassembly
29. Remove the cover (see B).

30. Remove circlip (6). Extract piston (3) with bearing (4)
and scrap Orings (2) and (5).
Reassembly
31. Clean and check the parts; replace any that are
faulty.
32. Without installing the Orings on the piston, check
that the latter slides freely in the bore in the cover.
33. After inspection, lubricate and fit new Orings. Reverse operation 30.
34. Refit the selector cover (see B).
Note
- Replacing piston (3), bearing (4) or circlip (6) implies
checking or repeating the setting of selector "S" on the
Hare/Tortoise range (see G).

the selector mechanisms
35. Remove the cover (see B) and tighten in a soft-jaw
vice.
Disassembly
Tractors with cabs
36. Remove screws (1) and (4). Remove selector (3),
link rod (5) and bracket (2) (Fig. 9).
37. Remove the pin integral with finger (8).
38. Remove screw (11). Remove the gear control assembly.
39. Remove cup washers (14) and (16) and spring (15).
40. Separate the assembly comprising pin and finger (9)
from grid (10). Remove spring cup (13) and spring
(12).
41. If necessary, unscrew and remove Hare/Tortoise
switch (20), the threaded fittings on return ports (1),
and temperature probe (4). Recover seal(s) (19) from
the Hare / Tortoise switch.
42. Extract seals (5) and (17).
Issue 1
December 2000
5
Fig. 9
5C01.13
Reassembly
Positioning bracket (2) (Fig. 10)
Special point
If considered necessary to replace guide rings (6) and
(18), lightly coat the edges of the replacement rings with
Loctite 638 or equivalent and fit them tight so that they
come into contact with the shoulders on the cover.
49. Refit bracket (2), observing a clearance of 29 mm

between the bracket and the 22-mm diameter of
shaft A (Fig. 10). Lightly coat screw (1) with
Loctite 270 or equivalent, fit the screw and torque to
25 - 35 Nm.
Reminder: This clearance MUST be observed to
ensure correct operation of the cell (see General).
50. Reassemble linkage (3). Coat threads of screw (4)
with Loctite 241 or equivalent (Fig. 9), fit the screw
and torque to 30 -35 Nm.
43. If removed, reinstall Hare / Tortoise switch (20) with

the same number of seals as removed. Apply a light
coat of Loctite 542 to the threads of the return port
and the temperature probe unions, then refit the
unions.
44. Lightly coat the outside diameter of seals (5) (17)
with Loctite 542, then fit the seals tight onto cover
using a suitable fixture.
45. From the inside of the cover, refit the pin-finger
assembly (8) without damaging the lip of seal (5).
46. Refit reversing linkage (5). Coat the threads of screw
(4) (Fig. 9) with Loctite 241 or equivalent and install
the screw. Torque to 30 - 35 Nm.
47. Reassemble spring (12) and spring cup (13) on shaft
(9). Assemble the shaft with grid (10). Reassemble
cup washers (14) (16), with spring (15) in between.
48. Refit the pin-finger assembly (9) without damaging
the lip of seal (17). Coat threads of screw (11) with
Loctite 270 or equivalent. Install the screw and
Final operations
51. Check that the selector mechanisms move freely.
Remove the cover from the vice and refit to the
gearbox (see B).
29 mm
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001

5C01.14
E . Installing and adjusting the gear

linkage and reverse shuttle control
cables (tractors with cab)
Gear linkage (cab side)

Preparation (Fig. 11)
52. On the end of control linkage (1) representing an
angle of 166, direct ball joint (2) according to the
Figure. Tighten nut (3).
53. Screw ball joint (4) into abutment on cable (6).
Tighten nut (5).
166
1
Fitting (Fig. 11)

54. Fit bracket (7) on a work bench.
55. Fit and torque-tighten the following parts onto the
bracket:
- the gear lever
- the previously prepared control linkage and cable
56. Refit and fix the bracket on the right wheel housing
in the cab. During the operation, ensure the rod and
cable are inserted through the openings in the bulkheads. Position the rub rings.
4
5
1
Fig. 11
Gear linkage (selector cover side)

57. Fit nuts (3) and ball joint (4) on threaded rod (9) then
screw latter onto link rod (1).
58. Screw ball joint (5) fully onto cable (6). Tighten nut
(7).
12
Fitting (Fig. 12)

59. Screw and lock the other end of ball joint (5) onto cam
(8).
60. Refit bracket (2) and lever "L", then position cam (8)
and bellcrank (10). Fit pins (11) and lock using new
splitpins.
61. Install ball joint (4) on lever "L". Fit the washer and
tighten the locknut.
X
9
D
3
4
6
12
1
11
7
9
11
10
5
L
8
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001
5C01.15
Adjusting link rod (1) (Fig. 12)

62. Turn threaded rod (9) and ball joint (4) so as to obtain
a dimension "X" of 11 1 mm between nuts (3) once
latter are tightened.
Adjusting cable (6) (Fig. 12)
63. Adjust the cable stop so as to balance dimensions
"C"and "D". Tighten nuts (12) without changing the
setting.
Check for proper engagement of each gear ratio; also

check the position of the gear lever in the opening in
the control panel.
Note: This check is to be performed by temporarily
moving the boot on the gear lever.
64. Engage each gear ratio and select the Hare / Tortoise
range. During this operation, check that the lever
does not come within 5 mm of the edge of the control
panel (Fig. 13 and 14).
Fig. 13
Remark
If no interference between the lever and the control panel
is observed, the setting is correct. Put back the boot.
If the position of the lever is incorrect, return to the
adjustment on the selector cover side.
- if interference in 1st or 3rd gears (Fig. 13), reduce dimension "X" (Fig. 12).
- if interference in 2nd or 4th gears (Fig. 13), increase
dimension "X" (Fig. 12).
- by playing on dimensions "C" and "D" (Fig. 12), the gear
lever can be moved around in the control-panel opening,
as shown by the arrows in Fig. 14.
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2001

5C01.16
Reverse shuttle control cables (cab side)

65. Screw clevises (1) level with the end of the threaded
part of the cables (2).
66. Install the clevises on oscillating lever (3) and position the clips. Tighten the nuts.
67. Slide the cable stops into the notches provided on
housing (4). Position and tighten cover (5).
4
6
Fitting (Fig. 15)

68. Assemble bracket (6) to housing (4).
69. Fix housing assy (4) and bracket (6) onto the frame
of instrument panel (8). Ensure that the cables are
fed through the openings in the cab floor. Position the
feed-through ducts (7).
70. Fit the floor covering.
71. Install the surround of the instrument panel and
associated items.
72. Position the reverse/forward lever. Coat screws
with Loctite 241 and install. Fit the boot.
73. Slide the cables through the clamp located above the
4 WD transmission-shaft bearing and under the plate
connecting the engine to the gearbox.
7
3
4
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2001
5C01.17
Reverse shuttle control cables (selector cover side)

74. Screw clevises (1) level with the end of the threaded
part of cables (2).
Installation (Fig. 16)
75. Slide the cable stops (3) in the notches provided on
bracket (4).
Special feature
The cable marked with coloured adhesive tape
(represented on figure by the letter "R") must be
installed in the upper slot on bracket (4).
Should the mark be missing, position the cables in
the notches such that the position of the reverse/
forward lever in the cab represents the logical driving
position, that is:
- forward drive: lever up
- reverse drive: lever down
76. With the engine stopped, set link (5) to the neutral
position then fit the clevises. Position the clips.
Tighten the nuts.
R
4
1
Fig. 16
Adjusting cables (2) (Fig. 17)

77. Progressively and alternately adjust the tension of
the cables using cable stops (3) so that dimensions
"X" and "Y" are identical (Fig. 17). Tighten nuts (1).
After adjustment, the unbent section of reverse/
forward lever (9) must be almost horizontal (Fig. 15).
Inspection
78. Consecutively engage forward drive and reverse
drive.
79. Next check that linkage (5) (Fig. 16) locks correctly
without excessive tension in the cables.
X =Y
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2001

5C01.18
F . Version for tractors with platforms
Layout
2
1
- Two levers installed on the right floor of the footstep are

respectively connected directly with related parts on
the cover (Fig. 19). They control operation of the reverse
shuttle, selection of the four basic speeds of the
gearbox, and the Hare/Tortoise range.
Remark
The operating principle (mechanical or hydraulic) remains identical to the system employed on the cab
version. In addition, removal, refitting and disassembly
of the cover are also similar operations.
It is worth noting that the position and contour of the
levers is generally different, and that the system is
simpler and more direct than on the cab version.
Reverse / Forward lever

- On tractors with a platform, the reverse shuttle is
engaged when lever (1) (Fig. 19) is moved either
forward (for forward drive) or backwards (for reverse
drive).
- Moving lever (1) causes rotation of the pin hardmounted to finger (8), the follower moves selector "S"
(Fig. 19).
Gear lever (Fig. 19)

Selecting 1st / 2nd gear
- Gear lever (2) pushes lever "L"and engages finger (9) in
the 1st / 2nd gear fork.
- First gear is obtained by moving lever "L" forward and
second gear by moving it rearward.
Selecting 3rd / 4th gear
- In this configuration, gear lever (2) is in the intermediate
position. Finger (9) integral with shaft "A" is engaged in
the 3rd / 4th gear fork.
- The third ratio is obtained by moving lever "L" forward,
and the fourth ratio by moving it backward.
Reminder before disassembly
- Visually identify the location and position of gear lever
(2) and reversing lever (1). Remove pin (3) and setscrew (4) (Fig. 18).
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 18
Creeper unit option

- See cab version
Removal - Refitting of cover
- See cab version
If necessary, adjust the covers on the levers (see below).
Torque values (Fig. 18)
- Screw (4): 30 - 35 Nm (Loctite 241 or equivalent)
5C01.19
1.2
3.4
20
8
20
L
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2001

5C01.20
Issue 1
May 2001
5C01.21
Adjusting the covers on the gear and reversing levers

Remark
Adjusting consists in positioning the covers without their
interfering with levers (2) (3) (Fig. 20), whilst ensuring
maximum protection of the ball joints, irrespective of
which gear is engaged. Interference between the cover
and the lever may cause vibration in the stacked parts,
and possibly jumping out of gear.
1
Adjustment (Fig. 20)
Note: Before adjusting, partially coat the inside of
the covers with anti-seize grease or equivalent.
80. Set the reverse/forward lever and the gear lever to
the neutral position.
81. Loosen nuts (1). Adjust the covers according to
figure 20.
82. After adjustment, check the condition of the ball joint
in the cover, for all positions of the lever.
Tightening torque
- Nuts (1): 44 - 55 Nm
Fig. 20
Issue 1
May 2001

5C01.22
G . Adjusting the Hare/Tortoise range

On cover (7) (Fig. 21)
83. Install piston (3) fully against the bottom of the

chamber (Hare position).
84. Position the arm of service tool MF 462A in the
piston groove, and place into contact with face "F" as
shown.
Note: Maintain piston (3) in abutment before
tightening knurled screws "V" on the tool cursor.
On the gearbox (Fig. 22)

85. Fit the tool onto the gearbox housing.
86. Fit the synchromesh ring against third gear "P" (Hare
position) (Fig. 4). The shoes of the fork must be
bearing on the synchromesh ring, on the 3rd gear
side.
87. Coat the screws of selector "S" with Loctite 221 or
equivalent and adjust so that face "F" is in from the
arm of the tool by 0.2 mm minimum.
88. Provisionally refit the cover (see B). Use a compressed-air source at 3 bar minimum to blow piston
(3) into the Tortoise position.
89. Locate the opening under the gearbox and check the
play of the Hare /Tortoise fork in the synchromesh
ring. Maximum clearance = 1 mm.
90. After checking the play, remove the cover and
definitively tighten the selector screws to 35 Nm
without changing the setting. Definitively reinstall
the cover (see B).
F
3
Fig. 21
0,2 mm
Fig. 22
Issue 1
May 2001
5C01.23
H . Service tools
- MF462A - Hare / Tortoise selector adjustment
gauge (Fig. 23).
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2001

5C01.24
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox with Power Shuttle Selector cover
5C02.1
5 C02 Selector cover
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Operation ______________________________________________
B.
C.
Replacing Hare / Tortoise piston seals ____________________
11
D.
Disassembling and reassembling the selector

mechanisms ____________________________________________
11
E.
Fitting and adjusting the gear linkage ____________________
13
F.
Adjustment of the Hare / Tortoise range __________________
15
G.
Service tools ___________________________________________
16
Issue 1
May 2002

5C02.2
General
Tractors fitted with a gearbox and power shuttle have a
selector cover that features a single control lever.
This lever selects the four basic gears as well as the
hydraulic Hare / Tortoise (Hi-Lo) function.
The gear lever (2) is controlled by a single linkage and
cable (Fig. 3) and is located on the right above the
console.
Special point
When the tractor is stopped with the handbrake on, a "C"
cell fixed onto the selector cover by means of a bracket
(Fig. 3) informs the user that a gear is still engaged and
that the handbrake is on.
This information is issued by a buzzer located under the
instrument panel surround.
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
Return port
Grounding lug
Screw
Temperature probe and seal
Plug
hose pipes holding lug
Selector cover
Finger and pin assembly (gears)
Grid
Screw
Spring
Cup
Cup
Spring
Cup
Seal
Shouldered ring
Seal(s)
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
May 2002
5C02.3
Overall view
12
13
14
15
16
1.2
18
3.4
17
20
19
20
20
11
10
5
1
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
5C02.4
Exploded view
9
12
13
11
10
14
15
16
7
1
18
17
5
2
3
4
19
20
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002
5C02.5
2
1
1/2
3/4
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2002

5C02.6
Issue 1
May 2002
5C02.7
A . Operation
The gear lever
Selecting 1st and 2nd gear ratios
- The gear lever (2) pushes lever "L" (Fig. 3) and engages
the finger (9) in the 1st and 2nd gear fork (Fig. 1).
- The first gear ratio is obtained by moving lever "L" upwards, and second gear by moving it downwards.
Selecting 3rd and 4th gear ratios
- In this configuration, the gear lever (2) (Fig. 3) is in the
intermediate position. The finger (9) integral with pin "A"
engages in the fork of the 3rd and 4th gear ratios (Fig. 1).
- Third gear is obtained by moving lever "L" upwards, and
the fourth gear by moving it downwards.

- A locking system located on the rear face of the
gearbox, at the end of the selector rails, prohibits any
accidental gear shifting.
Issue 1
May 2002
5C02.8
The Tortoise position (Fig. 4)

A fresh operation of the switch (20) (Fig. 1) causes the
opening of solenoid valve (1) (Fig. 4).
The 17-bar pressure enters chamber "B". The pressure
acting on the larger piston diameter is higher than that on
the annular face of the piston and forces it to return,
moving selector "S" and fork "F1" into the Tortoise position. The oil contained in chamber "A" returns to the 17 bar
circuit.

(1) Solenoid valve
(2) Oring
(3) Piston
(4) Bearing
(5) Orings
(6) Circlip
(7) Selector cover
Selecting the Hare / Tortoise range is carried out with the

gear lever in neutral position, by pulling lever "L" towards
the outside of the cover (Fig. 3). The finger (9) presses the
end of switch (20) (Fig. 1) which informs the electronic
system that the Hare / Tortoise valve is available and
can be switched.

The Hare / Tortoise selector rail is similarly locked in each
of its positions (Hare or Tortoise) in the 1st to 4th gear
ratios, by the same previously described system.
The Hare position (Fig. 4)

The solenoid valve (1) mounted on the selector cover (7)
is closed and causes a drop in pressure in chamber "B".
The constant pressure (17 bar) in chamber "A" thrusts on
the annular face of piston (3) which moves forward and
pushes the fork "F1" to the Hare position via the selector
"S".
The oil contained in chamber "B" returns to the housing
via the solenoid valve.
P
F1
S
A
B
Issue 1
May 2002
17 bar.
Fig. 4
5C02.9

12
2
11
1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the rear left wheel. Put

on the handbrake.
2. Place wedges for safety between the frame and the
front axle.
3. Remove the rear right wheel or set it to wide track
position. Install an axle stand if necessary.
4. Pivot the footstep and battery chest assembly or
remove the neighbouring elements that may hinder
the removal of the selector cover (depending on the
version).
6. Disconnect the electrical connectors on the cover.
7. Unscrew or loosen the pipes and hoses on the cover.
6
4
11
5
3
Fig. 5
Removal
Gear shift control (Fig. 5)
8. Disconnect the harness from cell "C" (Fig. 3). Remove the ball joint (4). Remove screws (3).
9. Remove pins (11). Remove the ball joint (5).
10. Note the adjustment of the cable (6). Slightly loosen the
top nut (12) and separate the cable from bracket (2).
11. Remove screws (3), mark the location of the grounding lug (2) and the the hose pipe clamp (6) (Fig. 1).
Note :
- On tractors fitted with a creeper unit, disconnect
the control cable (1) and remove bracket (2) (Fig. 6).
12. Loosen and remove the selector cover.
Refitting
13. Clean the mating faces of the gearbox and the cover.
14. Install :
On the cover: the Hare / Tortoise piston in the Hare
position.
On the gearbox: the Hare / Tortoise fork in the Hare
position, the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th forks in the neutral
position.
15. Lightly smear the housing /gearbox mating face with
Master Loctite 510 or equivalent.
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002

5C02.10
16. Turn the gear shift control linkage on the cover so that
it fits into selectors "S" (Fig. 7) when positioning the
cover on the gearbox.
17. If necessary, refit the creeper unit cable bracket.
Reconnect and adjust the control (see section 5K01).
18. Refit the bracket (2). Fit and tighten up the screws (3)
19. Refit the gear shift control. Carry out operations 8 to
10 in reverse order.
20. Using a grease gun, grease the various linkages of
the gear shift control on the selector cover.
Final operations
21. As necessary, refit those components removed
previously from around the cover.
22. Refit the wheel and tighten the wheel nuts or studs
to the correct torque depending on the version (see
section 2G01).
sight glass located at the rear of the centre housing.
24. Remove the wedges from between the frame and
the front axle. Release the handbrake.
25. With the engine running, check the gear shifting of all
gears and Hare / Tortoise positions.
26. Stop the engine and where necessary adjust the gear
shift control (see E).
27. Check that the buzzer of the safety cell vibrates correctly (ignition on, handbrake on and gear engaged).
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 7
5C02.11
C . Replacing Hare / Tortoise piston

seals (Fig. 4)
Disassembly
30. Take off circlip (6). Extract piston (3) with the bearing
(4) and discard the Orings (2) (5).
Reassembly
31. Clean and check the parts. Replace any defective
components.
32. Without fitting Orings on the piston, check that the
piston slides smoothly in the bore of the cover.
33. The above check completed, lubricate and fit new
Orings. Carry out operation 30 in reverse order.
1
Fig. 8
Remark
- The replacement of piston (3), bearing (4) or circlip (6)
requires the checking and readjustment of selector "S"
of the Hare / Tortoise range (see F).

Preliminary operation
35. Remove the cover (see B) and hold it in a vice with
jaw protectors.
Disassembly
36. Remove the screws (1) (4). Take off the selector (3),
and bracket (2) (Fig. 8).
37. Remove screw (11).
38. Remove the gear shift control assembly.
39. Remove the spring cups (14) (16) and spring (15).
40. Separate the finger and pin assembly (9) from the
grid (10). Remove spring cup (13) and spring (12).
41. If necessary, unscrew and remove the Hare/Tortoise switch (20), the unions screwed on the return
ports (1) and the temperature probe (4). Recover the
seal(s) (19) from the Hare/Tortoise switch.
42. Extract the seal (17).
Issue 1
May 2002
5C02.12
Reassembly
Positioning bracket (2) (Fig. 9)
Special point
If the guide ring (18) has to be replaced, coat its rim lightly
with Loctite 638 or its equivalent and insert it in thrust
against the shoulder of the cover.
49. Refit bracket (2), ensuring a clearance of 29 mm

between the bracket and the 22 mm diameter of pin
"A" (Fig. 9). Lightly smear the screws (1) with Loctite
270 or equivalent, and tighten them to a torque of 25
- 35 Nm.
Reminder: This clearance must be complied with in
order to ensure the correct operation of the cell (see
General).
50. Refit the link (3) and tighten screw (4) to a torque of
30 - 35 Nm, the threads previously smeared with
Loctite 241, or equivalent (Fig. 8).
43. If removed, refit the Hare/Tortoise switch (20) with

the same number of seals as removed, and with the
unions on the return ports, and the temperature probe
lightly smeared with Loctite 542 or its equivalent.
44. Lightly smear the external diameter of seal (17) with
Loctite 542 or its equivalent and insert it into the
cover using a suitable tool.
45. Refit spring (12) and cup (13) on pin (9).
46. Assemble pin and grid (10).
47. Refit cups (14) (16) seperated by spring (15).
48. Refit the pin (9) and finger assembly without damaging the lip of seal (17). Fit and tighten screw (11) to
a torque of 25 - 35 Nm, the thread previously lightly
smeared with Loctite 270, or equivalent.
Final operations
51. Check that the selector mechanism moves freely
without constraint. Remove the cover from the vice
and refit it on the gearbox (see B).
29 mm
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 9
5C02.13
E . Fitting and adjusting the gear

linkage
52. On the end of control linkage (1), shaped with an
angle of 166, turn the ball joint (2) as shown in the
figure. Tighten nut (3).
53. Screw the ball joint (4) to thrust against the cable (6).
Tighten nut (5).
2
3
166
1
Fitting (Fig. 10)

54. Fit bracket (7) on a bench.
55. Onto this bracket, fit and tighten the following components:
- the gear lever
- the previously prepared control linkage and cable.
56. Refit and secure the bracket on the right wheel
housing in the cab. During this operation, ensure the
control linkage and cable are inserted through the
openings in the bulkheads. Fit the grommets.
4
5
1
Gear linkage (selector cover end)

57. Screw the threaded rod (9) (complete with nuts (3)
and the ball joint (4)) onto link rod (1).
58. Tighten ball joint (5) in thrust against cable (6).
Tighten nut (7).
Fig. 10
Fitting (Fig. 11)

59. Tighten and lock the other end of the ball joint (5) onto
cam (8).
60. On bracket (2), and with lever "L" fitted beforehand,
position cam (8) and its extension piece (10). Fit pins
(11), and lock them in place with new cotter pins.
61. Install the ball joint (4) on lever "L". Position the
washer, and tighten the locknut.
12
1
C
X
9
D
3
4
6
12
1
11
7
9
11
10
5
L
8
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002

5C02.14
Adjusting the link rod (1) (Fig. 11)

62. Rotate threaded rod (9) and the ball joint (4) so as to
obtain a distance "X" of 11 mm 1 mm between the
two nuts (3) when these are tightened.
Adjusting the cable (6) (Fig. 11)
63. Adjust the end-point of the sheath so as to balance
dimensions "C" and "D". Tighten nuts (12) without
altering the adjustment.
Check for the proper engagement of each gear ratio
and the position of the gear lever in the opening of
the console.
Note: This check should be performed with the dust
cover of the gear lever temporarily removed.
64. Engage each gear, and select the Hare/Tortoise
does not come closer than 5 mm to the edge of the
console (Fig. 12 -13).
Fig. 12
Remark
When there is no interference with the operation of the
lever by the console, then the adjustment is correct. Refit
the dust cover.
If the position of the lever is incorrect, repeat the
adjustment procedure at the selector cover end.
- if there is interference when engaging 1st or 3rd gears
(Fig. 12), reduce dimension "X" (Fig. 11)
- if there is interference when engaging 2nd or 4th gears
(Fig. 12), increase dimension "X" (Fig. 11)
- by altering dimensions "C" and "D" (Fig. 11), the gear
lever moves in the console opening in the direction
shown by the arrows in Fig. 13.
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2002
5C02.15
F . Adjusting the Hare / Tortoise range

On the cover (7) (Fig. 14)
65. Place piston (3) in thrust against the bottom of the

66. Position the arm of tool ref. MF 462A, in the groove
of the piston and place it in contact with face "F" as
shown.
Note. Hold piston (3) thrust against face F
before tightening the thumbscrew V of the
cursor.

67. Place the tool on the gearbox housing.
68. Manually hold the ring of the synchromesh against
the pinion of 3rd "P" (Hare position) (Fig. 4) and with
the fork pads thrust against the synchromesh ring
(on the side of the 3rd gear pinion).
69. Smear the screws of selector "S" with Loctite 221 or
equivalent and adjust them so that face "F" clears the
arm of the tool by a minimum of 0.2 mm.
70. Temporarily refit the cover (see B). Use a compressed air supply sufficient to move piston (3) into
the Tortoise position.
71. Adjust and maintain the pressure to aproximately
3 bar. Through the opening located beneath the
gearbox, check the clearance between the Hare /
Tortoise fork and the synchromesh ring. The clearance should be 1 mm maximum.
72. After verifying the clearance, take off the selector
cover and definitively tighten the screws of selector
"S" to a torque of 35 Nm without modifying the
adjustment. Definitively refit the cover (see B).
F
3
Fig. 14
MF 462A
0,2mm
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2002

5C02.16
G . Service tools
- MF462A - Hare / Tortoise adjustment gauge (Fig.
16)
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2002
5C03.1
5 C03 Selector cover - Optimised Hare /

Tortoise function
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Identification of components - Hare / Tortoise function ____
B.
C.
Replacing Hare / Tortoise piston seals ____________________
12
D.
Disassembling and reassembling the selector mechanism _
12
E.
Fitting and adjusting the gear linkage ____________________
15
F.
Adjusting of the Hare / Tortoise range ____________________
17
G.
Service tool ____________________________________________
18
Issue 1
May 2002

5C03.2

Parts list
General
8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 series tractors fitted with a
Heavy Duty gearbox now benefit from an optimised
selector cover.
It is located on the right-hand side of the gearbox and
comprises :
- a toggle (34)
- a neutral position switch (20).
This cover has been introduced on the previously designed tractors from serial number K309019 onwards.
The single lever, fitted on the cover, controls the gear
shifting for ratios 1 to 4. A hydraulic device provides the
Hare / Tortoise function.
The mechanical locking of the 1st - 2nd / 3rd - 4th selector
rails and the Hare / Tortoise range is carried out as
previously, by pins placed between the gear selector
rails and the selector rail located at the rear part of the
gearbox (see section 5D02 - General).
The ergonomics of the pulse button located on the
pommel of the gear lever, to the right of the driver, allows
the Hare / Tortoise range. To change the range, simply
put the gear lever in the neutral position and press the
button.
Special point
- In parallel with the selector covers already fitted on
tractors with different options (see section 5C01 and
5C02) a cell C (Fig. 3) informs the driver that a gear is
engaged and that the handbrake is on.
Issue 1
May 2002
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(14)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(27)
(33)
(34)
Return ports
Grounding lug
Screw
Temperature probe
Hydraulic hose flange
Selector cover
Gear shift control finger
Bracket
Screw
Gear Selector grid
Seal
Shouldered ring
Screw
Neutral position switch
Washer
Circlip
Spring
Ball
Centring rings
Seal
Washer
Toggle
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
5C03.3
Overall view
12
13
14
15
16
1.2
18
3.4
17
20
19
20
20
11
10
5
1
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
5C03.4
Exploded view
9
12
13
11
10
14
15
16
7
1
18
17
5
2
3
4
19
20
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2002
5C03.5
2
1
1/2
3/4
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2002

5C03.6
Issue 1
May 2002
5C03.7
A . Identification and functions of

components - Hare / Tortoise function
Toggle (34)
- The toggle runs free on pin A (Fig. 3) and pivots with it
by means of a flat. It controls the Neutral position of pin
A (gear lever) by means of switch (20) (Fig. 1).
Switch (20)
- Controlled by the toggle, its function is to supply
information to the electronic system of the tractor when
the gear lever is in the Neutral position.
General operation
Gear lever
Selecting 1st - 2nd gear
- The gear lever (2) pushes lever L (Fig. 3) and engages
finger (9) in the 1st - 2nd fork (Fig. 3)
- The first ratio is obtained by moving lever L upwards
and the second ratio downwards.
Simultaneously the toggle (34) pivots with pin A and
leaves the Neutral position.
Selecting 3rd - 4th gear

- In this configuration, the finger (9) integral with pin A is
engaged in 3rd - 4th gear fork.
- The 3rd ratio is obtained by moving the lever L upwards
and the 4th ratio downwards (Fig. 3).
- As with the previous ratios the toggle is moved by
rotation of pin A.

- A locking system located on the rear face of the
gearbox, at the end of the selector rails, prohibits the
accidental engagement of a non-selected gear.
Issue 1
May 2002
5C03.8
The Tortoise position (Fig. 4)

A fresh operation of the pulse button (Fig. 3) causes the
opening of the solenoid valve (1) (Fig. 4).
The 17-bar pressure enters chamber B. The pressure
acting on the larger piston diameter is higher than that on
the annular face of the piston and forces it to return,
moving selector S and fork F1 into the Tortoise position.
The oil contained in chamber A returns to the 17 bar
circuit.

(1) Solenoid valve
(2) Oring
(3) Piston
(4) Bearing
(5) Orings
(6) Circlip
(7) Selector cover
Selecting the Hare / Tortoise range is carried out in the
Neutral position by pressing the pulse button incorporated in the gear lever pommel.

The Hare / Tortoise selector rail is similarly locked in each
of its positions (Hare or Tortoise) in the 1st to 4th gear
ratios, by the same previously described system.
Remark
- The new Parker Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve is now
fitted on the selector cover. This enhancement removes any risk of overtightening the spool.
The Hare position (Fig. 4)

The solenoid valve (1) mounted on the selector cover (7)
is closed and causes a drop in pressure in chamber B.
The constant pressure (17 bar) in chamber A thrusts on
the annular face of piston (3) which moves forward and
pushes the fork F1 to the Hare position via the selector S.
The oil contained in chamber B returns to the housing via
the solenoid valve.
P
F1
S
A
B
Issue 1
May 2002
17 bar.
Fig. 4
5C03.9

12
2
11
1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the rear left wheel. Put

on the handbrake.
2. Place wedges for safety between the frame and the
front axle.
3. Remove the rear right wheel or set it to wide track
position. Install an axle stand if necessary.
4. Pivot the footstep and battery chest assembly or
remove the neighbouring elements that may hinder
the removal of the selector cover (depending on the
version).
6. Disconnect the electrical connectors on the cover.
7. Unscrew or loosen the pipes and hoses on the cover.
6
4
11
5
3
Fig. 5
Removal
Gear shift control removal (Fig. 5)
8. Disconnect the harness from cell C (Fig. 3). Remove
the ball joint (4). Remove screws (3).
9. Remove pins (11). Remove the ball joint (5).
10. Note the adjustment of the cable (6). Slightly loosen the
top nut (12) and separate the cable from bracket (2).
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002

5C03.10
11. Remove screws (3), mark the location of the grounding lug (2) and the the hoses pipe clamp (6) (Fig. 1).
Reminder
- On tractors fitted with a creeper unit, disconnect
the control cable (1) and remove bracket (2) (Fig. 6).
12. Loosen and remove the selector cover.
Refitting
13. Clean the mating faces of the gearbox and the cover.
14. Install:
On the cover: the Hare / Tortoise piston in the Hare
position.
On the gearbox: the Hare / Tortoise fork in the Hare
position, the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th forks in the neutral
position.
15. Lightly smear the housing /gearbox mating face with
Master Loctite 510 or equivalent.
16. Turn the gear shift control linkage on the cover so that
it fits into selectors S (Fig. 7) when positioning the
cover on the gearbox.
17. If necessary, refit the creeper unit cable bracket.
Reconnect and adjust the control (see section 5K01).
18. Refit the bracket (2). Fit and tighten up the screws (3)
19. Refit the gear shift control. Carry out operations 8 to
20. Using a grease gun, grease the various linkages of
the gear shift control on the selector cover.
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 7
5C03.11
Final operations
21. As necessary, refit those components removed
previously from around the cover.
section 2G01).
sight glass located at the rear of the centre housing.
24. Remove the wedges from between the frame and
the front axle. Release the handbrake.
25. With the engine running, check the gear shifting of all
gears and Hare / Tortoise positions.
26. Stop the engine and where necessary adjust the gear
shift control (see E).
27. Check that the buzzer of the safety cell vibrates
correctly (ignition on, handbrake on and gear engaged).
Issue 1
May 2002

5C03.12
C . Replacing Hare / Tortoise piston

seals (Fig. 4)
Disassembly
30. Take off circlip (6). Extract piston (3) with the
bearing (4) and discard the Orings (2) (5).
Reassembly
31. Clean and check the parts. Replace any defective
components.
32. Without fitting Orings on the piston, check that the
piston slides smoothly in the bore of the cover.
33. The above check completed, lubricate and fit new
Orings. Carry out operation 30 in reverse order.
Remark
- The replacement of piston (3), bearing (4) or circlip (6)
requires the checking and readjustment of selector S of
the Hare / Tortoise range (see F).

35. Remove the cover (see B) and hold it in a vice with
jaw protectors.
Disassembly
36. Remove screws (1). Take out key (4) and selector
(3). Separate the bracket (2) from the cover (Fig. 8).
37. Remove screws (11). Separate the bracket (10)
including the gear shift control asssembly, from the
cover. If necessary, extract the centring rings (25).
On cover (7)
38. Take off the Neutral position switch (20). Recover
seal (27) and ball (24).
39. If necessary, take off the temperature probe (4) and
the unions screwed onto the return ports (1).
40. Extract and discard seal (17).
Issue 1
May 2002
1
Fig. 8
5C03.13
On the bracket (10)

41. Take off circlip (22), washer (21) and remove spring
(23).
42. Remove washer (33) and toggle (34), marking its
position and profile.
43. If necessary, take out screws (19). Take off the gear
selector grid (14) and extract the centring rings (25).
Reassembly
Special point
- If guide ring (18) has to be replaced, lightly smear its rim
with Loctite 648 or its equivalent and insert it thrust
against the shoulder of the cover.
On the bracket (10)
44. If removed, insert the centring rings (25). Refit the
gear selector grid (14) and tighten screws (19)
previously lightly smeared with Loctite 271 or its
equivalent and tighten to a torque of 29 - 37 Nm.
45. Check that the flat on toggle (34) slides freely over
finger (9) flat.
46. Slide the pin and finger assembly (9) into bracket
(10).
47. Suitably turn toggle (34) and position it on the flat of
finger (9). Place washer (33).
48. Refit spring (23) and washer (21). Fit circlip (22).
On the cover (7)
49. Check for the presence of centring rings (25).
50. Refit the bracket (10) and gear shift control assembly.
51. Lightly smear the threads of screw (11) with Loctite
242 or its equivalent and tighten to a torque of 29 - 37
Nm.
52. Protect the lip of seal (17) by covering the cylindrical
end of finger (9) with a flexible protection. Lightly
smear the external rim of the seal with Loctite 542
or its equivalent and slide it over the protection.
Remove the protection. Insert the seal into the cover
using an appropriate fixture.
53. Place finger (9) in the Neutral position.
54. Slide ball (24) into the depression on the toggle (34).
Issue 1
May 2002
5C03.14
Checking the Neutral switch (20) position before

assembly
55. Press manually on the button located at the end of
the switch. Release the button and check that the
button returns freely to its initial position.
Repeat the operation several times. The check must
be carried out using a multimeter.
56. Refit the switch complete with its seal and tighten to
a torque of 15 - 25 Nm
57. Refit bracket (2) respecting the dimension of 29 mm
between the bracket and the 22 mm diameter of pin
A (Fig. 9). Lightly smear screws (1) with Loctite 270
and tighten them to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
Reminder
- This dimension must be strictly met in order for the
cell to operate correctly (see General).
58. Refit selector (3). Insert and tighten the key (4) (Fig. 8).
59. In the selector grid (14), move finger (9) from 1st to
4th gear using selector (3) (Fig. 8) and check that the
finger moves freely into each of its positions.
Final operation
60. Take out the cover from the vice and fit it on the
gearbox (see B).
29 mm
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2002
5C03.15
E . Fitting and adjusting the gear

linkage
61. On the end of control linkage (1), shaped with an
angle of 166, turn the ball joint (2) as shown in the
figure. Tighten nut (3).
62. Screw the ball joint (4) to thrust against the cable (6).
Tighten nut (5).
2
3
166
1
Fitting (Fig. 10)

63. Fit bracket (7) on a bench.
64. Onto this bracket, fit and tighten the following components:
- the gear lever
- the previously prepared control linkage and cable.
65. Refit and secure the bracket on the right wheel
housing in the cab. During this operation, ensure the
control linkage and cable are inserted through the
openings in the bulkheads. Fit the grommets.
4
5
1
Gear linkage (selector cover side)

66. Screw the threaded rod (9) (complete with nuts (3)
and the ball joint (4)) onto link rod (1).
67. Tighten ball joint (5) in thrust against cable (6).
Tighten nut (7).
Fig. 10
Fitting (Fig. 11)

68. Tighten and lock the other end of the ball joint (5) onto
cam (8).
69. On bracket (2), and with lever L fitted beforehand,
position cam (8) and its extension piece (10). Fit pins
(11), and lock them in place with new cotter pins.
70. Install the ball joint (4) on lever L. Position the
washer, and tighten the locknut.
12
1
C
X
9
D
3
4
6
12
1
11
7
9
11
10
5
L
8
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002

5C03.16
Adjusting the link rod (1) (Fig. 11)

71. Rotate threaded rod (9) and the ball joint (4) so as to
obtain a distance X of 11 mm 1 mm between the
two nuts (3) when these are tightened.
Adjusting the cable (6) (Fig. 11)
72. Adjust the end-point of the sheath so as to equally
balance dimensions C and D as far as possible.
Tighten nuts (12) without altering the adjustment.
Check for the proper engagement of each gear ratio
and the position of the gear lever in the opening of
the console.
Note: This check should be performed with the dust
cover of the gear lever temporarily removed.
73. Engage each gear, and select the Hare/Tortoise
does not come closer than 5 mm to the edge of the
console (Fig. 12 -13).
Fig. 12
Remark
When there is no interference with the operation of the
lever by the console, then the adjustment is correct. Refit
the dust cover.
If the position of the lever is incorrect, repeat the
adjustment procedure at the selector cover end.
- if there is interference when engaging 1st or 3rd gears
(Fig. 12), reduce dimension X (Fig. 11),
- if there is interference when engaging 2nd or 4th gears
(Fig. 12), increase dimension X (Fig. 11),
- by altering dimensions C and D (Fig. 11), the gear lever
moves in the console opening in the direction shown by
the arrows in Fig. 13.
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2002
5C03.17
F . Adjusting the Hare / Tortoise

range
On the cover (7) (Fig. 14)
MF 462 A
7
74. Place piston (3) in thrust against the bottom of the

75. Position the arm of tool ref. MF 462A, in the groove
of the piston and place it in contact with face F as
shown.
Note: Carefully hold piston (3) in the Hare position with the arm of the implement thrust against
face F before manually tightening thumbscrew V
of the cursor.
V
3
76. Place the tool on the gearbox housing.

77. Manually hold the ring of the synchromesh against
the pinion of 3rd P (Hare position) (Fig. 4) and with the
fork pads thrust against the synchromesh ring (on
the side of the 3rd gear pinion).
78. Smear the screws of selector S with Loctite 221 or
equivalent and adjust them so that face F clears the
arm of the tool by a minimum of 0.2 mm.
79. Temporarily refit the cover (see B). Use a compressed air supply sufficient to move piston (3) into
the Tortoise position.
80. Adjust and maintain the pressure to aproximately
3 bar. Through the opening located beneath the
gearbox, check the clearance between the Hare /
Tortoise fork and the synchromesh ring. The clearance should be 1 mm maximum.
81. After verifying the clearance, take off the selector
cover and definitively tighten the screws of selector
S to a torque of 35 Nm without modifying the
adjustment. Definitively refit the cover (see B).
3
F
Fig. 14
MF 462A
0,2mm
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2002

5C03.18
G . Service tools
- MF462A - Hare / Tortoise adjustment gauge
(Fig. 16).
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2002
Gearbox - Selector rails
5D01.1
5 D01 Selector rails
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Disassembling and reassembling selector rails and adjusting

forks and gearbox selector _______________________________
Disassembling and reassembling selector rails and adjusting

input unit forks _________________________________________
B.
Issue 1
May 2001

5D01.2
General
On 8200 series tractors fitted with a Heavy Duty gearbox,
the selector rails used for gear selection are located on
the right-hand side of the gearbox behind the control
cover.
The gear selector comprises four selector rails of which
three are for the gearbox and one for the input unit.
Each selector rail supports its own fork and respective
selector and moves longitudinally in end-bearings.
The forks are adjustable, thus ensuring a functional
clearance between the pads and the synchromesh
sliding coupler.
Safety locking of the gearbox selector

The system comprises two cylindrical locks of different
lengths.
- short locking pin: selector rail 1st - 2nd
- long locking pin: selector rail 3rd - 4th
Their extremities are spherical and one of them has an
extended lug.
Each selector rail is machined both to lodge and to allow
movement of the locks.
Operating principle
Example: Ratio 1 engaged - Hare range
When the selector rail is moved to select 1st gear, it
forces its lock to move out of its lodging place and to lock
the range selector rail in the "Hare" position. At the same
time, this lock pushes another lock that in turn locks the
3rd - 4th selector rail, thus prohibiting any undue movement that might block the gearbox.
The same reasoning applies to the Tortoise range and
other gear ratios.
Issue 1
May 2001

Overall view
5D01.3
6
10
11
12
13
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
Selector rail 3rd - 4th

Short locking pin 1st - 2nd
Hare / Tortoise selector rail
Selector rail 1st - 2nd
Long locking pin 3rd - 4th
Gearbox housing
Selector 1st - 2nd
Reverse shuttle selector
Reverse shuttle selector rail
Locking pin
Spring
Plug
Input unit housing
Reverse shuttle fork
Fork 1st - 2nd
Fork 3rd - 4th
Hare / Tortoise fork
Long spacer
Short spacer
Bolt
Pin
S : Hare / Tortoise selector
Fig. 1
C
14
Fig. 2
16
17
4
10
11
15
4
18
3
Y
5
19
12
20
Parts list
Z
Partial view
View along F
Issue 1
Cross-section CC
May 2001
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
5D01.4
Exploded view
21
10
11
12
18
10
11
12
2
4
20
10
7
11
14
12
19
15
21
17
20
16
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

A . Disassembling and reassembling
selector rails and adjusting forks and
gearbox selector
1. Uncouple the tractor between the gearbox and the
intermediate housing (see section 2C01).
5D01.5
Special points
- The short locking pin (2) locks selector rail 1st - 2nd.
- The long locking pin (5) locks selector rail 3rd - 4th.
- The index assembly (10) (11) (12) (18) places selector
rail 1st -2nd.
rail 3rd - 4th.
12. Adjust forks and selector (7) (see below).
Disassembly
Remark
On tractors fitted with a creeper gearbox, the reducer unit
located on the rear face of the gearbox does not hinder
disassembly or reassembly of the selector.
3. Remove the bolts (20) from the selector (7) and forks
(15) (16).
Note: To carry out operations on the 1st - 2nd fork,
use a short Allen key due to the limited space
between the fork and the housing.
4. Disassemble the index assemblies (10) (11) (12)
(18).
5. Push selector rail (4) towards the front and remove
lock (2). Proceed in the same way for selector rail (1)
and locking pin (5).
6. Take out selector rails (1) (4) through the rear of the
gearbox.
7. Using a suitable pin punch, drive out pin (21) from the
Hare / Tortoise fork (17) (Fig. 2).
8. Take out selector rail (3) through the rear of the
housing.
9. Remove the 3rd - 4th (16) and the Hare / Tortoise forks.
Remark : The 1st - 2nd fork (15) cannot be removed
from the housing unless the main shaft has previously been removed (see section 5F01).
Reassembly
10. Clean and inspect the components. Replace any
defective parts.
11. Refit the selector rails, forks and selectors in the
reverse order of disassembly.
Note: During refitting, pin (21) on the Hare /
Tortoise fork must be replaced.
Issue 1
May 2001

5D01.6
Adjustment
Final operations
Principle
The positioning of forks (15) (16) and selector (7) is
obtained via the difference between the distance between the centre of threaded holes "Y" and mark "Z" on
the selector rails (1) (4) (Fig. 1).
A different forward or rearward movement of the forks is
obtained by acting on bolt (20) as required.
The adjustment of forks is carried out with the gear
engaged.

With the gear lever in neutral, check that locks (2) (5)
are free in the rear bearing in the Hare / Tortoise
range.
19. Couple the tractor between the gearbox and the
20. Road test. Check:
- gear changing
- correct operation of the Hare / Tortoise range.
21. Check oil tightness of the gearbox and intermediate
housing mating faces, selector cover and hydraulic
unions.
13. Smear the plugs of the indexing assemblies (10) (11)

(12) (18) with Loctite 542 or equivalent and tighten.
Lock fork (15) in 1st. Maintain the synchromesh
sliding coupler against the pinion. Check that the rear
pads are not in contact with the synchromesh sliding
coupler by slightly moving the selector rail without
moving the sliding coupler itself.
14. Repeat the operation (fork locked in 2nd), checking
that the rear pads are not in contact with the
synchromesh sliding coupler, by using the same
method as in operation 13. Where necessary, adjust
the fork using bolt (20) previously smeared with
Loctite 221 or equivalent.
15. Proceed in the same way to adjust fork (16).
Tightening torques
- Bolt (20): 35 Nm without modifying its adjustment,
Loctite 221.
- Plug (12): 50 - 70 Nm, Loctite 542.
16. Next, adjust selector (7) in line with the selector
incorporated in fork (16).
17. Adjust the "S" Hare / Tortoise selector (see section
5C01).
Issue 1
May 2001

selector rail and adjusting input unit
fork
12
11
22. Uncouple the tractor between the engine and the

23. Remove the input unit (see section 5B01).
5D01.7
10
24. Disassemble the indexing assembly (10) (11) (12).
25. Remove bolt (20) from the reverse shuttle fork (14).
26. Take out selector rail (9) and fork.
Reassembly
14
20
Fig. 3

defective parts.
28. Refit the fork and selector rail.
29. Carry out the adjustment of the fork (see further on).
Adjustment
Principle
The positioning of fork (14) is obtained by the difference
between the distance between "Y" and mark "Z" on the
selector rails (9) (Fig. 4). A different forward or rearward
movement of the forks is obtained by acting on the
forward bolt (20) or the rear bolt, as required (Fig. 4).
30. Fit the locking stud (10), spring (11) and plug (12)
tightened to 50 - 70 Nm and previously smeared with
Loctite 542 or equivalent. Fit bolt (20) smeared with
Loctite 221 or equivalent.
31. Position the fork, locked at the front. Maintain the
synchromesh sliding coupler in thrust against the
pinion. Pre-adjust the fork in accordance with the
above principle.
32. Check that the front pads are not pinched against the
synchromesh sliding coupler.
33. Repeat the operation (fork locked at the rear). Check
that the rear pads are not pinched against the
synchromesh sliding coupler.
14
20
Z
Fig. 4
Remark
The adjustment is correct when the space is identical
between the pads located on either side of the fork and
the synchromesh sliding coupler, when in the forward
and reverse positions.
34. Alternatively and progressively tighten bolt (20) to
35 Nm without modifying its adjustment.
Issue 1
May 2001

5D01.8
Final operations
35. Fit the input unit (see section 5B01).
37. Carry out a road test, checking for the correct
operation of the mechanical reverse shuttle .
38. Check for the oil tightness of the selector cover and
hydraulic unions.
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearboxes with Power Shuttle - Selector rails
5D02.1
5 D02 Selector rails
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Disassembling and reassembling selector rails and

adjusting forks and gearbox selector _____________________
Issue 1
May 2002

5D02.2
General
On 8200 series tractors fitted with a gearbox with Power
shuttle, the selector rails used for gear selection are
located on the right-hand side of the gearbox and behind
the control cover.
The gear selector comprises the following selector
rails for:
- 1st and 2nd gear
- Hare/Tortoise (Hi-Lo)
- 3rd and 4th gear
Each selector rail supports its own fork and respective
selector and moves longitudinally in end-bearings.
The front bearing fixed on the rear part of the input unit is
removable and serves as a support for the selector rails.
The forks are adjustable, thus ensuring a functional
clearance between the pads and the synchromesh
sliding coupler.
Safety locking of the gearbox selector

The system comprises two cylindrical locks of different
lengths.
- short locking pin: selector rail 1st - 2nd
- long locking pin: selector rail 3rd - 4th
Their extremities are spherical and one of them has an
extended lug.
Each selector rail is machined both to lodge and to allow
movement of the locks.
Operating principle
Example: Ratio 1 engaged - Hare range
When the selector rail is moved to select 1st gear, it
forces its lock to move out of its lodging place and to lock
the range selector rail in the "Hare" position. At the same
time, this lock pushes another lock that in turn locks the
3rd - 4th selector rail, thus prohibiting any undue movement that might block the gearbox.
The same reasoning applies to the Tortoise range and
other gear ratios.
Issue 1
May 2002

Overall view
Gearboxes with
Power Shuttle - Selector rails
5D02.3
S
13
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
Selector rail 3rd - 4th

Short locking pin 1st - 2nd
Hare / Tortoise selector rail
Selector rail 1st - 2nd
Long locking pin 3rd - 4th
Gearbox housing
Selector 1st - 2nd
Locking pin
Spring
Plug
Input unit housings
Reverse shuttle fork
Fork 1st - 2nd
Fork 3rd - 4th
Hare / Tortoise fork
Long spacer
Short spacer
Bolt
Pin
Removable front support
Rear support
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
F1
S : Hare / Tortoise selector

C
21
16
17
4
2
3
10
11
15
4
18
3
Y
5
19
12
20
Partial view
Z
CC
View along F
View along F
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 2
Parts list
Gearboxes with
Power Shuttle - Selector rails
5D02.4
Exploded view
23
10
11
12
18
7
4
15
3
21
17
10
11
12
19
20
16
1
22
C : Selector cover
Fig. 1
Issue 1
Parts list
May 2002
Fig. 2
5D02.5

selector rails and adjusting forks and
gearbox selector
Disassembly
Remark
On tractors fitted with a creeper gearbox, the reducer unit
(1) (Fig. 3) located on the rear face of the gearbox does
not hinder disassembly or reassembly of the selector.
3. Remove the bolts (20) from the selector (7) and forks
(15) (16).
Note: To carry out operations on the 1st - 2nd fork,
use a short Allen key due to the limited space
between the fork and the housing.
4. Disassemble the index assemblies (10) (11) (12)
(18).
5. Push selector rail (4) towards the front and remove
lock (2). Proceed in the same way for selector rail (1)
and locking pin (5).
6. Take out selector rails (1) (4) through the rear of the
gearbox (Fig. 4).
7. Using a suitable pin punch, drive out pin (21) from the
Hare / Tortoise fork (17) (Fig. 2).
8. Take out selector rail (3) through the rear of the
housing (Fig. 4).
9. Remove the 3rd - 4th (16) and the Hare / Tortoise forks.
Remark : The 1st - 2nd fork (15) cannot be removed
from the housing unless the main shaft has previously been removed (see section 5F02).
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Reassembly
defective parts.
11. Refit the selector rails, forks and selectors in the
reverse order of disassembly.
Note: During refitting, pin (21) on the Hare /
Tortoise fork must be replaced.
Issue 1
May 2002

5D02.6
Special points
- The short locking pin (2) locks selector rail 1st - 2nd.
- The long locking pin (5) locks selector rail 3rd - 4th.
rail 1st -2nd.
rail 3rd - 4th.
Y
1
20
12. Adjust forks and selector (7) (see below).
Adjustment
Principle
The positioning of forks (15) (16) and selector (7) is
obtained via the difference between the distance between the centre of threaded holes "Y" and mark "Z" on
the selector rails (1) (4) (Fig. 5).
A different forward or rearward movement of the forks is
obtained by acting on bolt (20) as required.
The adjustment of forks is carried out with the gear
engaged.
13. Smear the plugs of the indexing assemblies (10) (11)
(12) (18) with Loctite 542 or equivalent and tighten
onto the housing. Lock fork (15) in 1st. Maintain the
synchromesh sliding coupler against the pinion.
Check that the rear pads are not in contact with the
synchromesh sliding coupler by slightly moving the
selector rail without moving the sliding coupler itself.
14. Repeat the operation (fork locked in 2nd), checking
that the rear pads are not in contact with the
synchromesh sliding coupler, by using the same
method as in operation 13. If the pads are in contact
with the sliding coupler, adjust the fork using bolt (20)
lightly smeared with Loctite 221 or equivalent.
15. Proceed in the same way to adjust fork (16).
Tightening torques
- Bolt (20): 35 Nm without modifying its adjustment,
Loctite 221.
- Plug (12): 50 - 70 Nm, Loctite 542.
16. Next, adjust selector (7) in line with the selector
incorporated in fork (16).
17. Adjust the "S" Hare / Tortoise selector (see section
5C02).
Issue 1
May 2002
15 16
Z
Fig. 5
Final operations
With the gear lever in neutral, check that locks (2) (5)
are free in the rear bearing in the Hare / Tortoise
range.
20. Road test. Check:
- gear changing (all gears)
- correct operation of the Hare / Tortoise range.
21. Check oil tightness of the gearbox and intermediate
housing mating faces, selector cover and hydraulic
unions.
Gearbox - Output shaft
5E01.1
5 E01 Output shaft
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Removing and refitting the selector rail and forks _________
C.
Removing, refitting and shimming the shaft _______________
D.
Issue 1
May 2001

5E01.2
Issue 1
May 2001

General
The output shaft fitted to Heavy Duty gearboxes with
mechanical reverse shuttle or Power shuttle, transmits
the rotation supplied by the different gears to the drive
pinion, via a coupling sleeve or a coupler (an option with
the creeper gearbox).
It is fitted on the lower transmission line at the rear of the
gearbox.
The output shaft is supported by two taper roller bearings;
the first is centred in the bore of the mainshaft and the
second in the rear bearing.
The shaft supports:
- the 3rd Hare gear (35) fitted on two taper roller bearings
and comprising bearing cups and cones (33) (34) and
(36) (37).
- the synchromesh and the twin Hare / Tortoise cones
assembly (69)
- the Tortoise gear (40) which is free mounted on the
shaft (47).
A seal ring (28) fitted on washer (31) maintains lubricating pressure in the channel. The calibrated port in washer
(31) allows for decompression in the cavity located
behind the bearing cone (23). A channel drilled in the hub
lubricates both cones of the syncromesh (69).
The pre-loading of bearings (22) (23), (33) (34), (36) (37)
and (43) (44) is carried out by means of shim(s) (45)
placed behind the bearing cup (44).
5E01.3
Parts list
(22)
(23)
(28)
(31)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(40)
(41)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(69)
(70)
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Seal ring
Special washer
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
3rd Hare gear
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Tortoise gear
Locating pin
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Rear bearing
Shaft
Bolt
Hare / Tortoise synchromesh (double cone)
Synchromesh ring (creeper gearbox option)
F
G
P
R
Rear bearing (creeper gearbox option)

Syncromesh flange
Lubricating channel
Groove
:
:
:
:
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Designation of double cone synchromesh

components (69)
See section 5A01 or 5A02 (depending on assembly),
General and Operation.
Issue 2
1
March
May 2002
December
2000
5E01.4
Overall view
48
46
41
40
35
36
37
34
33
69
22
47
43
C
23
45
B
A
44
A
B
31
28
P
35
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Issue 1
December 2000
5E01.5
Exploded view
46
41
45
44
48
43
70
47
40
37
69
36
35
34
33
31
28
23
22
Fig. 1
Parts list
Fig. 2
Issue 1
December 2000

5E01.6
2. Remove the selector cover (see section 5C01 - 5C02
or 5C03 depending on the version).
B . Removing and refitting the selector rails and forks

Removal
3. Remove the selector rails and forks from the gearbox
(see section 5D01 - or 5D02, depending on assembly).
Refitting
defective parts.
5. Refit the forks and the selector rails (see section 5D01
- or 5D02, depending on assembly).
C . Removing, refitting and shimming the shaft

Removal
Remark
- If the tractor is fitted with the creeper gearbox option,
remove the reduction unit (see section 5K01).
6. Remove the rear bearing (46). By opening the plate
located at the rear underside of the gearbox, maintain
the gear train in place. Pull on the shaft and remove it.
7. Through the open selector cover, remove the entire
synchromesh unit (69), the 3rd Hare gear (35) with the
bearing cones (33) (37), special washer (31), bearing
cone (23) and Tortoise gear (40)
Issue 21
May 2002
December
2000
5E01.7
Reassembly (Fig. 3)
8. Clean and check the components. Replace any
defective part.
9. Check that the channels in shaft (47) and the decompression port of washer (31) are not blocked.
10. If necessary, insert:
- cup (22) in the layshaft
- cups (34) (36) in pinion (35)
- cone (43) on shaft (47)
11. Fit seal ring (28) in the throat of special washer (31).
12. Smear the special washer and the bearing cone (23)
with miscible grease. Place cone (23) and washer
(31), the seal turned towards the front in the bore of
the mainshaft (7).
A-A
V
A
D
A
V
47
Pre-assembly (detail E)
43
Gearbox with mechanical

reverse shuttle
13. Insert shaft (47) without its pinion in the previously

mentioned washer and cone.
14. Mark a line of paint T on the feed through, the
synchromesh (27) and shaft (47) corresponding to
the flat on washer (31) and that on shaft (47).
15. Remove the shaft while holding in place washer (31)
and cone (23) without turning shaft (7) (Fig. 3).
37
36
35
34
33
Gearbox with power shuttle
V
A
D
E
A
V
47
43
37
36
35
34
33
31
31
47
23
31
27
22
R
28
23
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001

5E01.8
Assembly
16. In the housing, introduce:
- the Tortoise pinion (40)
- pinion (35), with mark R turned to face the
synchromesh (69) (Fig. 1) and with cones (33) (37)
moderately smeared with miscible grease.
17. Fit syncromesh flange G (Fig. 1) on the Hare /
Tortoise pinions.
18. Lightly smear the cones and synchromesh bushes
with miscible grease.
19. Fit the synchromesh, the drilled hole P or the paint
mark turned towards the Tortoise pinion (40) (Fig. 4).
20. Position and centre the Tortoise pinion by holding it
via the opening of the plate located below and at the
rear of the gearbox or by using two bolts V as
shown in figure 3.
21. If necessary, with the help of another operator,
engage the shaft with cone (43) in the pinion assembly by aligning the paint marks previously made on
the shaft, synchromesh and feed-through of the
gearbox (Fig. 5).
40
P
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
5E01.9

22. Determine the thickness of the shim(s) in order to
obtain a provisional pre-loading clearance of 0.10 to
0.15 mm approximately (see further on). Place
bearing cup (44) in the bearing using the previously
determined shims (45) and placing the thickest shim
on the bearing cup side. Position the bearing with the
locating pin (41) (tractors without creeper gearbox)
on the gearbox housing using of bolts (48). Tighten to
a torque of 57 - 67 Nm (Fig. 6).
23. Proceed with the shimming operation.
Shimming
45
P2 = 0,01 / 0,05 mm
24. Place the index of the dial gauge on the end of the
shaft (47) (Fig. 7).
25. Push the short protruding length of the shaft using of
a suitably adapted vice jaw fitted with protection,
and turn the shaft left and right in order to seat the
bearing cones in their cups.
26. Set the dial gauge to zero.
27. Repeat operation 25, but this time while pulling.
28. In relation to the clearance shown, select the thickness of shim(s) required to obtain a pre-loading of:
P2 = 0.01 to 0.05 mm (Fig. 6)
29. Remove bolts (48) and bearing (46) (Fig. 7).
30. Take off bearing cup (44) and fit the definitive shims
(45) selected during operation 28.
31. Refit the cup. Place the bearing. Tighten bolts (48)
lightly smeared with Loctite 270 to a torque of 57 67 Nm (Fig. 7).
32. Manually check the rotation of the shaft and its gear
train.
48
Fig. 6
48
47
46
Fig. 7
33. Refit the selector rails and adjust the forks (see B).
34. Adjust the Hare / Tortoise selector and refit the
selector cover (see section 5C01 - 5C02 or 5C03
depending on the version).
35. Re-couple the tractor between the gearbox and the
36. Check for the oil tightness of all seals and hydraulic
unions.
37. Road test all controls.
2
Issue 1
March 2000
2002
December
Gearbox - Mainshaft
5F01.1
5 F01 Mainshaft
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Disassembling and reassembling the shaft ________________
C.
D.
Shimming the input pinion ______________________________
E.
Shimming the shaft _____________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

5F01.2
Gearbox - Mainshaft
Parts list
General
The mainshaft (7) fitted to Heavy Duty gearboxes rotates
on two taper roller bearings (9) (10) and (20) (21) lying in
the two lower bearings of the main gearbox. The input
gear (1) fitted at the front, engages with the shaft via
splines. It is held by Belleville washers (2) fixed by the
special cone-locking bolt (3).
The Belleville washers also provide a constant load on
bush (8), the synchromesh hub (16) and the shoulder of
the shaft.
This flexible assembly permits permanent contact of the
stated parts, when forces are applied to the gears.
Between the two lower bearings, the shaft bears the
freely rotating driving pinions of 2nd gear (13) and 1st gear
(19), as well as the synchromesh assembly of 1st and 2nd,
the hub of which engages splines on the shaft. At the
rear, it bears the freely rotating driving pinion of 4th gear
(24) and the synchromesh assembly for 3rd and 4th gear.
The rear bore receives bearing cup (22) of the taper roller
bearing of the output shaft.
The lubrication of 1st gear pinion and the bush of the 2nd
gear pinion are ensured by a central channel and radial
drillings.
The pre-loading of the bearings is adjusted by means of
shims (11) placed behind bearing cup (10). The input
pinion (1) is shimmed by means of shims (38) (39) fitted
on the special bolt (3) to obtain a flexing of the Belleville
washers (2).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(29)
(30)
(32)
(38)
(39)
Input pinion
Belleville washers
Special bolt
Lubricating pipe
Snap ring
Spring
Mainshaft
Bush
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Spacer
2nd gear pinion
2nd gear synchromesh bearing cone
2nd gear synchromesh ring
1st - 2nd synchromesh
1st gear synchromesh ring
1st gear synchromesh bearing cone
1st gear driving pinion
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Bearing cup
4th gear driving pinion
4th gear synchromesh bearing cone
4th gear synchromesh ring
3rd - 4th synchromesh
Snap ring
3rd gear synchromesh ring
3rd gear synchromesh bearing cone
Shim(s)
Spacer
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox - Mainshaft
5F01.3
Overall view
11
12
21
20
19
10
13
6
29
5
22
4
3
32
30
27
26
25
24
18
17
16
15
14
38
Parts list
Fig. 2
Issue 1
39
Fig. 1
May 2001
Gearbox - Mainshaft
5F01.4
Exploded view
29
32
27
30
26
25
4
24
7
20
21
2
19
18
17
15
16
14
13
8
Parts list
Fig. 1
39
12
38
11
10
4
5
1
2
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
Gearbox - Mainshaft
5F01.5
Remark
To dismantle the mainshaft, it is necessary to remove
the gearbox.
57
56
51

2. Separate the gearbox from the engine (see section
2B01).
4. Place the gearbox on a suitable fixture.
5. Take off the input unit (see section 5B01).
6. Remove the selector rails and forks (see section
5D01).
7. Remove the output shaft (see section 5E01).
Fig. 3

the shaft
Disassembly
Special point (Fig. 3)
To remove the bearing cone (25), the synchromesh (27)
and the 4th gear driving pinion (24), it is necessary to
remove circlip (56) (Fig. 3) from the machined throat of
the mainshaft. Then to push back pinion (57).
Fig. 4
8. Take off the snap ring (29). Remove 3rd - 4th gear
synchromesh (27) and mark its position.
9. Remove the synchromesh ring (26), the bearing
cone (25) and the pinion (24).
Note: Keep the synchromesh ring and bearing
cone together if they are to be re-used.
10. Keep the shaft under rotation by using a locally
manufactured tool and by using a 4 WD clutch, ref.
3617232M1 (Fig. 4).
11. If necessary, remove lubricating pipe (4) and spring
(6).
12. Unscrew bolt (3) by means of a 32 mm socket and
a suitable length extension.
13. Remove shims (38) (39), Belleville washers (2) and
input pinion (1).
14. Remove bush (8) fitted with cone bearing (9).
Issue 1
December 2000

5F01.6
Gearbox - Mainshaft
15. Remove the tool. Take out the shaft from its housing
with the 1st gear pinion (19) (Fig. 5) located at the
rear, through the bearing aperture, while maintaining
the fork, pinion and 1st - 2nd gear synchromesh
assembly.
Special point
The extracting of the 1st - 2nd gear fork from the
housing must be accompanied by the synchromesh
assembly (16) and the 2nd gear driving pinion (13).
16. Remove the whole assembly (synchromesh, 2nd
gear pinion assembly and fork) through the selector
cover aperture (Fig. 6).
17. Take off the bearing cups (10) (21).
Note: In the case of re-use, keep cups and cones
together.
18. Remove shims (11), spacer (12).
19. Where necessary, extract the bearing cones (9) (20),
cup (22). Take off snap ring (5) from bolt (3).
19
Fig. 5
Reassembly
defective parts.
21. Check that the central channel and radial ports of
shaft (7) are not blocked.
22. If disassembled, with the aid of a press and a
suitable fixture, respectively insert bearing cones (9)
(20) on bush (8) and shaft (7). Position the snap ring
(5) in bolt (3). Insert bearing cup (22) in shaft (7).
23. Lubricate the bearing cones and cups.
24. Fit cup (21).
25. Place the spacer (12), the shims (11) selected during
operation 59 and the bearing cup (10) in the bore of
the housing.
Remark:
- The shims (11) must be fitted between the spacer
(12) and the bearing cup (10) (Fig. 1).
26. Check for wear on syncromesh rings (15) (17)
against bearing cones (14) (18) (see section 5A01).
27. Assemble the 2nd gear pinion (13), bearing cone
(14), synchromesh ring (15), 1st - 2nd gear synchromesh (16), 1st gear synchromesh ring (17) and
bearing cone (18) on the workbench.
28. Refit the entire assembly between the separations
with the 1st - 2nd gear fork correctly positioned (Fig. 6).
29. Slide in the shaft and 1st gear pinion (19) through the
rear of the housing (Fig. 5) while holding the pinion /
synchromesh assembly.
30. Slide synchromesh ring (8) fitted with bearing cone
(9) on to the shaft (7).
Issue 21
March
December
2000
May 2002
Fig. 6
Gearbox - Mainshaft
31. Fit the pinion (1), the Belleville washers (2) positioned as in Fig. 7, and the shims (39) (38) determined during operation 50, along with bolt (3).
Remark: The shims (38) must be placed against the
shoulder of the bolt (3).
32. Hold the shaft in place as in operation 10.
33. Tighten bolt (3) lightly smeared with Loctite 270 to a
torque of 320 - 360 Nm. Remove the tool. Manually
check the rotation of the shaft.
34. If disassembled, fit spring (6) and lubricating pipe (4)
with bolt (3).
35. Check for wear of synchromesh ring (26) against
cone (25) (see section 5A01).
36. Fit the pinion (24), cone (25), synchromesh ring (26)
and the 3rd - 4th gear synchromesh (27) while respecting the direction of assembly.
37. Advance pinion (57) on the intermediate shaft and
place circlip (56) in the throat without bending it and
ensuring that it is correctly fitted (Fig. 3).
38. Place snap ring (29).
39. Manually check:
- the axial clearance of the pinions
- the rotation of the shaft and its gear train.
5F01.7
39
38
Fig. 7
C . Final operations
40. Refit the output shaft (see section 5E01).
41. Refit the input unit (see section 5B01).
42. Refit the selector rails. Adjust the forks and selectors
of 1st - 2nd and Hare / Tortoise (see sections 5D01 and
5C01 respectively).
43. Replace the selector cover (see section 5C01).
Check that changing of the gears is correctly carried
out and that the Hare / Tortoise position is present.
44. Connect the gearbox to the engine (see section
2B01).
45. Reconnect the tractor between the gearbox and the
46. Check the oil tightness of seals and hydraulic unions.
47. Road test the clutch controls, the reverse shuttle, the
Hare / Tortoise range of gears and the A, B, C, D
ratios of the Dynashift.
Issue 12
May 2000
2002
December

5F01.8
Gearbox - Mainshaft
D . Shimming the input pinion (Fig.

8)
38
39
48. Place the shaft (7) in a vice fitted with jaw protectors.
Provisionally fit the synchromesh (18), the ring (8),
input pinion (1), the Belleville washers (2) without the
shims (38) (39). It is essential that special bolt (3) is
tightened to a torque of 30 Nm maximum.
49. Place the dial gauge index on the end of the shaft,
measure axial clearance of pinion (1) (Fig. 8).
50. In relation to the clearance measured and the thickness of the shim removed (39), select shim thickness (38) to obtain a flexing of the Belleville washers
of between 1.25 mm and 1.75 mm.
Note: If the axial clearance is greater than 1 mm,
it is recommended to reduce it by adding only
one shim (38) in order to measure it again with
greater precision.
51. Take out bolts (3) and the elements provisionally
fitted during operation 48. Go on with the final
assembly of the shaft and carry out its shimming
(see E).
Remark: In cases where input pinion (1) is replaced
on the tractor (Fig. 9), the shimming method is
identical. First temporarily remove the cup (10) and
shims (11) (12) (Fig. 9) in order to eliminate the preloading effect on bearings (9) (10) and (20) (21).
When the shimming of the pinion is completed,
replace the shims and the cup (Fig. 9).
3
2
1
8
16
Fig. 8
11
12
10
Fig. 9
Issue 1
December 2000
Gearbox - Mainshaft
5F01.9
E . Shimming the shaft

52. Determine the thickness of the shim(s) (11) in order
to obtain a temporary clearance of approximately
0.10 mm to 0.15 mm, while awaiting the shimming
with pre-loading (see further on).
It is essential to place the spacer (12) against the
housing, previously determined shims (11) and cup
(10).
53. Fit the shaft locking tool (Fig. 4). Tighten bolt (3).
Remove the tool.
54. Proceed with the shimming.
Shimming
55. Place the index of the dial gauge on the end of shaft
(7) (Fig. 10).
56. From the front of the housing, pull hard on the shaft
while turning it left and right to seat it correctly in the
bearing cups and cones.
57. Reset the dial gauge to zero.
58. Repeat operation 56 this time by pushing.
59. In relation to the clearance read on the gauge, select
the correct thickness for the definitive shims (11) in
order to obtain a pre-loading of:
P1 = 0.10 mm to 0.20 mm maximum (Fig. 11).
60. Fit the locking tool on the shaft. Unscrew bolt (3).
Take off the shims (38) (39), the Belleville washers
(2) and the pinion (1).
61. Take out bush (8) fitted with bearing cone (9) and cup
(10) (Fig. 1).
62. Place the shims (11), selected in operation 59,
between spacer (12) and cup (10) (Fig. 1).
63. Fit bush (8) fitted with cone (9), pinion (1), Belleville
washers (2) and shims (38) (39) placed as during
operation 31.
64. Tighten bolt (3) smeared with Loctite 270 to a final
torque of 320 - 360 Nm. Remove the tool.
65. Manually check the rotation of the shaft and its gear
train.
Fig. 10
P1
0,10 / 0,20
maxi
Fig. 11
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002
Gearbox with Power

Shuttle - Mainshaft
5F02.1
5 F02 Mainshaft
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Disassembling and reassembling the shaft ________________
C.
D.
E.
Service tools ___________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2002

5F02.2
Gearbox with Power

Shuttle - Mainshaft
Parts list
General
The mainshaft (7) fitted to Heavy Duty gearboxes with a
power shuttle rotates on two taper roller bearings (9) (10)
and (20) (21) lying in the two lower bearing blocks of the
main gearbox. The input pinion (1), fitted at the front, is
integral with the shaft via splines. It is held by washer (2)
and nut (3).
Between the two lower bearing blocks, the shaft holds
the driving pinions of 2nd (13) and 1st (19) that run free, as
well as the synchromesh assembly for 1st and 2nd, the
hub of which is splined to the shaft. At the rear the shaft
holds the 4th gear driving pinion (24) that runs free and the
synchromesh assembly for 3rd and 4th gear.
The synchromesh is of the double cone type.
The rear bore receives bearing cup (22) of the taper roller
bearing of the output shaft.
The lubrication of the 1st gear pinion and 2nd gear bush is
ensured by a central channel with radial ports.
The pre-loading of bearings is adjusted by means of
shim(s) (11) placed behind bearing cup (10).
Issue 1
May 2002
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(16)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(24)
(25)
(27)
(29)
(32)
Input pinion
Tab washer
Nut
Lubricating pipe
Snap ring
Spring
Mainshaft
Bush
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Spacer
2nd gear driving pinion
2nd gear synchromesh cone
1st and 2nd gear synchromesh
1st gear synchromesh cone
1st gear driving pinion
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Bearing cup
4th gear driving pinion
4th gear synchromesh cone
3rd and 4th gear synchromesh
Snap ring
3rd gear synchromesh cone.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Gearbox with Power

Shuttle - Mainshaft
5F02.3
Overall view
11
12
10
21
20
19
13
4
22
29
32
27
25
24
18
16
14
Fig. 2
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 1
May 2002
Gearbox with Power

Shuttle - Mainshaft
5F02.4
Exploded view
29
4
24
27
7
6
5
4
20
32
18
21
1
19
16
2
13
8
14
25
12
11
10
Fig. 1
1
2
Issue 1
May 2002
Parts list
Fig. 2
Gearbox with Power

Shuttle - Mainshaft
5F02.5
Remark
To take out the mainshaft, it is necessary to remove the
gearbox.
57
56

2B01).
3. Remove the selector cover (see section 5C02 or
5C03 according to version).
5. Take off the input unit (see section 5B02).
6. Remove the selector rails and forks (see section
5D02).
51
Fig. 3

the shaft
Disassembly
To remove the synchromesh (27) and 4th gear driving
pinion (24) (Fig. 1), it is necessary to remove circlip (56)
(Fig. 3) from the machined groove of layshaft (51). Then,
push back the pinion (57).
8. Take off snap ring (29). Remove the 3rd and 4th gear
synchromesh (27), carefully marking its position.
9. Remove the synchromesh parts (rings, cones and
bushes) carefully marking their locations if the pinion
(24) is to be re-used later.
10. Immobilise the shaft using a locally made tool using
a 4 WD clutch plate, ref. 3617 232M1 (Fig. 4).
11. If necessary, remove lubricating pipe (4) and spring
(6).
12. Completely unscrew nut (3) (60 mm flat) using
socket, ref 3378009M1 (see E).
13. Remove tab washer (2) and the input pinion (1).
14. Take out bush (8) complete with bearing cone (9).
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2002

5F02.6
Gearbox with Power

Shuttle - Mainshaft
15. Remove the tool. Take the shaft out of the housing
complete with the 1st gear driving pinion (19) (Fig. 5)
towards the rear via the bearing block opening, while
holding together the 1st and 2nd synchromesh, pinion
and fork assembly.
Special point
The extraction of the 1st and 2nd gear fork from the
housing is carried out along with the synchromesh
assembly (16) and the 2nd gear driving pinion (13).
16. Remove the complete assembly (synchromesh, 2nd
gear pinion and fork) through the selector cover
opening (Fig. 6).
17. Take out bearing cups (10) (21).
Note: Carefully match the cups and cones if they
are to be re-used.
18. Remove the shim(s) (11) and spacer (12).
19.
If necessary, extract bearing cones (9) (20)
and bearing cup (22). Take off snap ring (5).
19
Fig. 5
Reassembly
20. Clean and check the parts, discard any defective
ones.
21. Ensure that the central and radial lubricating channels of shaft (7) are not blocked.
22. If removed, using a press and a suitable fixture,
insert the bearing cones (9) (20) on bush (8) and shaft
(7). On the latter, also position snap ring (5) and insert
cup (22).
23. Lubricate the bearing cups and cones.
24. Fit bearing cup (21).
25. Check for wear on synchromesh parts of 1st and 2nd
gear (see section 5A02).
26. Outside the housing, assemble the 2nd gear pinion
(13), new synchromesh parts and 1st and 2nd gear
synchromesh.
Remark
- If the synchromesh parts are to be re-used, refit
each part in its initial position, as marked during
disassembly.
27. Between the two compartments, refit the complete
assembly with the 1st and 2nd gear fork correctly
positioned (Fig. 6).
28. Slide the shaft and 1st gear pinion (19) through the
rear of the housing (Fig. 5) while holding the pinion /
synchromesh assembly.
29. Shim the shaft (see D).
30. Fit pinion (1).
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 6
Gearbox with Power

Shuttle - Mainshaft
31. Degrease the threaded end of the shaft using solvent.
Hold the shaft as desribed in operation 10. Clean and
lightly smear the new nut (3) with Loctite 270 or
equivalent (Fig. 7) then tighten it to a torque of 130 170 Nm using the socket previously used.
32. Remove the tool.
33. Lock the nut by bending its collar, without breaking
it, into the grooves of the shaft using a suitable drift.
Manually check the rotation of the shaft.
34. If removed, fit spring (6) and lubricating pipe (4) in
shaft (7).
35. Check the wear of the 3rd and 4th gear synchromesh
parts (see section 5A02).
36. Refit the synchromesh parts that are being re-used,
according to the markings made during disassembly. Position the driving pinion of 4th gear (24) and the
synchromesh of 3rd - 4th (27).
37. Move forward pinion (57) on the mainshaft. Fit circlip
(56) in its throat without bending it, and ensuring that
it is correctly positioned (Fig. 3).
38. Place snap ring (29).
39. Manually check:
- the axial clearance of the pinions
- the rotation of the shaft and its pinions.
5F02.7
Fig. 7
C . Final operations
40. Reassemble the output shaft (see section 5E01).
41. Refit the input unit (see section 5B02).
42. Reassemble the selector rails. Adjust the 1st - 2nd
and Hare / Tortoise forks and selectors (see sections
5D02, 5C02 or 5C03 respectively, according to
version).
depending on version). Check that the gear shifting
operates correctly and also check for the presence
of the Hare / Tortoise position.
44. Connect the gearbox with the engine (see section
2B01).
45. Couple the tractor to the gearbox and the intermediate housing (see section 2C01).
46. Check the oil tightness of mating faces and hydraulic
unions.
47. Carry out a road test of the Power Shuttle, gears,
Hare / Tortoise range and A, B, C and D ratios of the
Dynashift.
Issue 1
May 2002

5F02.8
Gearbox with Power

Shuttle - Mainshaft
D . Shimming the shaft

48. Determine the thickness of shim(s) (11) required to
obtain a provisional clearance of 0.10 to 0.15 mm for
the later loading of the bearings (see following).
Reminder:
- It is essential to place spacer (12) against the
housing, the previously determined shim(s) (11)
and bearing cup (10).
49. Slide bush (8) fitted with cone (9) and pinion (1) onto
shaft (7).
50. Fit washer (2) and nut (3).
51. Place the locking tool on the shaft (Fig. 4), tighten the
nut to a torque of 130 - 170 Nm and remove the tool.
Fig. 8
Shimming
52. Place the finger of the dial gauge on the end of the
shaft (7) (Fig. 8).
53. From the front of the housing, pull hard on the shaft,
turning alternately from left to right to correctly seat
the cones in their bearing cups.
55. Repeat operation 53, this time pushing.
56. In relation to the clearance measured, select a
definitive thickness for shim (11) in order to provide
a pre-loading of (Fig. 9):
P1 = 0.10 to 0.20 mm maximum.
Remark:
- Preferably shim to the maximum tolerance.
57. Place the locking tool on the shaft, loosen nut (3) and
take off the pinion (1).
58. Take off bush (8) complete with bearing cone (9)
from shaft (7). Remove bearing cup (10) from the
housing.
59. Place shims (11) selected during operation 56 between spacer (12) and bearing cup (10) (Fig. 1).
60. Slide the bush (8) and cone (9) assembly onto shaft
(7).
61. Proceed with the reassembly phase. Carry out
operations 30 to 39.
11
12
P1 = 0.10/0.20
0,10/0,20
maxi
max.
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2002
Gearbox with Power

Shuttle - Mainshaft
5F02.9
E . Service tools
1. Tool available in the AGCO network
- 3378009 M1: Nut socket - Mainshaft (Fig. 10).
2. Locally made tool

- Locking tool - Mainshaft (Fig. 11).
a : 4 WD clutch plate - 8200 ref. 3617232 M1 to be
ordered from your spare parts supplier
b : 40 flat iron
c : M12 bolts
Fig. 10
a
c
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002
Gearbox - Layshaft
5G01.1
5 G01 Layshaft
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Removing and disassembling the layshaft ________________
C.
Reassembling and refitting the layshaft ___________________
D.
E.
Shimming the pinions ___________________________________
F.
Shimming the bearings __________________________________
G.
Service tools ___________________________________________
10
Issue 1
May 2001

5G01.2
Gearbox - Layshaft
Parts list
General
The layshaft and its pinions form the upper transmission
line of the Heavy Duty gearbox with mechanical reverse
shuttle or Power shuttle.
Shaft (51) bears, in this order, the driving pinions of 2nd
gear (64), 1st gear (61), 4th gear (59) and 3rd gear (57).
These pinions are splined to the shaft and separated by
spacers (62) (60) and (58). Axial clearance of the gear
train is provided by one or more shims (63). The rear teeth
of the layshaft (51) continuously engage the Tortoise
pinion mounted on the output shaft. The front of the shaft
is supported by a roller bearing fitted to the rear of the
input unit. Its rear extremity is supported by two taper
roller bearings (49) (50) and (54) (55).
The adjustment of these bearings is of the "Semi Set
Right" type. It is carried out by placing a shim (53)
between the bearing cones (50) (54) in order to obtain a
clearance of a predetermined value between the cups
(49) (55) (see F).
Special points
- The friction ring (76) forms an oil tight link of the upper
shaftline between the gearbox and the intermediate
housing (see section 9G01). It is adjusted and sealed
with Loctite 648 or its equivalent in the rear bore of the
shaft (Fig. 6).
- Shim (53) has several radial ports permitting lubrication
of bearings (49) (50) and (54) (55).
Issue 2
1
December
May 2000
2002
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(76)
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Layshaft
Nut
Shim
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Circlip
3rd gear driven pinion
Spacer
4th gear driven pinion
Spacer
1st gear driven pinion
Spacer
Shim(s)
2nd gear driven pinion
Washer
Snap ring
Needle bearing
Friction ring with shoulder
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Gearbox - Layshaft
5G01.3
Overall view
76
52
51
57
61
59
63
64
56
58
60
50
54
49
55
62
65
66
67
53
52
Rear and partial view of the input unit:

- A : with mechanical reverse shuttle and without oil
deflector
- B : with Power shuttle and oil deflector
Parts list
Issue 12
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
December
May 2000
2002
Gearbox - Layshaft
5G01.4
Exploded view
52
50
49
53
55
54
51
67
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Parts list
Issue
Issue 21
May 2002
December
2000
65
Fig. 1
66
Fig. 2
Gearbox - Layshaft
5G01.5
Remark
To take out the layshaft it is necessary to remove the
gearbox.
intermediate housing (see section 2B01).
2B01).
3. Take off the selector cover (see section 5C01 or
5C02 depending on assembly).
5. Remove the input unit (see section 5B01 or 5B02
depending on assembly).
6. Disassemble the selector rails and the forks (see
section 5D01 or 5D02 depending on assembly).
7. Where necessary, immobilise the gear train in the
gearbox. Unlock and slightly loosen nut (52) with the
aid of an appropriate chisel in order to overcome the
resistance of the Loctite.
Remark :
- Of course, this nut is replaced during reassembly.
This operation facilitates the removal of the nut
with the service tool once the output shaft and
mainshaft have been disassembled.
9. Remove the mainshaft (see section 5F01 or 5F02
Fig. 3

the layshaft
Removal
10. Finish unscrewing the nut (52) using service tool
MF391 (see G) and remove bearing cone (50).
Note: Keep the bearing cups and cones together
if they are to be re-used.
11. Take out the shaft (51) and pinion assembly (Fig. 3).
12. Remove the shim (53) and take off the cone (54).
13. Where necessary, drive off the cups (49) (55) and
mark their locations (Fig.5).
Issue 12
May 2000
2002
December

5G01.6
Gearbox - Layshaft
Disassembly
14. On shaft (51) remove the snap ring (66) and washer
(65) and mark the locations. Take off the 2nd gear
pinion (64), shim(s) (63), spacer (62), 1st gear pinion
(61), spacer (60), 4th gear pinion (59), spacer (58),
3rd gear pinion (57) and circlip (56) (Fig. 4).
15. If necessary, drive off needle bearing (67) (Fig. 4).
65
67
66
64
63
62
C . Reassembling and refitting the

layshaft
60
61
59
58
Reassembly
16. Clean and inspect the components. Replace the
defective parts.
17. On the shaft, check that the lubricating ports leading
to the bearing cones (50) (54) are not blocked. Check
for the presence of friction ring (76) (Fig. 4).
18. If disassembled, insert the needle bearing (67) to
thrust against the shoulder of shaft (51) with the aid
of a suitable fixture.
Note: Check that the needle bearings turn freely
in the cage after insertion.
19. Fit a new circlip (56).
Replace the 3rd gear pinion (57), spacer (53), 4th
gear pinion (59), spacer (60), 1st gear pinion (61) and
spacer (62).
Replace 2nd gear pinion (64) without the shims (63).
Carry out the shimming of the pinions (see E).
20. Shim the pinions (see E).
57
51
56
76
Fig. 4
Refitting
Reminder
- If necessary, shim the bearings (54) (55) and (49) (50)
(see F).
21. Lubricate the cones (50) (54) and the bearing cups
(49) (55).
22. If disassembled, insert the cups to thrust against the
shoulder of the housing, with large cup (49) fitted into
the rear bore of the gearbox (Fig. 5).
23. Slide cone (54) onto shaft with shim (53) the thickness of which has been determined at operation 46.
24. Place the assembled shaft in the housing. Fit cone
(50). Pre-tighten nut (52) in contact with the cone
(50).
49
55
Fig. 5
Issue 1
December 2000
Gearbox - Layshaft
5G01.7
Special point
- This nut will be definitively tightened to torque once the
input unit has been refitted, in order to obtain the correct
alignment of the layshaft in the two bearings.
52
25. Reassemble the layshaft (see section 5F01 or 5F02
26. Reassemble the output shaft (see section 5E01).
27. Refit the input unit (see section 5B01 or 5B02
76
Fig. 6
Reminders (Fig. 6)
- Tighten nut (52) to a torque of 50 Nm. Rotate the
layshaft several times to progressively seat the bearings. Carry out final tightening of the nut to a torque of
100 - 150 Nm, the threads having previously been lightly
- Lock the nut by bending the collar without breaking it
into grooves "R" on the shaft with the aid of an
appropriate pin punch.
28. Reassemble and adjust the gear selector device
(see sections 5D01 or 5D02 and 5C01 or 5C02
30. Check that the gears change correctly and that the
Hare / Tortoise position functions.
31. Couple the gearbox to the engine (see section 2B01).
33. Check the oil tightness of seals and hydraulic unions
34. Road test the clutch controls, the A, B, C, D ratios of
the Dynashift mechanical reverse shuttle or power
shuttle, the gears and the Hare / Tortoise range.
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002

5G01.8
Gearbox - Layshaft
E . Shimming the pinions (Fig. 7)

Reminder
65
The pinions must be stacked with the shims (63)

temporarily removed.
66
35. Using a set of feeler gauges, measure the distance

between the 2nd gear pinion (64) and spacer (62).
36. In relation to the measurement, determine the required thickness of the shim(s) (63) in order to obtain
a clearance of:
J1 = 0.02 to 0.31 mm
Remark: If possible, preferably shim towards the
nominal tolerance.
37. Remove snap ring (66) and washer (65). Remove
the 2nd gear pinion.
38. Slide the previously selected definitive shims on to
the shaft. Refit the pinion and washer (65), turning
the chamfer to the exterior. Fit a new snap ring (66)
and check that it is correctly positioned.
39. Refit the assembled shaft with its pinions into the
gearbox housing (see C). Carry out the remaining
operations (see D).
63
J1 = 0,02/0,31
64
62
F . Shimming the bearings

Reminder (Fig. 8)
- The principle consists in defining the thickness of the
shim (53) to be fitted between the bearing cones (50)
(54) under load (500 N) and in order to obtain an "X"
measurement of 8.60 to 8.68 mm between cups (49)
(55) mounted loose.
Fig. 7
50
Remark
53
54
- Bearings will be shimmed before refitting the layshaft.

If the removed bearings which, extract cups (49) (55)
from the gearbox housing when pairing them with their
respective cones.
49
55
Fig. 8
Issue 1
December 2000
Gearbox - Layshaft
5G01.9
Preparation for shimming (Fig. 9)

40. Fit bearing cones (50) (54) and cups (49) (55) without
shim (53) on service tool, ref. 3378263M11 (see G).
Tighten the tool in a vertical position in a vice.
41. Compress the spring until the shoulder of the special
bolt is in contact with the top of the tool.
Special point
The spring characteristics and the length of the bolt
shoulder provide the correct load to apply to the
bearings.
42. Turn cylinder "C" several times, in order to correctly
seat the cones in the cups.
49
Shimming (Fig. 9)
Measure the distance between the bearing cones
(50) (54)
43. Position the pressure plate of the tool on the face of
the cone (54). Place the index of the dial gauge on the
extremity of the pressure plate.
44. On the dial gauge:
- set the long hand to zero
- note the position of the short hand
45. Turn the pressure plate half a turn while maintaining
it on the face of the cone (50).
Immobilise the rod by moderately manually tightening the stop bolt.
46. In relation to the measurement noted on the dial
gauge, select the corresponding shim (53) to be
definitively fitted between the bearing cones (50)
(54).
47. Carry out the remaining operations (see C and D).
54
55
50
Fig. 9
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002

5G01.10
Gearbox - Layshaft
G . Service tools
- MF391 - Socket for layshaft nut (Fig. 10).
- 3378263M11 - Bearing shimming tool (Fig. 11).
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Issue 1
December 2000
Full Powershift Gearbox
5H01
5H01.1
General
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Characteristics __________________________________________
C.
Transmission ___________________________________________
D.
Power transmission - Description ________________________
12
E.
Vibration damper and coupling shaft _____________________
18
F.
Service tools ___________________________________________
21
Issue 1
May 2001

5H01.2
A . General
The AG150 and AG250 Full Powershift gearboxes comprise forward and rear housings containing seven shafts
and nine clutches. Six speed clutches and three range
clutches. Three clutches must be hydraulically engaged
in order to transmit engine power. These transmissions
are fitted with their own Gerotor hydraulic pump, filter,
pressure regulating valve, lubricating metering valve and
nine proportional solenoid valves to engage the clutches.
These transmissions use an oil tank that is common to
the gearbox and axle assembly. The gearbox is coupled
to the engine via a splined coupling shaft situated in the
transmission and a damper located on the engine flywheel.
Fig. 1
B . Characteristics
The AG150 and AG250 Full Powershift gearboxes have
the following characteristics:
- 18 forward speeds
- 6 or 8 reverse speeds depending on the specifications
in each country
- constant meshing, helicoidal gears
- ball and roller bearings to eliminate all vibration
- common axle / gearbox oil tank
- hydraulically controlled multi-plate clutches
- electro-hydraulic gear changes
- 100% modulated gear changes
- adaptation to speed of movement
- reverse shuttle
- compact design in a 2-part housing
- housing also acts as the tractor chassis between the
engine and rear axle unit
- pressure lubrication of all clutches
- self-controlled hydraulic pump
- vibration damper in the engine flywheel
- electronically protected.
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.3
C . Transmission (Figs. 2 to 7)
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
Forward transmission housing

Rear transmission housing
Location of the first stage shaft
Location of the second stage shaft
Location of the third stage shaft
Location of the fourth stage shaft
Location of the fifth stage shaft
Location of the sixth stage shaft
Location of the seventh stage shaft
Input shaft and seal
260 psi (18 bar) pressure regulating valve
Clutch 2 proportional solenoid valve
Clutch A proportional solenoid valve
Clutch R proportional solenoid valve
Clutch B proportional solenoid valve
Clutch 1 proportional solenoid valve
Clutch C proportional solenoid valve
Clutch L proportional solenoid valve
(AG 150) clutch M proportional solenoid valve
(AG 250) clutch H proportional solenoid valve
(AG 150) clutch H proportional solenoid valve
(AG 250) clutch M proportional solenoid valve
130 psi (9 bar) pump pressure switch
Engine speed sensor
Forward speed sensor
Calibration sensor
Temperature sensor
Clutch hydraulic test port - 7/16 plugs
Lubricating pressure test port - 9/16 plugs
Pump hydraulic test ports - wide plugs
IN port (inlet) of the pump from the tank
Free return to housing port
Pump pressure outlet port
Pump pressure inlet port to forward housing
Oil outlet port towards oil cooler and lubricating
relief-valve
Return port for oil from oil cooler
Gearbox serial and model number identification
plate
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Issue 21
May 2002
2001
5H01.4
Overall view
2
15
26
27
21
26
13
24
17
16
1
11
12
26
14
27
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
18
28
Fig. 3
Parts list
Fig. 7
Fig. 2
Issue 2
1
May 2002
2001
5H01.5
Front view
10
3RD
2ND
4TH
19
11
7TH
6TH
5TH
Fig. 2
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Issue 1
18
Fig. 7
Parts list
Fig. 3
May 2001
5H01.6
Top view
26
27
14
26
27
21
16
26
11
12
17
19
24
13
15
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Parts list
Fig. 7
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.7
Right-hand view
29
35
13
23
13
12
27
20
19
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Issue 1
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 5
May 2001
5H01.8
Left-hand view
25
16
27
14
15
18
24
34
17
33
32
11
22
31
Parts list
Fig. 2
Issue 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
May 2001
Fig. 5
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
5H01.9
Bottom view
26
27
26
28
26
28
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Issue 1
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
May 2001
5H01.10
Diagram showing the meshing

of AG 150 pinions
74T
5TH STAGE
40T
70T
71T
42T 70T
71T
42T
71T
INPUT
4TH STAGE
62T
3RD STAGE
62T
2ND STAGE
48T
1ST STAGE
32T
48T
72T
65T
40T
6TH STAGE
PTO OUTPUT
OUTPUT
7TH STAGE
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.11
Diagram showing the meshing of

AG 250 pinions
80T
5TH STAGE
44T
80T
82T
48T 60T
82T
48T
82T
INPUT
76T
3RD STAGE
76T
59T
38T
53T
81T
75T
47T
4TH STAGE
2ND STAGE
1ST STAGE
6TH STAGE
PTO OUTPUT
OUTPUT
7TH STAGE
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.12
D . Power transmission Description

The engine power is transmitted to the 1st stage shaft that
drives the shafts of the 2nd, 3rd and 4th stages. The 1st
stage shaft also drives the Gerotor hydraulic pump for the
gearbox and acts as the PTO input shaft. The shafts of
the 2nd and 4th stages act as forward speeds with the
various ratios of input speed, while the shaft of the 3rd
stage acts as reverse with a single input speed ratio. This
allows to obtain forward and reverse speeds. When
clutch 1, 2 or R is engaged, it locks the clutch housing to
the corresponding shaft. Each clutch housing is fitted
with a pinion that meshes with the other shafts (all
having the same ratio), permitting the power to enter via
a clutch (1, 2 or R) and to exit via another clutch (A, B or
C) and another shaft.
SPEED
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
Issue 1
Thanks to this configuration, the various clutches supply

six forward ratios and three reverse ratios to the transmission, in accordance with the input clutches (1, 2 or R)
or output clutches (A, B or C) selected. The output from
speed clutches directs the power to the clutch of the
selected range (L, M or H), thus providing 18 forward
speeds and 8 reverse speeds. In the North American
market, the electronic control does not permit the engaging of the two highest speeds. Other international markets may authorise these reverse speeds in relation to
the legislation in force in their countries (Figs. 10 to 14).
CLUTCHES
AG15O
RATIO
AG250
RATIO
1-A-L
2-A-L
1-B-L
1-A-M
2-B-L
2-A-M
1-C-L
1-B-M
2-C-L
2-B-M
1-A-H
1-C-M
2-A-H
2-C-M
1-B-H
2-B-H
1-C-H
2-C-H
R-A-L
R-B-L
R-B-M
R-C-L
R-B-M
R-A-H
R-C-M
10,241
7,929
6,145
5,397
4,757
4,179
3,687
3,238
2,854
2,507
2,214
1,943
1,714
1,504
1,329
1,029
0,797
0,617
10,241
6,145
5,397
3,687
3,238
2,214
1,934
10,227
7,940
6,136
5,386
4,764
4,181
3,682
3,231
2,858
2,509
2,208
1,939
1,714
1,505
1,325
1,029
0,795
0,617
10,227
6,136
5,386
3,682
3,231
2,208
1,939
May 2001
POWER TRANSMISSION
ROUTE (Fig. 10)
A-C-E-F-G-I-H-J-K-L-M-P
A-B-I-H-J-K-L-M-P
A-C-E-F-J-K-L-M-P
A-C-E-F-I-O-Q-P
A-B-G-F-J-K-L-M-P
A-B-I-O-Q-P
A-C-K-L-M-P
A-C-E-F-H-I-O-Q-P
A-B-G-F-E-K-L-M-P
A-B-G-F-H-I-O-Q-P
A-C-E-F-G-I-O-N
A-C-K-J-H-I-O-Q-P
A-B-I-O-N
A-B-G-F-E-K-J-H-I-O-Q-P
A-C-E-F-H-I-O-N
A-B-G-F-H-I-O-N
A-C-K-J-H-I-O-N
A-B-G-F-E-K-J-H-I-O-N
A-D-F-G-I-H-J-K-L-M-P
A-D-J-K-L-M-P
A-D-F-G-I-O-Q-P
A-D-F-E-K-L-M-P
A-D-H-I-O-Q-P
A-D-F-G-I-O-N
A-D-F-E-K-J-H-I-O-Q-P
5H01.13
Power transmission route
5TH STAGE
3RD STAGE
INPUT
4TH STAGE
2ND STAGE
1ST STAGE
6TH STAGE
PTO OUTPUT
OUTPUT
7TH STAGE
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.14

F1 speed (1st forward)
5TH STAGE
4TH STAGE
3RD STAGE
2ND STAGE
1ST STAGE
INPUT
6TH STAGE
PTO OUTPUT
OUTPUT
7TH STAGE
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.15

R4 speed (4th reverse)
5TH STAGE
4TH STAGE
3RD STAGE
2ND STAGE
1ST STAGE
ENTREE
6TH STAGE
PTO OUTPUT
OUTPUT
7TH STAGE
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.16

F14 speed (14th forward)
5TH STAGE
4TH STAGE
3rd STAGE
2nd STAGE
INPUT
1st STAGE
6TH STAGE
PTO OUTPUT
SORTIE
7TH STAGE
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.17

F18 speed (18th forward)
5TH STAGE
4TH STAGE
3RD STAGE
2ND STAGE
INPUT
1ST STAGE
6TH STAGE
1ST STAGE
OUTPUT
7TH STAGE
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2001

5H01.18
E . Vibration damper and coupling

shafts (Figs. 15 - 16)
Parts list
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
Engine flywheel
LUK damper
Bearing
Coupling shaft
Spring
Input shaft seal
1st stage shaft
Bolt
Tightening torque
- M10 bolt (43): 68 92 Nm.
Reminder
For additional information (see section 3B01).
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.19
AG 150
40
43
37
39
41
42
A
36
38
A : Valmet engine flywheel

B : Perkins engine flywheel
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 16
Fig. 15
May 2001
5H01.20
AG 250
40
43
37
39
41
42
36
38
A and C : Valmet engine flywheel
Issue 1
Parts list
May 2001
Fig. 15
Fig. 16

F . Service tools
ATP 3015 - AG150 / AG250 - Tool kit (Fig. 17)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
ATP 3016 - Set of metric lifting rings

ATP 3017 - Pinion block lifting tool
ATP 3018-1 - Pump pressure test adaptor
ATP 3018-2 - Clutch pressure test adaptor
ATP 3018-3 -Lubricating pressure test adaptor
ATP 3019 - Pinion block fitting plate
5H01.21
(51) ATP 3020 - Bearing fit-in sleeves

(52) ATP 3020-1 - Fit-in grip
(53) ATP 3020-2 - Adaptor bush for AG150 gearbox bearings
(54) ATP 3020-4 - Adaptor bush for AG250 gearbox bearings
(55) ATP 3021 - Sling for clutch train
(56) ATP 3022 - Set of guide studs "
49
47
45
48
52
51
53
46
54
55
56
50
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.22
ATP 3030 Set of transmission pinion extractors also designed for the previous series of Full Powershift gearboxes (Fig. 18)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
ATP 3030-1 Main pinion extracting sleeve

ATP 3030-2 Pinion extracting sleeve
ATP 3030-8 Main pinion extracting sleeve
57
64
59
58
61
62
60
63
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2001
5H01.23
ATP 3002 Clutch spring compression tool

sold in previous tool kits (Fig. 19)
Other recommended tools
1. MFN-20001: Quick-disconnect coupling adaptor kit
for hydraulic tests
2. Pinion extractor with a range of 255 mm (10 inch)
minimum
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2001
5I01
5I01.1
Transmission hydraulic circuit
CONTENTS
A.
Characteristics __________________________________________
B.
General ________________________________________________
C.
Hydraulic circuit diagram ________________________________
D.
Gearbox oil filter ________________________________________
E.
Oil cooler thermostatic valve _____________________________
F.
Pressure regulating-valve ________________________________
10
G.
Proportional solenoid valve ______________________________
11
H.
Pump and pressure circuit _______________________________
12
I.
Pump disassembly ______________________________________
13
J.
Pump reassembly _______________________________________
14
K.
Clutch circuit ___________________________________________
15
L.
Lubricating circuit ______________________________________
16
Issue 1
May 2001

5I01.2
Issue 1
May 2001
5I01.3
A . Characteristics - Transmission hydraulic circuit

Hydraulic characteristics at 2200 rpm at 60 C (140 F)
1. Clutch pressure regulating-valve ........................................................ 17.2 - 19 bar (250 - 270 psi)
2. Lubricating pressure regulating-valve ................................................. 6.2 - 9.3 bar (90 -140 psi)
3. Filter by-pass valve Differential pressure ......................................... 3.1 - 3.7 bar (45 - 54 psi)
4. Oil cooler thermostatic valve opens at ...............................................
71 C (160 F)
5. Oil cooler thermostatic valve fully open at .........................................
85 C (185 F)
6. Gerotor pump flow rate ...................................................................... 94.5 l/min (25 gpm min)
7. Lubricating oil flow rate thru oil cooler at 85 C (185 F) ..................... 75.7 l/min (20 gpm min)
8. Lubricating oil flow rate by-passing oil cooler at 60 C (140 F) .......... 75.7 l/min (20 gpm min)
9. Gearbox oil filter ................................................................................. 15 microns
Issue 1
May 2001

5I01.4

Lubricating circuit
B . General
Clutch pressure circuit
The Full Powershift AG150 and AG250 transmissions are
fitted with their own Gerotor type toothed rotor hydraulic
pump mounted at the rear of the transmission. The pump
is driven at engine speed by the first stage shaft. When
the engine is running the pump supplies the pressure and
flow rate to activate the clutches and lubricate the
transmission. The oil is sucked through a strainer located
in the intermediate housing. The pump discharges oil
through the gearbox filter and by priority supplies the
clutch solenoid valves and the pressure regulating-valve.
Once the necessary pressure and flow rate for the clutch
supply is supplied, the pressure regulating-valve opens.
It maintains the operating pressure in the clutches. Three
solenoids are then simultaneously activated to engage
the three clutches and transmit the power from the
engine to the transmission. To obtain the various speeds,
it is possible to activate a combination of any three of the
nine solenoids. Once the required volume of oil to engage
the clutches is attained and the pressure regulating-valve
is open, the oil flows through the lubricating circuit via the
pressure regulating-valve and the thermostatic valve.
Proportional solenoid valves

The oil reaches each extremity of the proportional solenoid valves and the volume of oil that supplies each
clutch via a solenoid valve is controlled at clutch level by
an electrical signal emitted by the transmission calculator (TC), this modulates the gear changes.
Each solenoid valve is linked to the oil return. When the
TC cuts the supply to the solenoid valve, the oil contained
in the clutch returns to the tank.
Issue 1
May 2001
After having supplied the clutches, the oil supplied by the

pump passes through the oil cooler, or bypasses it via the
thermostatic valve, and is used to lubricate the clutches.
The cooled lubricating oil is thus supplied to the gearbox
to lubricate the shafts, clutches and bearings. All the oil
supplied to the bearings is metered by a calibrated port
located in the bore of the bearings and by three channels
drilled in the clutch shafts. When the pump provides
sufficient oil for the lubricating circuit, the pressure rises
until the relief-valve opens and the excess returns to the
tank.
5I01.5
C . Hydraulic circuit diagram

Parts list (Fig. 1)
2ND STAGE
"1"
"R"
"2"
"C"
"B"
"A"
6TH STAGE
3RD STAGE
14
4TH STAGE
7TH STAGE
"M"
"H"
"L"
"M"
"H"
INLET
"2"
"A"
"R"
"B"
12
"1"
Clutch "A"
Clutch "B"
Clutch "C"
Clutch "H"
Clutch "L"
Clutch "M"
Clutch "R"
Clutch "1"
Clutch "2"
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
"C"
A
B
C
H
L
M
R
1
2
14
"L"
Tank
Suction strainer (250 )
Suction pipe
Gerotor - toothed rotor pump
Pump discharge pipe
Main oil filter for the gearbox
Gearbox oil filter by-pass
Oil cooler
Oil cooler by-pass
Lubricating relief-valve
Clutch pressure regulating-valve (17 bar)
Proportional solenoid valve
Lubricating pressure pipe
Lubricating port
"A" clutch supply pipe
"2" clutch supply pipe
Clutch return port
Lubricating oil return port from relief-valve
5TH STAGE
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
17
Legend
Low pressure (17 bar)
Lubrication
Suction
Return
2
13
15
16
13
11
18
10
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
5I01.6
D . Oil filter (Fig. 2)
22
19
29
28
27
26
7
21
25
24
23
22
20
(6)
(7)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
Filter element
By-pass
Filter head
Filter bowl
Oil inlet port
Oil outlet port
Oring
Issue 1
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
May 2001
By-pass seat
Oring
By-pass outlet to lubrication
Oring
By-pass spring
Oring
Fig. 2

Oil filter Oil flow
Coming from the Gerotor pump, the oil enters the head
of the filter unit. It flows from the outside of the filter
element to the inside. Filtered oil from the centre of the
filter element then flows out through a separate channel
in the head of the filter unit to supply the transmission. If
the filter is blocked, a by-pass valve opens and channels
non-filtered oil to the lubricating circuit. The by-pass
valve operates on the pressure differential existing between the filtered oil and non-filtered oil. The differential
pressure is controlled by the by-pass valve spring.
5I01.7
Oil filtered under pressure flows into the chamber containing the by-pass valve spring and enables the spring
to keep the valve closed. If the filter becomes blocked,
the pressure on the outside of the filter element increases
while it drops in the centre of the filter element. The
pressure of the oil on the outside of the filter element then
exceeds that of the by-pass valve spring and the valve
therefore opens. The by-pass valve opens when the
pressure differential equals 3.1 - 3.7 bar (45 - 54 psi) (Fig.
3).
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
5I01.8
E . Thermostatic valve (Fig. 4)

(9)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
Thermostatic valve
"IN" oil inlet port
"OUT" oil outlet to oil cooler
"OUT" oil outlet to tank
Housing towards oil cooler
Housing towards tank
O'ring
Support bolts. Tighten to a torque of 6.7 Nm
Spring
Guide and spring seal
Thermic element
Guide washer
Screw adjustment. Smear the screw with Loctite
290. Tighten until contact, then add an additional
quarter turn.
31
41
33
40
39
36
30
35
35
37
38
34
36
32
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
5I01.9
Thermostatic valve Oil flow

When the transmission oil temperature is less than 71C,
the thermostatic valve closes so that oil cannot flow
through the oil cooler. When the oil temperature reaches
85C, the thermostatic valve is fully open and oil flows
to the oil cooler (Fig. 5).
CLOSED TO OIL COOLER
INLET
OPEN TO OIL COOLER
INLET
GEARBOX
GEARBOX
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
5I01.10
F . Pressure regulating-valve (Fig. 6)

(11)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
Gearbox pressure regulating-valve

Return port to tank
Return oil pressure - Outlet to lubrication
Pump inlet pressure
Plug
O'ring
Shims
Outer spring
Inner spring
O'ring
O'ring
Washer
Regulating spool
O'ring
Plug
45
49
50
51
53
55
46
47
48
52
51
54
42
43
44
11
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001
5I01.11
G . Proportional solenoid valve (Fig.

7)
(12)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
Proportional solenoid valve (cannot be repaired)

Aluminium nut - 1.7 to 2.8 Nm
Washer
Solenoid
O'ring
O'ring
O'ring
Clutch return oil port
Clutch outlet oil pressure
Pump inlet pressure
56
57
58
12
59
60
61
62
63
64
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

5I01.12
H . Pump and pressure circuit

The AG150 and AG250 transmissions have a fully integrated hydraulic circuit. The pump (4) is located at the
rear of the transmission (Fig. 8). It is driven by the first
stage shaft that runs at engine speed. The Gerotor pump
has two inlet ports in order to reduce vibration within the
hydraulic circuit. It can be removed by uncoupling the
tractor between the gearbox and the intermediate housing (see section 2C01). The inlet and outlet ports of the
pump are fixed to the rear housing of the gearbox and oil
tightness is provided by O'rings. The suction and discharge channels are moulded into the rear housing of the
gearbox. The right-hand channels are suction and the
left-hand channels are discharge.
Fig. 8
During repair operations, check pump wear between the

external bush and the housing, axial clearance and the
splines. Replace the pump if it is damaged. Consult
figures 8 - 9 and 1 for pump disassembly.
The pressure regulating-valve (11) (Fig. 10) controls the
pressure in the circuit used to activate the clutches. The
condition of the regulating-valve can be determined by
carrying out a pressure test (see section 9N01).
The pressure must be uniform across the whole engine
speed range, though it may vary slightly. The pressure
must be between 17.2 and 19 bars. The pressure test
can be carried out by removing the wide plug (28) (see
sections 5H01 and 9N01). Use the ATP 3018-1 service
tool in a wide plug on the forward housing. The pressure
regulating-valve has the form of a repairable cartridge
and it must be checked for any deposits, scratches or
friction points. Replace the O"rings on the cartridge each
time that it is removed from the transmission (Fig. 6 and
10).
Fig. 9
11
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001
5I01.13
I . Disassembling the pump

The Gerotor pump is bolted to the rear housing of the
gearbox. It can be removed by taking out the six retaining
bolts after uncoupling the tractor between the gearbox
and the centre housing. Remove the two bolts that hold
together the pump body and cover and separate the
halves (Fig. 8 - 9).
Measurement of wear on pump components

Maximum acceptable wear between the external rim of
the bush and the housing: 0.51 mm (Fig. 11).
Between the tip of the internal star and the external
bush: 0.18 mm (Fig. 12).
Fig. 11
Lateral clearance of two components in relation to the

housing: 0.1 mm (Fig. 13).
Examine the surface condition ace of the two components. Replace them where necessary.
Maintain the relative positions of components in relation
to each other, in order to avoid producing new wear areas
due to accidental offset.
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001

5I01.14
J . Pump reassembly
Reassemble the pump and fasten the cover on to the
body with the two bolts. Tighten to a torque of 24 Nm.
Lubricate the pump with transmission oil and fit the two
O'rings smeared with miscible grease into the pump
body. Fit the pump on to the rear housing of the gearbox.
Fix it in place with the six bolts removed previously.
Tighten the bolts to a torque of 24 Nm (Fig. 14 - 15).
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2001
5I01.15
K . Clutch circuit
The oil flow in the clutch piston chamber is controlled by
the proportional solenoid valves (12) and they themselves are controlled by the transmission control unit
(TC). The oil is metered in the clutch pistons by the
proportional solenoid valves, in relation to the electrical
signal received by transmission control. The hydraulic
spools of the proportional solenoid valves cannot be
repaired, except for the O'rings and the solenoid. The
solenoid is fixed to the spool by an aluminium nut (56)
and mustd be tightened to a torque of 1.7 - 2.8 Nm maximum.
56
12
Fig. 16
Each clutch is fitted with a control channel located near
the solenoid valve concerned.
Each control channel is identified by a number or letter
moulded into the housing (Fig. 17) and corresponding to
the clutch. All the channels are closed by a small 7/16
plug.
Use ATP 3018-2 adaptors (see section 5H01) to check
the pressure. To correctly carry out a check on a gear
ratio, check the pressure in all three clutches concerned
at the same time.
Fig. 17
56
12
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2001

5I01.16
L . Lubricating circuit
The gearbox lubricating oil is supplied by the Gerotor
pump via the pressure regulating-valve. Lubricating oil
pressure is maintained by the pump flow and by the
lubricating relief-valve. The lubricating relief-valve (10) is
located at the bottom of the threaded port provided for the
oil cooler connector on the left hand side of the transmission (Fig. 19). The lubricating oil supplies each transmission shaft, lubricates the clutch plates, shafts and
bearings. To test the lubricating pressure, use test
connector ATP 3018-3. Screw the test connector into one
of the medium-sized plugs (27) (see section 5H01).
10
The lubricating relief-valve (10) (Fig. 21) may be replaced

either by screw tapping the interior of the valve and
removing it with the aid of an inertia extractor, or when
the gearbox is disassembled by driving it out from the
interior using a suitable fixture (Fig. 20).
Fig. 19
A drilled aperture in the shaft provides lubrication for the

forward bearing while a port at the end of the shaft
provides lubrication for the rear bearing (Fig. 22).
10
Fig. 20
10
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 22
5J01
5J01.1
Transmission - Repair
Contents
A.
Disassembling the gearbox ______________________________
B.
Removing the front housing _____________________________
C.
Removing clutches and transmission shafts ______________
D.
Replacing the input shaft seal ____________________________
E.
Inspecting and repairing the housing _____________________
F.
Reassembling the gearbox _______________________________
G.
Overhauling a speed clutch train _________________________
10
H.
Input shaft - First stage shaft _____________________________
23
I.
Repairing the range clutch shaft __________________________
24
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.2
- Separate the tractor between the gearbox and the
- Separate the gearbox from the engine (see section
2B01).
A . Disassembling the gearbox

- Take off the Gerotor pump (4) from the gearbox and PTO
shaft from the rear of the gearbox. The Gerotor pump (4)
is fixed to the rear housing of the gearbox by six bolts.
Slide the pump and shaft apart to separate them. Keep
the Orings between the pump and the rear housing
(Fig. 1).
- Remove the engine speed sensors (22), forward speed
sensor (23) and the calibration sensor (24) from the
gearbox in order to avoid damage to them when
separating the housings (Fig. 2).
- Remove the hydraulic supply pipes, the output connections to the oil cooler and the pressure regulating-valve
(11) from the front housing of the gearbox in order to gain
access to the housing bolts (Fig. 3).
- Place a wooden plank of the correct thickness on the
ground. Provide enough space in order to be able to
reach the top of the gearbox with workshop crane or a
suitably adapted lifting tackle.
- In order to protect the mating faces from scratching or
damage, before removing the front housing, position
the gearbox vertically as shown in Fig. 5 using a
suitable sling and lifting rings ATP 3016 (Fig. 4), the rear
face being placed on the wooden plank.
Fig. 1
24
Fig. 2
11
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 4
5J01.3
B . Removing the front housing

Raise the front housing after having removed the bolts
(Fig. 5).
Note: Adjust the lifting sling in such a way that the

front housing remains horizontal during the separating operation. The shafts will be withdrawn more
easily from the housing if the latter is shaken lightly
as it is lifted.
Note: Take care that the transmission shafts remain
in the rear housing and are not lifted at the same time
as the front housing. Lightly shake the front housing
when it is lifted to avoid bending the shafts (Fig. 6).
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.4
C . Removing clutches and transmission shafts
Clean the work area and prepare shaft support plate (ATP
3019) on which the work will be carried out (Fig. 7). The
workshop must be accessible by a workshop crane or
suitable lifting tackle.
Position 1 - AG 150 gearbox
Stands (1) screwed directly into the plate (Fig. 8)
Position 2 - AG 250 gearbox
Stands (1) screwed into the bushes (Fig. 8)
- Remove the seal rings from all shafts to avoid damaging them before installing the shaft-lifting tool.
- Install lifting tool (AP 3017) on the shafts and fix each
shaft to the tool with the supplied locking devices.
Place the lifting ring of the tool in the correct position
(Fig. 11).
Fig. 7
- Position 1 for the AG 150 gearbox (Fig. 9)
- Position 2 for the AG 250 gearbox (Fig. 10)
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 10

- With a workshop crane or suitable lifting tackle and a
chain attached to the lifting ring of the tool (Fig. 11).
- Gently raise, while lightly shaking the shafts so that the
bearings leave the bores of the rear housing. Take care
not to lift the rear housing at the same time in order to
avoid bending the shafts.
- Once the block of shafts has been removed, take off the
plastic guard from the forward pinions (Fig. 12).
- lace the tool and shafts in a single block on the
workbench.
- Position the block of removed shafts on the previously
prepared support (ATP 3019) (Fig. 13).
- Remove the shaft lifting tool after having positioned the
shafts on the support. Take care not to knock over the
block of shafts or clutches when removing the lifting
tool.
- Mark the location of the shafts in order to understand
how to reassemble them.
- The shafts may be removed one by one from the
support to carry out even greater levels of disassembly.
- For the repair of clutches and shafts, see G and I.
5J01.5
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.6
D . Replacing the input shaft seal

41
Replacing the seal only without disassembling the gearbox

- Separate the tractor between the engine and gearbox
(see section 2B01).
- Take out, by sliding them, the input shaft and the spring
from the gearbox.
Note: Never try to separate the tractor between the
front and rear gearbox housings - this will result in
serious damage.
- Take out the input shaft seal (41) through the front
housing of the gearbox using a suitable extractor (Fig.
14).
- Fit a new seal using an insertion sleeve.
- Take care that the new seal is correctly aligned so that
it does not leak. Lubricate the seal lip with miscible
grease.
- Reassemble in reverse order using the guide studs to
align the gearbox with the engine (see section 2B01).
Fig. 14
41
Replacing the seal while disassembling the

gearbox
- When the front housing (1) has been removed, take out
the old seal (41) (Fig. 15).
- Fit the new seal using a suitable insertion sleeve, taking
care that it is correctly aligned so that it does not leak.
Lubricate the seal lip with miscible grease.
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2001

E . Inspecting and repairing the housing
5J01.7
10
Inspecting the housing

- Examine all the bearing bores of the front and rear
housings to ensure that they are not damaged. Replace
or repair any damaged bores.
- Examine all wear rings for damage and replace where
necessary (Fig. 16).
Replacing seal wear rings

All the seal bores in the front housing contain rings (Fig.
16). The latter may be replaced if they are damaged. The
location of the holes in the rings is not very important
since the bores have annular grooves beneath all the
bushes. By using an extractor with two or three jaws and
fitted with an inertia device (Fig. 17), hook the front edge
of the ring and extract it. Fit a new ring leaving the
chamfer on the outside to guide the seal. Fit the new bush
by pressing the insertion sleeve against the housing (Fig.
18).
Fig. 16
Lubricating relief-valve
If the previous tests have shown that the lubricating
relief-valve is defective (10) (Fig. 16), it may be removed
from the interior at this time. It may also be removed
from outside the housing by taking off the oil cooler piping
and connection. Screw tap the inside of the valve (10)
(Fig. 26) and use an inertia extractor to remove it.
Fig. 17
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.8
F . Reassembling the gearbox

- After cleaning the housings and refitting the shafts and
clutches, place the rear face of the rear housing on the
suitably sized plank of wood.
- Install the pinion block lifting tool (ATP 3017) on the
shafts in supporting tool (ATP 3019) (Fig. 19). Take care
that each shaft is locked to the lifting tool. With a
workshop crane or suitable lifting tackle, move the
block of pinions towards the rear housing (Fig. 20).
- Fit the plastic guard on the pinion block (Fig. 21). Slowly
lower the pinion block into the rear housing taking care
that guard remains in place (Fig. 22). When the pinion
block approaches its original position, take care that all
the bearings are correctly placed in their respective
bores. Once the shafts begin to slide into their bores,
lightly shake the pinion block so that the bearings slide
into the bores. Take care that all the shafts attain their
original position. Remove the pinion block lifting tool
(Fig. 23).
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 22

- Before fitting the seals on the shafts. Reshape each
seal ring by holding it and joining both ends and
compressing them so that the ends overlap (Fig. 24).
Fit the seals on the shafts and centre them in the
grooves. Apply miscible grease on the outside of the
seal to maintain them more easily in the groove. Check
that all the seals are correctly placed on each shaft.
- Using lifting rings (ATP 3016) fitted to the front housing,
lift the housing to a horizontal position to place it above
the shafts of the rear housing (Fig. 25).
- Clean and degrease the front and rear housing flanges.
Use Loctite 518 to seal the front and rear housings.
- Fit the guide studs (ATP 3022) into the rear housing to
facilitate the installation of the front housing.
- Lower the front housing onto the rear housing. Lightly
shake the front housing shafts, taking care that it is
perfectly horizontal when it is lowered. This avoids
damaging the seal rings when lowering the housing.
- Fit the 16 x 140 mm retaining bolts in the housing and
tighten them one by one to a torque of 68 Nm. Then
tighten to 135 Nm. Finally tighten to 217 Nm.
- Install the pressure regulating-valve (11), oil cooler pipe
connectors and the speed and calibration sensors in
the housings (Fig. 26).
5J01.9
Fig. 23
Fig. 24
10
11
Fig. 26
Fig. 25
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.10
G . Overhauling a speed clutch train

General
- All speed clutch trains are disassembled in the same
manner.
- All speed clutch trains are composed of two clutch
packs.
- The sets of speed clutches are identified thus:
. clutches A and 2 - 2nd stage shaft
. clutches B and R - 3rd stage shaft
. clutches C and 1 - 4th stage shaft
- For more details on the fitting of each shaft, see the
paragraphs relating to each shaft (Fig. 38, 39 and 40).
Disassembly
- Using a clutch train sling (ATP 3021), remove the speed
clutch to be repaired from the pinion block support tool.
Place the clutch train on a clean workbench and turn the
groove of the seal ring upwards (Fig. 27).
Note: Take care that the gear train is properly
supported to avoid it toppling and damaging the
pinions.
- Install a split bearing extractor (OEM 4175 or equivalent) on the bearing (18) or (22). The split bearing
extractor must be fitted so that its flat surface is turned
towards the pinion. Tighten the tightening bolts of the
extractor until the bearing begins to extract (Fig. 28).
- Hook the pinion extractor below the split bearing extractor and extract the bearing from the shaft by pulling (Fig.
29).
- Remove the circlip (17) or (21) from the shaft.
- Place the extractor (ATP 3030) (Fig. 30) on the pinion
and tighten the bolt. To be able to remove the pinion
from the shaft, the extractor must be tightened around
the external diameter of the pinion (4) or (5). In some
cases, the main sleeve is necessary and must be fitted
beneath the pinion. Place the extractor by hooking it
beneath the sleeve and extract the pinion (4) and (5) and
the bearing (16) or (20) from the shaft by pulling (Fig. 31).
Note: To select the extraction sleeve that matches
the pinion, see the pages relating to the clutch
trains (pages 14 to 19).
Note: DO NOT USE THE EXTRACTOR WITHOUT AN
EXTRACTION SLEEVE TO REMOVE THE PINIONS THIS MAY DAMAGE THE TEETH OF THE PINIONS.
THE TEETH ARE HARDENED AND MAY SHATTER
LIKE GLASS. THE PINIONS MUST BE EXTRACTED
BY EFFECTING A TIGHTENING ON THE EXTERNAL
WALL OF THE PINION.
- Remove circlip (14), closing plate (13), thrust plates and
friction plates.
- Fit a suitable extractor on the bearing of the inside pinion
(15) (19) and remove the latter from the shaft.
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
Issue
Issue21
May
May2002
2001
5J01.11
- Place the clutch train in a press. Fit tool ATP 3002 on the
Belleville washers (10). Compress the washers, remove the circlip (12) and release the pressure on the
washers (Fig. 32).
- Remove the clutch train from the press and remove the
locking washer from circlip (11) and the Belleville
washers (10).
- Remove the oil seal washer (9) that lies between the
Belleville washers (10) and the clutch piston (6) (Fig. 33).
Fig. 30
Fig. 31
10
Fig. 33
Fig. 32
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.12
- Once the Belleville washers are removed, inject

compressed air into the clutch oil supply channel near
the seal ring on the shaft (24) or (25) (Fig. 34). This will
eject the piston from the clutch housing (1) (Fig. 35).
- Disassemble the opposite end of the shaft in the same
manner.
Note: The best method to maintain the shaft in a
vertical position is to have a 3 (76 mm) diameter
hole in the workbench to recieve the shaft.
24
25
Inspecting components
Belleville washers
Check for:
- Cracks
- Wear on contact points
Piston, seals and piston bores
Check for:
- Seal hardening, cracking, nicks, etc.
- Piston seal groove: dents, burs, chipping, etc.
- Piston bores: chipping, dents, burs (Fig. 36).
Fig. 34
Thrust plates and clutch discs

Check for:
- Buckling, heat discoloration, surface and spline wear
Nominal dimensions
- Thrust plates
- Discs
1.78 mm
2.79 mm
When refitting previously used clutch discs and thrust

plates, it is the piston travel that determines whether they
should be replaced (Fig. 37).
1
Fig. 35
Fig. 36
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 37
5J01.13
Inspection of components
Pinions
Check for:
- Pitting, flaking, ripples, broken teeth, cracks, bore wear
due to bearing creep, spline wear.
Bearings
Check for:
- Pitting, denting, grooving, cracks in the groove, wear
due to creep on internal and external rims.
Circlips and grooves
Check that circlips and grooves are in good condition.
Note: Circlips with rounded and square edges. The
square edge must always retain the load.
Shafts
Check for:
- Wear on splines, cracks, surface wear due to creep.
Check that seal ring grooves are square edged and
without burs, etc. That oil channels are not blocked; that
all port and stop plugs are correctly in place; that there
is no spline wear or cracking in the clutch housings; that
circlip slots are square edged.
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.14
2nd stage shaft
26
24
25
17
18
16
26
15
13
2
2nd STAGE
14
26
A
11
12
10
25
24
26
19
21
26
23
22
20
Fig. 38
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.15
2nd stage shaft (Fig. 38)
2nd stage shaft (Fig. 38)
AG 150 transmission
(1) 2nd stage shaft pinion - 71 teeth
(2) "A" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(3) "2" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(4) "A" clutch hub pinion - 42 teeth
Use ATP 3030-1 and ATP 3030-3 sleeves to extract
the pinion
(5) "2" clutch hub pinion - 48 teeth
the pinion
(6) Clutch piston
(7) Piston external seal - "D" bush type seal
(8) Piston internal seal - O'ring
(9) Oil seal washer
(10) Belleville washers - 6
(11) Circlip holding washer
(12) Circlip
(13) Closing plate
(14) Clutch lining circlip
(15) "A" clutch internal pinion hub ball bearing
(16) "A" clutch external pinion hub ball bearing
(17) Circlip
(18) Forward shaft roller bearing
(19) "2" clutch internal pinion hub ball bearing
(20) "2" clutch external pinion hub ball bearing
(21) Circlip
(22) Rear shaft ball bearing
(23) Lubricating port
(24) "2" clutch pressurized oil channel
(25) "A" clutch pressurized oil channel
(26) Pressurized oil channel
AG 250 transmission
(1) 2nd stage shaft pinion - 82 teeth
(2) "A" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(4) "A" clutch hub pinion - 48 teeth
the pinion
Use only ATP 3030-1 sleeve to extract the pinion
(6) Clutch piston
(9) Oil seal washer
(12) Circlip
(13) Closing plate
(15) "A" clutch internal pinion hub ball bearing
(16) "A" clutch external pinion hub ball bearing
(17) Circlip
(21) Circlip
(25) "A" clutch pressurized oil channel
Instructions
(15) The ball bearing may be installed in either position.
(18) The roller bearing must be installed with the bearing
circlip facing the centre of the shaft.
Instructions
(15) The ball bearing may be installed in either position.
(22) The SH2 designation bearing must be installed
here. The SH2 bearing is a hardened bearing with
twice the normal life span.
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.16
3rd stage shaft
26
24
18
25
26
17
15
16
13
14
27
11
28
12
26
10
7
R
24
19
25
rd
3 STAGE
20
26
21
22
23
Fig. 39
Issue 1
May 2001

3rd stage shaft (Fig. 39)
AG 150 transmission
(1) 3rd stage shaft pinion - 71 teeth
(2) "B" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(3) "R" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(4) "B" clutch hub pinion - 42 teeth
Use only ATP 3030-1 to extract the pinion
(5) "R" clutch hub pinion - 62 teeth
(6) Clutch piston
(9) Oil seal washer
(12) Circlip
(13) Closing plate
(15) "B" clutch internal pinion hub ball bearing
(16) "B" clutch external pinion hub ball bearing
(17) Circlip
(18) Front shaft roller bearing
(19) "R" clutch internal pinion hub ball bearing
(20) "R" clutch external pinion hub ball bearing
(21) Circlip
(24) "R" clutch pressurized oil channel
(25) "B" clutch pressurized oil channel
(27) Pinion - 70 teeth
(28) Circlip
Instructions
5J01.17
3rd stage shaft (Fig. 39)

AG 250 transmission
(1) 3rd stage shaft pinion - 82 teeth
(2) "B" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(3) "R" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(4) "B" clutch hub pinion - 48 teeth
the pinion
(5) "R" clutch hub pinion - 76 teeth
(6) Clutch piston
(9) Oil seal washer
(12) Circlip
(13) Closing plate
(15) "B" clutch internal pinion hub ball bearing
(16) "B" clutch external pinion hub ball bearing
(17) Circlip
(21) Circlip
(24) "R" clutch pressurized oil channel
(27) Pinion - 60 teeth
(28) Circlip
Instructions
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.18

4th stage shaft
26
24
25
17
18
16
26
15
13
14
26
C
11
12
10
25
24
19
26
3
4th STAGE
26
5
20
23
21
22
Fig. 40
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.19
4th stage shaft (Fig. 40)
AG 150 transmission
(1) 4th stage shaft pinion - 71 teeth
(2) "C" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(4) "C" clutch hub pinion - 70 teeth
(6) Clutch piston
(7) Piston external seal - D bush type seal
(8) Piston internal seal - O-ring
(9) Oil seal washer
(12) Circlip
(13) Closing plate
(15) "C" clutch internal pinion hub ball bearing
(16) "C" clutch external pinion hub ball bearing
(17) Circlip
(21) Circlip
AG 250 transmission
(1) 4th stage shaft pinion - 82 teeth
(2) "C" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(4) "C" clutch hub pinion - 80 teeth
(6) Clutch piston
(9) Oil seal washer
(12) Circlip
(13) Closing plate
(15) "C" clutch internal pinion hub ball bearing
(16) "C" clutch external pinion hub ball bearing
(17) Circlip
(21) Circlip
(22) Rear shaft ball bearing - hardened bearing
(25) "C" clutch pressurized oil channel
Instructions
(16) The roller bearing must be installed with a circlip in
the bearing located towards the front of the shaft
Instructions
(16) The roller bearing must be installed with a circlip in
the bearing located towards the front of the shaft.
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.20
Reassembling the speed clutch train

Place the clutch train vertically on the bench. Refit the
internal and external seals (7) (8) on piston (6). Smear the
piston seals and clutch-housing bore with transmission
oil. Fit the piston (6) with the pockets and grooves on the
outside (Fig. 41).
Fit an oil seal washer (9). All the clutch oil seal washers
are identical (Fig. 42).
Reassemble the Belleville washers (10). The diameter of
the first Belleville washer must be in contact with the oil
seal washer. The second Belleville washer must be in
contact with the external diameter of the first washer.
Alternate the Belleville washers until they are all installed
(Fig. 42).
(6) Piston
(9) Washer - oil stop
(10) Belleville washers
(12) Circlip holding washer and circlip.
Fig. 41
Place the clutch train on a press. Using tool ATP 3002

compress the Belleville washers and fit a holding washer
(11) and a circlip (12) (Fig. 43).
Before assembly, lubricate the thrust plates and discs

with transmission oil. Alternate 10 thrust plates with 10
discs, beginning with a thrust plate on the piston. Fit the
closing plate (13) and circlip (14) (Fig. 44).
12
10
Fig. 42
Fig. 43
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 44
5J01.21
Measuring piston travel

- Using a depth gauge, measure distance (A) from the
end of the piston to the edge of the clutch housing.
- Inject compressed air at 4.8 bars into the piston supply
channel to compress the Belleville washers.
- Measure distance (B) from the end of the piston to the
edge of the clutch housing (Fig. 45).
- The difference between these two measurements, A B, equals the piston travel.
Piston travel
- The piston travel can be adjusted by selecting or
exchanging intermediate plates since their thickness
varies.
. With new thrust plates and discs:
Piston travel - 1.3 - 3.8 mm
. With used thrust plates and discs:
Piston travel - 1.8 - 5.5 mm
Fig. 45
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.22
Reassembling clutch bearings

Note: Certain bearings used in the clutches and
shafts require installing in the correct direction. See
the legend, page 14 -19, relating to each of the shafts
for instructions on the repair of clutch trains.
- Reassemble bearing (15) or (19) the nearest to the
clutch linings, using the ATP 3020 sleeve (Fig. 46 - 47).
- Reassemble the pinion with the clutch hub (4) or (5) in
the discs or thrust plates and above the bearing (15) or
(19). The pinion is slid over the bearing. Turn and lightly
shake the pinion until all the splines of the discs and
thrust plates are engaged and bearing (15) or (19) is at
the bottom of the bore of the pinion (Fig. 48)
- Reassemble the external pinion hub bearing (16) or (20)
on the shaft and push it into the pinion hub. Fit the circlip
(17) or (21) on the shaft (Fig. 49).
- Place the extractor on the pinion (4) or (5), pull the pinion
and bearing (16) or (20) against circlip (17) or (21) to
eliminate any lateral load being placed on the bearings.
The pinion hub must move longitudinally.
- Fit the shaft bearing (18) or (22) on the shaft and push
it into its emplacement.
- Repeat the procedure for each end of the shaft and for
all the other speed clutch shafts.
Fig. 46
15
Fig. 47
16
4
4
Fig. 48
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 49
5J01.23
H . Input shaft - 1st stage shaft (Fig.

50)
AG 150 transmission
(1) 1st stage shaft - 32 teeth

(2) At the rear - roller bearing
(3) At the front - ball bearing
Instructions
(2) Install the roller bearing with the bearing circlip facing
the pinion.
AG 250 transmission
(1) 1st stage shaft - 38 teeth
(2) At the rear - roller bearing
(3) At the front - ball bearing
Instructions
(2) Install the roller bearing with the circlip facing the
pinion.
Repairing the first stage shaft

- Remove the clutch train support tool required to reach
and extract the input shaft.
- Check for damage to the input shaft (1) and bearings (2)
and (3) and replace where necessary.
- Place the split bearing extractor (OEM 4175 or equivalent) on the bearing. Use the appropriate extractor to
hook the bearings and remove them from the input
shaft.
- Push new bearings (2) and (3) into their emplacement
using an appropriate sleeve tool.
- Replace the input shaft (1) in the support tool and
replace the clutch trains in the reverse order of their
removal.
1st STAGE
PTO
Fig. 50
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.24
I . Repairing the range clutch shaft

General
- All gear range clutch trains are dismantled in the same
way.
- All the gear trains possess a clutch.
- The gear range clutch trains (Fig. 51) are identified as
follows:
"L" clutch - 5th stage shaft
"H" clutch - 6th stage shaft
"M" clutch - 7th stage shaft
- For more details on the assembly of each shaft, see the
sections concerning each shaft following this section,
pages 28 - 33.
L
M
Fig. 51
Disassembly
- Using a sling for the clutch train, remove the range
clutch shaft to be repaired from the support tool (ATP
3021). Place the shaft on a clean workbench and turn
the grooves of the seal rings upwards.
Note. Take care that the shaft is properly supported
to avoid toppling and damage to the pinions.
- Install a suitable split bearing extractor (OEM 4175 or
equivalent) on the first bearing (16) or (17). The split
bearing extractor must be placed in such a manner that
its flat surface is turned towards the pinion. Tighten the
extractor bolts until the bearing begins to extract from
the 7th stage shaft.
- Hook the pinion extractor beneath the split bearing
extractor and remove the bearing from the shaft by
pulling (Fig. 52). Remove the circlips (18) (19) or (20)
from the shaft (Fig. 53).
Fig. 52
20
Fig. 53
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.25
- Place the pinion extractor sleeve (ATP 3030) on the

pinion and tighten the bolts. To be able to extract the
pinion from the shaft, the extractor sleeve must be
tightened around the external diameter of the pinion (3).
In certain cases, use of the main sleeve is specified and
must be fitted beneath the pinion. Hook the pinion
extractor beneath the extractor sleeve and remove the
pinion (3) and bearing (14) from the shaft by pulling
upwards (Figs. 54, 55 and 56).
Note: To select the extractor sleeve suited to the
pinions, see the pages relating to the shafts, pages
28 - 33.
Note: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE THE PINION

EXTRACTOR TO EXTRACT PINIONS WITHOUT EXTRACTOR SLEEVES - THIS CAN DAMAGE THE
TEETH OF THE PINIONS. THE TEETH ARE BRITTLE
AND MAY SHATTER LIKE GLASS. THE PINIONS
MUST BE EXTRACTED BY TIGHTENING AROUND
THE EXTERNAL WALL OF THE PINION.
Fig. 54
- Take off circlip (12) and closing plate (11), the thrust
plates, clutch discs and clutch housing.
- Place a suitable pinion extractor on the internal pinion
bearing (13) and remove it from the shaft (Fig. 57).
Fig. 55
12
13
11
Fig. 57
Fig. 56
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.26
- Place the clutch train in a press. Place tool ATP 3002 on

the Belleville washers (8). Compress the washers,
remove circlip (10) and release the pressure on the
washers (Fig. 58).
- Remove the clutch train from the press and take off the
holding washer of circlip (9) and Belleville washers (8)
from the clutch (Fig. 59).
- Remove the oil seal washer (7) located between the
Belleville washers (8) and the clutch piston (4) (Fig. 59
and 61).
- Once all the Belleville washers are removed, feed
compressed air into the clutch pressurized oil channel,
near shaft seal ring (22). This will eject the piston (4)
from the clutch housing (1) (Fig. 60).
- Disassemble the opposite end of the shaft in the same
manner.
Note: The best method of supporting the shaft is to
have a 76 mm diameter hole in the workbench to
receive the shaft.
- Compress the Belleville washers and remove the

circlip using tool ATP 3002 (Fig. 58).
- Take off the washing retaining the circlip, the Belleville
washers and the oil seal washer (Fig. 59).
- Remove the clutch piston (Fig. 60 and 61).
Fig. 58
8
9
10
Fig. 59
Fig. 60
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 61
5J01.27
Inspecting components
Belleville washers
Check for:
- Cracks
- Wear on contact points
Piston, seals and piston bores
Check for:
- Seal: hardening, cracks, nicks, etc.
- Piston seal groove: dents, burs, undercutting, etc.
- Piston bores: undercutting, dents, burs (Fig. 62)
Thrust plates and clutch discs
Check for:
- Buckling, heat discolouring, surface and spline wear.
- Nominal dimensions:
. thrust plates: 1.90 mm
. friction plates: 2.79 mm
- During the refitting of previously used thrust plates and
clutch discs, the piston travel determines whether they
should be replaced or not (Fig. 63)
Fig. 62
Pinions
Check for:
- Pitting, flaking, rippling, broken teeth, cracks, bore
wear due to bearing creep, spline wear.
Bearings
Check for:
- Pitting, dents, grooves, cracks in the groove, wear due
to creep on the internal and external rims.
Circlips and grooves
Check that:
- The edges of grooves and slots are square. The edges
of the circlips are square and that the springiness is
adequate.
Note: Circlips having one chamfered edge and one
square edge - the square edge must always bear the
load.
Fig. 63
Shafts
Check for:
- Spline wear, cracking, surface wear due to creep; that
grooves of seal rings have square edges, no burs, etc.;
that oil channels are not blocked; that all the stop plugs
and port plugs are in place; that there is no spline wear
or cracking on the clutch housings; that the circlip
grooves and slots are square.
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.28
5th stage shaft
23
22
16
22
10
12
15
11
13
5th STAGE
23
14
19
18
24
17
Fig. 64
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.29
AG 150 transmission
(1) 5th stage pinion shaft - 74 teeth
(2) "L" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(3) Pinion "L" clutch hub - 40 teeth.
Use extractor sleeves ATP 3030-1 and ATP 303010 to removethe pinion.
(4) Clutch piston
(5) External piston seal - type "D" bush seal
(6) Internal piston seal - Oring
(7) Oil seal washer
(9) Circlip retaining washer
(10) Circlip
(11) Closing plate
(13) Protected ball bearing of "L"clutch internal pinion
hub
(14) Ball bearing of "L"clutch external pinion hub
(15) Clutch lubricating oil regulation Oring
(16) Forward shaft ball bearing
(17) Rear shaft roller bearing
(18) Circlip
(19) Circlip
(22) "L" clutch pressurized oil channel
AG 250 transmission
(2) "L" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(3) Pinion "L" clutch hub - 44 teeth.
Use extractor sleeves ATP 3030-1 and ATP 303012 to remove the pinion.
(4) Clutch piston
(7) Oil seal washer
(10) Circlip
(11) Closing plate
(13) Protected ball bearing of "L" clutch internal pinion
hub
(14) Ball bearing of "L" clutch external pinion hub
(16) Forward shaft ball bearing - hardened bearing
(18) Circlip
(19) Circlip
(22) "L" clutch pressurized oil channel
Instructions
(13) The protected ball bearing must be installed with
the protective device facing the clutch linings.
circlip facing the centre of the shaft
Instructions
(16) The SH2 bearing must be installed here. The SH2
bearing is a hardened bearing providing twice the
normal life span.
circlip facing the centre of the shaft
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.30
6th stage shaft
23
22
21
16
14
20
13
11
23
12
10
15
5
6th STAGE
23
22
17
24
Fig. 65
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.31
AG 150 transmission
(2) "H" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(3) Pinion - "H" clutch hub - 48 teeth.
(4) Clutch piston
(7) Oil seal washer
(10) Circlip
(11) Closing plate
(13) Protected ball bearing of "H" clutch internal pinion
hub
(14) Ball bearing of "H" clutch external pinion hub
(20) Circlip
(21) Distance piece sleeve
(22) "H" clutch pressurized oil channel
AG 250 transmission
(2) "H" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(3) Pinion "H" clutch hub - 53 teeth.
(4) Clutch piston
(7) Oil seal washer
(10) Circlip
(11) Closing plate
(13) Protected ball bearing of "H" clutch internal pinion
hub
(14) Ball bearing of "H" clutch external pinion hub
(17) Rear shaft roller bearing - hardened bearing
(20) Circlip
(21) Distance piece sleeve
(22) "H" clutch pressurized oil channel
Instructions
Instructions
normal life span.
normal life span.
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.32
7th stage shaft
23
22
16
23
22
10
2
M
11
12
15
7th STAGE
14
13
18
23
24
17
Fig. 66
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.33
AG 150 transmission
(2) "M" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(3) Pinion "M" clutch hub - 40 teeth.
(4) Clutch piston
(7) Oil seal washer
(10) Circlip
(11) Closing plate
(13) Protected ball bearing of "M" clutch internal pinion
hub
(14) Ball bearing of "M" clutch external pinion hub
(18) Circlip
(22) "M" clutch pressurized oil channel
AG 250 transmission
(2) "M" clutch linings - 10 thrust plates and discs
(3) Pinion "M" clutch hub - 47 teeth.
(4) Clutch piston
(7) Oil seal washer
(10) Circlip
(11) Closing plate
(13) Protected ball bearing of "M" clutch internal pinion
hub
(14) Ball bearing of "M" clutch external pinion hub
(17) Rear shaft roller bearing - hardened bearing
(18) Circlip
(22) "M" clutch pressurized oil channel
Instructions
Instructions
normal lifetime
normal lifetime
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.34
Assembling range clutches

- Place the clutch train vertically on the workbench. Fit
the internal and external seals (5) and (6) on the piston
(4). Smear the piston seals and clutch-housing bore
with transmission oil. Fit piston (4) with the reinforcements and depressions facing outside (Fig. 67).
- Fit an oil seal washer (7). All the clutch oil seal washers
of the range are identical.
- Fit a Belleville washer (8). The first washer closest to
the piston must touch the internal rim of the washer.
The second Belleville washer must touch the external
rim of the first washer. Alternate Belleville washers
until they are all installed (Fig. 68).
(4) Piston
(7) Oil seal washer
(8) Belleville washers
(10) Circlip
Fig. 67
10
8
Fig. 68
Issue 1
May 2001
5J01.35
- Place the clutch train in a press. Using tool ATP 3002,

compress the Belleville washers and fit retaining washer
(9) and a circlip (10) (Fig. 69).
- Lubricate the thrust plates and discs with transmission
oil as they are installed. Begin with the thrust plate
closest to the piston and alternate until the 10 thrust
plates and 10 friction disks are installed. Place the
splined clutch closing plate (11) on the outside and fit
circlip (12) (Fig. 70).
Fig. 69
Fig. 70
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.36
Measuring piston travel

- Using slide callipers fitted with a depth gauge, measure
distance A from the piston to the edge of the clutch
housing.
- Inject 4.8 bar compressed air in the oil channel to
compress the Belleville washers. Measure distance B
from the piston to the edge of the clutch housing (Fig.
71).
- The difference between these two measurements, A B equals the piston travel.
Piston travel
- The piston travel can be adjusted by selecting or
exchanging thrust plates since their thickness varies.
. With new clutch discs and thrust plates
Piston travel: 1.3 to 3.8 mm
. With used clutch discs and thrust plates
Piston travel: 1.8 to 5.5 mm
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 71
5J01.37
Reassembling clutch range bearings

Note: Certain bearings used in the clutches and on
the shafts are directional and must be installed in
the correct direction. See the legend relating to each
shaft for instructions about the clutch train to be
repaired, pages 28 - 33.
- Push bearing (13) the closest to the clutch linings, on to
the shaft using a compression tool (ATP 3020). Fit the
bearing with the protective device facing the clutch
lining (Fig. 72).
- Fit the oil regulation oring (15) on clutch hub (3) and
lubricate the oring (Fig. 73).
- Install the pinion with the clutch hub (3) (Fig. 74) in the
discs and thrust plates, over the bearing. The pinion
being placed above the bearing. Turn the pinion and
shake lightly so that all the splines of the discs and
thrust plates are correctly engaged and so that the
bearing thrusts against the bottom of the pinion bore.
Note: When fitting the hub, ensure that the oil
regulation Oring (15) is not pinched when it passes
the closing plate (11). The Oring must be positioned so that it is loose on the clutch hub.
13
Fig. 72
15
Fig. 73
Fig. 74
Issue 1
May 2001

5J01.38
- Fit external pinion hub bearing (14) (Fig. 75) on the shaft
using a compression tool (ATP 3020) and push it into the
pinion hub. Fit a circlip (19) or (18) on the shaft of the fifth
or seventh stage, or a sleeve (21) and a circlip (20) on
the sixth stage shaft.
- Place an extraction sleeve (ATP 3030) on the pinion, pull
the pinion and the bearing upwards against the circlip to
avoid any lateral load on the bearings. The hub of the
pinion must move longitudinally.
- Place the bearings on the shaft (16) (17) and push them
home using a compression tool (ATP 3020).
Note: Bearing (17) of the fifth stage clutch train is
a roller bearing and must be installed so that the
bearing circlip faces the clutch.
- Repeat the procedure at each end of the shaft and for
all the speed clutch shafts.
14
Fig. 75
Issue 1
May 2001
Heavy Duty Gearbox Creeper unit
5K01.1
5 K01 Creeper unit
CONTENTS
General _____________________________________________
Operation ___________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the unit _______________________
B.
Disassembling, reassembling and adjusting the selector
C.
Disassembling and reassembling the epicyclical reducer
12
D.
Control adjustment __________________________________
13
Issue 1
May 2001

5K01.2
General
The 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 fitted with a Heavy Duty
gearbox may also be fitted, depending on the options,
with a creeper gear reducer unit.
This reducer unit (24) consists of a simple epicyclical
gear train comprising a planetary carrier and a crown
and placed at the rear of the gearbox (Fig. 1).
24
The link fitted to the front right-hand side of the intermediate housing operates the control fork of the reducer via
a cable linked to a lever located in the tractor cab.
The coupler can only be activated when the tractor is
halted.
Issue 1
May 2001
22
Fig. 1
5K01.3
Operation (Fig. 2)
The coupler (29) is connected by splines to the drive
pinion (9). Moving the control lever towards the "Snail"
position moves the coupler to the rear and connects it to
the planetary carrier (20) via the intermediary of the
coupler ring (22) (Fig. 1).
The rotational speed of the drive pinion is one quarter of
that of the output shaft of the gearbox.
In normal gears, when the coupler is moved forward the
output shaft of the gearbox is linked to the drive pinion,
thus ensuring direct transmission.
Lubrication
The lubricating of the epicyclical reducer is carried out by
splashing caused by its moving components.
20
22
29
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

5K01.4
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(9)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
Nut
Ring
Drive pinion
Snap ring
Friction washers
Pins
Friction plates
Planetary gears
Crown ring
Spacers
Needle bearings
Planetary carrier
Snap ring
Coupler ring
Bolt
Planetary carrier assembly (reducer)
Nut
Fork
Selector rail
Link
Locking stud
Spring
Plug
Pin
Index
Oring
pin
Link
Bolt
Housing
Shim(s)
Splined bearing
Output shaft
Bolt
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
5K01.5
Overall view
11
12
13
14
18
15
17
12
16
14
44
20
21
22
19
23
29
1
9
F
38
45
19
27
37
36
35
39
41
40
B
19
F
47
46
48
24
23
26
28
27
43
42
Parts list
Fig. 4
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
5K01.6
Exploded view
37
26
28
36
35
42
27
40
43
41
45
46
47
39
38
11
48
12
19
16
20
21
22
12
44
23
2
29
18
17
14
15
14
13
Issue 1
Parts list
May 2001
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
5K01.7
A . Removing and remounting the

unit
Removing the unit

2. Take off ring (2) and bolt (23) fitted respectively to the
output shaft (47) and the housing (44).
3. Remove the components making up the reducer
assembly (24) on the gearbox.
Remarks
- On gearboxes fitted with a creeper gearbox, bearing
(46) is different from that fitted to the standard version.
- Machined splines on its edge connect it to the crown
ring (16).
Refitting
4. Carry out a visual inspection of all components.
5. Lightly smear the faces of the reducer with miscible
grease and fit the friction washers (12) with their tabs
located in the appropriate grooves.
6. Replace the reducer assembly on the output shaft.
Remarks
- a machined area on the external diameter of the
crown ring ensures that the rear cup of the layshaft
of the gearbox stands clear.
- the cutaway part of the housing (44) faces downwards.
7. Check the correct positioning of the components and
tighten bolts (23) smeared with Loctite 241 to a torque
of 10 - 14 Nm.
Manually check for the rotation of the gearbox output
shaft.
Final operation
Issue 1
May 2001
5K01.8
12
11
29
12
37
36
35
26
38
28
19
39
41
45
40
43
42
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001

B . Disassembling, reassembling and
adjusting the selector
10. Disconnect the control cable fitted to the link (42).
Remark
- To take off the coupler (29), it is necessary to remove
drive pinion (1) from the hydraulic pumps.
11. Remove plug (37), recover spring (36) and locking
pin (35).
12. Remove the selector rail assembly (28) and nut (26).
If necessary, break the seal, unscrew and take off
nut (26).
13. Remove rear ring (2), take off the lug washer (3) and
spring (12).
14. Immobilize the pinion and remove bolts (4).
15. Extract pinion (1) from bearing (11) and simultaneously take out the assembly (pinion, fork and coupler) through the front of the housing.
16. Remove the control link (42) located on the righthand side of the intermediate housing. Drive out pin
(38) and remove index (39). Recover the shim(s) (45)
and remove pin (41) complete with oring (40).
5K01.9
Action
- If the clearance is outside the maximum allowed
tolerance, determine a new thickness of shims required. After shimming, check for correct orientation of
the index and the link. Definitively insert pin (38), fit and
tighten Allen screw (43).
19. Rearrange the assembly (pinion, coupler, and fork) in
the intermediate housing. Carry out operation 15 in
reverse order.
20. Immobilize the pinion again. Fit and tighten the bolts
(4) lightly smeared with Loctite 241 to a torque of 72
- 96 Nm.
21. On bearing (11), replace in their correct positions the
spring, lug washer and ring.
22. Refit the selector rail and nut assembly. Adjust the
fork (see operation further on).
Final operations
24. Reconnect the control cable and where necessary
carry out its adjustment (see D).
Refitting (Fig. 5)
17. Lubricate a new oring (40) and place it on pin (41).
18. Place the pin in the chamfered port located on the
exterior of the intermediate housing (19).
Reminder
- To limit the axial clearance, it is recommended to shim
to a tolerance of 0.1 to 0.6 mm.
Shimming
- On the axle, place the approximate thickness of shims
(45). Fit index (39) and partially place the pin (38). Refit
the link (42) and bolt (43).
- Manually evaluate the clearance.
Remark
- The adjustment principle consists of obtaining the
minimum clearance between the various components.
Issue 1
May 2001
5K01.10
29
1
9
F1
19
F2
37
36
F3
F4
35
G2
B
26
28
19
27
B
X1
X2
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001
5K01.11
Adjustment (Fig. 6)
- Fit locking stud (35), spring (36) and plug (37). Partially
tighten the plug.
- Place coupler (29) in the F1 creeper gear position, the
rear face thrusting against the M60 nut (1).
- In F2, maintain the fork thrust against the coupler.
- In F3, turn the selector rail (28) in nut (26) so as to place
in contact the oblique side of groove G2 with locking pin
(35) while simultaneously holding nut (26) against spotface B of the intermediate housing (19).
- Using a depth gauge, measure distance X1 between
the front face of the selector rail and face A of the
housing.
- In F2, maintain the fork thrust against the coupler.
- In F4, turn the selector rail in the nut so as to place the
other oblique face of groove G2 in contact with the
locking stud while maintaining nut (26) as previously.
- Measure distance X2 in the same way as X1.
- Determine the X adjustment position using the following formula:
X = (X1 + X2) 2
- Provisionally position the selector rail (28) at dimension
X.
- Place the coupler (29) in the "direct drive" position;
manually check the locking of the control and the
clearance between the fork and the coupler. Take care
also that the coupler is not in contact with the hydraulic
pumps drive pinion.
- If this check is satisfactory, take out plug (37), the
spring and the locking pin.
- Degrease the threads of the selector rail and those in nut
(26).
- Lightly smear the nut threads with Loctite, tighten the
nut and definitively position the selector rail, in accordance with the previously calculated dimension X.
- Lock the nut by bending its collar into the machined slot
on the selector rail.
- Replace the locking assembly. Tighten plug (37) to 50
- 70 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001
5K01.12
C . Disassembling and reassembling

the epicyclical reducer
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
Remove the unit (see A)

Take off the circlip (11).
Remove the friction washers (12).
Drive out the pins (13)
Remove the planetary gears (15) from the planetary
carrier (20) taking care not to lose the needles (18),
the spacers (17) and friction plates (14).
Remark
- The coupler ring (22) is inserted into the planetary
carrier using a press. The snap ring (21) ensures
additional locking of the various components.
33. Refit pins (13), correctly orienting them to correspond with snap ring (11).
34. Place the snap ring. Manually check the axial clearance and rotation of each planetary gear.
35. Lightly smear the faces of the reducer with miscible
grease and fit the friction washers (12), with their
lugs lodged in the appropriate grooves.
36. Refit the unit (see A).
Reassembly (Fig. 7)
30. Inspect and clean all components. Replace any
defective parts.
31. Fit each planetary gear with two rows of needles
smeared with miscible grease and separated by a
spacer.
32. Replace the planetary gears and position the friction
plates (14).
11
12
20
21
22
12
18
13
17
14
24
15
14
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
5K01.13
D . Control adjustment
On lever "A" (Fig. 8)
37. Place control lever A in the Snail position.

38. Screw clevis (1) flush with the threaded part of the
cable (6).
39. Mount clevis (1) on lever "A" with clip (7). Tighten nut
(2).
40. Tighten nut (3) on the knurled sheath end (5).
41. Fit the knurled sheath end and Grower washer onto
the support piece. Tighten nut (4) while checking that
the cable is not pinched.
1
7
6
4
2
3
On link "B" (Fig. 9)
42. Place link "B" in the "creeper gearbox" position

(coupler (29) engaging the splines of the planetary
gear carrier (20) (Fig. 2) and with the fork locked).
43. Screw clevis (9) flush with the threaded adjuster of
the cable (6).
44. Fit the clevis (9) on to link "B" using clip (10). Tighten
nut (11).
45. Adjust the stop (12) using nut (13) on support (8)
while checking that link "B" is still correctly locked.
46. Tighten nut (14) and check that the cable is not
pinched.
47. Check the operation and locking of the control in the
"direct drive" position.
Fig. 8
14
13
12
6
11
10
B
Issue 1
Fig. 9
May 2001
6 . REAR AXLE
Contents
6 A01
6 B01
6 B02
DESCRIPTION
STANDARD TRUMPET HOUSINGS
TRUMPET HOUSINGS WITH SEALED COMPARTMENT
6 B03
6 B04
6 C01
TRUMPET HOUSINGS WITH COMPOSITE DRIVE UNIT

TRUMPET HOUSINGS WITH DOUBLE DRIVE UNIT
HANDBRAKE UNIT AND CONTROL LINK
6 D01
6 D02
DIFFERENTIAL WITH STANDARD BEVEL GEAR AND HYDROMECHANICAL

LOCK
DIFFERENTIAL WITH STANDARD BEVEL GEAR AND MULTIDISC LOCK
6 D03
6 E01
6 F01
6 G01
6 H01
6 I01
6 J01
DIFFERENTIAL WITH HYPOID BEVEL GEAR AND MULTIDISC LOCK

BRAKE PISTONS AND SEALS
PARK LOCK
LIFT CYLINDER SUPPORTS
CREEPER UNIT
BRACKETS AND AUTOMATIC HOOK
REAR HITCH MECHANISM
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear Axle - Description
6A01
6A01.1
Description
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Layout of main components _____________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

6A01.2
A . General
The rear axle is made up of five main housings:
- The intermediate housing comprising:
Inside:
. the drive pinion (see sections 6D01, 6D02 or 6D03
according to the version)
. the hand brake unit (see section 6C01)
. the hydraulic pump pinion (see sections 9G01 - 9G02
depending on the hydraulic equipment)
. the 4 WD clutch (see section 8A01)
. the Park Lock system (if fitted) (see section 6F01)
. the PTO clutch transmission shaft.
Outside:
. the right-hand and left-hand side covers (see sections
9G01 - 9G02 and 9H01 depending on the hydraulic
equipment).
- The centre housing containing:
Inside:
. the drive pinion crownwheel and differential (see
sections 6D01 - 6D02 or 6D03 depending on the
version)
. the PTO brake (see section 7F01)
Outside:
. the two trumpet housings (see sections 6B01 and
6B04).
- The PTO housing containing:
. in the upper part, the clutch and double pinion driving
the 540 / 1000 rpm pinions (see section 7F01).
. in the lower part, the removable 540 or 1000 rpm shaft
depending on the desired speed and the 540 / 1000
rpm pinions (see respective sections 7A01 and 7E01).
- The left and right trumpet housings acting as the
housing for the rear wheel drive system.
Issue 1
May 2001
B . Layout of the main components

(Fig. 1 and 2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
Centre housing
PTO housing
Bevel gear (crownwheel and drive pinion)
Handbrake unit
Creeper gearbox (if fitted)
PTO clutch and drive pinion(s)
540 / 1000 rpm pinions
4 WD clutch
Park Lock unit
Hydraulic pump drive pinion
Removable 540 / 1000 rpm shaft (Fig. 1)
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Centre housing assembly

(longitudinal section)
6A01.3
Version with standard bevel gear - 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors
Remark: On tractors fitted with Heavy Duty transmission, the drive unit (6) is fitted to the rear of the gearbox.
11
12
10
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
Fig. 1

6A01.4
Version with hypoid bevel gear - 8250 to 8280 tractors
Centre housing assembly

(longitudinal section)
Remark: On a hypoid bevel gear, the axial line of the drive pinion is not common with the centre of the
crownwheel.
11
10
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Rear Axle - Standard trumpets
6B01
6B01.1
Standard trumpets
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the trumpet assembly _____________
B.
Removing and refitting the crownwheel and brake plate ___
C.
Removing and disassembling the planetary carrier ________
D.
Reassembling and refitting the planetary carrier ___________
E.
Replacing the axle shaft bearings ________________________
10
F.
Shimming the axle shaft bearings ________________________
12
G.
Replacing a wheel stud on the flange shaft _______________
13
Issue 1
May 2001

6B01.2

Parts list
General
8210 tractors are fitted with standard trumpet housings;
also known has Heavy Duty "HD".
They may be fitted either with a plain axle shaft or with
a flanged axle shaft.
The flanged axle shaft type of trumpet housing is offered
as an option on 8220 series tractors.
Description
The trumpet housings support the left and right-hand axle
shafts and contain the final drive unit that receives the
rotation from the differential assembly. Both trumpet
housings are symmetrical and fitted on either side of the
centre housing.
Construction
The axle shaft (2), depending on the version, is supported
by two taper roller bearings comprising bearing cups (8)
(12) and cones (7) (13) fitted opposing each other.
The oil tightness of the drive unit compartment is provided by a lip seal (11).
The oil tightness of the crownwheel is ensured by two
beads of silicone (Silicomet type).
The lip seal (5) protects the external bearing. The planetary carrier (25) engages with the axle shaft (2) by
means of splines and contains three planetary gears (22)
that engage with the crownwheel (15) and the sun gear
(29).
The crownwheel placed between the trumpet housing
(10) and the brake plate (30) is centred by pins (14).
The sun gear (29) drives the brake disc (35).
The pre-loading of the taper roller bearings is obtained by
shim(s) (26) placed at the end of the shaft between
washers (1) (27).
The axle shaft (2), depending on version and planetary
carrier (25) are held by washer (27) and bolt (28).
The brake plate (30) possesses a port "O" providing
lubrication for the brakes (see section 6E01).
Issue 1
May 2001
(1)
(2)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(34)
(35)
(39)
(40)
Washer
Plain axle shaft
Wheel flange
3-lipped seal
Cage
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Threaded plug
Trumpet housing
Seal
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Pins
Crownwheel
Tab washer
Spacer
Bolt
Circlip
Planetary gear pin
Washer
Planetary gear
Needle bearings
Spacer
Planetary carrier
Shim(s)
Lock washer
Bolt
Sun gear
Brake plate
Ring (straight axle shaft)
Brake disc
Bolt
Bolt
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Rear axle - Standard trumpets
Overall view
6B01.3
14
20 mm
B
6
39
39
39
10
11
16
25
19
20
21
24
15
23
22
21
6
39
35
40
29
39
34
39
17
18
8 mm
39
39
39
25
19
12
13
26
27
28
25
39
30
P1 = 0,02 / 0,12 mm
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Standard trumpets
6B01.4
Exploded view
14
2
16
15
13
12
11
10
9
35
8
7
30
29
28
27
26
1
17
18
19
21
23
24
23
22
40
39
21
25
20
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2

A . Removing and refitting the trumpet housing assembly
6B01.5
Remark
The piston of brake "P" remains in the housing (1) (Fig. 3).
Removal
Important:

2. Immobilize the tractor. Take off the wheel concerned.
Position an axle stand.
3. Remove the cab fixing bolts and the stabilizer support.
4. Take out the lift ram pin.
5. Support the trumpet housings with an appropriate
support and an adapted trolley jack
6. Take out bolts (39) excluding bolt (40) (Fig. 3).
7. Separate the centre housing, the trumpet housing
assembly, crownwheel (15) and brake plate (30). The
sun gear (29) and brake disc (35) remaining on the
housing (Fig. 3).
Note: If necessary, take out the sun gear and the
brake disc.
15
- Take care not to press the concerned brake pedal,

or fix a piston retaining tool on the centre housing
(see section 6E01).
30
35
29
39
40
P
35
1
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001

6B01.6
Refitting
8. Clean the mating faces of trumpet and centre
housings. Remove any remaining traces of sealing
compound. Dry the parts.
9. Place a bead of silicone sealing compound (Silicomet
type) in angle "D" of the centre housing (1) (Fig. 4).
Reminder: The diameter of the bead must be uniform, of small section and without joins.
10. Introduce the sun gear shaft (29) into the differential.
Refit the brake disc (35) while checking that it slides
freely on the splines of the shaft.
11. Support the trumpet housing with the equipment
used to remove it. If necessary, screw two guide
studs on to the centre housing. Engage the trumpet
housing. Turn the axle shaft and push the trumpet
housing until it makes contact with the centre
housing.
12. If used, remove the guide studs. Smear the bolts (39)
with a sealing compound such as "Plastex" or
"Hylomar" and tighten them to a torque of 220 300 Nm.
13. Replace the various components around the trumpet
housing. Refit the wheel and tighten the studs or
wheel nuts to the correct torque depending on the
version (see section 2G01).
14. Top up the oil level in the housings and check it in the
transparent tube located on the left-hand side of the
centre housing.
15. Check the lift ram operation. Carry out a road test of
the brake circuit. Check the oil tightness of the
trumpet housing and hydraulic unions.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 4

B . Removing and refitting the brake
plate and crownwheel assembly
6B01.7
30
Removal
16. Remove the trumpet housing assembly (see A).

17. If possible, place the trumpet housing on an appropriate stand (plain axle) (Fig. 6) or on the flange
(flanged axle) with the sun gear (29) upwards.
Remove bolts (40).
18. Free and take off the brake plate (30) and the
crownwheel (15).
Refitting
10
19. Clean the mating faces of the trumpet housing,

crownwheel and brake plate with solvent. Remove
all traces of previous sealing compound. Dry the
parts.
20. Place a bead of sealing compound (Silicomet type)
in angles "B" and "C" located on the trumpet housing
(10) and the brake plate (30) according to the arrows
in Fig. 5.
21. Refit the crownwheel and the brake plate. Fit and
tighten the bolts (40) to 100 - 300 Nm.
22. Refit the trumpet housing (see A).
Fig. 5
29
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

6B01.8
C . Removing and disassembling

the planetary carrier
Removal
23. Remove the trumpet housing (see A).
24. Free and take off the brake plate assembly (30) and
crownwheel (15) (see B).
25. Immobilise the axle shaft and planetary carrier.
26. Take off bolts (28), washers (1) (27), and the shim(s)
(26). Remove the planetary carrier assembly (25)
(Fig. 7).
28
Disassembly
27. Remove the bolts (18) and spacer (17). Remove
snap ring (19) by opening its two ends (Fig. 8).
28. Drive out and remove the pins (20). Take out the
friction washers (21) and the planetary gears (22)
from the planetary carrier. Recover the two ranks of
needle bearings (23) separated by spacer (24).
27
26
25
16
17
18
17
25
F
40
19
18
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 7
6B01.9
D . Reassembling and refitting the

planetary carrier
Reassembly
29. In the planetary gears, fit the needle bearings (23)
previously coated lightly with miscible grease.
30. Refit the planetary gears. Carry out operation 28 ( C)
in reverse order. Place the spacer (17). Lightly smear
bolts (18) with Loctite 270 (Fig. 8) and tighten to a
torque of 34 - 50 Nm.
Refitting
31. Check for the presence of the tab washer (16). Refit
the planetary carrier assembly (25) (Fig. 7). If necessary, shim the bearings (see F).
32. Immobilise the axle shaft and the planetary carrier.
Fit washers (1) (27) with the shim(s) (26) between
them. Fit bolt (28) previously lightly smeared with
Loctite 270 or equivalent, and tighten to the following
torque:
- 270 - 440 Nm : flanged axle shaft, 82 mm.
- 340 - 500 Nm : straight axle shaft, 95 mm.
33. Refit the brake plate assembly (30) and crownwheel
(15) (see B).
34. Refit the trumpet housing (see A).
Issue 1
May 2001

6B01.10
E . Replacing the axle shaft bearings

35. Remove:
- trumpet housing assembly (see A).
- brake plate assembly (30) and crownwheel (see
B).
- planetary carrier assembly (see C).
12
Disassembly
8 mm
36. Take off tab washer (16) and shaft assembly (2).
37. On the shaft:
- remove bearing cone (13)
- extract bearing cone (7) and seal (5).
38. Using an extractor or a locally manufactured tool,
remove the bearing cups (8) (12) and cage (6).
Remark: During the replacement of the bearings, the
replacement of seal (11) is also recommended.
Reassembly
parts found to be defective.
Positioning the seal (11)

40. Smear the external diameter of the seal with Loctite
542 and insert it 8 mm from the shoulder of bearing
cup (12) (Fig. 9), with the lip of the seal turned
towards the drive unit.
Special point
If a circumferential groove appears on the shaft (2)
at seal (11) location, offset the new seal slightly so
that the lip runs on a different section of the shaft.
Remark: Bush (34) is sealed with Loctite 648 and
force fitted on to shaft (2) (Fig. 1).
41. Insert:
- bearing cups (8) (12) thrust against their respective
shoulders
- cage (6) according to Fig. 10
- bearing cone (7), lubricated, and thrust against the
shoulder on shaft (2), depending on the version.
Issue 1
May 2001
11
Fig. 9
6B01.11
Positioning the three-lipped seal (5)

42. Insert the new seal, respecting the direction of
assembly and with the seal thrust against bearing
cone (7) (Fig. 10).
43. Moderately grease the cone and seal lips (5) (11) (BP
Agricharge grease or equivalent).
44. Protect the lip seal (11) by temporarily masking the
splines on the axle shaft with a flexible protection.
Introduce the prepared shaft into the trumpet housing fitted with its seal and its cups, and with the lips
of the seal (5) turned outwards.
Fit cone (13) and replace the tab washer (16).
7
20 mm
Final operations
45. Refit the planetary carrier (25) assembly.
46. Carry out shimming of the bearings (see F).
47. Refit the brake plate assembly (30) and crownwheel
(see B).
48. Temporarily replace plug (9) with a grease nipple.
Partially fill cavity "A" (Fig. 11) of the trumpet housing
with grease (BP Agricharge or equivalent). Remove
the grease nipple. Screw in the plug.
49. Refit the trumpet housing assembly (see A).
Fig. 10
9
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2001

6B01.12
F . Shimming the axle shaft bearings

Components concerned by the shimming
The axle shaft (2), the taper roller bearings (7) (8) (12) (13),
the trumpet housing, tab washer (16) and planetary
carrier (25).
Remark
The pre-loaded shimming of taper roller bearings on the
axle shaft is carried out via the shim(s) (26) placed
between washers (1) (27) (Fig. 12).
27
Reminder
To carry out the correct shimming of the bearings, place
the trumpet housing in a vertical position (Fig. 12).
26
Preparation
50. With the bearing cone (13), tab washer (16), planetary carrier (25) and washer (1) already fitted, place
a thickness of shims (26) greater than the space
between washer (1) and the thrust face of the
washer (27) on the planetary carrier (Fig. 13), so as
to obtain a provisional clearance of approximately
0.10 mm to 0.15 mm, in order to carry out the final
shimming with pre-loading (see further on).
51. Place washer (27). Provisionally tighten bolt (28).
P1 =
0,02 / 0,12 mm
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001

Shimming (Fig. 13)
52. Press hard on the planetary carrier and simultaneously turn the trumpet housing several times.
53. Place a dial gauge on the planetary carrier, the index
positioned towards its centre.
55. Using two appropriate levers, move the planetary
carrier upwards.
56. In relation to the clearance "J" measured, remove a
shim (26) thickness to obtain pre-loading of:
P1 = 0.02 mm to 0.12 mm (Fig. 12)
according: J (0.02 to 0.12).
57. Definitively fit washer (27) and bolt (28) previously
lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or equivalent, and
tighten in accordance with the torque indicated in
operation 32 (see D).
28
6B01.13
G . Replacing a wheel stud on the

axle flange
58. Drive out the defective stud
59. Clean the new stud and its lodging in the hub.
60. Smear the ridges of the stud with Loctite 270 or
equivalent and insert it using a bronze drift and an
appropriate hammer.
27
26
1
25
16
13
2
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001

6B01.14
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle -Trumpets with sealed compartment
6B02
6B02.1
Trumpets with sealed compartment
Contents
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Removing and refitting the compartment and crownwheel

assembly _______________________________________________
C.
Replacing compartment seals ____________________________
D.
Removing and refitting the planetary carrier _______________
E.
F.
10
G.
12
H.
Service tools ___________________________________________
14
Issue 1
December 2000
6B02.2
Rear axle -Trumpets with sealed compartment

Parts list
General
The 8220 tractors can be fitted with trumpets containing
a sealed compartment, these are also known as "HDE"
or Heavy Duty Etanche.
The 8240 and 8250 tractors are fitted with Optimised
Heavy Duty trumpets with sealed compartment called
"HDEO".
HDEO trumpets have a crownwheel and sun gears that
have been carbon nitrided: this is a special heat treatment that makes them resistant to "pitting."
A final honing ensures the optimum bearing of the teeth
as a function of the high loads borne by the epicyclic gear.
The trumpets bear the right and left hand side axle shafts
and contain the final drive units that transmit the rotation
from the differential assembly. The trumpets are symmetrical and mounted either side of the centre housing.
The final drive unit is lodged in a sealed compartment
isolated from the centre housing and containing oil with
SAE 85W140 viscosity grade.
Construction
The axle shaft (2) is supported by two opposing taper
roller bearings comprising cups (8) (12) and cones (7)
(13).
The oil tightness of the final drive unit compartment is
ensured by lip seal (11) and compartment (30) fitted with
seals (31) mounted back-to-back. The oil tightness of the
crownwheel (15) is provided by two beads of silicone
(Silicomet type).
The three lipped seal (5) protects the outer bearing. The
planetary carrier (25) engages with the axle shaft (2) via
splines, it is made up of three planetary gears (22) that
engage with the crownwheel (15) and the sun gear (29).
The crownwheel is placed between the trumpet (10) and
compartment (30) and is centred via pins (14). The
compartment (30) equally serves as the brake plate.
The sun gear (29) drives the brake disc (35) through a
splined hub (32) held in place by a snap ring (33).
The pre-loading of the taper roller bearings is provided by
shim(s) (26) placed at the end of the shaft.
Axle shaft (2) and planetary carrier (25) are held in place
by washer (27) and bolt (28).
The compartment (30) possesses a port "O" providing for
lubrication of the brakes (see section 6E01).
The tube (38) linked to the breather tube screwed on the
left hand-side lifting support allows atmospheric pressure to be maintained in the trumpet.
Issue 1
2
December
May 2000
2002
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(35)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
Straight axle shaft

Three-lipped seal
Cage
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Threaded plug
Trumpet
Seal
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Pins
Crownwheel
Tab washer
Spacer
Bolt
Circlip
Planetary gear pin
Washer
Planetary gear
Needle bearings
Spacer
Planetary carrier
Shim(s)
Lock washer
Bolt
Sun gear
Brake plate (compartment)
Seals
Splined hub
Snap ring
Brake disc
Tube
Bolt
Bolt
Filler plug
Oil level plug
Magnetic drain plug
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Overall view
Rear axle - Trumpets with sealed compartment
6B02.3
30
"O"
14
20 mm
D
B
C
10
39
39
16
25
19
38
20
21
23
24
15
22
21
35
39
6
2
30
41
31
31
39
40
29
42
33
39
32
2
5
8 mm
25
39
39
39
17
18
11
39
19
31
12
13
26
27
28
25
39
30
P1 = 0,02 - 0,12 mm
43
Fig. 1
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
6B02.4
Exploded view
14
38
16
15
13
12
11
10
35
32
30
41
43
28
27
26
17
18
33
19
31
31
42
29
41
21
23
24
23
22
40
39
21
42
25
20
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7. Separate the trumpet assembly with the sun gear (29)

from the centre housing, the compartment assembly
(30) with its markings (31) to (33) and the crownwheel
(15) (Fig. 3).
Remark
- Brake piston "P" remains in the housing (1) (Fig. 3)
A . Removing and refitting the trumpet assembly

Removal
Remarks
- The oil used for the mechanical and hydraulic components of the transmission and that used for lubricating the moving parts in the trumpet housings are
not the same, their viscosities differ.
- If the oils are not to be changed, they must not be
mixed when drained.
2. Immobilise the tractor. Take off the wheel. Position an
axle stand.
3. Remove the cab fixing bolts and the stabiliser support.
4. Take out the axle from the lift ram.
5. Support the trumpet with an appropriate support and
a suitable trolley jack.
6. Remove bolts (39) excluding bolt (40).
15
39
6B02.5
Important
- Take care not to press the brake pedal concerned,
or fix a piston retaining tool on to the centre
housing (see section 6E01).
30
29
40
P
1
35
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001

6B02.6
Refitting
8. Clean the mating faces of the trumpet and centre
housings. Remove any traces of previous sealing
9. Place a bead of silicone sealing compound (Silicomet
type) in angle "D" of the centre housing (1) (Fig. 4).
Reminder
- The diameter of the bead must be uniform, of small
section and without joins.
10. Replace the brake disc (35) checking that it slides
freely on the hub splines.
11. Support the trumpet using the equipment used when
removing it. If necessary, screw two gui-de studs
into the centre housing. Engage the trumpet. Turn the
axle shaft and push the trumpet until it makes
contact with the housing.
12. Remove the guide studs if used. Smear the bolts (39)
with an oil tightness product ("Plastex" or "Hylomar")
13. Refit the remaining components around the trumpet.
Refit the wheel and tighten the wheel nuts or studs
section 2G01).
14. Top up the oil level and check using it in the
transparent tube located on the left-hand-side of the
centre housing.
Remark
- In addition, check the oil level in the final drive unit.
15. Check the operation of the lift ram.
Road test the brake circuit.
Check the oil tightness of the trumpet, the hydraulic
unions and plugs.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 4
6B02.7
B . Removing and refitting the compartment and crownwheel assembly

Removal
33
16. Remove the trumpet assembly (see A) and drain

the drive unit concerned.
17. If possible, place the trumpet in a vertical position,
the sun gear (29) at the top (Fig. 6). Remove bolt (40),
snap ring (33) and hub (32).
Unstick and remove compartment (30) having previously place a flexible protection over the splines of
the sun gear (29).
Remove the sun gear. Release and remove the
crownwheel (15) (Fig. 5).
32
30
15
28
29
26
27
25
16
29
F
F
40
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

6B02.8
Refitting
18. Clean the mating surfaces of the trumpet, the
crownwheel and compartment with solvent. Remove all traces of the previous sealing compound.
Dry the components.
19. Seal angles B and C located on the trumpet (10) and
the compartment (30) with a Silicone sealing compound (Silicomet type) according to the arrows
shown in Fig. 7.
20. Refit the sun gear. Place protector 3376885M1,
compartment (30), hub (32), snap ring (33). Replace
and tighten bolt (40) to 100 - 130 Nm.
21. Refit the trumpet (see A) and top up and check the
oil level of the drive unit concerned.
30
C
B
10
Fig. 7
30
31
C . Replacing compartment seals

Disassembly
22. Remove the trumpet assembly (see A).
23. Remove the compartment assembly (30) and the
crownwheel (see B).
24. Extract the seals (31).
Reassembly
25. Using an appropriate assembly, insert the first new
seal (31) against the shoulder of compartment (30)
with the second seal back to back, employing the
same method (Fig. 8).
26. Refit the compartment assembly (30) and crownwheel (see B). Refit the trumpet assembly (see
A).
Issue 1
May 2001
31
Fig. 8

D . Removing and refitting the planetary carrier
17
6B02.9
18
Removal
28. Remove the compartment assembly (30) and
crownwheel (see B).
30. Take out bolt (28), washer (27), shim(s) (26).
Remove the planetary carrier assembly (25) (Fig. 5).
17
25
19
Disassembly
31. Take out bolt (18) and spacer (17). Remove snap ring
(19) by opening its two extremities (Fig. 9).
32. Drive out and remove the pins (20). Take off the
friction washers (21) and the planetary gears. Recover the needle bearings that are arranged in two
rows separated by a spacer (24).
18
Fig. 9
E . Reassembling and refitting the

planetary carrier
Reassembly
33. In the planetary gears, fit the needle bearings (23)
previously coated lightly with miscible grease.
34. Refit the planetary gears. Carry out operation 32 in
reverse order ( D). Place the spacer (17). Smear bolt
(18) with Loctite 270 (Fig. 9) and tighten to a torque
of 34 - 50 Nm.
Refitting
35. Check for the presence of washer (16). Refit the
planetary carrier assembly (25) (Fig. 5). If necessary, carry out shimming of the bearings (see G).
Place the shim(s) (26) and washer (27). Fit and
tighten bolt (28), lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or
equivalent, to a torque of 340 - 500 Nm.
37. Refit the compartment assembly (30) and crownwheel (see B). Refit the trumpet assembly (see
A).
Issue 1
May 2001

6B02.10
F . Replacing the axle shaft bearings

12
38. Remove:
- the trumpet assembly (see A).
- the compartment assembly (30) and crownwheel
(see B).
- the planetary carrier assembly (25) (see D).
Disassembly
39. Take off washer (16) and the shaft assembly (2)
(bearing cone (13) moves freely on the shaft).
40. Take off bearing cone (13). Extract bearing cone (7)
and seal (5) from the shaft.
take off the bearing cups (8) (12) and cage (6).
Remark
- When replacing the bearings, it is recommended
that the seal (11) is also replaced.
8 mm
11
2
Fig. 10
Reassembly
Positioning seal (11)

43. Smear the external diameter of the seal with Loctite
542 and insert it 8 mm from the shoulder of bearing
cup (12) (Fig. 10), the lip turned to face the drive unit.
Special point
- If a circumferential groove is present on shaft (2) at
the location of seal (11), offset the new seal slightly
so that it operates on a different section of the shaft.
44. Insert:
- cups (8) (12) thrust against their respective shoulders.
- cage (6) according to Fig. 11.
- cone (7) previously lubricated and thrust against
the shoulder on shaft (2).
Issue 1
May 2001
20 mm
7
Fig. 11
6B02.11
Positioning the three-lipped seal (5)

45. Insert the new seal thrust against bearing cone (7)
and respect the assembly direction (Fig. 11).
46. Moderately grease the cone, seal lips (5) (11) (BP
Agricharge grease or equivalent).
47. Protect the seal lip (11) by temporarily masking the
splines on the axle shaft with a flexible protection.
Introduce the prepared shaft into the trumpet fitted
with its seal and cups while directing the seal lips
towards the exterior.
Fit cone (13) and refit the tab washer (16).
Final operations
48. Refit the planetary carrier assembly (25).
49. Carry out shimming of the bearings (see G).
50. Refit the compartment assembly (30) and crownwheel (see B).
51. Temporarily replace plug (9) by a grease nipple.
Partially fill cavity A (Fig. 12) of the trumpet with
grease (BP Agricharge or equivalent). Remove the
grease nipple. Screw in the plug.
52. Refit the trumpet assembly (see A).
9
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001

6B02.12
G . Shimming the axle shaft bearings

Components concerned by shimming
- The axle shaft (2), taper roller bearings (7) (8) (12) (13),
the trumpet, tab washer (16) and planetary carrier (25).
27
Remark
- The pre-loading shimming of the taper roller bearings on
the axle shaft is carried out via shims (26) placed
between the shaft (2) end and washer (27) (Fig. 13).
Reminder
- To carry out the shimming of the bearings correctly,
place the trumpet in a vertical position (Fig. 13).
26
P1 =
0,02 - 012 mm
Preparation
- The bearing cone (13), tab washer (16) and planetary
carrier (25) being fitted, place a thickness of shims (26)
greater than the space between the end of the axle shaft
(2) and the washer (27) thrust face on the planetary
carrier (Fig. 14), to obtain a provisional clearance of
approximately 0.10 mm to 0.15 mm, in order to be able
to carry out definitive shimming and pre-loading (see
further on).
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001
6B02.13
Shimming (Fig. 14)

54. Press hard on the planetary carrier while simultaneously turning the trumpet several turns.
55. Place a dial gauge on the planetary carrier with the
index positioned towards its centre.
57. Using appropriate levers move the planetary carrier
vertically.
58. In relation to the clearance "J" measured, remove a
thickness of shims (26) to obtain the pre-loading:
P1 = 0.02 mm to 0.12 mm (Fig. 13) according to
J - (0.02 to 0.12)
59. Definitively fit washer (27) and bolt (28) previously
smeared with Loctite 270 or equivalent, tighten to
the torque indicated in operation 36 (see E).
28
27
26
25
16
13
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2001

6B02.14
H . Service tools
1. Tool available in the AGCO network
- 3376885 M1 - Oil seal protector (Fig. 15).
Fig. 15
2. Locally manufactured tool

- Cone and pusher for inserting snap ring (33) (Fig. 16).
85
30
R10
47-0-0,3
51-0-0,2
32,6 +0,1
+0,3
18
R10
41
35
20
45
180
0,5 x 45
61
71
+0,1
51,2 +0,3
30
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Trumpets with composite drive unit
6B03
6B03.1
Trumpets with composite drive unit
Contents
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Removing and refitting the spacer and crownwheel

assembly _______________________________________________
11
C.
Replacing spacer seals __________________________________
12
D.
Replacing the cassette seal ______________________________
13
E.
Removing and disassembling the planetary carrier ________
14
F.
15
G.
Shimming the planetary gear ____________________________
16
H.
17
I.
18
J.
Service tools ___________________________________________
20
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.2
Issue 1
May 2001

General
The 8250 tractors are fitted with trumpets having a
composite drive unit, as are the 8240 tractors, depending
on options.
Description
6B03.3
Kinematics (Fig. 2)
The differential assembly drives the sun gear shaft (29)
that in turn transmits the movement to the axle shaft (2)
via double planetary gears (22), crownwheel (15) and
planetary carrier (25).
It is a classical kinematics train: the movement enters
the sun gear shaft and is output to the planetary carrier.
The trumpets support the left-hand and right-hand side

axle shafts and contain the final drive unit that transmits
the rotation from the differential assembly. The trumpets
are symmetrical and fitted on either side of the centre
housing.
Construction
The axle shaft (2) is supported by two taper roller bearings comprised of cups (8) (12) and cones (7) (13)
mounted opposing each other.
The oil tightness of the final drive unit is provided by lip
seals (31) fitted back-to-back and orings (4). The cassette seal (3) protects the external bearing comprising
cup (8) and cone (7).
The planetary carrier (25) is separated from the centre
housing by a spacer (30) that also serves as the brake
plate.
The compartment containing the final drive unit contains
SAE 85W140 viscosity oil and is different from that used
in the transmission.
Axial and radial drilled holes in pin (20) permit lubrication
of the needle bearings (23) in the double sun gears.
The planetary carrier drives the axle shaft (2) via splines
and has three double pinions (22). The axial clearance of
these pinions is provided by shim(s) placed on pin (20)
against the 17-teeth pinion.
Shims (26) placed at the end of the axle shaft allow a preloading of the taper roller bearings. Shaft (2) and planetary
carrier (25) are held by washers (27) and bolt (28).
The reduction crown (15) squeezed between the trumpet
(10) and spacer (30) is centred by pin (14). Spacer (30) is
positioned by pin (5) on the centre housing. The rotation
of the differential is transmitted to the double sun gears
via a planetary gear shaft on which snap ring (33) retains
hub (32) driving the brake disc (35).
The compartment of spacer (30) possesses a port "O"
that provides for lubrication of the brakes (see section
6E01). Tube (38) linked to the breather tube screwed on
to the left-hand lift support allows atmospheric pressure
to be maintained in the trumpet.
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.4
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(40)
(41)
(43)
Bush
Straight shaft
Cassette seal
Orings
Locating pin
Shim(s)
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Washer
Trumpet
Nut
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Pin
Crownwheel
Tab washer
Spacer
Bolt
Circlip
Planetary gear pin
Washer
Double planetary gear
Needle bearings
Spacer
Planetary carrier
Shim(s)
Lock washer
Bolt
Sun gear
Spacer (brake plate)
Seals
Splined hub
Snap ring
Stud
Brake disc
Studs
Stud
Tube
Bolt
Plug (filler and level)
Magnetic drain plug
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
May 2001
Overall view
6B03.5
30
14
31
31
"O"
11
36
15
30
D
35
10
19
20
38
23
24
15
22
23
21
16
29
40
33
40
32
31
13
12
11
27
28
25
30
26
9
11
34
11
37
17
25
18
P1 =
0,02 - 0,12 mm
41
30
19
43
Fig. 1
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
6B03.6
Exploded view
29
16
4
15
22
14
4
13
12
15
10
8
7
1
30
25
41
29
28
27
35
26
33
25
32
19
31
5
9
11
43
36
40
40
21
22
23
17
24
18
20
11
34
11
37
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3

6B03.7
Removal
Remarks
- The oil used for the mechanical and hydraulic components of the transmission and that used for the
lubrication of the moving parts of the trumpet are not
of the same type and their viscosity is different.
- If the oils are not to be changed, they must not be
mixed when drained.
2. Immobilise the tractor. Take off the wheel. Position an
axle stand.
3. Remove the cab fixing bolts and the stabiliser support.
Note: If necessary slightly raise the side of the cab
concerned, check that nothing blocks its lifting.
4. Drive out the holding snap ring (1) (Fig. 4). Push the
lower axle (2) of the lift ram outwards and remove it.
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.8
5. Support the trumpet using appropriate support and

trolley jack.
6. Remove the nuts (11) and washers (9) but exclude
bolt (40).
7. Separate the centre housing, the trumpet assembly
from the sun gear (29), the spacer assembly (30)
bearing the markings (31) to (33) - (35) and crownwheel
(15) (Fig. 5).
Remarks
- The brake piston "P" remains in the housing (1)
(Fig. 5).
Important
- Take care not to press the brake pedal concerned or fix
a piston retaining tool to the centre housing (see section
6E01).
29
15
40
30
11
40
P
35
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
6B03.9
Refitting
Special points
- The threaded studs (34) (36) (37) screwed into the
centre housing have different lengths and their threads
must be lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or equivalent
before fitting (Fig. 6).
Important
- Place the studs in the housing, respecting their length
and locations in accordance with Fig. 1 :
. (34) : 16 mm - L 335 mm
. (36) : 16 mm - L 353 mm
. (37) : 16 mm - L 363 mm
8. Clean the mating faces of the trumpet and centre
housing. Remove all traces of previous sealing
9. Place a bead of sealing compound (Silicomet type)
in angle "D" of the centre housing (1) (Figs. 7 and 9).
Reminder
- The diameter of the bead must be uniform, of small
section and without joins.
10. Refit the brake disc (35) while checking that it slides
freely on the splines of the hub (32). Check for the
presence of the locating pin (5) (Fig. 8).
11. Support the trumpet with the aid of the equipment
used when removing it.
12. Engage the trumpet on the original studs. Turn the
axle shaft and push the trumpet until it mates with
the housing.
13. Place a washer (9) on each stud. Screw on the nuts
and tighten to a torque of 247 - 253 Nm.
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
35
32
5
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.10
14. Replace the components surrounding the trumpet.

Refit the wheel and tighten the bolts and nuts to the
correct torque depending on the version (see section
2G01).
Tightening torques
- cab fixing bolts (silent bloc): 200 - 260 Nm. Loctite
270 or equivalent.
15. Top up the oil level of the housings and check using
the transparent tube located on the left-hand side of
the centre housing.
Remark
- Equally, check the level of oil in the drive unit concerned.
16. Check the operation of the lift control. Carry out a
road test of the brake circuit. Check the oil tightness
of the trumpet, hydraulic unions and plugs.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 9
6B03.11
B . Removal and refitting the spacer

and crownwheel assembly
33
Removal
17. Remove the trumpet assembly (see A) and drain
the drive unit concerned.
the sun gear (29) at the top (Fig. 11). Remove bolts
(40), snap ring (33) and hub (32). Unstick and remove
the spacer (30) having previously placed a flexible
protection on the splines of the sun gear (29).
Take off the sun gear.
Remove the planetary carrier assembly (see E).
Unstick and remove the crownwheel (15) (Fig. 10).
19. Discard the orings (4) (Fig. 1).
32
30
29
28
27
15
26
16
25
29
40
F
F
40
Fig. 11
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.12
Refitting
20. Clean the mating faces of the trumpet, crownwheel
and spacer with solvent. Dry the parts.
21. Position new crownwheel orings (4) according to
the arrows in angles B and C (Fig. 12) between the
trumpet (10) and compartment (30).
22. Replace the trumpet assembly (see F) and the sun
gear. Fit protector ref. 3376885M1, the spacer (30),
hub (32), snap ring (33). Fit and tighten the bolts (40)
23. Replace the trumpet assembly (see A) and top up
and check the drive unit oil level.
30
4
10
B
Fig. 12
C . Replacing the spacer seals

Disassembly
30
31

25. Remove the spacer assembly (30) and crownwheel
(see B).
26. Extract the seals (31).
Reassembly
27. Using a suitable fixture, insert the first new seal (31)
against the shoulder of the spacer (30) (Fig. 13) and
the second seal back-to-back using the same method.
28. Refit the spacer assembly (30) and the crownwheel
(see B).
Issue 1
May 2001
31
Fig. 13
6B03.13
D . Replacing the cassette seal

3
30. Partially drain the concerned drive unit.
31. Chock the front wheels. Remove the rear wheel (see
section 2G01). Place an axle stand beneath the trumpet.
Removal
Special points
- The 8240 (depending on options) and 8250 tractors may
be fitted with axle shafts of 95 mm or 110 mm
diameter.
- Whatever the diameter of the shaft, the reference
number for bush (1) and cassette seal (3) (Fig. 14 - 15)
remains identical.
- If necessary, smear the bore of the bush with Loctite
648 or its equivalent and slide it on to the shaft flush with
the thrust face of bearing cone (7) (Fig. 15).
1
Fig. 14
32. Using a locally manufactured tool, extract the cassette seal (3), without damaging the trumpet or the
external diameter of the bush (1) (Fig. 14).
Refitting
33. Clean the location of the seal on the trumpet and
bush (1).
34. Lightly smear the external diameter of the seal with
Loctite 648 or its equivalent and moderately lubricate
its internal diameter with transmission oil.
35. Insert the seal using tool ref. 3378151M1 (see J).
Wipe off all remaining traces of Loctite.
Remark
- The design of the tool determines the position of the
cassette seal in the trumpet.
7
Fig. 15
Final operations
36. Refit the wheel and tighten the wheel studs or nuts
depending on the version (see section 2G01).
37. Top up and check the oil level in the drive unit.
38. Road test. Check the oil tightness of the cassette
seal.
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.14
E . Removing and dissassembling of

Removal
18
17

40. Remove the hub (32), spacer (30) and the sun gear
shaft (29) (see B).
42. Take out bolt (28), washer (27) and the shim(s) (26).
Remove the planetary carrier assembly (25) (Fig. 10)
using an appropriate sling.
43. Take out the crownwheel (see B).
Disassembly
44. Take out bolt (18) and spacer (17) (Fig. 16).
Take off the circlip (19) by opening its extremities
(Fig. 17).
45. Drive out and remove the pins (20).
Remove the friction washers (21), shim(s) (6) and
planetary gears (22).
Recover the two rows of needle bearings (23) separated by spacer (24) (Fig. 18).
Fig. 16
19
Fig. 17
23
24
23
20
6
21
22
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2001
6B03.15
F . Reassembling and refitting the

planetary carrier
Reassembly

47. Coat the needle bearings (23) with miscible grease.
In each of the planetary gears (22), place two rows
of needle bearings separated by spacer (24).
48. If necessary, carry out axial shimming of the planetary gears (see G), otherwise continue with the
reassembly operation.
49. Place the planetary gear (22) in the planetary carrier
(25) with the 17 teeth pinion facing the circlip (19).
Place washers (21) and shim(s) (6).
50. Engage the three pins (20) and turn the lubricating
ports "O" towards the circlip (19) (Fig. 19).
51. Push again on the three pins and open the circlip.
52. Tap lightly and alternately on the pins to ensure that
the circlip correctly fits in the groove of the planetary
carrier (Fig. 19).
53. Place spacer (17), fit and tighten bolt (18) previously
lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or its equivalent and
tighten to a torque of 34 - 50 Nm (Fig. 20).
54. Manually check the rotation of the planetary gears.
O
20
19
Fig. 19
17
18
17
Refitting
55. Refit the crownwheel (see B).
56. Check for the presence of washer (16). Refit the
planetary carrier assembly (25) (Fig. 10) turning the
marks stamped on each planetary gear to the position shown in Fig. 21.
If necessary, carry out shimming of the axle shaft
bearings (see I). Otherwise, continue the refitting
operation.
Remark
- Each planetary gear carries a punched mark on the
29 teeth pinion. These marks indicate the alignment of two teeth belonging to their respective
pinions (17 and 29 teeth). The marks must point
towards the centre of the planetary carrier.
57. Immobilise the axle shaft and the planetary carrier.
Place the shim(s) (26) and washer (27). Fit and
tighten bolt (28) previously lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or equivalent and tighten to a torque of 340
- 500 Nm.
58. Refit the sun gear shaft (29), spacer (30) and hub (32)
(see B).
59. Refit the trumpet assembly (see A) and top up and
check the oil level in the drive unit concerned.
19
18
Fig. 20
22
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.16
G . Shimming the planetary gear

Principle
- The planetary carrier (25) comprises three double pinions (22) also known as planetary gears. The axial
clearance of these pinions is obtained via shim(s) (6)
placed on pin (20) against the 17 teeth pinion.
Preparation
60. Place the planetary gears (22), the 17-teeth pinion
facing the circlip (19).
Place washers (21) against the 29 teeth pinion and
average thickness provisional shim(s) (6) against
the 17 teeth pinion.
61. Engage the three pins (20), turning the lubricating
ports towards the circlip (19).
Shimming
62. Using a feeler gauge (Fig. 22) determine the thickness of the definitive shim(s) (6) to be fitted so as to
obtain a clearance of between 0.15 mm and 0.6 mm
on each planetary gear.
Note: Where possible shim to the minimum
tolerance.
63. Slightly retract the pins (20) and place the shim(s) (6)
(Fig. 23) whose thickness was previously determined.
Reminder
- The thickest shim must be placed against the row
of needle bearings.
64. Refit the pins. Fit circlip (19). Position the spacer (17)
and tighten bolt (18), previously lightly smeared with
Loctite, to a torque of 34 - 50 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 22
20
Fig. 23
6B03.17
H . Replacing the axle shaft bearings

65. Remove:
- the trumpet assembly (see A)
- the spacer assembly (30) (see B)
- the planetary carrier (25)
- the crownwheel (see B)
Disassembly
66. Take off washer (16) and shaft assembly (2).
Remark
- The bearing cone (13) runs free on the shaft.
67. Remove the bearing cone (13). Extract bearing cone
(7).
68. Drive out the cassette seal (3).
69. Using an extractor or locally manufactured tool,
remove bearing cups (8) (12).
Reassembly
71. Insert:
- bearing cups (8) (12) thrusting against their respective shoulders
- bearing cone (7) previously lubricated with transmission oil and thrusting against the shoulder on
the shaft.
72. Introduce the prepared shaft into the trumpet fitted
with its cups.
73. Assemble cone (13) and refit tab washer (16).
Final operations
74. Place the crownwheel (see B). Refit the planetary
carrier assembly (25) (see F) and carry out shimming of the bearings (see I).
75. Refit the spacer assembly (30) (see B).
77. Insert a new cassette seal (see D).
section 2G01).
79. Top up and check the oil level in the housings and
check the level in the transparent tube located on the
left-hand side of the centre housing.
In addition, top up and check the oil level of the drive
unit concerned.
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.18
I . Shimming the axle shaft bearings

- The axle shaft (2), taper roller bearings (7) (8) (12) (13),
the trumpet and tab washer (16).
Remark
- The shimming for pre-loading of the taper roller bearings
on the axle shaft is carried out using shim(s) (26) placed
between the end of shaft (2) and washer (27) (Fig. 24).
P1 =
0,02 - 0,12 mm
27
26
Reminder
- To carry out the correct shimming of the bearings, place
the trumpet in a vertical position (Fig. 24).
Preparation
80. With bearing cone (13), tab washer (16) and planetary carrier (25) fitted, place a thickness of shim(s)
(26) greater than the space between the end of the
axle shaft (2) and the thrust face of washer (27) on
the planetary carrier (Fig. 25) to obtain a provisional
clearance of approximately 0.10 mm to 0.15 mm, in
order to carry out definitive shimming (see further
on).
Fig. 24
Issue 1
May 2001
6B03.19
Shimming (Fig. 25)

82. Press hard on the planetary carrier while simultaneously turning the trumpet several times.
83. Place a dial gauge on the planetary carrier (Fig. 25 26), the index positioned close to the axis of the
trumpet.
85. Using appropriate levers, move the planetary carrier
vertically (Fig. 26).
86. In relation to the clearance "J", remove a thickness
of shim(s) (26) necessary to obtain a pre-loading of:
P1 = 0.02 mm to 0.12 mm (Fig. 24) according to :
J - (0.02 to 0.012)
87. Definitively fit washer (27) and tighten bolt (28)
previously lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or its
equivalent, according to the torque shown in operation 57 (see F).
28
Fig. 26
27
26
25
16
13
Fig. 25
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.20
J . Service tools
- 3376885M1 - Spacer (30) seal protector (Fig. 27).
- 3378151M1 - Cassette seal (3) insertion tool (Fig.
28).
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
Issue 1
May 2001
6B03.21
2. locally manufactured tools

- Cone and pusher for inserting snap ring (33) (Fig. 29).
85
30
R10
47-0-0,3
51-0-0,2
32,6 +0,1
+0,3
18
R10
41
35
20
45
180
0,5 x 45
61
71
51,2 +0,3
+0,1
30
Fig. 29
Issue 1
May 2001

6B03.22
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Trumpets with double reduction
6B04
6B04.1
Trumpets with double reduction
Contents
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Removing and refitting brake plate, crownwheels, spacer

and epicyclic reducer gears ______________________________
11
C.
Replacing the cassette seal ______________________________
14
D.
Disassembling and reassembling the planetary gears ______
15
E.
16
F.
17
G.
Service tools ___________________________________________
19
Issue 1
May 2001
6B04.2
20
31
47
44
24
18
15
51
25
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

General
8260 and 8280 tractors are fitted with trumpets containing two epicyclic gear trains, also known as double
reductions.
These drive units allow for a higher reduction ratio and
lower transmission torque.
They are housed in a compartment and are comprised of
the trumpet, two primary crownwheels (47) and two
secondary crownwheels (15) and a spacer (48). The
brake plate (30) partially closes the drive unit compartment.
Construction
The axle shaft is supported by two bearings comprising
cups (8) (12) and bearing cones (7) (13) mounted in
opposition to each other. The input shafts (31) are of
different lengths ; the long shaft is fitted in the left hand
side trumpet. The crownwheels, spacer and brake plate
are positioned by pins (14). The pre-loading of the taper
roller bearings is provided by shim(s) (26) placed at the
end of the axle shaft. Shaft (2) and planetary carrier (25)
are held by washer (27) and bolt (28).
The oil tightness between the trumpet, crownwheels,
spacer and brake plate is provided by silicone seals
(Silicomet type).
The cassette seal (3) protects the outer bearing comprising cup (8) and cone (7).
The oil splash lubrication for the mechanical assemblies
is provided by transmission oil coming from the shared
oil tank formed by the intermediate housing and the
centre housing. The centre housing is linked to the lower
part of the trumpet by an external transfer pipe. The brake
plate contains a port "O" (Fig. 2) allowing lubrication and
cooling of the discs by a flow of oil coming from the
booster circuit. The transmission oil within the trumpet is
kept at the correct level via an oblique pipe (56). This pipe
is located in the drive unit compartment and communicates with the external transfer pipe.
The inner chamber of the trumpet is maintained at
atmospheric pressure by a breather pipe screwed onto
the left lift ram support. This breather pipe also ensures
the venting of the shared oil tank.
The input shaft (31) drives brake discs (35) via a splined
hub (32) held by snap ring (33).
6B04.3
Operation
Special point
- In order to maintain an operational clearance between
the planetary gears, the sun gears and crownwheels,
the secondary sun gear (51) floats on ball bearings (19)
(49).
Kinematics (Fig. 1)
Primary epicyclic gear train
- The primary planetary carrier (24) is integral via splines
with the secondary sun gear (51) and comprises three
planetary gears (20) that engage with crownwheel (47)
and primary sun gear (44) splined onto input shaft (31).
Secondary epicyclic gear train
- The secondary planetary carrier (25) integral via splines
with axle shaft (2) possesses six planetary gears (18)
in constant engagement with crownwheel (15) and
secondary sun gear (51). It receives movement coming
from the primary epicyclic gear train to then transmit it
to axle shaft (2).
Issue 1
May 2001

6B04.4
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
Bush
Straight shaft
Cassette seal
Thrust washer
Locating pin
Circlip
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Washer
Trumpet
Nut
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Pins
Secondary crownwheel
Tab washer
Stop ring
Secondary planetary gears
Ball bearing
Primary planetary gears
Circlip
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Primary planetary carrier
Secondary planetary carrier
Shim(s)
Lock washer
Bolt
Circlip
Brake plate
Input shaft
Splined hub
Snap ring
Studs
Brake discs
Stud
Studs
Intermediary plate
Drilled stop pin
Bolt
Stop pin
Circlip
Magnetic drain plug
Primary sun gear
Circlip
Washer
Primary crownwheel
Spacer
Ball bearing
Issue 1
Washer
Secondary sun gear
Oring
Orings
Transfer tube
Cup plug
Oblique pipe
Locating pin
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
May 2001

14
14
6B04.5
Overall view
5
30
39
41
0
30
10
15
48
47
30
25
17
23
18
17
29
24
20
22
29
51
26
27
28
19
46
21
45
44
42
6
57
50
49
31
33
32
35
38
2
10
12
2
4
13
16
11
34
36
37
31
P1 = 0,02 / 0,12 mm
43 52
Issue 1
May 2001
Parts list
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Rear axle - Trumpet s with double reduction
6B04.6
50
29
Exploded view
17
18
48
23
17
49
56
52
25
43
16
13
12
15
8
14
7
1
9
11
34
42
53
44
40
54
53
55
10
11
20
22
40
40
29
21
46
28
36
19
27
31
26
47
51
39
14
11
45
37
24
41
41
53
54
53
33
32
35
38
35
30
Issue 1
Parts list
May 2001
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
6B04.7

Removal
1. Drain the centre housing and the oil trapped in the
trumpet that is being removed.
Remark
- The drain plug (43) of the trumpet is located behind
the transfer tube (54) (Fig. 4).
2. Immobilise the tractor. Take off the wheel. Place an
axle stand beneath the centre housing.
54
43
Fig. 4
15
48
47
30
35
32
31
11
40
9
P
40
38
39
41
1
30
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001

6B04.8
3. Remove the bolt (1) holding the cab and if necessary

also take out bolt (2) from the rear support above the
trumpet (Fig. 6).
4. If necessary, slightly raise the side of the cab and
check that there is no interference with nearby elements. Chock the cab using a suitably adapted axle
stand.
5. Remove bolts (1) and the stabiliser support (2) (Fig. 7).
Take off circlip (1) and remove the lower pin (2) of the
lift ram (Fig. 8). Using a strap, pull the ram away from
the trumpet.
6. Position a suitable support beneath the trumpet.
7. Remove nuts (11) and washers (9) without taking out
bolts (40).
Remark
- These bolts serve to hold the crownwheel, spacer
and brake plate assembly on the trumpet.
8. Unstick and separate the trumpet assembly complete
with the input shaft (31), brake plate (30), crownwheel
(15) (17) and spacer (48) from the centre housing.
Recover the brake discs (35), the intermediate plate
(38) and the stop pins (39) (41) (Fig. 5).
Remark
- Brake piston P remains in the housing (1) (Fig. 5).
2
Fig. 6
Important
- Take care not to press the brake pedal concerned, or fit
a piston retainer tool on the centre housing (see section
6E01).
9. Remove the transfer tube (54) and discard the Orings
(53).
2
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
6B04.9
Refitting
Special points
- The studs (34) (36) (37), screwed into the centre
housing are of different lengths. Before fitting, their
threads must be lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or
equivalent (Fig. 9).
Important
- Place the studs in the housing, respecting their length

and location, according to Fig. 3:
. (34): 16 mm - L 363 mm
. (36): 16 mm - L 378 mm
. (37): 16 mm - L 388 mm
10. Clean the site of the silicone seal on brake plate (30)
and the centre housing.
Check that all previous traces of sealing compound
have been removed. Properly dry the components.
11. Coat angle "D" of the centre housing (1) (Figs. 10 -11)
with a sealing compound (Silicomet type).
Reminder
- The diameter of the bead (seal) must be uniform,
small section and without joins.
12. Check that discs (35) slide normally on the hub (32).
Check that the stop pins (39) (41) are free in:
- the drilled holes of piston"P" and the intermediate
plate (38) (Fig. 5)
- the recesses of the brake plate (30) and the centre
housing (1) (Fig. 5).
13. Check for the presence of locating pin (5) on the
centre housing.
14. Check that port "O" on the brake plate (30) is not
obstructed (Fig. 2).
15. Check for the presence of the radial drilled holes on
the intermediate plate (38).
16. On the trumpet, fit plate (38) by placing either side of
it a brake disc (35) on hub (32) and position the stop
pins (39) (41) (Fig. 5).
Remark
- The drilled pin is fitted in the upper recess of the
brake plate.
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2001

6B04.10
17. Fit new orings (53) smeared with miscible grease

onto the transfer pipe (54). Introduce the pipe into the
trumpet port.
18. With the help of a second operator and the support
equipment used for removal, engage the trumpet on
the studs. Turn the axle shaft and push the trumpet
until it mates with the centre housing. Check that the
end of the transfer tube (54) as well as the stop pins
(39) (41) are correctly positioned in their respective
grooves in the housing.
Place washers (9). Fit and tighten nuts (11) to a
torque of 247 - 253 Nm. Remove the support from
beneath the trumpet. Refit the lift ram. Replace the
stabiliser support and tighten the bolts to 480 - 640
Nm.
19. Refit the various elements that surround the trumpet. Refit the wheel and tighten the nuts or studs to
the correct torque depending on the version (see
section 2G01).
Tightening torque
- Cab fixing bolt (silent bloc): 200 - 260 Nm, Loctite
270 or equivalent.
20. Top up the oil level in the housings and check on the
transparent tube located on the left-hand side of the
centre housing.
21. Check the operation of the lift system. Carry out a
road test of the brake circuit.
22. Check the oil tightness of:
- the trumpet
- the Orings (53) located on transfer tube (54).
Issue 1
May 2001

B . Removing and refitting brake
plate, crownwheels, spacer and
epicyclic reducer gears (Fig. 12)
Removal
the input shaft (31) at the top (Fig. 13).
25. Remove the bolts (40). Unstick and remove the
brake plate (30).
26. If necessary, take off snap ring (33) and hub (32).
27. Disengage circlip (42) from its groove and remove
the primary sun gear (44).
28. Disengage circlip (21), take off washer (46) and
remove the input shaft (31) fitted with ball bearing
race (19).
29. Take off circlip (45). Take out the primary planetary
carrier (24). Remove the planetary gears (20) (see
D).
30. Unstick and remove the primary crownwheel (47).
31. Immobilise the planetary carrier (25). Take off bolts
(28). Remove holding washer (27) and shims (26).
32. Disengage the secondary sun gear (51). Remove the
thrust washer (4).
6B04.11
42
33
30
32
44
31
21
46
19
47
20
45
28
24
51
31
27
49
48
26
18
25
4
15
16
31
40
40
F
40
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001

6B04.12
33. Take out the secondary planetary carrier (25). Remove the planetary gears (18) (see D).
34. If necessary, extract bearing (19) from the input
shaft (31).
35. Unstick and remove the secondary crownwheel (15)
(see special points below).
Special points
- The reason for the secondary crownwheel (15) are
the large forces exerted, and its heat treatment is
different compared to that of the primary crownwheel
(47).
- In order to identify the crownwheels and avoid their
incorrect fitting, the perimeter of the secondary
crownwheel has two diametrically opposed machined flats "M" (Fig. 14).
- This crownwheel also possesses an additional
locating pin (57) (Fig. 2).
Refitting
36. Clean the components. Replace any parts found to
be defective. Remove all traces of previous sealing
compound in the internal angles of the trumpet, on
the crownwheels (15) (47), the spacer (48) and the
brake plate (30).
Special points
- If the replacement of the oblique pipe (56) is
necessary, lightly smear the end concerned with
Loctite 648 or its equivalent and introduce it into the
trumpet, the oblique profile turned towards bearing
(12) (13) (Fig. 15).
- The bearing cup plug (55) fitted at the end of the
channel (see exploded view) must likewise be
smeared with Loctite 542 or equivalent before insertion.
37. Check for the presence of the tab washer (16).
38. Refit the secondary planetary carrier (25).
39. Refit the thrust washer (4) as in the overall view.
Refit the secondary sun gear (51) comprising ball
bearing (49), washer (50) and circlip (6).
40. Place pin (14) and the locating pin (57) in their respective grooves located on the trumpet.
15
Fig. 14
56
12
13
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2001

41. Coat the inner angle "B" of trumpet (10) with a
silicone sealing compound (Silicomet type) (Fig. 16).
Reminders
- The diameter of the bead (seal) must be uniform,
small in section and without joins.
- This fitting information also holds true for all later
sealing operations.
42. Position the secondary crownwheel (15), with the
flats "M" (Fig. 14) along the horizontal axis of the
tractor.
43. If necessary, reassemble the secondary planetary
gears (18) with bearings (23) and stop rings (17).
44. Refit the secondary planetary gears correctly positioned on the planetary carrier (25). Fit circlips (29)
(see D).
45. Place the shim(s) (26) removed during disassembly
and refit the holding washer (27). Immobilise the
planetary carrier. Smear bolts (28) with Loctite 242
46. Coat the internal angles "A" and "C" of spacer (48)
with a silicone sealing compound (Silicomet type)
(Fig. 16).
47. Position the spacer on the secondary crownwheel
(15).
48. Place the second pin (14) in its groove in the spacer.
49. If necessary, refit the primary planetary gears (20)
correctly positioned with bearings (22) on the corresponding planetary carrier. Fit the circlips (29) (see
D).
50. Position the primary crownwheel (47) on the spacer
(48).
51. Slide the primary planetary carrier (47) onto the
secondary sun gear. Turn the planetary gears to
facilitate their engagement.
52. Fit circlip (45).
53. If disassembled, insert the ball bearing race (19) on
the input shaft (31).
54. Engage shaft (31) fitted with its bearing in the
secondary sun gear (51). Place washer (46) and
circlip (21).
55. Slide the primary sun gear (44) correctly oriented
(Fig. 2) on to shaft (31). Fit circlip (42).
6B04.13
30
E
48
A
C
15
B
10
Fig. 16
56. Coat the internal angle "E" of the brake plate (30) with
a silicone sealing compound (Silicomet type) (Fig.
16).
57. Position the brake plate on the primary crownwheel
(47).
58. Fit bolts (40) and tighten them to a torque of 90 - 120
Nm.
59. Slide hub (32) onto shaft (31). Using suitable pliers,
fit the snap ring (33).
Issue 1
May 2001

6B04.14
C . Replacing the cassette seal
61. Partially drain the trumpet concerned.
62. Chock the front wheels. Remove the rear wheel (see
section 2G01). Place an axle stand beneath the
trumpet.
Removal
Special points
- Model 8260 to 8280 tractors are fitted with axle shaft
with a diameter of 110 mm. The shape of this shaft is
different from that of the same diameter fitted to 8240
tractors (depending on option) and the 8250 fitted with
composite drive unit.
- Bush (1) (Fig. 17) has a larger bore and is referenced in
the spare parts catalogue.
- The cassette seal (3) (Fig. 17) retains the same characteristics as that fitted to trumpets with composite drive
unit.
- The bore of the bush is smeared with Loctite 648 or
equivalent. The bush is placed on the shaft flush with
the thrust face of the bearing cone (7) (Fig. 18).
1
Fig. 17
3
1
63. Using a locally manufactured tool, extract the cassette seal (3) without leaving any marks on the
trumpet or external diameter of the bush (1) (Fig. 17).
Refitting
64. Clean the groove of the seal on the trumpet and the
bush (1).
65. Lightly smear the external diameter of the seal with
Loctite 648 or equivalent and moderately lubricate its
internal diameter with transmission oil.
66. Using service tool ref. 3378151M1 (see G), insert
the seal. Wipe away any remaining traces of Loctite.
Remark
- The design of the service tool determines the
position of the cassette seal in its groove in the
trumpet.
Final operations
section 2G01).
68. Top up the oil level in the housings and check it on
the transparent tube located on the left-hand side of
the centre housing.
69. Road test. Check the oil tightness of the cassette
seal.
Issue 1
May 2001
7
Fig. 18
6B04.15

the planetary gears
18
Disassembly
70. Remove the trumpet assembly (see A) and the
epicyclic reducer gears (see B).
20
Primary planetary carrier (24) (Fig. 20)
71. Note visually the shape of the planetary gears (20)
and roller bearings (22) (Fig. 19). Take off the circlips
(29). Remove the three planetary gears.
Secondary planetary carrier (25) (Fig. 20).
72. Note visually the shape of the planetary gears (28)
and roller bearings (23) (Fig. 9). Take off the circlips
(29). Remore the six planetary gears.
23
D
D
22
Fig. 19
Reassembly
73. Check the components. Replace any parts found to
be defective.
74. Fit the planetary gears with their roller bearings and
respective snap rings. Refit the planetary gears on
the corresponding planetary carrier by turning the
clearance "D" on the bearings (Fig. 19) towards throat
"C" of the reducer gears (Fig. 20).
75. Fit the circlips (29) (Fig. 20)
76. Manually check the rotation of each planetary gear.
77. Refit the epicyclic reducer gears (see B) and the
trumpet assembly (see A).
25
24
29
C
18
20
29
Fig. 20
Issue 1
May 2001

6B04.16
E . Replacing the axle shaft bearings

79. Remove the brake plate, crownwheels, spacer and
epicyclic reducer gears (see B).
Disassembly
80. Take off washer (16) and shaft assembly (2).
Remark
- The bearing cone (13) is free on the shaft.
81. Remove cone (13). Extract bearing cone (7).
82. Drive out the cassette seal (3).
remove the bearing cups (8) (12).
Reassembly
85. Lubricate the bores of the cups (8) (12) with transmission oil.
86. Insert the cups into their respective bores thrusting
against the shoulder.
87. Lubricate the bore of the bearing cone (7) and insert
it so as to mate with the shoulder on shaft (2).
88. Lubricate the bearing cup (8).
89. Introduce the prepared shaft into the trumpet fitted
with its cups.
90. Lubricate and fit the bearing cone (13) and the tab
washer (16).
Final operations
91. Refit the secondary planetary carrier (25), thrust
washer (4), secondary sun gear (51) comprising
bearing (49), washer (50) and the circlip (6).
92. Carry out shimming of the bearings (see F).
93. Complete the refitting of the epicyclic reducer gear,
spacer, crownwheels and brake plate (see B).
95. Insert a new cassette seal (see C).
section 2G01).
97. Top up the level of the housings and check the oil
level on the transparent tube located on the left hand
side of the centre housing.
Issue 1
May 2001
6B04.17
F . Shimming the axle shaft bearings

- Axle shaft (2), taper roller bearings (7) (8) and (12) (13),
trumpet, tab washer (16), secondary planetary carrier
(25), washer (4), ball bearing race (49).
Remark
- The pre-loaded shimming of the taper roller bearings of
the axle shaft is carried out using shim(s) (26) placed
between the end of the shaft (2) and washer (27) (Fig.
22).
Reminder
Fig. 21

the trumpet in a vertical position (Fig. 21).
P1 =
0,02 / 0,12 mm
27
26
Fig. 22
Issue 1
May 2001
6B04.18
Preparation
98. Check for the presence of bearing cone (13), the tab
washer (16), the planetary carrier (25) and the
secondary sun gear (51) (Fig. 24).
Shimming (Fig. 24)

99. Press hard on the secondary sun gear while simultaneously turning the trumpet several times in
order to seat the bearing cones and cups.
100. Using an appropriate depth gauge (Fig. 23), measure distance "E" between side "A" of the ball bearing
race (49) and side "B" at the end of shaft (2).
101. Determine the thickness of shim(s) (26) to be fitted
to obtain a pre-loading of P1 = 0.02 to 0.12 mm
(Fig. 2), according to :
E - (0.02 to 0.12)
102. Place the previously selected shims on the end of
the shaft. Fit washer (27) on ball bearing race (49).
Smear bolts (28) with Loctite 242 or equivalent and
tighten them to a torque of 100 - 130 Nm.
Fig. 23
51
49
2
25
16
13
Fig. 24
Issue 1
May 2001
6B04.19
G . Service tools
- 3378151M1 - Fitting tools for rear shaft's cassette
seal ( 110) (Fig. 25)
Fig. 25
Issue 1
May 2001

6B04.20
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Handbrake unit and control link
6C01
6C01.1
Handbrake unit and control link
Contents
-
General ________________________________________________
Operation ______________________________________________
A.
Disassembling and reassembling the handbrake unit ______
B.
Disassembling, reassembling and adjusting the controls ___
C.
Disassembling, reassembling the lever and replacing the

cable ___________________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

6C01.2

Parts list
General
The mechanical control assembly of the handbrake is
fitted on drive pinion (9) located on the intermediate housing.
It consists of a mechanism (16) placed between six
discs (14) that are integral with the drive pinion and four
intermediary plates (6).
The mechanism housed in a unit (15) fixed to the rear
bearing carrier is composed of two cast-iron plates held
by springs and separated by ball bearings lodged in
raceways.
It is operated via a rod (23) fitted on relay pin (26) by
means of relay cam (22) which is in contact with rod (19),
itself thrusting against a second cam (31) integral via
splines with pin (11) controlled by link (3).
Remarks
- Depending on the type of tractor, the lubrication of the
handbrake discs is ensured by an oil mist coming from
a central channel and radial drilled holes machined into
the drive pinion (see section 6D01, 6D02 or 6D03
depending on the version).
- This centre oil channel also serves to lubricate a needle
bearing on those tractors fitted with a creeper unit (see
section 6H01 depending on the version).
Operation
When the handbrake lever is pulled upwards, the cable
acts upon link (3) integral with pin (11) via splines.
Pin (11) pivots and turns cam (31) that pushes rod (19) to
thrust against a relay cam (22) that turns freely on pin
(26), thus causing the spreading of mechanism (16) by
way of threaded link pin (23).
When the handbrake lever is in the off position, the link
(3) returns to its initial position by means of spring (32).
The adjuster nut of the mechanism is accessible via a
plug screwed on to the top of the intermediary housing.
The oil tightness of housing (7) is provided by seal (12)
and that of pin (11) by oring (1).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Oring
Bolt
Link
Holding plate
Bolt
Intermediate plates
Housing
Bolt
Drive pinion
Friction ring
Pin
Oil seal
Bearing carrier
Disks
Housing
Spreader mechanism
Bolt
Washer
Rod
Pin
Adjuster nut
Cam
Link
Clevis
Pin
Pin
Friction rings
Special bolt
Mecanindus pin
Set screw
Cam
Spring
Oring
Lever
Nuts
Grower washer
Cable
Ratchet
Quadrant
Clevis
Rod
Shouldered washer
Washer
Push-button
Spring
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
Overall view

7
6C01.3
19
30
31
K-K
6
16
14
13
LOCTITE 510
15
9
2
17
32
3
18
19
11
27
22
33
28
12
21
22
7
29
26
10
M
31
20
23
24
25
M-M
Fig. 1
L-L
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
Exploded view
6C01.4
34
8
13
6
14
16
35
14
15
36
35
21
20
37
23
25
24
33
29
28
27
22
5
27
26
38
39
17
18
1
3
32
40
12
41
42
11
45
43
44
7
10
31
30
30
19
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2

the handbrake unit
6C01.5
15
Remark
- To carry out operations on the handbrake mechanism
comprising discs (14), intermediate plates (6) and
mechanism (16), it is necessary to uncouple the tractor
and remove the intermediate housing as well as the
drive pinion.
2. Separate the intermediate housing from the centre
housing (see section 2D01).
3. Remove the creeper unit (if fitted) (see section 6H01).
If necessary, remove the sleeve and ratchet of the
Park Lock (depending on equipment) and the bearing
assembly / hydraulic pump drive pinion.
4. Remove the drive pinion and handbrake unit (see
section 6D01, 6D02 or 6D03 depending on the version).
T
14
C
5
16
13
6
8
Fig. 3
Disassembly
5. Remove circlip (5)
6. Loosen and remove bolts (8)
Separate the housings (13) (15).
7. Place the drive pinion on the workbench, the bevel
gear at the bottom.
8. Remove the discs, intermediate plates and the brake
mechanism.
Reassembly
9. Clean and check the components. Replace any parts
found to be defective or buckled.
Check that the central channel and radial drilled holes
of the drive pinion (depending on versions) are not
obstructed.
Check also, the oil discharge ports located at the base
of the handbrake unit housing.
Issue 1
May 2001

6C01.6
10. Place carrier (13) on the bearing cone of the drive

pinion, with the cup previously lubricated.
11. Correctly orient control"C". Refit mechanism (16) by
placing it between discs (14) and the intermediate
plates (6) as shown in the overall view. Correctly
position stops "T".
12. Assemble the handbrake unit (15) on bearing carrier
(13).
13. Fit bolts (8) previously lightly smeared with Loctite
270 or its equivalent and tighten to a torque of 120 160 Nm.
Final operations
15. Refit the drive pinion unit and handbrake (see
section 6D01, 6D02 or 6D03 depending on the version).
16. Turn and fit axle (25) to mechanism (16) so as to
clear it easily. Fit the washer and a new split pin.
Adjust the control (see B).
17. Refit the bearing / hydraulic pump drive pinion
assembly, the ratchet and the Park Lock sleeve
(depending on equipment). Fit the creeper unit (if
fitted).
18. Reassemble the intermediate housing and centre
housing (see section 2D01).
20. Check the correct operation of all the controls.
21. Check all the functions (mechanical and electrical)
of the handbrake lever.
22. Road test.
23. Check the oil tightness of the mating faces and the
hydraulic unions.
Issue 1
May 2001
6C01.7

adjusting the controls
Disassembly
27
22
24. Remove the entire unit (7) and rod (19). If necessary,
take out each component in the unit.
Remark
- To take out pin (26) and cam (22), it is necessary to

uncouple the tractor between the gearbox and the
Reassembly
25. Reverse the order of the previous operations and
respect the following special points.
Fig. 4
Special points
On unit (7)
- Insert friction bush (10) using a locally manufactured
drift.
- Insert oil seal (12) in contact with unit (7) using a
suitable fixture. After inserting, lubricate the seal.
- lightly smear with Loctite 241 the Philips head bolt (30)
of cam (31).
- lightly smear with Loctite 510 the mating face of unit (7)
and the intermediate housing.
- Tighten bolts (2) to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm and bolt (17)
Note: During assembly, do not forget oring (1) that
provides oil tightness between pin (11) and the link
(3).
On cam (22)
- Insert the friction bush (27) flush with face F (Fig. 4).
- Lightly smear bolt (28) with Loctite 542 (solely on an
assembly without an oring) and tighten to a torque of
25 35 Nm.
On cam (31)
- Moderately tighten set screw (30) smeared with Loctite
241.
On the brake mechanism (16)
- Fit pin (25) in such a manner as to provide clearance.
- Lightly smear the thread of link rod (23) with Loctite 270
and tighten it in clevis (24).
Issue 1
May 2001

6C01.8
Adjustment
- With cam (31) in contact with unit (7) (Fig. 5) via the port
located above the intermediate housing, act on nut (21)
in order to obtain a clearance "J" of 1.2 mm to 1.3 mm
between the discs, intermediate plates and mechanism (Fig. 7).
26. Position link (3) on pin (11) to obtain a dimension of
225 mm to 250 mm between the centre of the cable
and cable holder (4) (position A - Fig. 6) by checking
that cam (31) is in contact with the housing (7).
27. Check that the travel of the link (3) falls between 30
mm and 45 mm with a force of 10 - 25 daN exerted
at the point where the cable is fixed (position B Fig. 6).
31
Remarks
Fig. 5
- To adjust the tractor handbrake, take off the wheel

concerned and slightly tilt the cab to the left , taking care
not to damage any of the components attached to it.
- Remove the plug located above the intermediate housing.
- Using a locally manufactured short spanner, adjust nut
(21) in order to obtain the travel stated in operation 27.
- After adjustment, check the free movement of the
tractor with the handbrake in the off position.
225 - 250 mm
30 - 45 mm
Reminder
- Tightening torque for wheel nuts or studs (see section
2G01).
11
3
Fig. 6
J = 1,2 / 1,3 mm
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
6C01.9
C . Disassembling, reassembling the

lever and replacing the cable
Disassembling the handbrake lever (Fig. 9)
28. Disconnect the electrical connector (1) to the switch
and the handbrake cable (37) (Fig. 8).
29. Unscrew the push-button (44).
30. Recover washers (42) (43) and spring (45).
31. Remove the clevis assembly (40) and rod (41).
Note: If necessary, separate the rod and clevis.
32. Replace the quadrant (39) and ratchet (38) (Fig. 9).
Reassembly
37
33. Refit the lever. Reverse the disassembly operations.

34. Check the correct operation of the lever (see operation 37). If necessary, adjust the handbrake (see
B).
Replacing the cable

Removal
35. Disconnect the endsof the cable and sheath (Fig. 8).
Remove the cable.
Fig. 8
42
44
39
43
45
41
40
38
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
6C01.10
Refitting
Note: If necessary, before refitting the new cable,
hold it vertically and inject a few drops of Vaseline
oil between the cable and sheath. Wait for several
moments for the oil to descend the length of the
cable.
36. Carry out the fitting of the cable on its respective
fixing points.
Remark
- Take care to place the lock washer (1) between
nuts (35) on cable holder (4) (Fig. 10) located above
the intermediate housing. This assembly avoids
any kinking of the cable during handbrake operation.
37. Check the following points to ensure correct operation of the handbrake lever:
- put the handbrake on, its initial travel should be
approximately 10 to 13 clicks of the ratchet with a
force of around 10 - 25 daN exerted at the point of
cable connection.
- the signal lamp on the dashboard should light.
- release the handbrake. The assembly should return
to the handbrake off position.
- the assembly should operate freely without any
"hard" points or sticking.
- in the handbrake off position, the dashboard light
must go out.
Reminder
- On tractors fitted with a Full Powershift gearbox, first
disengage the speed control of the Park Lock in order to
get the dashboard light to go out when the handbrake is
in the off position.
Issue 21
Issue
May 2002
2001
May
35
35
Fig. 10
Rear axle - Differential
6D01
6D01.1
Differential with standard bevel gear and

hydromechanical lock
Contents
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the left-hand differential lock

carrier, disassembling and reassembling the
lock assembly __________________________________________
Removing and refitting the right-hand differential

lock carrier _____________________________________________
C.
Removing and refitting the differential unit assembly ______
D.
Removing and refitting the planetary gears and sun

gears and disassembling and reassembling the
crownwheel ____________________________________________
11
E.
Adjusting and checking the backlash _____________________
13
F.
Shimming the differential unit ___________________________
15
G.
Removing and refitting the drive pinion ___________________
18
H.
Adjusting the position and shimming the drive pinion _____
21
I.
Service tools ___________________________________________
25
B.
Issue 1
May 2001

6D01.2
General
Reminder
The 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors are equipped
with an identical centre housing. The intermediate housing differs depending on the type of gearbox.
Specifications
- Model 8210 8220 8240 and 8250 tractors
. Heavy Duty gearbox
. narrow intermediate housing
- Model 8210 8220 and 8240 tractors
. AG 150 Full Powershift gearbox
. wide intermediate housing
- Model 8250 tractors
. wide intermediate housing (hypoid version)
The differential assembly is formed by two halves

holding four planetary gears and two sun gears. The drive
pinion, which bears the 4 WD drive pinion (17) (if fitted),
is located in the intermediate housing. The adjustment of
its position is carried out by shims (12) fitted between the
differential lock carriers, the bearings (13) and the housing. The pre-loading of the bearings is obtained by
shim(s) (3) fitted between the bearing cone (1) and the
thrust washer (4). The pre-loading via shimming of the
differential assembly is carried out via the intermediary
of a deflector (55) (equally serving as an adjustment
shim) placed between bearing cup (57) and the left-hand
differential lock carrier (38).
Backlash between the drive pinion and the crownwheel
is obtained by using shims (59) inserted between cup
(32) and the differential half-housing (23).
Differential lock
Model 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors are fitted with
a standard bevel gear and either a multidisc or hydromechanical differential lock (depending on version).
In this section, we shall limit our description to the hydromechanical version. For the multidisc version, see section 6D02.
Construction
The bevel gear, its rotation provided by the gearbox
output shaft, drives the rear axle.
The helical drive pinion is supported by two taper roller
bearings mounted in opposition.
The bearing cone (7) is force fitted on the drive pinion, and
cups (2) (10) are likewise force fitted into the intermediate housing (19) and bearing carrier (13). The bearing
cone (1), mounted free on the drive pinion, allows to fit
shims (3) required for shimming. The crownwheel is
fastened to the differential housing by rivets. The differential assembly rotates on two taper roller bearings
supported by two lateral carriers centred by bushes (25)
(40) and fixed by bolts to the housing.
Issue 1
May 2001
Arrangement and operation

- The left-hand differential lock carrier houses the differential lock mechanism
- The system consists of a piston (58) and a mobile dog
(48) integral via splines with the input sun gear in the
left-hand side trumpet housing.
- The piston acts upon the mobile dog when the 17 bar
hydraulic circuit is pressurized via the solenoid valve
fitted to the right-hand cover. The piston moves and
pushes the mobile dog while compressing spring (47).
- The front teeth of the mobile dog engage with a fixed
dog (46) integral with the differential half-housing (23).
In this position, the input sun gears of the right-hand and
left-hand trumpets then turn at the same speed. When
the pressure is released, the mobile dog returns to its
initial position under the action of the spring.
Overall view
6D01.3
A
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Thrust washer
Circlip
Intermediat plates (handbrake)
Bearing cone
Bolt
Drive pinion
Bearing cup
Bolt
Shim(s)
Bearing carrier
Discs
Handbrake unit
Mechanism
4 WD drive pinion (if fitted)
Nut
Deflector
Crownwheel
Differential half-housing
Rivets
Centring bush
Bolt
Right-hand carrier
Spherical washer
Planetary gear
Sun gear
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Brace
Orings
Shouldered bush
Fixed coupler
Oring
Left-hand carrier
Bolt
Centring bush
Bolt
Transfer tube
Oring
Union
Centre housing
Fixed dog
Spring
Mobile dog
Friction washer
Oring
Oring
Circlip
(53)
(54)
(55)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(61)
Finger
Bearing cone
Deflector (shim)
Bearing cone
Piston
Shim(s)
Shouldered bush
55
46
50
57
59
52
58
Fig. 1
51
Fig. 2
19
20
6
49
Fig. 3
8
7
1
48
54
47
61
35
44
45
43
22
42
23
41
24
34
34
40
25
39
26
37
30
9
18
16
17
10
11
31
13
12
27
53
32
38
29
14
15
15
28
33
23
36
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 1
May 2001
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
6D01.4
Exploded view
33
30
35
28
22
23
20
23
59
32
61
31
34
29
9
24
25
4
7
27
3
10
26
11
1
13
12
18
44
57
54
41
46
43
38
34
42
50
58
37
51
52
49
48
39
47
55
40
53
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
6D01.5
A . Removing and refitting the lefthand differential lock carrier, disassembling and reassembling the lock
assembly
Remark
It is possible to gain access to the following differential
lock components by removing only the left-hand trumpet
housing:
- differential lock carrier (38)
- piston (58)
- seals (50) (51)
- spring (47)
- mobile dog (48)
44
Fig. 4
Removing the left-hand differential lock carrier (38)

1. Remove the left-hand trumpet housing (see section
6B01, 6B02 or 6B03 depending on the version).
2. Disconnect the hydraulic feed pipe.
Unscrew union (44) and raise the transfer pipe (42)
(Fig. 4 - 5).
3. Remove the brake piston (see section 6E01)
4. Alternatively, unscrew bolts (39) on the differential
lock carrier. Place two diametrically opposed guide
studs "G" on the housing. Progressively extract the
differential lock carrier through the tapped holes and
two bolts "V" (Fig. 6) in order to progressively release
the spring (47).
5. Remove the differential lock carrier and recover the
spring, the mobile dog, the friction washer, possibly
cup (57) and deflector (55) (shim).
42
Fig. 5
V
39
Issue 1
Fig. 6
May 2001

6D01.6
Refitting
6. Check for the presence of centring bush (40), the
correct positioning of deflector (55) (shim) and cup
(57) in accordance with Fig. 7.
7. Fit new orings (34) (37).
8. Place the friction washer (49) and spring (47) on the
mobile dog. Fit the assembly in the piston. Slide the
differential lock carrier onto the guide studs "G"
previously fitted into the housing (Fig. 6) by positioning the hydraulic port of the differential lock upwards
and holding the spring in position.
9. Alternately and uniformly tighten the four bolts (39)
to a torque of 100 - 130 Nm. Remove the guide studs.
Fit and tighten the other bolts to the same torque.
10. Fit transfer pipe (42) and connection (44).
11. Refit the brake piston (see section 6E01).
12. Check the oil tightness of seal (34) on differential
lock carrier (38) (see section 6E01).
13. Refit the left-hand trumpet (see section 6B01, 6B02
or 6B03 depending on the version).
57
55
40
Fig. 7
58
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
6D01.7
Disassembling the lock assembly (Fig. 9)

14. Remove the differential lock carrier (see A).
15. Take out cup (57). Note the orientation of the deflector (55) (shim) and remove the differential lock
carrier.
16. Take off circlip (52).
17. Drive out piston (58) from the differential lock carrier
using a compressed air jet (Fig. 8).
18. Take off the orings (37) (50) and (51).
19. If necessary, unscrew the finger (53).
53
52
50
58
Reassembly
20. Check and clean the components. Replace any
21. If finger (53) has been removed, lightly smear with
Loctite 221 then refit and tighten it in the differential
lock carrier (38).
22. Coat the orings (50) (51) with miscible grease, in
order to place them correctly in the bottom of their
respective grooves.
23. Using a plastic hammer, insert the piston (58) into
the differential lock carrier (38) (Fig. 10) while respecting the location of the finger (53).
24. Fit circlip (52), deflector (55) (shim) while respecting
its orientation (Fig. 7). Place bearing cup (57).
25. Refit the differential lock carrier on to the centre
housing (see A).
26. Test the oil tightness of the seals (50) (51) and
differential lock carrier (38) mounted on the locking
piston.
Reminder
- If the piston (58), seals (50) (51) or carrier (38) have
been disassembled, it is recommended to carry
out an hydraulic test of the whole hydraulic assembly and of the transfer tube after reassembly.
51
57
55
37
Fig. 9
58
38
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001

6D01.8
Hydraulic test
- Use a pressure gauge that has previously been tested
for pressure tightness (Fig. 11).
- Supply the circuit with compressed air up to around 5
bar, in order to check the reaction of the piston. Adjust
the pressure to approximately 0.3 bar. Carry out the
hydraulic test.
- Close the valve. For approximately 1 minute, no drop in
pressure must be observed on the pressure gauge.
27. When the test is completed, remove the pressure
gauge and fit the original pressure pipe.
28. Refit the trumpet housing (see section 6B01, 6B02
44
Fig. 11
B . Removing and refitting the righthand differential lock carrier

Remarks
- The access to the right-hand differential lock carrier
(27) is similar to that of the left-hand differential lock
carrier (38).
- In order to maintain the crownwheel assembly in
position, it is recommended to screw two diametrically opposed guide studs "G" into the tapped holes
holding the differential lock carrier on to the housing,
with their ends abutting against the differential halfhousing (23).
Removal
25
34
Fig. 12
29. Remove bolts (26).

30. Using the two V bolts in the tapped holes of the
carrier, extract the latter from the housing and
remove it, as described in the procedure used for the
left-hand carrier (Fig. 6).
Refitting
31. Check for the presence of centring pin (25) and Oring
(34) (Fig. 12).
32. Uniformly and alternately, tighten the four bolts (26)
to a torque of 100 - 130 Nm. Take out the guide studs.
33. Check the oil tightness of seal (34) on carrier (27)
(see section 6E01)
Issue 1
27
May 2001
6D01.9
C . Removing and refitting the differential unit assembly

36
Preparation for removal

34. Split the tractor between the intermediate housing
and the centre housing (see section 2D01).
35. If necessary, separate the PTO housing from the
centre housing (see section 2E01).
36. Remove the trumpet housings (see section 6B01,
6B02 or 6B03 depending on the version).
37. Take off union (44) and raise the transfer tube (42)
(Fig. 4 - 5). Unscrew the ground speed sensor to
avoid interference with the crownwheel.
38. Remove the brake pistons (see section 6E01).
39. Place and tighten sling ref. 3378116M1, (see I) in
position 1 (this position corresponds to a differential
assembly with a hydromechanical differential lock
and a rear axle with a Full Powershift or Heavy Duty
gearbox). Using the sling, hold the differential assembly in the axis of the left and right-hand carriers
(27) (38).
Fig. 13
Removing the differential unit

40. Remove bolts (26) (39) from the differential lock
carriers and fit the guide bolts "G" in accordance with
Figure 6.
Extract and remove the differential lock carriers
using the tapped holes and the two bolts "V" as
shown in Figure 6.
Recover the differential lock spring (47) fitted in the
left-hand differential lock carrier (38).
41. Remove the orings (34).
42. Take out the lock assembly and the differential (36)
from the centre housing (Fig. 13).
Refitting
Note: Since space is limited around the differential
unit, it is vital to fit the auxiliary spool valve and lift
control valve the oil return pipe in the housing (45)
before refitting the unit..
43. Using the sling, introduce the differential assembly
into the centre housing and hold it in the axis of the
trumpets.
44. Refit the left and right-hand side differential lock
carriers (see B and A).
45. After fitting the differential lock carriers, manually
check the rotation of the differential assembly.
Issue
Issue21
May 2002
December
2000
6D01.10
46. Refit the brake pistons (see section 6E01).
Special point
- If the carrier (1) of the ground speed sensor (2) has been
removed, position the carrier previously lightly smeared
with Loctite 510 or its equivalent, with the offset of the
sensor turned towards the longitudinal axis of the
centre housing as shown in Fig. 14. Tighten the bolts (3)
previously lightly smeared with Loctite 542 to a torque
of 25 - 35 Nm.
Remarks
- The end of the sensor must always be placed above the
teeth of the differential crownwheel.
- Fit and adjust the ground speed sensor lightly smeared
with Loctite 577 (Sensor Sealing or equivalent).
Fig. 14
Final operations
47. Refit the trumpet housings (see section 6B01, 6B02
48. If the PTO housing has been removed, assemble it
with the centre housing (see section 2E01).
49. Couple the tractor between the intermediate housing
50. Check the correct operation of all the controls (mechanical, hydraulic and electronic).
51. Carry out a road test. Check the oil tightness of the
mating faces and hydraulic unions.
Issue 1
December 2000
6D01.11
D . Removing and refitting the planetary gears and sun gears and disassembling and reassembling the
crownwheel
46
52. Remove the differential unit (see operations 34 to
42).
53. Remove the fixed dog (46) (Fig. 15).
Removal
54. Separate the differential half-housings (23) (Fig. 15).
Note: These components both bear the same
number. They must always be fitted as pairs.
55. Remove the sun gears (30), planetary gears (29),
washers (28) and the differential brace (33) (Fig.
15A).
56. If necessary, drive cup (32) off the differential halfhousing (23), recover the shim(s) (59). Extract and
discard the deflector (20).
23
Fig. 15
29
35
30
33
61
28
Fig. 15A
Issue 1
May 2001

6D01.12
Disassembling the crownwheel

- The replacement of the crownwheel automatically
requires replacement of the drive pinion.
- Both parts bear the same number.
- They must always be fitted as pairs.
- The original factory parts are assembled using rivets
- During repairs, these rivets are replaced by nuts and
bolts and are referenced in the spare parts catalogue.
24
57. Centre punch each rivet (24) (on toothed side of

crownwheel). Using a 5 mm drill, drill out the rivets
to a depth of 12 mm (Fig. 16). Carry out a second
drilling operation using a 12 mm drill to the same
depth. Drive out the rivets using an appropriate drift
(Fig. 17).
Fig. 16
Refitting the crownwheel

58. Clean the mating faces of the new crownwheel (22)
and differential half-housing (23) as well as their nuts
and bolts.
59. Lightly smear the first few threads of the bolts with
Loctite 270 and place them in the crownwheel and
housing.
60. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 150 - 200 Nm.
Refitting planetary gears and sun gears

Special points
- If replacement of the friction bushes (35) (61) is necessary, insert the new bushes lightly smeared with
Loctite 638 or equivalent, using a suitable fixture.
- Check after insertion that the lubricating ports have not
been blocked by Loctite.
- If necessary, insert deflector (20) and cup (32) (see
operation 66).
61. Refit the planetary gears and sun gears. Carry out
operations 54 to 55 in reverse order.
62. Refit the fixed dog (46).
63. Lightly smear bolts (41) with Loctite 270 or its
equivalent and tighten them to a torque of 130 Nm.
64. Refit the differential assembly (see operations 43 to
45) and the brake pistons (see section 6E01).
Final operations
65. Finish the refitting of the different assemblies. Carry
out operations 47 to 51.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 17

E . Adjusting and checking the backlash
Reminder
- The backlash between the crownwheel and drive pinion
ensures reliability of the bevel gear and the correct
operation of the assembly. This clearance must be
checked after:
. adjusting the bevel gear distance
. shimming the differential unit.
Disassembly
- Using an appropriate extractor, remove cup (32) and
6D01.13
66. Place the previously selected shim(s) (59) in the bore

of the half-housing (23). Insert the deflector (20) and
cup (32) (Fig. 18).
Remarks
- The deflector serves as a guide for centring the
shims. It is inserted using the cup and an appropriate locally manufactured tool. This method allows
the deflector to rest against the cup both during and
after its insertion.
- When the operation is completed, check that the
cup is thrusting on the shim(s) and in contact with
the deflector.
67. Refit the right-hand differential lock carrier and shim
the differential unit (see F).
Pre-adjustment
- The thickness of the shim(s) "E" required to obtain the
correct backlash is calculated as follows: E = Dc + 0.10
mm
E: thickness of shim(s) (59) to be fitted
Dc: crownwheel offset
Remark
- The Dc (example shown: -0.40) engraved on the external diameter of the crownwheel (Fig. 18) after the
pairing number and letter (39 K) may range between 0
and -0.60 mm.
Special point
- When calculating "E" do not take the negative sign preceding the Dc into consideration (Fig. 18).
59
32
20
39
40
K - 0,
23
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2001

6D01.14
Checking
- Couple and provisionally fix the intermediate housing to
the centre housing using several diametrically opposed
bolts tightened to a torque of 540 - 680 Nm.
- With the PTO housing taken off, through the rear
opening of the centre housing (45), place the index of a
dial gauge half way across the length of a tooth of the
crownwheel (Fig. 19).
- Check that the backlash is between 0.15 mm and 0.45
mm. Carry out this check at three points around the
crownwheel.
Important
- If the backlash is incorrect, the adjustment principle is
to reduce or increase the thickness of shim(s) (59).
- In this case, select and fit a different thickness of
shim(s). Carry out the shimming of the differential unit
again in order to obtain the pre-loading of bearings (31)
(32) and (54) (57).
- Check a second time, the backlash between the drive
pinion and the crownwheel.
- When the final adjustment has been obtained, go on
with the refitting operations.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 19
6D01.15
F . Shimming the differential unit

3378117 M1
Note: If the centre housing (45), crownwheel (see

D), taper roller bearings and carriers (27) (28) have
been replaced, the differential unit must be shimmed.
Check beforehand that the shim(s) (59) used for the
backlash (see E) are fitted in the half-housing (23)
and cup (32).
Shimming preparation
68. Place the differential assembly previously fitted
with bearing cone (54) in the housing using sling ref.
3378116M1 (see I). Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs into the centre housing.
Assembly of the right-hand differential lock

carrier
Fig. 20
- Insert the carrier (27) fitted with a new oring (34) using
four bolts (26). Remove the guide studs. Finish refitting
the four bolts and tighten to a torque of 100 - 130 Nm.
69. At the location of the left-hand side differential lock
carrier, place tool ref. 3378117M1 (see I), adapted
for the standard differential unit with hydromechanical
differential lock. Using two bolts, fix the tool onto the
housing (Fig. 20).
70. Tighten the centre bolt to 10 Nm (Fig. 20).
Note: Turn the crownwheel several times to seat
the cones correctly in the cups. Check the tightening torque of the centre bolt again.
Issue 1
May 2001

6D01.16
Dimension to be measured on the housing (45) (Fig.

21 - 22)
71. Using an appropriate depth gauge, measure dimension "B" and determine dimension "C" between
bearing cup (57) and the seating face of the carrier
(38) on the housing (Fig. 22):
C = B - 10 mm (10 mm is the thickness of tool, ref.
3378117M1).
Dimension to be measured on differential lock carrier (38) (Fig. 23)

72. Using appropriate tools (depth gauge, calliper, rule)
so as order to carry out the measurement under the
best conditions, measure dimension "Y".
3378117 M1
57
Fig. 21
38
3378117M1
B
Y
57
57
45
38
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 22

73. Calculate distance "E" (Fig. 24) between the seating
faces of bearing cup (57) and carrier (38):
E=CY
74. Fill in space "E" with a deflector (shim) of a thickness
shown in the following table, so as to obtain a P2 preloading of 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm (Fig. 24).
6D01.17
E
55
38
57
Final operations
75. Remove the tool and the bearing cup (57).
76. On differential lock carrier (38), check for the presence of centring bush (40) and place the deflector
(55) (shim) determined in operation 74 and cup (57)
in accordance with Figure 7.
77. Insert the carrier. Carry out operations 7 to 9.
78. After fitting the differential lock carriers, manually
check the rotation of the differential assembly.
P2 =
0,05 / 0,15 mm
Fig. 24
Reference
No. of punch
marks (dots)
E (mm)
57
187 689 M1
0,73
0,78
892 173 M1
0,864
0,914
892 172 M1
0,991
1,041
892 171 M1
1,118
1,168
892 170 M1
1,245
1,295
191 124 M1
1,37
1,42
191 125 M1
1,49
1,54
521 401 M1
0,61
0,66
Punch
marks
(dots)
Issue 1
May 2001

6D01.18
G . Removing and refitting the drive

pinion
18
79. Uncouple the tractor between the intermediate housing and the centre housing (see section 2D01).
80. Remove the creeper unit (if fitted) (see section
6H01). Free the ratchet of the Park Lock transmission lock (if fitted) (see section 6F01).
81. Locate the position of and take out the sleeve linking
the drive pinion and the lower shaft.
82. Remove the hydraulic pump bearing / drive pinion
assembly.
3378119M1
3378118M1
Removing the drive pinion

83. Disconnect control pin (25) of the handbrake mechanism (see overall view, section 6C01).
84. Release and immobilise nut (18) using spanner, ref.
3378118M1 (see I). Place special socket, ref.
3378119M1 (see I), on the end of the drive pinion
(Fig. 25) and turn it clockwise.
85. Remove bearing cone (1), shims (3) and thrust
washer (4).
86. Take out two diametrically opposed bolts (11) on
bearing carrier (13). In their place screw two guide
studs "G" (Fig. 26) into the tapped holes.87.
Extract carrier (13) using two bolts "V" of sufficient
length (Fig. 26) placed in the tapped holes.
88. Take off the carrier (13) assembly / unit (15), shims
(12) and 4 WD pinion (17) (if fitted). Visually note the
position of the components.
89. Remove circlip (5). Unscrew and remove bolts (8).
Separate the carrier (13) and the unit (15) (see
section 6C01).90.
Remove the discs (14), the
intermediate plates (6) and the handbrake mechanism (16) (see section 6C01).
91. If necessary, extract the bearing cups (2) (10) and
cone (7) on the drive pinion.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 25
11
G
13
V
11
Fig. 26
6D01.19
Refitting the drive pinion

Note: If the drive pinion (see D Disassembly of the
crownwheel), taper roller bearings (7) (10) (1) (2),
bearing carrier (13), thrust washer (4) and intermediate housing (19) have been replaced, it is essential to
adjust the position of the drive pinion (bevel distance) and then shim the taper roller bearings see
H).
93. If bearing cone (7) has been disassembled, force fit
it to thrust against the drive pinion and cup (10) in
contact with bearing carrier (13), using a press and
an appropriate fixture.
94. Lubricate the taper roller bearings (7) (10) with
transmission oil.
95. Refit mechanism (16), the intermediate plates (6)
and discs (14). Assemble unit (15) and carrier (13)
(see section 6C01).
the tapped bolt holes (11).
97. Position and slide the shims (12) on to the guide
studs.
98. Check that the 4 WD drive pinion (17) (if fitted) is
oriented as shown in the overall view. Correctly
position the carrier assembly (13) and unit (15) on
the guide studs. Turn the drive pinion so as to
engage the splines in pinion (17). Continue to push
the unit assembly until it reaches its inserted
position.
99. Use the remaining bolts (11) and insert uniformly
and alternately the carrier assembly (13) and unit
(15). Remove the guide studs. Lightly smear bolts
(11) with Loctite 270 and tighten them to a torque
of 100 - 130 Nm.
100. Check that carrier (13) is in contact with shims (12).
101. It is essential to place thrust washer (4) against
shoulder "E" of the drive pinion (Fig. 30). Slide on
shims (3). Lubricate the bearing cone (1) with
transmission oil and fit it on to the drive pinion in
contact with the shims.
102. Degrease the threads of nut (18) as well as those
on the drive pinion.
Issue 1
May 2001

6D01.20
103. Lightly smear the threads of the nut with Loctite

270 or its equivalent and immobilise it using spanner, ref. 3378118M1. Using socket, ref. 3378119M1,
turn the drive pinion anti clockwise and tighten it to
a torque of 200 - 250 Nm.
Important: Take care to correctly position the
torque wrench. Remove the tool. Manually
check the rotation of the drive pinion. Lock the
nut by bending the lock washer into the grooves
of the pinion without breaking it, using an
appropriate tool.
104. Fit pin (25) into the handbrake mechanism, correctly positioned to provide clearance. Place the
washer and retaining pin. Adjust the control (see
section 6C01).
Final operations
105. Refit the hydraulic pump bearing / drive pinion
assembly.
106. Refit the ratchet and locking sleeve of the Park
Lock transmission (if fitted). Refit the creeper
gearbox reducer gear (if fitted). Adjust the fork (see
section 6H01).
107. Re-couple the tractor between the intermediate
housing and the centre housing (see section 2D01).
Note: If the crownwheel and drive pinion have
been replaced, check the backlash (see E).
108. Check the operation of all the controls.
110. Check the oil tightness of the mating surfaces.
111. Check the oil tightness of the hydraulic unions.
Issue 1
May 2001
6D01.21
H . Removing and refitting the drive

pinion
Reminder
- It is essential to adjust the position of the drive pinion
before carrying out shimming of the taper roller bearings
(7) (10) and (1) (2). Under no circumstances, this
adjustment must be modified without readjusting the
shimming of the drive pinion bearings.
112. Using a press, force fit cup (10) thrust against
bearing carrier (13).
Using a suitable fixture, insert cup (2) to thrust
against housing (19). Screw in two diametrically
opposed guide studs into the tapped bolt holes (11).
Fit the carrier alone without shims (12). Alternatively and progressively, tighten the four bolts (11)
Check that carrier (13) is in contact with the
intermediate housing (19).
113. Using a press and an appropriate fixture, force fit
cone (7) to thrust against the drive pinion.
transmission oil.
115. Temporarily fit the drive pinion without shims (3)
but with thrust washer (4) placed between the
bearing cone (1) and nut (18)
116. Pre-tighten the nut to a torque of 30 - 50 Nm using
wrench, ref. 3378118M1 and socket, ref.
3378119M1 (Figs. 33 -34, I) taking care to correctly position the torque wrench.
117. Turn the drive pinion several times to correctly seat
the bearing cones in the cups. Check again the
correct pre-tightening of nut (18).
Issue 1
May 2001
6D01.22
Adjusting the position of drive pinion

The thickness of shims (12) required to position the drive
pinion is calculated as follows:
E = Z (X + Y) where:
E: Is the thickness of shims (12) to be fitted, tolerance
0.05 mm.
Z: Is the nominal dimension between the rear face of
the intermediate housing (19) and the axis of the
differential crownwheel (22) (Fig. 27).
Note: This dimension is stamped inside the
housing in the horizontal axis of the differential
unit (Fig. 28).
Y: Is the nominal dimension of the positioning of the
drive pinion = 139.00 (Fig. 28).
X: Is the dimension measured between the endof the
drive pinion and the rear face of the intermediate
housing (Fig. 29).
Note: The drive pinion and the crownwheel are
matched pairs with a number and letter engraved
on each component.
Z
X
19
18
39 K
22
39 K
11
13
19
12
Fig. 27
Issue 1
May 2001
6D01.23
Procedure (Operations 118 to 119)

118. Using a depth gauge, measure dimension X (Fig.
29).
119. After having taken the measurement, use the
formula to determine E, the thickness of the shim(s)
(12) to be fitted in order to correctly position the
drive pinion.
Checks
- Temporarily refit the assembly fitted with the
previously determined shims and measure dimension X again.
- Check that X + Y does in fact equal Z.
120. Remove the drive pinion and bearing carrier (13).
121. On bearing carrier (13), refit the mechanism, the
intermediate plates, the discs and unit (15). Refit
the assembly on the intermediate housing (19).
Carry out operations 94 to 100 again.
Reminder
- Carry out the shimming of the drive pinion taper
roller bearings.
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
Issue 1
May 2001

6D01.24
Shimming taper roller bearings (7) (10) and

(1) (2) of the drive pinion
122. On the drive pinion, slide the thickness of shims (3)
required to obtain a provisional clearance of 0.10
mm to 0.15 mm maximum, in order to prepare P1
shimming.
Note: The thrust washer (4) must be placed
against shoulder E of the drive pinion (Fig. 30).
123. Lubricate bearing cup (2). Fit bearing cone (1).
124. Using wrench, ref. 3378118M1and socket, ref.
3378119M1, temporarily tighten nut (18) to a torque
of 30 - 50 Nm.
125. Place the index of the dial gauge on the tapered end
of the pinion (Fig. 30).
126. Pull strongly on the pinion via the front of the
intermediate housing while alternately turning the
pinion left and right to correctly seat the bearing
cones in their cups.
127. With the assistance of another operative, set the
dial gauge to zero.
128. Repeat operation 126 but this time pushing.
129. In relation to the clearance measured, select a new
thickness of shims (3) in order to obtain pre-loading
(Fig. 30):
P1 = 0.04 mm to 0.10 mm
130. Loosen and take off nut (18).
131. Slide the shims (3) selected during operation 129
between thrust washer (4) (see note, operation
122) and bearing cone (1).
of the drive pinion. Fit and definitively tighten the
nut, its threads previously lightly smeared with
Loctite 270, to a torque of 200 - 250 Nm.
133. Manually check the rotation of the drive pinion.
134. Lock the nut by bending its lock washer into the
grooves of the pinion without breaking it, using an
appropriate tool.
18
E
P1 0,04 / 0,10 mm
18
10
11
2
13
12
Fig. 30
Issue 1
May 2001
6D01.25
I . Service tools
- 3378116M1 Differential unit sling (Fig. 31)
- 3378117M1 Shimming tool (Fig. 32)
- 3378118M1 Locking wrench for drive pinion nut
(Fig. 33)
- 3378119M1 Drive pinion tightening socket (Fig.
34).
Fig. 31
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Fig. 34
Issue 1
May 2001
6D02
6D02.1
Differential with standard bevel gear

and multidisc lock
Contents
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the carriers _______________________
B.
Removal and refitting the differential unit assembly _______
C.
Removal and refitting the multidisc lock __________________
10
D.
Removal and refitting the planetary gears and sun

crownwheel ____________________________________________
12
E.
Adjusting and checking the backlash _____________________
14
F.
16
G.
18
H.
Adjusting and shimming the drive pinion _________________
21
I.
Service tools ___________________________________________
24
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.2
The 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors are equipped

with an identical centre housing. The intermediate housing differs depending on the type of gearbox.
thrust washer (4). The pre-loading via shimming of the

differential assembly is carried out via shims (55) placed
between bearing cone (54) and the left-hand carrier (38).
Backlash of the drive pinion and the crownwheel is
obtained by using shims (59) inserted between cup (32)
and the differential half-housing (23).
Specifications
Differential lock
General
Reminder
- Model 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors

. Heavy Duty gearbox
. narrow intermediate housing
- Model 8210 - 8220 and 8240 tractors
. wide intermediate housing
- Model 8250 tractors
. wide intermediate housing (hypoid version)
Model 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors are fitted with
a standard bevel gear and either a multidisc or hydromechanical differential lock (depending on version).
In this section, we shall limit our description to the multidisc version. For the hydromechanical version, see
section 6D01.
Construction
The bevel gear, moved in rotation by the gearbox output
shaft, drives the rear axle.
cups (2) (10) are likewise force fitted into the intermediate housing (19) and bearing carrier (13). The bearing
shims (3) required for shimming.
The crownwheel is fastened to the differential housing by
rivets. The differential assembly rotates on two taper
roller bearings supported by two lateral carriers centred
by bushes (25) (40) and fixed by bolts to the housing.
holding four planetary gears and two sun gears. The drive
pinion, which bears the 4 WD drive pinion (17) (if fitted),
is located in the intermediate housing. The adjustment of
its position is carried out by shims (12) fitted between the
differential lock carriers, the bearings (13) and the housing. The pre-loading of the bearings is obtained by
shim(s) (3) fitted between the bearing cone (1) and the
Issue 1
May 2001
The multidisc lock system, located on the left-hand side

of half-housing (23), comprises:
- a unit (46) housing the discs (49) and intermediate
plates (48),
- a hub (53) integral via splines with the left-hand trumpet
input sun gear,
- a cover (52) made up by piston assembly (58) and
supported by taper roller bearings (54) (57).
The piston chamber lodged in the cover communicates
with a channel in the left-hand carrier, allowing (17 bar)
low pressure to act upon the piston. Two seal rings (56)
ensure the oil tightness of the circuit.
Operation
Clutched position
When the differential lock solenoid valve is activated, the
pressure flows through the channels of carrier (38) and
cover (52) and enters piston chamber (58). The piston
compresses the intermediate plates (48) and discs (49)
integral respectively via stops and splines in lock unit
(46) and hub (53).
In this clutched position, the input sun gears of the righthand and left-hand trumpets turn at the same speeds.
Declutched position
When the pressure is cut, the piston returns, the discs
and intermediate plates are no longer compressed and
allow the sun gears and planetary gears to carry out their
differential function.
Overall view
6D02.3
A
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Thrust washer
Circlip
Intermediate plates (handbrake)
Bearing cone
Bolt
Drive pinion
Bearing cup
Bolt
Shim(s)
Bearing carrier
Discs
Handbrake unit
Mechanism
4 WD drive pinion (if fitted)
Nut
Deflector
Crownwheel
Differential half-housing
Rivets
Centring bush
Bolt
Right-hand carrier
Spherical washer
Planetary gear
Sun gear
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Brace
Orings
Shouldered bush
Fixed dog
Oring
Left-hand carrier
Bolt
Centring bush
Bolt
Transfer tube
Oring
Union
Centre housing
Differential lock disc unit
Bolt
Intermediate plates (differential lock)
Discs
Oring
Oring
Cover
Hub
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
Bearing cone
Shims
Seal ring
Bearing cup
Piston
Shim(s)
Rivet
Shouldered bush
Fig. 1
19
60
Fig. 2
2
21
Fig. 3
4
41
20
56
59
57
61
35
44
45
43
22
42
23
52
24
34
34
9
18
40
25
39
26
16
37
17
30
54
11
53
31
55
27
51
32
12
58
35
14
15
38
29
15
48
28
50
33
10
13
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 1
Parts list
49
46
47
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
23
36
Fig. 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
6D02.4
Exploded view
33
30
35
28
22
23
20
23
59
32
61
31
34
29
9
24
25
4
7
27
3
10
26
2
11
1
13
12
53
18
48
49
44
41
46
43
47
42
56
37
54
39
50
58
38
51
40
34
55
Fig. 1
57
52
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
6D02.5
A . Removing and refitting the carriers

Left-hand carrier
Note: It is possible to carry out maintenance on
carrier (38) and seal rings (56) of the differential lock
by removing only the left-hand trumpet housing.
Removal
2. Take off union (44) and raise the transfer tube (42) (Fig.
4).
3. Remove the brake piston (see section 6E01).
4. Remove bolts (39) from the left-hand carrier as shown
in Figure 5. Place two diametrically opposed guide
studs "G" on the housing, their ends resting against
cover (52) of the lock unit.
5. Extract the carrier through the tapped holes and using
two bolts "V" (Fig. 5), take it off and recover cone (54)
and shim(s) (55).
Note: The guide studs "G" hold and centre the
differential assembly (36) in the housing (Fig. 6).
Do not unscrew the guide studs in order not to
throw off centre the assembly and damage the
seal rings (56) during refitting of the carrier.
42
44
Fig. 4
36
52
G
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.6
Refitting
6. Check for the presence of centring bush (40), the
correct positioning of shim(s) (55) and bearing cone
(54).
7. Check that the seal rings (56) are not damaged and
that they turn normally in their grooves. After this
check, remove the seal rings and coat them with
miscible grease, so that they remain at the bottom
of the groove when refitting the carrier.
8. Fit new Orings (34) (37).
9. Slide the carrier onto the guide studs "G" (Fig. 5) and
alternately and uniformly tighten the four bolts (39) to
a torque of 100 - 130 Nm. Remove the guide studs.
10. Position the transfer tube (42) in carrier (38).
11. Screw in and position union (44).
(see section 6E01).
14. Refit the left-hand trumpet housing (see section
Right-hand carrier
Note: The access to the right-hand carrier (27) is
similar to that of the left-hand carrier (38).
Removal
- Take out bolts (26) and place diametrically opposed
guide studs in the housing, their end resting against the
half-housing (23).
- Extract and remove the carriers by inserting the two
bolts "V" through the tapped holes and take it off.
Refitting
- Check for the presence of the centring pin (25) and
Oring (34).
- Tighten uniformly and alternately the four bolts (26) to
a torque of 100 - 130 Nm. Remove the guide studs. Fit
and tighten the other bolts to the same torque.
- Check the oil tightness of seal (34) on carrier (27) (see
section 6E01).
Issue 1
May 2001

B . Removal and refitting the differential unit assembly
6D02.7
36
Preparation for fitting

17. Remove the trumpet housings (see section 6B01,
6B02 or 6B03 depending on the version).
(Fig. 4). Unscrew the ground speed sensor to avoid
interference with the crownwheel.
19. Remove the brake pistons (see section 6E01).20.
Place and tighten sling ref. 3378116M1, (see I) in
assembly with a multidisc differential lock on the
rear axle with a Full Powershift or Heavy Duty
gearbox). Using the sling, hold the differential assembly in the axis of the left and right-hand carriers
(27) (38).
Fig. 7

21. Remove bolts (26) (39) from the differential lock
carriers and fit the guide bolts "G" in accordance with
Figure 5.
Extract and remove the carriers by inserting the two
bolts "V" through the tapped holes as shown in Figure 5.
Recover the cone (54) and shims (55) of carrier (38).
22. Remove the Orings (34).
23. Take out the differential lock assembly (36) from the
centre housing (Fig. 7).
Refitting
unit, it is vital to fit the auxiliary spool valve and lift
control valve return pipe in the housing (45) before
refitting the unit..
In order not to damage the seal rings (56), it is
necessary to correctly align the differential assembly along the axis of the centre housing before
inserting carriers (27) (38).
trumpet housings.
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.8
Assembling the right-hand carrier (27)

the centre housing. Check for the presence of centring bush (25). Lubricate and fit a new Oring (34)
(Fig. 8). Insert the carrier using the four bolts (26)
uniformly and alternately tightened to a torque of 100
- 130 Nm. Tighten the other bolts to the same torque.
25
Assembling the left-hand carrier (38)

26. Slide bearing cone (54) on to tool, ref. 3378117M1
(see I), adapted for the standard differential with
multidisc lock. Using the tool, centre the differential
assembly in the housing by manually turning the
central bolt clockwise until it encounters resistance.
two holes in the centre housing, their ends thrusting
against cover (52) of the lock unit. This method
allows the centring of the differential assembly to be
retained after removing tool ref. 3378117M1, so as
to later provide a correct fitting of the left-hand carrier
(38) without damaging the seal rings (56). Remove
the tool and recover the bearing cone (54).
28. Check for the presence of centring bush (40) and fit
a new Oring (34) on to carrier (38) (Fig. 8).
29. Check that the seal rings (56) have not been damaged and that they turn normally in their grooves. After
this check, remove the seal rings (Fig. 8) and coat
them with miscible grease so that they remain at the
bottom of the groove during refitting of the carrier.
30. Place shim(s) (55) and slide the bearing cone (54) on
carrier (38). Insert the carrier into the housing using
the four bolts (39) uniformly and alternately tightened
to a torque of 100 - 130 Nm. Tighten the other bolts
to the same torque.
31. After fitting the carriers, manually check the rotation
of the differential assembly.
32. Refit the brake pistons (see section 6E01), the
transfer tube (42) and union (44).
Issue 1
May 2001
27
34
56
40
38
34
Fig. 8

Special point
with Loctite 510 or its equivalent, with the offset of the
sensor turned towards the longitudinal axis of the
centre housing as shown in Fig. 14. Tighten the bolts (3)
previously lightly smeared with Loctite 542 to a torque
of 25 - 35 Nm.
6D02.9
Remarks
teeth of the crownwheel of the differential.
Fig. 9
Final operations
33. Refit the trumpet housings (see section 6B01, 6B02
36. Check the correct operation of all controls (mechanical, hydraulic and electronic).
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.10
C . Removing and refitting the multidisc lock
50
52
57
51
48
53
58
49
47
41
46
23).
Removal (Fig. 10)

39. Place the differential unit with the lock turned upwards.
40. Loosen and take out bolts (47).
41. Take off the cover (52), discs (49), intermediate plates (48) and hub (53).
42. Remove bolts (41) and lock unit (46).
43. Gently tap the cover (52) on a wooden block to remove the piston (58). Take off Orings (50) (51).
44. If necessary, drive out cup (57).
On the left-hand carrier (38)
45. Remove the seal rings (56) and Oring (37).
Reassembly
Note: If unit (46), cover (52) and carrier (38) have been
removed, it is mandatory to carry out shimming of
the differential unit (see F) and to check the
backlash between the drive pinion and the
crownwheel (see E).
47. Check that the hydraulic channels in cover (52) are
not obstructed.
48. Lubricate and fit new Orings (50) (51) on piston (58).
49. Insert the piston by tapping around its rim with a
plastic hammer. Check that there are no seal fragments after insertion.
50. Position unit (46). Lightly smear bolts (41) with
Loctite 270 and tighten them to a torque of 130 Nm.
51. Place hub (53). Assemble the intermediate plates
(48) and discs (49) as shown in Figure 10.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 10
6D02.11
52. Position cover (52) fitted with piston (58). Fit bolts
(47) lightly smeared with Loctite 270 and tighten to
53. Manually check that the discs and intermediate
plates are not constrained in any way.
54. Refit the differential unit (see operations 24 to 31) and
the brake pistons (see section 6E01)
Fit and adjust the forward speed sensor lightly smeared
with Loctite 577 (Sensor Sealing or its equivalent).
Refit the transfer tube (42) and union (44).
Final operations
55. Complete the refitting of the various assemblies,
carry out operations 33 to 37.
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.12
D . Removing and refitting the planetary gears and sun gears and disassemblying and reassembling the
crownwheel
46
23
30
29
33
30
61
35
23).
57. Remove the locking system and unit (46) (see C).
Removal
58. Separate the half-housings (23) (Fig.11).
Note: These components both bear the same
number. They must be fitted as pairs.
59. Remove the sun gears (30) fitted with friction bushes
(35) (61), the planetary gears (29), washers (28) and
differential brace (33) (Fig. 11).
60. If necessary, drive cup (32) off the half-housing (23)
and recover the shim(s) (59). Extract and discard
deflector (20).
29
28
Fig. 11
24

The replacement of the crownwheel automatically requires replacement of the drive pinion.
Both parts bear the same number and they must always
be fitted as pairs.
The original factory parts are assembled using rivets.
During repairs, these rivets are replaced by nuts and bolts
and are referenced in the spare parts catalogue.
61. Centre punch each rivet (24) (on toothed side of
crownwheel). Using a 5 mm drill, drill out the rivets
to a depth of 12 mm (Fig. 12). Carry out a second
drilling using a 12 mm drill to the same depth. Drive
out the rivets using an appropriate drift (Fig. 13).
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001
6D02.13

and differential half-housing (23) as well as their nuts
and bolts.
63. Lightly smear the first few threads of the bolts with
Loctite 270 and place them in the crownwheel and
housing.
64. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 150 - 200 Nm.

Special points
- If the friction bushes (35) (61) have been replaced,
insert the new bushes lightly smeared with Loctite 638
or equivalent, using a suitable fixture.
Note: If necessary, insert the deflector (20) and cup

(32) (see operation 70).
65. Refit the planetary gears and sun gears. Carry out
operations 58 and 59 in reverse order.
66. Lightly smear bolts (41) with Loctite 270 or its
equivalent and tighten them to a torque of 130 Nm.
67. Refit the hub, the intermediate plates, discs and
cover (see C).
68. Refit the differential unit (see operations 24 to 31) and
the brake pistons (see section 6E01).
Final operations
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.14
E . Adjusting and checking the backlash

Reminder
The backlash between the crownwheel and drive pinion
ensures reliability of the bevel gear and the correct
operation of the assembly. This clearance must be checked after:
- adjusting the bevel gear distance
- shimming the differential unit.
Disassembly
- Using an appropriate extractor, remove cup (32) and
Pre-adjustment
Fig. 14
- The thickness of the shim(s) E required to obtain the

correct backlash is calculated as follows:
E = Dc + 0.10 mm
E: thickness of shim(s) (59) to be fitted
Dc: crownwheel offset
Remark
- The Dc (example shown: -0.40) engraved on the external diameter of the crownwheel (Fig. 14A) after the
pairing number and letter ( 39 K) may range between 0
and -0.60 mm.
Special point
- When calculating E do not take the negative sign
preceding the Dc into consideration (Fig. 14A).
70. Place the previously selected shim(s) (59) in the bore
of the half-housing (23). Insert the deflector (20) and
cup (32) (Fig. 14A).
59
32
20
39
40
K - 0,
23
Fig. 14A
Issue 1
May 2001
6D02.15
Remarks
- The deflector serves as a guide for centring the shims.
It is inserted using the cup and an appropriate locally
manufactured tool. This method allows the deflector to
rest against the cup both during and after its insertion.
- When the operation is completed, check that the cup is
thrusting on the shim(s) and in contact with the deflector.
71. Refit and shim the differential unit (see B and F).
Checking
- Couple and temporarily fix the intermediate housing to
bolts tightened to a torque of 540 680 Nm.
- Check that the backlash is between 0.15 mm and 0.45
crownwheel.
Important
In this case, select and fit a different thickness of
shim(s).
Carry out the shimming of the differential unit again in
order to obtain the pre-loading of bearings (31) (32) and
(54) (57).
Check a second time the backlash between the drive
- When the final adjustment has been obtained, go on
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.16

3378117 M1

been replaced, carry out shimming of the differential
unit. Check beforehand that the shim(s) (59) used for
the backlash (see E) are fitted in the half-housing
(23) and cup (32).
72. Place the differential assembly previously fitted
with bearing cone (54) in the housing using sling ref.
3378116M1 (see I). Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs into the centre housing. Insert
carrier (27) fitted with a new Oring (34) using four
bolts (26). Remove the guide studs. Complete the
refitting of the other bolts and tighten to a torque of
100 - 130 Nm.
73. Remove bearing cone (54) and shim(s) (55) from
carrier (38).
74. Slide bearing cone (54) on tool, ref. 3378117M1 (see
I), adapted for the standard differential unit with
multidisc lock. Using two bolts, fix the tool onto the
housing (Fig. 15).
Fig. 15
3378117 M1

16 - 17)
76. Using an appropriate depth gauge, measure dimension "B" and determine dimension "C" between bearing cup (54) and the thrust face of the carrier (38) on
the housing (Fig. 17):
C = B 10 mm
(10 mm is the thickness of tool, ref. 3378117M1).
Fig. 16
38
57
C
B
54
3378117 M1
45
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2001

Dimension to be measured on carrier (38) (Fig. 18)
77. Measure dimension "Y" using an appropriate depth
gauge and rule.
78. Calculate distance "E" between the thrust faces of
bearing cup (54) and carrier (38):
E=CY
Fill in space "E" with a thickness of shims (55).
79. In space "E", add additional shims between 0.05 mm
and 0.15 mm, so as to obtain a P2 (Fig. 19):
P2 = 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm
Final operations
54
6D02.17
38
45
80. Remove the tool and bearing cup (54).

81. On carrier (38), place the shims determined in operation 79. Centre the differential assembly, carry out
operations 26 and 27. Insert the carrier, carry out
Fig. 18
P2 = 0,05/0,15 mm
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.18

pinion
18
6H01).
Free the ratchet of the Park Lock transmission lock
(if fitted) (see section 6F01).
assembly.
3378119M1
3378118M1
Fig. 20

87. Release and immobilise nut (18) using wrench, ref.
3378118M1 (see I). Place special socket ref.
(Fig. 20) and turn it clockwise.
88. Remove bearing cone (1), shims (3) and thrust washer (4).
bearing carrier (13). In their place screw two guide
studs "G" (Fig. 21) into the tapped holes. Remove the
other bolts.
90. Extract carrier (13) using two bolts "V" of sufficient
(12) and 4 WD pinion (17) (if fitted). Visually note the
position of the components.
section 6C01).
93. Remove the discs (14), the intermediate plates (6)
and the handbrake mechanism (16) (see section
6C01).
cone (7) from the drive pinion.
Issue 1
May 2001
11
G
13
V
11
Fig. 21
6D02.19

crownwheel), the taper roller bearings (7) (10) (1) (2),
bearing carrier (13), thrust washer (4) and intermediate housing (19) have been replaced, it is essential
to adjust the position of the drive pinion (bevel
distance) and then shim the taper roller bearings see
H).
96. If bearing cone (7) has been disassembled, insert
transmission oil.
(see section 6C01).
100. Position and slide shims (12) on to the guide studs.
the guide studs. Turn the drive pinion so as to
position.
of 100 - 130 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.20

270 or its equivalent and immobilise it using wrench,
ref. 3378118M1. Using socket, ref. 3378119M1,
turn the drive pinion anti clockwise and tighten it to
appropriate tool.
section 6C01).
Final operations
assembly.
Lock transmission (if fitted). Refit the creeper unit
(if fitted). Adjust the fork (see section 6H01).
110. Re-couple the tractor between the intermediate
housing and the centre housing (see section 2D01).
Note: If the crownwheel and drive pinion have
been replaced, check the backlash (see E).
Issue 1
May 2001

H . Adjusting and shimming the drive
pinion
Reminder: It is essential to adjust the position of the
drive pinion before carrying out shimming of the
taper roller bearings (7) (10) and (1) (2). Under no
circumstances should this adjustment be modified
without readjusting the shimming of the drive pinion bearings.
6D02.21

bearing cone (1) and nut (18)
wrench ref. 3378118M1 and socket, ref. 3378119M1
(Figs. 27 - 28, I) taking care to correctly position
the torque wrench.
the bearing cones in the cups. Check again the
correct pre-tightening of nut (18).
115. Using a press, insert cup (10) thrust against bearing
carrier (13). Using a suitable fixture, insert cup (2)
to thrust against housing (19). Screw in two diametrically opposed guide studs into the tapped bolt
holes (11). Fit the carrier alone without shims (12).
Alternatively and progressively, tighten the four
bolts (11) to a torque of 100 - 130 Nm.
Check that carrier (13) is in contact with the
intermediate housing (19).
116. Using a press and an appropriate fixture, insert
transmission oil.
Z
X
19
18
39 K
22
39 K
11
13
E
19
Issue 1
12
Fig. 22
May 2001

6D02.22
Adjusting the position of the drive pinion

E : Is the thickness of shims (12) to be fitted, tolerance
0.05 mm.
Z : Is the nominal dimension between the rear face of
Note: This dimension is stamped inside the housing
in the horizontal axis of the differential unit (Fig. 22A).
Y : Is the nominal dimension of the positioning of the
drive pinion = 139.00
X : Is the dimension measured between the end of the
housing (Fig. 23).
matched pairs with a number and letter engraved on
each component.
Fig. 22A
Fig. 23
Procedure (Operations 121 and 122)

121. Using a depth gauge, measure dimension "X" (Fig.
23).
formula to determine "E", the thickness of the
shim(s) (12) to be fitted in order to correctly position
the drive pinion.
X
Checks
- Temporarily refit the assembly fitted with the previously determined shims and measure dimension "X"
again. Check that X + Y does in fact equal Z.
Carry out operations 97 to 103.
Reminder
- Carry out shimming of the drive pinion taper roller
bearings.
Issue 1
May 2001
6D02.23

shimming.
against shoulder "E" of the drive pinion (Fig.
24).
127. Using wrench, ref. 3378118M1and socket, ref.
of 30 - 50 Nm.
of the pinion (Fig. 24).
130. With the assistance of another operator, set the dial
gauge to zero.
(Fig. 24):
P1 = 0.04 mm to 0.10 mm
appropriate tool.
18
E
P1 =
0,04 / 0,10 mm
18
10
11
2
13
12
Fig. 24
Issue 1
May 2001

6D02.24
I . Service tools
(Fig. 27)
28).
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
Fig. 27
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 28
6D03.1
6D03 Differential with hypoid bevel gear and

multidisc lock
Contents
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the carriers _______________________
B.
Removing and refitting the differential unit assembly ______
C.
Removing and refitting the multidisc lock ________________
10
D.
Removing and refitting the planetary gears and sun

crownwheel ____________________________________________
11
E.
Adjusting and checking the multidisc ____________________
13
F.
15
G.
17
H.
Adjusting and shimming the drive pinion _________________
21
I.
Service tools ___________________________________________
25
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.2

Backlash of the drive pinion and the crownwheel is
obtained by using shims (29) inserted between cup (28)
and the differential half-housing (21).
General
Reminder
The 8260 to 8280 tractors is equipped with a centre
housing identical to that mounted on the 8210, 8220,
8240 and 8250 tractors. They are fitted with an AG250
Full Powershift gearbox and have a wide intermediate
housing in which the axial position of the drive pinion has
been redesigned for the fitting of a hypoid bevel gear.
Construction
The bevel gear, moved in rotation by the gearbox output
shaft, drives the rear axle.
cups (2) (10) are likewise force fitted into the intermediate housing (19) and bearing support (13). The bearing
the shims (3) required for shimming.
The crownwheel is fastened to the differential housing by
bolts. The differential assembly rotates on two taper
roller bearings supported by two lateral carriers centred
by bushes (23) and fixed by bolts to the housing.
holding four planetary gears (31) and two sun gears (32)
(33). The left-hand side sun gear also serves as the hub
for the differential lock discs (56). The planetary gears
turn on four half shafts (35) housed in the unit and the
differential yoke (34). They are held in place by pins and
bolts.
The lubrication of the planetary gears is carried out by
axial and radial channels drilled in the half shafts.
The sun gears, left-hand carrier (40), cover (50) and the
differential yoke contain drilled lubrication channels allowing transmission oil to reach bushes (36) (37), discs
(56) and the differential lock system. The drive pinion,
which bears the 4 WD drive pinion (17), is located in the
intermediate housing. The adjustment of its position is
carried out by shims (12) fitted between the bearing
carrier (13) and the housing. The pre-loading of the
bearings is obtained by shim(s) (3) fitted between the
bearing cone (1) and the thrust washer (4). The preloading via shimming of the differential assembly is
carried out via shim(s) (48) placed between bearing cone
(46) and the left-hand carrier (40).
Issue 1
May 2001
Differential lock
The multidisc lock system comprises:
- a unit (21) housing the discs (56) and intermediate
plates (55).
- a hub (33) integral via splines with the left-hand trumpet
input sun gear.
- a cover (50) made up by piston assembly (52) and
supported by taper roller bearings (46) (47).
The piston chamber lodged in the cover communicates
with a channel in the left-hand carrier (40), allowing (17
bar) low pressure to act upon the piston. Two seal rings
(49) ensure the oil tightness of the circuit.
Operation
Clutched position
When the differential lock solenoid valve is activated, the
pressure flows through the channels in left-hand carrier
(40) and cover (50) on unit (21) and enters piston chamber
(52). The piston compresses the intermediate plates (55)
and discs (56) integral respectively via stops and splines
in lock unit (21) and hub (33).
In this clutched position, the input sun gears of the righthand and left-hand trumpets turn at the same speeds.
Declutched position
When the pressure is cut, the piston returns, the discs
and intermediate plates are no longer compressed and
allow the sun gears and planetary gears to carry out their
differential function.
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Thrust washer
Circlip
Intermediate plates (handbrake)
Bearing cone
Bolt
Drive pinion
Bearing cup
Bolt
Shim(s)
Bearing carrier
Discs
Handbrake unit
Mechanism
4 WD drive pinion
Nut
Crownwheel
Unit
Bolts
Centring bushes
Bolts
Right-hand carrier
Orings
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Spherical washer
Planetary gear
Right sun gear
Left sun gear
Differential yoke
Planetary gear half shafts
Shouldered bush
Shouldered bush
Needle bearings
Bolt
Left-hand carrier
Transfer tube
Oring
Oring
Union
Centre housing
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Seal rings
Cover
Bolt
Piston
Overall view
A
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
6D03.3
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
58
Oring
Oring
Intermediate plates (differential lock)
Discs
Lubricating pipe
Rivet
Rivet
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
50
29
21
59
32
23
37
36
51
46
48
Fig. 3
49
20
45
50
19
14
12
44
43
41
22
51
21
26
26
23
23
24
24
42
29
47
32
57
46
13
11
36
A
49
34
37
27
48
28
18
16
17
10
25
54
8
6
31
40
30
15
35
52
53
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
56
55
33
39
38
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 3
6D03.4
Exploded view
34
35
37
31
30
32
36
21
33
29
28
27
30
26
25
31
24
39
9
20
38
12
4
3
2
7
22
10
23
18
8
13
11
33
56
55
42
44
40
26
43
49
48
46
41
47
50
24
53
52
23
51
54
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
May 2001
6D03.5
A . Removing and refitting the carriers

Left-hand carrier
Note: It is possible to carry out maintenance on
carrier (40) and seal rings (49) of the differential lock
by removing only the left-hand trumpet housing.
Removal
6B04).
2. Take off union (44) (Fig. 4) and raise the transfer tube
(41) (Fig. 5).
3. Remove the brake piston (see section 6E01)
4. Remove bolts (24) on from the left-hand carrier. Place
two diametrically opposed guide studs "G" on the
housing as shown in Figure 6, their ends pushing
against cover (50) of the lock unit.
5. Extract the carrier by inserting two bolts "V" through
the tapped holes (Fig. 6); take it off and recover cone
(46) and shim(s) (48).
Note: The guide studs "G" hold and centre the
differential assembly in the housing (Fig. 7). Do
not unscrew the guide studs. This may throw off
centre the assembly and damage the seal rings
(49) during refitting of the carrier.
44
Fig. 4
41
Fig. 5
50
V
50
G
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.6
Refitting
6. Check for the presence of centring bush (23) on the
housing, the shim(s) (48) and bearing cone (46).
7. Check that the seal rings (49) are not damaged and
that they turn normally in their grooves. After this
check, remove the seal rings and coat them with
miscible grease, so that they remain at the bottom
of the groove during refitting of the carrier.
8. Fit new Orings (26) (42).
9. Slide the carrier onto the guide studs"G" (Fig. 6) and
alternately and uniformly tighten the four bolts (24) to
a torque of 100 - 130 Nm. Remove the guide studs.
10. Position the transfer tube (41) in carrier (40).
11. Screw in and position union (44).
(see section 6E01).
14. Refit the left-hand trumpet housing (see section
6B04).
Right-hand carrier
Note: The access to the right-hand carrier (25) is
similar to that of the left-hand carrier (40).
Removal
- Take out bolts (24) and place diametrically opposed
guide studs "G" in the housing, their ends thrust against
the half-housing (21).
- Extract the carrier by inserting two bolts "V" through the
tapped holes and remove it.
Refitting
- Check for the presence of the centring pin (23) on the
housing and Oring (26).
- Tighten uniformly and alternately the four bolts (24) to
a torque of 100 - 130 Nm. Remove the guide studs. Fit
and tighten the other bolts to the same torque.
- Check the oil tightness of seal (26) on carrier (25) (see
section 6E01).
Issue 1
May 2001
6D03.7
B . Removing and refitting the differential unit assembly

Preparation for fitting
17. Remove the trumpet housings (see section 6B04).
(Fig. 5). Unscrew the ground speed sensor to avoid
interference with the crownwheel.
19. Remove the brake pistons (see section 6E01).
20. Place and tighten sling ref. 3378116M1, (see I) in
assembly with a multidisc differential lock on the
rear axle with an AG250 Full Powershift gearbox).
Using the sling, hold the differential assembly in the
axis of the left and right-hand carriers (25) (40).
Fig. 8

21. Remove bolts (24) from the carriers and fit the guide
bolts "G" in accordance with Figure 6.
Extract and remove the carriers by inserting two bolts "V"
through the tapped holes as shown in Figure 6.
Recover the cone (46) and shims (48) from carrier
(40).
22. Remove the Orings (26).
23. Take out the differential assembly from the centre
housing (Fig. 8).
Refitting
unit, it is essential to fit the auxiliary spool valve and
lift control valve return pipe in the housing (45)
before refitting the unit.
In order not to damage the seal rings (49), it is
necessary to correctly align the differential assembly along the axis of the centre housing before
inserting carriers (25) (40).
trumpet housings.
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.8
Assembling the right-hand carrier (25)

the centre housing. Check for the presence of centring bush (23). Lubricate and fit a new Oring (26)
(Fig. 9). Insert the carrier (25) using the four bolts (24)
uniformly and alternately tightened to a torque of 100
130 Nm. Tighten the other bolts to the same torque.
25
23
Assembling the left-hand carrier (40)

26. Slide bearing cone (46) on to tool, ref. 3378117M1
(see I), adapted for the differential with hypoid
bevel gear and multidisc lock. Using the tool, centre
the differential assembly in the housing by manually
turning the central bolt clockwise until it encounters
resistance.
two holes in the centre housing, their ends thrusting
against cover (50) of the differential lock. This method
allows the centring of the differential assembly to be
retained after removal of tool ref. 3378117M1, in
order to later provide a correct fitting of the left-hand
carrier (40) without damaging the seal rings (49).
Remove the tool and recover the bearing cone (46).
28. Check for the presence of centring bush (23) in the
housing and fit a new Oring (26) on to carrier (40)
(Fig. 10).
29. Check that the seal rings (49) have not been damaged and that they turn normally in their grooves.
After this check, remove the seal rings (Fig. 10) and
coat them with miscible grease so that they remain
at the bottom of the groove during refitting of the
carrier.
30. Place shim(s) (48) and slide the bearing cone (46) on
carrier (40).
31. Insert the carrier into the housing using the four bolts
(24) uniformly and alternately tightened to a torque of
100 - 130 Nm. Tighten the other bolts to the same
torque.
Issue 1
May 2001
26
Fig. 9
49
40
23
26
Fig. 10
6D03.9
32. After fitting the carriers, manually check the rotation

of the differential assembly.
33. Refit the brake pistons (see section 6E01).
Special points
with Loctite 510, with the offset of the sensor turned
towards the longitudinal axis of the centre housing as
shown in Fig. 11.
- Tighten the bolts (3) previously lightly smeared with
Loctite 542 to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
Remarks
teeth of the crownwheel of the differential.
34. Refit transfer tube (41) and union (44).
Fig. 11
Final operations
35. Refit the trumpet housings (see section 6B04).
38. Check the correct operation of all controls (mechanical, hydraulic and electronic).
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.10
C . Removing and refitting the multidisc lock
47
51
23).
Removal (Fig. 12)

41. Place the differential unit with the lock turned upwards.
42. Loosen and take out bolts (51).
43. Take off the cover (50).
44. Separate the discs (56) and intermediate plates (55)
from the left-hand sun gear (33).
45. Gently tap the cover (50) on a wooden block to
remove the piston (52). Remove Orings (53) (54).
46. If necessary, drive out cup (47).
50
52
53
54
56
33
55
On the left-hand carrier (40)

47. Remove the seal rings (49) and Oring (42).
Reassembly
Note: If unit (21), cover (50) and carrier (40) have been
replaced, it is mandatory to carry out shimming of
the differential unit (see F) and to check the
backlash between the drive pinion and the
crownwheel (see E).
49. Check that the hydraulic channel in cover (50) is not
obstructed.
50. Lubricate and fit new Orings (53) (54) on piston (52).
51. Insert the piston by tapping around its rim with a
plastic hammer.
52. Check that there are no seal fragments after insertion.
53. Assemble the intermediate plates (55) and discs
(56) as shown in the overall view.
54. Position cover (50) fitted with piston (52). Fit bolts
(51) lightly smeared with Loctite 270 and tighten to
55. Manually check that the discs and intermediate
plates are not constrained in any way.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 12
56. Refit the differential unit assembly (see operations
24 to 31) and the brake pistons (see section 6E01)
57. Adjust the forward speed sensor (see special points
and remarks, B). Refit the transfer tube (41) and
union (44).
Final operation
58. Complete the refitting of the various assemblies,
6D03.11
D . Removing and refitting the planetary gears and sun gears and disassembling and reassembling the
crownwheel
34
21
39
30
38
33
35
59. Remove the differential unit assembly (see operations 15 to 23).

60. Remove the locking system (see C).
Removal
61. Remove the left-hand sun gear (33).
62. To remove the half shafts (35), it is necessary to
disassemble the crownwheel (see below).
64. Take out pins (38) from unit (21).
65. Push on a half shaft in the direction of the arrow to
drive out the opposite half shaft. Repeat the operation for the remaining half shafts. Recover the
spherical washers (30). Remove the planetary gears
(31).
66. Remove the differential yoke and the right-hand sun
gear (32).
67. If necessary, drive cup (28) off the unit (21) and
recover the shim(s) (29).
31
34
31
36
32
30
28
29
39
38
35

The replacement of the crownwheel automatically requires replacement of the drive pinion.
Both parts bear the same number and they must always
be fitted as pairs.
68. Remove bolts (22) (Fig. 14).
39
21
Fig. 13

Important
- During repairs, use the bolts referenced in the spare
parts catalogue.
and unit (21) as well as bolts (22).
the tapped holes of the crownwheel. Assemble the
crownwheel on the unit.
71. Smear the first few threads of the bolts with Loctite
270 and screw them into the crownwheel. Remove
the guide studs.
72. Tighten and lock the nuts at a torque of 240 - 320 Nm.
22
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.12

Note: If necessary, place shim(s) (29) and insert cup
(28) in unit (21).
Special points
- If replacement of the friction bushes (36) (37) is necessary, insert the new bushes lightly smeared with
Loctite 638 using a suitable fixture.
73. Refit the right-hand sun gear (32) in the friction bush
(36). Refit the differential yoke (34) as shown in the
overall view.
74. Check that the central channels and radial drilled
passages in the half shafts (35) are not obstructed.
75. Assemble planetary gears (31), friction washers (30)
and the half shafts, with the holes turned towards
bolt (39) as shown in the overall view.
76. Position the shafts. Fit and tighten bolts (39) lightly
smeared with Loctite 270 and tighten them to a
77. Manually check the rotation of the planetary gears
and the right-hand sun gear (32).
78. Refit the crownwheel (see D).
Refit the intermediate plates, discs and cover (see
C).
Refit the differential unit assembly (see operations
24 to 31) and the brake pistons (see section 6E01).
79. Fit and adjust the forward speed sensor (see special
points and remarks, B). Refit the transfer tube (41)
and union (44).
Final operation
Issue 1
May 2001

E . Adjusting and checking the multidisc
Note: The backlash between the crownwheel and
drive pinion ensures reliability of the bevel gear and
the correct operation of the assembly.
This backlash must be checked after:
- adjusting the bevel gear distance
- shimming the differential unit.
6D03.13
Special point
When calculating E do not take the negative sign
preceding the Dc into consideration (Fig. 15).
81. Place the previously selected shim(s) in the bore of
the unit (21). Insert bearing cup (28) and check that
it is in contact with the shims.
82. Refit and shim the differential unit (see B and F
respectively).
Disassembly
Using an appropriate extractor, remove cup (28).
Pre-adjustment
The thickness of the shim(s) "E" required to obtain the
correct backlash is calculated as follows:
E = Dc + 0.10 mm
where:
E : thickness of shim(s) (29) to be fitted
Dc : crownwheel offset
Remark
- The Dc (example shown: -0.10) engraved on the external diameter of the crownwheel (Fig. 15) after the
pairing number and letter (31 A) may range between 0
and -0.60 mm.
29
28
21
31
10
A - 0,
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.14
Checks
- Couple and temporarily fix the intermediate housing to
bolts tightened to a torque of 540 680 Nm.
- Check that the multidisc is between 0.15 mm and 0.45
crownwheel.
- In this case, select and fit a different thickness of
shim(s). Carry out the shimming of the differential unit
again in order to obtain the pre-loading of bearings (27)
(28) and (46) (47).
- Check a second time the backlash between the drive
83. When the final adjustment has been obtained, go on
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 16

6D03.15
3378117M1

been replaced, carry out shimming of the differential
unit.
Check beforehand that the shim(s) (29) used for
providing the multidisc (see E) are fitted between
unit (21) and cup (28).
84. Place the differential assembly in the housing using
sling ref. 3378116M1 (see I). Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs into the centre housing.
Insert carrier (25) fitted with a new Oring (26) using
four bolts (24). Remove the guide studs. Complete
the refitting of the other bolts and tighten to a torque
of 100 - 130 Nm.
85. Remove bearing cone (46) and shim(s) (48) from
carrier (40).
86. Slide bearing cone (46) on tool, ref. 3378117M1 (see
I), adapted for the hypoid differential unit with
multidisc lock. Using two bolts, fix the tool onto the
housing (Fig. 17).
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.16

18 - 19)
88. Using an appropriate depth gauge, measure dimension "B" at two opposed points (work out average of
the two measurements) and determine dimension
"C" between bearing cup (46) and the thrust face of
the carrier (40) on the housing (Fig. 18):
C = B 10 mm
(10 mm is the thickness of tool, ref. 3378117M1).
40
B
3378117M1
45
46
47
Fig. 18
3378117M1
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2001

Dimension to be measured on carrier (40) (Fig. 20)
89. Measure dimension "Y" using an appropriate depth
gauge and rule.
90. Calculate distance "E" between the thrust faces of
bearing cup (46) and carrier (40):
E=CY
Fill in space "E" with a thickness of shims (48).
91. In space "E", add additional shims between 0.05 mm
and 0.15 mm, in order to obtain P2 (Fig. 21):
P2 = 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm
45
6D03.17
40
46
Final operations
92. Remove the tool and bearing cup (46).
93. On carrier (40), place the shims determined in
operation 91. Centre the differential assembly, carry
out operations 26 and 27. Insert the carrier, carry out
Fig. 20
46

pinion
6H01).
96. Free the ratchet of the Park Lock transmission lock
(if fitted) (see section 6F01).
assembly.
40
P2 = 0,05 / 0,15 mm
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.18

100. Remove bolt (1). Take off pipe (57) located at the
taper end of the drive pinion (Fig. 22).
101. Release and immobilise nut (18) using wrench, ref.
3378118M1 (see I). Place special socket, ref.
(Fig. 23) and turn clockwise.
102. Remove bearing cone (1), shims (3) and thrust
washer (4).
bearing carrier (13). In their place, screw two guide
studs "G" (Fig. 24) into the tapped holes. Finishing
removing the other bolts.
104. Extract carrier (13) using two bolts "V" of sufficient
(12) and 4 WD pinion (17). Visually note the position
of the components.
section 6C01).
107. Remove the discs (14), the intermediate plates (6)
and handbrake mechanism (16) (see section 6C01).
cone (7) on the drive pinion.
57
Fig. 22
18
3378118M1
3378119M1
Fig. 23
11
11
V
G
Fig. 24
Issue 1
May 2001
6D03.19

crownwheel), taper roller bearings (7) (10) (1) (2),
bearing carrier (13), thrust washer (4) and intermediate housing (19) have been replaced, it is essential to
adjust the position of the drive pinion (bevel distance) and then shim the taper roller bearings (see
H).
110. If bearing cone (7) has been disassembled, insert
transmission oil.
(see section 6C01).
114. Position and slide shims (12) on to the guide studs.
the guide studs. Turn the drive pinion in order to
position.
of 100 - 130 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.20

270 (or its equivalent) and immobilise it using
wrench, ref. 3378118M1 (Fig. 25). Using socket,
ref. 3378119M1 (Fig. 25), turn the drive pinion anti
clockwise and tighten it to a torque of 200 - 250 Nm.
appropriate tool.
section 6C01).
18
337811
8M1
3378119M1
Fig. 25
Final operations
assembly.
Lock transmission.
124. Refit the creeper unit (if fitted). Adjust the fork (see
section 6H01).
125. Couple the tractor between the intermediate housing and the centre housing (see section 2D01).
Note: If replacement of the crownwheel and
drive pinion has been carried out, check the
backlash (see E).
Issue 1
May 2001
6D03.21
H . Adjusting the position and shimming the drive pinion

Reminder
- It is essential to adjust the position of the drive pinion
before carrying out shimming of the taper roller bearings
(7) (10) and (1) (2). Under no circumstances should this
adjustment be modified without readjusting the shimming of the drive pinion bearings.
130. Using a press, insert cup (10) thrust against bearing
carrier (13).
Using a suitable fixture, insert cup (2) to thrust
against housing (19). Screw in two diametrically
opposed guide studs into the tapped holes (11). Fit
the carrier alone without shims (12). Alternatively
and progressively, tighten the four bolts (11) to a
torque of 100 -130 Nm. Check that carrier (13) is in
contact with the intermediate housing (19).
transmission oil.
bearing cone (1) and nut (18).
wrench, ref. 3378118M1 and socket, ref.
3378119M1 (Figs. 33 - 34, I) taking care to correctly position the torque wrench.
the bearing cones in the cups. Check the correct
pre-tightening of nut (18) again.
Issue 2
1
May 2002
2001
6D03.22
Adjusting the drive pinion position

E : Is the thickness of shims (12) to be fitted, tolerance
0.05 mm.
Z : Is the nominal dimension between the rear face of
Note: This dimension is stamped inside the
housing in the horizontal axis of the differential
unit (Fig. 27).
Y : Is the nominal dimension of the positioning of the
drive pinion = 139.00
X : Is the dimension measured between the end of the
housing (Fig. 28).
matched pairs and have a number and letter
engraved on each component.
19
X
Y
31 A
20
18
31 A
13
11
19
E
12
Fig. 26
Issue 1
May 2001
6D03.23
Procedure (Operations 136 and 137)

136. Using a depth gauge, measure dimension "X" (Fig.
28).
formula to determine "E", the thickness of the
shim(s) (12) to be fitted in order to correctly position
the drive pinion.
Checks
- Temporarily reassemble the assembly fitted with
the previously determined shims and measure
dimension "X" again.
- Check that X + Y does in fact equal Z.
Reminder
- Carry out shimming of the drive pinion taper roller
bearings.
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
Issue 1
May 2001

6D03.24

shimming.
against shoulder E of the drive pinion (Fig. 29).
142. Using wrench, ref. 3378118M1 and socket, ref.
of 30 - 50 Nm.
of the pinion (Figs. 29 - 30).
145. With the assistance of another operator, set the dial
gauge to zero.
(Fig. 29):
P1 = 0.04 mm to 0.10 mm
appropriate tool.
18
E
P1 =
0,04 / 0,10 mm
18
10
11
2
13
12
Fig. 29
Fig. 30
Issue 1
May 2001
6D03.25
I . Service tools
(Fig. 33)
34).
Fig. 31
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Fig. 34
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Brake pistons and seals
6E01
6E01.1
Brake pistons and seals
Contents
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Disassembly ____________________________________________
B.
Reassembly ____________________________________________
C.
Service tools ___________________________________________
11
Issue 1
May 2001

6E01.2

Parts list
General
The brake pistons (2) are housed in two cavities formed
by the centre housing and the differential carrier, concentric with the thrust face of each trumpet housing. The
brake pistons are guided by three locating pins (6) force
fitted into the centre housing and have an annular face
that is submitted to pressure from the master cylinder.
The other face has a larger surface area and acts upon a
disc that is integral via splines with the input sun gear of
the trumpet housing and on the wall of a compartment
that also serves as the brake plate. This compartment is
centred by locating pins that are force fitted into the
trumpet housing which may or not be oil tight depending
on the type of assembly.
The oil tightness of the pistons is provided by Orings
fitted into the grooves of the centre housing and the
differential carriers. Two other seals placed in the angle
of each carrier stop the pressure in the piston chamber
from communicating with the interior of the centre
housing.
The shape of the pistons differs according to the options
and the type of trumpet housing.
Each piston is controlled by a master cylinder the oil level
of which is maintained by a residual oil flow from the
lubricating circuit.
When the brake is released, a minimum clearance is
provided between the piston and the disc. The brakes are
self-adjusting and maintain a constant brake pedal position.
When they are not in use, the discs are lubricated by an
oil flow from the lubricating circuit on the right-hand
cover. This oil also serves to cool the discs when they are
used.
Remark
On tractors fitted with trumpet housings with double
drive unit, the brake pistons (2) are fitted in the same
cylinders as previously mentioned. They are guided by
three stop pins (39) (41) mounted free in the housing. Pin
(39) fitted in the upper part of the housing has a drilled
central port to allow pressure venting from the trumpet
housing into the rear axle and breather pipe. The pistons
act upon a two-disc system (35) running in an oil bath and
integral via splines with hub (32) and the trumpet housing
input shaft. The discs are separated by an intermediate
plate (38) that is guided by the previously mentioned
pins.
During braking, the double-disc system is thrust against
the centre brake plate by pin (7) on the centre housing.
Issue 1
May 2001
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(32)
(35)
(38)
(39)
(41)
Centre housing
Piston
Oring
Oring
Oring
Stop pin
Pin
Hub
Disc(s)
Intermediate plate
Stop pin (drilled)
Stop pin
Identification of ports
O : Disc lubricating port
P : Pressure from master cylinders
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
6E01.3
Overall view
Assembly with standard trumpet housing
Assembly with sealed compartment trumpet housing
P
1
35
3
2
4
35
2
32
4
6
6
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Issue 1
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 1
May 2001
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 2

6E01.4
Overall view
Assembly with trumpet housing fitted with composite drive unit
Assembly with trumpet housing fitted with double drive unit
1
3
4
4
35
35
32
32
38
5
5
41
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Parts list
Fig. 3
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
May 2001
Fig. 3
Fig. 5
Fig. 4
6E01.5
Exploded view
Single disc
3
4
2
6
35
39
Double disc
3
4
2
41
32
35
38
35
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
May 2001

6E01.6
A . Disassembly
1. Remove the trumpet housing(s) concerned (see section 6B01, 6B02, 6B03 or 6B04 depending on the
version).
2. Remove the master cylinder brake supply pipe from
the union above the centre housing. Progressively
drive out piston (2) from housing (1) using a compressed air jet connected to the union (3) (Fig. 6).
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

3. Remove the Orings (3) (4) fitted on the housing and
differential carriers respectively (Fig. 7).
Remarks
- The seals (3) (4) not being mounted on the brake
piston, their movement and wear is limited.
- The Orings (5) fitted between the differential carriers
and the centre housing (Fig. 1 - 4) ensure the oil tightness of the piston chambers.
4. If necessary, remove the differential carrier(s) to
replace the previously mentioned Orings (see section
6D01, 6D02 or 6D03 depending on the version).
6E01.7
Reminder
- If the spacer acting as the brake plate has to be replaced, consult the section concerning the relevant trumpet housing type (6B01, 6B02, 6B03 or 6B04).
3
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

6E01.8
B . Reassembly
found to be defective.
6. If removed, refit the differential carrier(s) with a new
seal (see section 6D01, 6D02, or 6D03 depending on
the version).
V
1
Checks before reassembly

- Remove the Orings (3) (4) (Fig. 9) and place the piston
in the housing.
- Check that the piston slides freely in its bore and that
there are no stiff spots on stop pins (6) (39) or (41) (depending on the version) (Fig. 8 and 9).
6
V
6
V
39
41
41
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001

7. When the check is completed, definitively fit the new
seals previously lubricated with transmission oil (Fig.
7) and position the piston on the stop pins (Fig. 8), turning the more numerous lubricating ports upwards.
Reminder
- To avoid damaging the seals, place the piston in its
bore using a locally manufactured tool (see C) and
with the aid of two bolts "V" of a suitable length that
are alternatively and progressively tightened (Fig. 8).
6E01.9
6
6
39
41
41
3
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001

6E01.10
8. Remove the tool. If necessary, complete the fitting

by alternatively tapping on the face of the piston
using a plastic hammer. Check that there are no
fragments of Orings after fitting.
Hydraulic test (Fig. 10)

Positioning of seals
Remarks
- Use a pressure gauge that has previously been checked
for pressure tightness and fit the piston retainer tool
onto the housing (see C and Fig. 10).
- Using compressed air, pressurize the circuit to approximately 5 bar.
- Disconnect the pressure gauge and push the piston
back using a plastic hammer.
- Repeat the above operation several times.
Tests
- Pressurize the circuit again to a pressure of approximately 0.3 bar.
- Close the pressure relief-valve.
- Over a period of one minute, no drop in pressure should
be seen on the pressure gauge.
- After the test, remove the pressure gauge and take off
the retainer tool.
3
Final operations
9. Refit the trumpet housing(s) (see section 6B01,
10. Purge the main brake system (see section 9I01).
11. Carry out a road test of the brake circuit.
- trumpet housing seals (silicone)
- brake lubricating pipes
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 10
6E01.11
C . Service tools
340
- Brake piston fitting tool (Fig. 11)

a : rubber or plastic
215
30
Locally manufactured tools
2 13
20
2 mini
a
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Park lock
6F01
6F01.1
Park lock
Contents
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Unlocking the system and positioning the special bolt _____
B.
Removing and refitting the sleeve ________________________
C.
Disassembling the control _______________________________
D.
Reassembling the control ________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

6F01.2
General
The Park lock system, fitted inside the centre housing,
comprises a ratchet (17) and a toothed sleeved (15),
integral via splines with the drive pinion and the lower
shaft connected to the gearbox.
This system is activated by a control unit (3) attached to
the right-hand side of the housing and through a springloaded control rod.
The Park lock is only fitted to transmissions equipped
with a Full Powershift gearbox.
Operation
Engaged position (speed control in position P)
- When the tractor is halted with the engine running, the
Park lock provides a mechanical locking of the transmission. In the engaged position, the solenoid valve (7)
is not activated and the system functions in a purely
mechanical manner.
- Spring (10) pushes piston (1) towards unit (3). The
control rod (11) screwed into the piston drives the links
(13) that engage ratchet (17) in the toothed sleeve (15),
thus locking the lower transmission shaftline.
- With the engine halted, the Park lock is engaged automatically.
Disengaged position (hydraulic activation)
- When the speed control is placed in the P or N position,
the electronic unit (TC) controls solenoid valve (7) that
supplies control unit (3) which disengages the Park
lock. The pressure in the piston chamber (1), acting
upon the front face of the piston, compresses spring
(10) and frees ratchet (17) from the toothed sleeve (15).
- The electronic unit (TC) is informed through the position
of switch (19) (see section 11).
Issue 1
May 2001
Overall view
Parts list
Key to letters
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(23)
D : Disengaged position
E : Engaged position
Piston
Oring
Control unit
Bolt
Oring
Special bolt
Solenoid valve
Oring
Nut
Spring
Control rod
Split pin bolt
Links
Toothed sleeve
Pin and washer
Ratchet
Seal(s)
Switch
Oring
Non-return valve
6F01.3
23
6
10
11
13
15
12
17
16
18
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
19
E
F
D
Version without Park lock

(24) Plug
(25) Plug
(26) Threaded plug
2
20
24
18
25
26
View along F
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
6F01.4
Exploded view
19
18
16
17
16
12
13
13
11
10
1
8
23
6
5
20
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
6F01.5
A . Unlocking the system and positioning the special bolt

Special point
15
- The Park lock system must be unlocked before carrying

out certain maintenance operations on the tractor or
when the hydraulic or electronic circuits of the Park lock
system fail.
Unlocking
17
1. Take off nut (9) and turn the special bolt (6) (Fig. 3)
clockwise until piston (1) comes into contact with the
shoulder of the housing.
Action obtained
- During this operation, the control rod (11) is moved to
the right and compresses the spring (10) freeing ratchet
(17) from the toothed sleeve (15) (Figs. 3 - 4).
10
11
Fig. 4
Test
3. Check the correct operation of the transmission lock.
Restoring the initial position of the special

bolt
Reminder
- After any intervention on the special bolt (6), it is
important to restore it in its initial position, i.e. completely unscrewed and locked at a torque of 40 - 50 Nm
in order to ensure both the correct operation of the Park
lock system and oil tightness of its control unit (3).
2. Using wrenches, hold the bolt in the previously stated
position and tighten nut (9) against the unit housing to
11
1
10
15
11
17
11
11
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001

6F01.6
B . Removing and refitting the sleeve

Removal
5. Disengage the Park lock system (see A) and remove the creeper drive unit (if fitted, see section 6H01).
6. Visually locate the position of the sleeve and remove
it.
If necessary, take out the snap ring located inside it.
Refitting
defective parts.
8. If previously removed, replace the snap ring.
9. Check that the sleeve slides easily on the drive
pinion and on the lower shaft coming from the
gearbox. Place the sleeve in its final position on the
drive pinion, the long part turned towards the pinion.
Refit the creeper unit (if fitted, see section 6H01).
Final operations
10. Couple the tractor between the gearbox and the intermediate housing (see section 2C01).
11. Place the special bolt (6) in its initial position (see
A).
Issue 1
May 2001
6F01.7
C . Disassembling the control

12. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the front wheels.

13. Chock between the frame and the front axle.
14. Remove the rear wheels or place them in the wide
track position. If the wheels are removed, position
axle stands.
15. Remove the left and right-hand hydraulic covers (see
section 9G01, 9G02, 9H01 depending on the hydraulic equipment).
16. Disconnect solenoid valve (7) fitted on the Park lock
unit (3).
Disassembly
9
Fig. 5
17. Remove two diametrically opposed bolts (4) and

screw instead two sufficiently long M6 x 100 threaded
rods, fitted with nuts and washers, to make contact
with unit (3) (Fig. 5).
18. Remove the two other bolts.
19. Loosen nut (9) and turn the special bolt (6) (Fig. 5)
several turns clockwise to slightly free the lower pin
bolt (12) (Fig. 1).
20. Through the opening of the right-hand side cover,
take out the pin and remove the bolt.
21. Progressively and alternately unscrew the wing nuts
"E" on the two threaded rods in order to release the
spring (10) (Fig. 6).
22. Remove unit (3), piston (1) fitted with Oring (8), rod
(11) and spring (10).
23. Recover the Orings (2) (20).
24. Through the opening of the left-hand side cover,
remove the pin from bolt (16) and thus remove
ratchet (17).
25. If necessary, remove the switch (19) fitted with its
seal (18).
10
E
9
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

6F01.8
D . Reassembling the control

27. Refit the ratchet. Carry out operation 24 in reverse
order.
Special point
- Limit the axial clearance of pin bolt (16) to the
maximum (tolerance 0 mm to 2 mm), by if possible
placing a washer on the pin bolt between the
housing and the pin.
28. If fitted, screw piston (1) on to rod (11) with its
threads lightly smeared with Loctite 270 and tighten
to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm. Using a punch, mark the
external face of piston (1) and rod (11) with two
diametrically opposed marks (Fig. 7).
29. Replace and lubricate the Orings (2) (8) (20). In the
opening of the intermediate housing, position piston
(1) with rod (11) (Fig. 7) and spring (10) by aligning the
hole of the shaft with the two links (13).
30. Use unit (3) to push on piston (1) and compress
spring (10) by using the threaded rods, washers and
wing nuts used for disassembly.
31. Fit pin (12) with its retaining pin turned towards the
front.
32. Fit and tighten the two bolts (4) to a torque of 10 - 14
Nm.
33. Remove the nuts, washers and threaded rods.
34. Fit the other two bolts and tighten to the previously
indicated torque.
Final operations
35. Refit the right- and left-hand side covers (see section
9G01, 9G02 and 9H01).
36. Reconnect solenoid valve (7).
37. Remove the axle stands (if used) refit the wheels or
place them in their initial position. Carry out the
tightening of nuts and bolts to their indicated torque
(see section 2G01).38.
Check the correct operation of the dashboard indicator lamp and the
display of the letters P and N in relation to the speed
control.
39. Check the oil tightness of the control unit (3).
Issue 1
May 2001
R
1
11
Fig. 7
Torques
-
Switch (19): 20 Nm
Bolts (4): 10 - 14 Nm
Solenoid spool valve (7): 18 - 20 Nm
Knurled nut (solenoid valve): 3 - 4 Nm or manual tightening
Remark
- The letter "R" (Fig. 7) indicates the unit (3) oil return port.
Rear axle - Lift cylinder supports
6G01.1
6G01 Lift cylinder supports
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Cylinder attaching parts _________________________________
B.
C.
Removing and refitting the shaft _________________________
D.
Disassembling and reassembling the supports ____________
10
E.
10
F.
Service tools ___________________________________________
11
Issue 1
May 2001

6G01.2
Issue 1
May 2001

General
6G01.3
Remarks
- In both assembly configurations, an Oring (19) between the housing and the support provides oil tightness for channel "C".
- Tractors also exist without hydraulic lift. In this case, a
plate covers the location of the supports (2) (16).
The lift shaft (7) fits into supports (2) (16) fitted to the
centre housing. The lift shaft is splined at its ends and
operates the arms (5) (15).
The arm (5) is positioned by locating pin (4) inserted into
cam (8), itself integral with the shaft via splines. The
shaft drives the cam that informs the ELC calculator of
the arm position via sensor (11).
Each support is positioned by two locating pins (13) force
fitted into the centre housing.
Oil tightness of the bearings including friction bushes (10)
is provided by seals (1) (3) inserted in both sides of the
support.
The lower and lateral supports (1) of drawbars (7) are

positioned by locating pins (3) and retained by bolts (4) on
to the centre housing (Fig. 1).
Each support is fitted with a draft sensor (8) held by
locking plate (2), spacers (6) and bolts (5) (Fig. 1).
A guard (9) fixed to supports (1) protects the sensor
harness (Fig. 1).
Special point
Tightening torques
Two types of assemblies are possible on the lefthand support (Fig. 2)

Assembly 1
- On support (16), a channel "C" and a port "O", linked to
the trumpet housings by external pipes, provide for air
venting in the centre housing and trumpet housings via
breather pipe (18).
Assembly 2
- On support (16), air venting in the centre and trumpet
housings is solely ensured by channel "C" and breather
(18).
- A plug (30) blocks the unused port.
- Bolts (4) on supports (1) (Fig. 1): 480 - 640 Nm, Loctite
270
- Bolts (5): 50 Nm, Loctite 270.
6
5
4
2
7
1
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

6G01.4
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(30)
(31)
(32)
Seal
Right-hand support
Seal
Locating pin
Right-hand side lift arm
Bolts and washers
Shaft
Cam
Bolts and washers
Friction bushes
Position sensor
Nut
Locating pins
Grease nipples
Left-hand side lift arm
Left-hand side support
Grooved spacer
Breather pipe
Oring
Plug
Oring
Oring
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Assembly types (Fig. 2)

Assembly 1
- Tractors fitted with Heavy Duty trumpet housings with
sealed compartment or composite drive units.
Assembly 2
- Tractors fitted with standard or double drive unit trumpet housings.
Issue 1
May 2001
6G01.5
Overall view
Right-hand support
14
6
10
7
B
11
13
12
Left-hand support
32
16
18
6
15
16
14
O
7
10
C
19
13
Assembly 1
9
17
30
31
C
Parts list
Fig. 3
Issue 1
Assembly 2
Fig. 2
May 2001
6G01.6
Exploded view
31
30
O
7
1
32
18
16
10
17
6
10
2
4
1
11
12
14
13
19
15
29
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
6G01.7
Lift cylinder upper and lower attaching points

8260 to 8280 tractors
Lift cylinder upper and lower attaching points

8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors
A . Cylinder attaching points

Layout of components
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
Upper pins
Retaining pins
Cylinders
Washers
Grease nipples
Snap rings
Washers
Lower pins
Circlips
Friction bushes
20
21
20
21
24
22
24
23
23
29
23
29
Fig. 4
22
24
22
26
27
26
28
28
25
27
24
25
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 4

6G01.8
B . Preliminary operations
2
1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the front wheels.

2. If necessary, chock between the fcylindere and the
front axle. Remove the rear wheels or place them in
the wide track position. Position axle stands as
required. Remove the rear silent block bolts and
slightly tilt the cab forwards, checking that nothing
hinders this or touches the forward face of the cab.
Remarks
- Access to the right-hand side support is difficult
since one of the four retaining bolts is masked by the
high-pressure pipe (1) of the lift control and auxiliary
spool valves (Fig. 5)
- To remove the support, disconnect this pipe that runs
from the manifold on one hand, and the priority
blocks on the other (depending on options).
3. Disassemble union (2) (Fig. 5).
4. Remove the position sensor (11).
5. Take out the upper pins (20) from cylinders (22) and the
lift rod pins (Fig. 4).
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001

C . Removing and refitting the shaft
(7)
16
6G01.9
Removal
6. Take off breather pipe (18). Disconnect and remove
the union screwed into port "O" on support (16)
(depending on the assembly type, see Fig. 2).
7. Take out bolts (9) on each support. Using straps,
sling together the pin, supports and lifting arm and
remove them.
8. Recover the Oring (19).
9. Take out bolts (6). Remove the lift arms, noting their
direction for reassembly. If necessary, extract bushes
(29) (Fig. 3).
10. Remove the cam (8) and grooved spacer (17).
11. Note the position of the supports (2) (16) and separate them from the shaft.
Refitting
13. Use protector, ref. 3378123M1 (see F). Slide support (16) onto shaft (7) (Fig. 6) in the position previously noted in operation 11. Proceed in the same
way with support (2).
14. Check for the presence of locating pin (4) on cam (8).
15. On shaft (7), insert grooved spacer (17) and cam (8)
in contact with their respective supports (2) (16).
16. If necessary, replace friction bushes (29) using pin
(20) as an insertion tool.
17. Mark the position of locating pin (4) with a line of
paint on cam (8) and arm (5).
18. Lightly coat the splined ends of the shaft with Antiseize grease or its equivalent.
19. Refit the lift arms with the paint mark made previously on the arm (5) aligned with that on cam (8) and
side "A" of the arm flush with side "B" of the pin (see
Fig. 2).
20. Assemble the washers and bolts (6) the threads
lightly smeared with Loctite 270. Tighten to a torque
of 240 - 320 Nm.
21. Check for the presence of locating pins (13) inserted
into the centre housing at the location of each
support and Oring (19) on the left-hand side support.
22. Using straps, correctly sling the assembly of pin,
supports and lift arm and position them on locating
pins (13).
3378123M1
Fig. 6
23. Fit the washers on bolts (9) the threads lightly smeared with Loctite 270. Tighten to a torque of 240 -320
Nm.
24. Check that none of the channels in support (16) are
obstructed. In the case of an Assembly 2 type (Fig.
2), refit the plug (30) fitted with seal (31).
On an Assembly 1 type, fit the hydraulic union and
reconnect the pipe (see operation 6).
On each type of assembly, check the cleanliness of
breather pipe (18) and screw it fitted with Oring (32)
onto the left-hand side support.
25. Manually check the axial clearance and the rotation
of the shaft.
Issue 1
May 2001

6G01.10

the supports (2) (16)
Disassembly
26. On each support, remove seals (1) (3) and grease
nipples (14).
Note: The reference for bush (10) is not found in
the spare parts catalogue. If it is worn or damaged, replace the support.
Reassembly
27. Lightly smear the external diameter of seals (1) (3)
with Loctite 542 and insert them using service tool,
ref. 3378124M1, with the lip turned towards the
outside of the support (see F).
28. Fit the grease nipples (14).
29. Refit the upper cylinder pins fitted with grease
nipples (24) respecting the location of washer (23).
30. Fit and adjust the position sensor (see section 11 Electronics).
31. Refit union (2) on the manifold and reconnect the high
pressure pipe (1) from the auxiliary and lift control
spool valves that was disassembled in operation 3.
32. If needed, place the cab on its rear supports. Tighten
the bolts previously lightly smeared with Loctite 270
to a torque of 200 - 260 Nm. Refit the wheels or place
them in their initial position. Remove the axle stands
(if used). Tighten all nuts and bolts to their correct
torque (see section 2G01).
33. Using a grease gun, grease the supports (2) (16), and
pins (20) (27).
34. Check the lift control operation. Check the oil tightness of pipe (1) and union (2) (Fig. 5).
Issue 1
May 2001
6G01.11
F . Service tools
- 3378123M1 Protector (Fig. 7)
- 3378124M1 Seal insertion tools (Fig. 8).
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.1
6H01 Creeper
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
Operation ______________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the unit __________________________
B.
Disassembling, reassembling and adjusting the selection

mechanism _____________________________________________
Disassembling and reassembling the epicyclical reducer

gear ____________________________________________________
11
Adjusting the control ____________________________________
12
C.
D.
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.2
Operation (Fig. 1)
General
The coupler (29) is integral via splines with the layshaft

(30). The moving of the control lever to the "Snail" position
moves the coupler rearwards and locks it to the planetary
carrier (20) via coupler ring (22). The speed of the output
shaft is 1/4 of that of the input shaft.
All tractors in the 8200 range fitted with an AG150 or

AG250 Full Powershift gearbox may be fitted, according
to options, with a creeper.
This reducer unit (24) comprises a simple epicyclical
gear train having a planetary carrier and crownwheel
mounted at the front of the intermediate housing (19)
(Fig. 1).
Lubrication
The lubrication of the mechanical components of the
epicyclical reducer gear is ensured by an oil splash. The
drive pinion and the layshaft (30) have an axial drilled
channel, this allows flow "D" from the right-hand side
hydraulic cover to lubricate needle bearing (34) (Fig. 1).
The bearing supports the layshaft and permits a difference in rotation of the shafts when in the "Creeper"
position.
It is controlled by a lever on the right-hand side console

in the cab that is linked via a cable to a link fitted on the
front right-hand side of the intermediate housing. This link
moves the coupler control fork.
The coupler, fitted with straight teeth, must only be
engaged when the tractor is stationary.
20
19
22
30
29
24
34
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.3
Overall view
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Snap ring
Connecting shaft
Bolts
26
28
27
36
37
Sleeve
Support
Snap ring
Bearing carrier
Circlip
Circlip
Ball bearing
Snap ring
Friction washer
Pin
Friction plates
Sun gears
Crownwheel
Spacers
Roller bearings
A
Planetary carrier
Snap ring
45
Coupler ring
Bolts
Planetary carrier assembly (reducer gear)
Locating pin
Nut
B
Fork
Guide rod
Coupler
Layshaft
Snap ring
Sleeve
19
40
38
41
39
Snap ring
Needle bearing
Locking stud
Spring
B
Plug
Pin
Finger
Fig. 2
Oring
Pin
Link
Fig. 3
Bolt
Housing
43
42
Fig. 4
Shim(s)
35
16
17
18
14
26
25
27
28
29
30
15
14
E
12
11
13
12
20
22
21
44
10
23
7
24
3
5
6
19
34
31
32
33
Parts list
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Issue 1
Fig. 4
Parts list
May 2001
Fig. 2
Fig. 4
Fig. 3
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.4
Exploded view
3
5
10
7
2
11
12
16
25
20
45
42
12
44
26
23
43
38
40
18
28
41
35
17
36
39
37
14
15
27
14
13
19
21
22
29
31
34
30
32
33
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.5
A . Removing and refitting the unit

2. Remove the sleeve (4).
Removal
3. Remove bolts (3). Remove the shaft (2) and unit (24)
assembly.
Note: The locating pins (25) are force fitted into
the intermediate housing (19).
Refitting
4. Check for the presence of the locating pins on the
5. Screw two guide studs of suitable length in the place
of two bolts (3).
6. Place coupler (29) in contact with snap ring (31).
7. Refit shaft (2) and unit (24) assembly turning the
machined recess "E" on support (5) towards the
adjusting nut (26) on guide rod (28) (Fig. 3). Turn shaft
(2) several turns to engage the exterior splines of
coupler ring (22) in those of coupler (29).
8. Alternately and uniformly tighten bolts (3) lightly
smeared with Loctite 241 to a torque of 90 - 120 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.6
26
28
27
36
37
35
26
27
28
29
30
31
19
34
A
45
B
B
40
38
41
39
43
42
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper

adjusting the selection mechanism
10. Remove unit (24) (see A).
11. Disconnect the control cable fitted to link (42).
12. Remove plug (37). Recover spring (36) and locking
stud (35).
13. Remove the Allen screw (43). Remove the link (42)
and pin (41) fitted with seal (40) and finger (39).
Recover the shim(s) (45). Drive out pin (38) linking
the pin and the finger.
14. Disengage the guide rod (28) from the fork (27) and
15. If necessary, loosen, unscrew and discard nut (26).
16. Remove the fork, coupler and shaft (30) fitted with
needle bearing (34).
17. Remove snap ring (31).
18. If necessary, extract the bearing.
6H01.7
22. Fit the shaft, coupler and fork in the intermediate

housing.
23. Refit the guide rod and nut assembly.
24. Refit the unit (24) (See A).
Adjust the fork (see subsequent operations).
Final operations
26. Connect the control cable and adjust it if necessary
(see D).
Refitting
20. If fitted, using an appropriate fixture, insert bearing
(34) thrust against the shoulder on layshaft (30) and
check that the needle bearing turns normally. Place
snap ring (31).
21. Lubricate a new seal (40) and fit it on pin (41). Enter
the pin through the chamfered port of the intermediate housing (19).
Reminder
- To limit axial clearance of the pin, it is recommended to carry out shimming with a tolerance of
0.1 mm to 0.6 mm.
Shimming
- On the pin, place an approximate thickness of
shim(s) (45). Fit finger (39) and partially fit pin (39).
Reassemble the link (42) and bolt (43).
- Manually evaluate the existing clearance.
Remark
- The adjustment principle consists in obtaining a
minimum clearance between the various parts.
Action
- If the clearance is outside the maximum stated
tolerance, determine a new thickness of shim(s).
After shimming, check for the correct orientation of
the finger and the link. Definitively insert pin (38), fit
and tighten Allen screw (43).
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.8
B
A
27
37
35
36
B
X2
26
X1
19
28
F4
F3
G1
F2
29
2
F1
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.9
Adjustment (Fig. 6)
- Fit the locking stud (35), spring (36) and plug (38).
Partially tighten the plug.
- Position coupler (29) in accordance with F1, its forward
face thrust against shaft (2).
- Maintain the fork thrust against the coupler in accordance with F2. Turn the guide rod (28) in nut (25)
according to F3 so as to place in contact the oblique
face of groove G1 with locking stud (35) while simultaneously holding nut (26) against spot-faced face B of
- Using a depth gauge, measure X1 between the forward
face of the guide rod and face A of the intermediate
housing (19).
- Hold the fork thrust against the coupler in accordance
with F2.
- Turn the guide rod in the nut in accordance with F4 so
as to place the other oblique face of groove G1 in
contact with the locking stud while holding nut (26) as
previously.
- Measure X2 in the same manner as X1.
- Determine the position of adjustment X using the
following formula:
X = (X1 + X2) : 2
- Provisionally position guide rod (28) to dimension X.
- Place coupler (29) in the "Creeper unit" position. Manually check for locking of the control and the clearance
between the fork and the coupler.
- If this check is satisfactory, remove unit (24), plug (37),
the spring and the locking stud.
- Grease the threads of the guide rod and the threads of
nut (26).
- Tighten the nut, previously lightly smeared with Loctite
frein filet faibe, and definitively position the guide rod
according to the previously calculated dimension X.
- Lock the nut by bending its collar into the machined
groove of the guide rod.
- Reassemble the locking mechanism. Tighten plug (37)
to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm. Refit unit (24) (see A).
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.10
13
12
20
22
21
44
23
14
24
18
17
16
15
14
12
11
10
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper

the epicyclical reducer gear (Fig. 7)
27. Remove unit (24) (see A).
28. Take out bolts (23). Remove housing (44).
29. Disengage reducer gear (20) from shaft (2). Remove
crownwheel (16).
30. Separate supports (5) (7).
31. If necessary, take off snap ring (6) and circlips (8) (9).
Extract bearing (10).
6H01.11
Final operations
42. If disassembled, insert bearing (10) on shaft (2)
using an appropriate fixture.
43. Fit circlips (8) (9) and snap ring (6).
44. Assemble supports (5) (7).
45. Engage reducer gear (20) on shaft (2).
46. Refit the crownwheel (16).
47. Position housing (44), with the cut out turned downward.
48. Assemble and tighten bolts (23) previously lightly
smeared with Loctite 241 and tighten to a torque of
10 - 14 Nm.
49. Refit unit (24) (see A).
Disassembly
32.
33.
34.
35.
Remove the friction washers (12)

Take off circlip (11)
Drive out pins (13).
Remove sun gears (15) taking care not to lose the
needle bearings (18), spacers (17) and the friction
plates (14).
Remark
- The coupler ring (22) is fitted in the planetary carrier
using a press. Snap ring (21) provides additional
locking of the various parts.
Reassembly
36. Check and clean the components. Replace any
37. Fit each sun gear (15) with both needle bearings (18)
and spacer (17) smeared with miscible grease.
38. Refit the sun gears and position the friction plates
(14). Refit pins (13) correctly turning the spot-face for
the fitting of snap ring (11).
39. Fit the snap ring.
40. Manually check the axial clearance and rotation of
each sun gear.
41. Lightly smear the faces of the reducer gear with
miscible grease and fit the friction washers (12),
with the tabs lodged in the appropriate grooves.
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Creeper
6H01.12
D . Adjusting the control
On lever "A" (Fig. 8)

50. Place control lever "A" in the "Snail" position.
51. Screw yoke (1) flush with the end of the threaded part
of the cable (6).
52. Fit the yoke (1) on to lever "A" with clip (7). Tighten
nut (2).
53. Tighten nut (3) against sheath end (5).
54. Fit the sheath end and Grower washer on to the
support. Tighten nut (4) checking that the cable is not
pinched.
1
7
6
4
2
3
5
On link "B" (Fig. 9)

55. Place link "B" in the "Creeper" position (coupler (29)
locked by splines to planetary carrier (20) (Fig. 1) fork
locked).
56. Screw yoke (9) flush with the threaded part of cable
(6).
57. Assemble yoke (9) on to link "B" using clip (10).
Tighten nut (11).
58. Adjust stop (12) using nut (13) on support (8) while
checking that link "B" is still correctly locked.
59. Tighten nut (14) and check that the cable is not
pinched.
60. Check for correct operation and locking of the control
in the Direct drive position.
Fig. 8
14
13
12
6
C
11
10
9
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Brackets and automatic hook
6I01
6I01.1
Brackets and automatic hook
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Identifying the brackets, yokes, swinging drawbars and

automatic hook _________________________________________
B.
Adjusting the rods and automatic hook control ___________
C.
Operating principle of the Dromone retractable hook ______
Issue 1
May 2001

6I01.2
General
The 8200 tractors can be fitted either with an automatic
hook or a bracket according to the models shown in A
and depending upon the country and options.
A . Identifying the brackets, yokes,

swinging drawbars and automatic
hook (Fig. 1)
Brackets
a : brackets for standard swinging drawbar
b : brackets for swinging drawbar with roller
c : brackets with short ladder with a stud for attaching
the trailer eye-bolt
d : brackets with long ladder
Yokes
e : Lemoine standard yoke
f : Cramer automatic yoke
Swinging drawbars
g : standard swinging drawbars
h : swinging drawbar with roller
Hook
i
: Dromone automatic hook
Tightening torques for bolts

- (1) : 480 - 640 Nm (Loctite 270, automatic hook only)
- (1) (2) (3) : 480 - 640 Nm
- (4) : 100 - 130 Nm
Issue 1
May 2001
6I01.3
2
2
2
4
1
2
1
i
3
2
2
d
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

6I01.4
B . Adjusting the rods and automatic

hook control
Adjusting the rods
1. On the bracket, disconnect the lower yokes of the rods
and the control cable.
3. With the assistance of another operator, operate the
interior or exterior lift control (depending on option) so
that the lift arms are in the maximum high position
(continuous pumping).
4. Compress the lower part of the hook along the axis of
the tractor as indicated by F (Fig. 2), using a trolley jack
and to obtain a dimension X of 3.5 mm to 6.5 mm
between the top of the main bracket and the top of the
mobile plate (Fig. 2).
5. Adjust the length of the rods by turning their square
section (1) so as to engage the yokes (2) on pins (3)
of the bracket (Fig. 2).
6. Fit the pins.
7. Remove the jack.
8. Reconnect the control.
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
6I01.5
Adjusting the control

On the lever (Fig. 4)
10. Place the "L" lever in the "Neutral" position.
11. Screw yoke (1) flush with the threaded end of cable
(2).
12. Assemble the yoke on the lever using clip (3).
Tighten nut (4).
13. Adjust the sheath end (5) on bracket (6) with an equal
length of thread showing on each side of the nuts (7)
(8).
Note: Check that the cable is not pinched.
4
2
L
5
8
On the automatic hook (Fig. 5)

14. Screw yoke (1) flush with the threaded end of the
cable (2).
15. Fit the yoke on link B using clip (3) and ensure that
the link is in the locked position. Tighten nut (4).
16. Assemble the sheath end (5) in bracket (6) and
tighten nuts (7) (8) so that there is no play in cable (2)
and the cable is not pinched.
Note: During adjustment, take care that link B
remains locked.
6
7
3
Fig. 4
5
8
6
7
2
4
3
B
1
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001

6I01.6
C . Operating principle of the

Dromone retractable hook
Construction (Fig. 6)
- The automatic hook assembly comprises a main bracket
(1) fixed to the centre housing, a mobile plate (2) that
can be raised or lowered by the lift control and a
retractable hook (3) operated by a double acting hydraulic cylinder (4).
Operation (Fig. 8)
Plate lowered
- When the manual valve (1) is opened and the auxiliary
lever No. 1 (Fig. 7) located on the console is operated,
the high pressure passing through the unions (2) connected to quick-disconnect couplings A and B of the
spool valve concerned supplies the double acting cylinder (4) integral with the retractable hook (3).
- The hook can then extend and retract to connect a
trailer, depending on the position the auxiliary lever is
placed in.
Plate raised
- In this configuration, the locking safety of the retractable hook is provided when it is at maximum retraction,
with plate (2) (Fig. 6) previously raised and engaged.
- The principle is two mechanical locks located at the
rear of the main bracket. When the previously stated
conditions exist, the lock bolts enter their respective
recesses in the retractable hook and prohibit any further
movement.
On placing in the safety position, the locks must
produce a clack that is audible by the operator during
maximum retraction of the hook.
Note: During retraction of the hook, the operator in
the driving seat should check that the gear and
handbrake levers are in the neutral position. This
facilitates the coupling of a trailer.
3
Fig. 6
3
2
1
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
6I01.7

- When valve (1) is closed, the cylinder is hydraulically
isolated from the auxiliary spool valve and thus permits
normal use of the spool valve.
B
Reminder
- Periodically grease the safety lock mechanism and the
mobile plate control cable.
Checking on the safety locking
- Open the valve and check that the lock is correctly

engaging, by placing the auxiliary spool valve lever
concerned in both positions.
- The hook must not extend beyond the plate. If it does,
seek the cause of the problem.
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear axle - Rear hitch mechanism
6J01.1
6J01 Rear hitch mechanism
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Description of the hitch mechanism ______________________
C.
Disassembling and reassembling a lift cylinder ____________
Issue 1
May 2001

6J01.2
A . General
On 8200 tractors, the hitch comprises several components that are, depending on the options and the country:
- a hook or ball joint 3-point hitch
- two lower bars with ball joints, automatic hook or
telescopic links (depending on version)
- two levelling units
- two tube or thrust type blades
- a perforated bar
B . Description of the hitch mechanism

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3-point hitch bars (Fig. 4)

levelling units (Fig.3)
ball joint lower bars
lower links with automatic hooks (Fig. 1)
lower links with telescopic end-pieces
tube type (Fig. 6) or thrust type blades (Fig. 5)
perforated bar (Fig. 2)
Special point
- For the adjustment of tube type blades, refer to Operator Instructions Book.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001
6J01.3
Parts list
Fig. 3
Fig. 5
Parts list
Parts list
Fig. 1
f
IMPORTANT
a
Improper positionning
of stabilizers may
cause damage. See
Operator Instruction
Book.
Fig. 2
Fig. 4
Parts list
Parts list
Fig. 6
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
VOIR MANUEL D'UTILISATION

SEE OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK
VEDRE LIBRETO D'USO
SIEME BETRIEBS AMLEITUNG
VER MANUAL DEL OPERATOR
SE INSTRUKSIONS BOKEN FOR JUSTERING

6J01.4
Issue 1
May 2001
6J01.5

a lift cylinder
O
Remark
On 8200 tractors, there are two models of lift cylinders

depending on the type of tractor:
- 8210 - 8220 - 8240 - 8250 tractors
. 95 mm cylinders
- 8260 to 8280 tractors
. 105 mm cylinders
1. Run the engine and lower the lower bars to their
maximum using the ELC.
2. Disconnect the feed hose, remove the cylinder and
empty it of oil.
3
2
3. Remove the 90 union (1) fitted with its Oring.
4. Push the cylinder ram (5) until snap ring (4) is visible
in port O of the union.
5. Introduce a screwdriver in this port and while turning
the cylinder ram push the snap ring into the V-shaped
recess.
6. Remove the ram and seal (4). Drive off scraper seal
(2) and oil seal (3) (systematically discard these three
parts).
5
4
5
Reassembly
Special point
- Carefully clean all components. Replace any parts that
are scratched or bowed. In cases of seizing up or
serious scratching, replace the cylinder and ram.
7. Dry all components using compressed air.
8. Lubricate the assembly with clean transmission oil.
9. Proceed with assembly of the cylinder. Carry out
operations 3 to 6 in reverse order.
Special points
- New seals and snap rings must always be fitted.
- Use an appropriate fixture to force fit the parts
without damaging the seals.
- Fit the ram into the cylinder with care.
Fig. 7
Final operations
10. Lubricate the upper and lower pins with anti-seize
grease and refit them. Reconnect the feed hose.
11. Run the engine. Using the ELC, raise the lower hitch
bars into the high position and vice versa.
12. Check that the hitch is operating correctly and that
there are no oil leaks around either cylinder or ram.
Issue 1
May 2001
7 . POWER TAKE-OFF
Contents
7 A01
PRESENTATION OF THE POWER TAKE-OFF
7 B01
DRIVE PINIONS - BEARINGS - LAYSHAFT
7 C01
REMOVABLE SHAFT
7 D01
SHIFTABLE PTO SHAFT
7 E01
1000 RPM POWER TAKE-OFF SHAFT
7 F01
CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Issue 1
May 2001
Power Take-off - Description
7A01.1
7A01 Description of the Power Take-off
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Overall views ___________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

7A01.2
A . General
Description
The power take-off housing, fitted to the rear of the centre
housing, houses all mechanical components of the rear
power take-off on the 8200 series tractors.
The power take-off is independent of the transmission.
On tractors fitted with a Heavy Duty gearbox, the input
shaft is integral via splines with the vibration damper
fixed to the engine flywheel. It transmits the engine
speed to the power take-off multi-disc clutch via a
shaftline comprising two layshafts.
The first layshaft is linked by splines to the engine input
shaft and, at the front, to the hydraulic pump drive pinion.
The second layshaft is splined at the front on the
hydraulic pump drive pinion and at the rear on the power
take-off clutch.
On tractors fitted with an AG150 or AG250 Full Powershift
gearboxes, the engine speed is transmitted to the power
take-off clutch by a shaftline comprising four shafts.
The first shaft is likewise driven via the vibration damper
fitted to the engine flywheel. The second shaft, passing
through the gearbox, is linked to the third shaft by a
sleeve and drives the hydraulic pump drive pinion. As in
the version mentioned above, the last shaft is splined at
the front on the hydraulic pump drive pinion and at the rear
on the power take-off clutch.
Type "b" (Fig. 4)

- the clutch unit is integral via splines with two pinions
that are constantly engaged with the 540 / 1000 rpm or
750 / 1000 rpm pinions that rotate the power take-off
output shaft when the coupler is either moved forwards, to the 540 / 1000 rpm position, or rearwards to
the 1000 rpm position, depending on the speed required.
Type "c" (Fig. 5)
- the clutch unit is integral via splines with a single pinion
that is constantly engaged with the 1000 rpm pinion that
rotates the power take-off output shaft.
Remark
- In the type "c", a spacer replaces the 540 or 750 rpm
drive pinion. The coupler is integral via splines with the
1000 rpm drive pinion. It is held in place by a snap ring
located on the hub. This hub is itself immobilised by
another snap ring fitted on the output shaft.
When the clutch is disengaged and the control button in

the cab is placed in the "PTO brake" position, the 17 bar
pressure acts upon piston (1) and it enters in contact with
the outside edge of unit (6) and thus brakes its rotation
(Fig. 1).
Types of power take-off available

"a" : with long or short removable shaft - 540 / 1000 rpm
or with an option of 750 / 1000 rpm
"b" : with a jaw coupler and short or long shaft with disc
- 540 / 1000 rpm or 750 / 1000 rpm
"c" : with fixed coupler and shaft with disc - 1000 rpm
Type "a" (Fig. 3)

- the clutch unit is integral via splines with a double pinion
that is constantly engaged with the 540 / 1000 rpm or
750 / 1000 rpm pinions that rotate the 1000 rpm shaft
or the 750 rpm shaft at the required speed.
Section EE
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
7A01.3
Construction
The clutch, located on the upper shaftline, is supported
by two taper roller bearings. The bearing cups are fitted
in two carriers fixed to the power take-off housing and the
bearing cones are positioned on two spans inside the
clutch housing.
The front bearing cone is force fitted on:
- the clutch unit (type "a" PTO)
- the 540 or 750 rpm pinion drive pinion (type "b" PTO)
- the spacer (type "c" PTO)
The rear bearing cone is mounted free on all types. The
bearing clearance is adjusted by means of shims placed
between the two carriers.
The lower shaftline comprises:
- A unit fixed by bolts on the rear of the centre housing,
in which a roller bearing (type "a" PTO) is fitted.
On the other types, this bearing is force fitted, preceded
by an oil deflector, in the centre housing.
- A rear bearing comprising two taper roller bearings;
their clearance is adjusted by shims placed between
the power take-off housing and the bearing.
On the type "a" power take-off, the previously stated
bearings are fitted on a sleeve integral with the power
take-off output shaft.
- A cassette seal provides oil tightness for the bearing.
Fig. 2
Depending on the type of power take-off, the type of tool

that is to be driven and the recommended rotational
speed, the output shafts (Fig. 2) (removable or with
interchangeable end-piece) may be of different lengths
and have 6, 20 or 21 splines.
Issue 1
May 2001
7A01.4
B . Overall views
Type "a"
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
7A01.5
Type "b"
Fig. 4
Type "c"
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
Power take-off - Driving pinions- Bearings - Layshaft
7B01.1
7B01 Driving pinions - Bearings - Layshaft
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the driving pinion, bearings and

layshaft ________________________________________________
Shimming ______________________________________________
B.
Issue 1
May 2001

7B01.2

Parts list
General
On tractors in the 8200 series, the layshaft, clutch,
bearings and driving pinion form the upper shaft line of the
rear power take-off.
The upper shaftline passes through the intermediate and
centre housings to then transmit the engine speed to the
driving pinions located in the rear housing.
The layshaft is supported at the front by a bearing block
mounted on two ball bearings housed in the bore of the
intermediate housing and at the rear by the clutch
assembly (15) in which the driving pinions are integral via
splines.
On unit (23), the cups (3) (8) are free mounted in their
respective bores. The bearing cone (7) is mounted free on
the splined part of the clutch. Depending on the type of
power take-off, the bearing cone (2) is force fitted on:
- the clutch unit (15)
- the pinion (9)
- the spacer (10)
Identification of the assemblies corresponding to the
types of power take-off available
"a" : removable shaft
"b" : jaw coupler
"c" : 1000 rpm
Issue 1
May 2001
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(27)
(28)
Circlip
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Cover
Shims
Unit housing
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Driving pinion
Spacer
Driving pinion(s)
Circlip
Bolt
Layshaft
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7B01.3
Overall view
Front bearing with
27
23
12
28
11
11
15
23
28
Front bearing with

Heavy Duty gearbox
10
11
Parts list
Fig. 2
Issue 1
Fig. 1
May 2001

7B01.4

Exploded view
15
a
23
2
3
27
4
5
11
6
8
7
9
2
c
11
10
2
11
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7B01.5
Remark
- Uncouple the power take-off housing from the centre
housing (see section 2E01) to carry out maintenance on
the following components:
- driving pinion(s)
- unit housing (6)
- cover (4)
- bearings (2) (3) and (7) (8)
A . Removing and refitting the driving pinion, bearings and layshaft
11
27
Fig. 3
- If the layshaft (28) mounted on tractors fitted with Full

Powershift transmission has to be replaced, it is absolutely necessary to remove the left-hand side hydraulic
cover (see section 9H01) to gain access to circlip (1),
since this will not pass through the hole provided in the
wall of the intermediate housing. Before removing the
shaft, visually note its profile in order to later pass the
crownwheel of the bevel gear through.
- On tractors fitted with Heavy Duty transmission, the
layshaft does not has a circlip (1).
4
" D"
Removal
1. Remove and separate the clutch (15) and unit (23)
assembly (see section 7F01, B ).
Assembly "a" (Fig. 2 - 3)
2. Extract bearing cone (2) from the clutch unit and
remove it. Take off bolts (27), cover (4) and shim(s)
(5).
3. Take out the driving pinion (11) from unit (6).
4. Disassemble the cups (3) (8) (as required).
11
6
Fig. 4
Assembly "b" (Fig. 2 - 4)

5. Remove pinion (9) and bearing cone (2). Take out cup
(3) from the cover (4).
6. Remove the cover and shim(s) (5).
7. Take out cup (8) from unit (6). Extract cone (2) (as
required).
Assembly "c" (Fig. 2)
- On this type of assembly, the method is similar to that
used for assembly "b" type.
Issue 1
May 2001

7B01.6
Refitting
Reminder
- If maintenance has been carried out on one of the
components stated at the beginning of this section, it is
important to carry out shimming of the bearings (2) (3)
and (7) (8) (see B).
Assembly "a"
8. If disassembled, place cups (3) and (8) in cover (4)
and unit (6) respectively.
9. Refit the driving pinion (11), the shim(s) (5) (if
adjustment is not necessary), the cover (4) and the
bolts (27) on unit (6).
bearing cone (2) into the clutch housing.
Assembly "b"
11. If disassembled, place cups (3) and (8) in cover (4)
and unit (6) respectively.
12. Position pinion (11) in unit (6), the long offset "D"turned
to face cover (4) (Fig. 1 - 4).
13. Refit the shim(s) (5) (if adjustment is not necessary),
the cover (4) and bolts (27) on unit (6).
bearing cone (2) in pinion (9).
Assembly "c"
- In this type of assembly, assemble the components
using the assembly principle used in the b type
assembly.
15. Reassemble and refit clutch (15) and unit (23) assembly (see section 7F01, B).
Issue 1
May 2001
7B01.7
B . Shimming
J1 = 0 / 0,10mm
16. Assemble clutch (15) with unit (23) (see section

7F01, B ).
17. Fasten the cover (4) and the unit housing (6) with four
bolts (27) and nuts (14) that should be supplied
locally (Figs. 5 - 6). Hold the assembly (23) in a vice
fitted with soft jaws (Fig. 5).
23
Shimming (Fig. 5 6)
18. Place the index of a dial gauge on the end of the

sleeve (10).
19. Pull hard on the clutch unit while turning it alternatively left and right in order to correctly seat the cones
in the cups.
21. Repeat operation 19, but this time by pushing.
22. According to the provisional clearance measured on
the dial gauge, determine a new thickness of shim(s)
(5) to obtain a definitive clearance (Fig. 6):
J1 = 0 to 0.10 mm.
J1 = 0 / 0,10mm
4
27
14
6
b
23
J1 = 0 / 0,10mm
14
10
14
23
27
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
Power take-off - Removable shaft
7C01.1
7C01 Removable shaft
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Disassembling and reassembling 540 - 1000 rpm

or 750 - 1000 rpm pinions ________________________________
B.
Disassembling and reassembling the front bearing block ___
C.
Disassembling and reassembling the bearings ____________
D.
Removing and refitting the shaft and replacing the

oil seal _________________________________________________
E.
Shimming ______________________________________________
F.
Service tools ___________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

7C01.2

Part list
General
On 8200 series tractors, the driven pinions (7) (18) are
fitted on the power take-off shaft located on the lower
rear housing.
These pinions are constantly engaged with the driving
pinion(s) (depending on version) and driven by the upper
shaftline where the engine speed is transmitted by the
power take-off clutch.
At the front, the removable shaft (12) turns on a roller
bearing (24) inserted into a fixed bearing block on the rear
of the centre housing.
At the rear, the shaft is supported by a splined sleeve (5)
that turns in taper roller bearings.
Washer (4) is integral via a tab with sleeve (5) which itself
is integral with shaft (12) via splines. The sleeve is
serrated all around its outside edge and transmits speed
information to the onboard electronic system via the
sensor located on the right-hand side of the rear housing.
An oil splash from the centre housing along with a central
port and radial channels drilled in the shaft provide
lubrication of the:
- friction washers (10)
- taper roller bearings.
In the 540 rpm or 750 rpm (optional) configurations, the
shaft (12) is integral with pinion (7) via splines. Pinion (18)
is an idling gear that runs on the hubs of pinion (7) and
sleeve (5).
In the 1000 rpm configuration, the shaft (12) is integral
with pinion (18) via splines. Pinion (7) is an idling gear that
runs on the hub of pinion (18) and the front bearing.
The oil tightness of the rear bearing is provided by
cassette seal (14) and Oring (15).
Bearing clearance is adjusted by shim(s) (23) placed
between the rear housing and bearing (22).
Issue 1
May 2001
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
Front bearing
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Castellated washer
Serrated sleeve
Snap ring
540 or 750 rpm driven pinion
Bearing cone
Protector
Friction washer
Bolt
Shaft
Bolt
Cassette seal
O'ring
Circlip
Circlip
1000 rpm driven pinion
O'ring
Friction washer
Bearing cup
Bearing
Shim(s)
Roller bearing
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7C01.3
Overall view
10
2
3
4
11
23
22
21
8
12
24
20
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
19
540 / 750
1000
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
May 2001
7C01.4
Exploded view
540 / 750
1
24
1000
7
10
18
10
11
20
17
2
3
4
8
21
16
14
23
15
22
13
12
6
Parts list
5
19
12
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

Special point
- The removal and refitting of the power take-off housing
is necessary for all maintenance operations on the
layshaft apart from the removal of bearing (22), the
replacement of seals (14) (15) and shaft (12). The centre
housing must be drained either partially or completely
depending on the operation and must be brought up to
level again after the maintenance.

pinions 540 - 1000 rpm or 750 - 1000
rpm
Remark
- The 540 - 1000 rpm and 750 - 1000 rpm versions have
the same assembly configuration. The only difference
is that the 540 rpm and 750 rpm pinions have a different
number of teeth.
Disassembly
1. Uncouple the power take-off housing from the centre
2. Recover the friction washer (20).
3. Remove snap ring (6) and support driven pinions (7)
(18).
4. Pull shaft (12). Remove the pinions. Recover the
friction washer (10).
7C01.5

the front bearing block (1)
Disassembly
housing (see section 2E01 and carry out operation 2,
A).
12. Take out bolts (11). Remove the front bearing block
(1).
13. Where necessary, note the manner in which bearing
(24) is assembled and then extract it from the
bearing block.
Reassembly
15. If disassembled, position bearing (24) using an
appropriate insertion drift, with the rounded cage
holding the rollers turned to face the forward end of
shaft (12).
16. Refit bearing block (1). Fit and tighten bolts (11) with
their threads lightly smeared with Loctite 241 and
tighten to a torque of 27 - 35 Nm. Carry out operation
9 A.
17. Couple the power take-off housing to the centre
Reassembly
parts found to be defective. Check that the oil
channels in shaft (12) are not obstructed. Check that
the interior of sleeve (5) is clean and free of burrs.
Lubricate and fit a new Oring (19).
6. Assemble driven pinions (7) (18) and friction washers (10) smeared with miscible grease and placed
according to the overall view. Maintain the pinions
inserted and thrust against sleeve (5).
7. Engage shaft (12) against the shoulder of the sleeve.
8. Fit snap ring (6).
9. Smear friction washer (20) with miscible grease and
apply it against bearing (24).
10. Couple the PTO housing to the centre housing (see
section 2E01).
Issue 1
May 2001

7C01.6

the bearings
Disassembly
19. Take out the bolt from the lower sensor and remove
it. Disassemble the pinions and the shaft (see A).
20. Take out bolts (13), remove bearing block assembly
(22) comprising sleeve (5), oil seal (14), Orings (15)
(19), shim(s) (23), bearing cup (21), bearing cones (3)
(8) and castellated washer (4).
21. Take off bearing cup (2).
22. On sleeve (5), remove circlip (17). Remove bearing
cone (3), castellated washer (4), bearing cone (8)
and circlip (16).
Reassembly
Special point
- If the power take-off housing, bearing block (22), taper
roller bearings (2) (3) (8) (21) or castellated washer (4)
had to be replaced, the bearings must be shimmed
again (see E).
channels in shaft (12) are not obstructed.
24. On sleeve (5), place circlip (16), bearing cones (3) (8)
separated by castellated washer (4). Fit circlip (17).
25. Refit cup (2), sleeve (5) assembled, cup (21), bearing
block (22) with shim(s) (23) according to the method
described in operations 39, 41 and 42 D, as well as,
after lubrication, Orings (15) (19). Fit and tighten
bolts (13) to a torque of 72 - 96 Nm.
26. Refit the 540 - 1000 rpm or 750 - 1000 rpm pinions
and shaft (12) (see A).
27. Couple the power take-off to the centre housing (see
section 2E01).
28. Refit the sensor, Oring and bolt
Issue 1
May 2001

D . Removing and refitting the shaft
and replacing the oil seal
Removing the shaft
29. Partially drain the centre housing in order to avoid oil
from running through the shaft bore, or raise the rear
axle of the tractor (after chocking the front wheels).
30. Remove Oring (6). Take out shaft (12). Take off
Oring (19).
7C01.7
40. Hold the shaft (12) pushed forwards, as described in

operation 35.
41. Alternatively and uniformly screw two bolts and
washers on the threaded rods so as to insert the
bearing parallel with the face of the housing.
42. Remove the threaded rods. Fit and tighten the initial
bolts (13) to 72 - 96 Nm.
43. Top up the oil level in the housings and check it on
the transparent tube mounted on the left-side of the
centre housing.
Refitting
31. Check that the interior of sleeve (5) is clean and free
of burrs. Lubricate and fit a new Oring.
32. Check that the channel in the shaft is not obstructed.
Clean and then engage the shaft thrust up against the
shoulder on sleeve (5). Refit snap ring (6).
33. Remove the trolley jack.
Replacing the oil seal (14) on rear bearing

block (22)
Removal
34. Partially drain the centre housing.
35. Take out bolts (13), remove bearing block (22) while
holding the shaft (12) pushed forwards in order not to
displace sleeve (5) on pinion (18). Take off seal (15).
Recover the shim(s) (23).
36. Note the direction of assembly of seal (14) and then
extract it.
Reassembly
38. If necessary, before fitting seal (14), see note E.
Lightly smear the external diameter of seal (14) with
Loctite 542. Using a press and tool ref. 3378115M1,
insert the cassette seal into the bearing block (22)
with its lip turned to face taper roller bearing (8) (21).
39. Screw two diametrically opposed threaded rods (
10 x 150, length approximately 50 mm) in place of
bolts (13). Check that sleeve (5) is free from burrs.
Lubricate the internal diameter of cassette seal (14)
with transmission oil. Refit the bearing block fitted
with lubricated seal (15) and the shims (23) removed
during disassembly.
Issue 1
May 2001
7C01.8
E . Shimming (Fig. 3 - 4)
Note: Carry out the shimming of bearings (2) (3) and
(8) (21) before fitting seal (14).
44. Using a depth gauge, measure dimension A on the
power take-off housing.
45. Place the sleeve prepared in operation 24, the bearing cups and bearing block (22) thrust against a
locally manufactured support.
46. With the help of an operator, apply strong continuous
pressure around the rim of the cup (2). At the same
time, alternately turn the sleeve left and right in order
to correctly seat the bearing cones in their cups.
Measure dimension B at two opposing points. Take
the average of the two measurements.
47. Apply the formula B - A. Place a thickness of shim(s)
(23) in order to provide a clearance of:
J1 = 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm.
2
B
22
Issue 1
21
21
J1 = 0,05
/ 0,15
23
Fig. 3
May 2001
Fig. 4
7C01.9
F . Service Tools
- 3378115M1 - Insertion tool for cassette seal (14) on
power take-off bearing block (Fig. 5).
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
Power take-off - Shiftable PTO shaft
7D01.1
7D01 Shiftable PTO shaft
SOMMAIRE
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Disassembling and reassembling 540 / 1000 rpm or

750 / 1000 rpm pinions, fork and bearing __________________
Removing, refitting and disassembling, reassembling

the rear bearing block, oil seal and shaft bearings _________
C.
Shimming ______________________________________________
D.
Long shaft version ______________________________________
E.
Adjusting the control ____________________________________
F.
Service tools ___________________________________________
B.
Issue 1
May 2001

7D01.2

Parts list
General
On tractors in the 8200 series, the driven pinions (7) (18)
are fitted on the power take-off shaft located at the lower
part of the rear housing.
These pinions are constantly engaged with the driving
pinions driven by the upper shaftline where the engine
speed is transmitted via the power take-off clutch.
The power take-off shaft is supported at the front by a
roller bearing (24) that is force fitted into the centre
housing. It is free fitted in bearing cones (3) and (8) of the
rear bearing block (22).
Hub (11) of the coupler is integral with shaft (12) via
splines. The pinions (7) (18) drive the shaft when coupler
(10) is moved either forwards (540 or 750 rpm), or
rearward (1000 rpm). When one of the pinions (7) (18)
transmits movement to the lower layshaft, the other
pinion is passive and idles on its shaft.
A fork (31) fitted on pin (28) allows selection of the
required speed (540 - 750 - or 1000 rpm). This fork may
be controlled by an external lever located on the righthand side of the housing or via a cable operated by a lever
placed inside the cab.
The oil tightness of the rear bearing block is ensured by
cassette seal (14) and Oring (15).
Bearing clearance is adjusted by shim(s) (23) inserted
between the rear housing and bearing block (22).
The castellated washer (4), via its rotation, transmits
information to the sensor (output speed of shaft (12)) and
equally serves as a spacer for bearing cones (3) (8).
Locking ring
Circlip
Bearing cone
Castellated washer
Interchangeable end piece (shaft with disc)
Bolt
540 or 750 rpm driven pinion
Bearing cone
Protector
Coupler
Hub
Shaft
Bolt
Cassette seal
Oring
Circlip
Circlip
Bearing cup
Splined washer
Bearing cup
Bearing block
Shim(s)
Roller bearing
Oil deflector
Locking ring
Oring
Pin
Pads
Set screw
Fork
Oring
Control link
Fig. 1
Bolt
Locating pin
Fig. 2
Plug
Identifying the controls (Fig. 1 - 2)
Lubricating the pinions

Lubrication is ensured by the transmission oil. The oil
splashed and held in deflector (25) lubricates roller
bearing (24) and taper roller bearings (3) (19) (8) (21) via
the shaft (12) which is fitted with an axial channel and
drilled radial ports.
Issue 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
May 2001
A : External control
B : Internal control via cable and lever
7D01.3
Overall view
26
25
24
19
20
11
10
540 / 750
18
17
21
16
23
14
12
15
13
22
33
34
1000
A
FRONT
1000
REAR
540 / 750
1000
FRONT
540 / 750
REAR
33
B
34
27
28
29
30
31
29
32
33
Parts list
27
36
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
7D01.4
Exploded view
33
32
25
28
24
2
31
20
30
27
29
10
7
26
11
540 / 750
36
1
18
1000
17
19
3
4
8
13
21
12
16
35
14
23
15
22
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7D01.5
Special points
- The removal of the power take-off housing is necessary
for all maintenance concerning the lower layshaft line,
except for the disassembly of the interchangeable shaft
(5).
- The centre housing must be drained during maintenance and refilled afterwards.
7
18

540 - 1000 rpm or 750 - 1000 rpm
pinions, fork and bearing (24)
Fig. 3

Disassembling pinions and fork

2. Take off circlip (2) and splined washer (20).
3. Remove the clutch (15), unit (23) and pinion (7)
assembly (see section 7F01 B).
4. Take out set screw (30). Remove pin (28), link (33)
and the fork fitted with its pads (29).
5. Take off the locking ring (26), hub (11) and coupler
(10); locking ring (1) and driven pinion (18).
6. Take off and discard the Orings (27) (32) on pin (28).
Disassembling bearing (24)

7. Where necessary, note the direction of bearing (24)
and then extract it from the centre housing using an
inertia tool. Remove deflector (25).
Reassembling the bearing

be defective. Check that the oil channels in shaft (12)
are not obstructed.
9. Position deflector (25) in the bore of the centre
housing in accordance with Fig. 1.
10. Using an appropriate insertion drift, fit bearing (24)
with the rounded cage facing the front end of shaft
(12) and thrust against the deflector.
11. Lubricate the ring (1) of pinion (18) (Fig. 3). Slide the
pinion on to shaft (12).
12. Assemble the locking ring (1).
13. Assemble the hub assembly (11), coupler (10) and
fork (31) assembly with the pads (29) smeared with
miscible grease. Fit new Orings (27) (32) on pin (28)
and slide it through the bores of the power take-off
housing.
14. Position the fork. Fit and tighten the set screw (30)
previously lightly smeared with Loctite 241. Fit ring
(26).
15. Lubricate ring (1) of pinion (7) (Fig. 3).
16. Slide pinion (7) on to shaft (12). Refit the clutch (15)
and unit (23) assembly (see section 7F01 B).
Place washer (20) and fit circlip (2).
17. Manually check the rotation of the mechanical assemblies.
18. Assemble link (33). Tighten bolt (34).
19. Using either the external control or the control located inside the cab, check that coupler (10) engages correctly on the 540 - 1000 rpm or 750 - 1000
rpm pinions.
Final operation
Reassembling pinions and fork

Note: if the locking ring (1) (not referenced in the
spare parts catalogue) is worn, replace the pinions
(7) (18) (Fig. 3). The rings are bored and brought to the
correct dimension after insertion.
Issue 1
May 2001

7D01.6
B . Removing, refitting and disassembling, reassembling the rear

bearing block, oil seal and shaft bea
rings
31. Lubricate the internal diameter of seal (14) with

transmission oil. Insert shaft (12) in the seal of
bearing block (22).
32. Place circlip (16), refit cup (21), bearing cone (8),
castellated washer (4) and bearing cone (3). Fit
circlip (17).
Removing the bearing block

21. Disassemble the 540 - 1000 rpm or 750 - 1000 rpm
pinions (see A).
22. Take out the sensor (shaft output speed (12)) located
on the right-hand side of the housing.
23. Remove bolts (13), pull on the interchangeable end
piece (5) and take out the bearing block assembly
(22) comprising:
- oil seal (14)
- Oring (15)
- shim(s) (23)
- bearing cups (3) (8)
- castellated washer (4)
24. Take cup (19) out of the housing.
Disassembling the rear bearing block, oil

seal and shaft bearings
25. Take off circlip (17), remove the bearing cone (3),
castellated washer (4), cone (8), cup (21) and circlip
(16).
26. Separate bearing block (22) from shaft (12).
27. Extract cassette seal (14) and take off Oring (15).
28. If needed, take out bolts (6) and remove the interchangeable end-piece (5) (Fig. 1).
Reassembly
Special point
- If the power take-off housing, bearing block (22),
bearings (3) (19) (8) (21) or castellated washer (4) has
been replaced, carry out shimming of the bearings (see
C).
30. Before assembly of seal (14), see note C.
Lightly smear the external diameter of the seal with
Loctite 542. Using a press and tool, ref. 3378115M1
(see F), insert the cassette seal into bearing block
(22) with the lip turned to face bearing cone (8).
Issue 1
May 2001
Refitting the bearing block

33. Refit cup (19) and shaft (12) previously assembled
with bearing block (22), the bearings and Oring (15)
and place in the bore of the power take-off housing.
34. Place and tighten bolts (13) to a torque of 72 - 96 Nm.
35. Refit the 540 - 1000 rpm or 750 - 1000 rpm pinions
and fork (see A).
36. Couple the power take-off housing and the centre
37. Refit the sensor fitted with its Oring.
38. If the interchangeable end-piece (5) has been disassembled, check for the presence of locating pin (35).
Refit the end-piece. Lightly smear the threads of bolt
(6) with Loctite 241 and tighten it to a torque of 120
- 140 Nm.
7D01.7
C . Shimming (Fig. 4 5)
Note: The shimming of bearings (3) (19) (8) (21) must
be carried out before fitting seal (14).
19

40. On shaft (12) fit: bearing block (22), circlip (16), cup
(21), cone (8), castellated washer (4), cone (3) and
circlip (17).
41. Place the shaft and bearing block (22) assembly in
thrust on a suitable fixture. Using another operator,
press hard on the rim of cup (19) in a continuous
manner. At the same time, turn the shaft left and
right to seat the cones in their cups. Measure
dimension B at two diametrically opposed points.
Use the average of the two measurements.
42. Apply the formula: B - A
Place a thickness of shim(s) (23) to obtain a clearance (Fig. 5) of:
J1 = 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm
B
22
D . Long shaft version

- The removal of the long shaft is identical to the interchangeable end-piece version.
- The long shaft is centred by a locating pin (35) and fixed
by bolts (6) to shaft (12) (Fig. 6).
Fig. 4
J1 = 0,05
/ 0,15
23
35
12
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

7D01.8
E . Adjusting the control

On lever L (Fig. 8).
43. Place control lever L located inside the cab in the

1000 rpm position (Fig. 7).
44. Screw yoke (1) flush with the threaded end of the
cable (6).
45. Mount the yoke on the lever using clip (7). Tighten nut
(2).
46. Position nut (3) on the threaded sheath end (5).
47. Fit the threaded sheath end on the bracket. Tighten
nut (4) and check that the cable is not constrained in
any way.
On link B (Fig. 8)
Fig. 7
48. Turn link B towards the front of the tractor in the 1000
rpm position.
49. Screw yoke (9) flush with the threaded part of cable
(6).
50. Fit yoke (9) on link B using clip (10). Tighten nut (11).
51. Adjust the threaded sheath end (12) on bracket (8)
using nut (13), taking care that link B does not move.
52. Tighten nut (14) while checking that the cable is not
constrained.
53. Check the operation of the control lever in the
position 540 or 750 rpm.
2
7
4
3
5
12
14
13
11
10
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
7D01.9
F . Service tools
- 3378115M1 Tool for fitting cassette seal (14) on
the power take-off bearing block (Fig. 9).
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
Power take-off - 1000 rpm shaft
7E01.1
7E01 1000 rpm power take-off shaft
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Disassembling and reassembling 1000 rpm pinion

and bearing _____________________________________________
Removing, refitting and disassembling, reassembling

the rear bearing block, oil seal and shaft bearings _________
C.
Shimming ______________________________________________
D.
Long shaft version ______________________________________
E.
Service tools ___________________________________________
B.
Issue 1
May 2001

7E01.2

Parts list
General
Certain types of tractors in the 8200 series may be fitted
with a 1000 rpm power take-off.
The driven pinion (18) is fitted on the power take-off shaft
located at the lower part of the rear housing.
This pinion is constantly engaged with the driving pinion
driven by the upper shaft line where the engine speed is
transmitted via the power take-off clutch.
The power take-off shaft is supported at the front by a
roller bearing (24) that is force fitted into the centre
housing. It is mounted free in the bearing cones (3) (8) of
the rear bearing block (22).
The hub (11) is integral with shaft (12) via splines.
Rotation is transmitted to the driven pinion (18) via the
coupler (10). This coupler is held in position permanently
by circlip (2).
The oil tightness of the rear block is provided by cassette
seal (14) and Oring (15).
The clearance of the bearings is adjusted by shim(s) (23)
inserted between the rear housing and bearing block (22).
During rotation, the serrated washer (4) transmits information to the output shaft speed sensor (12) and equally
serves as a spacer between bearing cones (3) and (8).
Lubrication
Lubrication is provided by the transmission oil. The
projected oil is held in deflector (25) and lubricates roller
bearing (24) and bearing cones (3) (19) (8) (21) via the
intermediary of shaft (12) that contains an axial channel
and radial drilled ports.
Issue 1
May 2001
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(35)
(36)
Locking ring
Circlip
Bearing cone
Castellated washer
Interchangeable end-piece (shaft with disc)
Bolt
Bearing cone
Protector
Coupler
Hub
Shaft
Bolt
Cassette seal
Oring
Circlip
Circlip
Bearing cup
Bearing cup
Bearing block
Shim(s)
Roller bearing
Oil deflector
Locking ring
Locating pin
Plugs
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7E01.3
Overall view
25
24
19
26
11
10
18
17
21
16
23
14
12
15
13
22
1000
36
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
May 2001
7E01.4
Exploded view
25
24
2
26
11
10
1
18
1000
36
17
19
3
4
8
13
21
12
16
35
14
23
15
22
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7E01.5
Special points
- The removal of the power take-off housing is necessary
for all maintenance operations on the lower shaftline,
apart from the disassembly of the interchangeable
shaft (5).
- The centre housing must be drained and then brought
back up to level after the maintenance operation.
18
A . Disassembling and reassemblying 1000 rpm pinion and bearing

(24)
Fig. 3
Reassembling the pinion

Note: if the locking ring (1) (not referenced in the

spare part catalogue) is worn, replace pinion (18)
(Fig. 3). The ring is bored to the correct dimension
after insertion.
Disassembling the pinion

2. Take off locking ring (26). Slide hub (11) and coupler
(10) along shaft (12). Take off pinion (18).
Disassembling the pinion

3. Where necessary, visually locate the direction that
bearing (24) is fitted and then extract it from the centre
housing using an inertia tool.
4. Remove the deflector (25).
Reassembling the bearing
8. Lubricate locking ring (1) of pinion (18) (Fig. 3). Slide

the pinion on the shaft (12).
9. Fit locking ring (1)
10. Fit the hub assembly (11) and coupler (10).
11. Check for the presence of circlip (2) and fit locking
ring (26).
12. Check the presence of plugs (36) Figs. 1 - 2).
Final operation
5. Clean the components. Replace any parts found to be

defective. Check that the channels in shaft (12) are not
obstructed.
6. Position deflector (25) in the bore of the centre housing
in accordance with Fig. 1.
7. Using an appropriate insertion tool, fit bearing (24)
thrust against the deflector, with the rounded part of
the cage turned towards the front end of the shaft (12).
Issue 1
May 2001

7E01.6
B . Removing, refitting and disassembling, reassembling the rear

bearing block, oil seal and shaft bea
rings
24. Lubricate the inside diameter of seal (14) with

transmission oil. Insert shaft (12) in the seal of
bearing block (22).
25. Fit circlip (16), refit cup (21), bearing cone (8),
castellatedwasher (4), bearing cone (3). Fit circlip
(17).
Removing the bearing block

14. Disassemble the 1000 rpm pinion (see A).
15. Take out the speed sensor (output shaft (12) speed
sensor) located on the right-hand side of the housing.
16. Remove bolts (13), pull on the interchangeable endpiece (5) and take out the bearing block assembly
(22) comprising:
- oil seal (14)
- Oring (15)
- shim(s) (23)
- cups (19) (21)
- bearing cones (3) (8)
- castellated washer (4)
17. Take cup (19) out of the housing.
Disassembling the rear bearing, oil seal and

shaft bearings
18. Take off circlip (17), remove bearing cone (3), castellated (4), bearing cone (8), bearing cup (21) and
circlip (16).
19. Separate bearing block (22) from shaft (12).
20. Where necessary, take out bolts (6) and remove the
interchangeable end-piece (5) (Fig. 1).
Reassembly
Special point
- If replacement is necessary of the power take-off
housing, bearing block (22), bearings (3) (19) (8) (21) or
castellated washer (4), carry out shimming of the
bearings (see C).
23. Before fitting seal (14), see note C. Lightly smear
the external diameter of the seal with Loctite 542.
Using a press and tool, ref. 3378115M1 (see F),
insert the cassette seal in bearing block (22) with its
lip turned to face bearing cone (8).
Issue 1
May 2001
Refitting the bearing block

26. In the bore of the power take-off housing, refit cup
(19) and shaft (12) previously assembled on bearing
block (22), along with the bearings and oring (15).
27. Place and tighten bolts (13) to a torque of 72 - 96 Nm.
28. Refit the 1000 rpm pinion (see A).
30. Refit the sensor with its oring.
31. If removing of the interchangeable end-piece (5) is
necessary, check for the presence of locating pin
(35). Refit the end-piece. Lightly smear the threads
of bolts (6) with Loctite 241 and tighten them to a
7E01.7
C . Shimming (Figs. 4 - 5)
Note: The shimming of bearings (3) (19) (8) (21) must
be carried out before fitting seal (14).
33. On shaft (12), fit: bearing block (22), circlip (16), cup
(21), cone (8), castellated washer (4), cone (3) and
circlip (17).
34. Place the shaft and bearing block assembly (22) to
thrust against a locally manufactured fixture. Using
another operator, apply strong pressure around the
rim of cup (19) in a sustained manner. At the same
time turn the shaft alternately left and right in order
to correctly seat the bearings in their cups. Measure
dimension B at two diametrically opposed points.
Calculate the average of the two measurements.
35. Use the formula: B - A.
Place a thickness of shims (23) to obtain a clearance of:
J1 = 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm
19
B
22
D . Long shaft version

- The removal of the long shaft is identical to that of the
interchangeable end-piece.
- The long shaft is centred by locating pin (35) and fixed
by bolts (6) on shaft (12) (Fig. 6).
Fig. 4
J1 = 0,05 /
0, 15
23
35
12
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001

7E01.8
E . Service tools
- 3378115M1 - Tool for inserting cassette seal (14) on
the power take-off shaft (Fig. 7)
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
Power take-off - Clutch and brake
7F01.1
7F01 Clutch and brake
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Removing and refitting the clutch ________________________
C.
Disassembling and reassembling the clutch _______________
D.
Service tools ___________________________________________
11
Issue 1
May 2001

7F01.2
Issue 1
May 2001

A . General
On the 8200 series tractors, the PTO clutch is fitted in the
rear housing and driven by the upper shaftline (see
section 7A01, A).
Depending upon the type of tractor, the clutch contains
a different number of clutch plates and intermediate
plates.
- 8210 - 8220 tractors
. 5 clutch plates, 5 intermediate plates
- 8240 - 8250 tractors
- 8260 - 8280 tractors
7F01.3
Power take-off brake (Fig. 1)

- When the supply to the PTO clutch is halted, spring (8)
pushes piston (19) against unit (6).
- The pressure is then directed towards the PTO brake
and moves piston (1) which presses against the external periphery of unit (6) thus braking the driving pinion
(11) or (9) (if fitted) (Figs. 4 - 5) that is integral with the
clutch housing via splines.
- A channel communicating with piston chamber (1)
provides lubrication to the rim of unit (6) and the forward
face of the piston during its travel.
- The cylinder of piston (1) (Fig. 1) is positioned on the
centre housing by Mecanindus pins.
The clutch assembly comprises:

- a clutch unit (6) supported by two taper roller bearings
- a sleeve (10) centred by a ring in the rear housing and
by a ball bearing (13) inserted in hub (1). It has two
lubricating channels:
- a central channel for the bearings
- an axial channel for piston (19)
- a hub (1) supporting the clutch plates (4)
- a cover (2) that receives the intermediate plates.
Operation
Clutched position
- The clutch is supplied via the power take-off proportional
solenoid valve by the 17 bar hydraulic circuit located on
the right-hand side cover and by an external pipe connected to the rear housing of the power take-off.
- Oil enters unit (6) via channels a, c and chamber b (Fig.
2). It pushes piston (19) that then compresses clutch
plates (4) against the intermediary plates (3). The latter
are integral with cover (2) via tabs and bolts (16). Clutch
plates (4) are integral with hub (1) via splines. The
movement is transmitted to driving pinions (11) (9) (Fig.
4 - 5), depending on the type of power take-off, via shaft
(28) housed in hub (1).
- In the clutched position, the brake piston (1) of the
power take-off located in the centre housing is at rest
and this frees clutch unit (6) (Fig. 1) allowing the 540rpm 1000 rpm pinions to turn freely. When the clutch
is engaged, oil from the lubricating circuit coming from
channel d cools and lubricates the clutch plates (Fig. 2).
1
8
19
6
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

7F01.4

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
Drive hub
Cover
Intermediate plates
Clutch plates
Progressivity washer
Clutch housing
Valve
Spring
Oring
Sleeve
Bolt
Chamfered washer
Ball bearing
Circlip
Clutch assembly
Bolt
Spring seat
Oring
Piston
Support
Oring
Seal rings
Intermediate shaft
Reducer
Threaded plug
Deflector
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
7F01.5
Overall view
Exploded view
15
30
10
3
4
11
1
12
31
13
14
17
8
20
5
19
18
21
10
29
30
6
28
11
12
13
14
17
16
31
19
18
20
21
29
22
15
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 3
22
Fig. 2
May 2001
16
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
7F01.6
16 0,1 mm
27
15
15
22
23
27
25
23
28
11
12
24
20
10
18
26
10
Fig. 4
15
23
27
Fig. 6
16 0,1mm
15
22
23
27
25
28
11
20
24
Fig. 5
26
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
7F01.7
B . Removing and refitting the clutch

22
1. Remove the power take-off housing (see section
2E01).
Remove the sensor located on the upper right-hand
side of the power take-off housing.
22
Removal
Power take-off with removable shaft (Fig. 4)
2. Recover the friction washer (20).
3. Take off snap ring (6), support the driven pinions
(7) (18).
Pull on shaft (12). Remove the pinions. Recover the
friction washers (10).
4. Take out bolts (27).
5. Remove the clutch (15) and unit (23) assembly.
Power take-off with jaw coupler (Fig. 5)
6. Take off circlip (2) and splined washer (20).
8. Disengage the clutch (15), unit (23) and pinion (7)
assembly.
Fig. 8
25
26
24
1000 rpm power take-off

Remark
- To remove the clutch on this type of power take-off, no
operations need be carried out on the lower shaftline.
9. Remove the seal rings (22) (Fig. 8).
10. Using a press, an "S" support and service tool, ref.
3378135M1 (see D), moderately compress the
Belleville washer (24) until the recess of snap ring
(26) groove can be reached. Remove the snap ring
and washer (25) while noting their positioning for
later reassembly, then the Belleville washer.
Separation of the assembly (15) (23)

11. Separate the clutch (15) and unit (23) assembly (Fig.
6 - 7, depending on the type of power take-off).
Remove the bolts (27).
Check
12. Check that the hydraulic channels in the power takeoff housing are not obstructed.
S
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001

7F01.8
Special point
- If disassembled, using an appropriate insertion drift,
position ring (5) (Fig. 10) according to the dimension 16
mm 0.1 mm measured between the thrust face of the
power take-off housing and the end of ring (5) (Fig. 4 or
5) and in such a manner that the machined groove on
the outside of the ring matches the 17 bar channel of the
Reassembling assembly (15) (23)
13. Place bolts (27) on unit (23). Assemble clutch (15)
and unit (23) (Fig. 6 or 7).
14. Fit a new Belleville washer (24) respecting its assembly direction, then fit washer (25) turning the
countersinking towards snap ring (26).
15. Slide the new snap ring (a new snap ring must be
fitted) on sleeve (10) opening its diameter to the
minimum.
16. Compress the washer as in operation 10. Fit and
correctly position the snap ring in the countersunk
washer (25).
17. Place the seal rings (22) in their grooves and hook
their ends (Fig. 8). After assembly, check that they
rotate freely.
Refitting
Remark
- In order to facilitate the refitting of the clutch assembly,
tilt the power take-off housing, with the inside face
turned upwards.
18. Lubricate the seal rings with transmission oil
Power take-off with removable shaft (Fig. 4)
19. Lightly smear the threads of bolts (27) with Loctite
242 or equivalent and tighten them to a torque of 50
- 70 Nm. Assemble the clutch (15) and unit (23)
assembly.
20. Refit the driven pinions (7) (18) with friction washers
(10) lightly smeared with miscible grease.
21. Engage shaft (12) in the rear bearing block and
pinions (7) (18). Reassemble snap ring (6).
22. Position friction washer (20), previously lightly
smeared with miscible grease.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 10
Power take-off with jaw coupler (Fig. 5)
23. With the help of another operator, refit the assembly
(clutch (15) and unit (23) accompanied by pinion (7)).
24. Tighten bolts (27) to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm.
25. Place washer (20) and assemble circlip (2). On each
type of power take-off, manually check the rotation
of the mechanical assembly.
Final operations
26. Lightly smear the threads of the upper sensor with
Loctite 577 (Sensor Sealing or equivalent). Assemble and adjust the sensor:
- screw the sensor fully home without forcing it until
it touches the driving pinion,
- unscrew the sensor by turn
- moderately tighten the lock nut.
Test the clutch and its brake.
7F01.9

the clutch
28. Remove and separate the clutch (15) and unit (23)
(see B).
Disassembly
11
12
29. Tighten unit (6) in a vice fitted with soft jaw protectors.
30. Take out bolts (16). Separate the unit from the cover (2).
Remove clutch plates (4) and intermediate plates (3).
31. Using a locally manufactured tool (see D), hold the
hub (1). Take out bolts (11) and washer (12). Release
spring (8) (Fig. 11). Remove the tool.
32. Remove the drive hub (1), spring seat (17), spring (8),
support (20) and progressivity washer (5).
33. Where necessary, take off circlip (14) and extract
bearing (13).
34. Using a compressed air jet, drive out piston (19) and
take off the Orings (9) (18) (21).
Fig. 11
Reassembly
Remarks
- Valve (7) is crimped in unit (6). The restrictor (29) is
placed in sleeve (10). The bearing cone E is force fitted
(Fig. 2). The sleeve (10), previously lightly smeared
with Loctite 648, is fitted by press.
- If disassembly was necessary, on reassembly check
that the 17 bar and lubrication channels are not obstructed by Loctite. Threaded plug (30) is lightly smeared
36. Replace and lubricate the Orings (9) (18) (21).
37. Lubricate sleeve (10) and piston (19) and insert it in
unit (6) by tapping it moderately around the rim with
a plastic hammer.
38. If disassembled, insert bearing (13) in hub (1). Fit
circlip (14).
39. Refit progressivity washer (5) in accordance with the
overall view, support (20), spring (8), spring seat (17)
and drive hub (1).
Issue 1
May 2001

7F01.10
40. Compress the spring using the previously used tool,

fit washer (12) and bolt (11) (Fig. 11) lightly smeared
with Loctite 241. Tighten to a torque of 24 - 28 Nm.
41. Assemble the intermediate plates on hub (1), placing
the tabs T between the drilled holes V and alternating
them with previously lubricated clutch plates (Fig.
12).
Remark
- Depending on the type of tractor, the number of
clutch plates and intermediate plates differs.
42. Position cover (2). Fit bolts (16) the threads lightly
25.5 - 34.5 Nm.
43. Manually check that the hub turns freely.
V
Fig. 12
Final operations
44. Reconstitute and refit the clutch assembly (15) (23)
(see B).
Issue 1
May 2001
7F01.11
D . Service tools
- 3378135M1 - Belleville washer (24) compression
sleeve (Fig. 13).
Fig. 13
Locally manufactured tool
- Clutch spring holding tool (Fig. 14)
+ 0,2
146,25 -
21
170
25
= =
170
1 x 45
64
58
+ 0,5
0
92
M6
M6
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2001
8 . FRONT AXLE
Contents
8 A01
GENERALITY - CARRARO FRONT AXLE
8 B01
DANA FINAL DRIVE UNITS
8 B02
ZF FINAL DRIVE UNITS
8 B03
CARRARO FINAL DRIVE UNITS
8 C01
DANA DIFFERENTIAL
8 C02
ZF DIFFERENTIAL
8 C03
CARRARO DIFFERENTIAL
8 D01
2 WD FRONT AXLE
8 E01
STEERING COLUMN
8 F01
BEARINGS AND TRANSMISSION SHAFTS (DANA FRONT AXLE)
8 F02
BEARINGS AND TRANSMISSION SHAFTS (ZF FRONT AXLE)
8 F03
BEARINGS AND TRANSMISSION SHAFTS (CARRARO FRONT AXLE)
8 G01
4WD CLUTCH
8 G02
CARRARO SUSPENSION
8 I01
CARRARO TROUBLESHOOTING
Issue 2
May 2002
Front axle - Generality
8A01.1
8A01 Generality - Carraro front axle
CONTENTS
A. General description _________________________________________
B. Safety instructions __________________________________________
14
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.2

Parts list
A. General description
The axle described in this manual, designed and manufactured following the customers requests, consists of
a beam casing, housing the differential in the middle and
a wheel hub unit at each end.
The differential, type Limited Slip, is supported by two
bearings mounted on a suitable structure allowing the
bevel gear set to be adjusted.
The ring bevel gear is adjusted by means of two ring nuts
located opposite each other.
The position of the bevel pinion, supported by two
bearings, is adjusted by inserting adjusting shims.
The wheel hubs containing the epicyclic reduction gears
are supported by two tapered roller bearings and are
powered by a hydraulically-operated steering unit.
The axle is equipped with hydropneumatic shock-absorbing suspension system (Carraro patent), electronically controlled, ensuring the constant contact of the
tyres with the ground in any operating conditions.
Issue 2
May 2002
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Wheel hub group

Axle beam group
Differential group
Arms unit
Epicyclic reduction gear
Steering cylinder group
Differential support group
Pinion group
Suspension cylinder group
Fig. 1
8A01.3
Issue 2
May 2002
Parts list
Fig. 1

8A01.4
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.5
Overall dimensions
All values given in the following table are in millimeters.
A = 2145
F = 335
K = 260 45
B = 548
G = M22 x 1.5
L = 66
C = 380
H = 454
M = 160
D = 280.8
I = 90
N = 348
E = 1900
J = 183
O = 508
A
.
B
.
E
.
G
.3 1
8
9 9
0 9
1
.4 2
1 9
H
1 2
9 8
. 7
9
2
I
7 3
6
. 8
4
9
L
2 .3 7
1 1
2
K
J
I
.
6 .8 1
8 2
6
N
.
O
Fig. 2
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.6
The product identification
The Carraro front axle is designed by an identification

plate (Fig. 3) riveted on the axle housing.
Part list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
Axle type
Carraro S/N
Carraro N
Customer reference
Total ratio
Input rotation
Differential type
Differential oil type
Differential oil quantity
Epicyclic reduction gear oil type
Epicyclic reduction gear oil quantity
10
11
Fig. 3
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.7
Technical features
Axle model
20.29 S
20.43 S
Tractor
8210/40
8250
DESCRIPTION
Bevel gear reduction
Epicyclic reduction
Total reduction
Dry weight
Input rotation
Differential type
Steering angle
Toe in
Oil specification
Differential oil capacity

Gear box epicyclic oil capacity
Differential looking engaged feed pressure
Grease
Bevel gear set backlash

Pinion bearing P pull (Measured D=39.9 mm
without seal)
Total pinion ring gear bearing pull T (measured
D=37,9 mm)
VALUES
20.29 S
20.43 S
3,00 / 1
3,00 / 1
6,923 / 1
6,923 / 1
20,769 / 1
20,769 / 1
596 kg
616 kg
Reverse clock wise
With multidisc clutch in oil bath hydraulically
control
O
Maxi 55 -2
O
A -2
SAE 85W- 140 EP
To comply
API GL4 GL5
respectively
MIL-L-2105
and
MIL-L-2105D
8,5 Liters
1,3 + 1,3 liters
1,3 + 1,3 liters
20 bar
POLYMER 400/L
DIN = KHER1R
ISO-I-XMR-XM2
0,18+0,23 mm
P = 9,2 + 13,7 daN
T = (P+9,2) + (P+10,7) daN
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.8
Sealing compounds and adhesives
A1
B2
A1
B1
B1
B1
B1
Fig. 4
A1 = Loctite 510
B2 = Loctite 270
A2 = Loctite 573
C1 = Loctite 405
A3 = Loctite 518
C2 = Loctite 496
B1 = Loctite 542
C3 = Loctite 638
Apply on the contact surface

Apply on bolt screws / on pins
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.9
Tightening torques
All tightening torques are referenced in the following
table.
Tightening torques for 20.29 Sand 20.43 S(Fig.5 - 6)
NR.
T HREAD
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Wheel hub stud bolt
M18x69
70
Planetary gear retaining screw
M10x50
79
Wheel carrier retaining screw
M14x65
230
Magnetic plug
M30x2
60
Planetary gear carrier retaining screw
M8x20
25
Pad retaining screw
M10x25
10
Differential box/Crown wheel retaining screw
M10x30
70
Oil breather
M10x1
10
Steering arm ball joint retaining nut
M20x1.5
220
10
King pin retaining screw
M14x35
190
11
Oil fill plug
M24x1.5
60
12
Stop steering bolt nut
M16
150
13
Cover retaining screw
M10x30
60
14
Greaser
M6x1
15
Ball joint
16
Steering cylinder flange retaining screw
M12x45
120
17
Flange retaining screw
M10x60
57
18
Steering arm retaining nut
M24x10
250
19
Arms lower pin retaining screw

(potentiometer)
M14x120
190
20
Potentiometer retaining screw
M4x12
21
Potentiometer cover retaining screw
M8x25
13
22
Half-collar retaining screw
M14x75
266
23
Differential support retaining screw
M12x33
169
24
Shock-absorber cover retaining screw
M10x35
60
25
Arms lower pin bearing retaining screw
M14x120
190
26
Arms upper pin retaining screw
M14x100
190
27
Greaser
M6x1
28
Differential support retaining screw
M12x55
169
300
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.10
2
3
4
5
B
7
6
11
10
12
13
14
F
15
18
16
17
Fig. 5
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.11
22
19
20
21
Sez.A.A
24
Sez.B.B
23
Sez.C.C
25
26
Sez.D.D
28
Sez.F.F
Sez.E.E
27
Fig. 6
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.12
Filling and checks
Routine checks
Specific description
Differential oil filling and plug
level
Oil breather
Fill/drain and level plug of
epicyclic reduction gear oil
Differential oil drain plug
Greasing points
In the axle, lubricant should be flush with control plug (1)

and (3). If not, make up level with the same oil. If leakage
or any other factor determining fall in the oil level is found,
then it is advisable to check immediately, in order to
avoid damages to the machanical parts. Loosen and
remove the drain plug for oil draining (4) and (3).
Position
1
2
3
4
5
2
1
5
5
Fig. 7
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.13
General checks
1. Before draining the oil, loosen the breather to release
possible internal pressure, then tighten the plug with
a torque wrench to the prescribed torque (see A)
(Fig.8)
Drain the oil from the appropriate plug, then tighten the
plug with a torque wrench to the prescribed torque
(see section A01 A).
2. Before draining the oil, always loosen the breather to
release possible internal pressure.
Check oil level and top up if necessary (Fig.9)
Tighten the plug with a torque wrench to the prescribed torque (see A).
3. Before draining the oil, position the wheel hub so that
the filer cap is in the highest point, then loosen the plug
to release possible internal pressure.
Position the wheel hub so that the filer cap is on the
centre line of the horizontal axis (Fig.10)
Check oil level and top up if necessary.
Tighten the plug with a torque wrench to the prescribed torque (see A).
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Issue 2
May 2002
8A01.14
B. Safety instructions
Important
Before proceeding with any operations please read this
chapter very carefully
Safety precautions
- Correct use and repair of axles and of their components
is very important for safety and reliability.
- Recommendations and all described procedures given
in this manual have been experimented and hence are
effective operational methods. Please follow every
procedure. Use the text as well as the illustrations.
- Certain procedures show use of special tools, designed
so that the operations can be carried out in a clear and
correct manner.
- Special tools must be used when a particular operation
is being carried out.
- It is impossible to advice every working method or
know all possible methodologies for carrying it out or to
predict risky consequences of each operation. Hence,
performing procedures or using instruments which
have not been advised could be dangerous for the
operator/mechanic as well as the vehicle.
The product is used for any other purpose different from

the one foreseen, than Carraro Spa declines any responsibility.
In this case all consequences will be at the customers
expense.
Safety maintenance rules

1. Operate in a clean and dry environment.
2. Do not lubricate, handle or adjust the group underway.
3. Keep off your hands, feet and clothing from moving
parts.
4. Be always prepared for fires. Keep the extinguisher
and the first aid kit within reach.
5. Keep the phone numbers of a doctor, of an ambulance, of a hospital and of the fire department within
reach near the telephone set.
6. Wear suitable clothing and protections as overalls,
safety gloves and ear safety devices.
7. Use suitable ear protections, like ear plugs, to keep
out noise and prevent injury to the ears.
A prolonged exposure to noise can damage your
hearing.
8. The operator must be very careful with the equipment.
Do not use headphones to listen music while you are
working on the product or on the group.
Danger : Safety goggles must be worn while carrying out every assembling or disassembling operations.
Residual risk elimination
- Observe safety instructions, accident prevention rules

and all general safety regulations in each and every step
at work.
- Before going ahead with maintenance or repair work
ensure that all the tools, the supporting bench, stands,
levers, extractors and spanners are in good condition so
that the work can be carried out easily.
- Risks to various parts and components will also be
reduced in this way and working condition for the
operator will also be safer.
- Carraro Spa declines any responsibility in case of an
accident or damage resulting due to changes made
arbitrarily on product.
- Risk due to inhalation of poison gases that can be

produced by heating the varnishes during any welding.
Warning :
- Use work stations equipped with dust and fume
discharging systems.
- Let the fumes disperse for at least 15 minutes,
before welding or reheating, or working on the
group again.
Issue 2
May 2002
- Risk of squashing and shearing due to the presence of

moving parts.
Warning :
- Carry out all maintenance operations when the
machine is stationary.
8A01.15
- Risk of fire due to the solvents used and to the oil in the
axle.
Warning :
- Keep off any heat sources from the working area.
- When solvents or paint removers are used, they
should be removed with soap and water, before
welding.
- Remove any containers of solvent, paint remover
or any other inflammable products from the working area.
- Risk due to fall, drop or violent ejection of objects or oil

from the axle.
sWarning :
- These residual risks and the suitable relative
procedures to eliminate them completely are
pointed out, in detail, in the assembly and disassembly procedures. During maintenance, follow
carefully all the safety procedures indicated in the
manual.
Issue 2
May 2002
Front axle - Dana final drive units
8B01.1
8B01 Dana final drive units
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Layout of the main components __________________________
B.
Removing and disassembling the planetary carrier, sun gear

and crownwheel ________________________________________
Reassembling and refitting the planetary carrier, crownwheel

and sun gear ___________________________________________
C.
D.
Disassembling and reassembling the wheel hub __________
10
E.
12
F.
Disassembling, reassembling and shimming the swivel

housing ________________________________________________
12
G.
Removing and refitting the universal drive shaft ___________
15
H.
Service tools ___________________________________________
17
Issue 1
May 2001

8B01.2

Parts list
General
Types of final drive unit available according
to tractor type:
- 8210 - 8220 tractors
. Dana final drive unit (AG 155H front axle)
- 8240 tractors
. Dana final drive unit (AG 155H front axle or optional AG
200H)
- 8250 and 8260 tractors
. Dana final drive unit (AG 200H front axle)
The 8270 and 8280 tractors are fitted with a ZF front axle
with final drive unit of the same type (see section 8B02).
A plate riveted on the axle housing indicates the type and
serial number.
The final drive unit assembly comprises a swivel housing (5) that is articulated on the front axle housing via two
swivel pins (21). The wheel hub (3) turns on two taper
roller bearings whose cups (25) are force fitted in the hub.
The bearing cones (24) are likewise force fitted.
The taper roller bearings (24) (25) are not adjustable. The
parts are produced with machined tolerances that require
neither shimming nor adjustment.
The movement from the differential is transmitted to the
wheel hub via the universal drive shaft assembly (14),
the sun gear (39), the planetary gears (42) and crownwheel
(31). The crownwheel is retained on the crownwheel
carrier (28) by two snap rings (29). The splined rear end
of the sun gear (39) is inserted in the universal drive shaft
(14). The crownwheel carrier is force fitted on the swivel
housing (5). It is integral with the splines of the housing
and locked by central nut (32).
For greater efficiency, the oil seals are fitted with double
lips.
Oil tightness is ensured at the hub / housing by cassette
seal (23) and at the universal drive shaft / axle housing
by seal (16) and protection bush (17). It is ensured at the
drive unit / swivel housing by seal (22) and at the swivel
bearings in the unit and by seals (18).
Issue 1
May 2001
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
Wheel stud
Locating pin
Wheel hub
Circlip
Swivel housing
Cup plug
Threaded plug
Bolt
Shim(s)
Cover
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Front axle housing
Universal drive shaft
Bush
Seal
Protection bush
Seal
Grease nipple
Cover
Swivel pin
Seal
Cassette seal
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Plug
Seal
Crownwheel carrier
Snap ring
Bushes
Crownwheel
Nut
Stop
Washer
Circlip
Planetary carrier
Friction washers
Stop
Sun gear
Planetary gear pin
Needles
Planetary gear
Bolt
Set screw
Nut
Compound needle bearings
Oring
Countersunk screw
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
8B01.3
Overall view
AG155H
AG200H
10
11
12
13
14
15
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
40
42
50
26
27
51
52
43
42
41
40
39
37
38
36
35
34
33
32
31
Parts list
Fig. 2
Issue 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 1
May 2001
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 2
8B01.4
Exploded view
23
1
AG 155H
25
24
19
29
10
28
9
49
48
29
24
30
32
26
12
22
31
25
11
27
4
18
2
37
40
21
41
13
42
33
37
38
34
15
16
36
35
43
39
17
23
21
3
51
18
AG 200H
24
19
25
11
29
24
12
25
28
29
20
8
31
32
4
40
42
34
14
35
50
39
52
38
36
26
27
Fig. 3
Parts list
Fig. 1
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 4
May 2001
8B01.5
A . Layout of main components
42
39
31
3
AG 155H
36
28
41
32
24
24
23
25
25
36
50
42
39
31
51
35
34
22
21
14
13
AG 200H
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

8B01.6
Issue 1
May 2001
8B01.7

the planetary carrier, sun gear and
crownwheel
Remark
- The procedure is identical on both AG 155H and AG
200H front axles.
32
1. Chock the rear wheels. Put the handbrake on.
Reminder
- The 4 WD clutch is mechanically engaged when
the tractor is stationary and the engine turned off.
Raise both front wheels in order to freely turn the
hub of the wheel concerned.
2. Position axle stands.
3. Take off the wheel concerned.
4. Drain the final drive unit.
Fig. 5
Removing the planetary carrier

AG 155H final drive unit
5. Remove the bolts (43).
6. Release and remove the planetary carrier (36) and
stop (38) assembly.
7. Remove the sun gear (39).
32

8. Remove screws (52)
9. Remove the planetary carrier (36) and stop (38)
assembly.
10. Remove the sun gear (39).
Special point
- In order not to damage the threads on the swivel
housing (5), unlock nut (32) correctly.
Fig. 6
All types of final drive units

11. Loosen and take off nut (32) (Fig. 5, AG 155H front
axle or Fig. 6, AG 200H front axle) using the socket
ref. 3378028M1 (see H).
12. Place a sling on the wheel hub (3).
Issue 1
May 2001

8B01.8
13. Remove the hub, the crownwheel carrier (28) and

crownwheel (31) (Fig. 7, AG 155H front axle or Fig. 8,
AG 200H front axle) using extractor ref. 33780381M1
and sleeve ref. 3378122M1 (see H).
Remark
- Smear the cone and thread of the tool with graphite
grease in order to avoid unnecessary friction during
extraction.
14. Remove snap rings (29). Separate the crownwheel
(31) from the crownwheel carrier.
28
31
Disassembling the planetary carrier
15. Place the planetary carrier (36) on a workbench.

AG 155H final drive unit (Fig. 9)
16. Take off circlips (4) and the locating pins (2). Take out
the planetary gear pins (40) using a locally supplied
bolt. Recover the friction washers.
Fig. 7
28
AG 200H drive unit (Fig. 10)

17. Take off circlips (4) and locating pins (2). Take out the
planetary gear pins (40) using the above described
procedure.
31
3
Fig. 8
40
42
36
42
Fig. 9
Issue 1
36
May 2001
Fig. 10
40

C . Reassembling and refitting the
planetary carrier, crownwheel and
sun gear
8B01.9
AG 155H drive unit

33. Lightly smear the mating face of the planetary carrier

with Loctite 510 or its equivalent.
34. Check for the presence of stop (38) in the planetary
carrier.
35. Refit the planetary carrier.
36. Fit and tighten the bolts (43) to a torque of 70 - 85 Nm.
AG 200H drive unit
19. In each planetary gear (42), place the needles coated

with bearing grease.
20. Fit the prepared planetary gears in the planetary
carrier (36).
21. Centre the planetary gears and friction washers.
Position and fit the pins (40) with the notches facing
notches E on the planetary carrier (Fig. 9). Fit pins (2)
and circlips (4).
each planetary gear.
37. Lubricate Oring (51) and position it in the groove

concerned in the hub.
38. Check for the presence of stop (38) in the planetary
carrier.
39. Refit the planetary carrier.
40. Fit and tighten the countersunk screw to a torque of
40 - 50 Nm.

23. In each planetary gear (42), place the compound
needle bearings (50) coated with bearing grease.
24. Fit the prepared planetary gears in the planetary
carrier.
25. Centre the planetary gears.
Position and fit the pins (40) with the holes facing
notches E on the planetary carrier (Fig. 10). Fit
circlips (4).
each planetary gear.
Final operations
41. Turn the hub of the wheel in order to place the filler
plug in the horizontal axis of the final drive unit. The
same port is used for both filling and checking the oil
level of the drive unit.
Screw in plug (26) fitted with its seal (27).
42. Refit the wheel. Remove the axle stands and the
trolley jack.
Reminder
Wheel nut tightening torque: 640 - 680 Nm.
43. Remove the wheel chocks and take off the handbrake.
planetary carrier mating face and the filler plug.
All types of drive units

27. Assemble the crownwheel (31) on the crownwheel
carrier (28). Fit snap rings (29) correctly positioned in
their respective grooves.
28. Prepare the refitting of the hub. Carry out operations
49 and 50 again, then insert the hub assembly (3) and
crownwheel carrier (28) fitted with crownwheel (31).
29. Manually check the rotation of the hub.
30. Fit and tighten nut (32) previously lightly smeared
with Loctite 270 or its equivalent. Tighten to a torque
of 400 - 450 Nm.
31. Lock the nut, by bending its collar without breaking
it, into the notch on the swivel housing using an
appropriate punch.
32. Fit the sun gear (39).
Issue 1
May 2001

8B01.10

the wheel hub
Fig. 11
B
28
Disassembly
45. Remove the planetary carrier (36), the wheel hub (3)
and the crownwheel carrier (28) (see B).
46. If necessary, extract bearing cones (24) and remove
bearing cups (25) from the hub. If the bearings are to
be re-used, take care to match the correct cones and
cups.
Reassembly
Assembling bearings (24) (25)
Cups and cones re-used
48. Insert the previously carefully matched cups and
cones on their respective shoulders machined on the
wheel hub, swivel housing and crownwheel carrier.
28
3
New cups and cones

Special points
- The bearing cones and cups must be of a special type
(width tolerance 0.1 mm instead of 0.2 mm). The
shimming of the bearings is determined in relation to
the machined tolerances of swivel housing (5), hub (3)
and crownwheel carrier (28).
- The above components may be replaced individually.
Remark
- If the rotation of the hub (3) is not correct after fitting,
seek out the defective component(s) that are causing
the problem.
B
Fig. 12
49. To correctly guide hub (3) onto the cassette seal (23),
insert the crownwheel carrier (28) according to the
method described in operation 50.
Issue 1
May 2001

50. Lubricate the splines of swivel housing (5). Using
three or four flanges B (supplied locally) that are
screwed into the threaded holes on the hub, block
the planetary carrier (28) and hub (3) (Fig. 11, AG155H
front axle or Fig. 12, AG 200H front axle). Insert the
crownwheel carrier / hub assembly, using tool ref.
3378039M1, until the crownwheel carrier makes
contact with the housing.
Remark
- Tighten tool A (see H) thrust against the swivel
housing. Smear nut D and its thrust face with
graphite grease (Figs. 13 or 14).
51. Manually check the rotation of hub (3).
52. Clean the nut threads on the housing. Lightly smear
nut (32 with Loctite 270 or its equivalent and tighten
53. Lock the nut by bending its collar, without breaking
it, into the groove on the housing.
54. Refit the sun gear (39).
55. Refit the planetary carrier (see C).
8B01.11
G
3
28
G
Fig. 13
28
D
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2001

8B01.12
E . Replacing a wheel stud

56. Chock the rear wheels. Put on the handbrake.
57. Lift the side of the tractor concerned using a trolley
jack. Position an axle stand and disassemble the
front wheel.
58. Drive out the defective stud.
59. Lightly smear the serrated area with Loctite 270 and
insert it using an appropriate bronze drift and hammer.
60. Refit the wheel. Remove the axle stand and jack.
Tighten the nuts to the same torque as shown in
operation 42.
F . Disassembling, reassembling and

shimming the swivel housing
Disassembly
61. Remove the planetary carrier (see B).
62. Disassemble the sun gear (39) and wheel hub (see
D).
63. If necessary, remove seal (23) using a suitable
extractor or a locally manufactured tool. Remove
circlip (35) and washer (34). Take off the retaining pin
and nut of the steering ball joint. Extract the ball joint.
64. Using an appropriate sling place a sling on swivel
housing (5).
65. Take out bolts (8). Remove cover (20) and bearing
cup (12). Extract the lower swivel pin (21) (Fig. 15)
using tool MF451B and adaptor MF451B3 (see H).
66. Take out bolts (8) and remove cover (10). Remove
the shims (9), cup (12), and extract the upper swivel
pin (21) in the same way as the lower one (Fig. 15).
67. If necessary, extract cones (11) from the swivel
pins.
68. Remove housing (5).
69. If necessary, take off seal (22) and drive off the
bushes (30).
70. If necessary, remove the drive shaft. Take off
protection bush (17), seal (16) and extract bush (15).
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. . 15
8B01.13
Reassembly
72. If disassembled, insert bush (15) and seal (16) so as
to thrust against the shoulder of housing (13). Lubricate seal (16). Refit the universal drive shaft. Introduce a guide into the filler hole in order to align the
left-hand side drive shaft with the differential.
73. If disassembled, insert bushes (30) and a new
lubricated seal (22) thrusting against the shoulder of
housing (5).
74. Replace seals (18) turning the lips as shown in
Fig. 16.
Remark
- The turning lock stops (Fig. 17) are adjusted by set
screw (48), depending on the amount of turning
lock required. Refer to the table below. After adjustment, lock by tightening nut (49).
Dimension X
Turning lock angle
77 mm
35
63 mm
40
34 mm
50
75. If disassembled, insert cones (11) thrusting against
swivel pins (21).
76. Refit housing (5). Position the upper swivel pin (21)
in order to align the unit assembly with housing (13).
Insert the swivel pin while checking that the lip of
seal (18) is correctly positioned.
77. Fit cup (12), shim(s) (9) removed during disassembly, and cover (10). Fit and tighten bolts (8) uniformly
and alternately.
78. Fit the lower pin (21) smeared with Anti-seize grease
while checking that the lip of seal (18) is correctly
positioned. Place cup (12) and cover (20). Fit and
tighten bolts (8) (115 - 140 Nm) in the same way as
described in operation 77.
Important
- Check that the swivel pins (21) are fully in contact
with the housing.
79. Once the pins have been inserted, provisionally
remove shim(s) (9). Refit cover (10) and tighten the
bolts to a torque of 115 - 140 Nm. Inspect and if
required carry out P1 shimming.
18
21
Fig. 16
AG 155H
49
48
AG 200H
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2001

8B01.14
P1 shimming (Fig. 19)

80. Using a dial gauge, measure the axial clearance by
vertically moving the housing with a lever (Fig. 18).
81. Fill the clearance measured with a corresponding
thickness of shims (9). Then to definitively obtain P1,
add additional shims of a thickness of 0.15 mm to
0.25 mm (0.15 mm to 0.25 mm being the pre-load
value that is required).
82. Take out bolts (8), remove cover (10). Fit the shims
(9) that were defined in operation 81. Refit the cover.
Tighten bolts (8) to a torque of 115 - 140 Nm.
83. Continue the reassembly operations. With a grease
gun, grease bearings (11) (12).
84. Smear the rim of seal (23) with Loctite 542 (Fig. 20)
and lubricate the lips. Insert the seal (Fig. 20) using
tool ref. 3378039M1, and bush ref. 3378056M1 or
3378057M1 depending on the type of final drive unit.
Note: Tool A (see H) must be fully screwed in.
Seal (23) is not thrust against the shoulder; it is
the bush that determines its position. Smear nut
D (see H) and its thrust face with graphite
grease.
For information purposes: the position of seal (23) is
11.5 mm from face F (Fig. 20A).
85. Refit the steering ball-joint. Tighten the nut to a torque
of 140 - 155 Nm. Lock the nut with a new pin. Refit
the wheel hub (see D).
86. Place washer (34) and circlip (35). Refit the sun gear
(39).
Fig. 18
P1
Fig. 19
Fig. 20A
11,5
F
542
Fig. 20
Issue 1
May 2001

G . Removing and refitting the universal drive shaft
8B01.15
Removal
88. Remove the planetary carrier (see B).
89. Remove the sun gear (39), circlip (35) and washer
(34). Extract the steering ball-joint.
90. To remove the swivel housing (5) and hub (3)
assembly, apply the same procedure as that used
for removing the pins (21)and described in F.
91. Remove the universal drive shaft (14).
Disassembly of the shaft universal joint (Fig.

21)
92. Hold the external section (1) of the transmission

shaft in a vice fitted with soft jaw protectors.
93. Remove the four circlips (3) at each end of the
universal joint.
94. Using a plastic hammer drive out the central yoke
(2) downwards, until the sleeve of the bearing is
visible.
95. Hold the bearing sleeve in a vice, tap the yoke, and
drive it out.
96. Remove the opposite bearing sleeve in the same
way and remove the external section of the shaft.
97. Turn the shaft assembly through 90, then repeat
operations 94 to 96 to free the universal joint from
the shaft.
98. Tighten the internal section of the transmission
shaft in a vice and repeat operations 93 to 97. If
necessary, drive out the cup plug (6) (Fig. 1 - 2).
Fig. 21
Reassembly of the universal-joint
Fig. 22

universal joint assembly including the spiders, oil
seals, bearings, sleeves and circlips.
If disassembled, lightly smear the cup plug (6) with
Loctite 270 and insert it into the internal section of
the drive shaft but foresee the assembly of the sun
gear (39).
100. Coat the needle bearings with bearing grease and
ensure that they are all present in the sleeves.
101. Position the universal joint (1) in the yoke and push
it as far as possible to one side (Fig. 22) so that the
end of the spider acts as a guide for fitting the
sleeve with the needle bearings.
Issue 1
May 2001

8B01.16
102. Press the sleeve (1) into the yoke quite deeply and
hold the spider (Fig. 23) in order to fit the circlip.
103. Assemble the other sleeves and spider in the same
way.
Refitting
104. Refit the drive shaft. Introduce a guide through the
housing filler aperture (13) to align the left-hand
drive shaft with the differential while holding the
overhanging part.
105. Replace the seals (18). Turn the lips of seals as
shown in Fig. 16. Insert the cones (11) to thrust
against swivel pins (21). Refit the swivel housing
and wheel hub assembly. Position the upper swivel
pin (21) in order to align the housing assembly with
housing (13). Insert the pin while checking that the
lip of seal (18) is correctly positioned.
106. Fit cup (12), shims (9) and cover (10). Fit and tighten
bolts (8) uniformly and alternately to a torque of
115 - 140 Nm.
107. Fit the lower swivel pin (21) smeared with AntiSeize grease and while checking that the lip of seal
(18) is correctly positioned. Place cup (12) and
cover (20). Fit and tighten bolts (8) to a torque of
115 - 140 Nm in the same way as in operation 106.
Important
- Check that swivel pin (21) is fully in contact with
housing (13).
108. Using a grease gun, grease bearings (11) (12).
109. Reassemble the steering ball-joint. Tighten the nut
to a torque of 140 - 155 Nm and lock it using a new
pin.
110. Check for the presence of friction washer (33).
Place washer (34) and circlip (35). Fit the sun gear
(39).
Special point
- washer (33) is fixed on swivel housing (5) using
Loctite 270 or its equivalent.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 23
8B01.17
H . Service tools
- MF451B - Swivel pin extractor (Fig. 24)
- MF451B-3 - Adaptor for extractor M18 (Fig. 24)
- 3378028M1 - Socket for crownwheel carrier nut
(Fig. 25)
- 3378038M1 - Crownwheel carrier extractor (Fig. 26)
Fig. 24
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
AG 155H
AG 200H
Issue 1
May 2001

8B01.18
- 3378039M1 - Insertion tool for crownwheel carrier

and seal (Fig. 27)
- 3378056M1(*) - Insertion bush for AG 155H front
axle seal (23) (Fig. 28)
- 3378057M1(*) - Insertion bush for AG 200H front
axle seal (23) (Fig. 28)
- 3378122M1 - Sleeve (Fig. 29)
(*) Remark: These bushes must be used with the basic
tool ref. 3378039M1.
A
D
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
Issue 1
May 2001
Front axle - ZF final drive units
8B02.1
8 B02 ZF final drive units
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the planetary carrier, sun gear,

crownwheel and wheel hub _____________________________
B.
Disassembling and reassembling the planetary carrier _____
C.
Replacing the lip seal and wheel hub bearings ____________
D.
Adjusting the rotational torque of the wheel hub __________
E.
Shimming the planetary carrier __________________________
10
F.
Disassembling and reassembling the swivel housing ______
11
G.
Replacing the seal and transmission bushes ______________
14
H.
Removing and refitting - disassembling and

reassembling the universal drive shaft ____________________
15
I.
16
J.
Service tools ___________________________________________
17
Issue 1
May 2001

8B02.2
General
The 8270 and 8280 tractors are fitted with an APL 5052
front axle. A plate riveted on the rear right-hand side of the
main housing indicates the serial number and type, as
well as certain front axle specifications.
The final drive unit assembly is fitted on a swivel housing
(13) that is articulated on the main housing (1) via two
swivel pins (16). Two taper roller bearings (33) (36) and
(37) (38) fitted in the wheel hub (34) ensure the rotation
of the latter.
The movement from the front differential is transmitted
to the wheel hub via universal drive shaft (12), sun gear
(45) and crownwheel (41). The latter is retained by snap
ring (39) on planetary carrier (40).
Oil tightness is ensured at the final drive unit by a lip seal
(32) and at the universal drive shaft / main housing by
seal (9).
Oil tightness is ensured at spindle (30) and universal
drive shaft (12) by seal (28) and at swivel bearings in
housing (13) by Oring (7).
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(27)
Axle housing
Breather
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Deflectors
Oring
Bush
Seal
Dust cover
Swivel housing
Steering lock adjustment screw
Nut
Swivel pin
Shims
Arm
Mecanindus pin dia. 12
Mecanindus pin dia. 20
Bolt
Grease nipple
Lower cover
Bolt
45 grease nipple
Dust cover
Issue 1
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
Seal
Bush
Spindle
Bolt
Seal
Bearing cone
Wheel hub
Stud
Bearing cup
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Snap ring
Crownwheel carrier
Crownwheel
Castellated nuts
Stop
Tab washer
Sun gear
Snap ring
Tab washer
Shim
Planetary carrier
Bolt
Planetary gear pin
Snap ring
Bearing cup plug
Seal
Plug
Friction washer
Washer
Planetary gear
Needle bearing
Fig. 1
May 2001
8B02.3
Exploded view
12
27
2
28
29
6
31
4
30
32
36
10
33
34
21
1
37
38
39
19
35
40
20
41
18
42
22
44
45
17
46
47
16
48
49
13
14
50
15
43
55
56
23
16
17
24
25
57
54
58
59
53
57
56
51
Fig. 1
52
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001

8B02.4
Issue 1
May 2001
8B02.5
A . Removing and refitting the planetary carrier, sun gear, crownwheel

and wheel hub
1. Chock the rear wheels. Put the handbrake on.
Reminder
- The 4WD clutch is mechanically engaged when the
tractor is stationary and the engine turned off. Raise
both front wheels so as to freely turn the hub of the
wheel concerned.
2. Place axle stands beneath the front axle.
3. Take off the wheel concerned.
4. Drain the final drive unit.
Special point
- The drain port machined into the planetary carrier
(49) is aligned with a moulded cavity on wheel hub
(34), in order to allow for the correct evacuation of the
lubricating oil when draining. For this reason, the
position of the planetary carrier on the hub must be
located by two opposing paint marks T before
disassembly (Fig. 2).
T
50
Fig. 2
34
Removal
5. Remove bolts (50) and separate the planetary carrier
assembly from the hub using two extractor bolts V,
ref. 5870 204 016 (Fig. 2 and J).
6. Take off snap ring (46), sun gear (45) and tab washer
(44).
7. Correctly unlock the two castellated nuts (42) and
successively unscrew them using socket, ref.
5870 401 082 (see J). Discard the retainer (43).
8. Extract the wheel hub (34), crownwheel carrier (40)
and crownwheel (41). Remove the assembly using a
lifting device (Fig. 3). Where necessary, match and
keep together bearing cones (33) (38) and bearing
cups (36) (37).
Fig. 3
Danger
- Request the assistance of another operator and take
care when removing the hub.
9. If required, remove snap ring (39) and separate
crownwheel (41) from the crownwheel carrier (40).
Issue 1
May 2001

8B02.6
Refitting
Note: If the crownwheel has previously been separated from the crownwheel carrier, fit the two together and fit the snap ring (39).
10. If required, replace lip seal (32) that provides oil
tightness for the wheel hub (see C).
11. Refit the wheel hub, the crownwheel carrier and
crownwheel, using the same safety precautions and
method as when removing it.
12. Adjust the rotational torque of the wheel hub (see
D).
13. Check or carry out shimming of the planetary carrier
(see E).
14. Lightly smear the mating face of the planetary carrier
with the hub with Loctite 510 or its equivalent, taking
care that it does not enter the tapped holes.
the hub.
16. Check for the presence of tab washer (47) in the
cavity in the planetary carrier.
17. Position the planetary carrier according to the paint
marks made during its removal.
18. Fit bolts (50) and tighten to a torque of 190 - 220 Nm.
Final operations
19. Turn the wheel hub in order to fit the oil filler plug in
the horizontal axis of the drive unit. Top up the oil
level using an oil with a viscosity grade of 80W/90
and check the oil level through the same port. Screw
in plug (55) fitted with its seal (54).
20. Refit the wheel. Remove the axle stands and trolley
jack. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 575 Nm.
21. Remove the chocks and release the handbrake.
22. Carry out a road test. Check for the oil tightness of
the mating face of the planetary carrier and the drain
and filling plugs.
Issue 1
May 2001
8B02.7

51
23. Remove the planetary carrier (see A).
Disassembly
24. Place the planetary carrier in a press fitted with an
appropriate fixture.
25. Extract pins (51) from the planetary carrier (49),
pulling outwards as shown by P (Fig. 4)
Remark
- Each pin is fitted with a snap ring (52).
26. Recover the friction washers (56), washers (57) and
needle bearings (59) from each bearing.
49
Fig. 4
Reassembly
28. In the planetary gears (58), arrange the needle
bearings coated with bearing grease. Place a washer
(57) on either side of each planetary gear.
29. Position the friction washers (56), with each tab
located in the groove of the planetary carrier. Slide
the pre-assembled planetary gears between the
friction washers.
30. Check for the presence of snap ring (52) on the
planetary gear pins. Centre the planetary gears and
friction washers. Position and insert the pins (51)
thrusting against the planetary carrier via its external
face (Fig. 5) using the same equipment that was
used for their removal.
31. Manually check the axial clearance and the free
rotation of each planetary gear.
51
Fig. 5
Final operation
32. Refit the planetary carrier (see A).
Issue 1
May 2001

8B02.8
C . Replacing the lip seal and wheel

hub bearings
33. Remove the wheel hub (see A).
Replacing the seal (32)

Disassembly
34. Locate the position of the seal and extract it using a
local method.
Reassembly
35. Inspect and clean the seal location. Check for any
shock or scratching that could affect the oil tightness
of the hub.
36. Insert the new seal in the hub into the previously
noted position using an insertion tool made up from
centring bush, ref. 5870 905 005, drift, ref. 5870 055
073 and handle, ref. 5870 260 002 (see J).
37. Lubricate the lips of the seal.
Replacing the bearings

Disassembly
38. Extract seal (32) and discard it (see previous operations).
39. Extract the bearing cups from the wheel hub (34)
using a local method.
Discard the cones (33) (38) and bearing cups (36)
(37).
Reassembly
40. Clean and visually check that the cone and cup
locations are free from burs. Lubricate the bearings.
41. Insert new cups on the shoulders of the hub using a
press and an appropriate fixture.
Final operations
42. Refit the wheel hub (see A).
43. Adjust the hub rotational torque (see D).
44. Check or carry out the shimming of the planetary
carrier (see E).
Issue 1
May 2001
8B02.9
D . Adjusting the rotational torque

of the wheel hub
Remark
- This adjustment is carried out during the replacement of
the taper roller bearings or the wheel hub.
34
Adjustment
45. Fit internal nut (42) and tighten it using socket, ref.
5870 401 082 (see J), so as to obtain a rotational
torque of:
- 7 to 13 Nm for new bearings
- 3.5 to 6.5 Nm for re-used bearings
Remark
- The rotational torque is checked using a spring
balance and a wire wrapped around the circumference of hub (34) (Fig. 6).
46. Place the retainer (43). Screw and lock the external
nut (42) using the socket applied in operation 45.
Special point
- Retainer (43) is fitted between two nuts (42). By
means of two tabs lodged in the grooves on spindle
(30) it stops any rotation of the internal adjusting nut
during the tightening of the external locking nut.
47. Using an appropriate tool, lock nut (42) by bending
the retainer (43), without breaking it, into one of the
six notches on each nut.
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

8B02.10
E . Shimming the planetary carrier

34
12
Remark
- The shimming of the planetary carrier consists of
obtaining a J1 clearance of 0.3 to 0.5 mm between the
end of the universal drive shaft (12) and the bottom of
the planetary carrier (49).
48. Fit the tab washer (44) with its tabs positioned in the
notches on spindle (30).
49. Slide the sun gear (45) on to the end of universal drive
shaft and fit snap ring (46).
Shimming
Fig. 7
Important
- Push hard on the universal drive shaft in order that the
sun gear thrusts against the spindle.
On the wheel hub (34) (Fig. 7)
50. Measure dimension A between the thrust face of the
planetary carrier on the hub and the end of the
universal drive shaft (12).
On the planetary carrier (49) (Fig. 8)
51. Measure dimension B between the thrust face of the
planetary carrier and the tab washer (47).
52. Determine J1 using the formula: B - A
Remark
- If J1 is between 0.30 and 0.50 mm, the shimming
is correct. Otherwise, extract cup plug (53). Release and drive off tab washer (47) to add or remove
shims (48) in order to obtain the correct J1 clearance.
Final operation
53. After carrying out the shimming, refit:
- the previously selected shims
- the thrust washer, its rim lightly smeared with
Loctite
- a new cup plug, its circumference lightly smeared
with Loctite 542 or its equivalent.
Issue 1
May 2001
49
47
Fig. 8
8B02.11
F . Disassembling and reassembling

the swivel housing
54. Remove the wheel hub (see A).
Disassembly
55. Remove pin (1). Unscrew nut (2) and extract the ball
joint (3) from swivel housing (13) (Fig. 9).
56. Unscrew the nut and extract the ram ball joint (see
section 9F02).
57. Take out bolts (31) and take off the spindle (30).
58. Remove the universal drive shaft (12).
59. Take off grease nipples (22) (25) located on the upper
and lower swivel pins (16).
60. Take out bolts (21) (24). Remove arm (18) and the
lower cover (23).
61. With the assistance of another operator, hold the
swivel housing.
62. Remove the swivel pins (16) from the housing (13)
using an inertia extractor (Fig. 10 - 11) beginning with
the lower swivel pin.
Note: If necessary, match shims (17) with their
respective swivel pin.
63. Separate the bearing cones (4), deflectors (6) and
Orings (7) from the swivel pins. If needed, extract
the bearing cups (5) inserted in axle housing (1) and
match them with their respective cones (4).
13
Fig. 9
16
13
Fig. 10
13
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2001

8B02.12
Reassembly
65. Insert bearing cups (5) in the axle housing (1) using
66. Assemble on each swivel pin (16):
- a new Oring (7)
- a correctly positioned deflector (6)
- a bearing cone (4)
67. With the assistance of another operator, refit the
swivel housing (13).
68. Position the pre-assembled upper swivel pin (16) in
order to align swivel housing (13) and axle housing
(1) (Fig. 12).
69. Replace the shim (17) removed during disassembly.
Check for the presence of the Mecanindus pins (19)
(20) and check that their slots are diametrically
opposed. Fit arm (18) by partially fixing it with two
bolts (21).
70. Assemble the pre-assembled lower swivel pin (16).
Place shim (17) removed during disassembly and fit
cover (23). Assemble and tighten bolts (24) to a
torque of 190 Nm.
71. Fit all the bolts (21) and tighten to a torque of 190 Nm.
72. Turn swivel housing (13) several times from one
stop to the other in order to seat the cones in their
cups (Fig. 13).
73. Using a torque wrench fitted with a dial and an
appropriate fixture that respects the axis of the
swivel pins (Fig. 13), check that the resistance of
bearings (4) (5) is between 21 and 28 Nm. Otherwise, carry out adjustments.
16
13
Fig. 12
13
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001
8B02.13
Adjustment
- The adjustment principle consists of adding or removing shims (17) on the lower or upper swivel pins in order
to obtain the previously stated bearing resistance.
31
74. Refit the universal drive shaft (12)

Note: Introduce a guide through the housing
filler hole (1) in order to align the right-hand side
transmission with the differential.
75. Fit spindle (30). Lightly smear the threads of bolts
(31) with Loctite 241 and tighten them to a torque of
295 Nm (Fig. 14).
76. Fit the grease nipples. Using a grease gun, lubricate
bearings (4) (5) on the upper and lower swivel pins.
Note: A 45 grease nipple is fitted on the lower
swivel pin.
77. Insert the steering ram ball joint and tighten the nut
to a torque of 440 Nm.
78. Insert the ball joint of the steering rod and tighten the
nut to a torque of 290 Nm. Lock it using a new pin.
30
Fig. 14
Final operations
79. Refit the wheel hub (see A).
80. Adjust the steering lock stops.
Note: On the APL 5052 axle, the maximum allowed steering lock is 50.
Remark
- The steering lock stops are located on the upper
part of each swivel housing.
Issue 1
May 2001

8B02.14

Fig. 15
G . Replacing the seal and transmission bushes
81. Extract the steering ball joints and the coupling bar
(see F).
82. If only the dust covers (10), seal (9) or bush (8) on
axle housing (1) are to be replaced, integrally remove
swivel housing (13) and the final drive unit (Fig. 15).
Danger
8
9
- With the assistance of another operator, carefully carry

out the removal operation taking into account the risks
posed by a sudden tilting of the housing and the heavy
weight of the assembly.
13
10
- The removal of the lower and upper swivel pins is

carried out in the same way as the disassembly of the
swivel housing alone (see F).
83. Using a suitable sling, hold and remove the entire
drive unit assembly as well as the universal drive
shaft (Fig. 15).
Reminders
- For the replacement of the dust covers (27), seal (28)
and bush (29) on spindle (30), in addition remove the
planetary carrier and sun gear (see A) as well as the
universal drive shaft.
- Then use the same method as described in operations
84 and 85 for disassembly and then operations 86 to 89
for reassembly.
Final operation
Reminder
84. Locate the position of dust covers (10) and seal (9)
and drive them off the axle housing (1).
85. Carry out the same operation for bush (8).
Reassembly
86. Clean the components. Check that the seal and bush
carriers are free of scratches and dents.
87. Lightly smear the rim of the bush with Loctite 620 or
its equivalent and insert it into the axle housing using
the service tool made up from drift, ref. 5870 058 026
and handle, ref. 5870 260 002 (see J) in accordance with the position marked during disassembly.
88. Insert the seal and the dust covers using a service
tool made up from drift, ref. 5870 055 006 and handle,
ref. 5870 260 002 (see J).
89. Lubricate the lip of the seal.
Issue 1
May 2001
90. Refit the entire final drive unit assembly (Fig. 15 and
F) using the same safety precautions taken during
its removal.
8B02.15
H . Removing and refitting - disassembling and reassembling the universal drive shaft
12
Removal
91. To gain access to the universal drive shaft, it is
necessary to:
- remove the upper and lower swivel pins and
remove the housing assembled with the final drive
unit (see G).
- remove the planetary carrier and the sun gear (see
A).
1
2
1
Disassembling the seal of the universal drive

shaft (Fig. 16 - 17)
92. Hold the external section (12) of the universal drive
shaft in a vice fitted with soft jaws.
93. Remove the grease nipples and four circlips (3) at the
ends of the universal joint.
94. Using a soft hammer, drive the centre yoke (2)
downwards until the bearing sleeve is visible.
96. Remove the opposite bearing sleeve in the same
way and remove the protruding section of the shaft.
97. Turn the whole shaft through 90, then repeat the
operations 94 to 96 to disengage the universal joint
from the shaft.
98. Tighten the internal section of the universal drive
shaft in the vice and repeat operations 93 to 97.
Fig. 16
12
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2001

8B02.16
Reassembling the universal drive shaft

entire universal joint including the spider, seals,
bearings, sleeves and circlips.
100. Smear the needle bearings with bearing grease and
ensure that they are all in the sleeves.
101. Position the universal joint (1) in the yoke and push
it as far as possible to one side (Fig. 18) so that the
end of the spider serves as a guide for refitting the
sleeve with the needle bearings.
102. Push the sleeve (1) deep into the yoke while holding
the spider (Fig. 19) in order to fit the circlip.
103. Assemble the other sleeves and spider in the same
way and refit the grease nipples. Using a grease
gun, lubricate the spider.
Special point
- A 45 grease nipple is fitted on the external spider.
Fig. 18
Reassembling
104. Refit the universal drive shaft, carry out operation
I . Replacing a wheel stud

105. Chock the rear wheels. Apply the handbrake.
106. Lift the side concerned with a jack. Take off the
front wheel and position an axle stand.
107. Drive out the defective stud.
108. Fit a new stud in the hub flange with its serrated
area lightly smeared with Loctite 270.
109. Refit the wheel and remove the axle stand and
jack. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 575 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 19
8B02.17
J . Service tools
- 5870 401 082 - Socket for crownwheel carrier nuts
(Fig. 20)
- 5870 204 016 - Crownwheel carrier extraction bolt
(Fig. 21)
- 5870 260 002 - Handle (Fig. 22)
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Issue 1
May 2001

8B02.18
- 5870 905 053* - Centring bush (Fig. 23)

- 5870 055 006** - Insertion drift for seal and dust
cover (Fig. 24)
- 5870 058 026** - Insertion drift for bushes (Fig. 25)
- 5870 055 073** - Insertion drift for seal (Fig. 23)
5870 905 004

5870 055 073
Remarks
* Bush, ref. 5870 905 005 must be used with drift, ref.
5870 055 073
** Insertion drifts, ref. 5870 055 006, 5870 058 026
and 5870 055 073 must be used with handle, ref.
5870 260 002
Fig. 23
Fig. 24
Fig. 25
Issue 1
May 2001
Front axle - Carraro final drive units
8B03.1
8B03 Carraro final drive units
CONTENTS
-
General _______________________________________________
A. Steering cylinder group disassembly ____________________
B. Epicyclic reduction gear disassembly ____________________
C. Wheel hub group disassembly __________________________
D. Axle beam group disassembly __________________________
E. Axle beam group assembly _____________________________
F.
Wheel hub group assembly _____________________________
10
G. Epicyclic reduction gear assembly _______________________
15
H. Toe-in adjustement _____________________________________
16
I.
Steering angle adjustment ______________________________
18
J. Service tools __________________________________________
19
Issue 1
May 2002

8B03.2
General
Some of the pictures of that manual may not show
exactly your axle, but the process is the same.
A. Steering
disassembly
cylinder
group
Fig. 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Chock the rear wheels. Put the handbrake on.

Reminder
- The 4 WD clutch is mechanically engaged when
the tractor is stationnary and the engine turned off.
Raise the both front wheels in order to freely turn
the hub of the wheel concerned.
Positions axle stands.
Take off the wheel concerned.
Drain the final drive unit.
Steerring cylinder group disassembly

5. Unloose the guide rod locknut of some turns till it is
on a level with the threaded pin (Fig.1)
6. Beat on the nut with a hammer in order to disjoin the
guide rod from the swivel housing (Fig.2)
Note : this is a destructive operation for the nut.
To disassembly the steering cylinder group, see
section 9K02.
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 2
8B03.3
B. Epicyclic reduction gear disassembly

7. Before draining the oil, position the wheel hub with the
plug on the upper part and loosen it of some turns in
order to eliminate any possible inner pressure, then
remove it completely. Turn the wheel hub upsidedown till the hole is in the lowest point.
Drain the oil completely (Fig.3)
8. Unscrew and remove both fastening screws of the
planetary carrier with a wrench (Fig.4)
Remove the planetary carrier from the wheel hub.
Position the planetary carrier on a workbench and
check its wear conditions.
9. To carry out any possible replacements of the planetary gears:
- remove the fastening scews on every planetary
gear;
- remove the washers;
- take the planetary gears out of the pins
- collect the needle bearings, checking their conditions
- remove the thrust washers (Fig.5)
Note : With new planetary gears is advisable to
assembly new roller bearings.
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
20.29 S
20.43 S
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002

8B03.4
C. Wheel hub group disassembly

Before disassembling the wheel hub, it is advisable to
secure it with a belt or a rope on a hoist or any other
supporting device, in order to avoid its accidental fall that
could damage either the operator or the wheel hub group.
10. Insert a lever between the swivel housing and the
axle beam and fit it into the double U-joint. With the
lever push the double U-joint in the direction of the
final drive to make easier the lock ring removal
(Fig.6).
Remove and throw out the lock ring (Fig.6A).
Remove and throw out the washers (Fig6B).
Remove and throw out the two thrust washers
(Fig6C).
Fig. 6
Fig. 6A
Fig. 6B
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 6B
8B03.5
11. Unscrew and remove the fastening screws from the

wheel carrier group (Fig.7)
12. In order to remove the wheel carrier group from its
housing, screw at least two of the just removed
screws in the threaded extraction holes (Fig.8A).
Check that the scews don't touch the catches A.
Danger
- Don't use these two screws for the assembly of
the wheel carrier.
Fig. 7
Fig. 8a
Issue 1
Fig. 8A
May 2002

8B03.6
13. Extract and remove the wheel carrier together with

the epicyclic ring gear.
Remove the steel lock ring and disjoin the wheel
carrier from the epicyclic ring gear. Check the wear
conditions of the components (Fig.9). Only if necessary, remove the centering bushes of the hub lock
ring gear with a hammer and the special tool code
CA715027 (see J)
14. Remove the wheel hub, using levers and a hammer
to facilitate the operation (Fig.10)
Note : Collect the bearing cone.
15. Position the wheel hub on a flat surface and take the
seal ring A out with a lever.
Note : This is a destructive operation for the seal
ring.
Take the bearing cups B out, on both sides of the
hub, using a hammer and a suitable drift.
Remove the bearing cone from the swivel housing
end, using a suitable extractor.
Remove the O-Ring C from the wheel hub (Fig.11).
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
B
B
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002
8B03.7
16. Unscrew and remove the fastening screws from the

upper and lower king pin (Fig.12)
Danger
- Before removing the king pins, secure the swivel
housing with a belt or a rope to a hoist or any other
supporting device.
Remove the king pins.
Note : Collect the belleville washers.
17. Remove the swivel housing from the axle beam and
from the short shaft of the U-Joint (Fig.13)
Position the swivel housing on a flat surface and
take the seal ring out with a lever (Fig.14)
ring.
18. Turn the swivel housing and take the bush out, using
a drift and a hammer (Fig.14A)
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Issue 1
Fig. 14A
May 2002

8B03.8
D. Axle beam group disassembly

19. Remove the U-Joint from the axle beam (Fig.15)
20. Take the seal ring A out of the axle beam with a lever.
Remove the cup springs C from the king pin housings
in the axle beam.
ring.
Remove the bush B from the beam with a suitable
extractor (Fig.16)
Note : Examine the bush before the removal and
replace it only if the wear conditions require
this.
21. Take the upper D and lower E bushes out of the king
pin housings F and out of king pin with a suitable
extractor (Fig.17).
Fig. 15
C
D
B
E
C
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2002
8B03.9
E. Axle beam group assembly

22. Assemble the upper king pin bush on the axle beam
with the special tool CA715034 (see J) and a
hammer.
Insert the cup of the ball bearing on the lower part of
the axle beam with the special tool CA715035 (see
J) and a hammer (Fig.18)
Note : To make the assembly easier, it is advisable to cool the cup of the ball bearing at a
temperature lower than 100C. That operation is
possible by fully immersing the arms pins in
liquid nitrogen. To buy or rent liquid nitrogen,
contact the "Air liquide" society.
Warning : Wear safety gloves.
23. Assemble the bush on the axle beam with the
special tool code CA119055 (see J) and a hammer.
Assemble the seal ring on the beam with the special
tool code CA 715097 (see J) and a hammer (Fig.19)
Fill of the seal ring cavity with grease.
24. Lubricate the bush and the seal ring lip.
Insert the U-Joint inside the axle beam (Fig.20)
Warning : Be careful not to damage the seal.
Fig. 18
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
Issue 1
May 2002

8B03.10
F. Wheel hub group assembly

25. Force the bush into the swivel housing with the
special tool code CA 715108 (see J) and a
hammer or a press.
Assemble the seal ring on the swivel housing with
the special tool code CA 715097 (see J) and a
hammer (Fig.21)
Fill of the gasket cavity with grease.
26. Position the lower king pin on a workbench and
assemble the cone of the spherical joint with the
special tool code CA715035 (see J) under a press.
Grease well the king pin housings with specific
grease (see section 8A01 A).
Position the Belleville washers on the king pin
housings (Fig.22)
27. Danger : Secure the swivel housing group with
a rope.
Lubricate the seal ring lip and protect the splined end
of the axle shaft by winding it with thin adhesive tape
to avoid damage to the seal ring. After assembly,
remove completely the adhesive tape.
Assemble the swivel housing on the axle beam.
Assemble the two king pins, the upper and the
lower, and tighten the retaining screws with dynamometric wrench to the requested torque (see
section 8A01 A) (Fig.23)
Note : Make sure that the Belleville washers
remain in their position.
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2002

28. The special operation Set Right of the bearings
does not require specific registrations of preloading
or backlash. Anyway, before assembling new components check the indicated dimensions (Fig.24)
A= 08.450 to 08.500
B= 54.775 to 54.825
C= 23.070 to 23.172
29. Position the wheel hub on a workbench and force
both cups of the taper roller bearings in position with
the special tool code CA715026 (see J) under a
press or with a hammer (Fig.25)
Insert the seal ring into the wheel hub with the
30. Assemble the cone of the taper roller bearing on the
swivel housing end.
Assemble the wheel hub on the swivel housing and
fit the other cone of the taper roller bearing in position
(Fig.26)
31. Position the wheel carrier on a workbench and force
the bushes to the carrier surface level with the
special tool code CA715027 (see J).
At least two bushes (diametrically-opposed) should
be set slightly higher than the carrier surface level to
be used as dowel pins (Fig.26A).
8B03.11
Fig. 24
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
Fig. 26A
Issue 1
May 2002

8B03.12
32. Preassemble the wheel carrier-epicyclic ring gear

group with the special locking ring X shown in figure
(Fig.27)
33. Assemble the wheel carrier group on the wheel hub
using the two projecting bushes as dowel pins and
screw the relative screws in order to put in contact
the ring bevel gear with the wheel hub (Fig.28)
Danger
- Don't use the two screws you took to remove the
wheel carrier group from its housing (see operation
12).
34. Force all the hub dowel bushes completely with the
Assemble the wheel carrier fastening screws and
tighten to the requested torque (see section 8A01
A) (Fig.29).
X
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
Issue 1
May 2002
8B03.13
35. Insert a lever between the swivel houing and the

axle beam and fit it into the double U-joint. With the
lever push the double U-joint in the direction of the
final drive to make easier the lock ring insertion
(Fig.30).
Insert the two new thrust washerson the halfshaft
(Fig.31).
Warning : Check the correct insertion between
the bushings (Fig.31A).
Fig. 30
Fig. 31
Fig.31A
Issue 1
May 2002

8B03.14
Insert the new washer ref. CA 142017 with the lock

ring seat towards the external side (Fig.31B).
Side the new lock ring ref. CA 142018. Pay attention
not to damage the lock ring during the assembling
(Fig.31C).
Push the double U-joint thoroughly and check the
lock ring is correctly fitted in its seat (Fig.31D).
Fig. 31B
Fig. 31C
Fig. 31D
Issue 1
May 2002
8B03.15
G. Epicyclic reduction gear assembly

36. Collect all the components of the epicyclic reduction
gear (Fig.32)
37. Position the planetary carrier on a workbench.
Insert the lower thrust washer, the planetary gear,
the needle bearings and the two upper thrust washer
in the planetary carrier pins (Fig.33)
Note : Check correct positioning of lower thrust
washer in the lock pin. assemble the retaining
screw, then tighten the screws with dynanometric wrench to the requested torque.
38. Assemble a new O-ring on the wheel hub.
Assemble the epicyclic reduction gear on the wheel
hub (Fig.34)
Screw in the fastening screws and tighten with
dynamometric wrench to the requested torque (see
section 8A01 A).
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Fig. 34
Issue 1
May 2002

8B03.16
H . Toe-in adjustement
39. Put two equal one-meter-long linear bars on the
wheel sides and lock them with two nuts on the
wheel hub stud bolt (Fig. 35)
Warning : The two bars should be fixed on their
middle so that they are perpendicular to the
supporting surface and parallel to the pinion
shaft axis. Align the two bars.
40. Measure the distance in mm M between the bars
ends with a tapeline (Fig. 36)
Note : Keep the minimum value, swinging the
measurement point.
41. Check that the difference of the measurements E
between the wheel hubs diameters ends is within
the requested tolerance range (see Toe-in in sec.
8A01 A) (Fig. 37)
The prescribed value is referred to the external
diameter of the wheel hubs flange, therefore the
measured value M at the bars ends must be related
to the ratio between lenght of the bar and flange
diameter :
- toe-in (see section 8A01 A) = E 0-2
- measurement difference = M0-5
50 cm
50 cm
Fig. 35
Fig. 36
.
E0-2
A
.
M0-5
M
Fig. 37
Issue 1
May 2002
8B03.17
42. If toe-in is uncorrect, operate with two wrenches on

the guide rods screwing in and out the two joint tie
rods equally till the toe-in is within the requested
tolerance (Fig. 38)
43. After adjusting, screw in the lock nuts of the guide
rods to the requested tightening torque (see section
8A01 A) (Fig. 39)
Fig. 38
Fig. 39
Issue 1
May 2002

8B03.18
J. Steering angle adjustment

44. Use the same bars assembled for the toe-in adjustment and a long bar perfectly leaned over the
machined part of the central body (pinion side), so
that the two bars form an acute angle at the maximum steering (Fig. 40)
45. Adjust a goniometer to the requested angle (see
section 8A01 A) and position it on the long bar.
Move a wheel side till it forms, with the two bars, the
angle fixed by the goniometer (Fig. 41)
46. Adjust the steering mechanical retainer, screwing in
or out the special screws (Fig. 42), locking them with
a locknut to the requested tightening torque (see
section 8A01 A)
Steer completely towards the other side and repeat
the same operations.
Fig. 40
Fig. 41
Fig. 42
Issue 1
May 2002
8B03.19
K. Service tools
- CA 119055 - Bush driver (Fig. 43)
- CA 715097 - Oil seal driver (Fig. 44)
Fig. 43
Fig. 44
Fig. 45
Issue 1
May 2002

8B03.20
- CA 715026 - Bearing cone driver (Fig. 46)

Fig. 46
Fig. 47
Fig. 48
Issue 1
May 2002
8B03.21
- CA 715035 - Driver for king pin bush (Fig. 49)

Fig. 49
Fig. 50
Issue 1
May 2002
Front axle - Dana differential
8C01.1
8C01 Dana differential
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Splitting front axle / frame _______________________________
B.
Removing swivel housings, wheel hub and drive shafts ___
C.
Removing the differential housing assembly ______________
D.
Disassembling the differential ____________________________
E.
Removing the differential lock ___________________________
F.
Removing the crownwheel and drive pinion ______________
G.
Refitting the drive pinion and crownwheel ________________
H.
Reassembling the differential lock ________________________
12
I.
Piston leak test _________________________________________
14
J.
Refitting the differential housing assembly ________________
14
K.
Refitting swivel housings, wheel hub and drive shafts _____
14
L.
Assembling front axle / frame ____________________________
14
M.
Service tools ___________________________________________
15
Issue 1
May 2001

8C01.2
General
Whatever the type of front axle installed on 8200 series
tractors (AG 155H or AG 200H), the operating principles
and maintenance procedures remain similar.
- 8210 - 8220 - 8240 tractors
. AG 155H type
- 8240 (optional) - 8250 - 8260 tractors
. AG 200H type
Note however that the splined end of the drive pinion is
different on AG 200H front axles. This amendment
allows for a semi-rigid link between plate (45) and the
drive shaft.
The 8270 and 8280 tractors have a ZF front axle fitted with
a bevel gear of the same type (see section 8C02).
The bevel gear assembly containing the differential lock
mechanism is fitted in a housing (35) that has two halfbearings held by bolts (42).
The drive pinion is placed at the rear of the housing on two
opposing taper roller bearings. Its adjustment is carried
out via shim(s) (28) located behind the leading bearing.
The preloading of the bearings is obtained via shim(s)
(34) placed between bearing cone (32) and the shoulder
of the drive pinion.
The oil tightness is provided by seal (31) and Oring (29)
fitted on the drive pinion.
The adjustment of the crownwheel / drive pinion is
obtained via shim(s) (11) placed behind bearing cup (12).
The preloading of the housing and crownwheel assembly
is carried out via splined nut (24).
A plate riveted on the right-hand side of the housing
indicates the type and serial number of the front axle.
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Washer
Shim(s)
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Bolt
Cover
Half-housing
Planetary gear
Spherical washer
Planetary gear pins
Bolts
Sun gear
Bolt
Lock washer
Splined nut
Washer
Half-housing
Crownwheel
Shim(s)
Oring
Nut
Seal
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim
Housing
Deflector
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Drive pinion
Mobile coupler
Half-bearing
Bearing block bolt
Centring bush
Wear ring
Plate
Washer
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Snap ring
Tab washer
Oring
Piston
Friction washer
Spring
Locating pin
Oring
Guiding washer
Issue 1
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
Fig. 3
May 2001
8C01.3
Overall view
AG 155H
5
10
11
12
AG200H
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
39
47
38
40
25
39
26
37
35
38
27
28
44
37
28
42
42
44
36
22
35
23
34
33
43
32
31
30
29
24
22
34
33
32
29
43
31
23
45
24
46
41
30
41
Fig. 1
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
May 2001
Parts list
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
8C01.4
Exploded view
31
32
33
36
44
30
35
46
45
29
36
30
31
29
32
24
33
12
44
13
41
35
23
34
28
20
22
37
43
38
42
13
34
12
28
AG 200H
37
38
26
39
3
2
11
25
21
27
1
10
9
6
AG 155H
40
18
19
5
8
16
17
4
15
7
14
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
May 2001
8C01.5
A . Splitting front axle / frame

1. Drain the axle housing.
2. Split the axle and its bearing from the front frame (see
section 8F01).
35
B . Removing swivel housings,

wheel hub and drive shafts
Fig. 3A
Danger
- With the help of another operator, carefully carry out the
removal operation while taking into account the risks of
any unexpected tilting of the housing with its consequent weight.
3. Extract the steering ball joints.
4. Using a suitable sling, hold, then remove the swivel
housing assembly (see section 8B01 F).
C . Removing the differential housing assembly

5. Remove the swivel housing, wheel hub and drive
shaft assembly (see B). Remove the bolts holding
the steering ram and remove it.
6. Take out bolts (1) (Fig. 3A).
7. Release and remove the differential housing assembly (35) (Fig. 3A). If necessary, remove the deflector
(36).
Issue 1
May 2001
8C01.6
D . Disassembling the differential

8. Place housing (35) in a vice fitted with soft jaws
(Fig. 4)
9. Remove bolt (22) and its lock washer (23) (Fig. 4).
10. Remove the splined nut (24) using a special locally
manufactured wrench (see M).
11. Take out the four bolts (42), remove the half-bearing
(41) (Fig. 4).
24
42
35
23
Danger
27
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
- Carefully take off the half-bearing on the differential

lock control side, since spring (6) has been compressed during assembly. The washer (10) remains in housing (35).
Remove the entire differential assembly with bearing cones (13) and cups (12) (Fig. 5). Separate the
cups and cones. Remove shim(s) (11).
Remark
- If the bearings are to be reused, take care to match
the original cups and cones.
If necessary, extract the two cones (13).
Place the differential assembly in a vice fitted with
soft jaws. Remove bolts (20) and disassemble the
crownwheel (27).
Before disassembly, mark the position of halfhousings (16) (26) and cover (15). So that they can
be matched at reassembly. Remove bolts(14) and
separate the half-housings (16) and cover (15).
Remove the sun gear (21) and the washer (25).
Separate the two pins (19), the planetary gears (17)
and the spherical washers (18) (Fig. 6).
41
22
Fig. 4
12
13
Fig. 5
20
25
21
19
16
15
14
26
18
17
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

E . Removing the differential lock
(Fig. 7)
18. Using tool ref. MF471 correctly centred (see M),
compress spring (6) until washer (10) is released.
19. Remove washer (10).
20. Progressively, release the spring (6).
21. Remove the tool.
22. Remove the spring guiding washer (9).
23. Remove the spring (6).
24. Disassemble the snap ring (1) of coupler (40).
25. Remove the mobile coupler (40), friction washer (5)
and tab washer (2).
26. Remove piston (4).
27. Take off the Orings (3) (8).
8C01.7
40
10
3
Fig. 7
F . Removing the crownwheel and

drive pinion
Removing the crownwheel
Reminder
- The replacement of the crownwheel (27) necessarily
requires replacement of the drive pinion (39). Both the
crownwheel and drive pinion have the same number
engraved on them and they must be fitted as matched
pairs.
28. Take out bolts (20) and remove the crownwheel (27).
Issue 1
May 2001

8C01.8

29. Unlock nut (30).
AG 155H front axles
30. Unscrew the drive pinion clockwise (Fig. 9) using
wrench ref. 3378051M1 (Fig. 8) and a locally manufactured special sleeve C (Fig. 8) (see M).
AG 200H front axles
31. Unscrew the drive pinion clockwise using wrench
ref. 3378275M1 and flange ref. 33782267M1, (Fig.
8A and M).
32. Take out of the housing the drive pinion, cone (38),
shim (34) and Oring (29) assembly.
33. Separate the drive pinion, seal (29), shim (34).
34. Extract cone (38) from the drive pinion.
35. Extract cup (37) and remove shims (28).
36. Extract seal (31). Remove cone (32) and drive off cup
(33).
C
F
Fig. 8
Fig. 8A
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001

G . Refitting the drive pinion and
crownwheel
37. Before reassembly, clean and inspect all components and replace any parts found to be defective.
Check that the oil channel of the differential lock is
not obstructed.
d
C
SP
35
28
37
38
Fig. 10
+
9-
13
0
0,1
38. Adjust the position of the drive pinion (Fig. 10). The
thickness of shims necessary to correctly position
the drive pinion is calculated using the following
formula:
SP = C - E - (d r)
SP : Thickness of shims necessary (28)
C : Distance measured between thrust face of cup
(37) on housing (35) and machined face F.
d : Nominal distance of positioning drive pinion on
axles:
- AG 155H= 133.5 0.10
- AG200H = 139 0.10
E : Thickness of bearing (37) (38).
r : Actual dimension marked on drive pinion
(Fig. 11). This value may be either positive or
negative (add or deduct from nominal dimension d).
8C01.9
Procedure
39. Measure dimensions C and E using a depth gauge.
Note: Take care to correctly seat cone (38) in cup
(37).
40. When the dimensions are measured, apply the
formula in order to determine the thickness of the
shims required.
41. Insert the cone thrusting against the shoulder on the
drive pinion using a press and a suitable fixture
(Fig. 12).
42. Place the previously calculated thickness of shim(s)
(28) in the housing.
43. Insert cup (37) using an appropriate fixture.
44. Carry out the shimming of bearings (32) (33) (37)
(38).
r
Fig. 11
39
38
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001

8C01.10
Method
45. Place the prepared drive pinion in the housing (35)
thrusting against the cylindrical sleeve M as shown
in Fig. 13. Turn the housing several turns while
applying a strong pressure to correctly seat cone (38)
in cup (37).
46. Using an appropriate depth gauge, measure dimension F in accordance with the formula A - B (Fig. 13).
47. Press hard on cup (33) while turning it alternately left
and right in order to correctly seat cone (32). Measure dimension G (Fig. 13).
48. Determine thickness SP1 of shim (34) (Fig. 13) using
the formula:
(G + F) 0.05 (0.05 mm being the preload value).
49. Place cup (33) thrusting against the housing.
50. Slide the shim(s) (34) determined during operation 48
on to the drive pinion. Fit cone (32) and seal (29)
previously lubricated (Fig. 14).
51. Grease seal (31) and insert it home in the shoulder
using a locally manufactured tool (see M).
52. AG 155H front axles
- Assemble nut (30) lock it using wrench ref.
3378051M1. Using a special sleeve and a torque
wrench, turn the drive pinion then tighten to a torque
of 450 - 500 Nm (Fig. 15).
AG 200H front axles
- Assemble nut (30) and lock it with wrench ref.
3378275M1 and flange ref. 3378276M1, then tighten
to a torque of 450 - 500 Nm (Fig. 15).
53. Check the rotation torque of the drive pinion.
SP1
34
37
A
B
38
F
35
33
32
Fig. 13
29
32
34
Fig. 14
AG 155H
30
AG 200H
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2001
8C01.11
Method
54. On AG 155H front axles, turn the drive pinion several
turns using a dial torque wrench and the special
sleeve (Fig. 16) on AG 200H front axles use wrench
ref. 3378275M1. Check that the rotation torque of the
drive pinion is between 2 to 4 Nm.

Special point
- When repairing, use the bolts referenced in the spare
parts catalogue.
55. Clean the mating faces of the new crownwheel and
housing. Degrease the new bolts and lightly smear
with Loctite 270 or equivalent and screw them into
the crownwheel.
Tighten all the bolts to a torque of 140 - 155 Nm.
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2001

8C01.12
H . Reassembling the differential lock

56. Assemble the friction washer (5) on the mobile
coupler (40). Slide the assembly into piston (4). Fit
tab washer (2) and position snap ring (1) in the groove
of the mobile coupler.
57. In the housing without its seals, fit the piston (4) with
the mobile coupler (40).
Note: The pin (7) is force fitted into the piston.
Check that both the piston and pin slide freely in
the housing. Once this check has been carried
out, remove the piston and mobile coupler.
58. Fit new Orings (3) (8). Position the piston with the
mobile coupler then insert it by hitting around its rim
with a plastic hammer.
59. Position spring (6) and washer (9), with the shoulder
of the washer facing the spring. Place the assembly
under tension using tool MF 471 until washer (10)
slides freely in the groove of the housing.
60. Carefully loosen the tool so that the spring does not
escape.
61. Insert cone (13), if disassembled, on half-housing
(26) using a press or appropriate fixture (Fig. 17).
62. Insert the other cone (13), if disassembled, in cover
(15).
63. Assemble half-housing (16) in cover (15) (with coupler teeth) with regard to the marks made during
disassembly.
64. Position washer (25) on sun gear (21), place the
assembly in half-housing (16), while locating the
washer tab in one of the holes on the half-housing.
65. Place the four planetary gears (17) and four spherical
washers (18) on the two pins (19) then place the
assemblies in half-housing (16) inserting the washer
(18) tabs into the holes on the half-housing (16)
(Fig. 6).
66. Place the other washer (25) on the other sun gear
(21). Fit the assembly in half-housing (26) while
respecting the position of the washer (25) tab.
67. Position half-housing assembly (26) on half-housing
(16) with regard to the marks made during disassembly.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 17
13
26

68. Join together half-housings (16) (26) and cover (15).
Fit bolts (14) previously lightly smeared with Loctite
270. Tighten to a torque of 82 - 90 Nm.
Position crownwheel (27) on half-housing (26). Smear
bolts (20) with Loctite 270 and tighten to a torque of
140 - 155 Nm.
69. Position cups (12) on their cones (13).
70. Place shim(s) (11) on washer (10).
71. Place the crownwheel assembly in housing (35)
(Fig. 5). Check for the presence of centring bushes
(43). Position the half-bearings (41).
Moderately tighten bolts (42) so that cups (12) can
move freely.
72. Place the housing horizontally in a vice fitted with
soft jaws, the crownwheel facing upwards (Fig. 18).
73. Place a depth gauge. Tighten nut (24) (Fig. 18) and
turn the crownwheel several times while pushing
down vigorously on it in order to correctly seat the
bearing cones in their cups. Retighten the nut in order
to remove axial clearance.
74. Tighten nut (24) by three additional notches to obtain
the correct preload value.
75. Check the clearance between the teeth of the
crownwheel and drive pinion using a dial gauge
(Fig. 19). Take three measurements at equidistant
points. Calculate the average of the three measurements, to obtain a clearance of 0.18 mm - 0.23 mm.
If the value is too high, reduce the thickness of
shim(s) (11); if the value is too low, increase the
shim thickness until the correct clearance is obtained.
76. Remove one by one bolts (42) and smear them with
Loctite 270 then definitively tighten them to a torque
of 115 - 127 Nm.
77. Refit lock washer (23) on bolt (22) previously lightly
16 - 25 Nm. Lock nut (24) by bending the tab into its
corresponding slot.
8C01.13
24
27
Fig. 18
Fig. 19
27
Issue 1
May 2001

8C01.14
I . Piston leak test

78. Fit a pressure gauge fitted with an airtight valve on
to the supply side union of the differential lock.
79. Feed compressed air at approximately 5 bar into the
circuit and check for the movement of piston (4).
Bring the pressure down to 0.3 bar and close the
valve. No drop in pressure should be noted on the
pressure gauge for approximately 1 minute.
80. Remove the pressure gauge and valve.
J . Refitting swivel housings, wheel

hub and drive shafts
82. Check for the presence of bushes (47) on the axle
housing.
83. Smear the mating face of the differential housing
with the axle with a sealing compound such as
Loctite 510 or its equivalent, and screw in two
diametrically opposed guide studs.
Refit the housing assembly (35) (Fig. 3A).
84. Take out the guide studs. Fit and tighten bolts (1)
(Fig. 3A):
- AG 155H front axles: 125 - 140 Nm.
- AG 200H front axles: 215 - 235 Nm
Refit the swivel housings, wheel hubs and drive
shafts (see K).
85. Refit the steering ram. Smear the bolts with Loctite
270 and tighten to a torque of 180 - 200 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001
K . Refitting swivel housings, wheel

hub and drive shafts
Danger
- Reminder: With the assistance of another operator,
carefully carry out the refitting operation.
86. Using suitable slings raise, hold and then refit the
swivel housing assembly (see section 8B01, F).
L . Assembling front axle / frame

87. Couple the axle and its bearings to the front frame
(see section 8F01).
88. Top-up the oil level in the front axle housing oil level
and then check the levels in the drive units.
89. Carry out a road test of the front axle and the
differential lock control.
90. Check the oil tightness:
- of the seals and differential housing mating face,
- of the hydraulic unions.
8C01.15
M . Service tools
- MF 471 - Differential lock spring compression tool
(Fig. 20)
- 3378051M1 - AG 155H front axles - Drive pinion nut
wrench (Fig. 21)
- 3378275M1 - AG 200H front axles - C wrench for
drive pinion nut (Fig. 22)
- 3378276M1 - AG 200H front axles - B flange for
drive pinion plate (Fig. 22)
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Issue 1
May 2001

8C01.16
2. Locally manufactured tools

- Special wrench for splined nut (Fig. 23)
14
H M12
20
10
H M8
13
74
100
Fig. 23
- Special sleeve for tightening and rotation torque

of drive pinion - AG 155H front axles (Fig. 24).
H M18
H M8
3714416M2
Fig. 24
- Oil tightness bush insertion drift (Fig. 25)
+0,5
0
85
72
37,60
50
91,8
R=
30
22
25
1 x 45
94
107
Fig. 25
Issue 1
May 2001
Front axle - ZF differential
8C02.1
8C02 ZF differential
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Splitting front axle / frame _______________________________
B.
Removing the swivel housings ___________________________
C.
Removing the axle nose _________________________________
D.
Removing and refitting - disassembling and

reassembling the differential housing and crownwheel ____
Shimming the differential housing and adjusting

the backlash ____________________________________________
11
Removing and refitting the drive pinion, adjusting

the bevel gear distance and shimming the bearings _______
13
G.
Refitting the axle nose __________________________________
19
H.
Refitting the swivel housings ____________________________
19
I.
Assembling front axle / frame ____________________________
19
J.
Service tools ___________________________________________
20
E.
F.
Issue 1
May 2001

8C02.2
General
The 8270 and 8280 tractors are fitted with an APL 5052
front axle. This axle does not have a hydraulic differential
lock similar to the conventional front axles.
This front axle is fitted with an limited slippage system
which consists of friction disks (35) and intermediate
plates (36) integral with the left and right-hand side output
sun gears (34) and the half-housings of the differential
(17) (37).
This type of differential does not have a total self-locking
function.
The crownwheel / drive pinion assembly is fitted in
housing (7) and comprises two split bearings (18) held by
bolts. The drive pinion, located at the rear of the housing,
bears on two taper roller bearings. Its position is adjusted
by shim (23) inserted between the housing and the
bearing cup (21). The pre-loading of the bearings is
obtained by shim (9) placed between the shoulder of the
drive pinion and bearing cone (11).
Both the pre-loading of the differential housing assembly
and the drive pinion backlash is adjusted by castellated
nuts (4) fitted on either side of the differential housing.
The housing oil tightness is provided by a lip seal (12)
fitted in flange (13).
Parts list (Fig. 1)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Axle housing
Breather
Split pin
Castellated nut
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Housing
Bush
Shim
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Lip seal
Flange
Bolt
Issue 1
May 2001
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
Ring
Bolt
Half-housing
Half-bearing
Crownwheel
Drive pinion
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Shim (bevel gear)
Planetary gear pin
Planetary gear
Dust cover
Spherical washer
Plate
Washer
Nut
Level plug and seal
Drain plug and seal
Bolt
Sun gear
Friction disks
Intermediate plates
Half-housing
Washer
Bolt
Bolt
Tab washer
Bolt
Fig. 1
Exploded view
8C02.3
15
42
13
14
12
10
11
9
8
4
5
27
5
25
24
18
30
29
28
16
27
26
25
24
4
40
17
36
23
21
22
20
2
27
19
34
25
41
25
27
35
31
36
37
34
33
38
39
35
41
32
Fig. 1
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001

8C02.4
Issue 1
May 2001
8C02.5
A . Splitting front axle / frame

1. Drain the axle housing (1)
2. Split the axle and its main support bearings (see
section 8F02).
B . Removing the swivel housings

Danger
- Using a suitable sling, hold and then remove the entire
swivel housing assembly accompanied by the universal drive shaft (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2
3. Take off:
- the swivel pin grease nipples
- the arm on the upper swivel pin
- the cover on the lower swivel pin
Note: Visually note the location of the shims and
bearing cones.
1
Remark
- A 45 grease nipple is fitted on the lower swivel pin.
Reminder
- Take care not to damage the seals and dust covers
fitted on the axle housing when the removing the
universal drive shaft.
Fig. 3
C . Removing the axle nose

4. Take out bolts (33). Mark the position of the differential
housing on the axle housing (1) by two opposing paint
marks T (Fig. 3) in order to later refit the assembly
in its original position.
Lift and remove the housing using an appropriate
fixture (Fig. 3).
Issue 1
May 2001

8C02.6
D . Removing and refitting - disassembling and reassembling the differential housing and crownwheel
Removal (Fig. 4)
5. Mark the position of the half-bearings (18) on the
housing (7) using two opposing paint marks T so
as to be able to replace them in their original
positions on reassembly.
6. Take off and discard the two split pins (3). Unscrew
the castellated nuts (4) using a suitable locally
manufactured tool.
7. Cut and remove the steel wire F that locks bolts
(40). Take out the bolts fitted with their washers.
8. Remove the half-bearings and bearing cups (5). Take
out the differential housing from the housing (7) (Fig.
5)
Remark
- If they are to be re-used, match the cups and cones
together.
1
1
F
T
40
40
18
Refitting
Reminder
- The bearing cups and cones must be lubricated with oil
having an 80W/90 viscosity grade before assembly.
9. Place the differential housing in the housing with the
bearing cones.
10. Position the half-bearings in accordance with the
previously made marks.
11. Fit bolts (40) equipped with their washers and tighten
them to a torque of 150 Nm.
12. Lock the bolts by tying them in pairs using new steel
wire. Twist the ends of the wire together correctly.
13. Carry out the shimming of the differential housing
bearing cones and cups (6) (5) (see E).
14. Adjust the crownwheel and drive pinion backlash
(see E).
7
1
1
4
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
8C02.7
Disassembling the differential housing

15. Place the differential housing on a workbench with
the crownwheel (19) turned downwards (Fig. 6).
16. Mark the position of the differential half-housings
(17) (37) with two opposing paint marks (Fig. 6).
17. Remove the bolts fitted with their washers.
18. Separate the half-housings while holding the upper
sun gear (34) (Fig. 7) comprising:
- the disks
- the intermediate plates
- the tab washer
19. One by one, separate the disks (35), the intermediate plates (36) and tab washer (41) from the sun gear
(34) while visually noting their location (Fig. 8).
20. Take apart the planetary gear pins (24), the planetary
gears (25) and spherical tab washers (27) (Fig. 9).
21. Take out the lower sun gear (34) and one-by-one
remove the disks, intermediate plates and halfhousing (17) tab washer and visually note their
location.
22. If required, extract the bearing cones from each halfhousing using a locally manufactured tool.
37
17
19
Fig. 6
34
Fig. 7
Fig. 9
35
36
25
41
34
Fig. 8
24
Issue 1
27
24
May 2001

8C02.8

Reminder
- The replacement of the crownwheel necessarily requires replacement of the drive pinion. Both parts have
the same number engraved on them.
- They must be fitted as matched pairs.
23. Take out bolts (16) (Fig. 10) and extract the crownwheel from the half-housing (17).
16
Reassembling the crownwheel

Important: During repairs, use new bolts referenced
in the Spare Parts catalogue.
24. Clean the mating faces of the new crownwheel and
half-housing. Check that there is no traces of shock.
25. Using an oven only, heat the crownwheel to a temperature of 95 C and insert it thrusting against the
half-housing.
26. Degrease the new bolts and lightly smear the threads
with Loctite 270 or its equivalent and screw them
into the crownwheel. Tighten all the bolts to a torque
of 190 Nm.
Fig. 10
34
36
41
Reassembling the differential housing

- If disassembled, insert the new or re-used bearing
cones on the shoulder of each half-housing.
35
Reassembling the differential limited slip lock
Important: The friction disks (35), intermediate plates
(36) and tab washers (41) must be replaced.
27. Pile and alternate four disks (35), five intermediate
plates (36) and one tab washer (41) on the lower sun
gear (Fig. 11) beginning with the tab washer (41)
which has a greater thickness than the friction disks.
Special point
- The shiny face of the tab washer must face the sun
gear.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 11

28. Return the previously assembled sun gear to the
half-housing (17).
29. Assemble the four planetary gears (25), the four
spherical washers (27) on the two pins (24) then
place the assembly in the half-housing by placing
tabs E of each spherical washer in contact with
the half-housing (17) in accordance with Fig. 12.
30. Pile and alternate the friction disks, intermediate
plates and tab washer on the upper sun gear (34)
(Fig. 13) according to the procedure described in
operation 27.
31. Return the previously assembled sun gear to the
half-housing (37).
32. Check that the tabs of the spherical washers (27) are
in contact with the half-housing (17).
33. Place the half-housing (37) according to the paint
marks made during the disassembly of half-housing
(17) while holding manually the upper sun gear and
pile of friction disks, intermediate plates and thrust
washer.
34. Provisionally fit four diametrically opposed bolts (39)
with their washers and tighten to a torque of 120 Nm.
8C02.9
Fig. 12
25
24
36
27
24
17
35
41
34
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001

8C02.10
Adjusting the differential lock

Principle
- In order for the limited slip differential housing to function correctly there must be a space of 0.1 to 0.2 mm
between the friction disks and the intermediate plates.
For this, carry out the following adjustment.
41
37
Adjustment
Remark
- The adjustment is carried out on each sun gear.
34
Sun gear opposite the crownwheel
35. Place the index of a dial gauge on tab washer (41)
which is accessible via one of the four ports machined in the half-housing (37) (Fig. 14).
36. Set the needle of the dial gauge to zero.
37. Manually apply pressure from top to bottom or vice
versa on the sun gear (34) through the lateral recesses in the half-housing (Fig. 14) and calculate the
gap after reading the dial gauge.
Note: If the gap is between 0.1 mm and 0.2 mm
the adjustment is correct. Otherwise, replace
the intermediate plates (36) by thicker or thinner
plates in order to obtain the previously stated
clearance.
Remark
- There are three thicknesses of intermediate plates
referenced in the Spare Parts catalogue:
. 1.8 mm
. 1.9 mm
. 2 mm
38. Use the previously mentioned method for the sun
gear on the crownwheel side (Fig. 15)
Remark
- The half-housing (17) does not have lateral recesses. Manually access the sun gear via the central
bore.
39. When the adjustment phase is completed, take out
the four bolts and washers that were provisionally
tightened and then fit all the bolts (39), with their
threads lightly smeared with Loctite 242 or its
equivalent. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 120 Nm.
40. Manually check for the rotation of the sun gears
using a locally manufactured tool matching the
splines on the sun gears.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 14
17
34
41
Fig. 15
8C02.11
E . Shimming the differential housing and adjusting the backlash

Note: If replacement is necessary of the housing (7),
bevel gear and drive pinion (see F), carry out a
shimming of the differential housing and an adjustment of the backlash.
17

41. Refit the differential housing in the housing (see D).
42. Place the axle nose vertically on an appropriate
fixture.
Shimming the differential housing

43. Install a dial gauge, the index touching the machined
end of the half-housing (17) (Fig. 16).
Important: Before carrying out shimming, check
that the crownwheel does not overload the drive
pinion.
44. Using two diametrically opposed levers, exert an
axial pressure on the differential housing first frontward then rearwards in order to correctly seat the
cones (6) in bearing cups (5).
45. Screw down the castellated nut (4) facing the
crownwheel to remove the axial clearance at the
differential housing. During the operation, check for
the correct rotation of the assembly.
46. After removing the clearance, turn the previously
mentioned nut by two additional notches in order to
apply the correct pre-loading on bearings (5) (6).
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2001

8C02.12
Adjusting the backlash

Reminder
- the adjustment of backlash is carried out after shimming the differential housing. It ensures the reliability
and correct operation of the bevel gear.
Adjustment
47. Place the index of a dial gauge half way down a tooth
on the crownwheel (19) (Fig. 17).
48. Move the differential housing towards the drive
pinion by successively screwing and unscrewing
nuts (4) (Fig. 17) by the same amount.
49. With care, move the crownwheel forward and backward without actually turning the drive pinion in order
to read the value of the backlash on the dial gauge
(Fig. 17).
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 17
291 / 0,18
291/0,18
Important
50. Carry out three measurements at three equidistant
points on the crownwheel and calculate the average
of the three readings, so as to obtain a backlash
corresponding to the decimal number stamped on
the rim of the crownwheel (Fig. 18) within a tolerance
of 10%.
Example: 291 / 0.18
- 291 = matching set number
- 0.18 = correct value of backlash
51. When the correct backlash has been obtained, fit
and bend the new pins (3) in order to immobilise the
castellated nuts (4).
Notes:
- If the notch of the nut is not aligned with the
hole of the half-bearing pin, continue tightening until the next notch.
- Manually check for the rotation of the differential housing.
19
Fig. 18

Checking the bearing of the crownwheel on the
drive pinion
52. Using a marker product, mark the teeth of the
crownwheel (19) at three equidistant points (Fig. 19).
53. Turn the crownwheel several times and visually
check the traces of the crownwheel on the drive
pinion.
Note: If the traces are doubtful, check or adjust
the backlash and/or bevel gear distance again.
8C02.13
19
Fig. 19
F . Removing and refitting the drive

pinion, adjusting the bevel gear distance and shimming the bearings
54. Remove the axle nose (see C) and take out the
differential housing (see D).
Removal
Reminder
- Re-used bearing cups and cones must be matched
pairs.
55. Loosen and take off nut (30) using a standard socket
and holding clamp ref. 5870 240 002 (see J) from
plate (28).
56. Remove the plate and recover washer (29).
57. Take out bolts (14) and remove ring (15).
58. Take out bolts (42) and extract flange (13).
59. Force off the drive pinion fitted with bearing cone (22)
using a press and take it out through the rear of the
housing.
60. Recover shim (9) and extract bearing cone (22) using
a locally manufactured tool.
61. Extract the bearing cups (10) (21) from the housing
and recover shim (23) that positions the drive pinion.
62. Drive the lip seal (12) off the flange (13).
Issue 1
May 2001
8C02.14
18
b
SP
23
7
22
21
e
Fig. 22
18
18
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2001
8C02.15
Refitting
be defective.
64. Lightly smear the external diameter of seal (12) with
Loctite 640 or its equivalent and insert it to within 8
mm from the external edge of flange (13) (Fig. 20)
using tool, ref. 5870 055 017 and handle, ref. 5870
260 002 (see J).
13
Adjusting the bevel gear distance

Important
- If the crownwheel and drive pinion must be replaced,
both parts must be replaced together. They are matched
pairs with a number (e.g. 291) engraved both on the
front face of the drive pinion (Fig. 21) and on the rim of
the crownwheel (Fig. 18).
12
Fig. 20
Reminders
- As with the backlash, the adjustment of the bevel gear
distance is of firts importance. It ensures the reliability
and the correct operation of the drive / crownwheel
assembly.
- It is essential to first adjust the bevel gear distance and
then carry out the shimming of the drive pinion.
291
Remark
- The adjustment of the bevel gear distance is carried out
using a service tool made up from rod ref. 5870 500 001
and two bushes ref. 5870 500 010, held by the two halfbearings (18) (see Fig. 22 - 23 and J).
r
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2001

8C02.16
Adjustment (Fig. 22)

Note: The thickness of shim(s) necessary to correctly position the drive pinion is calculated using
the following formula:
SP = A (b + d + e)
SP : Thickness of shim(s) (23) to be fitted
A : Dimension measured between the housing (7)
mating face and the top of the measurement
axis
b : Radius of measurement axis
d : The nominal positioning dimension stamped
into front face of drive pinion (Fig. 21).
Caution: do not confuse the positioning dimension with the matched pairs numbering
e : Thickness of bearings (21) (22)
r : Possible correction factor (e.g. 0.05) engraved
on the forward face of the drive pinion (Fig. 21).
Special point
- In the given example, the negative r value is subtracted from the nominal dimension d.
Procedure
65. Measure dimension of A using tools, ref. 5870 500
001 and 5870 500 010 (see J) and in accordance
with Fig. 22 and 23.
66. Measure dimension e of bearing (21) (22) using a
depth gauge (Fig. 22).
Special point
- Take care to correctly seat bearing cone (22) in cup
(21).
67. After having taken the measurements, use the
previously stated formula to calculate the thickness
of shim(s) required.
bearing cone (22) against the shoulder of the drive
pinion.
69. Place the previously calculated thickness of shim(s)
(23) in the housing. Insert the bearing cups (21) (10)
using a press and an appropriate fixture.
70. Lubricate the bearing cones and cups and carry out
the shimming of the drive pinion.
71. Install the pre-assembled drive pinion in the housing.
Issue 1
May 2001
8C02.17
Shimming the drive pinion bearings

Remarks
- The shimming of the drive pinion bearings requires
calibrated ring ref. 5870 340 010 (see J).
- This ring has three mecanindus pins G fitted in opening holes 120 apart (Fig. 24).
- Before using the calibrated ring, push the three pins as
far out as they will go without losing them.
- The function of this tool is to measure the space between the shoulder of the drive pinion and the inner ring
of bearing cone (22) after tightening to a preset tightening torque.
- The shim (9) to fit, will therefore be equal to the gap
measured, in order to provide the correct pre-loading of
the drive pinion bearings.
72. Slide the previously mentioned tool on to drive pinion

(20), with pins G thrusting against the shoulder of the
pinion (Fig. 25).
73. Using an oven, only heat the inner ring of bearing
cone (22) to 95 C. Slide the bearing rapidly on to the
drive pinion in contact with the tool.
74. Provisionally fit the plate (28), washer (29) and nut
(30) after having lubricated the threads of the drive
pinion. Tighten nut (30) to a torque of:
- 2 Nm to 3 Nm for new bearings
- 1.5 Nm to 2 Nm for re-used bearings
Note: Turn the drive pinion several times and
check the tightening torque.
75. Take off the nut, washer and plate.
76. Drive off the drive pinion using a press and take it out
through the rear of the housing.
77. Recover the tool.
78. Measure dimension X on the tool in accordance
with Fig. 24. The thickness of the shim is equivalent
to measurement X.
Reminder
- Measurement X is obtained by forcing the mecanindus pins into the disc of the tool applying the
preset torque.
30
12
Fig. 24
20
Fig. 25
Issue 1
May 2001

8C02.18
79. Refit the drive pinion in the housing then slide on

shim (9) as determined in operation 78, with chamfer
C facing the drive pinion.
80. Using an oven, only heat the inner ring of bearing
cone (11) to 95 C and definitively slide the bearing
against the shim.
81. Lubricate the lips of seal (12). Lightly smear the
mating face of flange (13) with housing (7) with
Loctite 510 or its equivalent. Fit the flange. Tighten
bolts (42).
82. Fit ring (15) and tighten bolts (14).
83. Refit plate (28) and washer (29).
84. Degrease the threads of the drive pinion and the nut.
Smear the threads of the nut with Loctite 270 or its
equivalent and tighten to a torque of 350 Nm using a
standard socket and the flange used during removal.
30
28
29
Fig. 26
Final operation
85. Refit the differential housing (see D) and the axle
nose (see G).
C
9
Fig. 27
Issue 1
May 2001
8C02.19
G . Refitting the axle nose
I . Assembling front axle / frame
86. Clean the mating faces on differential housing (7)

and axle housing (1).
87. Smear the mating face of the differential housing
with Loctite 510 or its equivalent, taking care that it
does not enter the tapped holes.
the axle housing (optional).
89. Refit the housing using an appropriate fixture and
position it according to the marks made when
removing it.
90. Fit and tighten bolts (33) to a torque of 190 Nm.
95. Assemble the front axle and bearings with the main
stand (see section 8F02).
96. Top up the oil level in the front axle housing and
check the oil level in drive units.
97. Carry out a road test of the front axle and the
differential lock with limited slippage.
98. Check for the oil lightness of the mating face of the
differential housing and plate. (28).
H . Refitting the swivel housings

Danger
- Carefully carry out the refitting operation with the assistance of another operator.
91. Using a sling, refit the entire assembly of each
swivel housing, taking care not to damage the dust
cover and lip seal when introducing the universal
drive shaft into the axle housing.
92. Fit:
- the bearing cones and shims in their initial location
- the cover on the lower swivel pin
- the arm on the upper swivel pin
93. Tighten the cover and arm bolts to 190 Nm.
94. Fit the grease nipples taking into account the remark
in B. Using a grease gun, moderately lubricate the
swivel pin bearings.
Issue 1
May 2001

8C02.20
J . Service tools
- 5870 055 017 - Insertion drift for lip seal (Fig. 28).
- 5870 240 002 - Holding clamp for the drive pinion
plate (Fig. 29).
- 5870 260 002 - Handle for the insertion drift for the
lip seal (Fig. 30).
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
Fig. 30
Issue 1
May 2001
8C02.21
- 5870 500 001 - Rod for bevel gear adjustment tool

(Fig. 31).
- 5870 500 010 - Bevel gear adjustment rings (Fig. 31).
- 5870 340 010 - Drive pinion calibration ring (Fig. 32).
Fig. 31
Fig. 32
Issue 1
May 2001
Front axle - Carraro differential
8C03.1
8 C03 Carraro differential
CONTENTS
-
General _______________________________________________
A. Splitting front axle / frame ______________________________
B. Removing swivel housings, wheel hub and drive shafts ___
C.
Disassembling the differential support group ____________
D. Pinion group disassembly ______________________________
E. Differential group disassembly __________________________
F.
Pinion group assembly _________________________________
10
G. Differential group assembly _____________________________
14
H. Differential carrier group assembly _______________________
16
I.
22
Service tools __________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.2
General
Some of the following pictures may not show exactly
your axle, but the process is the same.
A. Splitting front axle / frame

1. Drain the axle housing.
2. Split the axle and its bearing from the front frame (see
section 8F02).
B. Removing swivel housings,

wheel hub and drive shafts
With the help of another operator, carefully carry out the
removal operation while taking into account the risks of
any unexpected tilting of the housing with its consequences weight.
3. Extract the steering ball joints.
4. Using a suitable sling, hold, then remove the swivel
housing assembly (see section 8B02)
Issue 1
May 2002
8C03.3
C. Disassembling the differential

support group
5. Remove the fastening screw B and the nut from the
flange A (Fig. 1).
Take the flange out, then collect the seal ring C.
ring.
6. Loosen and remove the screws on the differential
support.
Remove the differential carrier (Fig. 2).
Warning : Support the differential carrier with a
rope or other appropriate means.
7. Loosen and remove the screws A to take out the two
ring nut retainers B (Fig. 3).
C
B
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.4
8. Before removing the bolts, mark both half-collars

and the differential carrier with permanent reference
marks to avoid inverting them during re-assembly.
Mark the area between the ring nuts and the differential carrier as well (Fig. 4).
9. Unscrew the adjuster ring nuts using tools CA119030
(see I) and CA119049 (see I) (Fig.5).
Note : The two ring nuts are different, so take
note of their position with regard to the bevel
crown gear.
10. Remove the 4 screws A and remove both halfcollars B.
Check that the bushes C remain in their housings
(Fig.6).
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002
8C03.5
11. Take out the differential case.

Remove and collect from ring gear side, the spacer
E with its seal rings D assembled, the washer F and
the cup bearings, which are removed together with
the differential case (Fig. 7).
Warning : Dont mismatch the cup bearings if
they are not to be replaced.
12. Collect the washer G and the O-Ring H from the
bearing seat on the ring gear side (Fig. 8).
D
D
E
F
Fig. 7
G
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.6
D. Pinion group disassembly

13. Fit the differential carrier in a vise.
Unscrew the lock nut using special tools CA119099
(see I) and CA715022 (see I) (Fig.9)
Note : This operation will irretrievably damage
the ring nut.
14. Remove the ring nut A and collect its retaining
washer B (Fig.10).
15. Tap the shaft with a soft hammer to remove the
bevel pinion C.
Warning : Take care not to drop the pinion.
Collect the washers, the collapsible spacer D and
the inner cone E of the tapered roller bearing (Fig. 11).
Fig. 9
B
A
Fig. 10
E
D
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002
8C03.7
16. Place the differential carrier on a flat surface as

shown in the figure and remove the outer cups of the
taper roller bearing using a drift and a hammer (Fig.
12).
17. To remove the inner cone of the tapered roller bearing
of the pinion, use a standard extractor.
Collect the bearing cone and the underlying shim.
18. Check all pinion components for wear (Fig. 13).
The ring nut and the collapsible spacer must be
replaced when reassembling the unit (Fig. 14).
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.8
E. Differential group disassembly

19. Collect the differential and close it in a clamp.
Unscrew the fastening screws and remove the
bevel gear crown (Fig. 15).
Warning : This will make both differential half
boxes free, so take care not to drop the internal
components.
20. Disassemble the cover A from the differential box C
then remove the piston B (Fig. 16).
Collect the O-Rings from the cover and from the
differential lock piston (inner and outer housings).
21. Disassemble the plates, drive-plates and planetary
gear D from the differential box (Fig. 17).
Note : Separate, carefully clean and examine the
removed components, checking their wear and
operating conditions.
Fig. 15
A
B
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2002
8C03.9
22. Using a thin punch, pull out the three locking pins in
order to take out the short and the long pins (Fig. 18).
23. Disassemble the planetary carrier and collect all the
components inside the differential box: sun gears,
thrust washers, spider, planetary gear (Fig. 19).
Note: Check the operating and wear conditions
of all the components.
24. Take the bearings out of the differential half boxes
and from the cover, using a three-hold extractor (Fig.
20).
Fig. 18
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.10
F. Pinion group assembly

25. Place the differential support on a workbench.
Fit the outer cups of the new bearings using the
special drifts, ref. CA119225 (see I) and CA715092
(see I), a hammer and the drift CA119033 for final
positioning (Fig. 21).
26. In order to measure the distance, use the kit consisting of the special tools called false pinion CA119202
and false differential box CA119182 and CA119228
(see I) (Fig. 22).
27. Insert the false pinion with CA119202 , together with
its bearings and its ring nut, in the just mounted
housings for the bearings.
Tighten without exceeding, till the backlash is eliminated.
Install special tools CA119182 and CA119228 (see
I) to the differential group supports and screw in the
half collar bolts (Fig. 23);
Note : For all special tools here above advised,
see section C02 I.
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2002

28. Assembly diagram of the tools code CA119182 (see
I) and CA119228 on the bearing differential carrier
seats.
Use a depth gauge to measure distance V (distance
between the axis of the differential bearings and the
point at which the pinion head is supported, or base
of the bearing) (Fig. 24)
29. In order to determine the necessary thickness S
between the pinion and the bearing, subtract the
value V, stamped on the pinion head (V=requested
conical distance), from the measured value B (Fig.
25) :
S=B-V
30. Select the thickness S from the range of available
shims, and fit to shaft under the pinion head.
Note : take care to assemble correctly.
8C03.11
Fig. 24
SHIM RANGE
Thickness 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2 3.3 3.4
Q.ty
31. Once you have chosen and inserted the suitable

shim with the chamfer against the gear, force the
bearing into the pinion shaft end with special tool
CA715004 (see I) under a press, making sure that
it is well set.
Insert the shims and a new elastic spacer (Fig. 26).
Note : use always a new elastic spacer.
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.12
32. Insert the bevel pinion unit into the differential housing (from the internal side) and install the assembly
(with the bevel pinion oriented downwards) on a
hydraulic press equipped with a pressure gauge in
order to read the press fit pressure.
Insert a suitable shim between the bevel pinion and
the press bench so as to exert an opposing force to
the bearing press fit pressure.
Insert the second bearing cone at the pinion end
(Fig. 27), then the tool CA715004 (see I).
Press fit the bearing until the load in the press jack
reaches 3 tons as a maximum.
Remove the press assembly.
33. Insert a ring nut washer and screw a new lock ring
nut on the pinion end (Fig. 28).
34. Screw the ring nut in, using the wrench for ring nut
(CA119099) (see I) and for pinion retainer CA715022
(see I) (Fig. 29).
Warning : The torque setting is given by the
preloading measurement on bearings. Tighten
the ring nut gradually.
Note :
- If the tightening is excessive, the elastic spacer
must be replaced and the procedure repeated.
- When you check the preloading, it is advisable
to beat slightly both pinion ends with a soft
hammer, so as to help setting the bearings.
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
Fig. 29
Issue 1
May 2002
8C03.13
35. Carry out the torque measurement P of the pinion

taper roller bearings, using a dynamometer whose
cord is wound on the end of pinion spline.
The adjustment is carried out by increasing the ring
nut torque gradually, being careful not to exceed (Fig.
30).
Warning : All torques must be measured without the seal ring.
P = 1,82 to 2,72 Nm
Record the value, since it will be used in operation 50.
36. Once the requested torque value is achieved, caulk
the ring nut, using a hammer and a chisel (Fig. 31).
Fig. 30
Fig. 31
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.14
G. Differential group assembly

37. Assemble the cones of the new taper roller bearings
on the half boxes, using the special tool code
CA715093 (see I) and a hammer (Fig. 32).
38. Position a half box on a workbench and assemble all
its inner components (thrust washer, planetary gears,
sun gears, thrust washers, spider), as shown in
figure.
Insert the short pins and the long pin in their housings,
constraining appropriately the planetary gears and
the spider (Fig. 33).
39. Lock the just assembled pins inserting the relative
lock pins in the holes on the box and on the pins.
Rotate the pins by hand, in order to align the locking
pins holes to those on the box.(Fig. 34).
Note : Insert completely the lock pins.
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Fig. 34
Issue 1
May 2002
8C03.15
40. Position all the inner components into the box sun
gear, discs and counterdiscs (Fig. 35).
41. Position new O-Rings well lubricate in the relative
housings on the piston and on the differential box
cover.
Insert the piston and assemble the cover in the
differential box (Fig. 36).
42. Position the bevel crown gear on the cover, apply
Loctite 270 on the threads and fix the whole, tightening the screws to the requested torque (see
section 8A01 A) (Fig. 37).
Fig. 35
Fig. 36
Fig. 37
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.16
H. Differential carrier group assembly

43. Assemble the outer cups of the taper roller bearings
on both differential box bearings and on the bevel
gear side: the washer and the spacer with new seal
rings already assembled with a light grease layer
(Fig. 38).
44. Before positioning the differential box on the differential carrier, insert a new O-ring B and the washer A
in the bearing seat, at the bevel crown side, on the
hydraulic oil hole.
Position the complete differential box on the differential carrier (Fig. 39).
Warning : Take care not to invert the outer cups
of the taper roller bearings and check the right
side of the bevel crown assembly.
45. Move the differential group so to place the bevel
crown gear on the pinion.
Note :
- The insertion of a scriber (or equivalent) through
the oil inlet port will make the positioning of the
housing easier.
Check that all bushes E are in their housings and
position both half collars D on their seats using the
previously traced reference marks.
Lock both collars with their fastening bolts C (Fig.
40).
Fig. 38
Fig. 39
Fig. 40
Issue 1
May 2002

46. Assemble and tighten both adjustment ring nuts in
the differential support with special tools CA119030
(see I) and CA119149 (see I), till the backlash is
eliminated and the differential bearings are slightly
preloaded.
Note : The 2 ring nuts are different, so take care
not to invert their position with regard to the
bevel crown gear.
Check that the differential bearings are well settled;
if necessary, knock slightly with a soft hammer, in
order to properly set the bearings in position (Fig. 41).
47. Position a magnetic-base dial gauge on the differential carrier, so that the feeler stylus touches the
surface of one tooth of the crown gear with a 90
angle (Fig. 42).
Lock the pinion and move the crown gear alternatively and note the pinion-ring gear backlash, measured with the comparator.
Repeat the operation on 2 or more points (teeth),
rotating the crown gear, so that to obtain an average
value.
Check if the measured backlash value is within the
requested range :
0.18 to 0.23 mm
Carry out the adjustment by operating on the 2 ring
nuts with the appropriate tools CA119030 (see I)
and CA119149 (see I) (Fig. 43).
8C03.17
Fig. 41
Fig. 42
Fig. 43
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.18
48. Adjust the ring nuts, remembering that:

- if the measured backlash is less than the given
tolerance range, unscrew the ring nut on the bevel
crown gear side and screw in the opposite one by
the same measure;
- if the measured backlash is greater than the given
tolerance range, unscrew the ring nut on the side
opposite to the bevel crown gear, and screw in the
other one by the same measure.
49. Once the adjustment of the pinion-ring gear backlash
has been carried out, check also that there is a
minimum preloading on the differential box bearings.
Repeat the whole sequence of the above mentioned
operations till the indicated conditions are reached.
50. Once the pinion-ring gear backlash has been established, measure the total torque T of the bearings
(pinion-crown bevel gear system), using a
dynamometer whose cord is wound on the pinion
splined end. The measured value should be within
the following range:
T = (P + 1,82) (P + 2,12) Nm
where P is the effectively measured pinion torque
((see F, operation 36)..
Warning : All torques must be measured without seal ring.
If the measurement is not within the requested
range, check well the assembly of each component
and operate on the adjusting ring nuts of the differential support:
- if the total torque is less than the given range, screw
in both ring nuts by the same measure, keeping the
pinion-ring gear backlash value unchanged;
- if the total torque is greater than the given range,
unscrew both ring nuts by the same measure,
keeping the pinion-ring gear backlash value unchanged.
Fig. 44
Fig. 45
Fig. 45
Issue 1
May 2002
8C03.19
Generic information
51. To test the marks of the bevel gear teeth, paint the
ring gear with red lead paint.
The marking test should be always carried out on the
ring bevel gear teeth and on both sides (Fig. 47).
52. OK = Correct contact
If the bevel gear is well adjusted, the mark on the
teeth surfaces will be regular.
- Z : Excessive contact on the tooth tip
Approach the pinion to the ring bevel gear and then
move the ring bevel gear away from the pinion in
order to adjust the backlash.
- X : Excessive contact at the tooth base
Move the pinion away from the ring bevel gear and
then approach the ring bevel gear to the pinion in
order to adjust the backlash (Fig. 48)
53. Movements to correct :
1 move the pinion for type X contact adjustment
2 move the pinion for type Z contact adjustment
(Fig. 49).
Fig. 47
Z
OK
Fig. 48
Fig. 49
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.20
54. Once all the adjustment operations have been completed, fit the adjuster ring nut retainers and their
respective screws, tightening them to the requested
torque (see section 8A01 A) with a dynamometric
wrench (Fig. 50).
Warning : The ring nut and the relative locking
plate from the crown side are different from
them on the opposite differential box side; turn
the ring nuts slightly in order to align them to
the related retainer.
55. Tighten the bolts of both half collars to the requested
torque (see section 8A01 A) with a dynamometric
wrench (Fig. 51).
56. Before matching 2 surfaces, make sure they are
perfectly clean. Degrease and clean them with
appropriate detergents.
Spread a film of Loctite 510 on the contact surface
between the axle beam and the differential carrier.
Position the differential carrier on the axle housing,
and tighten the retaining screws to the requested
torque (see section 8A01 A) (Fig. 52).
Fig. 50
Fig. 51
Fig. 52
Issue 1
May 2002

57. Assemble a new well lubricated seal ring C on the
pinion end, using the special tool CA119148, then
assemble the flange A.
Fit the flange fastening screws B with the relative
nuts on the flange.
Tighten screws and nuts with dynamometric wrench
to the requested torque (see section 8A01 A) (Fig.
53).
8C03.21
C
B
Fig. 53
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.22
I. Service tools
- CA 119030 - Ring nut wrench (Fig. 54)
- CA 119099 - Pinion lock nut wrench (Fig. 55)
Fig. 54
Fig. 55
Fig. 56
Issue 1
May 2002
8C03.23
- CA 119149 - Ring nut wrench (Fig. 57)

- CA 119182 - False differential box (Fig. 58)
- CA 119202 - False pinion (Fig. 59)
Fig. 57
Fig. 58
Fig. 59
Issue 1
May 2002

8C03.24
- CA 119225 - Bearing cup driver (Fig. 60)

- CA 119228 - False differential box (Fig. 61)
Fig. 60
Fig. 61
Fig. 62
Issue 1
May 2002
8C03.25
- CA 715022 - Pinion shaft lock wrench (Fig. 63)

Fig. 63
Fig. 64
Fig. 65
Issue 1
May 2002
Front axle - 2 WD front axle
8D01.1
8 D01 2 WD front axle
CONTENTS
-
General _____________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the steering arm ball joint ______
B.
Removing and refitting the hub, axle spindle and

extending arm _______________________________________
C.
Removing and refitting the steering ram _______________
D.
Removing and refitting the front axle __________________
E.
Adjusting the wheel alignment ________________________
10
F.
Adjusting the track ___________________________________
10
G.
Service tools ________________________________________
11
Issue 1
May 2001

8D01.2
General
Tractors in the 8200 series, except the 8270 and 8280,
may be fitted with a 2 WD front axle.
The front axle is made up by the following assemblies:
- a cast-iron support identical to the 4 WD version, its
lower rear part having a bearing supporting the 2nd
removable swivel pin,
- a front bearing fixed to the cast-iron support and holding
the 1st swivel pin,
- a swivel beam, holding the arms,
- two extending arms,
- two axle spindle assemblies mounted into the bores of
the extending arms,
- a double-acting hydraulic ram linked to the axle spindles by two links.
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
Nut
Washer
Bearing cone
Spindle
Bearing cup
Guard
Grease nipple
Nut
Axle
Steering arm
Bush
Extending arm
Seal
Bearing cone
Hub
Bearing cup
Cover
Rivet
Nut
Washer
Belleville washers
Sealing ring
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Sealing ring
Lock washer
Spacers
Bolt
Hydraulic ram
Bolt
Issue 1
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
Washers
Nuts
Sleeve
Bolt
Steering rod
Bolt
Nuts
Sleeve
Pin
Washer
Nut
Ball joint
Pin
Nut
Ball joint
Support
Bush
Thrust washer
Oring
Oring
Nut
Lock nut
Bushes
Grease nipple
Plug
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
May 2001

Overall view

28
21
10
8D01.3
19
20
28
29
11
22
12
15
16
A
17
27
DETAIL A
27
55
18
12
24
26
25
13
14
23
45
46
47
53
51
54
50
52
1
DETAIL B
29
32
31
30
34
32
31
37
38
37
42
10
29
B
39
41
44
40
C
DETAIL C
19
28
Issue 1
33
35
36
May 2001
10
43
48
49
Parts list
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
8D01.4
Exploded view
53
52
50
8
48
47
39
41
9
40
24
54
28
23
51
19
27
20
10
49
29
21
25
46
45
22
30
44
11
43
6
31
7
12
32
4
34
37
13
33
35
26
14
36
18
15
38
16
3
2
17
42
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
May 2001

A . Removing and refitting the steering arm ball joint
Removal
1. Chock the rear wheels and put on the handbrake.
2. Raise the wheel concerned using a jack. Remove
pin (39), nut (41) and washer (40).
3. Extract the ball joint (42) from the steering arm (10).
4. Loosen nuts (37), turn sleeve (38) to separate the ball
joint (42) from steering rod (35).
Refitting
6. Fit the ball joint (42) into the steering arm (10).
7. Couple sleeve (38), steering rod (35) and ball joint
(42).
8. Place washer (40) and tighten nut (41) to a torque of
108 - 122 Nm, then lock it using a new pin (39).
9. Remove the jack.
10. Remove the chocks and take off the handbrake.
11. Adjust the wheel alignment (see E).
B . Removing and refitting the hub,

axle spindle and extending arm
13. Raise the front of the tractor using a jack placed in the
axle axis and then position axle stands.
14. Remove the wheel concerned.
Removing the hub

15. Extract cover (17).
Unlock and loosen nut (1), remove lock washer (26)
and washer (2).
16. Remove bearing cone (3).
17. Take hub (15) off the spindle (4).
18. Extract the seal (13) and remove cone (14).
19. Extract cups (5) (16).
20. Remove the guard (6).
8D01.5
Removing the axle spindle

21. Remove nut (19) and washer (20). Extract ball joint
(42) from steering arm (10). Remove the steering
arm and Belleville washers (21).
22. Take out axle spindle (4) from extending arm (12).
23. Separate bearing cone (23) from the spindle.
24. Extract the sealing rings (25) and (22) from the
extending arm (12).
25. Extract bush (11) and cup (24) from extending arm
(12). Removing the extending arm.
26. Remove bolts (28) and nuts (8)
27. Extract extending arm (12) from axle (9) and remove
grease nipple (7).
Refitting the extending arm

29. Assemble and fit extending arm (12) in axle (9) using
bolts (28) and nuts (8) placed in their adapted
locations. Tighten to a torque of 400 - 600 Nm.
Refitting the axle spindle

30. Using a drift, insert bush (11) home against the
shoulder in extending arm (12).
31. Using an appropriate fixture, position the sealing ring
(22) home against the shoulder in the extending arm,
the lip facing outwards in order to prevent the seal
from moving in case of excessive greasing of the
extending arm.
32. Insert the guard (6) on the axle spindle (4).
33. Position bearing cup (24) in the extending arm.
34. Insert the sealing ring (25) in the extending arm, the
lip turned outwards for the same reason as explained
in operation 31.
35. Insert bearing cone (23) on axle spindle (4), then
introduce the axle spindle into the extending arm.
36. Position the Belleville washers (21), the steering arm
(10) and washer (20). Smear nut (19) with Loctite 241
Issue 1
May 2001

8D01.6
Refitting the hub

37. Using as press or appropriate fixture, insert cups (5)
(16) home against the shoulder in the hub (15).
38. Smear cone (14) with bearing grease and place it in
cup (5).
39. Using an appropriate fixture, insert the seal (13) in its
housing thrust against the shoulder, the lip facing
outwards (Fig. 3) in order to prevent the seal from
moving in case of excessive greasing of the hub
bearings.
40. Fill the cavity of the hub (15) with bearing grease.
41. Fit the hub on to the axle spindle (4).
42. Smear cone (3) with bearing grease, place it on the
axle spindle in contact with cup (16).
43. Position washer (2), lock washer (26) and nut (1).
After tightening the nut to a torque of 81 Nm, loosen
it by 1/12 to 1/6 of a turn to obtain a clearance of
between 0 mm and 0.13 mm.
44. Bend the tab of the lock washer (26) to lock nut (1).
45. Check that the hub turns smoothly.
46. Fill the cavity of hub (15) (on the nut side) with
bearing grease.
47. Close the hub using cover (17).
48. Insert rivet (18) in the cover hole. Fit grease nipple
(7).
Final operations
49. Refit the wheel and remove the axle stands. Tighten
the wheel nuts to a torque of 140 - 200 Nm. Grease
the extending arms (12).
51. Adjust the wheel alignment (see E).
Issue 1
May 2001
13
Fig. 3
8D01.7
C . Removing and refitting the steering ram

Removal
Raise the front of the tractor with a jack placed in the
axis of the front axle.
53. Disconnect the hoses on the rams after marking
their position.
54. Loosen nuts (37), turn sleeves (38) to separate the
ball joints (42) from the steering rods (35).
55. Remove pin (43) and nut (44). Extract the ball joint
(45) from support (46).
56. Remove the steering ram assembly.
57. Unscrew ball joint (45) (if necessary).
58. Disassemble nuts (32), washers (31) and bolts (30),
separate the sleeves (33) fitted with steering rods
(35).
Refitting
60. Assemble sleeves (33) fitted with steering rods (35)
on the ram. Fit bolts (30), washers (31) and tighten
nuts (32).
61. Screw ball joint (45) (if removed) on to the steering
ram.
62. Refit the ram assembly on to the support (46).
63. Tighten nut (44) of the ball joint to a torque of 100 120 Nm and fit pin (43).
64. Couple sleeves (38) to the steering rods (35) and ball
joints (42).
65. Remove the jack. Take away the chocks and release the handbrake.
67. Check the wheel alignment (see E).
68. Check the oil tightness of the hydraulic ram unions.
Issue 1
May 2001

8D01.8
D . Removing and refitting the front

axle
Removal
70. Raise the front of the tractor with a jack positioned
in the axis of the front axle.
71. Position an axle stand beneath the lower part of the
engine sump.
72. Remove the front wheels.
73. Remove bolts (28) and nuts (8).
74. Take off nuts (32), washers (31) and bolts (30).
75. Remove the assemblies (1) (Fig. 4).
76. Remove pin (43), nut (44), extract ball joint (45) from
support (46), push the ram (29) away from the axle
(9).
77. Place slings on the axle beam (Fig. 5).
Fig. 4
2
1
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001

78. Take out bolts (1), grease nipple (3). Remove the
front bearing (2) and washer (4) (Fig. 6).
79. Remove the front axle by sliding it out of its rear
bearing (5) and washer (6) (Fig. 6).
80. Take off lock nut (52), nut (51) with its seal (50),
remove support (46). The bush (47), thrust washer
(48) and Oring (49) remain on support (46).
81. If necessary, extract bushes (53) from the axle
beam.
Refitting
83. If necessary, insert bushes (53) using a locally
manufactured drift (see G).
84. Check for the presence of bush (47) and thrust
washer (48). Replace Oring (49) and refit support
(46).
85. Tighten nut (51) fitted with Oring (50) on support
(46), then loosen it in order to obtain an axial
clearance of 0.05 mm to 0.25 mm.
86. Using a pin wrench, tighten lock nut (52) to a torque
of 120 - 150 Nm. Check that the support swivels
freely.
87. Place slings on the axle beam, position washer (6)
(the chamfer facing the axle) (Fig. 6). Insert the axle
in support (5).
88. Position washer (4) (the chamfer facing the axle)
(Fig. 6). Fit the front bearing (2) in order to obtain the
minimum clearance between washers and axle.
89. Smear bolts (1) with Loctite 270 (Fig. 6). Tighten to
a torque of 520 - 640 Nm. Remove the slings.
90. Fit grease nipples (3) and (7) (Fig. 6).
91. Refit the hydraulic ram assembly (29) on support
(46). Tighten nut (44) to a torque of 100 - 120 Nm and
fit the pin (43).
92. Grease the bearings (2) and (5) (Fig. 6) and support
(46).
93. Grease the steering rods (35) using molybdenum
sulphide grease. Refit assemblies (1) (Fig. 4). Fit
nuts (8) and bolts (28). Tighten to a torque of 400 600 Nm.
94. Fit bolts (30), washers (31) and nuts (32). Tighten to
95. Refit the front wheels, remove the axle stand.
Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 140 - 200 Nm.
97. Check the wheel alignment (see E).
8D01.9
1
2
3
5
7
Fig. 6
895
A
A'
A'
Issue 1
B'
Fig. 7
May 2001

8D01.10
E . Adjusting the wheel alignment

98. Place the steering in the central position. The
adjustment is carried out by acting upon sleeves
(38) in order to obtain a wheel alignment of 0 mm
to 14 mm.
This toe-in is measured from points A, A and B, B
and is determined by a 895 mm diameter circle
traced on the sides of the tyres (Fig. 7).
It is obtained from the difference of the two values
L and D.
Note. If the toe-in is measured on a diameter
other than 895 mm, correct the values accordingly. Once the adjustment has been carried
out, tighten nuts (37) to a torque of 45 - 55 Nm.
28
34
32
Fig. 8
F . Adjusting the wheel track

99. Raise the front of the tractor using a jack positioned
in the axis of the front axle.
100. Remove bolts (28) (34), nuts (8) (32) (Fig. 8).
101. Place the extending arms in the required position.
102. Fit bolts (28), tighten to a torque of 400 - 600 Nm.
103. Place the steering rods (35) in relation to the
position of the extended arms.
Fit bolts (34), washers (31), nuts (32), tighten to a
Note: When the tractor is used in the widest
track position, spacers (27) must be used for
fitting the 3rd bolt (28) (Fig. 29).
28
27
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
8D01.11
G . Service tools
Locally manufactured tools
- Bush insertion drift (Fig. 10)
(a) Knurling
(b) Chamfer
(a)
(b) 2 x 45
45
34,90
37,90
(b) 2 x 45
5
40
40
180
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001
Front axle - Steering column
8E01.1
8 E01 Steering column
CONTENTS
-
General ___________________________________________________
Operation _________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the steering column __________________
B.
Disassembling and reassembling of the control lever assembly
C.
Removing and refitting the notched lever and rack ____________
D.
Removing and refitting the locking mechanism _______________
E.
Replacing the shafts and bearings ___________________________
F.
Replacing the guide bushes _________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

8E01.2

Parts list
General
The steering column assembly consists of two parts:
- a lower fixed part comprising a tube and fixing baseplate,
- an upper mobile part comprising a tube and a welded
yoke as well as a housing containing the steering wheel
height and tilt adjustment mechanisms.
Operation
Height adjustment
When the control lever (4) is moved upwards, the rod T
causes the elbowed lever (8) to swivel and lower arm
(15), which is hinged on pin (14). The lock plate (16), on
which presses the adjusting screw (5) integral with the
arm, is released and allows the upper part of the steering
column to move.
Spring (3) returns lever (4) to its initial position.
Stop (25) limits the movement of both parts.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
Retaining washer
Retaining washer
Spring
Control lever assembly
Adjusting screw
Bolt
Spring
Elbowed lever
Notched lever
Rack
Pin
Upper shaft
Retaining washer
Pin
Arm
Lock plate
Springs
Pin
Pin
Housing
Mobile column
Bearings
Circlip
Bolt
Stop
Bush
Bush
Fixed column
Lower shaft
Bushes
Circlip
Seal
Fig. 1
Tilt adjustment
When control lever (4) is moved downwards, it presses
against the rod T which in turn pushes against the end of
the notched lever (9) and frees it from the rack (10), thus
allowing tilt the housing (20).
The two return springs (17) facilitate the positioning of the
steering wheel.
Adjusting screw (5) allows the meshing of the teeth of
the rack (10) and notched lever (9) to be adjusted.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
8E01.3
Overall view
12
23
32
17
22
20
17
19
18
20
10
11
10
27
15
24
28
25
26
21
16
13
28
28
14
21
15
30
31
26
29
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
May 2001
8E01.4
Exploded view
Fig. 2
Parts list
Fig. 1
32
23
22
20
12
3
2
27
17
T
7
1
28
6
19
10
29
18
14
30
11
21
15
26
Issue 1
24
May 2001
25
16
13

A . Removing and refitting the steering column
8E01.5
Removal
1. Using the lever located under the right-hand side of

the steering wheel, pull the steering column as far as
possible towards the driver.
2. Remove the steering wheel and the dashboard
covering.
3. Disconnect the connectors (Fig. 3):
- light switch (1)
- Dynashift lever A B C D (3) (Heavy Duty gearbox)
or reverse shuttle and left hand gear shift (Full
Powershift gearbox).
4. Remove the bolts (2) which attach the column base
onto the cab support (Fig. 3).
5. Remove the assembly by tilting it in order to take out
the base through the dashboard support.
2
2
Fig. 3
Refitting
6. Check the operation in all steering column positions.
7. Lightly smear the splines of shaft (29) with Loctite
Anti-Seize grease or its equivalent.
8. Carry out operations 2 to 5 in reverse order.
Note: Tighten the steering wheel nut to a torque
of 57 - 78 Nm.
9. Check the correct operation of the electrical equipment.

the control lever assembly
Disassembly
10. Remove the steering column. Carry out operations 1
to 5.
11. Take off the half-housings around the steering
column.
12. Remove and discard the retaining washers (1) (2).
Disassemble spring (3), lever (4) with its dust cover
and lever (8).
Reassembly
13. Refit the levers (4) (8) and spring (3). Replace the
retaining washers (1) (2).
14. Adjust lever (4), with the rod T in contact with the
notched lever (9), by using adjusting screw (5) (3
mm Allen key).
15. Reverse operation 11 and carry out operations 6 to 9.
Issue 1
May 2001

8E01.6
C . Removing and refitting the notched lever and rack

4
Removal
to 5.
17. Take off the half-housings around the steering column.
18. Remove and discard the retaining washers (1) (2).
Remove spring (3) and lever (4) complete with its
dust cover.
19. Compress spring (7) by pressing notched lever (9).
Remove bolts (6). Take out bolts (6). Remove the
rack (10).
20. Drive out pin (11). Remove the notched lever (9) and
spring (7).
Refitting
21. Carry out operation 20 in reverse order.
22. Compress spring (7). Position rack (10) in accordance with Fig. 4 in order to avoid interference with
lever (4). Fit and tighten bolts (6) lightly smeared with
Loctite 241.
23. Refit lever (4), with the rod T and spring (3). Replace
the retaining washers (1) (2).
24. Adjust lever (4) with the rod T in contact with the
notched lever (9), using adjusting screw (5) (3 mm
Allen key).
25. Carry out operation 17 in reverse order and then carry
D . Removing and refitting the locking mechanism

Disassembly
to 5 again.
28. Take off adjusting screw (5) (3 mm Allen key). Take
off and discard retaining washer (13). Drive out pin
(14).
29. Remove arm (15) and lock plate (16).
Issue 1
May 2001
10
Fig. 4
Refitting
30. Carry out operation 29 in reverse order.
31. Place pin (14). Replace the retaining washer (13).
32. Fit and adjust screw (5), lever (4), the rod T in contact
with notched lever (9).
8E01.7
E . Replacing the shafts and bearings
F . Replacing the guide bushes (26)

(27) (30)
Disassembly
Disassembly

to 5.
36. Slide the dust cover off the control lever (4).
37. Compress spring (7) by pushing on the notched lever
(9).
38. Remove springs (17).
39. Extract pin (18). Drive out pins (18) (19).
40. Separate housing (20) from the mobile column (21).
41. Take off circlip (23). Separate the upper shaft (12)
from housing (20).
mobile column (21).
43. Extract bearings (22) from housing (20).

to 5.
53. Remove the half-housings from around the steering
column.
54. Loosen screw (5) (3 mm Allen key). Remove the
lock plate (16).
55. Remove bolt (24) from stop (25).
56. Extract bush (26).
57. Uncouple the mobile column (21) from fixed column
(28).
58. Extract bush (27)
Reassembly
44. Insert bearings (22) in housing (20) using an appropriate fixture.
45. Assemble the upper shaft (12) on bearings (22). Fit
circlip (23).
46. Assemble the lower shaft (29) complete with bushes
(30) and circlip (31) on the fixed column (28).
Note: Deform the tube of the column using a
punch in order to lock bushes (30).
47. Assemble housing (20) and mobile column (21). Fit
pins (18) (19). Insert pin (18).
48. Refit springs (17).
49. Compress spring (7). Position rack (10) in accordance with Fig. 4 in order to avoid interference with
lever (4). Fit and tighten bolts (6) lightly smeared with
Loctite 241.
50. Adjust lever (4), with the rod T in contact with
notched lever (9) by using adjusting screw (5) (3 mm
Allen key).
Reassembly
59. Position bush (27).
60. Place stop (25) in the groove on fixed column (28).
61. Assemble the mobile column (21) with fixed column
(28).
62. Fit bolt (24) loose it in order to locate bush (26). When
the bush is correctly located, moderately tighten the
bolt. Check that the mobile column (21) slides freely.
63. Refit the lock plate (16). Adjust lever (4) and the rod
T in contact with notched lever (9) by using adjusting
screw (5).
64. Reverse the order of operation 53 and then carry out
operations 6 to 9.
Issue 1
May 2001
Front axle - Bearings and transmission shafts
8F01.1
8 F01 Bearings and transmission shafts

(Dana front axles)
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Removing and refitting the bearings ______________________
B.
Replacing bushes and seal _______________________________
C.
2WD version ____________________________________________
10
Issue 1
May 2001

8F01.2
General
On 8200 series tractors, the bearings supporting the
AG155H front axle are attached on the frame the same
way as the AG200H front axles.
The transmission shaft (1) is housed in a guard (2)
located beneath the tractor (Fig. 1). Each of its ends is
respectively linked by sleeves (3) to the 4WD gearbox
and to the front axle housing. The central part of the
transmission shaft is supported in a bearing (6) contained
in a support (5) fixed on to the lower part of the engine.
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(52)
Bolt
Front bearing
Chamfered washer
Rear bearing
Chamfered washer
Seal
Seal
Bush
Seal
Bolt
Bolt
Bush
Main support
Axle housing
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
8F01.3
1
AG 155H
2
6
3
AG 200H
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 1
May 2001

8F01.4

Overall view
15
AG 155H
1
A
10
11
13
12
14
A
4
9
2
4
52
AG 200H
8
A
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
8F01.5
Exploded view
15
1
2
14
10
11
6
12
13
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
May 2001

8F01.6
A . Removing and refitting the bearings

Removal
2. Disconnect the two hoses to the front axle differential lock fitted on to the guard. Remove the guard and
the transmission shaft.
3. Raise the front of the tractor using an appropriate
jack positioned in the axis of the axle housing.
Position an axle stand under the lower cranckcase
(Fig. 4). Take off the wheels.
4. Disconnect the hoses on the steering ram and mark
their locations.
5. Sling the front axle using straps (Fig. 4).
6. Take off grease nipple (3) and bolts (1). Remove
bearing (2) (Fig. 5), washer (4) and seal (9).
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
8F01.7
7. Take out bolts (12) (13). Remove the front axle with
bearing (6) (AG 155H front axle - Fig. 6 or AG 200H
front axle - Fig. 7).
8. Separate the front axle bearing. Remove washer (7)
and seal (8).
Refitting
9. Replace seal (8). Position washer (7), the chamfer
facing the axle housing (52) (Fig. 2). Assemble
bearing (6) on the front axle.
10. Sling the axle and bearing assembly and fit it in
place. Provisionally fit bolts (12) (13).
11. Replace seal (9). Position washer (4), the chamfer
facing housing (52) (Fig. 2). Refit bearing (2). Provisionally fit bolts (1).
12
13
Fig. 6
12
5
6
13
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

8F01.8
12. Remove and refit, one by one, bolts (12) (13), lightly
smeared with Loctite 270. Definitively tighten them
to a torque of:
- (12): 260 - 320 Nm
- (13): 560 - 640 Nm
13. Apply bearing (2) to washer (4) in order to obtain the
minimum clearance possible. Definitively tighten
bolts (1) previously lightly smeared with Loctite 270
14. Fit the grease nipples to the bearings (2) (6).
15. Reconnect the steering ram hoses. Smear the two
transmission shaft sleeves with Anti-Seize grease
or its equivalent. Fit the dust covers. Refit the
transmission shaft and sleeves on to the 4WD unit
and front axle.
- AG 155H front axles
. fit the bolts with a seal and tighten them on to the
sleeves previously lightly smeared with Loctite
241 or its equivalent.
- AG 200H front axles
. lightly smear bolts (4) with Loctite 241 or its
equivalent and tighten them to a torque of 61 81 Nm (Fig. 7).
16. Refit the guard. Reconnect both the hoses located on
either side of the front differential lock supply pipe.
Refit the wheels and tighten the wheel nuts to a
17. Using a grease gun, grease friction bushes (10) (14).
Issue 1
May 2001
8F01.9
B . Replacing bushes and seal

Disassembly
18. After removing the bearings, extract seal (11) and
the worn bushes (10) (14).
Refitting
19. Clean the components. Using a press and an appropriate fixture, insert bushes (10) (14) in their respective holders, flush with face F (Fig. 8), and with orifice
O facing upward and aligned with the grease channel.
Using an appropriate fixture, insert seal (11) thrust
against the shoulder of the bearing (6). Refit the
bearings.
14
10
11
Fig. 8
O
O
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001

8F01.10
C . 2 WD version
On tractors equipped with the 2 WD version, the same
method as that used for the 4WD version is applied.
Special points
- Raise the front of the tractor using a jack positioned in
the axis of the front axle and position axle stands.
- Insert plug (55), its rim previously lightly smeared with
Loctite 542 (Fig. 11).
- The Oring (11) ensures oil tightness of the 2nd axle
pivot.
- Tightening torque for wheel nuts or studs:140 - 200 Nm.
- Using a grease gun, grease the friction bushes (10) (14).
12
13
11
10
14
55
Parts list
(3) - (5) Grease nipples
(11) Oring
(55) Plug
Issue 1
Fig. 11
May 2001
8F02.1
8 F02 Bearings and transmission shafts

(ZF front axles)
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Disassembling and reassembling 4WD transmission shafts

and universal joint spiders _______________________________
B.
Removing and refitting the bearing stands ________________
C.
Replacing the bushes and seal ___________________________
10
Issue 1
May 2001

8F02.2
General
On 8270 and 8280 tractors, the front bearings, located on
the cast-iron stand, support the two pivots of the ZF axle.
The 4WD transmission shaftline comprises two shafts,
the straight shaft (1) and the universal shaft (1A) (Fig. 1).
They are linked to the 4WD and the front axle housing (52)
by splined sleeve (3) and the universal joint spiders (9).
This transmission line is supported by bearing (6) and
bearing block (5) fitted beneath the lower housing at the
rear of the engine.
Issue 1
May 2001
8F02.3
Overall view
2A
52
1A
8
9
7
5
8
Fig. 1
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
8F02.4
Parts list (Figs. 2 - 3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(52)
Bolt
Front bearing
Mecanindus locating pin
Washer
Rear bearing
Seal
Seal
Bush
Seal
Bolt
Bush
Main bearing stand
Bolt
Grease nipples
Grease nipples
Cover
Stop washer
Locating pins
Washer
Nuts
Axle housing
Overall view
15
12
Fig. 1
21
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
2
22
18
17
52
23
8
Fig. 2
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 3
May 2001
8F02.5
Exploded view
12
15
21
17
2
14
20
19
18
11
10
1
17
8
16
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
May 2001

8F02.6

4WD transmission shafts and universal joint spiders
Universal shaft
1. Chock the front wheels and put on the handbrake.
2. Remove the front guard (2A) (Fig. 1).
3. Remove universal shaft (1A) with its spiders (Figs. 1
and 4).
Reassembly (Fig. 1)
Remark
- The universal shaft and spiders form a complete assembly referenced in the spare parts catalogue.
1A
Fig. 4
4. Refit the shaft.
5. Raise the front wheels (optional). Fix the spiders on
sleeve (4) and plate (7) using bolts (8) previously
lightly smeared with Loctite 241 or its equivalent and
tightened to a torque of 61 - 81 Nm.
6. Using a grease gun, grease sleeve (4).
7. Refit the front guard (2A).
Issue 1
May 2001
8F02.7
Straight shaft
8. Remove the front guard and the universal shaft and
9. Remove the rear guard (2).
10. Spread apart the rubber protectors on sleeve (3).
Take out the bolt located in the centre of the sleeve
and slide the latter along straight shaft (1) towards
the front of the tractor.
11. Uncouple and remove the shaft, sleeve (3) and
bearing (5) assembly.
Reassembly (Fig. 1)
12. Inspect the components. Replace any parts found to
be defective.
13. Refit the shaft and sleeve assembly. Assemble the
central bearing in accordance with Fig. 5.
14. Tighten the bolts of bearing (5) and the central bolt of
sleeve (3).
15. Position the straight shaft.
Remark
- The rotating shaft turns bearing (6) located in
bearing (5) by means of bolts V (Fig. 5).
16. Lightly smear bolts V with Loctite 542 or its equivalent and tighten them in order to obtain a space
between the rear end of the shaft and the central bolt
on sleeve (3) (Fig. 1, detail A).
17. Place the rubber protectors on the sleeve.
18. Using a grease gun, grease sleeve (3).
19. Refit guard (2).
20. Refit the universal shaft (1A) and refit the front guard
(2A). Carry out operations 4 to 7 again.
5
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001

8F02.8
B . Removing and refitting the bearings

21. Remove the front weights and centre weights (if
fitted). Immobilise the tractor by putting on the
handbrake and placing chocks on either side of the
rear wheels, as shown in Fig. 7.
Removal
22. Remove the front guard and disassemble the universal shaft (1A) (see A).
23. Raise the front of the tractor using an appropriate
jack positioned in the axis of the axle housing. Take
off the wheels. Position an axle stand under the
lower part of the engine sump (Fig. 7).
24. Locate the hose unions and disconnect them from
the steering rams.
25. Sling the front axle using appropriate straps (Fig. 7).
17
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

26. Take off grease nipple (17) (Fig. 6). Remove bolts (1)
(Fig. 8), the bearing stand (2) and seal (9) (Fig. 2).
27. Unscrew nuts (23) and recover the washers (22)
(Fig. 9).
28. Remove the front axle with bearing stand (6).
29. Separate the bearing stand from the front axle.
Recover seal (8) and washer (4) (Fig. 2).
Remark
- The Mecanindus pin (3) is force fitted in housing
(52) (Fig. 2).
8F02.9
Refitting (Fig. 2)
30. Slide washer (4) on the axle pivot with the hole facing
the Mecanindus pin (3).
31. Position new seals (8) (9) on the axle pivots turning
the lip towards their respective stands.
32. Sling the front axle. Refit the front axle and stands
assembly.
33. Place the stands on the main stand.
Fit the bolts and washers and tighten the nuts (23)
lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or its equivalent to
34. Push bearing stand (2) towards axle housing (52) in
order to obtain the minimum clearance possible
between the bearing stands and housing.
35. Fit the washers and tighten bolts (1) previously
lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or its equivalent to
36. Check for the presence of grease nipples on cover
(19) and on each bearing.
37. Reconnect the hoses to the steering ram.
38. Refit the wheels. Remove the axle stand. Tighten
the wheel nuts to a torque of 640 - 680 Nm. Refit the
centre weight and front weights (depending on options).
39. Refit the universal shaft and guard (see A).
Fig. 8
22
23
Fig. 9
Final operations
40. Remove the chocks and take off the handbrake.
41. Using a grease gun, grease bushes (10) (14) in the
bearing stands.
Issue 1
May 2001

8F02.10
C . Replacing bushes and seal

20
42. Remove the bearing stands (see B).
F
Disassembly
Front bearing (Fig. 10)
43. Take out bolts (16), remove cover (19) and stop
washer (20). Extract and discard bush (14) of bearing
stand (2).
Rear bearing (Fig. 11)
44. Mark the position of the dust seal (11). Extract and
discard the latter as well as bush (10).
14
Reassembly
parts found to be defective. Check that the grease
channels are not obstructed.
16
19
Front bearing
Fig. 10
10
11
10
Rear bearing
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 11

Rear bearing (Fig. 12)
46. Using a press and an appropriate fixture, insert bush
(10) home against the shoulder of bearing stand (6),
with the oblong ports O facing upwards and communicating with the bearing lubricating channel.
47. Using a press and an appropriate fixture, insert the
dust seal (11) in the correct direction, abutting
against the shoulder of bearing stand (6).
8F02.11
10
Front bearing (Fig. 13)
48. Using a press and an appropriate fixture, insert bush
(14) flush with face F of bearing stand (2) (Fig. 10) and
with the oblong ports facing upwards and communicating with the lubricating channel of bearing stand
(2).
49. Refit the stop washer (20).
Remark
- The stop washer has ridges that allow the passage
of grease for the lubrication of the bearing block.
50. Fit cover (19) on bearing block holder (2) and tighten
bolts (16) to a torque of 90 - 120 Nm (Fig. 10).
11
Final operation
51. Refit the bearing stands (see B).
Front bearing
Fig. 12
20
2
Rear bearing
Issue 1
14
Fig. 13
May 2001
8 F03
8F03.1
Bearings and transmission shafts

(Carraro front axle)
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Disassembling and reassembling the 4WD transmission

shafts and the universal joint spiders _____________________
Removing and refitting the front bearing support and the

front axle _______________________________________________
Replacing the friction rings and seal ______________________
14
B.
C.
Issue 1
May 2002
8F03.2
General
8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 series tractors are equipped
with a Carraro fixed or suspension front axle. It is fitted
on a new frame which integrates the second axle pivot
bearing. The first axle pivot bearing, of conventional type,
can therefore be disassembled.
This frame can also be fitted with a Dana front axle. In
this case, the front axle must be supported by two
specific bearings (front bearing (2) and rear bearing (6)) to
be attached under the frame (Fig. 1).
The 4 WD transmission line is constituted by two shafts:
- straight shaft
- universal drive shaft.
These shafts are linked respectively to the 4 WD arrangement on the centre housing and to the nose of the front axle,
via a splined sleeve and universal joint spiders (Fig. 2).
This transmission line is supported by the bearing and the
cast-iron unit fitted at the front under the axle housing.
The rotating assembly is protected by two guards (2) (2A)
(Fig. 2).
Parts list (Fig.2)

(1)
(1A)
(2)
(2A)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(15)
(19)
(20)
Straight shaft
Rear guard
Front guard
Serrated shaft
Nut and bolt
Support
Ball bearing
Dust cover nut
Spiders
Yoke
Sleeve
Castellated locknut
Front frame
Flanges
Shoulder screw
Issue 1
Fig. 1
May 2002
8F03.3
Overall view
A : Full Powershift
B : Dynashift
15
20
19
1A
11
10
5
9
8
2
19
20
B
2A
Issue 1
Parts list
May 2002
Fig. 1
Parts list (Figs. 3 - 4)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(52)
Bolt
Front bearing
Unions
Washers
Lubricating pipe
Rear bearing
Seal
Seal
Bush
Seal
Bolt
Bush
Main bearing stand
Bolt
Grease nipples
Grease nipple(s)
Flanges
Stop washer
Axle housing
8F03.4

Overall view
Fig 3
15
Fig 4
Parts list
2
9
A
16
7
Version with suspension front axle
2
L1
7
2
A
10
6
1
L1
14
A
11
7
52
4
Fig 4
Version with fixed front axle

Issue 1
May 2002
52
19
20
Fig. 2
8F03.5
3
17
8
3
6
5
15
10
16
9
2
11
3
12
18
14
Parts list
Fig 1
Issue 1
May 2002

8F03.6

the 4WD transmission shafts and
the universal joint spiders
Universal drive shaft (Fig. 2)
Disassembly
1. Chock the rear wheels and put the handbrake on.
2. Remove the guards (2) (2A).
3. Unscrew the dust cover nut (7).
4. Remove the bolts (20) and flanges (19) (Fig. 5).
5. Spread the universal drive shaft (1A) and universal
joint spider (8) assembly apart from the nose of the
axle. Remove the shaft (Fig. 2 and 5).
Remark
- If there is not enough room to push the universal joint
backwards, disassemble the central bearing and
straight shaft (1).
Reminder
- It is possible to replace the universal joint spiders.
Their reference is indicated in the spare parts catalogue.
Reassembly
Check points
- If the universal joint spiders must be replaced, carefully
check the condition of the universal joint end yokes.
Remove any traces of impact or deformations. Clean
the groove of each circlip correctly. After assembly
check that the circlips are properly placed in their
respective grooves.
Remark
- If necessary, to facilitate the coupling of the universal
joint to the nose of the axle, raise the front wheels using
a jack having sufficient lifting capacity and positioned
along the axis of the axle housing.
6. Replace the dust cover nut (7) if necessary.
Note: Use a locally made conical tool to refit the
dust cover nut (7) on the shaft (1).
Issue 1
May 2002
1A
19
20
Fig. 5
7. Smear the front splines of the straight shaft with
molybdenum sulphide grease or its equivalent. Refit
the universal drive shaft (1A).
8. Fix the front universal joint spider (8) on the plate of
the axle nose using flanges (19) and shoulder screws
(20) lightly smeared with Loctite 241 or its equivalent
9. Moderately tighten the dust cover nut (7).
10. Using a grease gun, grease sleeve (10) and refit the
guards (2) (2A)(Fig.2).
8F03.7
Straight shaft and bearing (Fig. 2)

Disassembly
11. Remove the guards (2) (2A) and the universal drive
shaft assembly. Carry out operations 1 to 5.
12. Remove the nut and bolt (4) and slide the sleeve (3)
towards the front of the straight shaft.
13. Remove the central bearing assembly (5), bearing
(6) and the straight shaft (1) (Fig. 6).
14. Separate support (5) from the bearing (6).
15. Unscrew the castellated nut (11) using a suitable
wrench.
16. Remove the bearing from the straight shaft (1).
Reassembly
17. Check the components. Replace any parts found to

be defective.
18. Fit bearing (6) on the straight shaft with the offset
turned rearwards. Tighten the nut with a suitable
wrench.
19. Assemble support (5) on the bearing (6). Tighten the
bolts.
20. Refit the central bearing assembly, refit bearing (6)
and straight shaft (1).
21. Smear the rear splines of the straight shaft (1) with
molybdenum sulphide grease or equivalent.
22. Slide the sleeve (3) towards the rear of the straight
shaft. Fit abolt (4) and tighten the nut.
23. Refit the universal drive shaft assembly.
1
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002

8F03.8
B . Removing and refitting the front

bearing support and front axle
Fixed or suspension front axles
1
11
24. Remove the front weights (if fitted). Immobilise the

tractor. Put on the handbrake. Place safety chocks
on either side of the rear wheels as shown in Fig. 9.
Remark
- The belly weight (1) (where fitted) (Fig. 8) is attached
under the front frame and may hinder the removal of
bearing (2) support.
Danger
Fig. 7
- The belly weight weighs between 300 and 420 kg

(approximately), depending on the option. The removal
operation must be carried out carefully with the help of
an operator and using a suitable lifting tool.
To remove the belly weight, proceed as follows:
. remove the inside elements at the lower part of the
grille
. maintain the weight using the above-mentioned tool
. remove the screws (2) (Fig. 8)
. carefully remove the weight from the tractor.
Reminder
- Some tractors may be fitted with a front power take off.
In this case, it will be necessary to remove it in order
to uncouple the front axle from the frame.
1
2
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 9
8F03.9
Suspension front axle

Removing the hydraulic unit
25. Remove guard (14) (Fig. 3)
Special point
- It is important to unscrew bleed screw (1) to lower
the pressure in the hydraulic unit (11) (Fig. 7) before
carrying out any operations on the hydraulic pipes.
26. Locate the Load Sensing (LS) hydraulic pipes (2),
Return (3), and Pressure (4) connections linked to the
hydraulic unit (11) (Fig. 10) and remove them.
27. Locate and remove the hose pipes (1) (2) connected
to the suspension ram (Fig. 11).
28. Locate and separate the connectors linked to the
hydraulic unit electronic device, which are mounted:
- at the front left-hand side of the tractor beneath the
frame
- inside the nose assembly
29. On the hydraulic unit, locate and disconnect:
- the solenoid valve (1) located at the front of the
hydraulic unit, green connector (Fig. 12)
- the remaining solenoid valve (2), black connector
(Fig. 12).
30. Remove the hydraulic unit with the aid of another
operator or a locally-made fixture fitted to the head of
a trolley jack.
2
4
11
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
1
2
Issue 1
May 2002

8F03.10
Suspension and fixed front axles

Removing the support (2) and the front axle
31. Remove guard (2) (2A) (see A).
32. Raise the tractor along the axis of the front axle
housing using a jack that has sufficient lifting capacity. Remove the front wheels.
33. Remove the front wheels.
Danger
- Place a fixed axle stand under the lower engine
housing.
34. Locate the connections of the hoses for the steering
and separate them from the cylinder.
35. Disconnect the front differential lock hose.
36. Sling the front axle using suitable straps (Fig. 9).
37. Take out bolts (1) (Fig. 3).
38. Pull the front axle assembly complete with bearing
support (2) frontwards along the axis of the axle
(position 1) and remove the front axle (position 2)
(Fig. 3 - 9).
39. Note the characteristics, location and position of the
chamfered washers (4) (7) and remove them (Fig. 3).
Remark
- On 8210 to 8250 series tractors, which are equipped
with a fixed front axle, the two washers 3785074M1
(4 mm thick each) fitted on the first axle pivot now
are replaced by a single washer 3785924M1
(8 mm thick) from the serial number K179009 on.
Fixed front axles

(Fig. 3)
Types
of
tractors
Washers (4)
3785924M1
Suspension front axles

(Fig. 3)
Washers (7)
3785074M1
Inside
Outside
Inside
Outside
60 mm
90 mm
60 mm
110 mm
Washers (4) (7)

3785075M1
Inside
Outside
8210 - 8220
8240 - 8250
Issue 1
May 2002
70 mm
115 mm
8F03.11
Refitting
Check points
40. Clean all components and check the condition of:
- the pivot pin at each end
- the chamfered washers (4) (7)
- the friction rings (10) (16)
- the seal (9)
Fixed front axles

41. Slide a chamfered washer (7) slightly smeared with
bearing grease on to the rear end of the pivot, the
chamfer turned towards the front axle (Fig. 3).
42. Slide the washer (4), 3785924 M1, slightly smeared
with bearing grease, onto the front end of the pivot
pin (Fig. 3).

43. Slide the washers (7) respectively slightly smeared
with bearing grease onto the front and rear ends of
the pivot pin, the chamfer turned towards the front
axle (Fig. 3).
Fixed and suspension front axles

44. Sling the front axle (Fig. 9). Moderately grease the
ends of the pivot pin and mount the support (2) at the
front of the axle pivot.
Remarks
- Before refitting the front axle assembly, check that
there is no excess grease in the cavity of the
second axle pivot on the front frame.
- During refitting of the front axle assembly, any such
excess grease will be compressed making entry of
the axle pivot into its bearing difficult.
45. Refit the front axle and support (2) assembly.
46. Push the assembly hard until it abuts against the
second axle pivot.
47. Thrust the support (2) against the front axle assembly in such a way as to eliminate the clearance
between supports and axle housing to the maximum.
Issue 1
May 2002

8F03.12
48. Fit the screws lightly smeared with Loctite 270 or

equivalent and tighten to a torque of 520 - 640 Nm.
Check points
- Check that the front face of the pivot pin (1) is
almost flush with the front edge F of the bearing
support (2) (Fig. 13).
49. Check for the presence of the grease nipple on:
Fixed front axles
- the right-hand side and above the front frame
(second axle pivot)
- support (2) (first axle pivot)
- the right-hand side and above the front frame
(second axle pivot)
- the left-hand support of the hydraulic unit (first axle
pivot)
Fixed and suspension front axles

50. Reconnect the hoses (using marks made during
disassembly)
- of the steering ram
- of the front differential lock
51. Refit the wheels. Remove the axle stand and take
away the jack. Tighten the nuts to a torque of 640 680 Nm.
52. Refit the belly weight. Tighten bolts (2) to a torque of
420 - 560 Nm (Fig. 8), after smearing lightly the
threads with Loctite 270 or equivalent. Refit the front
weights (depending on equipment).
53. Refit the universal drive shaft and the guards (see A).
F
1
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2002
8F03.13

Refitting of the hydraulic unit
54. Refit the hydraulic unit using the same method used
when removing it.
55. Reconnect the solenoid valves and the electronic
device connectors (according to marks made).
56. Reconnect the hoses to the suspension cylinder
(according to marks made).
57. Reconnect the hydraulic pipes, Pressure (4), Return
(3) and LS (2) to the hydraulic unit (according to
marks made) (Fig. 10).
Reminder
- Check that bleed screw (1) (Fig. 7) is properly
closed with a view of the future putting into service
of the tractor.
58. Refit guard (14).
Final operations
59. Remove the safety chocks and release the handbrake.
60. Using a grease gun, grease the friction rings (10) (16)
of the axle pivots.
Issue 1
May 2002

8F03.14
C . Replacing the friction rings and

seal
16
Front bearing (first axle pivot, Fig. 3)

Disassembly
61. Remove only bearing support (2) (see B).
62. Extract and discard ring (16).
63. Drive out and discard seal (9).
Reassembly
found to be defective. Check that the grease channels in the support are not obstructed.
65. Using a press and a suitable fixture, insert a correctly
positioned seal (9) and ring (16) flush with face F of
support (2) (Fig. 14 - 15), the grease hole T in
communication with the channel (Fig. 16).
2
Fig. 14
2
16
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
9
Issue 1
May 2002
8F03.15
Rear bearing (second axle pivot, Fig. 3)

Remark
- To operate on bush (10) of the second axle pivot, it is
first necessary to take off the first axle pivot and the
front axle (see B).
Disassembly
66. Drive out bush (10) using a locally-made tool.
Note: The circlip (6) and plug (8) are not considered as normally wearing parts, therefore their
replacement is unlikely.
Reassembly
67. Using a locally-made drift, insert bush (10) into the
frame (15) flush with chamfer C (Fig. 17 - 18).
10
15
Fig. 17
Remark
- Bush (10) does not have a grease port. The grease is
led inwards by an axial channel L1 and a radially drilled
hole at the rear end of the pivot axis (Fig. 3).
Fig. 18
10
C
15
15
Issue 1
May 2002
Front axle - 4 WD clutch
8G01.1
8G01 4 WD clutch
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Removing, refitting the clutch assembly and shaft _________
C.
Disassembling, reassembling and shimming the clutch ____
D.
11
E.
11
Issue 1
May 2002

8G01.2
Issue 1
May 2002

General
On 8200 series tractors, the clutch assembly on the front
axle is fitted in the lower part of the intermediate housing.
A cover beneath the housing gives access to the clutch,
which comprises:
- a shaft (2) rotating in two taper roller bearings (8) (9) and
(4) (16) fitted in the bore of the housing
- a hydraulic clutch assembly integral with the rotating
shaft
- a bell-shaped gear (10) driving clutch plates (36) and
centred on the shaft by a friction bush (6)
The bell-shaped helical gear (10) is constantly meshed
with the driving pinion (17) that is integral via splines with
the drive pinion.
The shaft is shimmed to provide an operating clearance
of 0 mm to 0.1 mm using shim(s) (18) placed between
the seal holder (20) and bearing cup (4).
The clutch assembly (15) is shimmed to obtain a clearance of 0.9 mm to 1.1 mm between circlip (34) and
shim(s) (35) in the declutched position (solenoid valve
activated).
8G01.3
Operation
Declutched position
- The 4 WD solenoid valve, fitted on the right-hand side
hydraulic cover and controlled by the tractors electronic system, supplies the interior of the shaft with 17bar pressure via channel A (Fig. 1). The pressure is
maintained by seal rings (32). Piston (39) moves in hub
(30) and draws clutch cover (23) thus compressing the
Belleville washers (26) and freeing the plates (36). The
bell-shaped gear (10) then idles on the shaft.
Clutched position
- When the pressure is cut-off, the Belleville washers
(26) push the clutch cover (23), mating the clutch plates
with the bell-shaped gear (10) and thus allowing for the
rotation of shaft (2).
Lubrication
- The oil from the lubricating circuit arrives via reducer
union (22) and lubricates the clutch plates (36) via the
transfer pipe (21) and channel B drilled in shaft (2)
(Fig. 1).
A bush (7) held by transfer pipe (28) supplies the clutch

with 17 bar pressure via union (27).
The oil tightness of the shaft is ensured by a lip seal (1)
and a dust seal (41), and the oil tightness of the housing
by an Oring (19).
Depending on the type of tractor, the clutch possesses
a different number of clutch plates and intermediate
plates. This leads to minor differences in the following
components:
- drive shaft (2)
- bell-shaped gear (10)
- cover plate (29)
- hub (30)
8210 - 8220 - 8240 tractors
- 6 clutch plates - 5 intermediate plates
8240 - 8250 tractors
8260 - 8280 tractors
Issue 1
May 2002

8G01.4
Part list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
Lip seal
4 WD drive shaft
Circlip
Bearing cup
Circlip
Bush
Bush
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Bell-shaped gear
Cover
Bolt
Plug
Seal
Clutch assembly
Bearing cone
Driving pinion
Shim(s)
Oring
Seal holder
Transfer pipe (lubrication)
Restrictor union and seal
Clutch cover
Oring
Oring
Belleville washers
Union and seal
Transfer pipe (17 bar)
Cover plate
Hub
Oring
Seal rings
Circlip
Circlip
Shim(s)
Clutch friction plates
Intermediate clutch plates
Circlip
Piston
Oring
Dust seal
Issue 1
Fig 1
Fig 2
May 2002

G
19
18
8G01.5
Overall view
16
17
41
20
21
22
23
F-F
30
27
28
29
13
14
33
15
11
12
31
40
34
39
9
38
35
24
25
26
36
37
10
32
8
Parts list
Fig 2
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 1
8G01.6
Exploded view
5
17
7
33
8
6
11
29
37
12
28
13
31
9
14
10
25
34
35
36
38
32
23
2
26
16
30
19
39
1
24
20
40
Parts list
41
21
4
18
Fig 1
3
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002

1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the rear wheels. Put
on the handbrake.
2. On tractors fitted with an AG 155H or AG 200H front
axle, disconnect the front differential control piping
(block off the piping). Remove the transmission
shaft.
3. Drain the intermediate housing.
4. Remove bolts (12). Release and remove cover (11).
8G01.7
Stripping the shaft

13. Take off oil seal rings (32).
14. Extract bearing cone (16) using a press and appropriate fixture.
Reassembling the shaft

15. Ensure that channels "A"and "B" (Fig. 1) are not
obstructed. Check for the presence of the rivets at
each end of the shaft.
16. Insert bearing cone (16) thrust against the shoulder
on shaft (2).
17. Place the oil seal rings (32) in the grooves of the
shaft. Hook their ends. Ensure that they turn freely.
B . Removing, refitting the clutch

assembly and shaft
Special points
- Bush (7) is held solely by transfer pipe (28). If removal
of only the transfer pipe is necessary, check that the
bush has not accidentally been moved.
- This bush has a drilled hole "T" (Fig. 1) that is turned
downwards and allows for pressure-relief of the bearing.
Removal
5. Take off circlip (3).
6. Wrap the splined section of shaft (2) with a flexible
protective tape. Take out dust seal (41). Extract the
seal holder (20) fitted with its seal (1) using two
locally manufactured hooks placed in internal groove
"G" of the seal holder (Fig. 1). Extract seal (1).
7. Take out Oring (19).
8. Remove the shim(s) (18) and bearing cup (4).
9. Take out the shaft assembly (2) fitted with bearing
cone (16) while holding the clutch (15) and the bellshaped gear (10) assembly.
10. Remove the clutch assembly, the bell-shaped gear
and bearing cone (9).
11. Extract cup (8). Remove circlip (33).
Note: To carry out maintenance on driving pinion (17), remove the entire unit assembly with
drive pinion (see section 6D01, 6D02 or 6D03
according to the version).
12. Remove the 4 WD clutch 17 bar supply pipe, union
(27) and transfer pipe (28) using circlip pliers. Take
off bush (7). Remove Oring (31).
Issue 1
May 2002

8G01.8
Refitting the clutch assembly and shaft

19. Position bush (7) fitted with a new Oring (31), with
port "O" of the bush facing the transfer pipe (28) and
hole "T" positioned facing downwards (Fig. 1). Insert
the pipe. Screw on union (27) fitted with its seal.
Replace the clutch pressure supply pipe.
20. Refit circlip (33). Insert cup (8).
21. Smear bearing cone (9) with miscible grease and
place it in cup (8).
Note: If the intermediate housing, shaft (2),
bearings (8) (9) and (4) (16), seal holder (20) and
circlips (3) (33) have been replaced, carry out J2
shimming, see D.
22. Refit the clutch (15) and the bell-shaped gear (10)
assembly.
23. Hold the clutch assembly and bell-shaped pinion.
Engage shaft (2) fitted with bearing cone (16) and
lubricated seal rings (32), in the clutch assembly,
bearing cone (9) and bush (7).
24. Place cup (4). Lightly coat shim(s) (18) with miscible
grease and stick them against the cup.
25. Using a press and an appropriate fixture, insert lip
seal (1) in the seal holder (20).
26. Fit Oring (19).
27. Protect the splined section of shaft (2). Insert the
seal holder fitted with seal (1) previously lubricated,
using a locally manufactured sleeve. Remove the
protection material.
Issue 1
May 2002
8G01.9
C . Disassembling, reassembling and

shimming the clutch
Disassembly
29. Remove the clutch assembly (see B).
30. Separate the bell-shaped gear (10) from the clutch
assembly (15).
31. Take off circlip (38). Remove piston (39).
32. Take off the Orings (24) (40).
33. Using a press and an appropriate fixture, compress
the Belleville washers (26) (Fig. 3).
34. Take off circlip (34), the shim(s) (35) (Fig. 3).
35. Remove the fixture. Take off cover plate (29), clutch
plates (36) and intermediate plates (37).
36. Separate hub (30) from clutch cover (23).
37. Take off Oring (25).
38. Remove the Belleville washers (26).
34
35
26
Fig. 3
Reassembly
39. Inspect and clean the components. Replace any
parts found to be defective. Check that channels "A"
and "B" (Fig. 1) are not obstructed.
40. Position the Belleville washers (26) in the clutch
cover (23) (Fig. 4).
41. Lubricate and fit Oring (25) on hub (30).
42. Position hub (30) in clutch cover (23) and thrusting
against the Belleville washers.
43. Place the clutch friction plates (36) aligning the tabs,
the intermediate plates (37) and fit the cover plate
(29).
Reminder
- Depending upon the options, cover (29), the number
of clutch plates and intermediate plates differ.
26
23
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2002

8G01.10
Shimming the clutch

J1 shimming
44. Using a press and an appropriate fixture (Fig. 5),
apply a load of 2000 daN so as to fully compress the
Belleville washers (26).
45. Fit circlip (34). Using a set of feeler gauges, measure
the gap X (Fig. 6), between cover plate (29) and
circlip (34). Select a thickness of shim(s) (35) to
provide a clearance of:
J1 = 0.9 mm to 1.1 mm (Fig. 6).
46. Remove circlip (34).
47. Position the shim(s) selected in operation 45 between the cover plate and the circlip.
Important: Fit the splined shim on the circlip
side.
48. Refit the circlip.
49. Lubricate and fit the Orings (24) (40) on piston (39)
and refit it.
51. Couple clutch assembly (15) and bell-shaped gear
(10).
Note: Bush (6) is force fitted in the bell-shaped
gear and then rebored.
52. Refit the clutch assembly (15) and bell-shaped gear
(10). Carry out operations 21 to 28 B.
26
Fig. 5
J1 = 0,9 / 1,1 mm
34
35
34
29
X
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002
8G01.11
D . Shimming the shaft

Reminder
J2 = 0 / 0,10 mm
- Since the 4 WD clutch is mechanically engaged when

stationary by the Belleville washers and through the link
with the rear axle drive pinion, it is impossible to turn the
driving shaft (2).
Action
- To carry out J2 shimming, provisionally fit bearing cone
(9), shaft (2) fitted with taper roller bearing (16) without
fitting the clutch (15), bell-shaped gear (10) and shim(s)
(18) assembly. Fit bearing cup (4), seal holder (20) and
circlip (3).
J2 shimming
53. Place the index of a dial gauge on the end of shaft (2)
(Fig. 7).
54. Since access is limited around the shaft, pull hard
using vice grip pliers, and alternatively turning it left
and right in order to correctly seat the cones and
cups.
56. Repeat operation 54, this time while pushing.
57. In relation to the clearance measured, select a shim
(18) thickness to provide a clearance of:
J2 = 0 mm to 0.1 mm (Fig. 7)
58. Remove circlip (3), seal holder (20), shaft (2) and the
bearings.
59. Definitively fit the clutch (15), bell-shaped gear (10)
and shaft (2) assembly. Carry out operations 21 to 28
B.
Fig. 7
64. Refit the transmission shaft.
65. On tractors fitted with an AG 155H or AG 200H front
axle, reconnect the differential lock control piping.
66. Remove the chocks from the wheels. Carry out a
road test the 4 WD clutch.
- the cover (11) mating face beneath the intermediate housing
- the hydraulic unions
60. Clean cover (11) and its mating face on the housing.
61. Smear the cover mating face with Loctite 510 or its
equivalent.
62. Refit the inspection cover. Tighten the bolts (12) to a
63. Refill the housings and check the oil level on the
transparent tube on the left-hand side of the centre
housing.
Issue 1
May 2002
Front axle - Carraro supension
8G02.1
8G02 Carraro suspension
CONTENTS
A. Arms unit disassembly _________________________________
B. Arms unit assembly ____________________________________
C. Service tools __________________________________________
14
Issue 1
May 2002
Front axle - Carraro suspension
8G02.2
A. Arms unit disassembly

1. Secure the arms with a suitable lifting system in order
to prevent any unwished movement.
Unscrew the nut A and remove the conic pin B.
Remove the pivot pin C, if needed, beating with a
rubber hammer or other tender material.
A
B
Danger
- Arms are very heavy, then they could move and

harm the operator.
2. Remove the upper arms pin covers D on front and
back side of the arms, unscrewing the relative fastenig
screws F.
Collect the seal rings and the shims, where they are
present.
All dismantelled parts needs to be marked at their
position.
Remove the bearing G and the fastening ring H from
every pin.
3. Remove the arms pin fastening screws I and extract
the pins J with a suitable extractor, using the special
threaded hole in the pin.
Warning : This operation set the arms free.
Note :
- To make the extraction easier, there is a possibility to heat the arm pins housing until a limit of
+100C.
- This is a destructive operation for the seal rings.
Fig. 1
H
D
F
G
Danger
- if the upper and lower arms arent correctly
supported, they could move harming the operator.
Fig. 2
J
I
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2002
8G02.3
4. Remove the upper arms, using a suitable lifting

system.
Note : The type of washers placed on each side of
suspension cylinder's ball joint have been changed
for the following front axle serial number
- Model 20.19S : n 1000230
- Model 20.19S : n 1000132
Danger
- the lower arms could rotate harming the operator.
Collect the seal rings and the shims, where they are
present.
If needed replace the shock-absorber pads K removing the relative screws.
5. Remove the lower arms pin covers and the sensor
plate E, unsrewing the relative fastening screws F
(Fig. 5). Collect the rubber washer on the sensor side
(see section 11G01 B).
6. Remove the bearings fastening screws L from the
arms pin, collecting the relative thrust washer M and
the shims N, where they are present.
Note : The thrust washer on the sensor pin has a
particular shape and it could not be confused with
the other ones.
To reach the fastening screw on the sensor side,
positioning ring needs to be removed from the thrust
washer (see section 11G01 B).
Note : This is a destructive operation for the seals.
Remove the bearings O and the seal rings P.
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
P
L
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002
8G02.4
7. Extract the arms pins Q with a suitable extractor,

using the special threaded hole in the pin.
Warning : His operation set the lower arms free.
Remove the lower arms from the axle body.
Danger
- if the lower arms arent supported correctly they
could fall harming the operator.
8. In order to disassemble the lower cover T remove the
fastening screws. Remove the cylinder from the axle
beam.
Remove the O-Ring U from the cylinder and seal ring
R from its housing in the axle beam.
Only if needed replace the bush S, removing them
with a suitable extractor.
Fig. 7
R
S
U
T
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2002

B. Arms unit assembly
9. Insert the bush A in the suspension cylinder housing,

applying Loctite 510 on the retaining rabbet.
Assemble the seal ring B on the axle beam and a
new O-Ring C, with few grease, in the housing on the
bottom of the suspension cylinder D.
Insert the lubricate cylinder in the axle beam.
10. Assemble the lower cover E on the bottom of axle
beam and tighten the relative retaining screws tightening them to the requested torque (see section
8A01 A) with dynamometric wrench.
Note : Before assembling the cover check the
correct position of the O-Ring on the cylinder
bottom.
Place the lower arms on the axle beam and align the
pins housing inserting the special tool CA715350
(see C) G in the housing from the opposite side of
that the pin assembly.
11. Insert the arms pins H in their housings on every arm
and in the beam until the end is reached using the
special tool CA715353 (see C).
Note :
- To make the assembly easier, it is advisable to
cool the arms pins at a temperature lower than
-100C.
- That operation is possible by fully immersing
the arms pins in liquid nitrogen.
- To buy or rent liquid nitrogen, contact the "Air
liquide" society.
Note : The arms pins housing can be heated at a
maximum of +100C.
8G02.5
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002

8G02.6
12. Assemble the seal ring (I) on every pin in the lower
arms housings using the special tool CA715352 (see
C) code with a hammer.
Insert the conical bearing (J) using the special tool
CA715349 (see C).
Assemble a reference spacer R (on the pinion side)
of appropriate dimension (shim R= 1 mm) and the
thrust washer K with the fastening screw L (Fig.12).
Warning : The spacer must have the outer diameter lower than the inner one of the bearing.
Note : The thrust washer on the sensor pin has
a particular shape and it must not be confused
with the other pins ones.
Adjust the conical bearings moving the arms and
tighten the fastening screws with a dynamometric
wrench to the requested torque (see section 8A01
A).
13. Warning : verify the bearings assembly position
on the pins arms.
On the lower pins : the bearing must be inserted
with the cup on the inner side (in the arm housing)
and the cone on the outer one (on the pin).
On the upper pins : the bearing must be inserted
with the cone in the inner side (on the pin) and the cup
on the outer one (on the arm housing) (Fig.13).
14. Position a magnetic-base dial gauge on the axle
beam so that the feeler touches the lower arm side
surface and then zero the gauge.
Position a lever between the arm and the axle beam,
drive the arm till end of stroke from both side and
measure the backlash with the dial gauge. Repeat
this operation several times, so to find an average
value X (Fig.13).
15. In order to determine the necessary thickness S to
give preloading to the bearing, substract the measured value X and the prescribed one from the known
reference shim value R
S = (R - X) - V
V = 0.05 to 0.15 mm
Choose among the available shims a quantity in a
way to reach the previously determinated value S.
Thickness
Quantity
Shim range
0.1
0.2
-
I
L
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
0.5
-
R
X
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2002

16. Remove the fastening screws L from the pinion side
and the reference shim R.
Insert the shims S between the thrust K and the
conical bearing J (Fig.15).
Warning : It is necessary to insert all the shims
and only on the pinion side.
Reassemble the fastening screws then tighten
them with a dynamometric wrench to the requested
torque (see section 8A01 A).
Repeat the described procedures also on the other
lower arm.
17. Place the upper arms on a workbench, using a
suitable lifting system.
8G02.7
L
S
Danger
Fig. 15
- the arms are heavy, it is necessary to handle

them with extreme attention in order to avoid
operator harm.
If needed replace the shock-absorber pad (P), screwing its fastening screws with dynamometric wrench
to the requested torque (see section A01 A) (Fig.16)
P
P
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2002

8G02.8
18. Assemble the two bushes Q on the pivot pin housings

on the fork arm using the special tools CA715347 for
the 20.22 S and 20.19 S models, CA715385 for the
20.29 S model (see C) and a hammer.
Note : To make the assembly easier, it is necessary to cool the bushes at a temperature lower
than -100C.
Insert the seal rings R using the CA715383 (see C).
Insert the spacers T from the inner side fork, using
the special tool CA715384 (see C) and the relative
O-Ring U in the spacer housings (Fig.17).
19. Place the spacer Z in the other arm pivot pin housing
using the special tools CA715384(see C) and the
relative O-Ring V.
In the opposite side insert the false thrust washer W
in the spacer housing with the special tool
CA715381(see C) (Fig.18).
Note : Verify that the false thrust washer position remains correct during the arms assembly,
then the thrust washer will be replaced with
shims, after the spacer backlash is measured.
20. With the help of a suitable lifting system, place the
upper arms on the axle beam couple them with the
lower arms.
Insert the pins arms F in their housings on each arm
until the end is reached using the special tool
CA715353 (see C) (Fig.19).
Note : To make the assembly easier, it is necessary to cool the arms pins at a temperature lower
than -100C.
Assemble the fastening screws E, applying Loctite
542 on the threads, then tighten them with dynamometric wrench to the requested torque (see section
8A01 A).
U
T
U
Fig. 17
ZV
Fig. 18
F
E
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2002

21. Assemble the seal ring H on every arms pin using the
special tool CA715351(see C).
Insert the conical bearing (I) using the special tool
CA715349 (see C).
Warning :
- Check the bearings assembly position on the
pins arms, as defined at sequence 5.
Assemble the cover J with the relative fastening
screws K (Fig.20).
Note : Do not insert any spacers under the cover.
Adjust the conical bearings moving the arms and
tighten the fastening screws with dynamometric
A).
22. Position a magnetic-base dial gauge on the upper
arm so that the feeler touches the upper arm side
surface and then zero the gauge.
Position a lever between the upper arm and the lower
arm, drive the arm till end of stroke from both side
and measure the backlash with the dial gauge X
between the bearings and the relative housings.
Repeat this operation several times, so to find an
average value (Fig.21).
give preloading to the bearing, add the measured
value Y to the prescribed value V :
S=X+V
V = 0.05 to 0.15 mm
Thickness
Quantity
Shim range
0.1
0.2
-
8G02.9
H
K
Fig. 20
0.5
-
24. Repeat the described procedures also on the other

upper arm.
Remove the arms pins covers from the pinion side,
insert the shims S and a new O-Ring L and reassemble them, filling the housing in excess with grease,
then screw the relative fastening screws K with a
section 8A01 A).
Disassemble the covers from the pinion opposite
side, fill the housing in excess with grease, then
reassemble them with a new O-Ring L.
Warning : The shims are added only in the pinion
side.
Tighten the relative fastening screws K with a
section 8A01 A) (Fig.22).
Fig. 21
I
J
L
Fig. 22
Issue 1
May 2002

8G02.10
25. Align arms, suspension cylinder holes and washers

(if they are). Special tool the guide pin CA715382 for
(see C) can be used to align them, but needs to be
removed after.
26. Measured the dimensions X and Y with two long
thickness gauges at the same time with the washers in place.
The length of the gauge needs to be minimum the
outside diameter of the cylinder head.
27. If needed, move some of the positionned shims
(see operation 23) of the upper left arm from the
pinion side to the other side in order to obtain a
minimum play X of 0.10 mm.
If needed, move some of the positionned shims
(see operation 23) of the upper right arm from the
pinion side to the other side in order to obtain a
minimum play Y of 0.10 mm.
A
Fig. 23
A
Fig. 23A
Issue 1
May 2002

28. Insert the guide pin CA715382 for the 20.29 S model
(see C) and adjust the components.
Measure the dimension with a thickness gauge X
between the spacer T and the false thrust washer
W.
Remove the false thrust, taking away the guide pin
in order to remove the spacers housings on the arms
(Fig. 24).
give backlash to the arms, calculate:
S=X-V
V = 0.4 to 0.7 mm
Shim range
Thickness
0.1
Quantity
-
0.3
-
8G02.11
W
D
Fig. 24
30. Insert the just chosen shims S and the spacer D in

the false thrust washer housing, using the special
tool CA715348 (see C) (Fig. 25).
31. Align arms and suspension cylinder holes, inserting
before the pivot pin P the special tool CA715382 (see
C), then drive the pin in the housing (Fig. 26).
Warning : Hold the special tool at the exit from
the pin housing.
Stop the pivot pin with the conical pin Q, screwing
the nut R with a dynamometric wrench to the
requested torque (see section 8A01 A).
Fig. 24A
Danger
- if the upper and lower arms arent correctly
supported, they could move harming the operator.
32. Remove the fastening screws of all the lower arms
pins and erassamble then applying Loctite 542 on
the threads, then ligthen them with a dynanometric
A).
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
Issue 1
May 2002

8G02.12
33. Insert the seal ring M on the sensor pin thrust washer
with the special tool CA715345 (see C) and new ORings in the relative housing on the pins arms covers
O and on the sensor plate N.
Assemble arms pin covers and the sensor plate,
filling their housing in excess with grease, then
screw the relative fastening screws to the requested
torque (see section 8A01A) (Fig. 27).
34. Measure the distance Xac in the Closed Axle position from the pin centre to the differential support,
choosing a well precise datum-point P (Fig. 28).
35. Lift completly the arms and measure the distance
Xaa in the Opened Axle position, from the pivot pin
centre to the chosen datum-point P (Fig. 29).
Warning : Lift gradually the arms untill the end
of strokes is reached, surpasse this position
damage suspension cylinder.
Check that the suspension cylinder stroke C fall
within the prescribed range, substracting between
C = Xaa - Xac
C = 88 to 89 mm
M
N
O
Fig. 27
Xac
P
Fig. 28
Xaa
P
Fig. 29
Issue 1
May 2002

36. If the suspension cylinder stroke C fall out the
prescribed range, measure the backlash X between
the upper arms in the shims inserting point, in
Opened Axle position (Fig. 30).
give the correct end of stroke position to the arms
add the measured value X to the value prescribed
V:
S=X+V
V = 0.3 mm
Thickness
Quantity
Shim range
0.05
0.10
-
0.20
-
8G02.13
2.00
Fig. 30
38. Lower the axle upper arms (Closed Axle position)

and assemble the chosen shims with the relative
fastening screw.
Lift again the axle until the end is reached (Opened
Axle) in order to settle the arms, then come back to
the starting position (Closed Axle).
Check that the suspension cylinder stroke (C fall
within the prescribed range (Fig. 31).
Fig. 31
Issue 1
May 2002

8G02.14
C. Service tools
- CA 715382 - Driver rod (Fig. 32)
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Fig. 34
Issue 1
May 2002
8G02.15

- CA 715384 - Spacer driver (Fig. 36)
- CA 715349 - Bearing driver (Fig. 37)
Fig. 35
Fig. 36
Fig. 37
Issue 1
May 2002

8G02.16
- CA 715350 - Driver kit (Fig. 38)

Fig. 38
Fig. 39
Fig. 40
Issue 1
May 2002
8G02.17
- CA 715353 - Pin driver (Fig. 41)

- CA 715381 - False thrust washer (Fig. 42)
- CA 715384 - Space driver (Fig. 43)
Fig. 41
Fig. 42
Fig.43
Issue 1
May 2002
Front axle - Carraro troubleshooting
8I01
8I01.1
Carraro troubleshooting
CONTENTS
-
Generality __________________________________________________
A. Troubleshooting ____________________________________________
B. Axle problem and diagnosis _________________________________
Issue 1
May 2002
8I01.2
Generality
The following table presents you some possible problems
and their causes. Refer you to the number of the cause
to know its remedy.
Possible causes
Problems
Wheel vibration, front tyre resistance,

halshaft breakage
Wheel vibration, front tyre resistance,
halshaft breakage
No differential action, jamming while

steering
Bruit excessif de la transmission
Uneven wear of tyre
Friction noise
Vibration during forward drice,

intermittent noise
10
11
1. Incorrect installation / defective axle

Correct installation or repair or replace the differential
in case it does not survive any one of the test phases.
2. Overloading/ incorrect weight distribution
Remove excessive weight and redistribute load, following instructions related to the vehicle.
3. Different rotation radius of the tyres
If one tyre has a smaller radius, it will cause partial
wheel slipping when force is applied.The other tyre
with bigger radius will have to support all the work.
Replace the tyre or adjust pressure to have same
radius on both tyre.
4. Broken halfshaft
It is not advisable to operate the vehicle with a broken
halfshaft. It is acceptable to move the vehicle (engine
off unloaded) a few meters away only.
Issue 1
May 2002
8I01.3
5. Bent halfshaft
Replace halfshaft.
6. Blocked differential
Abnormal functioning of the differential or breakage/
blockage of command device. Verify assembly and
all components.
Vehicles with wide steering angle may proceed with
kicks, have steering difficulty or cause pneumatic
wearing at sharp turns. Reduce the steering angle to
minimum and decelerate when the vehicle begins to
kick.
7. Incorrect wheel adjustment
Verify group integrity and wheel side bearings.
Adjusting according.
8. Spoiled or worn out axle parts
Check the condition of ring gear, pinion gear, bearings etc. Replace when ever necessary.
9. Contamination in the axle box or incorrect assembly of parts
Look for foreign particles. Check assembly of the
various parts of the axle.
10. Incorrect adjustment of bevel gear set: Parts of
the transmission worn out (transmission gears, U
joints, etc.)
Replace or adjust as required.
11. Incorrect use of the product
See the vehicle producers instructions once again.
Issue 1
May 2002

8I01.4
A. Troubleshooting
PROBLEM
CAUSE
REMEDY
Ring gear tooth broken at the

outer side
1. Excessive gear load

compared to the one foreseen
2. Incorrect gear adjustment
(excessive backlash)
3. Pinion nut loosened
Replace bevel gear set

Follow carefully the
recommended operations for
the adjustment of bevel gear
set backlash
Ring gear tooth broken side
1. Load bump
2. Incorrect gear adjustment
(insufficient backlash)

set backlash.
Pinion or ring gear teeth or

worn
1. Insufficient lubrication
2. Contaminated oil
3. Incorrect lubrication or
depleted additives
4. Worn out pinion bearings
that cause an incorrect pinion
axle backlash and wrong
contact between pinion and
ring.
Replace bevel gear set.

set backlash.
Use correct lubricants, fill up to
the right levels and replace
according to the
recommended program.
Overheated ring and pinion

teeth. See if gear teeth have
faded
1. Prolong ed functioning at
high temperatures
2. Incorrect lubrication
3. Low oil level
4. Contaminated oil

Use proper lubrication, fill up to
right level and replace at
recommended program.
Pinion teeth pitting
1. Excessive use

Use correct lubrication, fill up
to the right level and substitute
at recommended intervals
Axle beam body bent
1. Vehicle over loaded

2. Vehicle's accident
3. Load bump
Replace axle beam body
Worn out or pitted bearings
2. Contaminated oil
3. Excessive use
4. Normal wear out
Replace bearings.
Use correct lubrication fill up,
to the right level and replace at
recommended intervals
Issue 1
May 2002

Oil leakage form gaskets and
seals
1. Prolonged functioning at
high temperature of the oil
2. Oil gasket assembled
incorrectly
3. Seal lip damaged
4. Contaminated oil
Replace the gasket or seal and

matching surface if damaged.
Use correct lubrication and
replace at recommended
intervals.
Excessive wearing out of input 1. Exhaustive use

flange spline
3. Pinion axle backlash
Replace the flange.

Check that the pinion spline is
not excessively worn out.
Replace bevel gear set if
required.
Fatigue failure of pinion teeth

See if the fracture line is well
defined
(wave lines, beach lines)
1. Exhaustive use
2. Continuos overload
Pinion and ring teeth breakage
1. Crash load of differential

components
Check and/or replace other

differential components.
Side gear spline worn out.

Replace all scratched washers
(Excessive backlash)
Excessive use
Replace differential gear group.

Replace halfshaft if required
Thrust washer surface worn

out or scratched.
2. Incorrect lubrication
3. Contaminated oil
Use correct lubrication and fill

up to right level.
Replace at intervals
recommended.
Replace all scratched washers
and those with 0,1mm
thickness lower than the new
ones.
Inner diameter of tapered roller 1. Excessive use

bearing worn out.
2. Excessive pinion axial
backlash
4. Contaminated oil
Replace bearing.
Check pinion axial backlash.
Use proper lubrication, fill up to
right level and replace at
recommended intervals.
Bent or broken halfshaft
Vehicle intensively operated or

overloaded
Replace
Halfshaft broken at wheel side
1. Wheel support loosened

2. Beam body bent
Replace
Check that wheel support is
not worn out or wrongly
adjusted.
Issue 1
8I01.5
May 2002
8I01.6
B. Axle problem and diagnosis

PROBLEM
Noise while driving
CAUSE
RECOMMENDED REPAIR
1. Excessive backlash between

pinion and ring gear
2. Worn out pinion and gear
ring
3. Worn out pinion bearings
4. Pinion bearings loosened
5. Excessive axial pinion
backlash
6. Worn out differential
bearings
7. Differential bearings
loosened
8. Ring gear out of roundness
9. Low lubricant level
10. Poor or wrong lubricant
11. Bent halfshaft
1. Adjust
1. Noise coming from axle are

usually heard when vehicle
moves in neutral gear but are
not loud.
2. Incorrect backlash between
pinion and ring (sound heard
while decelerating disappears
while increasing the speed)
3. Pinion or input flange worn
out
1. Replace or adjust (see

above)
Intermittent noise
1. Ring gear damaged

2. Differential box bolts
loosened
1. Replace bevel gear set

2. Tighten to torque
Constant noise
1. Ring gear teeth or pinion

damaged
2. Worn out bearings
3.Pinion spline worn out
4. Bent halfshaft
1. Replace bevel gear set
1. Worn out differential gears

2. Worn out differential box or
spider
3. Differential thrust washers
worn out
4. Half shaft spline worn out
1. Replace
2. Replace
Noise while driving in neutral
Noise while seering
Issue 1
May 2002
2. Replace
3. Replace
4. Adjust
5. Adjust
6. Replace
7. Adjust
8. Replace
9. Oil level
10. Replace
11. Replace
2. Replace
3. Adjust
2. Replace
3. Replace
4. Replace
3. Replace
4. Replace
9 . HYDRAULICS
Contents
9 A01
DESCRIPTION OF THE 110 L/MIN CIRCUIT
9 A02
DESCRIPTION OF THE 150 L/MIN CIRCUIT
9 B01
PRIORITY BLOCKS WITH TRAILER BRAKING
9 C01
PRIORITY BLOCKS WITHOUT TRAILER BRAKING
9 D01
AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVES
9 E01
LIFT CONTROL SPOOL VALVE
9 F01
HYDROSTATIC STEERING FOR 2WD AND 4WD FRONT AXLES - AG155H /

AG200H
9 F02
HYDROSTATIC STEERING FOR 4WD FRONT AXLES - APL5052
9 G01
RIGHT-HAND COVER 110 L/MIN LOAD SENSING
9 G02
150 L/MIN RIGHT-HAND COVER
9H01
LEFT-HAND COVER 110 L/MIN AND 150 L/MIN LOAD SENSING
9 I01
BRAKE AND CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDERS CIRCUIT AND BLEEDING
9 J01
CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
9 K01
POWER SHUTTLE CONTROL UNIT
9 K02
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT - SUSPENDED FRONT AXLE
9 L01
DYNASHIFT CONTROL
9 M01
OIL DECONTAMINATION
9 N01
HYDRAULIC TESTS
Issue 2
May 2002
Hydraulics - Description of the 110 l/min circuit
9A01.1
9 A01 Description of the 110 l/min circuit
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Principle _______________________________________________
C.
Centre housing lubricating circuit ________________________
D.
Layout of components in AG 150 - AG 250 Full Powershift

Heavy Duty gearboxes ___________________________________
Diagrams _______________________________________________
20
E.
Issue 1
2
December
May 2000
2002

9A01.2
Issue 1
December 2000

A . General
The hydraulic circuit is of the closed centre type and is
equipped with controlled pressure and flowrate. It consists of two separate high and low pressure circuits,
supplied by a variable displacement pump having a
maximum flowrate of 45 cm3 per revolution. The variable
displacement pump is fed by a booster pump.
Both pumps are driven by a pinion fitted on the upper
shaftline of the PTO located in the intermediate housing.
The booster pump fitted on the left-hand cover sucks oil
through a suction strainer to feed the common tank
formed by the centre housing, the intermediate housing
and the gearbox. The booster pump oil flow is then
directed to the right-hand hydraulic cover where it passes
through the main filter before flowing to the variable
displacement pump and then to the oil manifold of the
centre housing to supply the following components:
- the trumpet housings
- the PTO clutch
- the hydraulic pump drive bearing
- the 4WD unit
- the handbrake mechanism
- the creeper unit (if fitted)
The variable displacement pump supplies either one or
two priority blocks, depending on the options, these are
fitted on the right-hand side hydraulic cover:
- one block for tractors without hydraulic trailer braking
- two blocks for tractors with hydraulic trailer braking.
The first block supplies:
- as its first priority, the steering system,
- as its second priority, the 17 bar rear axle hydraulic
circuit, the auxiliary spool valves and the lift control
valve.
If a second block is fitted, it shares the priority between
the steering system and the trailer braking.
Once the first priorities have been met, the remaining oil
flow becomes available to the auxiliary spool valves and
the lift control valve.
9A01.3
The controller takes into account the pilot signal corresponding to the function requiring the highest pressure.
Component characteristics
Suction strainer (37)
- Type ....................................
- Filtration threshold ................
cartridge
150
Booster pump (38)

- Trademark ...........................
- Capacity ..............................
- Output ..................................
Rexroth Sigma
60 cm3 per revolution
165 l/min at 2200 rpm
Main filter (13)

- Filtration threshold ................
- With differential pressure
bypass .................................
- With differential pressure
switch ..................................
15
3,5 bar
2,4 bar
Safety valve (26)

- Calibration ............................ 22 bar
- Fitted on the low pressure circuit
Safety valve (25)
- Calibration ............................
- No slave device used ...........
- Switch .................................
5 bar
supplies booster pump
5 bar (clogging indicator placed on main
filter)
3 bar
2 bar
Opens ..................................
Closes .................................
Fitted in parallel to filter
Linked to signal lamp on dashboard
Variable displacement pump (48)

- Trademark ........................... Brueninghaus
- Type .................................... Axial pistons
- Variable capacity ................. 0 to 45 cm3 per
revolution
- Output .................................. 0 to 105 l/min
at 2200 rpm
- Min. pressure ....................... 22 bar
- Max. pressure ..................... 200 bar
- Internal lubrication with return to housing
All the pilot signals from the various high pressure valves
are directed to the priority block(s) to then be retransmitted
to the variable displacement pump controller.
Issue 1
May 2001

9A01.4
B . Principle
The purpose of the closed centre hydraulic system is to
limit the power absorbed by the engine. If no hydraulic
slave device is actuated, no flow is discharged by the
variable displacement pump.
When a function is activated, the pump only supplies the
output required for that function.
Note: If the housing is drained, or if the main filter is

replaced or any servicing operation carried results in
the air intake into the system, it is essential to prime
the hydraulic circuit. Disconnect the connector to
the fuel injection pump. Activate the engine starter
motor in consecutive bursts until the (red) booster
pressure signal lamp on the dashboard goes out.
C . Centre housing lubricating circuit

Parts list (Fig. 1)
A
B
C
D
E
F
:
:
:
:
:
:
Trumpet housing lubrication

Centre housing lubricating manifold
Pump bearing lubrication
General supply from booster circuit
PTO clutch lubrication
Lubrication for handbrake mechanism and creeper
unit (if fitted)
G : Transfer pipe for trumpet housings with double
drive unit
Issue 1
May 2001
9A01.5
B
C
D
G
Fig. 1
Issue 12
Issue
May 2000
2002
December

9A01.6
D . Layout of components in AG 150

- AG 250 Full Powershift and Heavy
Duty gearboxes
Full Powershift gearbox (Figs. 2 - 3)
Parts list
(1) Tank
(2) Brake master cylinders
(3) Servo brake
(4) Gearbox proportional
to solenoid
(12) valves
(13) Main filter (15 u)
(14) Suction strainer (250 u)
(15) Pump
(16) Variable displacement pump regulator
(17) Load Sensing diagnostic connector
(18) Solenoid valves: PTO, PTO brake, differential
to lock (front, rear)
(21) and 4WD
(22) Steering priority spool valve
(23) 17 bar pressure spool valve
(24) High pressure diagnostic connector
(25) 5 bar safety valve
(27) Priority block without trailer braking
(28) Right-hand cover
(29) Booster pump pressure diagnostic connector
(30) Low pressure diagnostics connector
(31) Discharge pressure limiter
(32) Lift rams
(33) Couplers
(34) PTO brake
(35) PTO clutch
(36) Auxiliary spool valves
(37) Suction strainer (150 )
(38) Booster pump
(39) Centre housing lubricating manifold
(40) 4WD clutch
(41) Lift control valve
(42) Rear differential lock
(43) Left-hand cover
(44) 3-way filter
(46) Gearbox pressure regulating valve (17 bar)
(47) Hydrostatic steering spool valve (Orbitrol)
(48) Variable displacement pump
(49) Thermostatic valve
(50) Front differential lock (except ZF front axle)
(51) Steering rams
(52) Oil cooler
Issue 1
December 2000
(53)
(54)
(55)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
Pump drive pinion bearing

Park Lock control
Park Lock solenoid valve
Priority blocks with trailer braking
Trailer brake valve
Trailer brake coupler
High pressure spool valve
Note: for Full Powershift hydraulics, see section 5I01.
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
High pressure
Low pressure
Lubrication
Suction
Return
Brakes
Pilot flow
9A01.7
Full Powershift gearbox - Dana front axle - Without trailer brake
52
51
50
49
3
4
47
58
46
15
45
13
44
54
53
14
43
16
38
18
12
55
17
21
37
40
22
23
65
39
24
29
30
42
48
32
27
41
25
26
28
36
33
35
34
33
Parts list
Issue 1
32
31
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
May 2001

9A01.8

Full Powershift gearbox - ZF front axle - With trailer brake
52
51
51
1
2
49
3
4
12
47
58
46
15
45
13
44
54
53
14
43
16
17
38
22
23
37
62
63
40
18
39
24
42
48
32
27
41
25
36
33
35
34
33
64
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
32
55
65
21
29
30
26
28
31
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
9A01.9
Right-hand side
14
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Ports and suction pipe of the Gerotor pump

Return port (Orbitrol and braking assistance)
Gearbox
Fig. 4
Issue 1
2
December
May 2000
2002

9A01.10

Left-hand side
4
12
45
15
52
44
46
49
(E) Engine speed sensor

(F) Tank and master cylinders of brake and clutch
(Heavy Duty gearbox only)
Fig. 5
Issue 1
December 2000
9A01.11
Heavy Duty gearbox (Fig. 6 - 7 - 7A)

Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(6)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
to
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(51)
Tank
Brake master cylinders
Servo brake
Engine clutch
Power shuttle
Control valve (clutch and Dynashift)
Control unit with Power shuttle
Clutch diagnostics connector
Front and rear clutch diagnostics connector
Dynashift diagnostics connectors
Accumulator for low pressure components
Hare/Tortoise solenoid valve
Oil cooler
Load Sensing diagnostics connector
Variable displacement pump controller
Main filter (15 )
Solenoid valves: PTO, PTO brake, differential lock
(front, rear)
and 4WD
Steering priority spool valve
17 bar pressure spool valve
High pressure diagnostic connector
Booster pressure / lubricating diagnostics connector
Low pressure diagnostics connector
Priority blocks without trailer braking
Right-hand side cover
5 bar safety valve
22 bar safety valve
Pressure limiter
Lift rams
Couplers
PTO brake
PTO clutch
Auxiliary spool valves
Lift control valve
4WD clutch
Booster pump
Left-hand side cover
Suction strainer and pipe (clutch(es))
Left and right-hand side brakes
Dynashift unit
Hydrostatic steering spool valve (Orbitrol)
Clutch master cylinder
Front differential lock
Steering ram
Variable displacement pump
Braking assistance accumulator
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 7A
Issue 21
with mechanical
reverse shuttle
(Fig. 7)
with Power
shuttle
(Fig. 7A)
December
2000
May 2002
9A01.12
Parts list
with mechanical
reverse shuttle
(Fig. 6)
(55) Priority blocks with trailer braking

(56) Trailer brake valve
(57) Trailer brake couplers
with Power
shuttle
(Fig. 6)
High pressure
Low pressure
Lubrication
Version with trailer braking
Suction
Return
Brakes
Pilot flow
2
3
Parts list
Fig. 7
Fig. 7A
55
56
57
Fig. 6
Issue 12
May 2000
2002
December
9A01.13
Heavy Duty gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle
Parts list
Fig. 6
Fig. 7A
10
47
46
1
2
3
4
45
44
51
43
42
41
13
40
11
39
14
38
18
19
37
20
21
22
36
48
35
23
34
24
25
26
28
27
33
32
29
31
29
30
12
17
28
Fig. 7
2
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December

9A01.14

Heavy Duty gearbox with low pressure circuit
4
5
Parts list
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 7A
9A01.15
With mechanical reverse shuttle
51
Fig. 8
With mechanical reverse shuttle
41
Fig. 9
Issue 21
May 2002
December
2000

9A01.16
Mechanical reverse shuttle (Fig. 8)
Booster circuit
(1) Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve

(2) Engine clutch (Pressure Loaded) and Dynashift
control valve
(8) Accumulator for low pressure components
(51) Accumulator for braking assistance
- The booster hydraulic line feeds the variable

displacement pump and lubricates the mechanical
elements in the gearbox. Exclusively in the Pressure
Loaded version, it also maintains the oil level in the
brake and clutch master cylinders.
A : 17 bar supply piping for Hare / Tortoise range and

control valve (clutch and Dynashift)
B : Piping to clutch
C : Hose from clutch master cylinder
17 bar low pressure

Gas
Heavy Duty gearbox

Suction circuit
(41) Suction strainer and pipe (Pressure Loaded clutch)
(Fig. 9).
Low pressure (17 bar)

- The Hare / Tortoise range, Dynashift and engine clutch
(Pressure Loaded) or Power shuttle (depending on
assembly) are fed by the low pressure circuit.
- An accumulator fitted on the supply line allows the oil
flow to be accelerated producing a faster reaction of the
Dynashift pistons.
- Another accumulator of the same type is fitted on the
17 bar line and maintains the pressure to the assistance
mechanism (engine stopped), by means of a non-return
valve mounted upstream.
Cooling
- The transmission oil of the rear axle housing is cooled
by two cooling elements located in the grille at the front
of the tractor and linked to the main 15 micron filter
element via a set of pipes and hoses.
Issue 21
May 2002
December
2000
9A01.17
With low pressure circuit
51
B
Fig. 8A
With low pressure circuit
41
Fig. 9A
Issue 1
2
December
May 2000
2002

9A01.18
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000
9A01.19
Low pressure circuit (Fig. 8A)

(1)
(2)
(8)
(51)
Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve

Engine clutch and Dynashift control valve
Accumulator for low pressure components
Accumulator for braking assistance
A : 17 bar supply piping for Hare / Tortoise range and

control valve (clutch and Dynashift)
B : Piping to clutch
17 bar low pressure

Gas
Heavy Duty gearbox

Suction circuit
((41) Suction strainer and pipe (Pressure Loaded clutch)
(Fig. 9A).
Issue 12
Issue
May 2000
2002
December

9A01.20
E . Diagrams
Full Powershift gearbox (Fig. 10)
Parts list
(1) Oil tank (gearbox and centre housing)
(3) Servo brake
(4)
to Gearbox proportional solenoid valves
(12)
(13) Main filter (15 )
(15) Pump
(16) Variable displacement pump controller
(18) Solenoid valves: PTO brake, differential lock
to (front, rear)
(21) and 4WD
(31) Dsicharge pressure limiter
(32) Lift rams
(33) Couplers
(34) PTO brake
(35) PTO clutch
(36) Auxiliary spool valve
(38) Booster pump
(40) 4WD clutch
(43) Left cover
(44) 3-way filter
(51) Steering rams
(52) Oil cooler
(54) Park Lock control
(55) Park Lock solenoid valve
(56) Dual Control or front PTO (if fitted) 17 bar hydraulic
line
(57) Braking assistance non-return valve
(58) Braking assistance accumulator
(59) Load Sensing connector (provision for)
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
Return connector (provision for)

High pressure connector (provision for)
Trailer brake valve
Note: for Full Powershift gearbox hydraulics, see

section 5I01.
Legend
A : Differential lock
B : (17 bar) low pressure switch
C : 4WD
D : rear PTO
E : rear PTO brake
F : 4WD clutch
G : Pump bearing lubrication
H : Rear PTO lubrication
I : Trumpets lubrication
J : Creeper unit and handbrake mechanism lubrication
Fig. 10
Diagram showing Full Powershift gearbox mounted in series
- Load sensing 110 l/min and Dana front axle mounted in series.
9A01.21
27
Yft
41
32
T0
63
150
bar
23
17
bar
Xdlr
Pbf
Pdlr
Pbn
Parts list
62
22
61
65
Xbf
Xbf
P
Paux
26
64
31
22 bar
155 bar
17
LS
A2
B2
Pl
Pfr
51
Xaux
24
A
B
16
24
20
230 bar
47
XLS
21
22 bar
44
200 bar
15
29
48
250 microns
15>200
17 bar
6 bar
LS
19
30
49
52
2,4 bar
87/73
45 cc/tr
14
18
46
25
3,5 bar
36
A1
B1
60
58
5 bar
LS
59
15>200
12
2,4 bar
3,5 bar
28
G
13
56
J
I
2,8 bar
38
87/70
60 cc/tr 7
37
150
microns
39
4,4
4,4
Issue
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000
55
54
57
43
Fig. 10

9A01.22 Hydraulics
- Description of the 110 l/min circuit
Full Powershift gearbox (Fig. 11)

Parts list
(3) Servo brake
(4) Gerabox proportional
to solenoid valves
(12) of gearbox
(13) Main filter (15u)
(14) Suction strainer
(15) Pump
(18) Solenoid valves: PTO brake,
to differential lock (front, rear)
(21) and 4WD
(31) Discharge pressure limiter
(32) Lift rams
(36) Auxiliary spool valve
(37) Suction strainer (150u)
(38) Booster pump
(44) 3-way filter
(47) Hydrostatic steering spool valve (17 bar)
(51) Steering rams
(52) Oil cooler
(54) Park Lock control
(55) Park Lock solenoid valve
(56) Dual control or front PTO hydraulic line (17 bar)
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
Load Sensing connector (provision for)

Trailer brake valve
High pressure valve spool
Note : For Full Powershift hydraulics, see section

5I01.
Legend
C : 4WD
D : rear PTO
E : rear PTO brake
F : 4WD clutch
J : Creeper unit and handbrake mechanism lubrication
Fig 11
Diagram showing Full Powershift gearbox
- Load sensing 110 l/min and ZF front axle
9A01.23
27
Yft
41
32
T0
63
150
bar
23
17
bar
Xdlr
Pbf
Pdlr
Parts list
62
Pbn
22
61
65
Xbf
Xbf
P
Paux
26
64
31
24
22 bar
155 bar
17
LS
A2
B2
Pl
Pfr
51
Xaux
A
B
16
24
20
230 bar
47
XLS
21
22 bar
44
200 bar
15
29
48
250 microns
15>200
17 bar
6 bar
60
58
5 bar
LS
59
15>200
2,4 bar
12
3,5 bar
28
13
J
I
56
2,8 bar
38
87/70
60 cc/tr
37
150
microns
39
4,4
Issue 1
30
LS
19
49
52
2,4 bar
87/73
45 cc/tr
14
18
46
25
3,5 bar
36
A1
B1
4,4
December
2000
May 2002
55
54
57
43
Fig. 11

9A01.24 Hydraulics
Heavy Duty gearbox (Fig. 6 - 7 - 7A)

Parts list

(3) Servo brake
(4) Engine clutch
(4) Power shuttle
(5) Control valve (clutch and Dynashift)
(5) Control unit with Power shuttle
(6) Clutch diagnostics connector
(6) Power shuttle front clutch diagnostics connector
(6A) Power shuttle rear clutch diagnostics connector
(7) Dynashift diagnostics connector
(8) Accumulator for low pressure components
(9) Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve
(10) Oil cooler
(13) Main filter (15 u)
(14) Solenoid valves: PTO brake,
to differential lock (front,
(17) rear) and 4WD
(21) Booster / lubrication diagnostics connector
(27) Pressure limiter
(28) Lift rams
(32) Auxilliary spool valve
(32A)Electro-hydraulic auxiliary spool valves
(37) Suction strainer (150 u)
(38) Booster pump
(45) Clutch master cylinder
(47) Steering ram
(49) Dual control or front PTO (if fitted) hydraulic line (17 bar)
(52) Load Sensing connector (provision for)
(53) Return connector (provision for)
(54) High pressure connector (provision for)
with mechanical
reverse shuttle
(Fig. 12)
with Power
shuttle
(Fig. 13)
Fig 12
Fig 13

(52) Load Sensing connector for front axle
with suspension system
(53) Return connector (provision for)
(54) High pressure connector for front axle
with suspension system
(58) 13 bar valve
(59) 17 bar diagnostics connector on control unit
with mechanical
reverse shuttle
(Fig. 12)
Legend (Fig. 12 13)

C : 4WD
D : Rear PTO
E : Rear PTO brake
F : 4WD clutch
K : Line to brake master cylinder booster circuit
L : Lubrication to gearbox
M: Low pressure accumulator
N : Engine clutch line
O : Line to Dynashift rear piston (clutch C)
Q : Line to Dynashift front piston (clutch A)
S : Hare/Tortoise mechanism
U : High pressure line to suspension front axle with suspension system
V : Load Sensing line from suspension front axle with suspension system
W: Baking assistance accumulator
X : Line to front PTO
Y : Line to Power shuttle rear clutch
Z : Line to Power shuttle front clutch
Issue 1
December 2000
with Power
shuttle
(Fig. 13)
Diagram showing Heavy Duty gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle
- 110l/min Load Sensing, mounted in series
9A01.25
23
33
28
T0
19
17
bar
Pbn
Fig 13
Parts list
54
18
Xbf
LS
A2
B2
Paux
26
27
Xaux
20
22 bar
11
32
A1
B1
Pl
A
B
12
150 bar
47
24
16
230 bar
XLS
17
25
K
21
14
48
22
15
LS
52
50
51
53
45
D
87/73
45 cc/tr
LS
200 bar
44
22 bar
8
5 bar
G
11 2,8 bar
38
I
4,4
Issue 1
24
49
13
4,4
37
N
2,4 bar
15>200
35
3,4 bar
87/70
60 cc/tr
150
microns
May 2000
2002
December
3,4 bar
10
6
7
39
Q
5
Fig. 12

9A01.26 Hydraulics
Issue
Issue11
May 2002
December
2000
Diagram with Heavy Duty gearbox and Power shuttle
- 110 l/min Load Sensing
9A01.27
23
Yft
T
T0
19
62
17 bar
32A
150 bar
Xdir
32
Pdir
28
54
18
U
Paux
26
Xaux
27
20
22 bar
12
P1
Pfr
60 microns
33
B
11
50 bar
47
16
230 bar
17
XLS
22 bar
52
14
25
21
22
200 bar
48
V
S
50
44
76/65
45cc/tr
15
51
Fig 12
59
5 bar
Parts list
L
F
58
3,4 bar
13
G
H
2,8 bar
35
24
15>200
2,4 bar
3,4 bar
38
39
37
150 nicrons
49
13b
10
76/61
50cc/tr
6A
O
5
Q
1
7
Issue 1
December
2000
May 2002
Fig. 13
9A02.1
9A02 Description of the 150 l/min circuit
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Principle _______________________________________________
C.
Centre housing lubricating circuit ________________________
D.
Layout of components in AG 150 and AG 250 Full Powershift

gearboxes ______________________________________________
Diagram ________________________________________________
10
E.
Issue 1
May 2001

9A02.2
A . General
All tractors in the 8200 series are fitted with a closed
centre hydraulic circuit with controlled pressure and
flowrate.
Only tractors with a Full Powershift gearbox can be fitted,
depending on options, with a 150 l/min flowrate circuit.
48
It is composed of two separate high and low pressure

circuits, supplied by a variable displacement pump (48)
located on the external face of the right-hand side cover
(Fig. 1). This pump has a maximum output of 60 cm3 per
revolution and is itself fed by a 80 cm3 booster pump.
Both pumps are driven by a pinion fitted on the upper
shaft of the PTO located in the intermediate housing. A
relay pinion mounted on a bearing located on the
internal side of the cover, ensures the rotation of the
driven pinion of the variable displacement pump.
The booster pump fitted on the left-hand cover sucks oil
through a suction strainer to feed the common tank
formed by the centre housing, intermediate housing and
gearbox. The booster flowrate is then directed towards
the right-hand cover and passes through the main filter
before flowing towards the variable displacement pump
and the oil manifold of the centre housing to supply the
following components:
- the trumpet housings
- the PTO clutch
- the hydraulic pump bearing
- the 4WD unit
- the handbrake mechanism
- the creeper unit (if fitted).
The variable displacement pump supplies one or two
priority blocks, depending on options, that are fitted on
the right-hand side cover:
- one block for tractors without hydraulic trailer braking
- two blocks for tractors with hydraulic trailer braking.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
The first block supplies:
- its first priority, steering system

- its second priority, the 17 bar rear axle hydraulic circuit,
the auxiliary spool valves and the lift control valve.
If a second block is fitted, it shares the first priority
between the steering circuit and the trailer braking.

Once the first priorities have been met, the remaining oil
flow becomes available to the auxiliary spool valves and
the lift control valve.
All the pilot signals from the various high pressure valves
are directed to the priority block(s) to then be retransmitted
to the variable displacement pump controller.
The controller takes into account the pilot signal corresponding to the function requiring the highest pressure.
Component characteristics
Suction strainer (37)
- Type: cartridge
- Filtration threshold: 150
9A02.3
B . Principle
The purpose of the closed centre hydraulic system is to
limit the power absorbed by the engine. If no hydraulic
slave device is actuated, no flow is discharged by the
When a function is activated, the pump only supplies the
output required for that function.
Note: If the housing is drained, or if the main filter is
replaced or any servicing operation carried results in
the air intake into the system, it is essential to prime
the hydraulic circuit. Disconnect the connector to
the fuel injection pump. Activate the engine starter
motor in consecutive bursts until the (red) booster
pressure signal lamp on the dashboard goes out.
Booster pump (38)

- Trademark Rexroth Sigma
- Capacity: 80 cm3 per revolution
- Output: 215 l/min at 2200 rpm
Main filter (13)
- Filtration threshold: 15 u
- With differential pressure bypass: 3.5 bar
- With differential pressure switch: 2.4 bar
Safety valve (26)
- Calibration: 22 bar
- fitted on the low pressure circuit
Safety valve (25)
- Calibration: 5 bar
- No slave device used resupplies booster pump
- Switch: 5 bar (clogging indicator placed on main filter)
- Opens: 3 bar
- Closes: 2 bar
Fitted in parallel to filter
Linked to signal lamp on dashboard
Variable displacement pump (48)
- Trademark: Brueninghaus
- Type Axial pistons
- Variable capacity 0 to 60 cm3 per revolution
- Output: 0 to 150 l/min at 2200 rpm
- Min. pressure: 22 bar
- Max. pressure: 200 bar
- Internal lubrication with return to housing
Issue 1
May 2001

9A02.4
C . Centre housing lubricating circuit

Fig. 2
B
C
D
G
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F :
Trumpet housing lubrication

Pump bearing lubrication
General supply from booster circuit
PTO clutch lubrication
Handbrake mechanism lubrication and creeper unit
(if fitted)
G : Transfer pipe for trumpets with double drive unit
Issue 1
May 2001
9A02.5
D . Layout of components in AG 150

and AG 250 Full Powershift gearboxes
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
to
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
to
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
Tank
Servo brake
Proportional solenoid valves of gearbox
Main filter (15 )
Pump
Load Sensing diagnostic connector
Solenoid valves: PTO brake, differential lock
(front, rear)
and 4WD
5 bar safety valve
22 bar safety valve
Priority block without trailer braking
Right-hand cover
Booster pump pressure diagnostic connector
Discharge pressure limiter
Lift rams
Couplers
PTO brake
PTO clutch
Auxiliary spool valve
Booster pump
4WD clutch
Lift control valve
Left-hand.t cover
3-way filter (15 )
Temperature probe
Gearbox pressure regulating valve (17 bar)
Thermostatic valve
Front differential lock
Steering rams
Oil cooler
27
Fig. 3
Version without trailer braking
(54)
(55)
(58)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
Park Lock control

Trailer brake valve
Remark
- For Full Powershift gearbox hydraulics, see section

5I01.
High pressure
Low pressure
Lubrification
Suction
Return
Brakes
Pilot flow
Fig. 4
Issue 1
Fig. 5
May 2001

9A02.6

Full Powershift gearbox - Dana front axle with trailer braking
52
51
50
49
3
4
12
47
58
46
15
45
62
63
44
22
23
53
54
55
43
24
25
38
27
37
28
40
18
39
14
42
30
32
13
48
41
16
17
36
33
35
34
33
64
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
32
65
26
31
21
29
Fig. 5
Fig. 4
9A02.7
Full Powershift gearbox - ZF front axle with trailer braking
52
51
51
1
2
49
3
4
12
47
58
46
15
45
62
63
44
22
23
53
54
55
43
24
25
38
27
37
28
40
18
39
14
42
30
32
13
48
41
16
17
36
33
35
34
33
64
Parts list
Issue 1
32
65
26
31
21
29
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
May 2001
9A02.8
Right-hand side
14
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Port and suction pipe of the Gerotor pump

Return port (Orbitrol and braking assistance)
Gearbox
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001
9A02.9
Left-hand side
4
12
45
15
52
44
46
49
(E) Engine speed sensor

(F) Tank and brake master cylinders
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

9A02.10
E . Diagram
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
to
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
to
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(41)
(43)
(44)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(51)
(52)
(54)
(55)
(56)
Tank
Servo brake
Gearbox proportional solenoid valves
Main filter (15 )
Pump
Load Sensing diagnostic connector
Solenoid valves: PTO, PTO brake, differential lock
(front, rear)
and 4WD
5 bar safety valve
22 bar safety valve
Priority block without trailer braking
Right-hand cover
Booster pump pressure diagnostic connector
Discharge pressure limiter
Lift rams
Auxiliary spool valve
Booster pump
Lift control valve
Left cover
3-way filter (15 )
Gearbox pressure regulating valve (17 bar)
Thermostatic valve
Steering ram(s)
Oil cooler
Park Lock control
Dual Control or front PTO (if fitted)17 bar hydraulic
line
Issue 1
May 2001
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
Braking assistance non-return valve

Load Sensing connector (provision for)
Trailer brake valve
Intermediate pinion lubrication
Fig. 8
Diagram of Full Powershift gearbox
Hydraulics - Description of the 150l/min circuit
- 150 l/min Load Sensing optional

- A: Dana front axle version
- B: ZF front axle version
9A02.11
62
27
Yft
41
32
T0
63
150
bar
Xdir
23
17
bar
Xdir
Pdir
Pbf
Pdir
Pbn
22
61
65
Xbf
Xbf
P
Paux
26
47
64
31
22 bar
B
155 bar
17
16
Manocontact
BP
XLS
21
A
22 bar
200 bar
15
25
29
48
66
PDF
250 microns
17 bar
6 bar
2,4 bar
30
Frein PDF
52
60
58
5 bar
LS
59
15>200
Pump
bearing lub.
2,4 bar
PTO lub.
3,5 bar
28
13
56
Trumpets lub.
2,8 bar
38
87/70
80 cc/tr 7
37
150
microns
39
4,4
LS
19
49
4 WD
clutch
12
87/77
60 cc/tr
14
15>200
18
46
3,5 bar
36
A1
B1
4 RM
44
Diff.lock
24
20
230 bar
LS
A2
B2
Pl
Pfr
51
Xaux
24
4,4
55
54
57
43
Fig. 8
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Hydraulics - Priority blocks
9B01.1
9 B01 Priority blocks with trailer braking
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Identification of ports ___________________________________
B.
Operation of spool valves ________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

9B01.2
General
Depending on options, the 8200 Load Sensing series
tractors fitted with the 110 l/min or 160 l/min variable
displacement pump, may be fitted with a trailer brake
mechanism.
The hydraulic unit attached on the right-hand side cover
has two priority blocks mounted in series.
The internal block (1) (Fig. 1) ensures priority for the 17 bar
circuit and manifold that supplies the auxiliary spool
valves and lift control valve (see respective sections
9D01 and 9E01).
The external block (4) (Fig. 1) shares priority between the
steering function and trailer braking.
To facilitate access to the trailer-braking device, either
remove the rear wheel or place it in its wide track position
(see section 2G01).
Tightening torques
- Bolts V: 25 - 35 Nm. Loctite 542 (Fig. 2 - 3)
- Wheel studs or nuts: see section 2G01
Special points
- Check the oil tightness of the unions and Orings on
priority blocks fitted against the hydraulic cover.
- If the priority blocks have been replaced, carry out
hydraulic tests (see section 9N01) and check the
operation of the controls.
- Carry out a road test.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
9B01.3
Load sensing 110 l/min
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

9B01.4

Load sensing 150 l/min
G F
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001

A . Identification of ports (Figs. 2 to
4)
Note: Drilled port B on cover (2) (see section 9C01,
Fig. 2) allows the priority blocks to be supplied in
series.
A
C
D
E
F
9B01.5
I : 17 bar output
J : Plugs
K : Pilot flow from brake master cylinders
P.dir (St.pr) : Tiroir priorit direction
BP (LP)
: low pressure spool valve
HP
: high pressure spool valve
:
:
:
:
:
Supply to steering spool valve (Orbitrol)

Load Sensing (LS) pilot flow to pump controller
Load Sensing (LS) pilot flow from the Orbitrol
To trailer brake connection
Pressure to lift control valve and auxiliary spool
valves
G : LS pilot flow from lift control valve and auxiliary
spool valves
Load Sensing 110 l/min
Bottom view
Bottom view
2
K
K
F
E
Front view
A
Front view
P.dir
HP
BP
BP
HP
P.dir
2
I
A
Top view
Top view
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001

9B01.6

Parts list (Fig. 5)
B . Operation of spool valves

The control slide moves to the left under the action of
spring (5). The flow coming from channel B is by priority
directed to the Orbitrol spool valve via channel A. When
the steering in a central position, there is no flow through
this channel. The increasing pressure forces the spool to
move to the right and compress spring (5) thus allowing
the flow to pass into channel J.
During operation, a pilot pressure from the Orbitrol arrives
through channel D and pushes the spool valve to the left
thus allowing the flowrate required by the steering to
enter into channel A.
The remaining flow is directed into channel J.
Trailer brake spool valve (6) (Fig. 5)

When the trailer brake is not actuated, the pressure in
channel K is zero and the spool valve allows communication between the L and R channels.
As soon as the tractor brake is activated, the pressure
existing in channel K moves piston (7), this pushes the
spool valve to the left allowing oil to flow between the J
and L channels.
The increasing pressure in channel L acts on the end of
spool valve (6) and compresses spring (8) to reestablish
the balance, allowing pressure in channel L to be maintained in relation to the pressure existing in channel K.
The maintenance of this pressure is obtained by placing
in communication channel L with either channel J or R
port .
Note: As with the no trailer braking priority block
(see section 9C01), a flowrate of 0.5 l/min flows
through channel A towards channel D (dynamic
steering) via a drilled hole and a pressure relief valve
mounted in the spool valve (2).
Issue 1
May 2001
(4)
(17)
(20)
(21)
(31)
Priority block
Lift control valve
Manifold
LS signal
P : High pressure
R : Return below oil level
LS : Signal to pump controller via the priority blocks
Fig. 5
9B01.7
4
B
A
150 bar
17 bar
D
A
R
G
E
B
17
20
1A
1B
31
21
7
P
LS
LS
P R
R
P
P
Fig. 5
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
9C01.1
9 C01 Priority blocks without trailer braking
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Identification of ports ___________________________________
B.
Operation ______________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

9C01.2
General
The priority block (1) (Fig. 1) comprises two spool valves
(Fig. 5) and is fitted on the right-hand side hydraulic cover
(2) (Fig. 2). It receives the oil flow coming from the
variable displacement pump. It ensures priority for the
steering circuit and the low-pressure circuit (17 bar). The
oil is then directed to the manifold for use by the auxiliary
spool valves and lift control valve (see respective sections 9D01 and 9E01).
To facilitate access to the priority block, remove the rear
wheel or place it in its wide track position (see section
2G01).
Tightening torques
- Bolts V: 25 - 35 Nm. Loctite 542 (Figs. 2 to 4).
- Wheel nuts or studs: see section 2G01.
Special points
- Check the oil tightness of all unions and Orings fitted
between the priority block and the hydraulic cover.
- If the priority block has been replaced, carry out hydraulic tests (see section 9N01) and check the operation of
the controls.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
9C01.3
A . Identification of ports (Fig. 2 to 4)

A : Supply to steering (Orbitrol)
B : HP supply from variable displacement pump (drilled
port on mating face of priority block and hydraulic
cover) (Fig. 2)
C : Load Sensing (LS) pilot to pump controller
D : Load Sensing (LS) pilot from the Orbitrol
F : Pressure to lift control valve and auxiliary spool
valves
G : LS pilot flow from lift control valve and auxiliary
spool valves
H : Internal channel (Fig. 5)
I : 17 bar output
J : Plug
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
HP : high pressure spool valve

LP : low pressure spool valve
Fig. 4
2
Bottom view
B
Bottom view
J
V
HP
BP
BP
HP
V
Front view
Front view
F
G
Top view
Top view
Parts list
Issue 21
Fig. 4
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
May 2002
2001
9C01.4
HP
BP
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
Fig. 4
Fig. 3
9C01.5
G F
Parts list
2
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
2002
May 2001

9C01.6

Parts list
B . Operation (Fig. 5)
1 priority: Steering
st
The spool valve (2) moves to the left under the action of
spring (3).
The oil flow coming from the variable displacement
pump via channel B (Fig. 2) is by priority directed towards
the Orbitrol spool valve via channel A.
- Steering in neutral position: The steering spool valve
(Orbitrol) is closed. The pump pressure moves spool
valve (2) to the right and the oil flow is directed into
channel H.
- Steering wheel turned: A pilot pressure from the
Orbitrol arrives at port D and pushes the spool valve (2)
to the left, allowing the oil flow to enter into port A and
supply the Orbitrol.
Note: An oil flow of approximately 0.5 l/min flows
through port A towards port D via a drilled hole and
restrictor in spool valve (2). This flowrate causes a
pressure of approximately 6 bars at port D. The line
LS directs this pressure to the pump controller
which is adjusted to 22 bar in order to obtain a
standby pressure of 28 bar.
2nd priority: 17 bar pressure holding valve

The spool valve (4) moves to the left under the action of
spring (5), allowing the oil flow from channel H to be
directed into port I (17 bar low pressure). As soon as the
pressure in this port reaches 17 bar, the spool valve
reaches equilibrium thus allowing the low pressure to be
maintained and the oil flow to be directed towards port F
(lift control and auxiliary spool valves).
When the lift control and auxiliary spool valves are used,
a pilot pressure LS is sent to the block via port G to join
the LS line at port C.
Issue 1
May 2001
(1)
(17)
(20)
(21)
(31)
Priority block
Lift control valve
Manifold
LS signal
P : High pressure
R : Return below oil level
LS : Signal to pump controller via the priority block
9C01.7
1
HP
I
F
D
BP
B
20
17
1A
1B
21
P
31
LS
LS
P R
R
P
G
4
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
Hydraulics - Auxiliary spool valves
9D01.1
9 D01 Auxiliary spool valves
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
Operation ______________________________________________
A.
Different types of spool valves ___________________________
B.
Diagram ________________________________________________
10
C.
Removing and refitting the spool valves __________________
11
Issue 1
May 2001

9D01.2

Basic assemblies proposed
General
The Rexroth MP18 type auxiliary spool valves are fitted
on the high flowrate, high-pressure circuit. They are
supplied by oil coming from the priority block(s) (depending on options).
If no function is activated, the entire flowrate is sent to
the spool valves. If certain priorities are being supplied,
the remaining flowrate is then available to the auxiliary
spool valves.
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
spool valves: e c c
spool valves: a d c
spool valves: c c c
spool valves: b a d
spool valves: a d c c
spool valves: e c c c
spool valves: c c c c
spool valves: b a d c
spool valves: b - e c c
Each spool valve is provided with a flowrate regulation

system that is controlled by a knob (1) mounted on a
support fixed to the right wing (Fig. 1). Each coupler is
identified by a coloured plug (black, red, green and yellow
for 4th spool valve) which corresponds to the colour of the
knobs (1).
The main spool of the valve is operated by a cable linked
to a lever located in the cab, except in the case of a spool
valve with Dual Control where the cable is replaced by an
electrical control (this type of spool valve is not dealt with
in this section). The spool directs the oil towards one or
other of the outlet ports. Each outlet port is linked to the
XLS control line of the variable displacement pump
regulator, via the priority block(s).
The tractors are fitted with a basic block comprising three
or four spool valves (depending on options).
Different types of spool valves

- a : 3-position, flowrate regulator, spring return, zero
leak
- b : 3-position, flowrate regulator, spring return, electrical control (Dual Control is not dealt with in this
section)
- c : 4-position, flowrate regulator, automatic return to
neutral, floating position, zero leak
- d : 4-position, flowrate regulator, automatic return to
neutral, floating position, no zero leak.
- e : 4-position, flowrate regulator, automatic return to
neutral, floating position, overpressure and supply
valves for hydraulic motors.
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
9D01.3
Couplers (Fig. 1A)

When the auxiliary spool valve is at rest, a lever system
(1) allows existing pressure to be relieved into the hose
hydraulic pipe (2) linking the spool valve to the coupler
block concerned (3).
By acting on this system, the clean oil under pressure is
directed to the return via a hose and pipe assembly (4)
connected to the upper part of the intermediate housing.
This drop in pressure facilitates the connecting of the
male coupler to the female coupler.
The contaminated oil, coming from the separation of the
couplers, flows through a port placed above a tank (5)
located beneath the coupler blocks, in a flexible and
transparent manner.
F
5
3
3
F
Fig. 1A
Issue 1
May 2001

9D01.4
Operation (Fig. 5 to 7)
Adjusting the compensated pressure flow
This system comprises:
- the flow control tube (6)
- the compensating spool (7)
- the rod (5)
- the compensator spring (10)
The role of this system is to provide a constant pressure
drop of 4.5 bar (65 psi) in the flow control tube and outlet
port and to limit the flowrate of 9.5 to 114 l/min.
The pressure supplied by the variable displacement
pump arrives via chamber D and enters inside the tube.
This pressure then passes to the right-hand side end of
the spool via a central drilled hole. The pressure in the
inlet chamber E becomes greater by 4.5 bar than the XLS
pilot pressure acting upon the spring. The compensating
spool moves to the left and closes the inlet, thus dropping
the pressure in chamber E and causing movement of the
spool to the right.
This regulation of the compensating spool ensures a
constant drop in pressure in the control tube and the work
port. This pressure drop allows the flowrate to remain
constant whatever the load.
Slot F in the control tube limits the maximum flowrate.
This slot opens or closes the oil flow to the body of the
spool valve when rod (5) is turned. When the tube is in
the minimum position, a slightly open space is formed
and a greater percentage of 4.5 bar pressure acts on the
flowrate control tube. The remainder of the pressure drop
acts upon the main spool. The result of this is to create
a flowrate of 9.5 l/min at the work port. When rod (5) is
turned in the other direction, the opening increases,
generating a lower pressure in the flow control tube and
a greater pressure at the main spool, permitting an
increase in the flowrate in the work port.
Issue 1
May 2001

Position B
The main spool (2) is pulled 9.50 mm (0.375 inch) and
held in position by a trigger mechanism (automatic return
to neutral version only, Fig. 6 7)). It places in communication port A and control chamber G with the tank. The
main spool closes chamber G and links pressure port B
to shuttle valve (11) in communication with the spring
side of the compensating spool. The shuttle valve is also
linked to a second shuttle valve (13) and to the pressurerelief housing (22). The shuttle valve (13) closes to send
the XLS pilot pressure to the pump regulator. The main
spool places pressure chamber H and outlet port B in
communication.
See below for spool valves fitted with zero leak devices:
Operation principle of valve (23).
9D01.5
Return to neutral by spring (Fig. 5)

When the main spool (2) is either pushed or pulled, the
pressure-relief housing spring (22) is compressed. As
soon as the spool is released, it positions itself in the
neutral position under the action of the spring.
Valve (23) operating principle (zero leak)
The main spool pulled in the direction of the arrow (Figs.
5 and 7 position B) allows the pressure passing through
the spool to open the valve, thus providing for the required
feed flow for outlet B.
The operation of the valve is identical on all spool valves
fitted with this system.
Position A
The main spool is pushed 9.50 mm (0.375 inch) and held
in position by the trigger mechanism (automatic return to
neutral version only (Fig. 6 7)). It places port B and
control chamber J in communication with the tank. The
main spool closes chamber J and places port A in
communication with the primary shuttle valve linked to
the spring side of the compensating spool. The primary
shuttle valve is also linked to a secondary shuttle valve
(13) and to the pressure-relief housing (22). The secondary valve (13) closes to transmit the XLS pilot pressure
to the pump regulator. The main spool permits the flow
to pass from chamber H to outlet port A.
Automatic return to neutral (Figs. 6 7)
The pilot pressure acts on valve (25) in the pressure-relief
housing. When the pressure is sufficient, the valve
raises and the pressure moves the piston (26) which
relieves the relief spring and allows the centring spring to
return the spool to the neutral position. When the spool
is in the neutral position, the piston relief pressure flows
to the tank via port K of the pressure relief housing. The
spring then returns the piston to its original position. The
return pressure can be adjusted using screw (27).
The more the spring is compressed, the greater the return
pressure.
Issue 1
May 2001

9D01.6
Description (Fig. 2)
(2)
(3)
(20)
(22)
Main spool
Compensating valve
Spool valve
Return to neutral device housing (automatic or by
spring)
22
20
Designation of ports (Fig. 3)

On manifold (21) and spool valve (20)
(15) Return to housing
(30) HP feed from variable displacement pump via the
priority block(s)
(31) LS signal
A and B outlets to couplers
Fig. 2
Ports foreseen on manifold (21) (Fig. 4)

(1) Return
(30) Pressure
15
Special points
- Check for the presence of plugs on manifold (21). If
necessary, lightly smear them with Loctite 542 before
fitting.
- The oil tightness of the auxiliary spool valve return pipe
and the lift control manifold is provided by two Orings
placed at each end of the collar held in place by manifold
(21). The tube is positioned by a stud lodged in a cavity
in the centre housing.
30
21
30
15
31
1
30
31
RL
30
15
20
A
21
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
15
Fig. 3
9D01.7
A . Different types of spool valves

3-position spool valve - Zero leak with return to neutral by spring
22
23
J
20
LS
10
Fig. 6-7
Issue 1
Fig. 8
Fig. 5
May 2001
9D01.8
4-position spool valve - Automatic return to neutral (Kick-out)

H
26
20
22
10
11
LS
Fig. 6
4-position spool valve - Automatic return to neutral
(Kick-out) zero leak
27
25
23
13
22
20
G
A
26
10
LS
Fig. 7
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 8
9D01.9
4-position spool valve - Assembly for hydraulic motors
26
20
22
10
27
25
11
13
Fig. 5
Fig. 6-7
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001

9D01.10
B . Diagram
20
17
LS
21
31
LS
P
R
1
P
(1)
(17)
(20)
(21)
(31)
P
R
LS
Priority block(s)
Lift control spool valve
Manifold
LS signal
High pressure
Return beneath oil level
Signal to pump regulator via the priority block(s)
LS
P
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
9D01.11
C . Removing and refitting the spool

valves
9
Important:
When removing the control cables from spool valves,
it is essential not to turn the main spool of the valve
by half a turn in order to avoid any communication
between the control and pressure channels.
The seals (1) are maintained in the spot faced ports
of manifold (21) by a "RL" wide washer and rings "C"
(depending on channels) (Fig. 3) in order to ensure
the oil tightness of the mating face, when the spool
valve is in operation.
6
2
4
3
1
21
2
Removal
1. On each spool valve, disconnect the control cables (2)
and the hose pipes fitted to the spool valve rods (5)
(Fig. 10).
2. Take off the LS hose pipe (9) (Fig. 10). Mark the
position of the hose pipes connected to the couplers
(Fig. 11).
3. Remove the auxiliary spool valves separately and
disconnect the hose pipes one by one as they are
removed.
4. Note the colour of the connectors and disconnect the
solenoid valves on the lift control spool valve.
Note: The brown connector is connected to the
MoveDown solenoid valve.
5. Take off or move to one side the lift control spool valve
from its mating face.
6. Take out bolts (10), remove the support (11) (Fig. 10),
the seals, the wide "RL" washer and rings "C" (Fig. 3).
10
11
9
21
11
10
Refitting
7. Clean the mating faces of the manifold (21) and the
support (11) (Fig. 10).
8. Position new seals (1) with the wide "RL" washer and
rings "C" on the relevant channels of the manifold (21)
(Fig. 3).
9. Refit support (11). Tighten bolts (10) to a torque of 25
- 35 Nm (Fig. 10).
Before refitting the lift control spool valve, check for
the presence of the Orings and washer "R" and rings
"B" (see section 9E01). Tighten the bolts to a torque of
25 - 35 Nm.
A-A
M
+- 5
A
M
A
2
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001

9D01.12
10. Check for the presence of new Orings (1) (Fig. 3) and
shims (2) (see assembly procedure). Refit the spool
valves. Reconnect:
- the hose pipes of the couplers, respecting their
correct locations
- the LS signal hose on the spool valve block.
11. Check that the flats provided for the fitting of the yoke
on the end of the main spool are parallel to the mating
face of the spool valve.
If this is not so, it is essential to position the flats "M"
of the spool according to Figure 10 and without turning them a half turn, in order to avoid any abnor-mal
operation of the spool valve.
12. Loosen nut (3) on control cable (2) (Fig. 10). Position
the cable and the yoke (1) on the spool. Fit pin (4) (Fig.
10). Hold the yoke and tighten the nut without turning
the spool. Check that the yoke pin is not constrained
in any way. Adjust the position of the levers in the
cab by acting upon the covers (8) (Fig. 10). After
adjustment, tighten bolts (6) and nut (7) (Fig. 10).
13. Check the operation of the spool valve controls, in
three or four positions, as well as the lift control spool
valve.
14. Check the oil tightness of the seals and hydraulic
unions.
3B
3A
2B
2A
1B
1A
3A
3B
2B
2A
1A
1B
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2001
9D01.13
Assembly procedure
To correctly fit the Orings (1) (Fig. 3) and shims (2) (Fig.
12), the reassembly of each spool valve must be carried
out in a vertical position on the tractor or workbench, in
accordance with Fig. 12.
Important: Shims (2) allow the tightening load to be
distributed among the three studs and not the entire
contact surface of the spool valves. To avoid jamming the spools, it is important to respect the fitting
of the shims and to tighten nuts (3) to a torque of 27
Nm (Fig. 12).
Special point
Tighten studs (1), smeared with Loctite 241, on support
(11) (Fig. 12).
20
11
11
11
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001
9D02.1
9 D02 Bosch auxiliary spool valves
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
Operation ______________________________________________
A.
Layout of components, designation of ports and parts _____
B.
Diagram ________________________________________________
C.
Removing and refitting the unit - Splitting the spool

valves __________________________________________________
D.
Assembly procedure ____________________________________
13
E.
Assembling and adjusting the control cables _____________
14
Issue 1
May 2002

9D02.2
General
The Bosch SB23 LS proportional auxiliary spool valves
are fitted on the high pressure, high flowrate circuit. As
for the Rexroth auxiliary spool valves, they are fitted to
8200 series tractors. They are juxtaposed at the rear of
the tractor each side of the oil manifold and may form a
unit of two, three or four spool valves (depending on the
option).
The auxiliary spool valve unit also integrates the lift
control spool valve.
The auxiliary spool valves comprise spools and valves.
Certain parts cannot be repaired or replaced by spare
parts.
The spool valves are supplied by oil coming from the
priority block(s). When no other function is engaged, the
entire flowrate is directed to the spool valve. If certain
priorities are being supplied, the remaining flowrate is
then made available to the auxiliary spool valves.
Each spool valve has a flowrate regulation system
controlled by a black, red, green or yellow button (depending on the option) fitted directly to the shaft of the
regulating valve.
The main spool is activated by a cable linked to a lever
located in the cab. The spool directs oil to one or other of
the outlet ports.
Each outlet port is connected to the LS pilot flow line of
the variable displacement pump regulator via the priority
block(s).
The different types of spool valves

- a : 3 positions, flowrate regulation, double acting, zero
leak.
- b : 4 positions, flowrate regulation, double acting, automatic return to neutral (Kick-out) and floating position.
- c : 4 positions, flowrate regulation, double acting, zero
leak, automatic return to neutral (Kick-out) and
floating position.
Issue 1
May 2002
9D02.3
Couplers (Fig. 1)
- When the auxiliary spool valve is at rest, a lever system
(1) allows the pressure to be relieved in the hydraulic
hoses (2). These hose pipes link the spool valves to the
couplings concerned (3). By acting on this system, the
clean oil under pressure is directed to the return via a
pipe and hose assembly (4) connected to the upper part
of the intermediate housing.
- This drop in pressure facilitates the connecting of the
male coupler to the female coupler.
- The oil, which may be polluted, coming from the
separation of the couplers, drains into a flexible transparent plastic tank (5) that is located beneath the
coupling unit.
F
5
3
3
F
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2002

9D02.4
Operation (Fig. 2 - 3)
When the spool (1) is pulled, oil penetrates into channel
P, passes through restrictor C and grooves D. It is then
directed to channel E, pushes the ball (2) and enters into
chamber F.
Simultaneously, the ramp on the spool lifts valve (3) and
oil flows via port B.
The supply of port A is obtained by pushing spool (1).
Flow regulation is ensured by rod (4) and control spool (5).
E
D
C
R
P
A
LS
F
N
A . Layout of components, designation of ports and parts

N-N
Layout of components (Fig. 3)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Main spool
Valve
One-way valve
Flowrate regulation control rod
Flowrate regulation control spool
Unit(s) and locking system.
Fig. 2
Designation of ports (Fig. 2 - 4 - 5)

A
B
C
D
E
F
P
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
P2
R
R2
LS
:
:
:
:
Outlet to coupler
Outlet to coupler
Restrictor
Grooves
Channels
Chamber
High pressure supply from variable displacement
pump via the priority block(s) (according to version)
High pressure port - Not yet available
Auxiliary spool valves return
Return port - Not yet available
Load Sensing signal to variable displacement pump
regulator via the priority block(s) (according to
version).
R
3
1
542
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 4
9D02.5
3
1
A
5
N-N
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2002
9D02.6
Designation of components (Fig. 5)

(1)
(6)
(14)
(17)
(21)

Left-hand side end plate
Right-hand side end plate
Oil manifold
14
241
17
P
21
LS
1
1
1
6
R2
P2
241
R
P
LS
R
A
1
B
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002
9D02.7
B . Diagram
B A
B A
1.2
F
2
0
1
F
2
0
1
B A
1.2
1.2
F
2
0
1
20
P
LS
R
B A
21
1.2
F
2
0
1
17
P2
20
P
(1)
(17)
(20)
(21)
P
P2
R
LS
Priority block(s)
Manifold
High pressure
High pressure port - Not yet available
Return below the oil level
Signal to the pump regulator via the priority block(s)
LS
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002

9D02.8
C . Removing and refitting the unit Splitting the spool valves
14
Reminder
- On the mechanically-operated spool valves, disconnect the linkage cables while avoiding turning the main
spools a half-turn. This precaution avoids any possible
hydraulic leaks between the pilot flow and pressure
channels.
17
21
Remark (Fig. 7)
- The lift control spool valve (17) is integral with the
auxiliary spool valve unit. It is located between the oil
manifold (21) and the right-hand side end plate (14) or
4th spool valve (1) (if fitted).
17
1. On each auxiliary spool valve, disconnect the control

cables (2) (Fig. 8) taking the previous reminder into
account.
Remark
M = Flat (Fig. 8)
21
Fig. 7
2
A-A
7
8
5
3
A
4
1
4
6
Issue 1
May 2002
1
Fig. 8
9D02.9
2. Disconnect the high pressure pipes (30) and supply to

lift rams (16) as well as the LS hose pipe (9) (Fig. 9).
3. Mark and disconnect the Up (13) / Down (14) solenoid
valve harness on lift control spool valve (17) (Fig. 10).
Remark
- The brown connector is connected to the Move
Down solenoid valve.
4. Mark the position of the hose pipes linked to the
couplers and remove them (Fig. 12).
30
16
9
Fig. 9
3B
3A
2B
2A
1B
1A
14
17
13
Fig. 10
3A
2A
1A
3B
2B
1B
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2002

9D02.10
Removing the spool valve unit

5. Remove the bolts (3) and nuts (2) fitted respectively
to the base and upper part of the manifold (21)
(Fig. 11).
6. Lift and separate the spool valve from support (1)
(Fig. 11). Discard the Oring (3) (Fig. 4).
Splitting the spool valve unit

- The spool valve parts are maintained on either side of
the oil manifold (21) by six studs, three of these have
different lengths.
7. Unscrew the nuts on each end plate of the spool valve
unit.
8. Remove the spool valves separately without losing
the inserted seals.
3
21
21
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002
9D02.11
Assembling the spool valves unit

Remark
- If the previously mentioned studs are to be replaced,
lightly smear the end of the stud threads with Loctite
241 or equivalent before tightening them into manifold
(21) (Fig. 5). Wipe off any excess Locite after tightening.
9. Clean the mating surface:

- of the manifold (21) without removing the adhesive
shims (1) (inserts) (Fig. 14)
- of the spool valves (auxiliary - lift control)
10. Check for the presence of new seals:
- (3) to (5) in each spot-faced port of the spool valves
(1) (Fig. 13)
- (3) to (6) in each spot-faced port of the manifold (21)
(Fig. 14)
11. Assemble the spool valve unit on the workbench
according to the procedure described in D.
1
Fig. 13
Refitting the spool valve unit

- The oil return pipe (3) of the auxiliary spool valves and
of the lift control spool valve is positioned by means of
a tab in the centre housing and held by support (1).
- The oil tightness of this pipe is provided by fitting two
Orings (2) either side of the collar.
5
4
21
21
1
5
1
1
2
3
3
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2002

9D02.12
12. Before refitting, check the tightness of studs (2) on

support (1) and replace the Oring (3) (Fig. 16).
Remark
- If the studs are to be replaced, lightly smear the short
threaded ends with Loctite 270 or equivalent before
tightening them into the support. Wipe away any
excess Loctite after tightening.
13. Refit the spool valve unit on the support. Tighten
bolts (3) to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm and nuts (2) to a
torque of 90 - 120 Nm (Fig. 11).
Final operations
14. Fit the hose pipes linking the spool valves to the
couplers.
15. Reconnect the high pressure pipes (30) and the
supply to the lift rams (16) as well as the LS hose
pipe (9) (Fig. 9).
16. Fit and adjust the control cables, see E.
18. At each spool position, check the operation of:
- the hydraulic system (see section 9N01 - Hydraulic
tests)
- the electronic system (see section 11H01 - Tests).
19. Check the oil tightness of spool valves and hydraulic
unions.
Issue 1
May 2002
270
Fig. 16
9D02.13
D . Assembly procedure
Remark
- To obtain a correct fitting of seals (3) (4) (5) (6)
(Figs. 13 - 14), the assembling of each spool valve (1)
on the manifold (21) must be carried out in a vertical
position on a clean workbench (Fig. 17).
Special points
- Adhesive shims, known as inserts, allow a spreading
of tightening forces around the three long studs but not
across the whole contact surface of the various parts.
- To avoid any warping that may lead to a jamming of the
spools, it is important to check for the presence of these
shims and to respect the tightening torque of the nuts:
30 - 33 Nm.
21
Fig. 17
Assembly (Fig. 18)

20. After reassembling the spool valve unit, screw nuts
(3) so as to make contact with each end plate, but
without fully tightening them.
21. Place the spool valve unit vertical. Tighten a first
series of nuts to a torque of 30 - 33 Nm. Turn the unit
over and complete the assembly by tightening the
second series of nuts to the same torque.
22. Push and pull each spool, using a suitable lever, to
check that they can move freely.
30/33 Nm
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2002

9D02.14
E . Assembling and adjusting the

control cables (Fig. 19)
Special points
- The pins (2) are fitted with the threads lightly smeared
- The numbers 1 - 4 in the black circles indicate the
assembly order for the spool valve levers.
- A location is provided on the console for the future
mounting of a fourth control, which would be placed to
the left of lever 1 (as seen from driving position).
- The friction washers (1) should be lightly smeared with
molybdenum bisulphide grease before fitting.
- The nuts (3) should be tightened so as to provide a slight
resistance to the levers during operation.
2
3
2
1
On support (6) and lever (Fig. 19)

Note: Depending on the type of spool valve, clevis (4)
may be fitted on link rod A or B.
Assembly A: Normal spool valves.
Assembly B: Spool valves with floating position.
6
5
8
3
2
23. Pass the cable through the flange plate (9) located at
the rear right-hand side of the cab and then into
stirrup (8).
Note: The hole in stirrup (8) is offset (Fig. 20). To
assemble a spool valve control having floating
position, the hole must be turned upwards in
order to ensure a correct alignment of the cable
and its attachment.
24. Screw clevis (4) flush with the threaded cable end of
the cable sheath (7) and mount it on linkage A or B
of the lever concerned. Position clip (5).
Tighten the nut on the clevis while checking that the
cable is not constrained in any way.
4
9
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2002
9D02.15
On the spool valves (Fig. 21)

25. Without turning the main spools a half-turn, check
that they are in the neutral position.
26. Screw clevis (1) flush with the threaded end of the
cable sheath (2). Tighten nut (3) and fit pin (4).
27. Partially screw on the cover (8) and fit bolts (6) but
without tightening them.
28. Turn and adjust the cover in order to correctly centre
the control lever in the opening provided in the
console.
29. Fully tighten bolts (6) and tighten nut (7) to a torque
of 20 Nm.
30. Check the operation of the spool valve controls in all
three or four positions, depending on the type.
6
Fig. 20
8
6
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2002
Hydraulics - Closed centre

9 D03
9D03.1
Electro-hydraulic spool valves
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Layout of components and identification of channels

and ports _______________________________________________
B.
Diagram ________________________________________________
C.
Spool valve assembly ___________________________________
10
D.
Assembly procedure ____________________________________
13
E.
Location of levers on the console and fitting, adjustment

of a control cable _______________________________________
14
Issue 1
May 2002

9D03.2

The spool valves consist of both electronic and hydraulic
components, the latter containing spools and valves.
General
Description of the components
The SB23LS - EHS BOSCH type spool valves that control
the supply to the hydraulic couplers comprise two parts:
The tractors are fitted with a basic block, comprising

three to four spool valves (according to options).
A hydraulic part:
- See operation below.
An electro-hydraulic part comprising:

- an ON / OFF solenoid valve and a 3-way pressure relief
valve located on the left-hand end plate of the distribution block,
- a pilot valve fitted in the electro-hydraulic unit.
This section only deals with the hydraulic part. For the
electronic part, see Chapter 11.
The SB23LS - EHS electro-hydraulically operated spool
valves are fitted as optional equipment to 8200 series
tractors with a closed centre hydraulic circuit. They are
supplied with high pressure, high flow rate oil from the
priority blocks.
When no functions are being activated, the entire flowrate
is directed towards the spool valves. When certain
functions are being supplied, the remaining flow then
remains available to the auxiliary spool valves.
The adjustment of the flowrate, expressed as a percentage, may be displayed on the onboard computer
(Datatronic) by the operator (see Operating mode, section 11 - Electronics).
Joystick electro-hydraulic spool valves are fitted with a
floating Kick-out position (automatic return to neutral).
The main spool of the spool valve directs oil towards the
outlet ports A or B.
Each outlet port is linked to the LS pilot line of the variable
displacement pump regulating valve via the priority
block(s).
Issue 1
Some elements cannot be repaired by replacing with

spare parts.
May 2002
Types of spool valves available

. a : electro-hydraulic (Joystick)
. b : electro-hydraulic (Dual control)
. c : mechanical control (for SB23LS, see section 9D02).
This spool valve has four positions with automatic
return to neutral (Kick-out), is zero leak and provides
lowrate regulation.
Available assemblies
-
3
3
4
4
spool valves : a + a + c
spool valves : a + a + b
spool valves : a + a + c + c
spool valves : a + a + b + c
Parts list (Fig. 1)

(1)
(6)
(14)
(17)
(21)
Electro-hydraulic auxiliary spool valves

Left-hand end plate with pressure relief valve
Right-hand end plate, LS outlet
Oil manifold

9D03.3
Exploded view
M
A
P
LS
14
R
17
A : 3 spool valves
B : 4 spool valves
P
21
M
LS
1
1
P2
R2
241
R
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 1
May 2002

9D03.4
Hydraulic connections between spool

valves and couplers (Fig. 2 to 4)
Fig. 2
Remark
- Figures 1 to 4 indicate the assembly order of the
auxiliary spool valves.
Legend
. M : black, mechanical spool valve
. X : red, Joystick
. Y : green, Joystick
. DC : black, Dual Control
. VR : lift control spool valve
(5) Support
(6) Joystick lever
VR
M
Y
DC
VR
X
DC
Fig. 3
VR
Y
X
5
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2002

9D03.5
Operation of the pressure relief valve

When the ON - OFF solenoid valve (18) located on end
plate (6) is open, the flow from the pump is directed to the
3-way relief valve (3) (Fig. 5). The latter supplies the pilot
valve (5) (Fig. 6) with a pressure of 21 bar to 24 bar via
a pressure balancing valve (Fig. 5).
The pilot valve receives a signal from the digital device
(6) and moves the main spool (1) (Fig. 6) in accordance
with information received from the Joystick.
The digital device is informed of the position of the main
spool by a displacement sensor (7) (Fig. 6).
The pilot valve and the digital device are housed in unit
(2) fixed on the base of the spool valve.
18
X3
3
DMV
Electro-hydraulic spool valve (2) (Fig. 6)

Parts list
(1) Main valve spool
(2) Electro-hydraulic unit
(3) Return spring
(4) Piston
(5) Pilot valve
(6) Digital electronic system
(7) Displacement sensor
P : Pressure
R : Return
FP
X3
XNA
18
Remark
- Channels P and R are linked to the auxiliary spool
valve.
Operation of the auxiliary spool valve (Fig.

10 - 12)
When spool (1) is moved electro-hydraulically upwards,
via the pilot valve (5) (Fig. 6), high-pressure oil penetrates
via channel P, passes through restrictor C and grooves D.
It is then directed to channel E, where it pushes ball (2) and
gains access to chamber F. Simultaneously, the ramp on
the spool raises valve (3) and oil flows via port B.
Port A is supplied by moving spool (1) downwards.
Fig. 5
FP : Filter
X3 plug 12 x 1.50 : Location of diagnostics
connector.Presence of fuel tank limits access.
3
4
Issue 1
Fig. 6
May 2002

9D03.6

Fig. 7
A . Layout of components and identification of channels and ports
Layout of components (Fig. 10)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6)
Main spool
Valve
Non-return valve
Pressure balancing valve
Cover
Identification of channels and ports
LS
21
On oil manifold (21) and the support (1) (Fig. 7 to 9)

P : High pressure supply from the variable displacement pump via the priority block(s) (depending on
version)
R : Return from the auxiliary spool valves (beneath the
oil level)
LS : Signal to the pump regulating valve via the lift
control spool valve and the priority block(s) (depending on version)
Fig. 8
P
21
P
LS
R
R
LS
R
1
2
3
R
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 9

9D03.7
A
5
3
B
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2002

9D03.8

On the auxiliary spool valves (Fig. 11 to 13)

A : Outlet to coupler
B : Outlet to coupler
C : Restrictor
D : Grooves
E : Channel
F : Chamber
P - R and LS : see previous identification on oil manifold
(21)
A
B
A
B
A
B
Fig. 11
E
P
R
C
A
LS
F
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 12

9D03.9
B . Diagram
B A
B A
B A
F
2
0
1
F
2
0
1
F
2
0
1
DMV FP
XNA
1.2
20
P
LS
R
B A
21
1.2
F
2
0
1
17
P2
20
P
Nomenclature (Fig. 14)

(1)
(17)
(20)
P :
P2 :
R :
LS :
Priority block(s)
Lift control valve
High pressure
Hight pressure port (not yet available)
Return beneath the oil level
Signal to the pump regulator via the priority
block(s)
LS
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2002

9D03.10

C . Spool valve assembly
Fig. 15
Reminder
- On tractors where one or more elements of the auxiliary spool valves are operated mechanically, take care
to disconnect the link cable(s) without turning the main
spool of the valve a half turn (see section 9D02).
Remark
- The lift control valve (17) is integral with the spool valve
assembly.
1. On the lift control valve (Fig. 16), locate and disconnect the solenoid valve harnesses:
- moveUp E1
- moveDown E2 (brown connector)
2. Disconnect:
- the following: high pressure pipe, lift rams feed pipe
and LS hose
on mechanically operated spool valves
- control cable (2) (Fig. 15) taking into account the
previous reminder.
on Joystick or lever (Dual Control) operated spool
valves (Fig. 16)
- solenoid valve (18) located on the left-hand end
plate (6)
- connector(s) "C" linked to the electro-hydraulic unit(s)
of the spool valve(s), carefully marking their
position(s).
Removal
18
E1
Remark
- The spool valve assembly must be removed in full.
- Any operations carried out on the spool valves require
scrupulous cleanliness.
- First correctly clean the spool valves (lift control and
auxiliary), and the areas around them on the tractor,
before removing them.
3. Locate the hose pipe(s) between spool valves and
couplers and disconnect them.
4. Remove the spool valve assembly.
Issue 1
E2
May 2002
Fig. 16

9D03.11
Splitting the spool valve assembly on the

workbench
Special point
- The spool valve components are maintained on either
side of the oil manifold (21) by six studs, of which 3 are
of a different length.
5. Unscrew the nuts on each end plate of the spool valve

assembly.
6. Remove the spool valves separately taking care not to
lose the seals inserted between the components.
Assembling the spool valve

Remark
- If it is feasible to replace the studs mentioned above,
lightly smear one of their threaded ends with Loctite
241 or equivalent and block them on the manifold (21)
(Fig. 1). Wipe off any excess Loctite if necessary.
Fig. 17
7. Clean the mating faces:

- of the manifold (21) without removing the adhesive
shims (1) (inserts) (Fig. 18)
- of the spool valves (auxiliary - lift control)
8. Check the presence of new seals:
- (3) to (5) in each spot-faced port of the spool valves
(1) (Fig. 17)
- (3) to (6) in each spot-faced port of the manifold (21)
(Fig. 18)
9. Assemble the spool valve on the workbench, using
the procedure described in D.
5
4
21
21
1
1
3
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2002

9D03.12

Refitting the spool valve assembly

10. Check tightening of the studs (2) on the support (1)
and replace the O'ring (3) (Fig. 19).
Remark:
- If it is absolutely necessary to replace the studs,
lightly smear the short threads with Loctite 270 or
equivalent, and lock the studs on the support.
Wipe off any excess Loctite if necessary.
11. Refit the spool valve assembly on its support.
Tighten the oil manifold (21) on the support (1) as
follows,
- screws: 50 - 70 Nm
- nuts: 90 - 120 Nm
270
Final operations
12. Assemble the hose pipes between the spool valves
and couplers, according to the marks.
13. Reconnect the pipes (high pressure pipe, lift rams
feed pipe and LS hose.
14. Reconnect the MoveUp and MoveDown solenoid
valve connectors in accordance with marks made
during removal.
15. Reconnect:
On the mechanically operated spool valves
- the control cable(s) taking into account the reminder in C
On the Joystick or lever operated spool valves
(Dual Control)
- the connector(s) connected to the electro-hydraulic housing(s) in accordance with marks made
during removal.
- the ON - OFF solenoid valve located on the lefthand end plate.
17. For each spool valve position, check the operation of:
- hydraulic devices (see section 9N01 - tests)
- electronic devices (see section 11)
18. Check the oil tightness of the spool valves and
hydraulic unions.
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 19

9D03.13
D . Assembly procedure
Remark
- To obtain the correct assembly of seals (3) (4) (5) (6)
(Fig. 17 - 18), the reassembly of each spool valve (1)
on the oil manifold (21) must be carried out vertically
on a clean workbench (Fig. 20).
1
Special point
- Adhesive shims also known as inserts allow the
tightening load to be distributed among the three studs
and not on the entire contact surface of the spool
valves. To avoid jamming the spools, it is important to
respect the fitting of the shims and to tighten nuts to
Assembly (Fig. 21)

19. After refitting the spool valve assembly, tighten the
nuts (3) in contact with each end plate, without
locking them.
20. Place the spool valve assembly in a vertical position.
Tighten a first series of nuts to a torque of 30 - 33
Nm. Turn the assembly over and complete the
assembly process by tightening the second series of
nuts to the same torque.
21. Use a suitable lever to check the mobility of each
spool valve.
21
Fig. 20
30/33 Nm
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2002

9D03.14

E . Location of levers on the console

and fitting, adjustment of a control
cable
Location of the lever(s)
- The threads of spindle (2) must be lightly smeared with
Loctite 241 or its equivalent (support side).
- The friction washers (1) are smeared with molybdenum
disulphide grease before assembly.
- The locknut (3) is tightened so as to obtain a slight
resistance on the lever during its manipulation (it being
provisionally separated from its cable).
Remark (Fig. 22)

The figures 1 - 2 and 4 in the black circles indicate the
assembly order for levers on the console depending on
the characteristics of the spool valves:
(1) Control for a mechanical spool valve or fitting of a
Dual Control lever
(2) Control for a second mechanical spool valve
(4) Control for a mechanical spool valve twinned with a
Dual Control lever
a : Three spool valves including one mechanical and
two electro-hydraulic
b : Three spool valves including two electro-hydraulic
and one Dual Control
c : Four spool valves including two mechanical and two
electro-hydraulic
d : Four spool valves including one mechanical, two
electro-hydraulic and one Dual Control.
Fig. 22
Issue 1
May 2002

9D03.15
Fitting and adjustment of a control cable

- Figure 23 shows the assembly of a lever for a mechanical spool valve.
- The assembly and adjustment are identical for an
additional lever.
1
1
Reminder
- For the design and operation of the Dual Control lever,
see chapter 11 - Electronics
3
A
4
5
8
Assembly and adjustment on the console

(Fig. 23)
Note: For further information, see section 9D02 E.
22. Pass the cable through the flange (9) located at the
right rear side of the cab and into stirrup (8).
23. Screw yoke (4) flush with the threaded part of the
cable (7) and assemble it on link A of the lever
concerned. Position clip (5).
24. Tighten the yoke nut and check that the cable is not
pinched in any way.
9
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2002

9D03.16

Fitting and adjustment on spool valves

(Fig. 24)
25. Check that the main spools of the spool valves are
at the neutral point, without turning them a half turn.
26. Screw yoke (1) flush with the threaded part of the
cable. Tighten nut (3) and fit spindle (4).
27. Partially screw on cover (5) and fit bolts (6) without
tightening them.
28. Turn and adjust the cover to correctly centre the
control lever(s) in the opening provided for them in
the console.
29. Lock bolts (6) while tightening nut (2) to a torque of
20 Nm.
30. Check the operation of the controls in all four positions.
5
6
Fig. 24
Issue 1
May 2002
Hydraulics - Lift control spool valve
9E01.1
9 E01 Lift control spool valve
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Diagrams _______________________________________________
B.
Removing and refitting the spool valve ___________________
C.
Neutral position ________________________________________
D.
Raise position __________________________________________
E.
Lower position _________________________________________
10
Issue 2
May 2002

9E01.2
General
21
The lift control spool valve is fixed to a manifold provided

with three drilled channels. It is mounted on the centre
housing, in front of the lift control shaft.
The role of the spool valve is to regulate the oil flow, the
feed to and return from the lift rams, in relation to signals
transmitted by the electronic linkage control (ELC) calculator. It has a LS port for the Load Sensing system.
This control port allows the spool valve to transmit
pressure information to the variable displacement pump,
via the priority block(s).
30
15
31
30
Description (Fig. 12 to 14)

The Bosch spool valve comprises two parts:
- Hydraulic part (spool valve)
(2) Spool assembly used during the Lower phase
(4) Control spool
(5) Flowrate adjustment spool
(6) Shock valve
(9) Flowrate adjustment spool spring
(10) Control spool spring
(11) Spool assembly spring
(12) Non-return valve holding oil in the rams
Fig. 1
14
30
31
17
13
- Electrical part (solenoid valve) (Fig. 2 - 5)

(13) MoveUp solenoid valve
(14) MoveDown solenoid valve (brown connector)
6
Remarks
- The number of hydraulic ports on the Bosch lift control
spool valve varies depending on whether it is assembled with:
. a manifold (21) and Rexroth auxiliary spool valves
(Fig. 1)
. a manifold (21) and Bosch auxiliary spool valves (Fig.
4)
- In all cases, the operating principle remains identical.
- Note the different location on the tractor.
15
16
Fig. 2
17
Fig. 3
Issue 2
May 2002
9E01.3
Lift control spool valve with Rexroth auxiliary

spool valves
- The lift control spool valve is fixed on a manifold that
has three ports (Fig. 1).
- It is assembled on the centre housing in front of the lift
control shaft.
15
30
Lift control spool valve with Bosch auxiliary spool

valves
- The lift control spool valve is located between the
manifold (21) provided with four ports (Fig. 4) and the
right-hand end plate, or the fourth auxiliary spool valve
(if fitted).
- It is integral with the auxiliary spool valve unit at the
rear of the tractor.
21
31
15
Fig. 4
Designation of the ports

- On the manifold (21)
. Fig. 1: with Rexroth auxiliary spool valves
. Fig. 4: with Bosch auxiliary spool valves
priority block(s)
(31) LS signal
- On the lift control spool valve (17)
. Fig. 2 - 3: with Rexroth auxiliary spool valves
. Fig. 5 - 6: with Bosch auxiliary spool valves
(16) HP feed to rams
priority block(s)
(31) LS signal
14
30
31
17
13
16
Note: To distinguish a hydraulic problem from an

electrical problem, operate the push buttons on
the end of the solenoid valves (13) (14), thus eliminating the effect of the electrical circuit on lift
control.
Fig. 5
15
Special points
- The return oil from the lift control spool valve is
directed to the centre housing at the manifold (21)
outlet by a large section pipe the end of which is
beneath the oil level.
- This pipe is also used for the return from the auxiliary
spool valves (see section 9D01 and 9D02).
17
Fig. 6
Issue 2
May 2002
9E01.4
A . Diagrams
Layout with Rexroth auxiliary spool valves
17
LS
21
31
20
LS
31
R
P
R
P
P
LS
LS
(1)
(17)
(20)
(21)
(31)
P :
R :
V :
Priority block(s)
Manifold
LS signal to pump regulator via the priority block(s)
High pressure
Lift rams
Fig. 7
Issue 2
May 2002
9E01.5
Layout with Bosch auxiliary spool valves
20
P
LS
R
V
21
20
31
P2
17
P
(1)
(17)
(20)
(21)
(31)
P :
P2 :
R :
V :
Priority block(s)
Manifold
LS signal to pump regulator via the priority block(s)
High pressure
Secondary high pressure port
Lift rams
LS
Fig. 8
Issue 2
May 2002

9E01.6
B . Removing and refitting the spool

valve
On the manifold with Rexroth auxiliary spool
valves
Special points
- Access to the lift control spool valve is limited given the
presence of the neighbouring components. Before removing it, disassemble the auxiliary spool valves.
- The seals (1) are maintained in the spot faced ports of
manifold (21) by washer "R" and rings "B" (depending on
the channels) (Fig. 9), in order to provide the correct oil
tightness of the mating face when the lift control
function is activated.
21
Removal
30
1. Disassemble the auxiliary spool valves (see C,

section 9D01).
2. Locate the colour of the connector and disconnect
the MoveUp solenoid valves (13) and the MoveDown
solenoid valves (14) (Fig. 10).
3. Using a locally manufactured tool, disassemble the
feed pipes to the rams, connected to union (16)
(Fig. 10).
4. Take out bolts (1) (Fig. 10). Remove the cover (2) and
spool valve (17).
5. Take off the seals, washer "R" and rings "B" (Fig. 9).
Refitting
6. Clean the mating faces of the cover and the spool
valve.
7. Position new seals (1) with washer "R" and rings "B"
on the channels concerned of the manifold (21)
(Fig. 9).
Replace the seals (1) between the spool valve (17)
and the cover (2) (Figs. 3 - 10).
8. Fit and tighten bolts (1) to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm
(Fig. 10).
9. Definitively tighten union (16) on the ram feed pipes.
10. Reconnect the solenoid valves (according to their
markings) and refit the auxiliary spool valves (see
C, section 9D01).
12. Check the operation of the lift control system and the
auxiliary spool valves, the oil tightness of all seals
and hydraulic unions.
30
15
31
Fig. 9
13
17
16
14
Fig. 10
Issue 2
May 2002

On the manifold with Bosch auxiliary spool
valves
Reminder
- The lift control spool valve (17) is integral with the
auxiliary spool valve assembly.
- It is situated between the manifold (21) and the righthand end plate (14) (Fig. 11) or the fourth auxiliary spool
valve (if fitted) (see section 9D02).
- Consequently, it is necessary to remove (and then to
refit) the auxiliary spool valve assembly in order to
access to the lift control spool valve for servicing (see
section 9D02).
9E01.7
Fig. 11
14
17
21
Issue 2
May 2002
9E01.8
C . Neutral position
When the engine is not running and the spool valve is in
the neutral position, the control spool (4) and the other
spools (2) are maintained in position by springs (10) and
(11).
The flowrate adjustment spool (5) is pushed downwards

by spring (9).
When the engine is running and the spool valve is at rest,
no pressure information is transmitted to the variable
displacement pump. The LS line communicates with the
return.
11
9
10
P
R
LS
Fig. 12
Issue 2
May 2002

D . Raise position
When the MoveUp solenoid valve (13) is activated, the
control spool (4) is moved upwards.
The LS pressure information acting on the upper face of
the flowrate regulating spool (5) (spring (9) side) moves
the spool downwards the right thus directing the flow to
the control spool and the non-return valve (12).
The movement of the flowrate regulating spool is dampened by the volume of oil present in chamber "d".
9E01.9
As soon as the pressure on valve (12) is greater than that

in the rams, the lift control arms raise.
The LS line communicates with outlet (16) informs the
regulator of the variable displacement pump. If the
pressure in the rams is too high (shocks received on the
lift arms) the valve (6) opens and excess pressure is
vented to the housing.
R
P
LS
16
5
12
4
13
Fig. 13
Issue 2
1
May 2002

9E01.10
E . Lower position
When the MoveDown solenoid valve (14) is activated to
lower the lift control arms, the spool assembly (2) allows
the flow coming from the rams to enter the return. The LS
pressure information is transmitted to the side of the
flowrate regulating spool (5) (spring (9) side) and to the
14
P
R
LS
Fig. 14
Issue
Issue 12
May 2002
2002
Hydraulics - Hydrostatic steering
9F01.1
9 F01 Hydrostatic steering
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
The principle of Load Sensing ____________________________
B.
Layout of channels and ports ____________________________
C.
Diagram ________________________________________________
D.
Neutral position (engine running) ________________________
E.
Steering lock (engine running) ___________________________
10
F.
Manual steering (engine stopped) ________________________
12
G.
Disassembling and reassembling the Orbitrol

steering unit ____________________________________________
14
Removing , refitting and disassembling, reassembling

the Dana and Carraro steering rams ______________________
16
H.
Issue 2
May 2002

9F01.2
General
A . The principle of Load Sensing
The steering system used on tractors of the 8210 - 8220

- 8240 to 8260 series tractors is of the dynamic type
(constant flow rate of 0.5 l/min - standby pressure of 6 bar
(see section 9B01 or 0C01 depending on version)). There
is no mechanical linkage between the steering wheel
and the steering ram.
The Orbitrol type is marked on a plate riveted to the lower
part of the unit (Fig.).
Its control principle is of the Load Sensing type.
The system comprises the following main components:
- a pressurized oil feed from the priority block(s) supplied
by the variable displacement pump,
- an Orbitrol closed centre steering unit, whose capacity
differs according to the tractor type, installed in by-pass
(Orbitrol OSPC 125 LS Dynamic 2WD - Orbitrol OSPC
200 LS Dynamic for 4 WD),
- a double acting ram fitted either on the 4 WD front axle
or on the 2 WD axle beam.
Orbitrol steering unit
The Orbitrol unit is supplied via the priority block(s) by the

high flow rate circuit. When the steering wheel is turned,
the necessary flow of oil is directed to the corresponding
side of the steering ram. The flowrate in excess, not
required by the ram, flows through the return ports to the
selector cover of the Heavy Duty gearbox or to the righthand side of the Full Powershift gearbox (according to
version).
In the case of an engine breakdown or failure of the hydraulic pump, the Orbitrol acts as a hand-operated pump
so that the steering can be controlled.
Description of the Orbitrol steering unit

The Orbitrol comprises a selector spool valve, a spring
centred supply sleeve and a drive shaft linked to the
steering column. It has five hydraulic ports:
- pressure
- return to the selector cover or to the gearbox (according
to the transmission version)
- two supplies to the steering ram
- Load Sensing
The circuit is protected by a safety valve and two shock
valves as well as two suction valves.
Issue 2
May 2002
The LS port is either placed in communication with the

closed circuit of the Orbitrol when the steering is in a
neutral position, or placed in communication with the
pressure supply line as soon as the steering wheel is
turned.
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
Bolt
Bolt
O-ring
Cover plate
O-ring
Stator
Pin
O-ring
Rotor
Spacer
Link shaft
Washer
Centring springs
Needle bearing
Bush
Washer
O'ring
Relief-valve
Seal
Shock valve
Orbitrol unit (distribution valve)
Non-return valve
Suction valve
Bush
Spool valve
Non-return valve
Sleeve
O'ring
Distributor plate
Fig 1
Fig 2
9F01.3
Overall view
20
14
16
17
15
13
19
21
27
12
24
25
11
26
29
22
28
8
5
4
3
10
18
23
Fig 2
Parts list
Fig. 1
Issue 2
May 2002
9F01.4
Exploded view
DANFOSS
OSPC XXX
XXXXXX
2
XXXX
3
4
1
5
6
8
9
10
29
7
11
28
27
26
25
13
24
12
14
16
15
17
18
21
22
19
23
20
Fig 1
Issue 2
May 2002
Parts list
Fig. 2
A
B
L
LS
9F01.5
B . Layout of channels and ports (Fig. 3)
R
T
Steering ram
Location of steering column
Supply to left-hand side union of the steering ram
Signal to variable displacement pump via the priority
block(s)
High flow rate supply from the variable displacement pump
Supply to right-hand side union of the steering ram
Return to the housing via the selection cover or the
gearbox (depending on transmission version)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
2WD axle
Dana front axle
Carraro fixed front axle
Carraro suspended front axle
L
T
B
T
LS
P
R
A
A
R
3
L
R
L
P
LS
R
1
A
A
L
4
R
L
Fig. 3
Issue 2
May 2002

9F01.6
Issue 2
May 2002
9F01.7
C .Diagram
A
Mechanical links
LS
BP
BP Priority block(s)
Fig. 4
Issue 2
May 2002

9F01.8
D . Neutral position (engine running)

(Fig. 5)
In this position the spool valve (25) is centred in relation
to the sleeve (27) by the springs (13). The channels P1L-R are not supplied.
The oil coming from the variable displacement pump via
channel (2) is directed in priority to the Orbitrol unit via
channel (1).
With the steering in a neutral position, there is no flow in
this channel.
The circuit is closed centre.
Two shock valves (20) and two suction valves (23) are
located in ports L and R of the valve.
The shock valves (20) protect the circuit between the
steering ram and the steering unit from over pressure
caused by mechanical shocks to the front wheels.
The suction valves (23) allow the oil released by the
shock valves (20) to pass from the right-hand channel to
the left-hand channel or vice versa depending on the
movement of the piston inside the steering ram.
Issue 2
May 2002
9F01.9
R
20
23
25
27
P1
13
P
12
BP
LS
Inlet channel
BP Priority block(s)
P1 Supply to the metering device
Fig. 5
Issue 2
May 2002

9F01.10
E . Steering lock (engine running)

(Fig. 6)
Action on the steering wheel (to the left or right) produces
an angular displacement of the spool valve (25) in relation
to the sleeve (27) and the opening of the closed Orbitrol
circuit.
The pilot flow coming from the Orbitrol enters via channel
(4) thus allowing for the flow required for the metering
device ((stator) (6) and rotor (9)) to pass into channel (1).
The rotor (9) is driven in rotation by the steering wheel and
since the degree of rotation of the rotor (9) is equal to that
of the steering wheel, it forces a directly proportional
quantity of oil towards the steering ram.
Example:
Let us suppose that the steering wheel is turned by 5.
An angular displacement of 5of the spool valve (25) is
produced in relation to the sleeve (27).
The rotor (9) is driven in rotation as long as it is supplied.
It drives with it the link shaft (11) (Fig. 1 - 2) and the
sleeve (27).
When the latter have turned 5, the spool valve (25) and
the sleeve (27) are once again centred by the springs (13).
The rotor ceases to be supplied and stops.
This same reasoning applies to greater angles. The
quantity of oil delivered by the steering unit to the steering
ram is therefore proportional to the rotation angle of the
steering wheel.
The spool valve (25) allows, whether steering lock is
applied to the left or right, to direct oil fed by the metering
device (stator (6) and rotor (9)) to port L or R.
During rotation, the sleeve (27) ensures the synchronous
communication of the cavities in the metering device
with the circuit from the pump, on the one-hand, and the
circuit to the steering ram, on the other hand.
A non-return valve (26) (Fig. 2) is screwed into the supply
port of the steering unit. This one-way valve stops
excessive pressure or blows received by the front
wheels from being transmitted to the pump whenever
steering lock is applied.
If the pressure in the steering circuit is too high, the reliefvalve (18), located in the steering unit, opens and the
excess pressure is released to channel T.
Issue 2
May 2002
9F01.11
13
25
27
9
(R) D
T
T
(L) G
26
18
Inlet channel
Delivery channel
Return channel
Pilot flow channel
Fig. 6
Issue 2
May 2002

9F01.12
F . Manual steering (engine stopped)

(Fig. 7)
When the pump is no longer operating or the available
pressure is too low, the rotor (9) is no longer hydraulically
driven. It is no longer power assisted.
In this case, action on the steering wheel compresses
the centring springs (13). The angular clearance between
pin (7) (Fig. 1) and the sleeve (27) is reduced to zero
resulting in mechanical rotation of stator (6) and rotor (9).
The steering distribution valve then operates in the same
way as a hand pump.
The oil returning from steering ram A passes through the
non-return valve (22) and supplies the metering device.
The pressure generated is proportional to the torque
applied to the steering wheel. In such cases where
manual steering is used the effort required to steer is
much greater.
Issue 2
May 2002
9F01.13
13
25
27
(R) D
(L) G
13
22
T
P
BP
LS
Inlet channel
Delivery channel
Return channel
Fig. 7
Issue 2
May 2002

9F01.14
G . Disassembling and reassembling

the Orbitrol steering unit (Fig. 1)
Reminder
- If the Orbitrol steering unit is to be replaced, it must be
replaced by a unit having exactly the same
characteristics.
Example: OSPC.200.LSD
OSP ........ Orbitrol steering pump
C ............. Valves incorporated in the steering unit
200 ......... 200 cm3 per rotor rotation
LSD ......... Dynamic Load Sensing (closed centre)
Disassembly
1. Remove the distribution valve from the tractor.
2. Place the distribution valve in a vice fitted with
plastic jaws
3. Take out the bolts (1). Carefully mark the location of
the bolt (2) and then remove it.
4. Remove the cover plate (4), the O'ring (5), the stator
(6) and O'ring (8).
5. Remove the spacer (10), the rotor (9), the distribution
plate (29) and the O'ring (28).
6. Take out the splined link shaft (11).
7. Unscrew the threaded bush and take out the valve
ball from the non-return valve (22).
8. Take out the two axle pins and valve balls from the
suction valves (23) of the distribution valves.
9. Extract the sleeve (27) and spool valve (25) assembly
by pushing it out while checking that the pin (7) lies
along the horizontal axis.
10. Remove the washers (12) (16), the needle bearing
(14) as well as the bush (24) from the sleeve and
spool valve assembly. Remove the pin (7), and the
centring springs (13) by pressing on their ends.
Separate the sleeve (27) from the spool valve (25).
11. Unscrew the plug from the relief-valve (18). Using an
8 mm Allen key, disassemble the threaded bush and
remove the seal, the spring and the valve (the
crimped seat cannot be removed).
12. Unscrew the two plugs from the shock valves (20)
and remove the seals. Using a 6 mm Allen key,
remove the threaded bushes and take out the springs,
the valve balls and their seats (the crimped seats
cannot be removed).
13. Extract the seal (19), the bush (15) and the O'ring (17).
14. Disassemble the non-return valve (26).
Issue 2
May 2002
9F01.15
Reassembly
15. Check and clean all components, replace those
defective. Lubricate with clean transmission oil
before reassembly.
16. Reassemble the non-return valve (26).
17. Fit the seal (19), the O'ring (17) and the bush (15).
18. Place the valve balls and springs in the recesses of
the shock valve (20). Screw in the threaded bushes,
fit the seals and tighten the plugs.
19. Fit the valve and spring in the recesses of the reliefvalve (18), screw in the threaded bush. Fit the seal
and tighten the plug to a torque of 40 - 60 Nm.
20. Insert the spool valve (25) into the sleeve (27).
Position the centring springs (13) according to Fig. 8
and insert the pin (7).
21. Position the bush (24) on the sleeve and spool valve
assembly so that the chamfer facilitates assembly
in the steering unit.
22. Place the washers (12) (16), the chamfer of washer
(12) towards the centring springs (13), by inserting
the needle bearing (14) between them.
23. Fit the sleeve and spool valve assembly in the
steering unit by oscillating it slightly. Check that the
pin (7) is held horizontally.
24. Place the two valve balls and the two pins in the
recesses of the suction valves (23).
25. Fit the valve ball in the recess of the non-return valve
(22) and screw in the threaded bush.
26. Position the splined link shaft (11).
27. Fit the O'ring (28), the distributor plate (29).
28. Fit the rotor (9) so that the two concave depressions
"C" lie along the axis of the slot in the splined link
shaft (11) (Fig. 9). Refit the spacer (10).
29. Place the O'rings (5) (8) on the stator (6).
30. While avoiding moving the rotor (9), fit the stator (6).
Then move it so that its fixing holes match with
those of the steering unit.
Note: The rotor (9) and the pin (7) must be in the
position shown in Figure 10.
31. Refit the cover plate (4).
32. Refit the bolt (2) (in the same location as marked
during disassembly) and the bolts (1) fitted with their
seals (3). Tighten opposing bolts to a torque of 30 35 Nm.
33. Using a test-bench or a suitable fixture, check the
adjustment and correct operation of the steering unit.
34. Refit the steering unit on the tractor.
35. Check the oil tightness of the unions.
Fig. 8
11
C
Fig. 9
7
Fig. 10
Issue 2
May 2002
9F01.16
H . Removing, refitting and disassembling, reassembling the Dana

and Carraro steering rams
Reminder
- 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors are now equipped
with a Carraro front axle.
- 8260 tractors are equipped with a Dana AG200H front
axle with an elevated pivot.
Remark
- If access to the ram fixing bolt (2) in the Dana front axle
seems difficult (Fig. 11):
. lift the front of the tractor with a trolley jack positioned
in the centre of the front axle,
. remove the front wheels,
. place an appropriate axle stand beneath the lower
engine housing,
. swing the front axle at maximum to high and low
positions in order to access the bolts.
36. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the rear wheels. Put
on the handbrake.
Fig. 11
1
4
5
7
2
Fig. 11A
Issue 2
May 2002
9F01.17
Removal (Fig. 11 - 11A)

Carraro front axle
Remark
- To help clear the steering ram on the Carraro front axle,
first remove the mudguard and the front left wheel of
the tractor.
Dana or Carraro front axle

37. Disconnect and block off the feed hoses to the ram,
carefully identifying their positions.
38. Drive out the steering ball joints (1) using an
appropriate extractor.
39. Take out the bolts (2) from the ram and remove it:
- Dana front axle (Fig. 11)
- Carraro front axle (Fig. 11A)
Refitting
40. Refit the ram. Fit and tighten bolts (2) :
- Dana front axle: to a torque of 180 - 200 Nm, the
threads previously smeared with Loctite 270 or
equivalent.
- Carraro axle: to a torque of 120 Nm.
41. Fix the steering ball joints. Tighten bolts (4) :
- Dana front axle: to a torque of 115 - 130 Nm and
block them with new pins (Fig. 11)
- Carraro front axle: to a torque of 220 Nm (Fig. 11A)
42. Reconnect the feed hoses in the positions identified
during disassembly.
43. Mount the wheel(s) and tighten the bolts to a torque
of 640 - 680 Nm.
Refit the mudguard (Carraro front axle).
Issue 21
May 2002
9F01.18
Disassembly (Fig. 12 - 12A)

Rep.
Description
Dana
(Fig. 12)
Carraro
(Fig. 12A)
(1)
Ram assembly
(2)
Pack of seals
(3)
Guide bushes
(4)
Cylinder
(5)
Lock ring
(6)
Piston rod
(7)
Cover
2
3
2
4
5
Remarks
- The Dana or Carraro front axles are fitted with a doubleacting cylinder, which receives pressure from the
Orbitrol spool valve proportional to the rotation of the
steering wheel.
- When one side of the ram is fed, the other is connected
to the return pipes and vice versa.
- Each component can be replaced and is listed in the
spare parts catalogue.
- A pack provides all the seals necessary for carrying out
service operations.
44. Remove the steering ram (see previous operations).
2
3
2
Fig. 12
2
4
Fig. 12A
Issue 2
1
May 2002
9F01.19
Dana front axle (Fig. 12)
Carraro front axle (Fig. 12A)
45. Release and remove the spherical joints (7) (Fig. 11).
46. Take off the lock rings (5) using an appropriate locally
manufactured tool, while simultaneously turning the
guide bushes (3).
47. Take out the piston rod (6) from cylinder (4).
48. Discard all the seals (sealing ring, Orings, dust
guards and lock rings).
60. Lubricate the seals, bushes and cylinder internal

bore with clean transmission oil.
61. Fit the seals on the piston rod (6) cylinder (4) and the
cover (7) respectively.
62. Put together the steering ram without damaging the
oil tight seals :
- by sliding the piston rod fitted with its seals in the
cylinder bore
- by putting back the cover on the cylinder, with the
pressure inlet facing the right direction.
63. Tighten and block the spherical joints (7) (Fig. 11A)
to the torque of 300 Nm.
Carraro front axle (Fig. 12A)

49. Release and remove the spherical joints (7) (Fig.
11A).
50. Separate the cover (7) from the cylinder (4).
51. Take out the piston rod (6) from cylinder.
52. Discard all the seals (sealing ring, Orings, dust
guards and lock rings).
Reassembly
53. Clean the components. Replace any parts to be found
defective.
Remark
- Check the condition of the internal bore of the
cylinder and the operational parts of the piston rod.
Systematically discard all scratched components
that may compromise the oil tightness of the
steering mechanism.

64. Refit the steering ram on the tractor.
65. Check the supply of the ram and its internal oil
tightness (see section 9N01, Hydraulic tests).
Final operation
66. Carry out a road test on the steering system.
Dana front axle (Fig. 12)

54. Lubricate the Orings, bushes and internal bore with
clean transmission oil.
55. Fit the relevant seals on the piston rod (6) and the
guide bushes (3).
56. Slide the piston rod fitted with its seals into the
cylinder bore.
57. Fit the guide bushes at each end of the cylinder,
taking care not to damage the lip of the sealing rings.
58. Position the machined groove of each guide bush
opposite the cylinder groove. Turn the guide bushes
while simultaneously slipping in the lock rings.
59. Tighten and block the spherical joints (7) (Fig. 11) to
a torque of 120 - 150 Nm, the threads previously
2
Issue 1
May 2002
9F02.1
9 F02 Hydrostatic steering for 4WD front axles APL5052
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Principle of Load Sensing ________________________________
B.
Neutral position (engine running) ________________________
C.
Wheel steering lock position (engine running) _____________
D.
Manual steering (engine not running) _____________________
11
E.
Disassembling and reassembling the Orbitrol distribution

valve ___________________________________________________
13
Removing and refitting - Disassembling and reassembling

a steering ram __________________________________________
16
Layout of channels and ports ____________________________
18
F.
G.
Issue 1
May 2001

9F02.2
Issue 1
May 2001
9F02.3
General
The steering system on 8270 and 8280 is of the dynamic
type (constant flowrate of 0.5 l/min, standby pressure of
6 bar) (see section 9B01 or 9C01 depending on the
version). There is no mechanical linkage between the
steering wheel and the steering rams.
Its control principle is of the Load Sensing type. The main
components of the circuit are:
- pressurised oil feed from the priority block(s) (depending on version) supplied by the variable displacement
pump,
- an Orbitrol steering distribution valve of the closed
centre OSPD.LS 100 - 260 type with twin stator rotors
mounted in by-pass.
- two double acting steering rams connected in parallel
and mounted on the front 4WD axle.
Description of the distribution valve

The Orbitrol houses twin stator rotors having different
capacities and mechanically linked by a drive shaft
connected to the steering column, as well as a supply
sleeve centred by springs and a spool integrated in its
body (19).
It has 5 ports:
- pressure
- return to gearbox
- two steering ram supplies
- Load Sensing.
The circuit is protected by a discharge valve, two shock
valves and two suction valves.
Capacity of the stator rotors

- Stator rotor (27) (28): 100 cm3 / rpm
- Stator rotor (30) (31): 160 cm3 / rpm
The maximum capacity of the Orbitrol is 260 cm3 / rpm.
Operation
The Orbitrol is supplied via the priority block(s) by the high
flowrate circuit that equally supplies the integrated spool
(18) and the twin stator rotors (27) (28) and (30) (31).
When the steering wheel is turned, the necessary oil flow
is directed to the corresponding side of the steering rams.
The excess flow not required by the rams is directed via
the return ports to the right-hand side of the gearbox.
In the case of an engine breakdown or a variable
displacement pump failure, only stator rotor (27) (28) is
active and acts as a hand pump allowing the steering to
still be used.
Issue 1
May 2001

9F02.4
A . Principle of "Load Sensing"

Steering unit
The LS port is placed in communication with the closed
circuit of the Orbitrol when the steering is in a neutral
position, or placed in communication with the pressure
supply line as soon as the wheel is turned.
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
Lip seal
Centring springs
Bush
Oring
Pin
Sleeve
Spool valve
Oring
Linkage shaft
Oring
Plate
Oring
Plate
Oring
Spacer
Oring
Oring
Integrated spool
Spool body
Seals
Oring
Washer
Needle bearings
Washer
Discharge valve
Block
Rotor (100 cm3)
Stator (100 cm3)
Oring
Stator (160 cm3)
Rotor (160 cm3)
Plate
Spring
Oring
Closing plate
Bolts
Shock valves
Non-return valve
Spacers
One-way valve
Suction valve
Pin
Issue 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
May 2001
9F02.5
Overall view
21
22
23
24
5
6
25
7
8
9
26
10
27
11
28
12
29
13
30
14
31
15
32
16
33
17
34
18
35
19
36
20
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
May 2001
9F02.6
Exploded view
37
37
1
41
39
4
22
23
24
3
25
5
26
6
40
38
15
8
12
7
28
29
10
11
27
14
13
31
30
33
16
32
17
19
18
42
Parts list
34
35
Fig. 1
20
36
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2

B . Neutral position (engine running)
(Fig. 3)
In this position, the spool valve (7) is centred in relation
to sleeve (6) by springs (2). The P1 L - R channels are
not supplied.
The flow coming from the variable displacement pump
via channel 2 is directed by priority to the Orbitrol
distribution valve via channel 1.
With the steering in the neutral position, there is no flow
through this channel.
9F02.7
Two shock valves (37) and two suction valves (41) are
placed in the L and R ports of the distribution valve. The
shock valves (37) protect the circuit between the steering ram and the spool valve from eventual pressure
overloads caused by shocks to the wheels.
The suction valves allow the oil released by the shock
valves to pass from the right-hand channel into the lefthand channel and vice versa, depending on the movement of the piston in the steering ram.
37
2
6
41
L
P1
27
25
28
31
30
40
38
T
12
LS
B
L
LS
P
Priority block(s)
Supply to steering rams (left-hand lock)
Pilot flow
High flowrate supply from variable displacement
pump
P1
R
T
Supply to metering mechanism (stators (28) (30)

and rotors (27) (31))
Supply to steering rams (right-hand lock)
Return to housing
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
9F02.8
27
31
(R) D
T
T
25
(L) G
30
40
T
28
18
LS
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
9F02.9
C . Wheel steering lock position (engine running) (Fig. 4)

Any action on the steering wheel (left or right) produces
an angular offset of the spool valve (7) and causes the
opening of the closed circuit of the Orbitrol.
A pilot pressure coming from the Orbitrol arrives in
channel 4 and allows the passing into channel 1 of the
flow necessary to the integrated spool (18) and the stator
metering mechanism (stators (28) (30) and rotors (27)
(31)).
The rotors (27) (31) are driven in rotation and force
towards the ram a quantity of oil that is proportional to the
degree of rotation. The rotation of rotors (27) (31) is equal
to that of the steering wheel.
Example: If the steering wheel is turned by 5 an angular
offset of 5 the spool valve (7) is produced in relation to
the sleeve (6).
The rotors (27) (31) are driven in rotation as long as they
are supplied with pressurised oil. They drive the link shaft
(9) and sleeve (6).
When the latter have turned 5, the spool valve (7) and the
sleeve (6) are once again centred by the springs (2). The
rotors are no longer supplied and stop.
The same principle applies to other steering wheel
angles. The quantity of oil discharged by the steering unit
is therefore proportional to the rotational angle of the
steering wheel. Depending on whether a left-hand or
right-hand lock is applied,the spool valve (7) directs the
oil discharged by the metering mechanism (stator (28)
(30) and rotor (27) (31)) towards the L or R port.
The sleeve (6) ensures, during rotation, a synchronous
communication of the cavities of the metering mechanism with the circuit from the pump, on one hand, and the
circuit going to the rams, on the other.
A one-way valve is screwed into the supply port of the
spool valve.
This one-way valve (40) avoids any excessive pressure
on the wheels from being transmitted to the pump when
the wheels are on steering lock position.
If the pressure in the steering circuit becomes too high,
the discharge valve (25), located inside the spool valve,
is activated and the excess pressure is directed towards
channel T.
Issue 1
May 2001
9F02.10
27
31
L
(R) D
T
28
25
(L) G
40
38
LS
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
9F02.11
D . Manual steering (engine stopped)

(Fig. 5)
When the pump is no longer providing pressure or when
the pressure is too low, the rotors (27) (31) are no longer
hydraulically driven. There is no power assistance.
In this case, action on the steering wheel compresses
the centring springs (2). The angular clearance between
pin (5) (Fig. 1)a and sleeve (6) is caught up and there is
a mechanical driving of the metering mechanism (stator
(28) and rotor (27)). The spool valve then functions as a
hand pump.
The oil returning from the ram passes through the nonreturn valve (38) and supplies the metering mechanism.
The pressure generated is directly proportional to the
torque applied to the steering wheel. The effort therefore
required to turn the wheel in order to steer the tractor is
much greater.
Issue 1
May 2001
9F02.12
LS
A
A-A
A
40
LS
B
LS
L
P
R
T
Issue 1
May 2001
Priority block(s)
Pilot flow
Supply to the steering rams (left-hand lock)
P High flowrate supply from the variable
displacement pump
Supply to the steering rams (right-hand lock)
Return to housing
Fig. 6
9F02.13
E . Disassembling and reassembling

the distribution valve (Orbitrol) (Fig.
1 - 2)
Disassembly
1. Remove the distribution valve from the tractor.
2. Place the distribution valve in a vice fitted with
plastic jaw protectors.
3. Mark the location of bolts (36). Remove the bolts
along with seals (20).
4. Take off the closing plate (35), the Oring (34), the
body (19), the integral spool (18) and spring (33).
5. Remove the Oring (17). Locate the position of plate
(32) and remove it.
6. Remove Oring (16). Remove stator (30) and rotor
(31). Take out the Oring (14).
7. Locate and remove plate (13).
8. Remove spacer (15), stator (28), rotor (27). Locate
and remove plate (11). Take out Oring (10).
9. Take out the splined linkage shaft (9).
10. Unscrew the threaded socket and recover the ball
from the non-return valve (38).
11. Take out the two pins and the two balls from the
spool valve suction valves (41).
12. Extract the sleeve assembly (6) and spool valve (7)
by pushing on it and checking that pin (5) lies along
the horizontal axis.
13. Take out washers (22) (24), the needle bearings (23)
and bush (3) from the sleeve / spool valve assembly.
Take out pin (5) and centring springs (2) by pressing
on one of their ends. Separate sleeve (6) from spool
valve (7).
14. Unscrew the plug of the discharge valve (25). Using
an 8 mm Allen key, disassemble the threaded bush
and remove the seal, spring and valve (the inserted
valve seat cannot be removed).
15. Unscrew the two plugs from the shock valves (37),
remove the seals. Using a 6 mm Allen key, disassemble the threaded bushes and take out the springs,
the balls and their seats (the inserted valve seats
cannot be removed).
16. Extract the oil tightness seal (1) and Oring (21).
17. Disassemble the check valve (40).
Issue 1
May 2001

9F02.14
Reassembly
18. Check and clean all components, replace any parts
found to be defective. Lubricate the components
with clean transmission oil before reassembly.
19. Refit the check valve (40).
20. Fit seal (1), Oring (21) and the bush.
21. Fit the balls and springs in the housings of the shock
valves (37). Screw in the threaded bushes, place the
seals and tighten the plugs.
22. In the housing of the discharge valve (25), place the
valve and spring, screw in the threaded bush. Fit the
seal and tighten the plug to a torque of 40 - 60 Nm.
23. Introduce the spool valve (6) in sleeve (7). Position
the centring springs (2) according to Figure 7 and fit
pin (5).
24. Position bush (3) on the sleeve and spool valve
assembly so that the chamfer facilitates assembly
in the spool valve.
25. Place washers (22) (24), with the chamfer of washer
(24) turned towards the centring springs (2) and
placing needle bearing (23) in between them.
26. Assemble the sleeve and spool valve assembly in
the spool valve using a slight oscillatory movement.
Take care that pin (5) is held horizontally.
27. In the suction valve housings (41), place the two
balls and the two pins.
28. In the non-return valve housing (38), place the ball
and screw in the threaded bush.
29. Position the splined linkage shaft (9).
30. Place the Oring (10), and the distributor plate (11).
31. Fit rotor (27) so that the two cavities "C" lie in the axis
of the slot of splined shaft (9) (Fig. 8).
32. Place the Orings (12) (29) on the stator (28).
33. While avoiding moving the rotor (27), fit the stator
(28). Then turn it so that its fixing holes match those
in the spool valve. Position spacer (15) and plate
(13).
Note: Rotor (27) and pin (5) must be in the
34. Refit rotor (31) on the spacer (15) so that the two
cavities "C" lie in the axis of the slot of splined shaft
(9) (Fig. 8).
Issue 1
May 2001
2
Fig. 7
27
31
C
Fig. 8

35. Place Orings (14) (16) on the stator (30). Fit and
move it so that the fixing holes match those provided
in the spool valve.
Note: Rotor (31) and pin (5) must be in the
36. Refit plate (32) in the position noted during disassembly.
37. Check that the bore of body (19) and the rim of spool
(18) are free of scratches or burs.
38. Check that the spool moves normally in the body.
39. Slide the spool fitted with its oil tightness components into the body. Place Orings (17) (34) and
spring (33).
40. Refit the closing plate (35).
41. Refit the new seals (20) and bolts (36) at the
emplacement noted during disassembly.
42. Alternately tighten the bolts to a torque of 30 - 35 Nm.
43. Using a test bench or an appropriate fixture, check
the adjustment and operation of the spool valve.
Refit the spool valve on the tractor.
44. Check the oil tightness of the unions.
9F02.15
27
31
5
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001

9F02.16
F . Removing and refitting Disassembling and reassembling a steering ram
Removal (Fig. 10 - 11)

45. Disconnect the hoses (2), carefully noting their
positions
46. Loosen and take off nut (4) holding cylinder (3) on the
stub (7) concerned.
47. Repeat the previous operation with the fixing point of
the piston rod.
48. Remove washers (6), spacers (1), carefully noting
their positions.
49. Remove the ram(s) (1).
50. If necessary, take out the circlip(s), remove the ball
joint(s) (8).
Fig. 10
Refitting (Fig. 11)

51. If removed, replace the ball joint(s). Fit the circlip(s).
52. Refit the ram(s), spacer(s) (1) with the chamfer
facing the ball joint and washers (6).
53. Fit and tighten the nut(s) (4) to a torque of 440 Nm.
Reconnect the hose pipes (2).
54. Using a grease gun and bearing grease, grease the
pins (7).
10
3
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 11
9F02.17

55. Take off snap ring (14) by turning the oil tight stuffing
box (5) using a locally manufactured pin wrench.
Take out piston rod (15) from cylinder (3).
56. Fix the piston rod in a vice using the end intended for
holding the ball joint.
57. Loosen and remove nut (2).
58. Remove piston (4) and take off Oring (9).
59. Separate the stuffing box (5) from the shaft (15).
60. Remove:
- from the piston: oil seal (6), bush (7) and Oring
(8).
- from the oil tight stuffing box: Oring (10),
washer (11), oil seal (12), oil scraper seal (13).
3
2
4
Reassembly (Fig. 12)

found to be defective.
62. Check that the bore of the cylinder (3) and the rim of
the piston (4) are free from scratches and that the oil
passage ports in the cylinder are not blocked.
63. Carefully refit:
- on the stuffing box (5): oil seal (12), scraper seal
(13), washer (11) and Oring (10).
64. Lubricate the oil seals, Orings and oil scraper seal.
65. Slide the stuffing box in the correct direction on to the
shaft (15) (Fig. 12).
66. Refit with care:
- on piston (4): Oring (8), bush (7) and oil seal (6).
67. Place a lubricated Oring (9) against the shoulder of
the shaft (15).
68. Slide the piston in the correct direction on to the
screw cut end of shaft (15).
69. Carry out operation 56 again to grip the piston rod.
70. Discard the used nut (2). Fit and tighten a new nut to
a torque of 405 Nm.
71. Lubricate the bush (7) and the oil seal (6).
72. Slide the shaft assembly (15), stuffing box (5) and
piston (4) into cylinder (3).
73. Position the machined groove of the stuffing box
opposite that of the cylinder.
74. Fit snap ring (14) using the same method as in
operation 55.
75. Refit the ram(s) on to the tractor.
76. Check the operation and the internal oil tightness of
the ram(s) (see section 9N01, Hydraulic Tests).
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001
9F02.18
G . Layout of channels and ports

T
T
LS
A
LS
A
B
LS
L
R
P
T
Steering rams
Location of the steering column
Pilot pressure from the priority block(s)
Supply to steering rams
Issue 1
May 2001
A-A
Supply to steering rams

High pressure from variable displacement pump
Return
Fig. 13
Hydraulics - Right-hand cover
9G01.1
9 G01 Right-hand cover 110 l/min Load Sensing
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
13
B.
Description and operation of the variable displacement

pump __________________________________________________
17
C.
Removing and refitting the pump ________________________
20
D.
Adjusting the engine speed sensor (Heavy Duty version) ___
21
E.

the pump bearing _______________________________________
22
Issue 1
May 2001

9G01.2
General
The right-hand cover is mounted on the intermediate
housing. It acts as a support for numerous components
and contains the different booster, lubricating and low
flowrate channels and circuits.
39
On its internal face, the cover contains:

- the variable displacement pump (41) and its drive pinion
(39).
- the safety valve (45) of the low pressure circuit calibrated at 22 bar
- the safety valve (44) of the booster circuit and 5 bar
lubricating circuit.
On its external face, the cover is fitted with:
- the main 15 micron filter (27)
- one or two priority blocks serving different functions of
the low and high flowrate circuits
- the pressure relief-valve (2)
- the regulator (12) of the variable displacement pump
- the 4 solenoid valves (15) to (18) of the low pressure
control functions (depending on options)
- the high and low pressure diagnostic connectors (11)
(48), lubricating booster (29), LS (9)
- the engine speed sensor (25) (depending on options)
- the low pressure (14) and booster (42) switches as well
as the main filter clogging indicator (34).
Description
- The movement transmitted to pinion (1) by the engine,
via shaft (2), drives pinion (39) of the variable displacement pump (41) (Fig. 1).
- The oil coming from the booster pump, located on the
left-hand cover (see section 9H01) is directed towards
the priority blocks through pipe (54) (Fig. 2) via the
variable displacement pump (41), in order to supply the
function requested.
- The pipe (55) (Fig. 2) directs oil coming from the 5 bar
safety valve (44) to the suction manifold fitted on the
booster pump (see section 9H01).
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
9G01.3
A
53
22
55
VS
52
52
54
22
53
PCV
54
(22)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
55
Mecanindus pin
Oring
Oring
Booster pipe
Safety valve pipe (44)
A :
PCV :
VS :
C :
Suction
To variable displacement pump
5 bar safety valve (44)
Intermediate housing compartment
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

9G01.4
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
to
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
Bolt
Pressure relief-valve
Supply to Orbitrol
Bolt
LS pilot flow from the Orbitrol
LS pilot flow to the pump regulator
Priority block(s)
Cover
LS diagnostics connector
Plugs (depending on version)
HP diagnostic connector
Pump regulator
Union (LS)
LP switch (17 bar)
Solenoid valves (PTO, PTO brake,
differential lock (front and rear if fitted)
and 4WD
Plugs
Park Lock union or plug (depending on assembly)
PTO clutch union
PTO brake union
2WD or 4WD differential lock union
Plug or speed sensor (Heavy Duty gearbox)
4WD union
15 micron main filter
LP union
Diagnostic connector for booster and lubricating
pressure
Supply to lift control valve manifold and auxiliary
spool valves
LS pilot flow from auxiliary spool valves and lift
control valve
Bolt
Trailer brake valve pilot line
Clogging indicator
Centring pins
Nut
Washer
Pinion
Key
Booster and lubricating pressure switch
Union and pipe to manifold and lubrication (depending on assembly)
5 bar safety valve
Issue 1
May 2001
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
Safety - valve 22 bar

Plug or temperature switch (Heavy Duty gearbox)
Pump attachment screw
LP diagnostics connector
Rivets
Trailer brake to quick-disconnect coupler
Fig. 3
Fig. 3A
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 5A
9G01.5
External overall view without trailer braking
11
12
13
14
19
15
16
17
18
21
20
23
HP
24
BP
24
28
26
34
31
32
30
47
29
19
48
28
27
25
F
F
Parts list
Fig. 3A
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Issue 1
Fig. 5A
Fig. 3
May 2001
9G01.6
External overall view with trailer braking
33
11
12
13
14
19
15
16
17
18
21
20
23
HP
24
BP
28
26
34
50
31
32
30
47
29
19
48
28
27
25
F
F
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
May 2001
Fig. 5
Fig. 5A
Fig. 3A
9G01.7
Internal overall view
36
10
49
37
39
38
40
41
36
45
49
10
44
34
Heavy Duty
gearbox
43
42
46
Full Powershift
gearbox
Parts list
Fig. 3
Fig. 3A
Issue 1
Fig. 5
Fig. 5A
Fig. 4
May 2001
9G01.8
Exploded view - Right-hand cover without trailer braking
53
55
52
7
4
54
41
40
39
36
8
12
1
47
38
44
37
34
32
25
42
11
34
27
29
48
15
16
17
8200 version with Heavy Duty gearbox

(25) Engine speed sensor
(46) Temperature switch
Parts list
Fig. 3
Issue 1
46
18
May 2001
Fig. 3A
Fig. 4
Fig. 5A
Fig. 5
9G01.9
Exploded view - Right-hand cover with trailer braking
53
55
52
7
4
54
41
40
39
36
8
1
47
9
25
38
12
44
37
34
32
46
11
27
29
48
42
15
16
17
8200 version with Full Powershift gearbox

(25) Plug
(46) Plug
Fig. 3
18
Parts list
Fig. 3A
Issue 1
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 5A
May 2001
9G01.10
Identification of ports and channels (Figs. 6 - 7)

Fig. 6
HP
GAV
Fig. 7
9
P
C
F
12
C
D
P
R
S
:
:
:
:
:
22 bar adjusting screw

HP from variable displacement pump
To control piston of variable displacement pump
Regulator return
Issue 1
May 2001
(9) LS diagnostics connector

(12) Pump regulator
Important: Adjusting screws C and D are factory set.

Do not modify these settings.
9G01.11
Identification of ports and channels (Figs. 8 - 9)

Fig. 8
2
G
S1
G
G
R
Fig. 9
45
2
G
G
G
44
F
G
L
P
R
S
S1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Booster
Lubrication
HP outlet from variable displacement pump
To control piston of variable displacement pump
Regulator return
Return from priority block(s)
(2) Pressure relief-valve

Issue 1
May 2001
9G01.12
12
14
19
15 16 17 18
2
21
20
23
HP
24
BP
26
28
48
27
"O"
34
31
32
30
47
41
28
43
Issue 1
May 2001
42
46
Fig. 10
9G01.13
A . Removing and refitting the cover

Removal (Fig. 10)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Immobilise the tractor. Chock the left rear wheel.

Chock between the frame and the front axle.
Partially drain the intermediate housing.
Remove or place the right rear wheel in the wide track
position. Position axle stand(s) as necessary.
Disconnect pipes and hose pipes (3) (5) (6) (20) (21)
(23) (24) (26) (28) (30) (31) (43), solenoid valve electrical harnesses (15) to (18) (depending on version),
switches (14) (42) (34), engine speed sensor (25) and
switch (46) (according to version).
Take out bolts (32). Remove the main filter assembly
(27).
Take out bolts (4). Remove the priority block(s).
Take out bolts (1). Unstick and remove the cover.
Remove the booster pipe (54) and pipe (55) of the 5 bar
safety valve (Fig. 2) (optional).
Special points
- One upper bolt holding the cover may be masked by the
union screwed into regulator (12). Take off the regulator
in order to facilitate the removal of the cover.
- To disassemble the safety valve (45) of the LP circuit,
compress spring (3) using a screwdriver and remove
circlip (1). Remove parts (2) to (4) (Fig. 12). Check that
valve (4) slides freely in its housing.
54
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
1
2
45
3
4
44
Issue 1
May 2001

9G01.14
Refitting
Note: Check for the presence of the rivets on the
channels provided on the external face of the cover,
as well for those (45) on the internal face (Fig. 4).
Also check for the fitting of plugs (10).
9. Clean the mating faces of the housing and the cover.
10. Check for the presence of the two pins (36) (Fig. 13).
11. If it has been removed, insert pipe (55) of the 5 bar
safety valve. Position its end fitted with seal (53) in
the Mecanindus pin (22) located on compartment "C"
of the intermediate housing (Fig. 2).
Place booster pipe (54) fitted with Oring (52) (Fig. 2),
its slot held by pin (1) (Fig. 11). Lightly smear seal (4)
with miscible grease and position it on the collar of
pipe (54) (Fig. 11).
12. Smear the mating face of the housing with a sealing
product (Loctite 510 or equivalent). Place the guide
studs "G" (Fig. 11).
13. Fill pump (41) with transmission oil via port "O"
(Fig. 10).
14. Slide the cover on the guide studs "G" (Fig. 11). Using
a bronze hammer, tap the rim of the cover to engage
pins (36) in the housing. Between the mating faces
of the cover and housing, check that pipe (55)
(Fig. 2) is correctly positioned on the 5 bar valve (44).
15. Tighten bolts (1) to a torque of 120 - 160 Nm.
Note: If resistance is felt during tightening, do
not continue. Move the cover away from the
housing and check the position of pipe (55) on
the 5 bar valve (44) (Fig. 2). Also check for the
rotation of pinion (39).
16. Replace seals (3) to (5) (Fig. 14) and refit the priority
block(s). Tighten bolts (4) smeared with Loctite 542
(Fig. 10) to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
17. Reconnect the engine speed sensor (see following
special points). Reconnect the switches, the harnesses of the solenoid valves and the hydraulic
pipes.
18. Raise the tractor, refit the wheel or place it in its initial
position. Remove the axle stands where necessary
and tighten the wheel nuts or studs to the torque
shown in section 2G01.
19. Top up the oil level in the housings.
20. Check the operation of the electrical circuits, LP
switches (14), booster (lubrication) switches (42),
clogging switch (34) and the solenoid valves.
21. Check the oil tightness of the cover, the mating
faces and the hydraulic unions.
36
36
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2001
9G01.15
Special points
- The engine speed sensor (25) is only fitted on 8200
tractors with a Heavy Duty transmission. Before fitting
it, see D.
- Lightly smear the threads of the booster (lubrication)
switch (42) and low pressure switch (14) with Loctite
542 or its equivalent before fitting them.
Reminder: If replacement of the pump is necessary
(see C), carry out hydraulic tests (see section 9N01).
Tightening torques
- Solenoid valve spools (15) to (18): 18 - 20 Nm.
- Hexagonal nut (PTO differential solenoid valve) moderate tightening.
- 5 bar valve (44): smear threads with Loctite 241 and
tighten to a torque of 10 - 20 Nm using a locally
manufactured tool.
- Sensor nut (25) (depending on options, Heavy Duty
gearbox only): 10 - 15 Nm.
- Pressure relief-valve (2): 150 Nm.
- Knurled nuts: 4 - 5 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001
9G01.16
Rotates to the left, shaft facing the operator

G : From variable displacement pump
P : HP outlet to priority block(s)
R : To control piston (10)
10
F
a
+
-
41
10
b
P
13
12
4
G
F
R
P
11
6
7
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2001
9G01.17
B . Description and operation of the

variable displacement pump
The variable displacement pump, fitted inside the righthand cover, is driven by a pinion fixed by bolts to a
bearing block and located in the intermediate housing
(see E).
It comprises a body (1) and a cylinder (3) driven by shaft
(13). The cylinder has nine axial pistons (4) thrust on ball
joints (5) that are in contact with plate (6) via the
intermediary of pads (7).
The inclination of the plate is obtained by the balance
between spring (8), pushrod (9) and piston (10) that is
controlled by a regulator receiving the LS pilot pressure
from the HP components via the priority block(s).
Depending on the inclination of the plate, the length of
travel of the axial pistons (4) is modified, thus permitting
the flowrate to adjust to the operating conditions.
The distribution plate (11), behind the cylinder, places in
communication the piston chambers with the suction
and discharge ports of the pump.
The ball joints (5) are drilled to provide lubrication between the pads (7) and plate (6). The oil is then sent to
the housing via port "O" (Fig. 10).
The pressure relief-valve (2) is screwed into the upper left
of the cover (Fig. 3 or 3A).
Issue 1
May 2001
9G01.18
12
S
R
LS
P
10
20
20
21
(1)
(10)
(12)
(17)
(20)
(21)
Issue 1
17
Priority blocks
Piston
Variable displacement pump regulator
Spool valves (17) (20) manifold
Fig. 16
May 2001

Working position full capacity
When a high flowrate function is activated, for example
an auxiliary spool valve, the pump exits the standby
position and enters the maximum flowrate position. The
flowrate in the spool valve is not slowed enough to allow
the pump pressure to compress the 22 bar spring of spool
a. The pump remains in the maximum flowrate position.
The LS pilot pressure is slightly higher than the pump
pressure, minus 22 bar.
Working position partial capacity
The partial opening of the spool valve causes an increase
in pressure that results in a LS pilot pressure being sent
to the pump. This pressure pushes spool a, allowing the
pump to be set at full capacity. The pressure of the pump
increases and pushes spool a into its equilibrium position
where the pump pressure is greater than 22 bar in
accordance with the LS pilot signal.
If the receiver load increases, the LS pilot pressure
increases on the spring side of the spool a and communication is set up between ports R and S. The pressure
on piston (10) drops, the spring (8) pushes plate (6) and
increases the pump flowrate in order to finally stabilise
itself in a position where spool a is in an position of
equilibrium.
If a higher flowrate is requested, requiring a further
opening of the spool valve. The pressure drops and the
flowrate of the pump increases until it reaches a new
equilibrium.
Maximum pressure zero flowrate
When the pressure at port P reaches 200 bar, spool b is
pushed forwards compressing its spring. The ports P and
R are placed in communication and piston (10) is brought
to the zero flowrate position.
The regulator (12) (Fig. 17), fitted on cover (8) regulates
the flow of pump pressure according to information
transmitted by the LS signal.
Identification of ports and channels (Fig. 17)
C : 22 bar adjusting screw
D : 200 bar adjusting screw
O : Decompression port
P : Pump pressure
R : To piston (10)
S : Return
LS : Signal
Important: The adjusting screws C and D are factory
set. Do not modify these settings.
12
9G01.19
XLS
D
Fig. 17
R
F
1
P
F
Fig. 18
Pressure relief-valve (2) (Fig. 18)

The high pressure flow discharged by the variable displacement pump passes through channel P in the cover
(8) (Fig. 8) and is directed towards the priority block(s).
The pressure relief-valve calibrated at 230 bar and screwed
onto the cover, ensures the safety of the high pressure
circuit. In the case of abnormally high pressure, valve (1)
opens and oil is directed to the housing via the intermediary of ports R of the relief-valve.
Issue 1
May 2001

9G01.20
C . Removing and refitting the pump

22. Remove the right-hand cover. See A.
Removal
23. Remove pump (41) with idler pinion (39).

24. Unscrew nut (37). Remove washer (38). Using an
appropriate extractor, remove the pinion. Recover
key (40).
2
3
Refitting
25. Clean all components. Replace any parts found to be
defective. Check that none of the channels in the
cover are obstructed.
26. Check for the presence of the locating pins (4) (Fig.
19).
27. Remplace O'ring (1) to (3) (Fig. 19).
28. Carry out the removal operations in reverse order.
Tighten bolts and nuts to the indicated torque.
Note: Inside the cover, apply a small continuous
bead of Loctite 574 or its equivalent around the
bolt holes (47). Use the same method as used
with the left-hand cover (see section 9H01 B).
Final operation
29. Refit the right-hand cover (see A).
Tightening torques
-
Nut (37) : 50 - 60 Nm, Loctite 241

Bolt (47) : 120 - 160 Nm, Loctite 241
Bolt (4) : 25 - 35 Nm, Loctite 542
Sensor nut (depending on assembly) : 10 - 15 Nm
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 19
9G01.21
D . Adjusting the engine speed sensor (Heavy Duty version)

Reminder
- The engine speed sensor (25) is only mounted on 8200
tractors fitted with a Heavy Duty transmission.
Special point
- The threads of the sensor must be lightly smeared with
Loctite 577 or its equivalent before adjustment.
Adjustment
30. Screw the sensor fully home without forcing it. The
end must be in contact with pinion (39) of the variable
displacement pump.
Then unscrew the sensor by three quarters of a turn,
in order to obtain a clearance of 1 mm approximately
between the sensor and the pinion. Tighten the nut
Issue 1
May 2001

9G01.22
E . Removing and refitting Disassembly and reassembling the pump

bearing
- Place the rear wheels in the wide track position.
- Uncouple the tractor between the gearbox and the
- Remove the components of the creeper unit (if fitted)
that might hinder the removal of the pump drive pinion
(see section 6H01).
- Free the ratchet of the Park Lock (depending on assembly). See section 6F01 and take out the toothed sleeve
linking the drive pinion and the shaft, after carefully
noting its position.
- Remove pump drive pinion (1) fixed on bearing block
(11) (Fig. 20).
Removal (Fig. 20)

31. Take out plug (8). Using a threaded rod screwed into
the tapped hole, pull on locating pin (7) so as to free
spacer (5).
32. Through the front of the intermediate housing, pull on
bearing block (11) and take it out through the bore.
Refitting (Fig. 20)

33. Check that neither the channel nor drilled holes in the
spacer are blocked.
34. Check for the presence of circlip (12) on the upper
shaft of the power take off (only on tractors fitted
with Heavy Duty gearbox). Refit the bearing block
assembly, carry out operation 32 in reverse order.
35. Position the groove of spacer (5) along the axis of the
port provided for plug (8).
36. Fit the locating pin, inserting the flats in the groove of
the spacer. Tighten the plug.
37. Check that the bearing block assembly is correctly
positioned and that it turns normally.
38. Refit the pinion (1). Tighten bolts (4) lightly smeared
with Loctite 241 to a torque of 72 - 96 Nm.
Disassembling the bearing block (11) (Fig. 20)

39. Remove the bearing block.
40. Take off circlip (10). Extract bearings (6) from the
bearing block. Remove spacer (5).
Issue 1
May 2001
Reassembly
41. Clean and check the parts. Replace any components found to be defective.
bearings (6) separated by spacer (5).
43. Place circlip (10).
44. Refit the bearing block.
45. Fix the pinion on the bearing block using bolts (4)
lightly smeared with Loctite 241 and tighten to a
Special point
- The union (9) has a calibrated port R to provide a
metered lubrication of the bearings (6).
9G01.23
9
AA
5
A
10
12
11
A
Fig. 20
Issue 1
May 2001

9G01.24
Final operations
If fitted, refit the ratchet and sleeve of the Park Lock. The
long part of the sleeve must be turned towards the drive
pinion.
- Refit and adjust the elements of the creeper gearbox if
fitted (see section 6H01).
- Couple the tractor between the gearbox and the intermediate housing (see section 2C01).
- Replace the rear wheels in their original position.
Tighten wheel nuts or studs to the torque shown in
section 2G01.
- Check the correct operation of all controls.
- Road test.
- Check the oil tightness of the mating faces and hydraulic unions.
11
Fig. 21
Special points
- On tractors fitted with the Heavy Duty gearbox, the
profile of the drive bearing block (11) (Figs. 21 22) is
different from that fitted to tractors with a Full Powershift
gearbox (Fig. 20). The repair and maintenance operations however remain the same for both versions.
- If necessary, see section 5K01, creeper unit.
- A sleeve (14) held in position against bush (76) by a
spring (12) and a tab washer (3) provides oil tightness
of the upper shaft line between the gearbox and the
intermediate housing (Fig. 22).
Issue 1
May 2001
9G01.25
Heavy Duty gearbox version
14
12
3
12
13
11
76
13
(2) Collar
(3) Tab washer
(12) Spring
19
(13) Rivets
(14) Sleeve
(19) Intermediate housing
Issue 1
10
(76) Shouldered bush

Fig. 22
May 2001
Hydraulics - 150 l/min right-hand cover
9G02.1
9 G02 150 l/min right-hand cover
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
13
B.
Description and operation of the variable displacement

pump __________________________________________________
16
C.
Removing and refitting the pump ________________________
20
D.
Disassembling and reassembling - shimming of the idler

pinion __________________________________________________
22

the pump bearing block _________________________________
25
E.
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.2
Issue 1
May 2001

General
Certain 8200 tractors may be fitted with a 150 l/min
flowrate Load Sensing circuit.
The right-hand side hydraulic cover of this circuit is fitted
on the intermediate housing as is the 110 l/min flowrate
Load Sensing circuit. The cover serves as a support for
numerous components and contains various channels
for the booster, lubricating and low flowrate circuits.
9G02.3
Hydraulic routing
- The oil coming from the booster pump located on the
left-hand cover (see section 9H01) flows into the priority
block(s) (7) (depending on version) via the main filter
(27) and the variable displacement pump (41) (Fig. 2).
- The tube (55) (Fig. 3) sends the oil coming from the 5 bar
safety-valve into the suction manifold of the booster
pump (see section 9H01) when no hydraulic slave
device is used.
On its internal face, the cover contains:

- an idler pinion (82) also known as the "relay" pinion.
- the safety valve (44) of the booster and lubricating
circuit calibrated at 5 bar.
- the safety valve (45) of the low pressure circuit (17 bar).
On its external face, the cover is fitted with:
- the variable displacement pump (41) and its regulator
(12)
- the main 15 micron filter (27)
- one or two priority block(s) (7) (depending on assembly)
serving the various functions of the low and high
flowrate circuits
- the high pressure relief-valve (2) calibrated at 230 bar
- the four solenoid valves (15) to (18) controlling the low
pressure functions (depending on options) one of which
(power take off clutch) is of the proportional type.
- the high and low pressure diagnostics connectors (11)
(48), booster (lubrication) (29) and Load Sensing (9).
- the low pressure (14) and booster (42) switches as well
as the clogging indicator (34) of the main filter (27).
Description
- The engine movement transmitted to pinion (1) by shaft
(2) drives the variable displacement pump pinion via the
"relay" pinion (82) (Fig. 1).
82
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.4
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
to
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
Bolt
High pressure relief-valve
Orbitrol spool valve supply port
Bolt
Load Sensing control port from Orbitrol spool valve
Load Sensing control port to pump regulator
Priority block(s)
Cover
Load Sensing diagnostics connector
Return pipe
Pump regulator
Load Sensing union
Low pressure (17 bar) switch
Solenoid valves: power take off, power take off
brake, differential lock front and rear if fitted and
4WD
Hydraulic cover assembly
Park Lock union
Power take off clutch port
Mecanindus pin
Power take off brake
2WD or 4WD differential lock port
Oring
Port for 4WD union
Low pressure port
Booster pressure and lubricating diagnostic connector
Supply port for lift control valve and auxiliary spool
valves via the manifold
Load Sensing control port from auxiliary spool
valves and lift control valve
Bolt
Control port of trailer brake valve
Clogging indicator
Oring
Centring pins
Nut
Washer
Pump pinion
Key
Pressure switch (booster and lubrication)
Port to lubricating manifold located above centre
housing
5 bar safety valve
22 bar safety valve
Plug
Bolt
Issue 1
May 2001
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
(69)
(70)
(71)
(72)
(73)
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)
(78)
(79)
(80)
(81)
(82)
(83)
(84)
Low pressure diagnostic connector

Rivets
Port to trailer braking quick disconnect coupling
Transfer pipe
Composite seal (Oring and anti-extrusion bush)
Dust cover
Sleeve
Oring and dust cover
Oring and dust cover
Composite seal (Oring and anti-extrusion bush)
Dust cover
Suction manifold and bolt
Discharge manifold and bolt
Lubricating port for relay pinion
Port to brake power assistance
Studs
Nuts
Plug
Closing plate and seal
Plug
Spacer
Bolt
Obturator and seal
Bolt
Washer
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Circlips
Spacer
Idler pinion
Pin
Oring
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
9G02.5
41
BP
27
HP
7
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.6
A
53
22
55
VS
52
52
54
22
53
PCV
54
(22)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
A
PCV
VS
C
Mecanindus pin
Oring
Oring
Booster pipe
Safety valve (44) pipe
:
:
:
:
55
Suction
To variable displacement pump (41)
5 bar safety valve (44)
Intermediate housing compartment
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
9G02.7
External overall view without trailer braking
F
F1
16
17
15
18
F.PDF
4RM D.LOCK
PDF
21
48
42
29
43
10
47
23
24
26
28
31
14
30
F1
67
68
BP
7
13
HP
12
56
57
72
51
41
62
61
11
3
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
9G02.8
External overall view with trailer braking
F
F1
16
17
15
18
F.PDF
4RM D.LOCK
PDF
21
48
42
29
43
10
47
23
24
26
28
31
30
14
50
67
F
F1
68
33
BP
13
HP
12
56
57
72
51
41
62
61
11
5
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
9G02.9
External overall view
24
26
31
28
P aux
X aux
23
50
66
21
30
33
17B
Frein Rem
20
Xdir
Pdir
XLS
69
67
68
65
67
Fig. 6
67
68
70
68
32
71
34
27
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.10

Internal overall view
36
45
36
2
44
84
41
37
74
38
40
39
68
36
67
82
77
78
80
79
80
81
78
77
83
76
75
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.11
Exploded view
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
80
19
79
52
58
63
78
39
77
83
54
46
38
42
37
53
48
60
55
14
59
67
49
47
25
44
68
40
41
1
45
49
35
49
84
12
62
64
70
61
56
57
51
34
32
27
Without trailer braking

With trailer braking
72
73
11
74
68
67
36
Fig. 10
Fig. 9
Parts list
Issue 1
71
Fig. 10
May 2001
Parts list
Fig. 9

9G02.12
Issue 1
May 2001
9G02.13

1.
2.
3.
4.
Immobilise the tractor. Chock the left rear wheel.

Chock between the frame and the front axle.
Partially drain the intermediate housing.
Disassemble the right rear wheel. Position an axle
stand.
Removing the priority block(s)

5. Proceed with the removal of the priority block(s) by
removing bolts (4) after previously disconnecting
hose pipes (3) (5) (6) (28) (30) (31) (50) (Figs. 4 or 5).
Special point
- On tractors fitted with trailer braking, remove the
priority block(s) (7) without disconnecting hose (33)
(Fig. 5). This precaution will avoid bleeding of the
valve pilot circuit when refitting the cover.
8
Fig. 11
Removing the cover (8) (Fig. 11)

6. Disconnect pipes (10) (21) (23) (24) (26) (43), the solenoid valve harnesses (15) to (18) (depending on the
version) and switches (14) (34) (42) (Fig. 4, 5 and 7).
7. Take out bolts (32) and remove the main filter assembly (27).
8. Remove bolts (1) and nuts (68).
Reminder
- Check that there is no hydraulic or electrical link that
remains connected between the cover and the
9. Release and remove the cover (see following safety
precaution).
Special point
- Certain nuts and bolts on the cover are difficult to
access. Where necessary, use a locally manufactured wrench.
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.14
Danger
- The cover and pump together are extremely heavy.
Their removal must be carried out with care using a
locally manufactured support that replaces the head of
a trolley jack.
10. After removing the cover, take out pipes (54) (55)
(optional).
Reminder
- The 22 bar safety valve (45) comprises (Fig. 13):
. a circlip (1)
. a stop (2)
. a spring (3)
. a valve (4)
Refitting the cover

Reminder
- Check for the presence of rivets (49) at the end of the
channels located on the external and internal faces of
the cover.
12. Check for the presence of the two centring pins (36)
(Figs. 8 - 14).
13. If removed:
- place seal (53) on pipe (55) (Figs. 3 - 9). Position the
end of the pipe in the Mecanindus pin (22) located
on compartment "C" of the intermediate housing
(Fig. 3).
- place seal (52) on pipe (54) (Figs. 3 - 9). Position the
machined slot of the flange in pin (1) (Fig. 12).
4
Fig. 12
36
36
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 14

14. Lightly smear the seal (4) with miscible grease and
stick it to the flange (Fig. 12).
15. Check the location of the pins (67) in the intermediate
housing.
Remark
- The pins are first lightly smeared with Loctite 241
before fixing them on the housing.
16. Smear the mating face of the housing with Loctite
17. With the assistance of another operator and the tool
recommended in the preceding remark "Danger",
refit the cover by aligning its holes with the studs on
the housing.
18. Push the cover progressively while simultaneously
checking between housing and cover mating faces
that the 5 bar safety valve is correctly housed in pipe
(55) (Fig. 3).
19. Tighten bolts (1) and nuts (68) to a torque of 120 160 Nm.
Important
- If there is any resistance, stop tightening and open
the gap between housing and cover to check on the
correct alignment of pipe (55) and the 5 bar valve.
20. Refit the main filter assembly (27) and tighten bolts
(32).
21. Reconnect the harnesses to the solenoid valves and
switches. Carry out operation 6 in reverse order.
9G02.15
Refitting the priority block(s)

22. Refit the priority block(s) and check for the presence
of seals (3) (4) (5) (Fig. 15). Tighten bolts (4) previously smeared with Loctite 542 to a torque of 25 35 Nm. Reconnect the pipes or hoses. Carry out
operation 5 in reverse order.
Fig. 15
Final operations
23. Refit the rear wheel. Remove the axle stand. Tighten
the wheel nuts or studs (depending on version) to the
torque shown in section 2G01.
24. Top up the oil levels in the housings and check the
transparent tube on the left-hand side of the centre
housing.
25. Remove the chocks. Start the engine and check:
- the operation of the hydraulic and electrical components
- the oil tightness of the mating faces, pipes and
hoses.
Remark
- If the variable displacement pump has been replaced, carry out hydraulic tests (see section 9N01).
Issue 1
May 2001
9G02.16
B . Description and operation of the

variable displacement pump
- The variable displacement pump (41) is fitted on the
external face of the right-hand side cover. It is driven by
an idler pinion known as the relay pinion that is itself
driven by a driving pinion driven by the engine.
- The variable displacement pump comprises a body (1)
and a cylinder (3) driven by shaft (13). The cylinder
contains nine axial pistons thrust against ball joints (5)
in contact with plate (6) via the pads (7).
- The angle of the plate results from a balance between
spring (9) and piston (10) controlled by a regulator (12)
that receives the LS pilot pressure from the high
pressure components via the priority block(s).
- Depending on the angle of the plate, the travel of the

axial pistons (4) varies and permits the flowrate to be
adapted to operating requirements.
- The distributor plate (11) at the rear of the cylinder,
places the piston chambers in communication with the
suction ports and the pump discharge.
- The ball joints (2) (5), fitted respectively to the axial
pistons and the inclined plate, are drilled to ensure the
lubrication of all moving parts. The oil is then directed
to a port and an external pipe to lubricate the relay pinion
bearings.
- The pressure relief-valve is screwed into the lower right
front of the cover.
Rotation to the right, shaft facing the operator

G : Booster from left pump
P : HP outlet to the priority block(s)
P1 : HP pressure
R1 : To control piston (10)
S : Return from the regulator
a
41
10
b
P
11
13
G
8
-
10
R1
S
12
P1
F
F
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2001

Identification of ports and components (Fig.
17)
C
D
P
P1
R
R1
S
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(1)
(10)
(12)
(17)
(20)

HP pressure from variable displacement pump
HP pressure to regulator
Return
To control piston (variable displacement pump)
Return from regulator
Priority block(s)
Piston
Variable displacement pump regulator
(21)
Manifold for spool valves (17) (20)
Important
- Screws C and D are factor set.
- Do not modify these settings.
20
P
9G02.17
21
17
LS
LS
PR
1
P
P1
12
R1
S
R1
C
10
D
P1
S
F
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.18
Working position full capacity

- When a high flowrate function is activated, for example
an auxiliary spool valve, the pump exits the standby
position and enters the maximum flowrate position.
The flowrate in the spool valve is not slowed enough to
allow the pump pressure to compress the 22 bar spring
of spool a. The pump remains in the maximum flowrate
position. The LS pilot pressure is slightly higher than the
pump pressure, minus 22 bar.
P1
12
R1
a
b
O
S
Working position partial capacity

- The partial opening of the spool valve causes an
increase in pressure that results in a LS pilot pressure
being sent to the pump. This pressure pushes spool a,
allowing the pump to be set at full capacity. The
pressure of the pump increases and pushes spool a into
its equilibrium position where the pump pressure is
greater than 22 bar in accordance with the LS pilot
signal.
- If the receiver load increases, the LS pilot pressure
increases on the spring side of the spool a and communication is set up between ports R1 and S. The pressure
on piston (10) drops, the spring (8) pushes plate (6) and
increases the pump flowrate in order to finally stabilise
itself in a position where spool a is in an position of
equilibrium.
- If a higher flowrate is requested, requiring a further
opening of the spool valve. The pressure drops and the
flowrate of the pump increases until it reaches a new
equilibrium.
Maximum pressure zero flowrate

- When the pressure at port P1 reaches 200 bar, spool b
is pushed downwards compressing its spring. The
ports P1 and R1 are placed in communication and piston
(10) is brought to the zero flowrate position.
- The regulator (12) (Fig. 17), fitted on pump (41) regulates
the flow of pump pressure according to information
transmitted by the LS signal.
Issue 1
May 2001
XLS
D
Fig. 18
Identification of ports and channels (Fig. 18)

C
D
O
P
R
S
XLS
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Decompression port
Pump pressure
To piston (10)
Return
Signal
Important:
- The adjusting screws C and D are factory set.
- Do not modify these settings.
9G02.19
Pressure relief-valve (2) (Fig. 19)

- The high pressure flowrate discharged by the variable
displacement pump is directed towards the priority
block(s).
- The pressure relief-valve calibrated at 230 bar and
screwed into the cover, ensures the safety of the high
pressure circuit. In case of any abnormal variation in
pressure, valve (1) raises and the oil is directed to the
housing via ports R in the relief-valve.
2
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.20
C . Removing and refitting the pump

47
27. Remove the right-hand side cover (see A).
84
Removal (Fig. 20 - 21)

28. Disconnect any pipes linked to the pump (41).
29. Take out the obturator (74) along with its seal.
30. Immobilise the pump shaft by blocking pinions (39)
(82) using a bronze drift.
31. Unscrew nut (37) and recover washer (38).
32. Via the port obturator, introduce an extractor so that
its threaded rods screw into and lock in the threaded
holes of the pinion. Operate the extractor and remove the pinion from the conical pump shaft.
33. Remove the hydraulic suction A and discharge R
manifolds from the pump. Discard the seals and
recover the transfer pipe (51).
34. Take out bolts (47) and remove the pump from the
cover (8).
35. Discard seal (84).
41
51
Fig. 20
82
39
40
38
37
74
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2001
9G02.21
Refitting
36. Clean and inspect all the parts. Replace any components found to be defective.
37. Degrease the threads of the pump shaft.
38. Place an new Oring (84) in the bore of the pump
housing and position key (40) in its slot at the end of
the shaft.
39. Position the pump on the cover by checking the
alignment of the key in the slot on the pinion. Tighten
bolts (47), lightly smeared with Loctite 542 or its
equivalent, to a torque of 200 - 260 Nm.
40. Slide washer (38) onto the shaft.
41. Degrease the threads of nut (37) and lightly smear
them with Loctite 241 or its equivalent, then tighten
42. Manually check the rotation of the pump and check
the pinion backlash.
43. Fit the obturator with a new seal and refit the
assembly in the port in the cover.
44. Replace the hydraulic manifolds and the transfer
pipe fitted with new seals. Fit spacer (72). Tighten
the bolts (Fig. 20) using the torques shown below:
- manifold A : 90 - 120 Nm
- manifold R : 50 - 70 Nm
- spacer (51) : 50 - 70 Nm
41
Fig. 22
Final operation
45. Refit the right-hand side cover (see A).
Important
- Fill the variable displacement pump (41) with transmission oil via the port of pipe (1) (Fig. 22) before
starting the engine.
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.22
D . Disassembling, reassembling and

shimming of the idler pinion
46. Remove the variable displacement pump (see C).
47. Unlock and remove bolts (75).
48. Take out pin (83) and pinion (82) and pair together the
bearing cones and cups (77) (78) if they are to be reused. Recover the shim(s) (79) and spacer (81).
49. On the pinion, remove the bearing cups (78) and
circlips (80).
79
80
81
78
77
Reassembly
50. Place the bearing cups (78) thrust against the previously fitted circlips.
51. Reassemble the turning hub of the idler pinion (82) by
assembling the bearing cones (77), spacer (81), the
shim(s) and pin (83).
Reminder
- If required, carry out the shimming of the idler
pinion (see operations 56 to 64). Otherwise continue the reassembly operations.
52. Assemble the pinion and pin on the cover.
53. Degrease the threads of bolt (75) and lightly smear
it with Loctite 241 or its equivalent.
54. Fit washer (76) and tighten the bolt to a torque of 100
- 130 Nm.
55. Manually check the rotation of the pinion.
83
82
75
76
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2001
9G02.23
Preparation for shimming the idler pinion

Parts concerned by shimming (Figs. 24 - 25)
- The pinion (82), the circlips (80), the bearing cones and
cups (77) (78) and spacer (81).
77
78
80
81
Remark
- The clearance of the taper roller bearings is adjusted by
shim(s) (79) placed between the front cone (77) and
spacer (81). (Fig. 24).
77
Reminder
the cover in a vice with the pump pinion (39) protruding
as shown in Figure 25.
78
82
83
80
79
Fig. 24
J1 = 0,03 / 0,13mm
81
39
75
79
76
82
Fig. 25
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.24
Shimming
56. Place the index of the dial gauge on the pinion (82)
(Fig. 25).
57. Push the pinion strongly downwards, alternatively
turning the pinion left and right in order to correctly
seat the cone in the bearing cup.
59. Repeat the operation, this time pulling on the pinion
instead of pushing.
60. Depending on clearance measured, select a thickness of shim(s) in order to provide a clearance of:
J1 = 0.03 to 0.13 mm (Fig. 25)
Remark:
Wherever possible, shim the bearings to the minimum clearance.
61. Fit the definitive shim(s) selected in operation 60.
62. Degrease the threads of bolt (75) and lightly smear
the threads with Loctite 241 or its equivalent.
63. Fit washer (76) and tighten the bolt to a torque of 100
- 130 Nm.
64. Manually check the rotation of the pinion.
Issue 1
May 2001

E . Removing and refitting - Disassembling and reassembling the
pump bearing block
82
9G02.25
- Place the rear wheels in the wide track position.
- Uncouple the tractor between the gearbox and the
- Remove the creeper unit components (if fitted, see
section 6H01).
- Free the ratchet of the Park Lock (if fitted, see section
6F01). Take out the toothed sleeve after carefully noting
its position.
Removal
Fig. 26
65. Immobilise pinions (1) (82) using a bronze drift. Take

out bolts (4) and extract pinion (1) (Fig. 26).
66. Take out plug (8). Using a threaded rod screwed into
the threaded hole in locating pin (7), pull on it so as
to free spacer (5) (Fig. 27).
67. Through the front opening of the intermediate housing, pull on the bearing block to disengage it from the
bore of the housing.
Refitting
68. Check that the hydraulic channels and ports of the
spacer are not obstructed.
69. Refit the bearing block. Carry out operation 67 in
reverse order.
70. Place the groove of the spacer in the axis of the port
provided for the plug (8) (Fig. 27).
71. Fit the locating pin, with the flats lodged in the groove
in the spacer. Tighten the plug.
72. Check that the bearing block assembly is correctly
positioned and that it turns normally.
73. Fit pinion (1). Tighten bolts (4) previously smeared
with Loctite 241 or its equivalent to a torque of 72 96 Nm (Fig. 26).
Issue 1
May 2001

9G02.26
Disassembly
74. Remove the bearing block.
75. Take off circlip (10). Extract bearings (6) and recover
spacer (5) (Fig. 27).
Reassembly
77. Using a press and an appropriate fixture insert
bearings (6), placing spacer (5) between them.
79. Check for the presence of circlip (12) on the upper
shaft of the power take off (Fig. 27).
80. Refit the bearing block and fit the pinion. Tighten the
bolts to the torque shown in operation 73.
Special point
- The union (9) has a calibrated port for the lubrication of
bearings (6).
Final operations
- If fitted, unclamp the ratchet and position the sleeve of
the Park Lock.
Remark
- The long part of the ratchet must face the drive pinion.
- Refit and adjust the creeper unit components (if fitted,
see section 6H01).
- Couple the tractor between the gearbox and the
- Replace the wheels in their initial positions. Tighten
the wheel nuts or studs to the torque shown in section
2G01.
- Check the operation of all the controls.
- Check the oil tightness of the mating faces and
hydraulic unions.
Issue 1
May 2001
9G02.27
9
AA
6
1
10
12
11
A
Fig. 27
Issue 1
May 2001
Hydraulics - Left-hand cover
9H01.1
9 H01 Left-hand cover 110 l/min and

150 l/min Load Sensing
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
B.
Removing and refitting the booster pump _________________
10
C.
Replacing pump seals ___________________________________
11
Issue 1
May 2001
9H01.2
General
The left-hand side cover, fitted on the intermediate

housing, forms the support for the following components:
On its inside face (Figs. 3 - 4)
- the booster pump (2) the capacity of which differs
depending on the hydraulic characteristics as shown in
the table below.
- the suction manifold (4)
12
1
2
Load Sensing hydraulic circuit
Booster pump
Variable displacement
pump (*)
60 cm3/rpm
0 45 cm3/rpm
80 cm3/rpm
0 60 cm3/rpm
(*) see respective sections 9G01 and 9G02
On the outside face

- the 150 micron suction strainer (6) differs through the
size of its filtering surface and depends on the capacity
of the variable displacement pump (96 mm long with
the 60 cm3 pump and 139 mm long with the 80 cm3
version).
Remarks
- The figures given in this section are for the 60 cm3 pump
and its surrounding elements. The construction of the
80 cm3 pump is identical in principle to the former.
- It should be noted however, that the internal pinions as
well as the body of the pump have slightly different
profiles.
Description
Pinion (1) taking its rotation from shaft (2), drives pinion
(12) of the booster pump (Fig. 1). The oil is sucked into
the intermediate housing via the manifold (4). It is then
directed towards the strainer (6) and the booster pump (2)
(Fig. 2) through an internal channel in the cover.
The oil is then discharged towards the variable displacement pump by the booster pipes (3) (54) held by compartment C of the intermediate housing (Fig. 2).
The pipe (55) directs the oil coming from the 5 bar safetyvalve towards the suction manifold (4).
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
9H01.3
A
5
C
4
55
25
2
VS
6
54
17
3
26
25
PCV
26
(25)
(26)
(54)
(55)
A
PCV
VS
C
Oring
Mecanindus pin
Booster pipe
Safety-valve pipe (see section 9G01 or 9G02 depending on hydraulic characteristics)
Suction
To the variable displacement pump (see section 9G01 or 9G02 depending on hydraulic characteristics)
5 bar safety-valve
Fig. 2
Compartment of the intermediate housing
Issue 1
May 2001

9H01.4
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
Nut
Booster pump
Booster pipe
Suction manifold
Oring
Strainer
Studs
Plug
Seal
Bolt
Washer
Pinion
Key
Cover
Nut
Centring pins
Oring
Gasket
Bolt
Bowl
Oring
Bolt
Oring
Locating pins
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
9H01.5
Vue
densemble
Overal
view
17
14
13
12
11
16
17
10
9
8
1
7
15
5
4
18
16
20
24
23
21
19
20
22
18
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 4
Fig. 3
May 2001
9H01.6
Exploded view
16
3
17
2
24
23
12
10
14
9
8
22
24
19
11
13
15
10
6
21
20
18
7
1
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
9H01.7
Identification of channels and ports
12
23
24
Fig. 5
16
16
A : Suction from manifold (4)

B : Strainer (150 microns)
G : Booster supply to the variable displacement pump
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001

9H01.8

Removal
1. Take off the wheel on the side concerned. Position
an axle stand.
2. Partially drain the intermediate housing.
3. Unscrew the bowl (20). Remove the strainer (6) (Fig. 7)
4. Take off nuts (1) and bolts (10) (19) (Fig. 7).
5. Remove the cover (14) and then the suction manifold (4). If necessary, remove the studs (7) (Figs. 4 and
7).
Refitting
Smear the mating face of the housing with Loctite
7. Replace the Oring (17) and position the seal (5) on
the suction manifold (4) (Fig. 3).
8. Refit manifold (4), the end fitted with seal (5) inserted
into compartment C of the intermediate housing
(Fig. 2).
9. Lightly smear the face of the gasket (18) on the
suction manifold (4) with Silicomet type silicone.
Spool the gasket over the studs (7), the adhesive
facing the cover. Screw two diametrically opposed
guide studs G on to the intermediate housing (Fig. 8).
10. Check for the presence of the two centring pins (16)
(Fig. 6).
11. Place a new Oring (25) on the booster pipe (3). Insert
the pipe, its end positioned in the Mecanindus pin
(26) (Fig. 2).
14
19
10
14
20
20
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

12. Spool the cover on to the guide studs G and studs (7)
(Fig. 8). Using a bronze hammer, tap the cover to
engage the pins (16) in the housing.
13. Take out the guide studs G. Fit and alternately and
uniformly tighten the bolts (10) (19) to a torque of 90
- 120 Nm.
Note: In case of any resistance felt while tightening, move the cover away from the housing and
check the position of pipe (3) in the pump port.
Also turn pinion (12).
14. Fit nuts (1) (Fig. 7) smeared with Loctite 241 and
tighten to a torque of 15 - 20 Nm.
15. If necessary, replace Oring (21) on bowl (20). Put
the strainer (6) in place and tighten the bowl.
16. Carry out operations 1 and 2 in reverse order.
17. Check the oil tightness of the mating face of the
cover as well as that of the bowl.
9H01.9
7
G
18
Fig. 8
Tightening torques
-
Nuts (1): 15 - 20 Nm (Loctite 241)

Bolts (10) (19): 90 - 120 Nm
Wheel nuts or studs: see section 2G01
Bowl (20): moderate tightening.
Issue 1
May 2001

9H01.10
B . Removing and refitting the booster pump
24
23
Remark
- The removal and refitting procedures are the same for
a 60 cm3 or 80 cm3 pump.
18. Take off the cover (see A).
Removal
19. Remove bolts (22) and pump (2) (Fig. 3). If necessary, remove pinion (12) from the pump. Recover
key (13).
Refitting
20. Clean the mating faces of the pump and cover.
21. Check for the presence of the locating pins (24) (Fig.
9).
22. Inside the cover, apply a bead C of Loctite 574 or
its equivalent around the bolt holes (Fig. 9). The diameter of the bead should be small in section so as
to not touch the groove of seal (23). Fit a new seal.
23. If disassembled, replace key (23) and refit pinion
(12). Tighten nut (15) to the torque indicated below.
Position the pump on the centring pins.
24. Fit bolts (22) smeared with Loctite 241 or its equivalent and tighten to a torque of 40 - 50 Nm.
25. Manually check the rotation of the pump.
Final operation
26. Refit the cover (see A).
Tightening torques
- Nut (15): 50 - 60 Nm (Loctite 241)
- Bolt (22): 40 - 50 Nm (Loctite 241)
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 9
9H01.11
C . Replacing the pump seals (Fig.

10)
Remark
- Whatever the hydraulic characteristics of the pump, the
operational procedure for the replacement of the seals
remains identical.
27. Remove the left-hand side cover (see A) and the
booster pump (see B).
13
17
5
7
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001

9H01.12
Disassembly
28. Tighten the pump in a vice fitted with plastic jaw
protectors.
29. Remove bolt (1) and cover (7) (Fig. 11).
30. Take off circlip (3), seal (4) (Fig. 12) and Orings (5)
(6) (Fig. 13).
Refitting
31. Lubricate seal (4) and insert it using an appropriate

fixture. Place circlip (3).
32. Lightly smear the Orings (5) (6) with miscible
grease and position them on the cover (7) (Fig. 13).
33. Position the cover (Fig. 14). Fit and tighten bolts (1)
to a torque of 30 - 40 Nm (Fig. 11)
34. Manually check for the free rotation of the pump.
Fig. 11
Final operation
35. Refit the booster pump (see B) and the left-hand
cover (see A).
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 14
Hydraulics - Master cylinders
9I01.1
9 I01 Brake and clutch master cylinders circuit

and bleeding
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Servicing the master cylinders ___________________________
B.
Brake master cylinders __________________________________
C.
Master cylinder and servobrake assembly _________________
10
D.
Adjusting the servobrake rod ____________________________
12
E.
Adjusting the brake pedals ______________________________
12
F.
Clutch master cylinder - Tractor with mechanical

reverse shuttle __________________________________________
13
Adjusting the clutch pedal - Tractor with mechanical

reverse shuttle __________________________________________
14
H.
Bleeding the main brake circuit __________________________
15
I.
Bleeding the trailer braking circuit _______________________
17
J.
Bleeding the clutch control - Tractor with mechanical

reverse shuttle __________________________________________
18
G.
2
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December

9I01.2
Issue 1
December 2000
9I01.3
General
The tank (4) (Fig. 1 - 2) maintains a constant level in the
brake master cylinders through a residual flow of oil
coming from:
- either, the output line of the oil cooler via the thermostatic valve (on tractors with Full Powershift transmission)
- or, the lubrication line (booster) of the right-hand hydraulic cover (on tractors with Heavy Duty transmission).
On the version without trailer braking, the arrangement is

two single circuit master cylinders (Fig. 1)
On the version with trailer braking, the arrangement is
two double circuit master cylinders (Fig. 2) with a valve
incorporated in the priority blocks (see section 9B01) and
a quick-disconnect coupling located at the rear of the
tractor.
On 8200 tractors, the arrangement is completed by
power assistance reducing the effort required on the
brake pedal.
Fig. 1
The servobrakes are supplied from the 17 bar lowpressure circuit (Fig. 3 - 3A or 4 depending on the
version).
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
9I01.4
Characteristics
(1) Accumulator (Fig. 3 - 3A - 4)

- Manufacturer ................................
Olaer
- Type ..............................................
1/20
- Capacity ........................................
1 litre
- Gas ...............................................
Nitrogen
- Inflation pressure ..........................
9 1bar
To be checked every
six months with
the engine stopped
(2) Non-return valve (Fig. 3 - 3A - 4)
- Manufacturer .................................
Parker
Special point
- During refitting, turn the arrow engraved on the
valve body to match the direction of the fluid flow
(3) Main accumulator (Fig. 3 - 3A) for Dynashift integrated into Heavy Duty transmission
Servobrake
1
Fig. 4
Full Powershift transmission

Servobrake
17 bar low pressure

Gas
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
9I01.5
Version with Power Shuttle

Servo-rake
2
3
17 bar low pressure

Gas
Fig. 3A
Clutch master cylinder

- Only tractors fitted with Heavy Duty transmission are
equipped with a clutch master cylinder. It is of the
classical type and supplies the engine clutch valve
(Pressure Loaded) that is fitted on the mechanical
reverse shuttle version (Fig. 3). Its oil level is maintained constant by the flow passing through hose (1)
(Fig. 2).
Issue 1
May 2001
9I01.6
Parts list (Fig. 5 to 7)
(1) Supply from thermostatic valve (Full Powershift

transmission) or right-hand hydraulic cover (Heavy
Duty transmission).
(3) To clutch master cylinder (Heavy Duty transmission)
(4) Supply tank
(5) Return from the tank and bleed connector
(6) Pressure balancing junction
(7) Brake pistons supply
(8) Brake assistance return
(9) Servobrake supply
(10) Bleed screw
(11) Right-hand master cylinder
(12) Left-hand master cylinder
(13) Right-hand servobrake
(14) Left-hand servobrake
(15) Trailer brake junction
(16) Hydraulic link
(17) Trailer brake quick-disconnect coupling
(18) Priority blocks with trailer braking
Heavy Duty transmission with power brakes
11
13
12
14
10
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
9I01.7
Full Powershift transmission with power brakes
11
12
14
13
A
D
10
A : Supply to thermostatic valve from the gearbox

B : To oil cooler
C : To gearbox lubrication
D : Oil cooler return
Fig. 6
Full Powershift transmission with power brakes and trailer braking
11
12
14
13
16
18
17
15
1
D C
A : Supply to thermostatic valve from the gearbox
B : To oil cooler
10
C : To gearbox lubrication
D : Oil cooler return
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
9I01.8
D
B
Fig. 8
4
D
Fig. 8A
16
17
11
10
8
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
9I01.9
A . Servicing the master cylinders

- If disassembly of the master cylinders is necessary,
carefully clean all the parts. Replace any components
found to be scratched or distorted.
- Repair kits for the clutch and brake master cylinders
(tractors with mechanical reverse shuttle only) are
listed in the Spare Parts catalogue.
- After disassembling or replacing the brake master
cylinders, bleed the main brake circuit (see H).
- Check the adjustment of the servobrake rods and the
pedals (see D and E).
- After disassembling or replacing the clutch master
cylinder (tractors with mechanical reverse shuttle only),
bleed the circuit (see J) and adjust the pedal (see G).
B . Brake master cylinders

Unlatched pedals (Fig. 8)
- The force applied to the pedal is transmitted by rod (8)
(Fig. 9) and moves piston (4) along the bore of the active
master cylinder. Valve (1) closes the supply port, the
balancing valve (3) opens by way of piston (4) and ball
(2) and the oil is directed under pressure towards the
main brake ports C and the pressure balancing junction
D.
- Through the balancing junction, the pressure closes
valve (3) of the passive master cylinder.
Latched pedals (Fig. 8)

Braking and pressure balancing
- The force applied to the pedals is transmitted by the
rods (8) (Fig. 9) and moves the pistons (4) along the
bores of both master cylinders. Both valves (1) close
the supply ports, the two balancing valves (3) open by
way of pistons (4) and balls (2).
- The balancing of pressure is carried out in both master
cylinders via balancing junction D.
- The oil under pressure is directed towards ports C and
C of the main brake circuit.
2
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December

9I01.10
C . Master cylinder and servobrake

assembly
Description
- The servobrake is located between the brake pedal and
the master cylinder. It is fitted at the rear of the master
cylinder and uses pressure from the 17 bar circuit to
power assist the master cylinder piston.
Identifying ports and ports on master

cylinders (Figs. 8 8A)
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F :
Control of the trailer braking arrangement

Supply of brake master cylinders from tank
To main brake
Trailer brake pressure chamber
Trailer brake valve
Identifying ports and channels on the

servobrake (Fig. 9)
A : 17 bar supply
E : To housing return
T : Piston chamber (10)
1 . Functioning of the servobrake (Fig. 9)

Rest position
- Piston (10) is pushed to the right by the action of spring
(16).
- 17 bar pressure enters port A until it reaches groove (2)
where it is stopped by spool (6). The chamber T is
linked to the return E via hole (9), the central channel (5)
and open port (1).
Operating position
- When pressing the brake pedal, a force is applied to
spool (6) via piston (7) and rod (8). The spool (6) is
pushed to the left and closes the link to the tank via
supply port (1). Hole (3) is placed in communication
with groove (2). The oil under pressure arrives in the
supply slot at the rear of the piston (10) via channel (5)
and hole (9) and enters in front of the piston until an
equilibrium is obtained between the resistance of the
master cylinder, via thrust-rod (17) and the force
applied to piston (10).
Issue 1
December 2000
- Pressure acting on the face of the piston (7) produces

a reaction force due to the effort of the push rod (8). This
equilibrium gives a waiting position for which the
slightest change in force at the pedal turns into an
increase or decrease in pressure until the equilibrium is
newly restored. The machine's amplification factor is
the ratio of surfaces of pistons (7) (10) 1/4-4.
Maximum braking position
- In this position, the groove (2) and hole (3) are entirely
in communication. The spool (6) is thrust up against the
pad (11), and total possible pressure (17 bar) is applied
to the rear of the piston (10), and maximum assistance
force is obtained. The amplifier thus reaches saturation
and an increase in force on the master cylinder is not
possible except by pressing the pedal harder.
Servicing
- The servobrake does not require servicing. Any defective assemblies should be completely replaced.
9I01.11
2 . Functioning of the master cylinders

with trailer braking
Unlatched pedals (Fig. 8A)
Tractor braking and balancing
- The force applied on a pedal and transmitted by rod (17)
(Fig. 9), via the servobrake, moves piston (4) along the
bore of the active cylinder. Valve (1) closes the supply
port, the balancing valve (3) then opens and oil under
pressure is directed towards ports C and D. Through
port D, the pressure closes valve (3) on the passive
master cylinder.
Trailer braking
- The action on piston (4) also produces a movement of
piston (6) and the closing of valve F. The oil contained
in chamber E is directed to chamber E of the passive
master cylinder and towards port B via the intermediary of the open valve F. The valve F and piston (6)
assembly rapidly abuts against the bottom of the
active master cylinder.
- In this position, only the tractor brake is activated, the
trailer is not braked.
Latched pedals (Fig. 8A)

Braking and pressure balancing
- The force applied to both pedals and transmitted by
rods (17) (Fig. 9) through the intermediary of the servo,
moves pistons (4) along the bores of the two master
cylinders. The beginning of the travel of each piston,
while displacing a certain volume of oil, closes the two
F valves. The simultaneous movement of pistons (4)
opens the balancing valves (3) and stops them from
closing again. A balancing of pressures is carried out
in the two master cylinders by way of the communicating pipe screwed into port D. The oil under pressure is
also directed to tractor braking port C.
Trailer braking
- The continued action of pistons (4) (6) closes valves F
and F. Chambers E and E which are pressurised,
supply the trailer braking valve via ports A and A.
- In the case of an incident involving the tractors braking
circuit, the trailer will remain braked even though the
tractor is not.
- In the case of a failure of the trailer braking valve or its
channels, the tractor will remain braked.
Note: In versions without trailer braking, the master cylinder does not have port A, valve F or piston
(6) (Fig. 8)
Issue 1
May 2001

9I01.12
D . Adjusting the servobrake rod

(Fig. 10)
J = 0,5 +- 0,25
1. Measure the position of master cylinder piston (4) in

relation to the flange, dimension A.
Important: When measuring this dimension do not
compress spring (5) (Figs. 8 8A).
2. Smear the threads of the push rod nut with Loctite
542.
3. Place the push rod in position in the brake assistance
servo.
4. Measure the position of the end of the push rod (17)
in relation to the flange of the servobrake, dimension
B.
Important: When measuring the dimension take
care not to compress spring (16) on piston (10).
5. Correct the length of the push rod so as to obtain a
clearance of J = 0.5 0.25 mm between push rod
(17) and piston (4) on the assembly of the master
cylinder and servobrake.
6. Proceed in the same manner for the second
servobrake.
16
10
A
17
Fig. 10
5
8
1
E . Adjusting the brake pedals (Fig.

11)
7. If disassembled, smear the pins (5) (6) with molybdenum bisulphide grease.
8. Smear the threads of yoke (1) with Loctite 542 and
screw it onto rod (8).
9. Fit the return spring (3).
10. Adjust yoke (1) by turning rod (8) so as to obtain the
dimension Y between support (4) and the centre of
pin (6) in the yoke.
Y = 113 0.5 mm without servobrake
Y = 139 0.5 mm with servobrake
11. Proceed in the same way with the second yoke.
Press each pedal ensuring that it goes through its full
travel.
Check that the pedals return freely to their initial
position.
12. Check that the pedal latch functions normally without any hard points.
Issue 1
May 2001
4
Y
Fig. 11
9I01.13
F . Clutch master cylinder - Tractor

with mechanical reverse shuttle
Reminder
- Fitted only on Heavy Duty gearboxes with mechanical
reverse shuttle, see the General section.
Functioning (Fig. 12)

- Force F applied via the pedal moves piston (1) along the
bore of the master cylinder. The oil coming from port A
is directed under pressure to port B and the supply
channel of the clutch control valve.
1
A
B
(1)
(2)
Supply from hose pipe (1) (Fig. 2)

Supply to the clutch valve
Piston
Master cylinder
Fig. 12
Issue 12
Issue
May 2000
2002
December

9I01.14
G . Adjusting the clutch pedal - Tractor with mechanical reverse shuttle
Remark
- If a pedal had to be replaced, during refitting smear the

pins (7) (8) with molybdenum bisulphide grease (Fig. 13).
Adjustment
13. Adjust the push rod (3) so as to obtain a movement

of the piston (1) (Fig. 12) of 18.5 mm 0.25 mm.
Method (Fig. 13)

- Unscrew the stop (6) in order to remove any possible
constraint. Measure dimension C between the master
cylinder support and the yoke pin, with the pedal in the
clutch engaged position.
- Proceed in the same way, the pedal in contact with stop
(2) (declutched position).
- Calculate the movement of the piston, this is equal to
the difference between the two measurements.
14. After adjustment of the push rod, tighten lock nut (4)
to a torque of 15 - 20 Nm (Fig. 13). Adjust stop nut (6)
to obtain a clearance of 0.5 to 1 mm between it and
the clutch pedal (Fig. 13). Tighten lock nut (5).
Check that the pedal operates normally.
Special point
- Tractors equipped with Full Powershift transmission
are fitted with a pedal known as a manoeuvring pedal.
To adjust it, see section 11 - Electronics.
Issue 2
1
May 2000
2002
December
C
Fig. 13
9I01.15
H . Bleeding the main brake circuit

15. Link the connector (1) of the booster circuit and bleed
connector (2) using hose (3) (Fig. 14) fitted with
female diagnostic connectors, ref. 3582045M1.
16. Connect transparent tubes to both the left and right
bleed screws (1) of the centre housing (Fig. 15).
17. Plunge the ends of the two tubes into a container
partially filled with clean transmission oil.
18. Pinch the return hose (5) (Fig. 14) closed using a clip
fitted with suitable jaw protection.
Remark
- Some hose pipes may be difficult to pinch shut due to
their rigid sheath. Consequently, it will be necessary to
disconnect the hose pipe from union (2) and temporarily
replace it with a plug.
110 l/min
1
150 l/min
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2001

9I01.16
Bleeding procedure
19. Run the engine at approximately 1300 rpm.
20. Open the bleed screws by one turn and wait 5 minutes
Latched pedals
- Press and slowly release the latched brake pedal eight
times over its full travel, until the oil that is released
contains no air bubbles.
Unlatched pedals
- Press and slowly release each unlatched brake pedals
eight times over their full travel, until the oil that is
released contains no air bubbles.
- First close the left bleed screw, then the right-hand one.
- Press hard (60 - 80 kg approximately) on each pedal in
order to position the brake pistons. Check the hardness
and the force required on each pedal. The travel of the
latched pedals must be less than 120 mm using the
previously stated force.
- Stop the engine.
- Remove the hose and unions (3) assembly (Fig. 16) and
the clip fitted to hose (5), see remark in operation 18.
Fig. 15
Special point
- If any functional problem appears, carry out the bleeding operation again.
- If the problem persists, check the oil tightness of:
. the circuit
. the master cylinders
. the piston seals.
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2001

I . Bleeding the trailer braking circuit
Note: If the tractor is fitted with trailer braking, it is
strongly recommended that the main brake and
trailer brake are bled simultaneously.
To carry out this bleeding, use the same equipment
and method as described in H for the bleeding of
the main brake circuit.
9I01.17
110 l/min
1
Special point
- Open the three bleed screws (main brake (1) (Fig. 15),
trailer brake (1) (Fig. 17 or 19)).
- When the bleeding has been completed, tighten the
bleed screws in the following order: left bleed screw,
right bleed screw and trailer brake bleed screw.
- Check the pressure of trailer braking system (see
section 9N01 - Hydraulic Tests) at the quick-disconnect
(17) (Fig. 18) at the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 17
17
Fig. 18
150 l/min
Fig. 19
Issue 1
December 2000

9I01.18
J . Bleeding the clutch control - Tractor with mechanical reverse shuttle
Heavy Duty transmission (mechanical reverse shuttle only)

22. Using jaw protection, pinch closed the return hose
(5) (Fig. 14).
Remark
- Certain hose pipes may be difficult to pinch shut
due to their rigid sheath. Consequently, it will be
necessary to disconnect the hose from union (2)
and temporarily replace it with a plug.
23. Slightly unscrew the union (output to control valve)
at the end of the master cylinder so as to expel air
from the master cylinder and pipe. Tighten the union
again.
24. Connect a transparent tube to bleed screw (2) as
shown in Fig. 20.
25. Slightly unscrew the bleed screw and slowly press
the clutch pedal through its full travel. Repeat the
operation several times until the oil flows without
any air bubbles. Close the bleed screw.
26. If necessary, check the adjustment of the clutch
pedal (see G).
27. Carry out a road test of the clutch.
Issue 2
1
May 2000
2002
December
Fig. 20
9I02.1
9 I02 Brake and clutch master cylinders circuit and

bleeding
CONTENTS
General ________________________________________________
A.
Servicing the master cylinders and FTE valve _____________
B.
Brake master cylinders __________________________________
C.
FTE valve _______________________________________________
D.
Adjusting the brake pedals ______________________________
10
E.
Bleeding the main brake circuit __________________________
11
Issue 1
May 2002

9I02.2
General
The MT645 to MT665 tractors are equipped, in their
standard version, with Meritor brake master cylinders (1)
(Fig. 1 - 2) and provide hydraulic power assistance.
The MT535 model may be fitted with the Meritor master
cylinders as an option.
On the version with trailer braking, the system is completed by a FTE valve (2) (Fig. 2) providing control of the
trailer brake valve. The latter is incorporated into the
priority blocks (see section 9B01) and a quick-disconnect coupling located at the rear of the tractor.
The master cylinders are supplied by the 17 bar lowpressure circuit.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002
9I02.3
Characteristics
(1) Accumulator (Fig. 3 - 3A - 4)
- Manufacturer ................................
Olaer
- Type ..............................................
1/20
- Capacity ........................................
1 litre
- Gas ...............................................
Nitrogen
- Inflation pressure ..........................
9 1bar
To be checked every
six months with
the engine stopped
(2) Non-return valve (Fig. 3 - 3A - 4)
- Manufacturer .................................
Parker
Special point
- During refitting, turn the arrow engraved on the
valve body to match the direction of the fluid flow
(3) Main accumulator (Fig. 3 - 3A) for Dynashift integrated into Heavy Duty transmission
(4) Brake hydraulic power assistance
4
1
Fig. 4
8200- Version with power shuttle
2
3
17 bar low pressure

Gas
Fig.
Issue 1
May 2002
9I02.4
Parts list (Figs. 5 to 7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Master cylinder
FTE valve
Brake power assistance return and bleed connector
Brake pistons supply
Brake power assistance supply
Hydraulic link
Trailer brake quick-disconnect coupling
Priority blocks with trailer brake
Bleed screw
Heavy Duty transmission
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002
9I02.5
Fig. 6
Full Powershift transmission and trailer braking
12
13
9
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2002

9I02.6
A . Servicing the master cylinders

and FTE valve
Important
- All problems concerning the master cylinders as
well as the FTE valve (oil tightness, seizure, etc.)
require systematic replacement of the entire component.
- After replacement of the brake master cylinders, bleed
the brake circuit (see E).
- Check the adjustment of the servo-brake rods and the
brake pedals (see D).
- The master cylinder assembly requires no maintenance.
B . Brake master cylinders

Operation
The force applied to the brake pedal is transmitted by rod
(2) and moves the spool (3) in the bore of piston (4).
The 17 bar oil under pressure arriving through port A is
thus applied to the surface of piston (4) through passage
into chamber B via the groove (12) and ports (10). This
causes the piston (4) to compress the oil (present within
the master cylinder (8)), forcing it towards brake D or the
FTE valve (when fitted).
The bolt (7) guides piston (4) along its movement axis.
Note: Under no circumstances should this bolt be
removed.
When the brake pedal is released, the spool (3) tends to
restore its initial position. The oil under pressure thus no
longer reaches piston (4) and it therefore likewise resumes
its resting position.
The valve (6) allows the pressure between master
cylinder (8) and the tank (5) to be balanced only once the
piston has returned.
The port (9) allows oil to pass in order to maintain a
constant level in the master cylinder.
Issue 1
May 2002
The oil under pressure (17 bar) present in chamber B also

tends to fill reserve (5) by passing through the bore (11).
Port C removes any excess oil and directs it to the tank.
Note: Under no circumstances should the master

cylinder be disassembled; if it is defective it must be
completely replaced.
Parts list (Fig. 8)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
A:
B:
C:
D:
Master cylinder assembly

Rod
Spool
Piston
Braking circuit reserve supply
Piston guide bolt
Master cylinder capacity
Port
Port
Bore
Groove
Ball plug
17 bar constant supply

Chamber in piston (4)
Return to housing
To main brake or FTE valve (if fitted)
9I02.7
D
2
1
7
9
D
11
12
10
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 8
May 2002
9I02.8
C.
Parts list (Fig. 9)
FTE valve (Fig. 9)
The FTE valve is only present on tractors fitted with a

trailer braking valve. It provides a logical AND function,
i.e., it allows the passage of oil to the braking valve only
when both brake pedals are activated at the same time.
If only one brake pedal is depressed, the trailer braking
valve is not activated.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Spool
Ball
Plunger
Spring
To trailer braking valve

From right-hand master cylinder
From left-hand master cylinder
To right-hand tractor brake
To left-hand tractor brake
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2002
9I02.9
Unlatched pedals (Fig. 10)

- When force is applied to a single brake pedal, the oil
under pressure coming from the master cylinder B
moves spool (1) and forces the ball (2) onto the spool
to close off the link between D and A. Because of this,
there is only one direction possible for the oil, from B
towards D.
Latched pedals (Fig. 11)

- When force is applied to both pedals simultaneously,
the spools (1) are thrust against each other and compress spring (4). The plunger (3) then forces the balls (2)
apart lifting them from their seats in the spool. Because
of this, all the ports are then in direct communication,
i.e., there is a braking pressure supplied to tractor
brakes D and E and to the braking valve A.
Fig. 10
Note: Under no circumstances should this valve be

disassembled, it must be systematically replaced.
C
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002

9I02.10
D . Adjusting the brake pedals (Fig.

12)
1. If disassembled, lightly smear the pins (5) and (6) with
molybdenum disulphide grease.
2. Lightly smear the threads of yoke (1) with Loctite 542
and screw it onto rod (8).
3. Fit the return spring (3).
4. Adjust yoke (1) by turning rod (8) so as to obtain during
the maximum pedal travel (top stop to bottom stop) a
movement of rod (8) of 30 to 31 mm. This corresponds
to a dimension Y, between bracket (4) and yoke pivot
pin (6):
Y = 132 mm.
5. Proceed in the same way with the second yoke.
Press each pedal ensuring that it goes through its full
travel.
Check that the pedals return freely to their initial
position.
6. Check that the pedal latch functions normally without
any hard points.
Issue 1
May 2002
5
8
1
4
Y
Fig. 12
9I02.11
E . Bleeding the main brake circuit

7. Link the connector (1) of the booster circuit (5 bar)
and bleed connector (2) using hose (3) (Fig. 13) fitted
with female diagnostic connectors, part reference
3582045M1.
8. Connect transparent tubes to both the left and right
bleed screws (1) of the centre housing (Fig. 14) as
well as to the trailer braking valve (if fitted) (Fig. 16
or 18).
Note: The location of the bleeds may differ
slightly on different models.
9. Plunge the ends of the two tubes into a container
partially filled with clean transmission oil.
10. Pinch the return hose (5) (Fig. 13) closed using a clip
fitted with suitable jaw protection.
Remark
- Some hose pipes may be difficult to pinch shut due to
their rigid sheath. Consequently, it will be necessary to
disconnect the hose pipe from union (2) and temporarily
replace it with a plug.
110 l/min
1
150 l/min
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2002

9I02.12
Bleeding procedure
12. Open the three bleed screws by single turn:
- right-hand brake
- left-hand brake
- trailer braking valve (if fitted)
13. Slowly depress the brake pedals several times
14. Continue until bubble free oil is discharged from both
the left- and right-hand bleeds.
15. With the brake pedals fully released, close the leftand right- hand brake bleeds.
16. If trailer braking is fitted, slowly depress the brake
pedals several times until bubble free oil is discharged from the trailer braking valve bleed.
17. With the brake pedals fully released, close the trailer
braking valve bleed.
18. Remove the clip from the booster return hose.
19. Remove the 5 bar pressure connector.
20. The bleeding procedure is now completed.
Fig. 15
110 l/min
1
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2002
9I02.13
Special points
- If a there is a problem when operating the brakes, carry
out the bleed sequence a second time.
- If the problem still persists:
. check the oil tightness of the circuit and the unions
. check the trailer braking pressure (see section 9L01
or 9L02) on the quick-disconnect coupling (17) (Fig.
17) at the rear of the tractor.
17
Fig. 17
150 l/min
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2002
Hydraulics - Heavy Duty transmission circuit
9J01.1
9 J01 Clutch control valve
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Operating phases of the clutch valve _____________________
B.
Disassembling and reassembling the valve ________________
C.
Service tools ___________________________________________
11
Issue 1
December 2000

9J01.2
General
On 8210 - 8220 - 8240 and 8250 tractors fitted with a
Heavy Duty gearbox, with a mechanical reverse shuttle,
the distribution block (1) (Fig. 1) mounted on the front
right-hand side of the gearbox is formed of two distinct
parts that ensure the control of the clutch and the four
Dynashift ratios.
- The clutch part comprises a series of spools, seals,
a valve and piston. These can be replaced by a kit (Fig.
10) that is found in the Spare Parts catalogue.
- The Dynashift part (see section 9L01).
Role of the control valve

Fitted in the 17 bar circuit, this valve provides the
following functions:
- 17 bar supply to the clutch when the clutch pedal is
released (clutch engaged position).
- modulation of the clutch engagement pressure: 0 to 11
bar (see section 9N01 - Hydraulic Tests).
- starting safety when the tractor is started using external
assistance. To activate the clutch it is necessary to
press the clutch pedal once.
- low pressure starting safety. The clutch disengages
automatically if the pressure drops below 3 bar.
- the ports O (Fig. 2) allow leaks to return to the housing.
Issue
Issue 21
May 2002
December
2000
9J01.3
17 bar low pressure

Gas
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Distribution block
17 bar supply
Accumulator on 17 bar line
Master cylinder hose pipe
Clutch supply pipe
Clutch diagnostics connector
Dynashift front piston diagnostics connector
Dynashift rear piston diagnostics connector
Accumulator for brake assistance
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

9J01.4
Description
- The valve comprises two spools. The upper spool is
controlled by pressure from the clutch master cylinder
and controls the clutch supply.
- The lower spool, controlled by the inlet pressure,
provides hydraulic safety for the system.
A . Operating phases of the clutch

valve
Neutral position, engine running (Fig. 2)
- If the tractor is started without pressing the clutch
pedal, the pressure rises to 17 bar but all the suction
ports are closed and the clutch is not supplied.
Disengagement before switching the safetyvalve (Fig. 3)

- The main spool (5) is pushed to the rear and compresses spring (2) under the effect of piston (19) that is
controlled by the master cylinder. The pressure coming
from the 17 bar circuit passes via the shoulder of the
main spool (5) and begins to act on the front face of
spool (4), the clutch is then linked to the return.
Issue 1
May 2001
9J01.5
P = 17 bar
R = Return
E = Clutch
Fig. 2
P = 17 bar
R = Return
E = Clutch
19
4
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001

9J01.6
P = 17 bar
R = Return
E = Clutch
5
4
Fig. 4
P = 17 bar
R = Return
E = Clutch
16
Fig. 5
P = 17 bar
R = Return
E = Clutch
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001
9J01.7
Clutch disengagement, switching the safetyvalve (Fig. 4)

- The spool (4) moves to the rear when the pressure is
greater than 12 bar. During full opening, spool (4) allows
communication with the front of the main spool (5).
Clutch engagement, modulation phase (Fig.

5)
- When the pedal is released, the pressure supplying the
clutch is modulated by the position of the main spool
(5).
This position is regulated:
. at the rear by the 17 bar pressure and spring (2)
. at the front by the clutch pressure and spring (16)
- When the pedal is slightly released, the spring tension
(2) diminishes. The main spool (5) moves forward and
places the 17 bar line in communication with the clutch.
- The pressure in the clutch increases and this pushes
the spool to the rear to find its equilibrium position.
- From this intermediate position, when the pedal is

slightly pressed, the force acting on spring (2) is
increased. The spool moves rearwards opening the
communication between the clutch and the return.
- The pressure in the clutch diminishes and the spool
moves forward to find its equilibrium position.
- The modulation begins after having pressed the pedal
approximately 32 mm. The declutched position is reached 25 mm before the farthest pedal position is reached.
Clutch fully engaged (Fig. 6)

- When the pedal is completely released, spring (2)
pushes spool (5) forwards and causes the full opening
of the 17 bar circuit to the clutch.
Issue 1
May 2001
9J01.8
Overall view
13
14
15
18
16
19
20
21
11
17
18
10
22
11
10
9
4
6
12
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
Plug
Spring
Non-return valve
Safety-valve spool
Main spool
Safety-valve sleeve
Valve body
Main spool sleeve
Plugs
Oring
Circlip
Spring
Push rod
Circlip
Spring
Modulation spring
Seal quadring
Guide segments
Piston
Calibrated union
Modulation limit stop
Main spool limit stop
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
9J01.9
Exploded view
8
3
22
20
13
16
21
18
12
17
18
11
10
15
9
14
10
11
19
Fig. 8

the valve (Fig. 10)
- To remove the valve, see section 4A01.
Disassembly
1. Using a locally manufactured tool, C, remove circlip
(11) and take out plug (9) (Fig. 9) from the A assembly.
Using the same method for the B assembly. Remove
the A and B assemblies while visually noting their
positions.
2. Unscrew plug (1) and remove the C assembly as in
the previous operation.
11
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
9J01.10
Reassembly
Tightening torques (Fig. 10)
3. Check and clean the parts. Replace any components

found to be scratched or distorted. Check that valve
(4) and spool (5) spool freely in the sleeves (6) (8).
Before reassembly, lubricate the seals with transmission oil.
4. Replace orings (10) and the assemblies A, B and C
using repair kits. Fit circlips (11).
Note: Before fitting the piston of assembly A,
bend guide segments (18) in a circular manner and
lightly smear them with miscible grease so as to
correctly position them in the grooves of the
piston, the knurled faces turned towards the
valve body.
Remark
- Union (20) is fitted with a calibrated port.
- Plug (1) smeared with Loctite 542: 50 Nm.

- Non-return valve (3): 28 - 30 Nm.
Final operations
5. Refit and bleed the clutch control valve (see sections
4A01 and 9I01 respectively).
6. Check the modulation pressure of the valve (see
section 9N01 - Hydraulic Tests).
A
20
11
11
10
7
18
8
10
5
B
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 10
9J01.11
C . Service tools
Tool to be manufactured locally
- Spring compression tool
100
HM8
35
17
M8
45
60
75
100
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2001
Hydraulics - Power Shuttle

control unit
9K01.1
9 K01 Power Shuttle control unit
CONTENTS
.
General ________________________________________________
A.
Designation of pipes and components ____________________
B.
Removing and refitting the control unit ___________________
C.
Location of ports and identifying proportional

solenoid valves _________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2002

9K01.2

control unit
General
The control unit is fixed on the right-hand side at the front
of the gearbox. Its role is to supply:
- the power shuttle proportional solenoid valves with oil
- the Dynashift (see section 5B04).
A filter element (6) (Fig. 1) is located underneath the righthand hydraulic cover, upstream of the control unit, to
provide additional filtering of oil going to the proportional
solenoid valves.
A . Designation of pipes and components (Fig. 1)

(1)
(2)
(2A)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(12)
Control unit
17 bar line - Front clutch
17 bar line - Rear clutch
Accumulator (Nitrogen)
Main supply line (17 bar)
60 micron filter element
17 bar line - Dynashift to clutch A - B
17 bar line - Dynashift to clutch C - D
Cover for separate return to gearbox for oil coming
from pipes (2) (2A)
Issue 1
May 2002

control unit
9K01.3
2A
12
F
7
17 bar low pressure
2A
Gas
Issue 1
Fig. 1
May 2002

9K01.4

control unit
B . Removing and refitting the control

unit (1) (Fig.1)
- Drain the oil from the gearbox.
Removal
Danger
- If you work on the 17 bar hydraulic circuit immediately
after stopping the engine, release the pressure stored in
the accumulator or wait a while before working on the
circuit.
1. Mark and disconnect the connectors on EV1 and EV2
solenoid valves of the Dynashift (see section 9L01) as
well as those of the proportional solenoid valves of the
front and rear clutch of the power shuttle (Fig. 2).
2. Disconnect and remove pipes (2) (2A) (4) connected
respectively to the gearbox and accumulator.
3. Remove the solenoid from the solenoid valve of the
Dynashift rear clutch. Unscrew, release and take off
cover (12) and the control unit. Discard the Oring (13)
(Fig. 2).
4. If necessary, empty the internal pipes supplying the
A - B - and C - D clutches of the Dynashift.
Remark:
- The lower pipe has a swan neck.
Refitting
5. Remove all traces of Loctite from the mating surfaces
of the unit and gearbox housing.
6. If removed, position the internal pipes of the Dynashift
clutches in the ports of the input unit.
7. On the unit, replace the Orings of the previously
mentioned pipes.
8. Lightly smear the mating surface of the unit that
mates with the housing with Loctite 510 or equivalent.
9. Turn the internal pipes of the Dynashift in such a way
that they correctly penetrate the ports of the unit. Refit
the unit.
Issue 1
May 2002
10. Tighten the bolts holding the unit to the gearbox to a

torque of 42 - 46 Nm, having previously smeared the
threads with Loctite 542.
Note: The cover (12) is positioned on the hydraulic unit by the two Mecanindus pins G(Fig. 2).
The oil tightness is ensured by:
- application of Loctite 510 or equivalent on the
surface in contact with the unit
- an Oring (13) fitted between the gearbox housing and the cover.
11. Reconnect the pipes and electrical connectors that
were marked during removal.
Special points
If the control unit or proportional solenoid valves had
to be replaced, carry out hydraulic tests (see section
9N01) in order to check:
- the 17 bar pressure of the hydraulic unit
- the front and rear clutch pressures of the power
shuttle
- the pressure in the A - B and C - D clutches of the
Dynashift.
Then, calibrate the front and rear clutches of the
power shuttle (see Electronics section, chapter 11).
12. Carry out a road test of all hydraulic functions.
13. Check the oil tightness of hydraulic unions.

control unit
9K01.5
12
13
12
F
F1
F
2
Loctite 510
F1
F2
8
11
10
F2
10
11
10
11
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002

9K01.6

control unit
C . Location of ports and identifying

proportional solenoid valves
10
11
Location of ports (Fig. 2)

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(12)
(13)
Return to rear clutch housing

Outlet to front clutch
Outlet to rear clutch
17 bar supply
Front clutch pressure connector
Rear clutch pressure connector
Return to front clutch housing
17 bar low pressure pressure connector
Cover
Oring
Remark
- Each hydraulic return line from the proportional solenoid
valves is channeled separately, this is done so as to
avoid back pressure between one solenoid valve and
another.
Identification of the proportional solenoid

valves (Fig. 2 - 3)
(10) Rear clutch solenoid valve
(11) Front clutch solenoid valve
Hydraulic part (Fig. 3)
A : Supply ports to front clutch or rear clutch depending
on solenoid valve concerned.
B : Return ports from front clutch or rear clutch depending on solenoid valve concerned.
P : 17 bar low pressure.
Electrical part (Fig. 3)

C : Connector connection.
Tightening torques
- Body of solenoid valves: 15 to 20 Nm maximum
- Nut on solenoids: 5.4 to 8.1 Nm maximum.
Important: It is imperative to respect the indicated
tightening torques in order to avoid any risk of
deforming the valves and leading to the blocking of
the spool.
Issue 1
May 2002
F
Fig. 3
Hydraulic - All circuits
9K02.1
9K02 Hydraulic control unit - Suspended

front axle
CONTENTS
A.
Technical Features __________________________________
B.
Description of the hydraulic circuit __________________
C.
Disassembly / Assembly of the hydraulic control

unit _______________________________________________
Disassembly / Assembly of the steering cylinder ______
D.
Issue 1
Mai 2002

9K02.2
A. Technical Features
DESCRIPTION
Nominal pressure
Hydraulic oil type
Ambient temperature
VALUES
250 bar
DIN 51524
Min -30 C
Max +90 C
Min -30 C
Max +70 C
M18x1.5 (ISO6149-1)
M14x1.5 (ISO6149-1)
NAS 1638 class 10
Temperature of hydraulic oil

Hydraulic connections type ports: P, T, A, B
Hydraulic connections type port LS
FILTRATION: maximum permissible
contamination level of the operating fluid
Tightening torque of valves
Tightening torque of accumulators
Nominal voltage
25 Nm
200 Nm
12 V DC

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
LS pilot flow
Accumulator KSP1
Accumulator KSP2
Accumulator RSP1
Bleed screw
Solenoid valve WV1
Solenoid valve WV2
Return line
Supply from the pump
Top cylinder supply
Bottom cylinder supply
2
4
Fig. 1
Accumulators pressure and capacity

AXLE TYPE
RSP 1
KSP 1
KSP 2
20.19
0,75 litres
140 bar
1,4 litres
40 bar
0,75 litres
40 bar
20.22
0,75 litres
140 bar
1,4 litres
40 bar
0,75 litres
40 bar
20.29
0,75 litres
140 bar
1,4 litres
40 bar
1,4 litres
40 bar
20.43
0,75 litres
140 bar
1,4 litres
40 bar
1,4 litres
40 bar
Issue 1
Mai 2002
9K02.3
Overall dimensions of the hydraulic control unit
10
3
11
6
9
5
Fig. 2
Issue 1
Mai 2002
9K02.4
Neutral position
B . Description of the hydraulic circuit

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(11)
(12)
(14)
- In low position, chamber A of the cylinder is empty.

The suspension is in contact with two mechanical stops
on the centre beam.
- In high position (fig. 3), the cylinder is maintained in
equilibrium by the accumulators.
- If the pressure in the cylinder is too high (impact on the
front axle), the pressure limiter (12) opens and excess
pressure is directed towards the return line.
- If the cylinder position has changed, the position sensor value has also changed. If after 3 seconds the sensor value does not correspond to the calibrated value,
the calculator feeds the appropriate solenoid valves so
as to make these two values identical.
Front axle suspension cylinder

Accumulator KSP1
Accumulator KSP2
Accumulator RSP1
Bleed screw
Solenoid valve WV1
Solenoid valve WV2
Suspended front axle
Motor-operated check valve
250 + 20 bar pressure limiter
High pressure inlet
D
C
E
5
12
11
6
250 + 20
bar
14
Fig. 3
Issue 1
Mai 2002
9K02.5
Raising position (Fig. 3A)

- During the raising phase, solenoid valves WV1 (6) and
WV2 (7) are activated.
- Solenoid valve WV1 sends the oil to the accumulators
(2) (3) and the chamber A of the cylinder.
- When pressure in chamber B reaches 250 bars, oil
returns to the tank through channel C. Channel D also
feeds the accumulator (4).
- Solenoid valve WV2 gives priority to the suspended
front axle in the pilot line F.
A
B
D
E
C
5
12
11
6
250 + 20
bar
14
Fig. 3A
Issue 1
Mai 2002
9K02.6
Lowering position (Fig. 3B)
- During the lowering phase, only the solenoid valve WV2

(7) is fed.
- Oil feeds chamber B of the cylinder through channel E.
The pressure created in the pilot line F gives priority to
the suspended front axle.
- The pressure in the pilot line F also allows the opening
of the check valve (11) so that oil in chamber A returns
to the tank through channel G.
1
2
A
B
D
E
C
5
11
12
250 + 20
bar
14
Fig. 3B
Issue 1
Mai 2002
9K02.7
C . Disassembly / Assembly of the

hydraulic control unit
The disassembly instructions presume that the unit has
been removed from the vehicle and positioned on a
suitable workbench.
your control unit, but the process is the same.
Disassembly of the hydraulic control unit

Important
AV
- Before operate on control unit, open the AV drain

valve, loosening it gradually, to release possible
internal pressure and discharge the accumulators
completely (Fig. 4).
Fig. 4
1. Disassemble the accumulators unloosing them with

suitable wrenches (Fig. 5).
Remove the seal rings.
Note : the accumulators have different capacity,
take a note of the assembly position.
2. Unscrew the valve fastening ring nuts A.
Remove the solenoids B from all the group valves.
Remove the valves C unscrewing them with a wrench
and collect all its components.
Check the components conditions in order to identify
those ones who must be replaced.
Fig. 5
B
C
Fig. 6
Issue 1
Mai 2002

9K02.8
Assembly of the hydraulic control unit

3. Assemble all the components on the valves C.
Insert the solenoid valves in the control unit and screw
them at a torque of 25 Nm
Assemble the solenoids B on the valves locking them
with the relative retaining ring nuts A tightened with
hand (Fig. 7).
4. Install new seal rings on the accumulators connections.
Screw the accumulators at a torque of 25 Nm (Fig.
8)
Note: The accumulators have different capacity,
respect the correct assembly position.
B
C
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Issue 1
Mai 2002
9K02.9
D . Disassembly / Assembly of the

steering cylinder
Disassembly of the steering cylinder
5. Unloose the guide rod locknut of some turns till it is on
a level with the threaded pin.
6. Beat on the nut with a hammer in order to disjoin the
guide rod from the swivel housing (Fig. 10).
Note: this is a destructive operation for the nut.
7. Remove the guide rod link A by unloosing the tie nut
B with a suitable wrench, then check its conditions.
Unscrew the fastening screws C of the cylinder, then
take the cylinder D out of its housing and, if necessary,
use a rubber hammer (Fig. 11).
Remove only that parts that need to be overhauled
and/or replaced.
8. Detach the cylinder head E from the cylinder case G.
Remove off the cylinder head and the rod F from the
cylinder case.
Remove all the sealings and O-Rings, both from the
cylinder head and the rod (Fig. 12).
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
E
A
B
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
Issue 1
Mai 2002

9K02.10
Assembly of the steering cylinder

9. Assemble new seal rings: on the cylinder head (A),
on the piston (B) and on the cylinder body (C) (Fig. 13)
10. Slide pre-assembled rod into the cylinder body (Fig.
14)
11. Fit the O'rings to the ends of the cylinder rod and
tighten with dynamometric wrench to the requested
torque (see section A01 A).
Install the O'rings on the central body, with guide
rods already assembled on the stem.
Note: Install the spacer flange.
Assemble and tighten the steering cylinder fastening
screws with dynamometric wrench to the requested
torque (see section 8A01 A) (Fig. 15)
Fig.13
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Issue 1
Mai 2002
9K02.11
12. Align the swivel housings with the axle (parallel

wheel hub).
Screw the link so that the ball joint can be inserted
into the swivel housing arm (Fig. 16)
Note : it is important to unscrew the locking nut
to carry out this operation.
13. Insert the ball joint into its own housing on the swivel
housing (Fig. 17)
Assemble and tighten the lock nut with dynamometric wrench to the requested torque (see section
8A01 A).
14. Screw in the lock nut of the link only when the toein adjustment has been carried out (Fig. 18)
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
NON
Fig. 18
Issue 1
Mai 2002
Hydraulics - Dynashift control
9L01.1
9 L01 Dynashift control
CONTENTS
-
General ________________________________________________
A.
Explanation of ratios ____________________________________
B.
Checking piston pressures _______________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

9L01.2
General
The Dynashift control assembly fitted to 8210 - 8240 and
8250 tractors equipped with the Heavy Duty gearbox
comprises the following three components (Figs. 1 - 1B):
- The control unit (1) mounted on the right-hand side of
the gearbox, constituted by two separate parts
. the first part controls the engine clutch control (Pressure Loaded version) or the front and rear clutches
(Power Shuttle)
. the second part controls the four Dynashift ratios. The
Dynashift part contains two internal channels, A and
B (Fig. 2 - 2A) allowing oil to circulate from one
solenoid valve to another.
- The solenoid valves (2) screwed into the control unit
comprise:
. a lower solenoid valve EV1 with four ports and two
positions
. an upper solenoid valve EV2 with three ports and two
positions.
- The accumulator (3) fitted on the supply line, allows
the oil flow rate to be accelerated to fill the piston
chambers of the Dynashift unit when necessary. The
reaction of the pistons is consequently faster.
Trademark
: Olaer
Type
: 1/20
Capacity
: 1 litre
Gas
: Nitrogen
Inflation pressure
: 9 1 bar (to be checked with
specific tools every 6 months,
engine stopped).
Note: When the engine is stopped, the accumulator maintains a pressure of 17 bar for a short while.
If an immediate maintenance intervention is necessary, release the pressure or acts on the circuit
with caution.
On tractors fitted with a reverse shuttle, a filter element

(6) (Fig. 1A) located on the right-hand side hydraulic cover
upstream of the control unit, provides additional filtering
for the oil supplying the Dynashift solenoid valves and
those of the Reverse Shuttle (see section 9K01).
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1A
On the version with a Mechanical Reverse Shuttle, two
diagnostics connectors (7) (8) (Fig. 1B) can be provisionally fitted to replace the plugs and in order to check the
pressure in the piston chambers (see section 9N01 Hydraulic tests).
On tractors fitted with a reverse shuttle, the diagnostic
connectors are fitted during manufacture.
The tube (4) supplies the control unit. The oil return
allowing the piston chambers to be emptied passes
through the gearbox.
Special point
- The cross-shaped union (6) is fitted with a restrictorvalve. During reassembly, turn the restrictor to face the
17 bar supply coming from tube (4) (Fig. 1B).
9L01.3
Mechanical reverse shuttle version

3
Fig. 1B
Reverse shuttle version
F
4
17 bar low pressure

D
Gas
D : Non-return valve
Issue 1
Fig. 1
May 2001
9L01.4
Identifying channels and ports
R
A
P
A
C
F
EV2
D
P
A
E /T
Control units with Pressure Loaded

clutch
A : Internal channel
B : Internal channel
C : To F
E : Port to front piston
F : Port to rear piston
P : Pressure (17 bar)
R : Return
S : Location for rear diagnostics connector
T : Location for front diagnostics connector
EV1 : Solenoid valve 4 x 2
EV1
Tightening torques
- bodies of solenoid valves EV1 and EV2 : 20 Nm
maximum
- nuts of solenoid valves: 3 to 4 Nm maximum
Important: The specified tightening torques must

absolutely be met in order to avoid any risk of
distortion that may lead to the seizure of the spool
valves.
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
9L01.5
Identifying channels and ports

B
R
P
A
B
EV2
R
D
B
P
A
EV1
Control unit with Power Shuttle

A : Internal channel and connecting ports
B : Internal channels and connecting ports
C : To port F
E : Port to front piston
F : Port to rear piston
P : Pressure (17 bar)
R : Return
Tightening torques
- bodies of solenoid valves EV1 and EV2 : 20 Nm
maximum
- nuts of solenoid valves: 3 to 4 Nm maximum
Important: The specified tightening torques must

absolutely be met in order to avoid any risk of
distortion that may lead to the seizure of the spool
valves.
Fig. 2A
Issue 1
May 2001

9L01.6
A . Explanation of ratios
- For a theoretical and mechanical explanation of the
ratios, see section 5B03 or 5B04 (depending on the
version).
EV1+
A ratio (Fig. 2 - 2A - 3)
The solenoid valve EV1 is supplied, thus allowing oil
under pressure to reach channel A. This channel directs
the oil towards the front piston via port E and also
towards solenoid valve EV2. The latter being in the
neutral position, the oil can pass through the slide and
port F towards the rear piston chamber. Both pistons are
therefore under pressure.
A
E
EV2
F
Front
B ratio (Fig. 2 - 2A - 4)
Rear
Fig. 3
The changing of speeds from A to B is carried out when

both solenoid valves are supplied. The oil flow to the rear
piston is therefore cut off. The rear piston is pushed by
springs, this sends the oil into channel B. This channel
communicates with the housing via the solenoid valve
EV1.
EV1+
B
EV2+
Front
Issue 1
May 2001
Rear
Fig. 4
9L01.7
C ratio (Fig. 2 - 2A - 5)
The changing of speeds from B to C is obtained by cutting
off the electrical supply to solenoid valve EV1, while
solenoid valve EV2 is still maintained under voltage. The
channel A is no longer under pressure but linked to the
housing. Consequently, the front piston can return to its
neutral position. Channel B is under pressure. The oil
flows to the rear piston via solenoid valve EV2.
EV1
B
EV2+
Front
Rear
Fig. 5
D ratio (Fig. 2 - 2A - 6)
The D ratio is obtained by cutting off the electrical supply
of EV2. Both pistons are linked to the housing via channel
A.
EV1
EV2
Front
Issue 1
Rear
Fig. 6
May 2001

9L01.8
B . Checking piston pressures

Note: After disassembly or replacement of the control unit, check the pressure in the piston chambers
(see section 9N01 - Hydraulic tests).
Remark
- If the pressures are incorrect, check that the spool
valve is actually moving in the solenoid valve concerned or consult the section on electrical tests.
Issue 1
May 2001
Hydraulics - Oil decontamination
9M01.1
9M01 Oil decontamination
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Decontamination procedure ______________________________
C.
Diagrams _______________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

9M01.2
A . General
The correct operation and performance of the hydraulics
system is closely linked to the use of clean transmission
oil.
When maintenance is carried out on the gearbox / axle
assembly (e.g. brake or transmission repairs) this contaminates virtually the whole hydraulic circuit.
It is therefore essential to carry out a decontamination
operation after repairs in order to avoid the rapid deterioration of other components in the circuit caused by the
movement of particles carried by the oil.
The contamination of oil can result in:
- seizure or leaks in the steering spool valve (Orbitrol)
- seizure of the spool valves in the solenoid valves
- excessive wear in the hydraulic pump(s).
The aim of oil decontamination is to restore the hydraulic
circuit to a state of cleanliness higher than that before the
repair operation. The particles that cause the greatest
damage are not the largest ones, for these are rapidly
caught in the filter, it is the repeated circulation of small
non-filtered particles that has the greatest abrasive
effect.
Issue 1
May 2001
9M01.3
B . Decontamination procedure
Special point
- The decontamination is carried out in two distinct
phases.
The static phase

Remarks
- This takes place immediately after the repair operation,
without moving the tractor.
- Check that the oil has been replaced after the repair
operation.
- During this phase, no low-pressure components should
be activated.
- The decontamination is carried out by circulating the
contaminated oil to the housing return through filter
elements in order to rapidly remove any particles
suspended in the oil.
Fig. 1
Preparation of the tractor (Fig. 3 - 4)

Note: The equipment used for oil decontamination
is two hose pipes of a suitable length fitted with a
female diagnostics connector, ref. 3582045M1 (Fig.
1) on one of the ends.
1. Disconnect the temperature switch (3) (Fig. 3) (Heavy
Duty transmission) and ground it to earth in order to
neutralise its action.
2. Connect the female diagnostics connector of each
hose pipe on the male connectors (1) (2) of the lowpressure circuit. These connectors are respectively
located on the right-hand side hydraulic cover, on the
clutch valve or the Reverse Shuttle hydraulic control
unit, depending on the version (Fig. 3 - 4).
3. Fasten the other end of the hose pipes without
connectors to the return port R (Fig. 3 - 4).
Issue 1
May 2001

9M01.4
Decontamination
Remark
- The oil temperature must be above 10 C to avoid the
opening of the by-pass.
4. Start the engine and run it at 1200 rpm.
5. Allow the engine to run for 15 minutes minimum in
order to filter out the particles in the oil.
Important: Check that the clogging indicator
lamp on the dashboard does not light during the
decontamination operation. If this does happen,
replace the 15-micron filter element and check or
change the suction strainer.
6. After having let the engine run for 15 minutes, stop
the engine and replace the 15-micron filter by a 6micron filter.
7. Procure a hose pipe of appropriate strength, fitted at
each end with a male quick-disconnect coupling for
connection to the auxiliary spool valves (Fig. 2).
8. Connect the connectors of the flexible to ports A and
B of the same spool valve (Fig. 2).
9. Start the engine and run it at 1200 rpm.
10. While the engine is running, turn the knurled knob of
the spool valve to maximum flow and alternate the
direction of oil circulation in the spool valve for
approximately 5 minutes (Fig. 2) using the control
lever.
Repeat the operation on the two or three other spool
valves (depending on options).
Reminder
- If the clogging indicator lamp lights on the dashboard,
replace the 6-micron filter element by another of the
same type.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 2
9M01.5
Dynamic phase
Remark
- Contrary to the static phase, the dynamic phase uses
all the hydraulic functions of the tractor for 15 minutes
with the engine running:
. lift control
. steering
. power take off
. brakes
. etc.
Preparation of the tractor

11. Remove all the hose pipes used during the static
phase.
Procedure
Reminder
- During decontamination, carefully monitor the dashboard clogging indicator. If necessary, immediately
replace the 6-micron filter and the suction strainer.
12. Raise and lower the lift arm over the entire travel of
the rams and carry out a rapid alternating raise and
lower cycle.
13. Turn the steering wheel to full lock in both directions
several times.
14. Declutch and allow the clutch in and out 5 or 6 times
using the full travel of the pedal (tractors with Heavy
Duty transmission).
Repeat the same operation again more quickly.
15. Press and release each of the unlatched brake
pedals several times.
16. Repeat the same operation more quickly.
17. Slowly press and release the latched pedals several
times.
18. Repeat the same operation again more quickly.
19. Activate the Dynashift control, located on the left
beneath the steering wheel, moving it from A to D
and vice versa several times.
20. Operate and halt the power take off 4 or 5 times, one
after another.
21. Reconnect the temperature switch.
Issue 1
May 2001

9M01.6
Test
22. Carry out a road test the tractor using various engine
speeds, changing up and down through the ratios for
approximately 15 minutes.
23. When the road test is completed, let the engine run
at 1200 rpm for approximately 15 minutes with the
tractor stationary, in order to eliminate any remaining
particles in the circuit.
Preparing the tractor for service

24. When all these operations have been completed,
prepare the tractor for service by replacing the
suction strainer and the 6-micron filter used for
decontamination with a new and original spare parts
suction strainer and 15-micron filter, as referenced in
the Spare Parts catalogue.
Issue 1
May 2001
9M01.7
C . Diagrams
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Decontamination connectors (low pressure)

Decontamination connector on clutch valve or Power
shuttle hydraulic control unit (Heavy Duty transmission)
Temperature switch (Heavy Duty transmission)
Oil decontamination replaceable oil filter element (6
micron)
Clogging indicator
A : Pressure Load ed - Mechanical reverse shuttle

version
B : Reverse shuttle version
2
Fig. 3
B
2
5
4
3
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 3

9M01.8
Issue 1
May 2001
9M01.9
R
Parts list
(1) Decontamination connectors (low pressure)
(4) Oil decontamination replaceable oil filter element (6 micron)
(5) Clogging indicator
Fig. 4
4
Fig. 4
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Hydraulics - Hydraulic tests
9N01.1
9 N01 Hydraulic tests
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Testing the high pressure 110 l/min circuit _______________
C.
Testing the low pressure 110 l/min circuit ________________
D.
Testing the high pressure 150 l/min circuit _______________
21
E.
Testing the low pressure 150 l/min circuit ________________
30
F.
Testing the low pressure hydraulic functions of the

Full Powershift gearbox _________________________________
31
2
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December

9N01.2
A . General
The 8200 series tractors are fitted with a closed centre
hydraulic system that provides a flowrate of 110 l/min,
depending upon the characteristics of the booster pump
and the variable displacement pump.
The 150 l/min hydraulic system is only fitted as an option
on tractors with a Full Powershift transmission.
The hydraulic system comprises two separate circuits:
low and high pressure.
Low pressure circuit

Tractors may be fitted with either Full Powershift or
Heavy Duty gearboxes, with or without Power shuttle.
The Full Powershift gearbox has a specific pump fitted to
the rear of its housing. This discharges oil towards the
low pressure functions of the gearbox and lubricates
various mechanical assemblies under pressure.
The other 17 bar functions of the rear axle are identical for
tractors with a Full Powershift or Heavy Duty gearbox.
These are supplied via the priority blocks by the oil flow
under pressure coming from the variable displacement
pump that is located either in the intermediate housing or
on the outside of the right-hand side hydraulic cover
(depending on options).
High pressure circuit

The design and operating principle of the high pressure
circuit is similar regardless of the type of gearbox that is
fitted.
Before beginning the tests, run the engine in order to bring
the oil temperature up to 80 C minimum (176 F).
To facilitate the increase in oil temperature:
- run the engine at 2000 rpm
- connect a flowmeter to an auxiliary spool valve
- maintain the spool valve activated
- limit the flow through the flowmeter
- as soon as the oil temperature is above 80 C, release
the spool valve and open the flowmeter valve to the
maximum.
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000
To carry out the tests indicated in this section, it is

recommended that the following equipment available
through the AGCO network be used:
- MF 3001: Pressure gauge kit
- MF 3016: turbine flowmeter - 4 - 160 l/min
- MF 3017: Hose piping assembly for MF 3016 flowmeter
- 3378174M1: Hose piping kit with diagnostic connectors (Full Powershift gearbox)
- 3582045M1: Diagnostic coupler
If the above is not available, use equivalent suitable
equipment.
Always check the oil flow direction to avoid damaging the flowmeter. In addition, select pressure
gauges, hose piping and unions of sufficient capacity and strength.
Values measured during the tests :
- maxi flowrate .................. 105 115 l/min
or 150 l/min (depending on option)
- mini flowrate ................... 5 l/min
- maxi pressure ................. 200 bar
- mini pressure .................. 0,4 bar
9N01.3
B . Testing the high pressure 110 l/

min circuit
P1
The high pressure, 110 l/min circuit supplies the following functions:
- steering
- auxiliary spool valves
- lift control
- trailer braking
11 bar
maxi
1. Booster pressure of the variable displacement pump

- Connect a pressure gauge on to the diagnostic connector located on the right-hand side hydraulic cover (Figs.
1 - 3) and check P1:
Fig. 1
Engine speed
(rpm)
P1
(bar)
1000
5.2 1
2200
6.3 1
P2
2. Standby pressure and XLS pressure

- Connect a pressure gauge to the diagnostic connector
(Fig. 2 - 3) located:
. on the pump controller: XLS pressure = P2
. on the right-hand side hydraulic cover: pump pressure
= P3
Important: Do not activate any high pressure function such as the steering. This may cause a momentary pressure greater than that the P2 and P3
pressure gauges can withstand.
Engine speed
(rpm)
P2
(bar)
P3
(bar)
1000
26 1
2200
26 1
Note: Pump pressure = XLS pressure + 22 bar 1

bar
P3 = P2 + 22 1 bar
30 bar
11 bar
maxi
P3
Fig. 2
P3
P2
HP
P1
BP
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
9N01.4
3. Maximum flowrate and pressure

- Connect a flowmeter to an auxiliary spool valve (Fig. 4).
Activate and hold the spool valve lever to obtain Q1.
- Connect a pressure gauge on each diagnostics connector (Fig. 5 - 7) located:
on the pump controller: XLS pressure = P2
on the right-hand side hydraulic cover: pump pressure
= P3
- Set the control (1) of the flowrate controller of the
auxiliary spool valve concerned to the maximum flowrate
(Fig. 6).
- Activate the auxiliary spool valve and progressively
close the valve of the flowmeter in order to read the
flowrate and increase the pressure.
Engine
speed
(rpm)
Q1
P2
P3
(l/min)
(bar)
(bar)
2200
10010
110
2200
10010
130
2200
10010
2200
10010
170
2200
10010
180
2200
P2 = P3 - 221
190
150
190
Note: If the flowmeter is fitted with a pressure

gauge, the pressure indicated must be taken into
account.
Fig. 4
P2
270 b
270 b
P3
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
9N01.5
4. Checking the auxiliary spool valve flowrate controller
Fig. 6
- Connect a flowmeter to a spool valve (Fig. 4) in order

to obtain Q2.
on the pump controller: XLS pressure: P2
= P3
Controller
position
Engine
speed
(rpm)
P2
P3
(bar)
(bar)
Q2
mini
(l/min)
Maxi
2200
P2 = P3
-221 bar
130
10010
Mini
2200
P2 = P3
-221 bar
35
51
- Set the control (1) (Fig. 6) of the controller concerned

slowly to its minimum stop. Q2 must drop progressively to a flowrate of 5 1 l/min.
If the flowrate is incorrect, see controller operation,
section 9D01.
P2
HP
P3
BP
5. Auxiliary spool valve with automatic return to neutral

- Connect a flowmeter to an auxiliary spool valve (Fig. 4).
- Connect a pressure gauge to the pump controller (Fig.
7 - 8) to read: XLS pressure = P2.
- Run the engine at 1000 rpm. Activate the spool valve
in the automatic return position, release the lever and
progressively close the valve of the flowmeter until the
lever returns to the neutral position. Read the triggering
pressure: P2 = 160 - 185 bar.
- The triggering pressure can be adjusted (see section
9D01).
Fig. 7
P2
270 b
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001

9N01.6
6. Lift control
Maximum pressure
- Connect a pressure gauge to each diagnostics connector (Fig. 9 - 11) located:
on the pump controller: XLS pressure = P2
= P3
- Run the engine at 1000 rpm.
- Use the external lift control buttons to reach the maximum lift position
P2 and P3 = 190 bar.
Shock valve
- With the engine stopped, disconnect hose supply
piping to the ram (Fig. 10 - 11).
- Inject a pressure in the circuit using a calibration pump
(note the opening pressure):
P4 = 220 240 bar.
P2
270 b
270 b
P3
Fig. 9
High pressure
7. Steering
Maximum steering
- Connect a pressure gauge to each diagnostics connector (see 6 and Fig. 9 to 11) and run the engine at 1000
rpm.
- Slowly turn the steering and make sure that P2 and P3
gradually increase:
P2 = 149 + 2 bar
P3 = 170 + 2 bar
Shock valve
- With the engine stopped, connect a hand calibration
pump to one of the two supply pipes of the steering ram
(Fig 10 - 11).
- Inject a pressure using a calibration pump (note the
opening pressure).
P5 = 225 - 250 bar.
- Apply the same procedure to the second steering ram
supply.
Steering circuit leak
- Place the front wheels on full lock and apply a torque of
4 Nm, measured along the axis of the steering column,
to the steering wheel. The steering wheel must not turn
more than 2 rpm. If it rotates at more than 2 rpm,
disconnect the piping supplying the rams and block off
both ports.
- Apply the same torque to the steering wheel, if it turns
less than 2 rpm, this indicates a leak from the hydraulic
ram.
Issue 1
May 2001
Low pressure
Lubrication
Full Powershift gearbox lubrication (filter
clogged)
Suction
Booster
Return
Brakes
Pilot flow
9N01.7
High pressure 110 l/min circuit (Heavy Duty gearbox)
High pressure 110 l/min circuit (Full Powershift gearbox)
P5
P5
P3
P3
P2
P2
HP
BP
HP
BP
P4
P4
P4
P4
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 11
9N01.8
High pressure 110 l/min circuit (Full Powershift gearbox)
8. Trailer braking (if fitted)

Maximum pressure
- Connect a pressure gauge to the trailer braking quickdisconnect coupling (Fig. 12) in order to read P6.
- With the brake pedals latched, apply a progressive
pedal pressure.
- The observed pressure must increase gradually and
reach:
P6 = 130 to 150 bar maximum
- If the pressure does not increase gradually, bleed the
brake circuit (see section 9I01).
Flowrate
- Connect a flowmeter, with its load valve fully open, to
the trailer braking quick-disconnect coupling (Fig. 13).
- Connect the return to the manifold union that supports
the auxiliary spool valves.
- Carry out the reading of Q3.
Engine speed
(rpm)
P6
(bar)
Q3
(l/min mini)
1000
47 1
2200
53 1
- Still connected as indicated, progressively close the

load valve to increase the pressure and read the Q3
flowrate again.
Engine speed
(rpm)
P6
(bar)
Q3
(l/min mini)
1000
90
25 1
2200
90
26 1
HP
BP
R
Q3
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001
P6
Fig. 12

C . Testing the low pressure 110 l/min
circuit
9N01.9
P7
On 8200 tractors fitted with a 110 l/min circuit, the rear

axle 17 bar low pressure supplies the following functions:
- Dynashift (*)
- Engine clutch (*)
- Rear power take off clutch
- 4WD clutch
- Front and rear differential lock
- Hare / Tortoise range (*)
- Power braking assistance
- Front power take off (if fitted)
Note: On tractors fitted with a Full Powershift gearbox, the functions marked with an asterisk (*) must
not be taken into account.
30bar
Fig. 14
1. 17 bar circuit
P1

(Figs. 14 - 16) located at the front of the right-hand side
hydraulic cover in order to check P7.
- De-clutch (zero pressure in engine clutch) and deactivate all the low pressure components.
The front axle must be engaged, the pressure is only
used when de-clutching.
Place the range lever in the Tortoise position and the
Dynashift lever in position D.
- Engage each function, the pressure must not drop
below 14 bar and must return to its initial level after each
disengagement.
P7 = 17 1 bar
11 bar
maxi
Fig. 15
2. Booster circuit and oil cooler safety

(Fig. 15 - 16) located on the right-hand side hydraulic
cover in order to check P1
Engine speed
(rpm)
P1
(bar)
1000
5.2 1
2200
6.3 1
2
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December
9N01.10
Low pressure 110 l/min circuit (Heavy Duty gearbox)
P8
P9
P10
HP
BP
P1
Issue 1
December 2000
P7
Fig. 16
9N01.11
3. Oil cooler (optional)

- In accordance with Fig. 16, connect a pressure gauge
to the oil cooler inlet to check P8 and to the oil cooler
outlet to check P9.
Engine speed
(rpm)
P8
(bar)
P9
(bar)
1000
2 0.5
1.9 0.5
2200
2.3 0.5
2 0.5
Issue 1
May 2001
9N01.12
Q4
P11 P12
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2001
9N01.13
4. Transmission lubricating circuit

a) Pressure test
- Connect a pressure gauge between the union located
on the left-hand side of the transmission and the
lubricating pipe leading to the gearbox, to check P10
(Fig. 16).
At 1000 rpm, P10 = 1.5 0.1 bar
Important: If any auxiliary spool valve is activated
(a flowmeter or slave device must be connected to
it), the pressure must not drop below 1 bar for P10.
3
30bar
b) Flowrate test
- Connect a flowmeter to the lubricating circuit as shown
in Fig. 18, in order to read Q4 (the union on the box is still
accessible despite the tank being fitted).
Important: The flowmeter valve must remain in the
maximum open position until the end of the test in
order not to cut off lubrication to the transmission.
Engine speed
(rpm)
Q4 mini
(l/min)
1000
17.8 1
2200
19.9 1
Important:
- If an auxiliary spool valve is activated (a flowmeter
or slave device must be connected to it), the
pressure must not drop more than 2 l/min.
5. Pressure of the Servo systems

a) Dynashift
- Remove the plugs (1) from the distribution block.
- Screw on two male connectors (2) and (3), ref.
33843871M1, and connect them to the diagnostic
connectors connected to pressure gauges that are able
to withstand approximately 30 bar (Fig. 17 - 18).
- Start the engine.
- Activate the control located on the left-hand side,
beneath the steering wheel, to select each ratio (A, B,
C and D).
P11
30bar
2
P12
Fig. 17
- Check that the pressures are correct according to the
following table:
Ratio
Front
piston
connector (2)
P11 (bar)
Rear
piston
connector (3)
P12 (bar)
EV1
voltage
en
Volt
EV2
voltage
en
Volt
171
171
12
171
12
12
171
12
- If the pressures are incorrect, check the movement of

the solenoid valve slide or consult the electrical tests
section.
Issue 1
May 2001

9N01.14

Q5
P13
P14
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2001
9N01.15
b) Clutch
Control circuit
- Connect a pressure gauge to the clutch valve diagnostics connector located on the right-hand side of the
gearbox (Fig. 19 - 21) in order to check P13.
- Operate the pedal to disengage and engage the clutch.
17 bar
Engine speed
(rpm)
P13
P13
disengaged engaged
(bar)
(bar)
1000
17 1
2200
17 1
150
25
Modulation position
- The clutch valve modulates between 11 bar and 0 bar.
This modulation corresponds to a pedal travel of between 32 mm 1 mm from the high stop position and
25 mm 1 mm before the lower stop position of the
pedal (the total travel is 150 mm).
- If the modulation travel is offset in relation to the pedal
travel, it is necessary to bleed the system using the
bleed-valve located on the end of the valve (see section
9I01).
0 bar
(rpm)
30bar
P14
P14
disengaged engaged
(bar)
(bar)
1000
2 0,1
0,4 0,1
2200
3 0,1
1,2 0,1
11 bar
P13
Clutch lubricating circuit

- Connect a pressure gauge on the diagnostic connector
located on the right-hand side of the gearbox (Fig. 20 21) in order to check P14.
- Operate the pedal to disengage and engage the clutch:
Engine speed
32
Fig. 19
Checking the admissible pressure leak on

the clutch supply
- Connect a flowmeter between the valve and the union
on the spacer (Fig. 21) and read Q5.
P14
11bar
Engine speed
(rpm)
1000
Q5
Q5
declutched clutch in
(l/min)
(l/min)
0
3 maxi
Fig. 20
Issue 1
December 2000

9N01.16
Power shuttle
Remark
All 8200 tractors with a Heavy Duty gearbox can be fitted
with a power shuttle.
The rear axle 17 bar low pressure supplies the following
functions:
- Dynashift
- Power shuttle
- Rear PTO clutch
- Power take-off brake
- 4 WD clutch
- front and rear differential lock
- Hare / Tortoise range
- Power braking assistance
- front clutch PTO (if fitted)
2
Front view
6. 17 bar circuit
- Connect a pressure gauge to the diagnostics connector
(Fig. 14) located at the front of the right-hand side
hydraulic cover in order to check P7.
- Deactivate all the low pressure components.
- Place the multiple position lever, located to the left
beneath the steering wheel, in neutral position.
- The front axle must be engaged, the pressure is only
used when de-clutching.
- Place the range lever in the Tortoise position and the
Dynashift lever in position D.
- Engage each function, the pressure must not drop
below 14 bar and must restore its initial position after
each disengagement.
P7 = 17 + 1 bar
Reminder
- The booster, transmission oil cooler safety and transmission lubricating circuits are similar for the Power
shuttle and mechanical reverse shuttle. If necessary,
refer to C (2 - 3 and 4).
P11
2
7. Pressure of the Servo systems

a) Dynashift
Checking piston pressure
- Connect the male connectors (2) (3) to 30 bar capacity
pressure gauges through hoses fitted with diagnostics
connectors (Fig. 22 - 23).
P12
Fig. 23
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000
9N01.17
110 l/min low pressure circuit (Heavy Duty gearbox)
P18
P12
P11
P15
P16 - P17
Fig. 22
2
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December
9N01.18
Start the engine.

- Activate the multiple position lever located on the lefthand side, beneath the steering wheel, to select each
ratio (A, B, C and D).
- Check that the pressures are correct according to the
following table:
Ratio
Front
Rear
EV1
EV2
piston
piston
voltage voltage
connector
connector (in volts) (in volts)
(2) P11 (bar) (3) P12 (bar)
171
171
12
171
12
12
171
12
- Advice: If the pressures are incorrect, before you

consider the Dynashift to be partially defective, check
the movement of the solenoid valve spools and the
solenoid power supply.
b) Power shuttle front and rear clutch

Checking control unit pressure supply
- Connect a pressure gauge with a capacity of around 30
bar to the diagnostics connector (1) on the control unit
located to the right-hand in front of the gearbox (Fig. 2224).
- Check the pressure readings with those of the table
below.
P15
Fig. 24
Engine speed
(rpm)
P15
(bar)
1000
18 1
2200
18 1
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000
9N01.19
c) Checking clutch lubricating pressure

The checking operation is to be carried out with
an operator in the tractor driving seat.
Remark
- The clutch diagnostics connectors (1) (forward ratio)
and (2) (reverse ratio) can be accessed through the
control unit located to the right-hand sode in front of the
gearbox as shown in Fig. 25.
Reminder
The multiple position lever is located on the left-hand
side, beneath the steering wheel:
- lever in upward position (forward): green light is on
- lever in downward position (reverse): red light is on
- Connect a 30 bar capacity pressure gauge on each

diagnostics connector (1) (2) (Fig. 22 and 25).
- run the engine at 1000 rpm.
- Activate the lever and select the forward gear, reverse
gear, and neutral.
- Check the pressure readings against those given in the
table
Lever
position
1
P16
Clutch (1)
Clutch (2)
P16 (bar)
P17 (bar)
Clutch
Clutch
Clutch
Clutch
engaged disengaged engaged disengaged
Forward
gear
181
Neutral
Reverse
gear
181
P17
2
Fig. 25
2
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December
9N01.20
d) Checking clutch lubricating pressure
The checking operation is to be carried out with

an operator in the tractor driving seat.
Reminders
- The clutches are lubricated by a gear pump, independent from the one used for the standard lubricating
system.
- When the front clutch is under load, its internal components are lubricated.
- Two valves, mounted on the reverse shuttle front
cover, enable lubrication of the reverse gear system,
when selected.
- Connect a hose fitted with a 11 bar capacity pressure
gauge on the diagnostics connector (1) located to the
right-hand side on the front of the gearbox housing (Fig.
22 and 26).
- Check the test results against the table below.
Ratio
Ratio
engine (rpm)
P18 (bar)
disengaged
P18
P18 (bar)
engaged
Pedal or lever
Forward
(green
light on)
Reverse
(red
light on)
1000
1,5 0,1
0,5 0,1
2200
2 0,1
0,9 0,1
1000
1,5 0,1
0,4 0,1
2200
2 0,1
0,8 0,1
Fig. 26
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000

D . Testing the high pressure 150 l/
min circuit
9N01.21
P1
The high pressure circuit supplies the following functions:

- steering
- auxiliary spool valves
- lift control
- trailer braking
1. Booster pressure of the variable displacement pump

- Connect a pressure gauge on the diagnostic connector
located on the cover (Fig. 27 - 29) and check P1:
Engine speed
(rpm)
P1
(bar)
1000
5,2 1
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
P2
2200
6,3 1
2. Standby pressure and XLS pressure

- Connect a pressure gauge to each diagnostics connector (Fig. 28 - 29) located:
. on the right-hand cover: pump pressure = P3
Important: Do not activate any high pressure elements (e.g. steering) in order to avoid a rise in
pressure greater than that the P2 and P3 pressure
gauges can withstand.
Engine speed
(rpm)
P2
(bar)
P3
(bar)
1000
26 1
2200
26 1
P3
P1
Note: Pump pressure = XLS pressure + 22 bar 1

bar
P3 = P2 + 22 1 bar.
P2
P3
Fig. 29
2
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December

9N01.22
3. Maximum pressure and flowrate

Remark
- The Q1 flowrate is obtained by using a flowmeter
connected to two auxiliary spool valves.
- Connect a flowmeter according to the previous remark
and Fig. 30. Activate and hold the levers of the spool
valves to obtain Q1.
- Connect a flowmeter to each diagnostics connector
located (Fig. 31 - 33):
. on the right-hand cover: pump pressure = P3
Fig. 30
P3
P2
Fig. 31
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000

- Place the control (1) of the flowrate controller of the
auxiliary spool valves concerned to maximum flowrate.
- Simultaneously activate the spool valve levers and
progressively close the flowmeter valve to read the
flowrate and increase the pressure.
Engine
speed
(rpm)
Q1
P2
P3
(l/min)
(bar)
(bar)
2200
145 10
110
2200
145 10
130
2200
145 10
2200
145 10
170
2200
145 10
180
2200
P2 = P3 - 221
190
9N01.23
Fig. 32
1
150
190
Note: If the flowmeter is fitted with a pressure

gauge, the pressure indicated must not be taken into
account.
2
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December

9N01.24
4. Checking the auxiliary spool valves flow

controller
- Connect a flowmeter to a spool valve.
- Connect a pressure gauge to the right-hand cover
(Fig. 31 - 33) to read : P3 pump pressure.
- Increase the engine speed to 2200 rpm and progressively close the flowmeter valve to obtain a P3 pressure
of 130 bar.
- Place the control (1) (Fig. 32) of the flow controller
concerned on the minimum position and note that the
flowrate is 5 1 l/min at a P3 pressure of approximately
35 bar.
If the flowrate is incorrect, see the controller operation,
section 9D01.
P2
P3
Fig. 33
5. Auxiliary spool valve with automatic return to neutral

- Connect a flowmeter to a spool valve.
- Connect a pressure gauge to the pump controller (Fig.
33 - 34) to read: XLS pressure = P2.
- Run the engine at 1000 rpm. Activate the spool valve in
the return to neutral position, release the lever and
progressively close the valve of the flowmeter until the
lever returns to the neutral position. Read the triggering
pressure:
P2 = 160 - 185 bar
- The triggering pressure can be adjusted (see section
9D01).
P2
Fig. 34
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000
9N01.25
6. Lift control
Maximum pressure
. on the right-hand side hydraulic cover: pump pressure
= P3
- Utilise the external lift control buttons to reach the
maximum high position:
P2 and P3 = 190 bar
Shock valve
- With the engine stopped, disconnect the hose piping
supplying the rams (Fig. 36 - 37).
- Inject a pressure in the circuit using a calibration pump
(note the opening pressure):
P4 = 220 - 240 bar
P3
P2
Fig. 35
Issue
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002

9N01.26
7. Steering
Maximum pressure
- Connect a pressure gauge to each diagnostics connector (see 6, Fig. 35 - 37) and run the engine at 1000 rpm.
- Slowly turn the steering and ensure that P2 and P3
gradually increase:
P2 = 149 2 bar
P3 = 170 2 bar
Shock valve
- With the engine stopped, connect a hand calibration
pump to one of the two supply pipes of the steering ram
(Fig. 36 - 37).
- Inject a pressure using the calibration pump (note the
opening pressure):
P5 = 225 - 250 bar
- Carry out the same procedure with the second ram
supply.
Steering circuit leakage
- Place the front wheels on full lock and apply a torque of
4 Nm to the steering wheel axis. The steering wheel
must not turn more than 2 rpm. If the steering wheel
rotates faster than 2 rpm, disconnect the piping supplying the rams and block off both pipe ports.
- Apply the same torque to the steering wheel, if it rotates
less than 2 rpm, there is a leak from the steering ram.
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000
9N01.27
ZF front axle - High pressure 150 l/min circuit
(Full Powershift gearbox)
Dana front axle - High pressure 150 l/min circuit

(Full Powershift gearbox)
P5
P5
P2
P3
P2
P4
P4
P4
P4
R
Q3
Q3
Fig. 31
Issue 2
P3
May 2002
Fig. 32

9N01.28
Issue 2
May 2002
9N01.29
8. Trailer braking (if fitted)

Maximum pressure
- Connect a pressure gauge to the trailer brake quickdisconnect coupling (Fig. 38) in order to read P6.
- With the brake pedals latched, apply a progressive
pressure.
- The pressure that is read must increase gradually and
reach:
P6 = 130 to 150 bar maximum
- If the pressure does not increase gradually, bleed the
brake circuit (see section 9I01).
P6
Flowrate
- Connect a flowmeter, with its load valve open to the
maximum, on to the trailer brake quick-disconnect
coupling (Fig. 36 - 37).
- Connect the return to the manifold union that supports
the auxiliary spool valves.
- Carry out a reading of Q3.
Engine speed
(rpm)
P6
(bar)
Q3
(l/min mini)
1000
47 1
2200
53 1
Fig. 38
- Still connected as previously described, progressively

close the flowmeter load valve in order to increase the
pressure and read the new Q3 flowrate.
Engine speed
(rpm)
P6
(bar)
Q3
(l/min mini)
1000
90
25 1
2200
90
26 1
Issue 21
May 2002
December
2000
9N01.30
E . Testing the low pressure 150 l/

min circuit
On 8200 series tractors fitted with a 150 l/min circuit, the
17 bar low pressure of the rear axle supplies the following
functions:
- rear power take clutch
- power take off brake
- 4WD clutch (depending on version)
- front diff lock (if fitted) and rear diff lock
- power braking assistance
- front power take off clutch (if fitted)
Note: The 150 l/min circuit is only available on
tractors fitted with a Full Powershift gearbox.
P7
1. 17 bar circuit
Fig. 39

(Fig. 39) located above the right-hand side hydraulic
cover to check P7.
- De-activate all low pressure components.
The front axle must be engaged since pressure is used
only when de-clutching.
- Activate each function, the pressure must not drop
below 14 bar and must restore to its initial level when
each component is de-activated.
P7 = 17 1 bar
P1
2. Booster circuit of the variable displacement pump and rear axle lubricating circuit
- The oil used for boosting the variable displacement
pump is also used to lubricate the following functions:
. power take off clutch
. the trumpets (depending on model)
. the handbrake system and mainly the creeper gearbox (if fitted)
. the 4WD unit
. the hydraulic pump drive bearing block
located on the booster manifold above the right-hand
side hydraulic cover (Fig. 40) in order to check P1.
Engine speed
(rpm)
Issue 11
Issue
P1
(bar)
1000
5,2 1
2200
6,3 1
May 2000
2002
December
Fig. 40

F . Testing the low pressure hydraulic functions of the Full Powershift
gearbox
9N01.31
Top view
12
13
The Full Powershift gearbox possesses its own hydraulic

supply and clutch lubricating system (see section 5I01).
An inspection plate located beneath the pedals and
bolted to the cab floor allows access to the different plugs
corresponding to the various channels: pump outlet (17
bar), clutch pressure and lubrication (1) (2) (A) (B) (C) and
(R).
- In order not to eliminate the operation of the pressure
switch (17 bar) during the pressure tests, provisionally
screw the pressure switch (13) (red dot) and its reliefvalve at the location of the large plug (12) (Fig. 41).
Reconnect the wiring loom to the pressure switch.
- Fit in the port previously used by the pressure switch,
the diagnostics connector and reducer found in kit, ref.
3378174M1, in order to test P1 (Fig. 41).
- Remove the 7/16 plugs. Screw the diagnostic hose
piping provided with kit, ref. 3378174M1, into the
corresponding ports (1) (2) (A) (B) (C) and (R) (Fig. 41)
and the diagnostics connectors into the ports (L) (H) and
(M) (Fig. 42).
P1
A
Fig. 41
Bottom view
AG 250
AG 150
Fig. 42
Issue 1
December
2000
May 2002
9N01.32
- Take out the 9/16 plug (14) located on the upper left-side
of the gearbox (Fig. 43). Fit a diagnostic connector in its
location.
- Run the engine to bring the oil up to a temperature of
80 C minimum (176 F) (see A).
- Before checking the clutch pressure (see paragraph 3),
check the pump pressure, the operation of the 17 bar
valve and the lubrication pressure in the clutches.
P2
14
1. Pump pressure and valve operation

and check P1 (Fig. 41).
Engine speed
(rpm)
P1
(bar)
1000
18 1
2200
18 1
Fig. 43
2. Clutch lubricating pressure

and check P2 (Fig. 43).
Engine speed
(rpm)
P2
(bar)
1000
0,6 0,2
2200
1,8 0,2
Issue 1
May 2002
December
2000

3. Clutch pressures
Remark
For each ratio, selected with the gear shift lever,
three clutches are engaged. The clutch pressure test
is carried out using three pressure gauges of approximately 30 bar capacity that are moved in relation to the clutches to be tested (F = Forward and R
= Reverse)
Ratios
selected
9N01.33
Note: The reading of the pressures is carried out

inside the cab, with the tractor moving.
Clutches
engaged
F1
1-A-L
F2
2 - A- L
F3
1-B-L
F4
1-A-M
F5
2-B-L
F6
2-A-M
F7
1-C-L
F8
1-B-M
F9
2-C-L
F10
2-B-M
F11
1-A-H
F12
1-C-M
F13
2-A-H
F14
2-C-M
F15
1-B-H
F16
2-B-H
F17
1-C-H
F18
2-C-H
R1
R-A-L
R2
R-B-L
R3
R-A-M
R4
R-C-L
R5
R-B-M
R6
R-A-H
R7
R-C-M
R8
R-B-H
Issue 1
May 2000
2002
December
9N01.34
- Connect the pressure gauges to the connectors and

diagnostics hose piping of the clutches engaged (Fig. 44)
according to the ratio selected.
- Drive the tractor in this ratio, note and then check the P3
to P11 pressures according to the following table:
Clutch
Pressure
P3 = 17 1
P4 = 17 1
P5 = 17 1
P6 = 17 1
P7 = 17 1
P8 = 17 1
P9 = 17 1
P10 = 17 1
P11 = 17 1
Note: The value read on each pressure gauge must

be constant when the clutch is fully engaged.
Final operations
- After carrying out the tests, restore the tractor to the
state prior to the tests (17 bar pressure switch is refitted
in its initial location - all connectors and hose piping
removed).
Fig. 44
Top view
R
1
Bottom view
of AG250 gearbox
M
Bottom view
of AG150 gearbox
Issue 11
Issue
May 2000
2002
December
10 . ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Contents
10 A01 RISTS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

10 A02 DEUTSCH ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Issue 2
May 2002
Electrical equipment
10A01.1
10 A01 Electrical equipment
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Dynashift - Cab accessories and engine equipment ________
C.
Full Powershift - Engine equipment ______________________
22
D.
Full Powershift - Cab equipment _________________________
24
E.
Lighting layout (except North America) ___________________
26
F.
Direction indicator lamps (except North America) __________
28
G.
Work lights and flashing beacons (except North America) __
30
H.
Dynashift - Full lighting system (North America) ___________
32
I.
Full Powershift - Full lighting system (North America) _____
34
J.
Dynashift - Fuses (except North America) _________________
36
K.
Full Powershift - Fuses (except North America) ____________
37
L.
Dynashift - Fuses (North America) ________________________
38
M.
Full Powershift - Fuses (North America) ___________________
39
Issue 1
May 2001

10A01.2
Issue 1
May 2001
A . General
The 8200 series of tractors are fitted with a 12-volt
negative ground electrical circuit, charged by a 120 A
alternator (70 A for platform versions).
The alternator has an integrated rectifier and a charging
regulator. An additional terminal is provided to supply the
electronic tachometer (for Autotronic 2 versions only).
The alternator fitted on the right-hand side of the engine
is driven by a belt from the crankshaft pulley.
The starter motor, fitted on the right-hand side of the
engine, is of the pre-engaged type.
The safety switch, placed under the clutch pedal, supplies
the starter solenoid when the clutch pedal is fully pressed.
The batteries are mounted on a fixed or pivoting carrier
(depending on the model), behind the right-hand side
footstep.
10A01.3
Regulator voltage
Starter
8210 to 8260
Make
Model
Voltage
Type
14.2 V
Magneti Marelli
2.8 kW
12 V
pre-engaged
8270 8280
Make
Model
Voltage
Type
Magneti Marelli
3.6 kW
12 V
pre-engaged
+P
: + Permanent
+ AC : + After contact
Ah
: Amp hours
Designation of harnesses
Characteristics
Batteries
8210 - 8220
Quantity
Type
Cold start performance
Reserve capacity at 25 A
Voltage
Capacity
2
Maintenance free
420 A (- 18 C)
120 minutes
12 V
66 Ah
8240 to 8280
Quantity
Type
Cold start performance
Voltage
Capacity
2
Maintenance free
420 A (- 18 C)
180 minutes
12 V
105 Ah
Alternator
Cab
Make
Max. output amperage
Regulator
Regulator voltage
Valeo
120 A
integral
14.2 V
Platform
Make
Type
Max. output amperage
Regulator
Magneti - Marelli
A127
70 A
integral
a
b
c
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
aa
ab
ak
: Dashboard harness
: Engine harness
: Console harness
: Roof harness
: Battery cut out harness
: Rear wiper harness
: Lead for battery cut out (radio, clock and roof light
supply)
: Additional tank harness
: Door switch harness for roof light
: Windscreen washer pump lead
: Thermostart lead
: Batteries harness
: Interior power socket harness
: Roof dashboard lighting harness
: Roof headlights harness
: Roof dashboard harness (lower part)
: Roof dashboard harness (upper part)
: Front work lights harness
: Front and rear lighting harness
: Roof lighting harness
: Registration plate light harness
: Interior 25 A power socket harness
: Cigarette lighter harness
: Parking brake buzzer harness
: Ground lead (tractor without radiator water level
sensor)
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.4
Connectors
Number
of ways
Connector
colour
Lead colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
(Deutsch kit)
Black circle
M - M - M - M - VI - G - G - N
C2
9 (Ritz) or 16
(Deutsch kit)
Black circle
with red mark
RO - M - M - B - R - VI O - BLF
C3
Black
J - R - M emb. R - R - VI - MC
Dynashift
C3
10
Black
V-R-N-R-R-N-J-J
M emb. R - MC
Full
Powershift
C4
Black
VC - VI - B - VF - MC - N
Dynashift
C4
Black
J-N
Full
Powershift
C5
10
Black
M-R-J-R-N-O-M-R
Dynashift
C5
10
Black
RO - S - R - V - M - B - VI
Full
Powershift
C6
Black
B - O - O - G - VI - R - RO - BL
C7
13
Transparent
G - BLF - MF - O - VC - J G - VI - B - BL - R - M - RO
C8
Black
BLC - BLF
Dynashift
Except
North America
C8
Black
BLF
Dynashift
North America
C8
Black
Full
Powershift
C9
9 (Ritz) or 16
(Deutsch kit)
Black circle
with green mark
M-M-M-M-V-J-G
C10
Transparent
VF - BE - BLF - VF - R - BLF
Except
North America
C10
Transparent
BLF - BLF - BLF - M BE - RO - R
North America
C11
10
Grey
BL/G - G - S - R - B RO - R - VI
Full
Powershift
C12
Transparent
M emb. R - N
C13
Black
C14
Transparent
R - R - R - N - VI
Issue 1
May 2001
Tractor
Connectors
Number
of ways
10A01.5
Connector
colour
Lead colour
Tractor
Full
Powershift
C15
10
Black
J - R - V - O - BLF - B - R R - VI - N
C16
Transparent
R - G - BE - N
C17
Black
VI - O - R
Standard roof
C17
Brown
O - O - N - VI
High visibility
roof
C18
Black
G - BL - B - O - N
C19
Black
O - N - R - RO
Except
North America
C19
Black
O-N
North America
C21
Black
O - RO - RO
Except
North America
C21
Black
VF - VF - VF - M - RO - VI
North America
C22
Black
N-R
C24
Black
VI - O - RO - R
C25
Black
RO
C26
Black
RO
C27
Black
Dynashift
Except
North America
C27
Black
BLC
Dynashift
North America
C28
Black
M-R-V
C29
Black
O-O-N-N-R
Except
North America
C29
Black
R-N-O
North America
C30
13
Transparent
G - VF - O - R - G - J - M - R
M - B emb. N - J - M - N
Dynashift
C31
13
Transparent
O - BLF - J - R - G - B - VI RO - O - B emb. B
Dynashift
C33
Black
N-J
C34
Black
R-N
C37
Black
R - B - M - G - M - BL
Issue 1
Full
May 2001
10A01.6
Connectors
Number
of ways
Connector
colour
Lead colour
Tractor
C42
Black
VI
Except
North America
C43
Black
M-R
Except
North America
C45
Black
G - VF - J
Full
Powershift
C46
Transparent
B-N
Except
North America
C47
Transparent
M-R-N
C48
Black
N-N
C50
10
Black
R-N-O-M-V-R
B - O - RO
Dynashift
C50
10
Grey
R - B - RO - R - V
BL - O - RO
Full
Powershift
C51
Black
J-R-M
Dynashift
C51
10
Black
O - BLF - R - J - R - V
BLG - RO - S - N
Full
Powershift
C52
Black
V - BL - O - R
Dynashift
C52
Black
B - VI - V - BL - O - RO
Full
Powershift
C53
Grey and black
V-M-B
Full
Powershift
C60
Black
O - R - R - M - I - B - RO - R
Except
North America
C60
Transparent
G - RO - R - O - R - R - M - BE
North America
C62
Transparent
VF - VF - BLF - BLF - BE - R
Except
North America
C62
Black
BLF - BLF - BLF - M

R - RO - BE
North America
C63
Black
G - V - BL - BL - V - R
Except
North America
C63
Black
BL - BL - BL - M - G - RO
North America
C64
Transparent
RO - R
Except
North America
C64
Transparent
RO
North America
C65
Transparent
M-R
Except
North America
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.7
Connectors
Number
of ways
Connector
colour
Lead colour
Tractor
C65
Transparent
RO
North America
C66
Black
R - RO - B - N
Except
North America
C66
Black
N - RO - R/M
North America
C67
Black
N-M-R-B
Except
North America
C67
Black
N-M-R
North America
C68
2x2
Black
BL - BL - N - N
C69
2x2
Black
BL - BL - N - N
C70
Black
VF - V
Except
North America
C70
Black
BLF - B
North America
C71
Black
VF - V
Except
North America
C71
Black
BLF - B
North America
C72
Black
N-R
C73
Black
N-R
C74
Round terminal
C75
Black
R - R - VI - O - RO - N
C76
Black
O - VI - R - RO - N - R
C78
Black
VF - VF
C79
Black with
green adhesive tape
VF - VF
C80
Black
VF
C81
Transparent
VF - N
C82
Black
C83
Black
C84
Black
N-J-V
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.8
B . Dynashift - Cab accessories and
engine equipment (Fig. 1 to 7)
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Starter switch
Air filter
Temperature probe
Water temperature gauge
Water level detector
Ground to be connected (if no water level detector)
Engine oil pressure switch
Thermostart
Injection pump control solenoid
Temperature switch
Thermostart solenoid valve
Dashboard supply
Alternator
Lighting switch
Cab relay
Air conditioned compressor pressure switch
Ventilation unit harness connector
Clock
Roof light
Door switch
Radio harness connector
Starter
Batteries
Power socket
Cigarette lighter connector
Windscreen washer pump
Front windscreen wiper switch
Time delay relay
Front windscreen wiper motor
Rear wiper switch
Rear wiper motor
Indicator lamps
T5 : Alternator charge lamp
T8 : Air filter clogging lamp
T10: Engine oil pressure lamp
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Identification of connectors
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
(Deutsch kit) / black circle
Under bonnet
C2
9 (Ritz) or 16 (Deutsch kit)

/ black circle with red mark
Under bonnet
C3
6 / Black
Under dashboard left-hand side
C6
8 / Black
C10
6 / Transparent
Under right-hand side cab upright
C : Light
F : Dark
Except
North America
C10
8 / Transparent
North America
Emb.: end fitting
C12
2 / Transparent
C13
1 / Black
C14
5 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C16
4 / Transparent
In heating compartment
C17
3 / Black
Standard roof
C17
7 / Marron
High visibility roof
C18
6 / Black
Under dashboard right-hand side
C24
4 / Black
Under right-hand side
C25
1 / Black
Under dashboard
C28
3 / Black
C29
6 / Black
Behind power socket
Except
North America
C29
3 / Black
Behind power socket
North America
C47
3 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C62
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C62
8 / Black
North America
Issue 1
Location
Tractor
Dynashift
Behind starter
May 2001
10A01.9
Air filter vacuum sensor

R
T8
Temperature probe
5a
Engine oil pressure

R
T10
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.10
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Starter switch
Air filter
Temperature probe
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Dashboard supply
Alternator
Lighting switch
Cab relay
Clock
Roof light
Door switch
Starter
Batteries
Power socket
Time delay relay
Rear wiper switch
Rear wiper motor
Indicator lamps
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end fitting
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
(Deutsch kit) / Black circle
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C3
6 / Black
C6
8 / Black
C10
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C10
8 / Transparent
North America
C12
2 / Transparent
C13
1 / Black
C14
5 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C16
4 / Transparent
C17
3 / Black
Standard roof
C17
7 / Brown
C18
6 / Black
C24
4 / Black
C25
1/ Black
Under dashboard
C28
3 / Black
C29
6 / Black
Behind power socket
Except
North America
C29
3 / Black
Behind power socket
North America
C47
3 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C62
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C62
8 /Black
North America
Issue 1
Location
Tractor
Dynashift
Behind starter
May 2001
10A01.11
Thermostart
1
N
R
Injection control and dashboard supply
R
8
1
R
9
11
10
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.12
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Starter switch
Air filter
Temperature probe
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Dashboard supply
Alternator
Lighting switch
Cab relay
Clock
Roof light
Door switch
Starter
Batteries
Power socket
Time delay relay
Rear wiper switch
Rear wiper motor
Indicator lamps
Colour codes
A :
B :
BL :
BE :
G :
I :
J :
M :
N :
O :
R :
RO :
S :
V :
VI :
Silver
White
Blue
Beige
Grey
Ivory
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Salmon
Green
Violet
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end fitting
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C3
6 / Black
C6
8 / Black
C10
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C10
8 / Transparent
North America
C12
2 / Transparent
C13
1 / Black
C14
5 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C16
4 / Transparent
C17
3 / Black
Standard roof
C17
7 / Brown
C18
6 / Black
C24
4 / Black
C25
1/ Black
Under dashboard
C28
3 / Black
C29
6 / Black
Behind power socket
Except
North America
C29
3 / Black
Behind power socket
North America
C47
3 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C62
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C62
8 /Black
North America
Issue 1
Location
Tractor
Dynashift
Behind starter
May 2001
10A01.13
Battery charging
12
T5
1
N
13
14
15
16
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.14
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C3
6 / Black
C6
8 / Black
C10
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C10
8 / Transparent
North America
C12
2 / Transparent
C13
1 / Black
C14
5 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C16
4 / Transparent
C17
3 / Black
Standard roof
C17
7 / Brown
C18
6 / Black
C24
4 / Black
C25
1/ Black
Under dashboard
C28
3 / Black
Indicator lamps
C29
6 / Black
Behind power socket

Except
North America
C29
3 / Black
Behind power socket
North America
C47
3 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C62
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C62
8 /Black
North America
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Starter switch
Air filter
Temperature probe
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Dashboard supply
Alternator
Lighting switch
Cab relay
Clock
Roof light
Door switch
Starter
Batteries
Power socket
Time delay relay
Rear wiper switch
Rear wiper motor
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end fitting
Issue 1
Location
Tractor
Dynashift
Behind starter
May 2001
10A01.15
Accessories
1
N
13
14
20
17
18
19
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.16
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Starter switch
Air filter
Temperature probe
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Dashboard supply
Alternator
Lighting switch
Cab relay
Clock
Roof light
Door switch
Starter
Batteries
Power socket
Time delay relay
Rear wiper switch
Rear wiper motor
Indicator lamps
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end fitting
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C3
6 / Black
C6
8 / Black
C10
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C10
8 / Transparent
North America.
C12
2 / Transparent
C13
1 / Black
C14
5 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C16
4 / Transparent
C17
3 / Black
Standard roof
C17
7 / Brown
C18
6 / Black
C24
4 / Black
C25
1/ Black
Under dashboard
C28
3 / Black
C29
6 / Black
Behind power socket
Except
North America
C29
3 / Black
Behind power socket
North America
C47
3 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C62
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C62
8 /Black
North America
Issue 1
Location
Tractor
Dynashift
Behind starter
May 2001
10A01.17
21
23
30 Amp
22
Cab interior power socket
13
24
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.18
Colour codes
A :
B :
BL :
BE :
G :
I :
J :
M :
N :
O :
R :
RO :
S :
V :
VI :
Silver
White
Blue
Beige
Grey
Ivory
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Salmon
Green
Violet
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C3
6 / Black
C6
8 / Black
C10
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C10
8 / Transparent
North America.
C12
2 / Transparent
C13
1 / Black
C14
5 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C16
4 / Transparent
C17
3 / Black
Standard roof
C17
7 / Brown
C18
6 / Black
C24
4 / Black
C25
1/ Black
Under dashboard
C28
3 / Black
Indicator lamps
C29
6 / Black
Behind power socket

Except
North America
C29
3 / Black
Behind power socket
North America
C47
3 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C62
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C62
8 /Black
North America
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Starter switch
Air filter
Temperature probe
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Dashboard supply
Alternator
Lighting switch
Cab relay
Clock
Roof light
Door switch
Starter
Batteries
Power socket
Time delay relay
Rear wiper switch
Rear wiper motor
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end fitting
Issue 1
Location
Tractor
Dynashift
Behind starter
May 2001
10A01.19
Front windscreen wiper
14
27
25
26
28
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.20
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Starter switch
Air filter
Temperature probe
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Dashboard supply
Alternator
Lighting switch
Cab relay
Clock
Roof light
Door switch
Starter
Batteries
Power socket
Time delay relay
Rear wiper switch
Rear wiper motor
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C3
6 / Black
C6
8 / Black
C10
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C10
8 / Transparent
North America.
C12
2 / Transparent
C13
1 / Black
C14
5 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C16
4 / Transparent
C17
3 / Black
Standard roof
C17
7 / Brown
C18
6 / Black
C24
4 / Black
C25
1/ Black
Under dashboard
C28
3 / Black
C29
6 / Black
Behind power socket
Except
North America
C29
3 / Black
Behind power socket
North America
C47
3 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C62
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C62
8 /Black
North America
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb : end fitting
Indicator lamps
Issue 1
Location
Tractor
Dynashift
Behind starter
May 2001
10A01.21
Rear wiper
14
13
29
30
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.22
C . Full Powershift Engine equipment (Fig. 8)
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
45.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Batteries
Injection pump solenoid
Starter
Alternator
Starter relay
Fuel gauge
Engine oil pressure gauge
Tachometer and hourmeter
Water level sensor
Engine oil pressure sensor
Temperature probe
Fuel level sensor
Fuel level sensor (additional tank)
Diode and resistor located behind fuse box
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
Location
C1
9 (Ritz) or
16 (Deutsch kit) / Black circle
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C60
8 / Black
Except
North America
C60
8 / Transparent
North America
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end fitting
Indicator lamps
T5
T8
T10
T23
T28
:
:
:
:
:
Alternator charge lamp

Air filter clogging lamp
Engine oil pressure lamp
5 bar booster pressure lamp
Coolant level lamp
a
b
k
w
: Dashboard harness
: Engine harness
: Additional tank harness
: Front and rear lighting harness
Issue 1
May 2001
Tractor
10A01.23
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.24
D . Full Powershift - Cab equipment
(Fig. 9)
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
6.
13.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
22b
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Batteries
Alternator
Lighting switch
Air conditioned pressure switch
Air conditioned compressor
Cab relay
Radio
Digital clock
Digital clock supply with battery cut out
Roof light
Door switch
Water pump
Water pump switch
Ventilation switch
Blower motor
Air conditioned temperature switch
Battery cut out
Interior power socket
Console, armrest lighting (roof)
Parking brake switch
Rear wiper switch
Cigarette lighter
Windscreen wiper time delay
Windscreen wiper switch
Rear wiper motor
Parking brake sound signal
Autotronic2 or DCC / TC batteries supply
Abbreviations
a
b
c
h
i
j
: Dashboard harness
: Engine harness
: Console harness
: Battery cut out harness
: Rear wiper harness
: Lead for battery cut out (radio, clock and roof light
supply)
: Door switch harness for roof light
: Windscreen washer pump lead
: Batteries harness
: Interior power socket harness
: Roof dashboard harness (lower part)
: Roof dashboard harness (upper part)
: Interior 25 A power socket harness
: Cigarette lighter harness
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C3
6 / Black
C4
2 / Black
C6
8 / Black
C8
1 / Black
Under bonnet
C12
2 / Transparent
C13
1 / Black
C14
5 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C16
4 / Transparent
C17
3 / Black
Standard roof
C17
7 / Brown
C18
6 / Black
C19
8 / Black
Behind radio compartment
Except
North America
C19
2 / Black
Behind radio compartment
North America
C : Light
F : Dark
C22
2 / Black
Under pneumatic seat
C24
4 / Black
Emb.: end fitting
C25
1/ Black
Under dashboard
C26
1 / Black
Under dashboard
C28
3 / Black
C29
6 / Black
Behind power socket
Except
North America
C29
3 / Black
Behind power socket
North America
C33
2 / Black
Under Autotronic2 or TC
C34
2 / Black
Under Autotronic2 or TC
l
m
o
p
t
u
z
aa
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
CB : 4WD and differential lock switch

CE : Clutch switch
GY : To flashing beacon
M : Cab ground terminal block
PS : Pneumatic seat (depending on version)
RE : Electronic Linkage
Issue 1
Location
Tractor
Dynashift
Under cab upright right-hand side

Behind starter
May 2001
Connectors
Ro.
emb.R
Location
Tractor
C47
3 / Transparent
To ELC calculator
C48
2 / Black
On roof light
C60
8 / Black
Except
North America
C60
8 / Transparent
North America
22
24
23
+AC
MF
21
25
10A01.25
Number of ways /
colour
3
G
20
13
26
2
27
RE
30
5
CB
28
19
29
18
CE
31
13
32
22b
39
33
42
M
34
PS
RE
RE
37
38
41
RE
35
40
GY
36
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.26
E . Lighting layout (except North
America) (Fig. 10)
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
23.
43.
Starter switch
Horn
Front left headlight
Front right headlight
Right rear tail light / stop light
Left rear tail light / stop light
Stop light switch
Lighting controller
Roof mounted front left headlight
Roof mounted front right headlight
Registration plate light
Roof mounted headlights switch
Lighting switch
Front right sidelight
Front left sidelight
Trailer lighting socket
Lighting control unit
Indicator lamps
Colour codes
A :
B :
BL :
BE :
G :
I :
J :
M :
N :
O :
R :
RO :
S :
V :
VI :
Silver
White
Blue
Beige
Grey
Ivory
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Salmon
Green
Violet
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end fitting
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
Location
C1
9 (Ritz) or 16
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C7
13 / Transparent
C9

/ Black circle with
green mark
C10
6 / Transparent
C60
Tractor
Under dashboard
Under bonnet
Except
North America
8 / Black
Except
North America
C62
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C63
6 / Black
Except
North America
C64
2 / Transparent
Behind rail mounted light
Except
North America
C65
2 / Transparent
Except
North America
C66
4 / Black
Behind left tail light
Except
North America
C67
4 / Black
Behind right tail light
Except
North America
C72
2 / Black
Behind rear top panel
C73
2 / Black
C75
6 / Black
Beneath dashboard right-hand side
C76
6 / Black
Beneath right-hand side cab upright
T17 : Headlights on lamp
Issue 1
May 2001
Except
North America
10A01.27
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.28
F . Direction indicator lamps (except
North America) (Fig. 11)
Parts list
1.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
23.
43.
Starter switch
Rear right indicator lamp
Rear left indicator lamp
Front right indicator lamp
Front left indicator lamp
Flasher unit
Emergency lights switch
Trailer lights socket
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or
Under bonnet
C2

black circle with red mark
Under bonnet
C60
8 / Black
C64
C : Light
F : Dark
Indicator lamps
T16 : Direction indicator lamp
T18 : Direction indicator lamp for second trailer
T19 : Direction indicator lamp for first trailer
Emb: end fitting
Issue 1
Location
Tractor
Except
North America
2 / Transparent
Except
North America
C65
2 / Transparent
Except
North America
C66
4 / Black
Behind left tail light
Except
North America
C67
4 / Black
Behind right tail light
Except
North America
May 2001
10A01.29
T16
T16
T19
T18
21
20
43
16
18
23
17
19
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.30
G . Work lights and flashing beacons
(except North America) (Fig. 12)
Parts list
13.
22.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
34.
44.
Lighting switch
Rear right wing work light
Rear left wing work light
Rear roof work lights
Front work light on right-hand rail
Front roof work lights
Front work light on left-hand rail
Front work light on right-hand footstep
Front work light on left-hand footstep
Front and rear work lights switch
Flashing beacons
Flashing beacon(s) switch
Wing and rail work lights switch
Footstep work lights switch
To console lighting
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
C : Light
F : Dark
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
Location
C1
9 (Ritz) or
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C9

black circle with green mark
Under bonnet
C10
6 / Transparent
C16
4 / Transparent
C21
3 / Black
Except
North America
C62
6 / Transparent
Except
North America
C63
6 / Black
Except
North America
C68
2 x 2 / Black
Behind left-hand roof light
C69
2 x 2 / Black
Behind right-hand roof light
C70
2 / Black
Except
North America
C71
2 / Black
Except
North America
C74
1 / Round terminal
C79
2 / Black with green mark
C80
1 / Black
Behind left footstep light
C81
2 / Transparent
Behind right footstep light
C82
1 / Black
Behind left wing light
C83
1 / Black
Behind right wing light
Emb : end fitting
Issue 1
Behind flashing beacon

Behind right rail light
May 2001
Tractor
Except
North America
10A01.31
13
29
26
35
34
31
31
22
27
25
28
24
30
32
32
44
33
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.32
H . Dynashift - Full lighting system
(North America) (Fig. 13)
Abbreviations
EA : To rear windscreen wiper switch
JC : To fuel gauge
TB : To dashboard
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C3
6 / Black
C6
8 / Black
C7
13 / Transparent
C9
9 (Rits) ou 16 (kit Deutsch)

/ Rond noir repre vert
C10
8 / Transparent
C16
4 / Transparent
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
7.
8.
9.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
43.
44.
Starter switch
Horn
Stop light switch
Lighting controller
Roof mounted front left headlight
Right rear direction indicator lamp
Left rear direction indicator lamp
Front right direction indicator lamp
Front left direction indicator lamp
Flasher unit
Power socket
Rear roof work light
Front right rail light
Front roof work light
Front left rail light
Front right footstep work light
Front left footstep work light
Front and rear roof work lights switch
Flashing beacon
Flashing beacon switch
Rear low work lights switch
Front rail and footstep work lights switch
Rear right tail light and direction indicator lamp
Rear left tail light and direction indicator lamp
To console lighting
Indicator lamps
T17 : Headlights lamp
T18 : Second trailer direction indicator lamp
Colour codes
A :
B :
BL :
BE :
G :
I :
J :
M :
N :
O :
R :
RO :
S :
V :
VI :
Silver
White
Blue
Beige
Grey
Ivory
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Salmon
Green
Violet
Location
Tractor
Dynashift
Under dashboard
Under bonnet
North America
C21
6 / Black
North America
C : Light
F : Dark
C60
8 / Transparent
North America
Emb. : end fitting
C62
8 / Black
North America
C63
6 / Black
North America
C64
1/ Transparent
Behind rail light
North America
C65
1 / Transparent
Behind rail light
North America
C66
3 / Black
Behind left rear light
North America
C67
3 / Black
Behind right rear light
North America
C68
2 x 2 / Black
Behind left roof light
C69
2 x 2 / Black
Behind right roof light
C70
2 / Black
North America
C71
2 / Black
North America
C74
1 / Round terminal
C78
2 / Black
Behind left rail light
C79
C80
1 / Black
a :
b:
g:
t :
u:
w:
x :
Dashboard harness
Engine harness
Roof harness
Roof dashboard harness (lower part)
Roof dashboard harness (upper part)
Front and rear lighting harness
Roof lighting harness
Issue 1
May 2001
North America
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
Location
C81
2 / Transparent
C82
1 / Black
C83
1 / Black
Tractor
10A01.33
13
32
33
43
EA
21
20
T16 T16 T17 T18
35
31
34
1
44
Auto 2
7
16
18
36
25
29
22
26
27
23
28
24
TB
JC
30
25
37
19
17
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2001
10A01.34
I . Full lighting system - Full
Powershift (North America) (Fig. 14)
Parts list
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.
8.
13.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
43.
44.
Starter switch
Horn
Stop light switch
Lighting controller
Lighting switch
Right rear direction indicator lamp
Left rear direction indicator lamp
Front right direction indicator lamp
Front left direction indicator lamp
Flasher unit
Power socket
Rear roof work light
Front right rail light
Front roof work light
Front left rail light
Front right footstep work light
Front left footstep work light
Front and rear roof work lights switch
Flashing beacon
Rear low work lights switch
Front rail and footstep work lights switch
Rear right tail light and direction indicator lamp
Rear left tail light and direction indicator lamp
To console lighting
Indicator lamps
T17 : Headlights lamp
T18 : Second trailer direction indicator lamp
Abbreviations
EA : To rear wiper switch
JC : To fuel gauge
TB : To dashboard
Connectors
Number of ways /
colour
C1
9 (Ritz) or
Under bonnet
C2

Under bonnet
C6
8 / Black
C7
13 / Transparent
C9

black circle with green mark
C10
8 / Transparent
C16
4 / Transparent
C21
6 / Black
North America
C60
8 / Transparent
North America
C62
8 / Black
North America
C63
6 / Black
North America
C64
1 / Transparent
Behind rail light
North America
C65
1 / Transparent
Behind rail light
North America
C66
3 / Black
Behind left rear light
North America
C67
3 / Black
Behind right rear light
North America
C68
2 x 2 / Black
Behind left roof light
C69
2 x 2 / Black
Behind right roof light
C70
2 / Black
North America
C71
2 / Black
North America
C74
1 / Round terminal
C78
2 / Black
Behind left rail light
C79
C80
1 / Black
C81
2 / Transparent
Colour codes
A
B
BL
BE
G
I
J
M
N
O
R
RO
S
V
VI
: Silver
: White
: Blue
: Beige
: Grey
: Ivory
: Yellow
: Brown
: Black
: Orange
: Red
: Pink
: Salmon
: Green
: Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark
Location
Tractor

Under dashboard
Under bonnet
North America
Emb.: end fitting
a :
b:
g:
t :
u:
w:
x :
Dashboard harness
Engine harness
Roof harness
Roof dashboard harness (lower part)
Roof dashboard harness (upper part)
Front and rear lighting harness
Roof lighting harness
Issue 1
May 2001
32
33
Number of ways /
colour
Location
C82
1 / Black
C83
1 / Black
Tractor
10A01.35
13
EA
Connectors
43
21
8
20
T16 T16 T17
T18
35
31
34
1
44
7
18
16
36
25
29
22
26
27
23
28
24
TB
JC
30
25
37
19
17
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 14
15
25
7.5
7.5
16
17
18
10
11
15
10
15
25
15
12
15
(+P)
(+P)
14
30
(+P)
25
25
10
15
25
15
25
7.5
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
A 5 A fuse, located on the battery cut out (if fitted) protects

the clock.
10
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
13
A 30 A fuse located beside the starter, protects the interior

power socket.
25
15
30
10
7,5
7,5
7,5
10
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
Front work lights

Starter relay
Cigarette lighter
Front wiper and washer
Cab air conditioning, radio, clock, roof light
Rear wiper
Seat with pneumatic suspension
Dynashift control lever
ELC Alternator charge lamp
Cab relay, 4WD and differential lock switch
Dashboard (digital display) Injection pump
Parking brake buzzer Interior power socket, Datatronic, Hare / Tortoise, Power take off, ELC switches
Stop lights
Stop light switch
Left and right direction indicator lamps
Horn
Front left sidelight and rear left sidelight, Lighting relay control
Front right sidelight and rear right sidelight, Registration plate light
Lighting of armrest buttons and switches
Rear work lights
Dipped beams
Flashing beacon switches
Emergency lights, additional work lights (if fitted)
Headlights
Additional work lights (if fitted)
24
7.5
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
23
30
25
3
30
25
30
15
10
5
7,5
10
15
25
22
30
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
A 3 A fuse located under the ELC console protects the

ELC calculator (+ AC).
21
Functions protected
20
Amperage
15
Fuse
reference
19
10
Note: Always replace fuses with fuses of the same amperage
There are also three fuses placed in the battery compartment:

- a 5 A fuse protects the front power take off (if fitted)
- a 7.5 A fuse protects the ELC
- a 15 A fuse protects the Autotronic 2 unit.
25
J . Dynashift Fuses (except North America) (Fig. 15)
25
10A01.36
Fig.15
+P
=
+AC =
Permanent
+ after contact
Note :
- Fuse F7 : If no fuse, the pneumatic seat function is protected by fuse F12
- Fuse F11: Depending on assembly, it may be 15, 20 or 30 A
- Fuse F21: Depending on assembly, it may be 7.5 or 15 A
Issue 1
May 2001

10A01.37
+P
=
+AC =
(+P)
(+P)
Permanent
+ after contact
Note :
- Depending on assembly, the functions of the Datatronic, ELC and power take off are protected by fuse F10
or fuse F12.
Issue 1
May 2001
15
30
7.5
7.5
14
15
16
17
18
10
11
12
30
25
30
15
(+P)
25
30
10
7,5
25
15
30
7.5
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

the clock.
10
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
13

power socket.
25
15
30
10
7,5
7,5
7,5
7,5
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
10
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
24
15
10
30
25
23
30
F10
F11
F12
Front work lights

Starter relay
Cigarette lighter
Cab air conditioning; radio; clock; roof light
Rear wiper
Transmission controller
ELC; Power take off stop
Park Lock; Clutch switches (top and bottom); Left and right neutral
lever switch.
Power take off; ELC; Parking brake switch; Interior power socket;
Pneumatic seat suspension; Datatronic
Stop lights
Stop light switch; DCC braking information
Horn
Front left sidelight and rear left sidelight; Lighting relay control
Front right sidelight and rear right sidelight; Registration plate light;
Rear work lights
Dipped beams
Headlights
10
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
22
30
30
3
30
25
30
15
15
3
15
21
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9

Functions protected
20
Amperage
15
Fuse
reference
19
15
30

- a 15 A fuse protects the TC.
K . Full Powershift Fuses (except North America) (Fig. 16)
30
Fig.16
15
15
7.5
7.5
15
16
17
18
10
11
10
20
14
25
25
15
12
30
(+P)
(+P)
25
(+P)
7.5
30
20
10
25
15
15

the clock.
10
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
13

power socket.
25
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
10
15
3
10
7,5
7,5
7,5
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
Front work lights

Starter relay
Cigarette lighter
Cab air conditioning, radio, clock, roof light
Rear wiper
Seat with pneumatic suspension
ELC Alternator charge lamp
Parking brake buzzer Interior power socket, Datatronic, Hare /
Tortoise, Power take off, ELC switches
Stop lights
Stop light switch
Horn
Front left sidelight and rear left sidelight, Lighting relay control
Front right sidelight and rear right sidelight, Registration plate light
Rear work lights
Dipped beams
Headlights
24
7.5
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
23
30
30
3
30
25
30
15
10
5
7,5
10
25
25
22
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12

21
Functions protected
20
Amperage
15
Fuse
reference
19
10

- a 15 A fuse protects the Autotronic 2 unit.
30
L . Dynashift Fuses (North America) (Fig. 17)
30
10A01.38
Fig.17
+P
=
+AC =
Permanent
+ after contact
Note :
- Fuse F7 : If no fuse, the pneumatic seat function is protected by fuse F12
- Fuse F11: Depending on assembly, it may be 15, 20 or 30 A
Issue 1
May 2001

10A01.39
(+P)
(+P)
Permanent
+ after contact
Note :
- Depending on assembly, the functions of the Datatronic, ELC and power take off are protected by fuse F10
or fuse F12.
Issue 1
May 2001
15
15
7.5
16
17
18
10
11
12
25
15
(+P)
7.5
30
20
10
25
15
30
15
30
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
14
30
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
25
10
7,5
7,5
7,5
7.5
F15
F16
F17
F18

the clock.
10
(+AC)
(+AC)
13

power socket.
25
15
3
10
F13
F14
24
10
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
23
15
10
30
25
22
30
F10
F11
F12
Front work lights

Starter relay
Cigarette lighter
Cab air conditioning; radio; clock; roof light
Rear wiper
Transmission controller
ELC; Power take off stop
Park Lock; Clutch switches (top and bottom); Left and right neutral
lever switch
Power take off; ELC; Parking brake switch; Interior power socket;
Pneumatic seat suspension; Datatronic
Stop lights
Stop light switch;
DCC braking information
Horn
Front left sidelight and rear left sidelight; Lighting relay control
Front right sidelight and rear right sidelight; Registration plate light;
Rear work lights
Dipped beams
Headlights
21
20
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
20
30
3
30
25
30
15
15
3
15

19
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
+P
=
+AC =
Functions protected
Amperage
30
Fuse
reference
15
15

- a 15 A fuse protects the TC.
M . Full Powershift Fuses (North America) (Fig. 18)
30
Fig.18
Electricity
10A02.1
10 A02 Deutsch electrical equipment
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Engine and cab equipment - Autotronic 3 _________________
12
C.
Engine and cab equipment - Powershift ___________________
30
D.
Lighting equipment - Europe _____________________________
50
E.
Lighting equipment - North America ______________________
56
F.
Location of fuses - Dynashift (Europe) _____________________
62
G.
Location of fuses - Dynashift (North America) _____________
63
H.
Location of fuses - Powershift (Europe) ___________________
64
I.
Location of fuses - Powershift (North America). ____________
65
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.2
Issue 1
Electricity
May 2002
Electricity
A . General
The 8200 Z1 series tractors are equipped with a 12-volt
negative ground electrical circuit. The charging is provided by an 120 amp alternator (80 amp for platform
tractors).
The alternator contains an integrated rectifier and charge
regulator. The alternator fitted on the right-hand side of
the engine is driven by a belt from the crankshaft pulley.
The starter, fitted on the right-hand side of the motor, is
of the pre-engaged type.
The starter safety switch, placed beneath the clutch
pedal, allows the starter solenoid to be activated only
when the clutch pedal is fully pressed.
The batteries are mounted on a stable or rotating base
(depending on option) behind the right-hand side footstep.
10A02.3
Description of the Deutsch connector

Since the beginning of January 2001, a new electrical
connection system has been introduced on all tractors
(6200 / 8200). This replaces the former system (Rits).
The tractors with this new electrical connection system
can be recognised by:
- the reduced number of connectors
- a new fuse box (32 fuse locations)
- improved harness protection (ringed sheath)
- a positive terminal (1) on the cab side
- the engine / dashboard junction (2)
- the lighting / dashboard junction (3) fixed on the front of
the cab.
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.4
Electricity
Characteristics
Colour codes
Battery
8210 and 8220
Quantity
Type
Cold start efficiency
Voltage
Capacity
2
Maintenance free
420 A (-18 C)
120 min
12 V
66 Ah
8240 to 8280
Quantity
Type
Cold start efficiency
Voltage
Capacity
2
Maintenance free
505 A (-18 C)
180 min
12 V
105 Ah
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
C : Light
F : Dark
Alternator
Cab
Make
Type
Maximum output
Regulator
Regulator voltage
Iskra
AAK
120 A
built-in
14.2 V
Cab (depending on options)

Make
Type
Maximum output
Regulator
Regulator voltage
Iskra
AAK
80 A
built-in
14.2 V
Starter
8210 to 8280
Make
Model
Voltage
Type
Issue 1
Iskra
(3 kW)
12 V
Pre-engaged
May 2002
Emb.: end
Electricity
Note: One connector may have a different number of
wires in relation to the number of channels.
Example: Connector C3: 6 channels and 5 wires
CD1 M - Engine harness / dashboard harness junction
- channels: 31
- colour: Black
- wires: B - B - B - B - B - B - B - B - B - B - B - B - B
-B- B-B- B-B- B-B- R-M-R
- location: front of the cab
- for: Tractors 8210 - 8220

- channels: 31
- colour: Black
- for: Tractors 8240 8250 Dynashift

- channels: 31
- colour: Black
- for: Tractors 8240 Full Powershift

- channels: 31
- colour: Black
- for: Tractors 8245 to 8280 Full Powershift
CD1 C - Engine harness / dashboard harness junction

- channels: 31
- colour: Black
- wires: RO - G - G - R - A - G - R - BLF - N - R - R - VI
- M - N - R - B - O - V - G - VI - O - B - VC - BLF - J - O
-V-G
- for: all countries except North America
10A02.5
CD1 C - Engine harness / dashboard harness junction

- channels: 31
- colour: Black
- wires: RO - G - G - R - A - G - R - BLF - R - MF - VI - RO
- M - B - O - V - G - VI - O - B - VC - BLF - J - J - V - G
- for: North America only
CD2 - Lighting harness / dashboard harness junction

- channels: 21
- colour: Black
- wires: R - R - RO - RO - BLF - MC - R - B end N - B end
N - N - RO - I - BLC - RO - O - O
- for: All countries except North America
CD2 - Lighting harness / dashboard harness junction

- channels: 21
- colour: Black
- wires: VF - R - R - G - M - RO - R - VF - BE - BLC - V
- VF - J - O
- for: North America only
CD3 - Autotronic 3 harness / dashboard harness

junction
- channels: 47
- colour: Black
- wires: N - MF - M - R - R - J - BLF - VI - V - M - VI - O
- B end B - BLC - BLF - J - BLC - J - BLC - J - N - J - VI
- RO - MF - R - B - N - MF - R - B end N - R - VI - G - VF
- O - R - G - J - J - B - BL - O - BLC - G - R - J
- location: on top of Autotronic 3
- for: Dynashift tractors all countries
C3 - Console / dashboard harness junction

- channels: 6
- colour: Black
- wires: J - M - VI - R - R
- location: under dashboard, left-hand side
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.6
C3 - Console / dashboard harness junction
- channels: 10
- colour: Black
- wires: VI - V - J - R - R - R- R - J - M
- for: Full powershift tractors all countries
C11 - Armrest console cab electronics harness junction

- channels: 10
- colour: White
- wires: J - G - BL/G - S - VI - R - V - R - B - RO
- location: to ELC calculator
- for: Full Powershift tractors all countries
C4 - Dashboard harness junction

- channels: 6
- colour: Black
- wires: VF - B - N - VC
- for: tractors all countries
C12 - Rear wiper harness junction

- channels: 2
- colour: Black
- wires: M end - R - N
- location: under right upright in cab
C5 - Armrest / dashboard harness junction

- channels: 10
- colour: Black
- wires: N - R - N - M - R - M - V - V - M
- location: under dashboard, right-hand side
C14 - Electronic linkage harness junction

- channels: 5
- colour: Transparent
- wires: VI - R - R - N - R
C5 - Armrest / dashboard harness junction

- channels: 10
- colour: Grey
- wires: N - R - N - M - R - M - V - V - M

- channels: 5
- wires: R - R - N - R
C8 - Windscreen washer pump junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: B
- location: to windscreen washer pump
C15 - Armrest console cab electronics harness junction

- channels: 10
- colour: Black
- wires: B - O - M - V- M - V
C10 - Roof harness / dashboard junction to roof

- channels: 6
- wires: VF - BLF - BLF - VF - BE - R
- location: under right upright in cab
- for: tractors all countries except North America
C16 - Dashboard to roof harness junction

- channels: 4
- wires: BE - N - R - G
- location: in heating compartment
C10 - Roof harness / dashboard junction to roof

- channels: 8
- wires: BLF - BLF - BLF - R - RO - BE - M
- location: under cab upright, right-hand side
- for: tractors North America only
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.7
C17 - Ventilation unit harness junction

- channels: 3
- colour: Black
- wires: O - VI - R
- for: standard tractors all countries
C25 - Junction
- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: RO
- location: under dashboard
C17 - Ventilation unit harness junction

- channels: 6
- colour: Brown
- wires: V - O - O - N
- for: high visibility tractors all countries
C28 - Rear wiper harness junction

- channels: 3
- colour: Black
- wires: M - R - V
C18 - Windscreen wiper harness junction

- channels: 6
- colour: Black
- wires: G - N - B - BL - O
C29 - Power socket harness junction

- channels: 6
- colour: Black
- wires: R - R - N - N - R
- location: behind power socket
C19 - Radio harness junction

- channels: 8
- colour: Black
- wires: N - O - R - RO
- location: behind radio

- channels: 5
- colour: Black
- wires: RO - G - B - M - V1
C19 - Radio harness junction

- channels: 2
- colour: Black
- wires: N - O
- location: behind radio
- for: North American tractors only
C37 - Autotronic 3 / transmission harness junction

- channels: 31
- colour: Black
- wires: VF - B - R - I - G - B - J - BLF - N - N - BLC - VC
- MC - N - O - RO - N - N - J - VI - J - M - R - R - VF
- location: on top of Autotronic 3
C22 - Pneumatic seat junction

- channels: 2
- colour: Black
- wires: R - N
- location: behind pneumatic seat
C37 - Transmission harness junction

- channels: 6
- colour: Black
- wires: BL - M - G - M - B - R
- location: under dashboard

- channels: 4
- colour: Black
- wires: VI - O - RO - R
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.8
Electricity
C42 - Cab / console electrical junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: B
C62 - Dashboard harness junction

- channels: 6
- wires: V - BE - BL - BL - G
- location: under dashboard, right-hand side
- for: platform tractors
C46 - Proportional PTO harness junction

- channels: 2
- wires: B - N
C63 - Roof light / dashboard junction

- channels: 6
- colour: Black
- wires: G - BLF - VF - VF - BLF
C47 - Cigarette lighter junction

- channels: 3
- wires: MC - R - N
- location: behind cigarette lighter
C63 - Roof light / dashboard junction

- channels: 6
- colour: Black
- wires: RO - M - BLF - BLF - BLF - G
C48 - Roof light

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: N
- location: on roof light
C64 - Front left travelling light harness junction

- channels: 2
- wires: RO - R
- location: behind front left travelling light
C52- Electronic linkage harness junction

- channels: 10
- colour: Grey
- wires: R - G - N - J - BL - V - B - R
C65 - Front right travelling light harness junction

- channels: 2
- wires: M - R
- location: behind front right travelling light
C52- Electronic linkage harness junction

- channels: 10
- colour: Grey
- wires: R - G - N - J - BL - V - B - R - VI - B
C66 - Rear left travelling light harness junction

- channels: 4
- colour: Black
- wires: RO - R - N - B
- location: behind rear left travelling light
C53 - CAN connector

- channels: 3
- colour: Black and grey
- wires: M - B - V
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.9
C66 - Rear left travelling light harness junction

- channels: 3
- colour: Black
- wires: R - N - RO
- location: behind rear left travelling light
C70 - Rear left work light harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: BLF
- location: behind rear left work light
C67 - Rear right travelling light harness junction

- channels: 4
- colour: Black
- wires: B - N - M - R
- location: behind rear right travelling light
C71 - Rear right work light harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: VF
- location: behind rear right work light
C67 - Rear right travelling light harness junction

- channels: 3
- colour: Black
- wires: R - N - M
- location: behind rear right travelling light
C71 - Rear right work light harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: BLF
- location: behind rear right work light
C68 - Front left work light harness junction

- channels: 2
- colour: Black
- wires: BLF - N
- location: behind front left work light
C72 - Registration plate light

- channels: 2
- colour: Black
- wires: R - N
- location: behind rear roof peak
C69 - Front right work light junction

- channels: 2
- colour: Black
- wires: BLF - N
- location: behind front right work light
C73 - Registration plate light

- channels: 2
- colour: Black
- wires: R - N
- location: behind rear roof peak
C70 - Left rear work light harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: V
- location: behind rear left work light
C74 - Flashing beacon junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: G
- location: behind flashing beacon
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.10
Electricity

- channels: 6
- colour: Black
- wires: O - RO - N - R - VI - R
- for: Full Powershift tractors all countries except North
America
C80 - Front left work light on footstep harness

junction
- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: O
- location: behind front left work light on footstep
C76 - Dashboard lighting to roof harness junction

- channels: 6
- colour: Black
- wires: O - VI - R - RO - N - R
C80 - Front left work light on footstep harness

junction
- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: VF
- location: behind front left work light on footstep
C78 - Front left rail work light harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: RO
- location: behind front left rail work light
C78 - Front left rail work light harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: VF
- location: behind front left rail work light
C79 - Front right rail work light harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: RO
- location: behind front right rail work light
C79 - Front right rail work light harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: VF
- location: behind front right rail work light
Issue 1
May 2002
C81 - Front right work light on footstep harness

junction
- channels: 2
- colour: Black
- wires: N - O
- location: behind front right work light on footstep
C81 - Front right work light on footstep harness

junction
- channels: 2
- colour: Black
- wires: N - VF
- location: behind front right work light on footstep
C82 - Work light on left wing harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: RO
- location: behind work light on left wing
Electricity
10A02.11
C82 - Work light on left wing harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: G
- location: behind work light on left wing
C83 - Work light on right wing harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: RO
- location: behind work light on right wing
C83 - Work light on right wing harness junction

- channels: 1
- colour: Black
- wires: G
- location: behind work light on right wing
C84 - Front lights harness junction

- channels: 3
- colour: Black
- wires: B - B - N
- location: to front lights
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.12
B . Engine and cab equipment Autotronic 3 (Fig. 2 to 10)
Parts list
1.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
14.
16.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
Starter switch
Water temperature indicator
Water temperature sensor
Alternator
To electronic linkage
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Air conditioning pressure switch
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Windscreen wiper motor
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
To ground if no water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Cold start solenoid valve
Ventilation harness junction
Wiper time delay relay
Front of the cab (+) terminal
Front axle connector
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Trailer socket reversing light
Reversing light junction
Electricity
Colour codes
Designation of connectors (for more details see
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
CD1 M/C - Engine harness / dashboard harness
junction
CD2
- Lighting harness / dashboard harness
junction
CD3
- Autotronic 3 harness / dashboard harness
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
C3
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47
- Dashboard / console harness junction

- Windscreen washer junction
- Dashboard to roof harness junction
- Rear wiper harness junction
- Electronic linkage harness junction
- Ventilation unit harness junction
- Windscreen wiper harness junction
- Junction
- Cigarette lighter junction
Indicator lights
T5 : Alternator charge indicator light
T8 : Clogging indicator light
T10 : Engine oil filter clogging indicator light
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.13
CD1 M/C
P8
P8
Ro
Tb-C01
Tb-B05
T8
7
N
Temperature probe
B
10
P1
P1
CD1 M/C
Tb-B03
87
P7
P7
BL.F
88
CD1 M/C
Engine oil pressure
B
11
P5
P5
Tb-A05
T10
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.14
Parts list
1.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
14.
16.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
Starter switch
Alternator
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
CD2
junction
CD3
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
C3
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.15
1
CD1 M/C
Thermostart
+P
2
P2
P2
89
94
P3
P3
30
F5
Injection control
CD1 M/C
B
P9
P9
P10
P10
1
R
14
+P
1
94
2
3
+AC
5
R
B
90
91
Fig. 3
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.16
Parts list
1.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
14.
16.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
Starter switch
Alternator
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
CD2
junction
CD3
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
C3
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.17
F18
7.5
Battery charging
Vi
Vi
CD1 M/C
B
12
6-D+ ALT
Vi
P6
C14-04
C3-03
Vi
Vi
Tb-C03
T5
C3-03
16
10
F12
30
F9
R
6
M
+P
20
Ro
3
4
M.F
10
53
+ACC
94
5
F25
M.F
N Ro
M.F
22
92
C17-03 C17-02
C17-01
Issue 1
Vi
O R
P4
P4
C24-01
C24-04
C24-02
May 2002
Vi
O
Vi
Ventilation
CD1 M/C
C24-01
C24-04
C24-02
Fig. 4

10A02.18
Parts list
1.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
14.
16.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
Starter switch
Alternator
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
CD2
junction
CD3
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
C3
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.19
10
15
10

F27
F25
96
97
P3 P1 P8
P1A P2A
R
6
53
5
P2 P7
P1B P2B
N
R
93
M
+P
2
+AC
4
5
1
R
P1 P2
CD1 M/C
P3
P24
M
P4
95
P5
P7
P8
P6
P24
26
P26
27
B
29
M
P25
25
R
V
P27
28
P28
G
O
P29
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.20
Parts list
1.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
14.
16.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
Starter switch
Alternator
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
CD2
junction
CD3
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
C3
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.21
F9
10
30
F12
10
30
F17
Accessories
F25
94
1
R
M
+P
2
53
Ro
+AC
20
M.F
M.F
M.F
N Ro
M.F
Ro
C25
C25
Ro
Ro
C24-03
Ro
O
C24-03
C24-04
C24-02
C24-02
18
19
ONR R
C24-04
49
Ro
Ro
50
N
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.22
Parts list
1.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
14.
16.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
Starter switch
Alternator
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
CD2
junction
CD3
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
C3
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.23
30
F1
P-04
40
P-04
10
Power socket inside cab
O
F20
R
N
N
N
C03-04
C03-04
+P
94
2
1
3
4
+AC
30
10
Cigarette lighter
F17
R
6
94
+P
2
53
F24
3
4
M.F
M.F
R
31
C47-01
C47-02
C47-03
C03-02
C03-02
C03-06
C03-06
Issue 1
Fig. 7
May 2002

10A02.24
Parts list
1.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
14.
16.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
Starter switch
Alternator
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
CD2
junction
CD3
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
C3
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.25
10
F3
Fuel heater and pneumatic seat
CD1 M/C
P12
99
P12
94
M
+P
+AC
1
R
P-01
P-01
98
N
F4
CD2
Reversing light
PIN A
BL
PIN A
BL
94
+P
+AC
1
R
BL
100
CD3
P40
101
N
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 8

10A02.26
Parts list
1.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
14.
16.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
Starter switch
Alternator
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
CD2
junction
CD3
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
C3
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.27
F9
25
F10
10
Electricity
Windscreen wiper
1
94
M
+P
2
1
Ro
+AC
20
M.F
N Ro
M.F
G
BL
B
M
Vi
93
CD1 M/C
38
22
C8
P22
BL
27
43
C18-01
C18-02
C18-03
C18-04
C18-06
B
BL
O
G
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.28
Parts list
1.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
14.
16.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
Starter switch
Alternator
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
CD2
junction
CD3
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
C3
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.29
F9
10
Rear wiper
10
15
F11
F25
94
M
+P
2
1
Ro
53
+AC
3
4
20
M.F
M.F
N Ro
M.F
C10-02
C10-02
M EMB R
R
C16-02
C16-03
C12
C12
C16-02
C16-03
36
M V
C12
C12
C28-02
C28-03
C28-01
C28-03
C28-02
M
C28-01
N
V
R
J
P4
P3
P2
P1
28
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.30
C . Engine and cab equipment Powershift (Fig. 11 to 20)
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Dashboard harness junction
- Windscreen washer pump junction
- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.31
P8
Ro
Tb-F.f
T8
7
CD1 M/C
Temperature probe
10
P1
Tb-C.f
Tb-B03
87
CD1 M/C
P1
BL.F
P5
88
Engine oil pressure
11
Tb-B.g
T10
CD1 M/C
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.32
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.33
Thermostart
M
+P
2
1
89
P2
P3
94
4
5
CD1 M/C
30
F5
Injection control
14
P9
R
10
P10
M
+P
2
1
5
CD1 M/C
94
+ AC
90
91
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.34
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.35
7,5
F18
Battery charging
R
12
6-D+ ALT
P6
Vi
CD1 M/C
1
+P
2
1
+ ACC
3
4
5
F9
Ventilation
F12
M
+P
2
1
R0
+ ACC
94
53
4
5
7
N
M.F
F25
20
M.F
Ro
N
O
M.F
92
C17-03
C17-03
C17-02
Vi
O
Vi
CD1 M/C
22
P4
C24-01
R
Issue 1
C24-02
C24-01
C24-04
C24-02
C24-04
Vi
O
Fig. 13
May 2002

10A02.36
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.37
F14
15
10
15
F27
F25
96
97
P3 P1 P8
P1A P2A
53
5
P2 P7
7
N
P1B P2B
M
N
R
+P
2
1
94
+ AC
1
R
P1 - P2
P3
95
P4
P5
P6
25
B
B
P26
28
B
P8
P24
26
27
P7
P24
P25
P27
V
O
P28
P29
29
CD1 M/C
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.38
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.39
Fuel heater and pneumatic seat
10
F3
99
12
P12
CD1 M/C
+P
2
94
4
5
+ AC
1
R
P-01
P-01
98
N
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.40
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.41
F9
10
30
F12
Accessories
30
10
F17
F25
94
53
6
+P
1
R0
M.F
20
+ AC
M.F
7
N
M.F
N R0
M.F
D
R0
C25
C25
R0
R0
C24-03
R0
C24-03
R
C24-04
C24-04
C24-02
C24-02
19
O NR R
R
D
18
49
R0
R0
50
N
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 16

10A02.42
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.43
F1
P-04
P-04
10
30
Power socket inside cab
O
O
40
F20
N
N
M
N
C03-04
C03-04
+P
94
2
1
4
5
3
+ AC
1
R
94
+P
30
10
Cigarette lighter
F17
2
1
5
F24
53
7
N
M.F
M.F
31
C47-01
C47-02
C03-02
C03-02
C03-06
C03-06
C47-03
Fig. 17
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.44
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.45
10
F9
25
F10
Windscreen wiper
M
+P
Ro
2
1
94
+ ACC
3
4
5
20
M.F
Ro
N
M.F
O
G
BL
B
M
VI
3
93
CD1 M/C
N
C8
22
P22
27
38
43
C18-01
C18-02
B
BL
C18-03
C18-04
C18-06
O
G
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.46
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.47
10
10
F9
15
F11
Rear wiper
F25
53
M
+P
2
1
Ro
M.F
94
+ ACC
1
5
7
N
M.F
20
N Ro
M.F
C10-02
C10-02
R
M EMB R
C16-02
C16-03
C16-02
C16-03
C12
C12
36
V
C12
C12
C28-03
C28-02
Issue 1
May 2002
C28-01
C28-03
C28-01
C28-02
V
J
P4
P2
P3
P1
28
Fig. 19

10A02.48
Parts list
1.
2.
4.
7.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
18.
19.
20.
22.
27.
28.
31.
36.
38.
40.
43.
49.
50.
53.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
122.
Starter switch
Safety switch
Alternator
Starter
Clock
Radio
Cab relay
Rear wiper motor
Cigarette lighter
Rear wiper switch
Roof light
Door switch
Lighting switch
Water level sensor
Thermostart
Temperature switch
Front axle switch
Front axle LED
Pneumatic seat
Fuel heater
Start relay
Electricity
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
A)
junction
C : Light
F : Dark
C3
C4
C8
C10
C12
C14
C16
C17
C18
C24
C25
C28
C47

- Junction
Emb.: end
Indicator lights
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.49
F7
Start
C4-03
C4-03
C4-04
C4-04
C4
13
O
122
N
94
M
+P
2
1
+ ACC
5
Conn 14
Conn 14
CD1 M/C
Fig. 20
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.50
D . Lighting equipment - Europe
(Fig. 21 to 23)
Parts list
1.
17.
27.
32.
39.
42.
53.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
94.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
Starter switch
To TCU
Console lighting
Roof console lighting
Lighting switch
Rear right work light on roof
Lower rear right work light
Trailer power socket
Lower rear left work light
Rear left work light on roof
Horn
Front left direction indicator
Front left work light on footstep
Front left work light on rail
Front left work light on roof
Front right work light on roof
Front right work light on rail
Front right work light on footstep
Front right direction indicator
Flashing beacon
Central direction indicator
Hazard warning switch
Front work lights on rail and footstep switch
Front and rear work lights on roof switch
Right travelling / stop light
Left travelling / stop light
Front left parking light
Front right parking light
Left stop light switch
Right stop light switch
Front left roof mounted headlight
Front right roof mounted headlight
Roof headlights switch
Roof mounted headlights option
Option without roof mounted headlights
Rear right direction indicator
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
Left rear direction indicator

Footstep worklight switch
Wing mounted and rail work lights switch
Rear roof mounted work lights switch
Front roof mounted work lights switch
Rear right travelling light
Rear left travelling light
Indicator lights
T16 : Parking lights indicator light
T17 : Headlight beam indicator light
T19 : 1st trailer parking light indicator light
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Electricity

A)
junction
CD2
junction
C10
C16
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C79
C80
C81
C82
C83

- Dashboard / roof lighting harness junction
- Front left travelling light harness junction
- Front right travelling light harness junction
- Rear left travelling light harness junction
- Rear right travelling light harness junction
- Front left work light harness junction
- Front right work light junction
- Rear left work light harness junction
- Rear right work light harness junction
- Registration plate light
- Flashing beacon junction
- Front right rail work light harness junction
- Front left work light on footstep harness junction
- Front right work light on footstep harness junction
- Work light on left wing harness junction
- Work light on right wing harness junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.51
112
Stop light / front - rear lighting (Europe)

Roof mounted headlight (option)
10
R
N O Vi
7.5
20
15
F19
15
Ro
F32
F31 F22 F30
Vi
O
R-C75-P6
N-C75-P5 Ro-C75-P4
R-C75-P3 Vi-C75-P2
O-C75-P1
R-C75-P6
Ro-C75-P4
Vi-C75-P2
N-C75-P5
R-C75-P3
O-C75-P1
R-C72
94
109
R-C73
Horn
F26
10
111
110
7.5
F25
102
N
G
2
A1
M.F
O-C7
+AC
J-A1
T17
53
39
A12
94
+P
R-A12
27
R-C63-P6
R-C63-P6
R-C10-P2
R-C10-P2
V
J
G
108
107
Ro
B emb N
V
J
TCU
17
113
Vi
R-C75
106
B emb N
D47 V
D47 V
N
J
R
B emb N
V.C-C7
J-C7
Ro-C75-P4
N-C67-P4
B-C67-P3
R-C67-P2
103
O
J
N
J
V
79
B
B EMB N
B EMB N
CD1 M/C
N J V
P18
P19
P20
P18
P19
P20
78
V
J
G
R-C64
P-M
P-N
P-J
P-H
P-M
P-N
P-J
P-H
L
54
54g
58L
R EMB N
65
58R
31
R
CD2
N
R
N-C66-P4
R-C66-P2
B-C66-P3
104
105
G
70
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.52
(Fig. 21 to 23)
Parts list
1.
17.
27.
32.
39.
42.
53.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
94.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
Starter switch
To TCU
Console lighting
Lighting switch
Horn
Flashing beacon
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.

Indicator lights
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Electricity

A)
junction
CD2
junction
C10
C16
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C79
C80
C81
C82
C83

C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.53
Direction indicator / hazard warning function

(Europe)
30
F21
82
T16 T16 T19 T18
83
BL
B
Ro
A2
A14
C3
A8
C1
A6
+P
49L
V.F
Ro
V.F
V.F
B-A14
27
N-A6
BL-A2
49
Ro-A8
31
94
+AC
B
M
Ro
BL
B
B
P-L
P-K
P-L
P-K
CD2
N-C67-P4
114
M-C67-P1
80
M-C65
Ro
54g
54
58L
58R
31
N
M
N-C66-P4
Ro-C64
71
65
115
Ro-C66-P1
Fig. 22
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.54
(Fig. 21 to 23)
Parts list
1.
17.
27.
32.
39.
42.
53.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
94.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
Starter switch
To TCU
Console lighting
Lighting switch
Horn
Flashing beacon
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.

Indicator lights
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Electricity

A)
junction
CD2
junction
C10
C16
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C79
C80
C81
C82
C83

C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.55
Vi
Work light function (Europe)
M.F
15
F28
Vi
25
53
F13
7.5
94
25
25
25
Flashing beacon
F16
F25
F27
M.F
F26
F29
M.F
R
R
Vi
P3
77
O-C81
116
P2
117
118
119
76
Ro-C79
N
P1
BL-C69
N-C69
75
N.C
V.C
N
BL.C
P1
P5
BL-C69
N-C69
Vi
Vi
Vi
Ro-C83
64
N
P4
P1
V.F-C71
G
BL-C68
N-C68
G
O
74
P1
63
V.F-C71
N
Ro
P-G
P-E
P-D
P-B
P-G
P-E
P-D
P-B
BL-C68
N-C68
V.F-C70
67
V.F-C70
N
C2
P2
73
P5
Ro-C79
Ro
N
P3
O-C80
72
V.F-C63-P1
G-C63-P2
BL.F-C63-P3
BL.F-C63P4
V.F-C63-P5
V.F-C63-P1
G-C63-P2
BL.F-C63-P3
BL.F-C63P4
V.F-C63-P5
V.F-C10-P1
R-C10-P2
BL.F-C10-P3
BL.F-C10-P4
V.F-C10-P5
Be-C10-P6
Ro-C82
V.F-C10-P1
R-C10-P2
BL.F-C10-P3
BL.F-C10-P4
V.F-C10-P5
Be-C10-P6
66
N
V.F
V.F
81
81
Be-C16-P1
N-C16-P2
R-C16-P3
G-C16-P4
N
Be-C16-P1
N-C16-P2
R-C16-P3
G-C16-P4
42
R
32
Be N
G-C74
G-C74
Fig. 23
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.56
E . Lighting equipment - North
America (Fig. 24 to 26)
Parts list
1.
17.
27.
32.
39.
42.
53.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
94.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
Starter switch
To TCU
Console lighting
Lighting switch
Lower Rear right work light
Lower Rear left work light
Horn
Flashing beacon
Front right travelling / stop light
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
Rear left direction indicator

Rear roof light switch
Indicator lights
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Electricity

A)
junction
CD2
junction
C10
C16
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C79
C80
C81
C82
C83

- Front right work light harness junction
- Work light on right wing junction
C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.57
Front - rear lighting function (North America Only)

Horn
94
F25
+P
F19
F26
10
2
1
3
F32
M.F
15
1
+AC
94
7.5
10
53
7.5
39
O-C7
F31
F22
T17
V
N
A12
A1
J-A1
R-A12
27
V.C-C7
J-C7
R
R
108
107
B emb N
B emb N
B emb N
D47 V
D47 V
TCU
65
17
J
79
N-C67-P3
P-J
P-H
N J V
P18
P19
P20
P18
P19
P20
V
J
G
CD1 M/C
P-J
P-H
CD2
120
R-C67-P1
N-C66-P3
121
R-C66-P1
78
N
70
Fig. 24
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.58
Parts list
1.
17.
27.
32.
39.
42.
53.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
94.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
Starter switch
To TCU
Console lighting
Lighting switch
Horn
Flashing beacon
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.

Indicator lights
Colour codes
A : Silver
B : White
BL : Blue
BE : Beige
G : Grey
I : Ivory
J : Yellow
M : Brown
N : Black
O : Orange
R : Red
RO : Pink
S : Salmon
V : Green
VI : Violet
Electricity

A)
junction
CD2
junction
C10
C16
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C79
C80
C81
C82
C83

C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.59
Direction indicator / hazard warning function
82
27
BL
B
83
10
F28
T16 T16 T19 T18
25
(SAE standard)
R
F21
Ro
3
4
49a
Ro
+AC
B-A14
BL-A2
V.F
B
R V.F
N-A6
Ro-A8
49
94
M
31
+P
A14
A2
C3
A8
C2
A6
B
M
Ro
BL
B
M
B
Ro
M
Ro
R
V.F
B
1
6
2
7
65
3
4
V
M
CD2
N-C67-P3
114
M-C67-P2
M-C65
80
N
N
N-C66-P3
Ro-C64
71
115
Ro-C66-P2
Fig. 25
Issue 1
May 2002

10A02.60
Parts list
1.
17.
27.
32.
39.
42.
53.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
94.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
Starter switch
To TCU
Console lighting
Lighting switch
Horn
Flashing beacon
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.

Indicator lights
Colour codes
A :
B :
BL :
BE :
G :
I :
J :
M :
N :
O :
R :
RO :
S :
V :
VI :
Silver
White
Blue
Beige
Grey
Ivory
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Salmon
Green
Violet
Electricity

A)
junction
CD2
junction
C10
C16
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C79
C80
C81
C82
C83

C : Light
F : Dark
Emb.: end
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.61
BL
Vi
94
53
M.F
F16
15
25
F21
F28
15
F27
M.F
F13
10
10
Flashing beacon
15
94
25
Work light function (North America only)
F25
M.F
30
F30 F29
R
+P
Vi
2
3
+AC
V-C81
77
Vi
BI
R
49d
V-C79
76
V-C79
84
30
30b
15
49
83
117
R
R
BL-C69
N-C69
75
BL-C69
N-C69
N.C
P5
64
G-C83
N
85
P4
V.F-C71
BL-C68
N-C68
63
V.F-C71
N
P-G
P-E
P-D
P-B
P-G
P-E
P-D
P-B
74
BL-C68
N-C68
CD2
P4
V.F-C70
67
V.F-C70
N
V-C79
73
V-C79
G-C82
V-C80
72
V.F-C63-P1
G-C63-P2
BL.F-C63-P3
BL.F-C63P4
V.F-C63-P5
V.F-C63-P1
G-C63-P2
BL.F-C63-P3
BL.F-C63P4
V.F-C63-P5
81
V.F-C10-P1
R-C10-P2
BL.F-C10-P3
BL.F-C10-P4
V.F-C10-P5
Be-C10-P6
Be-C16-P1
N-C16-P2
R-C16-P3
G-C16-P4
81
N
66
BL-C10-P1
R-C10-P2
BL.F-C10-P3
BL.F-C10-P4
V.F-C10-P5
Be-C10-P6
Be-C16-P1
N-C16-P2
R-C16-P3
G-C16-P4
N
R
32
Be N
G-C74
G-C74
Fig. 26
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.62
F . Location of fuses - Dynashift (Europe) (Fig. 27)
Note: Always replace fuses by fuses of the same amperage
F7
(+AC)
F8
F9
7,5
10
(+AC)
(+AC)
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
25
15
30
25
15
0
25
30
7,5
7,5
10
10
20
7,5
15
10
7,5
15
25
25
15
15
10
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
F 15
F 31
Accessories power socket

Linkage, diagnostic connector, electro-hydraulic spool valve
Pneumatic seat, fuel heater
Reversing light
Injection pump solenoid valve
Dashboard, Autotronic 3, Hare / Tortoise switch, gearbox neutral
safety
Dynashift steering wheel lever, starter switch, BOC, TOC, power take
off stop, rear power take off, economical power take off, cab power
socket, creeper gearbox
Starter relay
Cab relay, 4 WD switch, differential lock, Dynashift armrest, accelerator
pedal
Cab relay windscreen wiper motor, switch, time delay
Cab relay rear wiper motor, switch
Cab relay radio, ventilation
Front work light
Front power take off, suspended front axle
Not used
Rear work light
Clock, roof light, cigarette lighter, radio
Linkage, alternator charge
Horn
Brake switch
Linkage control
Autotronic 3
Backlighting switch, dashboard, headlight relay
Travelling lights front - rear, dashboard, work light relay
Flashing beacon, suspended front axle
Hazard warning switch, footstep work light
Wing and rail work light
Stop light
Headlight beam
Dim light
F 25
F 24
F 9
F 8
F 23
F 7
F 22
F 6
F 21
F 14
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
F 11
F 10
F 20
F 19
F 5
F 4
F 3
F 13
30
7,5
10
5
30
10
Functions protected
F 30
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Amperage
F 27
F 26
F 29
Fuse
reference
F 12
F 16
F 32
F 28
F 18
F 17
F 2
F 1
F1 - 30A
F2 - 7,5A
F3 - 10A
F4 - 15A
5A
F5 - 30A
F6 - 10A
F7 - 5A
F8 - 7,5A
F9 - 10A
F10 - 25A
F11 - 15A
F12 - 30A
25A
F13 - 15A
F14 - 15A
F15 -
25A
F16 - 30A
F17 - 30A
F18 - 7,5A
F19 - 7,5A
F20 - 10A
F21 - 10A
F22 - 20A
F23 - 7,5A
F24 - 15A
F25 - 10A
AUTO III
F26 - 7,5A
F27 - 15A
F28 - 25A
F29 - 30A
25A
F30 - 15A
HAND
+P
=
+AC =
Permanent
+ after contact
STOP
F31 - 15A
F32 - 10A
REF: 3785765M1
A 5 A fuse located on the battery cut out (if fitted) protects the clock.
Fig.27
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.63
G . Location of fuses - Dynashift (North America) (Fig. 28)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
F7
(+AC)
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
7,5
10
25
15
30
15
15
0
25
30
7,5
7,5
10
15
3
7,5
15
10
7,5
15
25
30
15
15
10
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
+P
=
+AC =

Not used
Dashboard, Autotronic 3, Hare / Tortoise switch, gearbox neutral
safety
Dynashift steering wheel lever, starter switch, BOC, TOC, power
take off stop, rear power take off, economical power take off, cab
power socket, creeper gearbox
Starter relay
Cab relay, 4 WD switch, differential lock, Dynashift armrest
Front work light
Not used
Rear work light
Horn
Brake switch
Linkage
Autotronic 3
Hazard warning switch, wing work light
Rail work light
Footstep work light
Headlight beam
Dim light
F 16
F 9
F 24
F 8
F 23
F 7
F 22
F 6
F 21
F 5
F 20
F 19
F 4
F 3
F 18
F 17
F 2
F 1
F1 - 30A
F2 - 7,5A
F3 - 10A
F4 - 15A
F5 - 30A
F6 - 10A
F7 - 5A
F8 - 7,5A
F9 - 10A
F10 - 25A
F11 - 15A
F12 - 30A
F13 - 15A
F14 - 15A
F15 -
25A
F16 - 30A
F17 - 30A
F18 - 7,5A
F19 - 7,5A
F20 - 10A
F21 - 15A
F22 - 20A
3A
F23 - 7,5A
F24 - 15A
F25 - 10A
AUTO III
F26 - 7,5A
Permanent
+ after contact
F 10
F 25
F 13
30
7,5
10
0
30
10
F 11
F 26
F 15
F 31
Functions protected
F 30
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Amperage
F 29
Fuse
reference
F 12
F 27
F 14
F 32
F 28
F27 - 15A
F28 - 25A
F29 - 30A
F30 - 15A
HAND
F31 - 15A
F32 - 10A
REF: 3785917M1
Fig.28
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.64
H . Location of fuses - Powershift (Europe) (Fig. 29)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
7,5
10
25
15
30
25
15
0
25
30
7,5
7,5
10
10
20
7,5
15
10
7,5
15
25
25
15
15
10
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
+P
=
+AC =

Park Lock switch
Dashboard
Steering wheel lever, starter switch, BOC, TOC, power take off stop,
rear power take off, economical power take off, cab power socket,
creeper gearbox, hand brake
Starter relay
Cab relay, 4 WD switch, differential lock buzzer
Front work light
Not used
Rear work light
Horn
Brake switch
Linkage
Park Lock DCC time delay relay
Hazard warning switch, footstep work light
Wing and rail work light
Rear stop light
Headlight beam
Dim light
F 15
F 7
F 22
F 6
F 21
F 20
F 19
F1 - 30A
F 18
F 17
F2 - 7,5A
F 9
F 8
F 23
F 14
30
7,5
10
15
30
10
5
F 24
F 11
F 10
F 5
F 4
F 3
F 13
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F 25
F 31
Functions protected
F 30
Amperage
F 26
F 29
Fuse
reference
F 27
F 12
F 16
F 32
F 28
F3 - 10A
F 2
F 1
F4 - 15A
F5 - 30A
APC TEMPO PARK
Permanent
+ after contact
F6 - 10A
F7 - 5A
F8 - 7,5A
F9 - 10A
F10 - 25A
F11 - 15A
F12 - 30A
25A
F13 - 15A
F14 - 15A
F15 -
F16 - 25A
30A
F17 - 30A
F18 - 7,5A
F19 - 7,5A
F20 - 10A
F21 - 10A
F22 - 20A
F23 - 7,5A
F24 - 15A
F25 - 10A
+VBAT TEMPO PARK
F26 - 7,5A
F27 - 15A
F28 - 25A
F29 - 30A
25A
F30 - 15A
HAND
STOP
F31 - 15A
F32 - 10A
REF: 3785919M1
3785918M1
Fig.29
Issue 1
May 2002
Electricity
10A02.65
I . Location of fuses - Powershift (North America) (Fig. 30)
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
+P
=
+AC =
7,5
10
25
15
30
15
15
0
30
30
7,5
7,5
10
15
20
7,5
15
10
7,5
15
25
30
15
15
10
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+P)
(+P)
(+P)
(+AC)
(+AC)
(+AC)

Park Lock switch
Dashboard
Steering wheel lever, starter switch, BOC, TOC, power take off stop,
rear power take off, economical power take off, cab power socket,
creeper gearbox, hand brake
Starter relay
Cab relay, 4 WD switch, differential lock, buzzer
Front work light
Not used
Rear work light
Horn
Brake switch
Linkage
Park Lock DCC time delay relay
Hazard warning switch, wing work light
Rail work light
Footstep work light
Headlight beam
Dim light
Permanent
+ after contact
F 16
F 10
F 25
F 9
F 24
F 7
F 22
F 6
F 21
F 5
F 20
F 18
F 17
F2 - 7,5A
F 8
F 23
F 19
F1 - 30A
F 11
F 26
F 4
F 3
F 13
30
7,5
10
15
30
10
5
F 12
F 15
F 31
Functions protected
F 30
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Amperage
F 29
Fuse
reference
F 27
F 14
F 32
F 28
F3 - 10A
F 2
F 1
F4 - 15A
F5 - 30A
APC TEMPO PARK
F6 - 10A
F7 - 5A
F8 - 7,5A
F9 - 10A
F10 - 25A
F11 - 15A
F12 - 30A
F13 - 15A
F14 - 15A
F15 -
F16 - 30A
F17 - 30A
F18 - 7,5A
F19 - 7,5A
F20 - 10A
F21 - 15A
F22 - 20A
F23 - 7,5A
F24 - 15A
F25 - 10A
+VBAT TEMPO PARK
F26 - 7,5A
F27 - 15A
F28 - 25A
F29 - 30A
F30 - 15A
HAND
F31 - 15A
F32 - 10A
REF: 3785919M1
Fig.30
Issue 1
May 2002
11 . ELECTRONICS
Contents
11 A01 AUTOTRONIC 2 - DESCRIPTION
11 A02 AUTOTRONIC 2 - CHECKING WITHOUT TESTER
11 A03 11 A03 AUTOTRONIC 3 - DESCRIPTION
11 B01 DCC / TC - DESCRIPTION
11 B02 DCC / TC - CALIBRATION
11 B03 DCC / TC - ERROR CODES
11 C01 ELECTRONIC LINKAGE - DESCRIPTION - TRACTOR WITH CAB
11 C02 ELECTRONIC LINKAGE - AUTODIAGNOSTICS - TRACTOR WITH CAB
11 C03 PREVISIONAL
11 C04 PREVISIONAL
11 D01 DATATRONIC 2 - DESCRIPTION
11 D02 DATATRONIC 2 - FRONT DUAL CONTROL
11 D03 DATATRONIC 2 - DUAL CONTROL FOR SEMIMOUNTED IMPLEMENT
11 D04 DATATRONIC 2 - TIC FOR SEMIMOUNTED IMPLEMENT
11 E01 PREVISIONAL
11 E02 PREVISIONAL
11 E03 PREVISIONAL
11 F01 WINTEST - GENERAL
11 F02 AUTOTRONIC 2 WITH WINTEST
11 F03 AUTOTRONIC 3 WITH WINTEST
11 F04 TC / DCC WITH WINTEST
11 F05 ELECTRONIC LINKAGE WITH WINTEST
11 F06 DATATRONIC WITH WINTEST
11 F07 JOYSTICK WITH WINTEST
11 F08 AUTOTRONIC 3 TO KIT AUTOTRONIC
11 F09 KIT AUTOTRONIC TO AUTOTRONIC 3
11 G01 CARRARO FRONT AXLE
11 H01 SMS SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
Issue 2
May 2002
Autotronic 2 - Description
11A01.1
11 A01 Description
CONTENTS
A.
General _____________________________________
B.
Flowchart of Autotronic 2 modes _____________
C.
Flowcharts of functions ______________________
D.
Diagrams ___________________________________
10
Issue 1
May 2001

11A01.2
Issue 1
May 2001
A . General
The Autotronic 2 also known as the TCU (Transmission
Control Unit) is fitted to all 8200 series tractors with a
Mechanical Reverse Shuttle.
On 8200 series tractors fitted with a Power Shuttle, the
Autotronic 2 has been replaced by a new calculator
known as the Autotronic 3.
The Autotronic 2 is fitted outside beneath the right-hand
flooring on tractors with cab, and inside on the right wing
on tractors without a cab.
Only Autotronic units with reference numbers equal to
or greater than 3792092H92 can be fitted to 8200 series
tractors.
11A01.3
The Autotronic 2 controls the automatic functions of the

transmission according to the drivers actions and information from the various sensors.
It controls:
- the shifting of the Hare / Tortoise range
- the power take-off
- the differential lock
- the front axle 4 WD
- the Dynashift
The Autotronic 2 unit can be:
- programmed: updating of the logic controllers
- parameterised: identification of the unit, type and
features of the tractor
- tested: verified using Wintest or a tester to check the
correct operation of the logic controllers.
The Autotronic 2 can be easily identified by its external

label (Fig. 1).
Phoenix PN :
3792094 M1
PHOENIX
OP Software PN :
BOOTROM Software PN :
PN :
Serial Number :
1-91-127671 Issue D
1-91-123234 Issue E
3792093 H94
99 00 000
TRANSMISSION CONTROL Unit

Tested : ______________________________
INTERNATIONAL
Assembled in USA
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
CASE MUST BE EARTHED

Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

11A01.4
B . Flowchart of Autotronic 2 modes

To operate correctly, the Autotronic 2 must receive a
certain amount of safety information and be in the
Working Mode.
>
ALARM MODE
>
>
All functions locked

TCU 2
Clutch switch
signal
Low pressure
< 9 bar
Engine speed
< 200 rpm
Low pressure
= 17 bar
Engine speed
> 200 rpm
STANDBY MODE
>
Engine stopped
No hydraulic pressure
TCU OFF
Low pressure
< 9 bar
Engine speed
< 200 rpm
>
WORKING MODE
All functions OK
TCU 4
PTO ALARM MODE
>
All functions locked

TCU 7
Issue 1
May 2001
Low pressure
= 17 bar
Engine speed
< 200 rpm
11A01.5
C . Flowchart of functions
AUTOTRONIC 2
(T . C. U .)
Automatically acts on
Hare / Tortoise
shifting
Power take-off
(PTO)
Differential
lock
Front axle
4WD
Dynashift
or
Speedshift
Hydraulic protection of functions 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5

If the pressure (17 bar nominal) drops too much, the red low oil pressure indicator lights on the dashboard and the
system transits to Alarm Mode.
1. The shifting of the Hare / Tortoise range is prohibited
2. The PTO is automatically disengaged
3. The differential lock is automatically disengaged
4. The front axle is automatically engaged
5. The Dynashift automatically shifts to the D ratio.
Issue 1
May 2001
11A01.6
SHIFTING OF THE HARE / TORTOISE RANGE
SHIFTING OF HARE / TORTOISE

RANGE IMPOSSIBLE
SHIFTING TO HARE / TORTOISE

RANGE PROHIBITED
- If the forward speed is greater than:

- 10 kph: Tortoise to Hare
- 6 kph: Hare to Tortoise
- If the Hare range is selected at the same

time as the creeper unit, the Hare dashboard indicator flashes to warn the driver
he must shift into the Tortoise range.
- If sufficient hydraulic pressure
POWER TAKE-OFF
2
Progressive clutch control

during engagement
- By sending impulses to solenoid valve until complete engagement
Disengagement if the PTO

clutch slips
- If a pressure drop occurs (17 bar
nominal) or if the clutch slips,
the supply to the PTO clutch is
cut (flashing indicator)
Does not engage if the

implement is jammed
- If the implement is jammed the
clutch engagement stops before stalling the engine (flashing
indicator)
Issue 1
May 2001
Does not re-engage during

start-up
- If the engine is stopped with the
PTO engaged or it is re-engaged
before start-up, the Autotronic
prohibits the engagement of
the PTO during start-up (flashing indicator)
Stop the PTO when the stop

switch located on the wings
is pressed
11A01.7
DIFFERENTIAL LOCKING
3
Action on the differential

lock switch engages
4 WD
Unlocks when
brakes are applied
Unlocks when the

three-point hitch is
lifted
- action on one or other of the

brake pedals unlocks the
differential, it is not reengaged until action on the
brakes has stopped, unless
it was temporarily uncoupled by the ELC.
- when the lifting / lowering

switch is in the lifting or
transport position, the
differential unlocks. It reengages when the switch
is in the lowering position
(indicator goes out and
then relights).
Note: Manual control
has priority.
Unlocks if the hyraulic

pressure drops too low (17
bar nominal)
- indicator lights
Unlocks if the
forward speed
exceeds 14 kph
- Does not re-engage when
speed drops below 14 kph
(indicator not lit).
Issue 1
May 2001
11A01.8
FRONT AXLE
4
4 WD status
Tractor stopped
Engine running
If parameter
B=3 and I =2
1. If the front axle is
engaged, the 4 WD
indicator lamp is lit,
pressing the 4 WD
switch disengages
it. The 4WD solenoid valve is supplied.
2. If the 4 WD indicator
lamp is not lit, the
front axle is disengaged, pressing the
4 WD switch engages 4 WD. The 4
WD solenoid valve
is no longer supplied.
Note: The front
axle is engaged
mechanically and
disengaged hydraulically.
Disengages if speed
exceeds 14 kph
- The front axle being

engaged by a simple
pressure on the
4 WD button: it then
disengages above
speeds of 14 kph. It
re-engages when the
speed drops below
14 kph.
- If the tractor is
travelling in excess of
14 kph and the 4 WD
is disengaged, it can
be re-engaged by
pressing once on the
4 WD button.
Remains engaged
whatever the speed
- Hold down the 4 WD

switch more than 2
seconds at a speed
below 14 kph.
- Trigger 4 WD at a
speed greater than
14 kph.
- During braking involving both pedals, the

TCU automatically engages 4 WD.
Note: Braking using
only one pedal (unlatched pedals) does
not engage the 4 WD.
Engages when the

differential lock is
activated
Engages
if hydraulic pressure
drops
Issue 1
Remains engaged
whatever the speed
May 2001
11A01.9
DYNASHIFT
5
On starting the
engine
Progressiveness
Drop in hydraulic
pressure
- If parameter G = 1, the
range engaged corresponds to the lever position.
- If parameter G = 2, 3 or 4,
the range engaged corresponds to the last position memorised before
stopping the engine.
- Controlled timed shifting

of intermediary ratios
when the lever is moved
directly from A to D.
- Engine running, tractor
stopped, de-clutch to
shift directly from one
range to another without
passing through the
intermediary ranges.
- If the forward speed
differs from 0, direct
shifting is prohibited.
- Automatic shifting to D
ratio, if hydraulic pressure < 9.5 1 bar.
Low temperature
- Shifting prohibited when

the oil temperature is less
than 5 C. The system is
restricted to ratio D, the A
and D indicator lamps
flash. When the temperature is correct there
are two possibilities:
If parameter G = 1
- the position of the
Dynashift lever is
identical to the range
selected. The indicator
lamp shows that the
ratio is engaged.
- the position of the
Dynashift is different
from the ratio engaged.
AB and CD indicators
flash alternately. Place
the lever in the
corresponding range to
authorise the shifting.
If parameter G = 2, 3 or 4
- the ratio engaged is the
last one memorised.
Note: Speed limitation
control operates even
at low temperature.
Maximum engine
speed
Low engine speed
Speed limitation
- Shifting down is impossible when the motor

speed is higher than 2400
rpm (engaged ratio indicator lamp flashes)
- Shifting to a higher ratio is

forbidden if the engine
speed drops more than
2% (indicator lamp flashes)
- Down shift ratios in relation to the parameter E

selected.
Issue 1
May 2001

11A01.10
D . Diagrams
Dynashift
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
46
47
48
53
54
55
Autotronic unit
Differential lock solenoid valve
Dynashift EV2 (3 x 2) solenoid valve
Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve
Rear PTO solenoid valve
4 WD solenoid valve
Dynashift EV1 (4 x 2) solenoid valve
F18 + lighting fuse
Cab ground
Battery
Temperature sensor
Alternator
PTO 540 / 1000 rpm switch
Starter motor
PTO 540 rpm indicator lamp
PTO 1000 rpm indicator lamp
Low pressure indicator lamp
Hare / Tortoise indicator lamp
Differential lock indicator lamp
4 WD indicator lamp
PTO and speed digital display
To + AC cab relay
+ AC (start switch)
Left brake switch
Right brake switch
Clutch safety switch
Start switch
Dynashift ratio indicator lamps
To hydraulic filter clogging indicator lamp
Economic PTO indicator lamp
Low hydraulic pressure switch
Engine speed sensor
Rear PTO sensor
4 WD and differential lock sensor
Start relay
Rear PTO brake solenoid valve
Rear PTO, power take-off selector
PTO stop switch
Economic PTO switch
Rev counter - hourmeter
High pressure filter clogging indicator lamp
Temperature switch
Low pressure 3 bar pressure switch
Selector cover ground
To linkage control harness
To Lifting / Neutral / Lowering, linkage control
switch
Issue 1
May 2001
56
57
58
59
60
61
Not connected (creeper unit)

Shunt on 2 WD tractor only
To fuse box then stop lights
Buzzer, parking brake
Front lamp switch
Electronic linkage control supply
Only on tractors fitted with 540 / 1000 rpm or 750 /

1000 rpm PTO lever in the cab
44 - PTO 1000 rpm switch
45 - PTO 540 rpm switch
On tractors fitted with a creeper gear

49 - Creeper unit switch
50 - Flasher relay
51 - Relay
52 - Creeper unit indicator lamp
Abbreviations
Example: TB.A4: terminal 4 of connector A on the
dashboard
Fig. 1
11A01.11
36
14
61
44
4
45
13
12
11
15
c49
10
Fus.
7,5A
57
16
17
Fus.
15A
53
18
19
9
54
20
C31
62
21
56
43
22
C30
F
25
53
D
C
B
A
B.emb.B
B.emb.N
C31
14
58
13
41
C30
25
24
D
7
VI
42
59
26
40
23
23
56
27
F7
O
55
D
8
C60
C
28
B
35
50
51
37
38
60
34
C42
VI
33
31
32
VI
C4
VI
TBA17
30
29
18
46
49
52
47
Issue 1
May 2001
48
Parts list
Fig. 1

11A02.1
Autotronic 2 - Checks without a tester
11 A02 Checks without a tester
CONTENTS
A.
Test procedures _____________________________
B.
Analysis of possible faults ____________________
Issue 1
May 2001

11A02.2
A . Test procedure
This procedure allows to check for the proper operation
of the Autotronic 2 unit as well as solving the most
straightforward failures.
The tester or Wintest software shall be used for more
complex cases.
1 . Checking the power supply

Engine stopped, ignition switch turned off, all
indicator lamps out.
De-clutch: The following indicator lamps must light
almost immediately:
- hydraulic pressure,
then
- indicator lamps A, B, C and D
lastly
- 4 WD
- hydraulic pressure
- Hare / Tortoise
- D ratio
Release the clutch: all the indicator lamps should go
out after a few seconds.
This test shows that:
- the TCU is present and supplied with 12 volts
- the microprocessor is functioning
- the indicator lamps: 4 WD, hydraulic pressure, Hare
/ Tortoise, ratios A, B, C and D and the sense of
direction are correctly cabled.
- the clutch switch is operating.
Note: To check that the supply is correct, check the
battery voltage and lines resistance.
2 . Hydraulic pressure switch / engine

speed sensor
a) Engine stopped, ignition key off
De-clutch
The indicator lamps light as indicated in 1.
Start the engine
The red hydraulic pressure indicator lamp should go
out after several seconds
- the engine speed sensor is correctly wired and is
functioning correctly
- the hydraulic pressure switch is closing.
Issue 1
May 2001
b) If test 2a produces the correct results:

Stop the engine.
After several seconds the red hydraulic pressure
indicator lamp lights, the 4 WD, the Dynashift /
Speedshift ratio engaged and the Hare range if it is
engaged must light for 4 seconds before the other
indicator lamps go out.
Note: 4 or 5 minutes may be necessary for the
hydraulic pressure indicator lamp to light
(depends on the discharging of the hydraulic
accumulator).
- the hydraulic switch is correctly connected and is
operating (re-opening).
3 . Differential lock
Engine idling
With the 4 WD indicator lamp lit.
- Press the differential lock button, the differential lock
indicator lamp lights.
- Press the differential lock button again, the differential
lock indicator lamp goes out.
- Disengage the front axle.
- Drive at 4 kph and engage the differential lock. The 4
WD engages.
- Place the Linkage Control switch in high position, then
in lowering position (not in Neutral), the differential
lock indicator lamp goes out, then re-lights.
- Turn the tractor in a tight circle, engage the differential
lock, you can feel the jerk as it engages and disengages
and the rear tyres skid.
- Check that the differential lock disengages when the
forward speed exceeds 14 kph.
- The differential lock disengages but does not engage
again when right or left braking is applied.
These tests show that:
- the supply to the switches is correct.
- the differential lock button is working correctly.
- the differential lock indicator lamp is working correctly.
- the solenoid valve is correctly wired and operating.
- the differential lock is also functioning.
- the speed sensor is functioning and the Autotronic
unit is correctly reacting.

4 . Brake switch
Engine idling
- Again press the differential lock button, the differential
lock indicator lamp lights.
- Unlatch the brake pedals. Successively press lightly
on each pedal (engage the lock each time a brake pedal
has been pressed).The differential lock indicator lamp
goes out as soon as the stop lights are lit.
This test shows that :
- the electrical supply to the switches is correct
- both brake switches are working correctly and are
properly adjusted.
5 . 4 WD
Engine idling
4 WD indicator lamp lit
- Press the 4 WD button: the 4 WD indicator lamp
should go out.
- Press the differential lock button: the 4 WD and
differential lock indicator lamps light up at the same
time.
- Successively disengage the 4 WD and the differential
lock, the two indicator lamps should go out.
- Drive the tractor at approximately 4 kph. Turn in a
circle using maximum steering lock.
Engage and disengage the 4 WD several times. When
the 4 WD is engaged you should see the front wheels
skid and feel a jerk with the engagement and
disengagement.
- With the front axle disengaged, when braking using
both pedals the front axle should engage.
- With the front axle disengaged, when braking using
one or other of the pedals the front axle should not
engage.
- Drive at less than 14kph. Press the 4WD button more
than 2seconds. The 4 WD remains engaged regardless
of the speed
- Drive at less than 14 kph. Press the 4 WD button
shortly. The front axle should be:
. engaged below 14 kph
. disengaged above 14 kph.
- Drive above 14 kph. Press the 4 WD button shortly.
The 4 WD remains engaged regardless of the speed.
11A02.3
6 . The Lifting / Lowering linkage control

switch
Engine idling
- With the linkage control switch in the down position,
press on the differential lock button. The differential
lock and 4 WD indicator lamps are lit.
- Move the linkage control switch to the Lifting position,
the differential lock indicator lamp should go out.
Place the switch in the Lowering position, the
differential lock indicator lamp should light again (the
4 WD indicator lamp should always remain lit).
- The indicator lamps do not change status in neutral.
- the Lifting / Lowering linkage control switch is
functioning.
7 . Shifting the Hare / Tortoise range

Engine idling. Tractor stopped.
- Shift the Hare / Tortoise range using the gear lever.
The Hare indicator lamp lights when the Hare range is
selected. No indicator lamp is lit when the Tortoise
range is selected.
- Drive the tractor forwards. Change the range several
times, checking that the forward speed changes
along with it. Check the correspondence between the
indicator lamps and the range that is actually selected.
- Also check :
. that above 10 kph, the shifting of the Tortoise to
Hare range is impossible.
. that above 6 kph the changing of Hare to Tortoise is
also impossible.
These tests show that :
- the Hare / Tortoise switch is correctly wired
- the range indicator lamp is wired
- the Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve is correctly wired
and operating.
- the speed sensor is operating and the TCU reacting
correctly.

- the 4 WD button is operating correctly
- the front axle solenoid valve is correctly wired and
operating correctly
- the front axle clutch is operating
- the speed sensor is functioning and the Autotronic
unit is correctly reacting.
Issue 1
May 2001

11A02.4
8 . Power take-off
Engine idling
Using the 540/1000 rpm or 750 / 1000 rpm control in the
cab.
- Place the PTO lever in the 1000 rpm position.
- Engage the PTO.
- The PTO 1000 rpm indicator lamp lights up on the
dashboard.
- The PTO shaft should begin turning.
- Stop the PTO.
- Place the PTO lever in the 540 rpm or 750 rpm position.
- Engage the PTO.
- The PTO 540 rpm or 750 rpm indicator lamp lights up
on the dashboard.
- Also check that at 1900 rpm, the economic PTO is
triggered.
- If the engine is stopped with the PTO engaged, the PTO
indicator lamp flashes on start-up and the PTO is not
engaged.
- Engage the PTO and press the "Stop PTO" switch
located on the rear wings. The PTO should stop.
- the PTO switches are correctly wired
- the PTO indicator lamps are correctly wired
- the PTO solenoid valve is correctly wired
- the engine speed sensor and the TCU are operating
- the "Stop PTO" switch is operating.
9 . Checking the PTO speed sensor

Engine idling Engage the PTO
- Disconnect the PTO sensor (behind the right-hand lift
ram).
- The PTO should stop after 5 or 6 seconds and the PTO
indicator lamp begin flashing.
- Stop the tractor engine then restart with the sensor
disconnected, the PTO engages but without any
progressiveness.
This test demonstrates the correct functioning of the PTO
sensor.
10 . Checking the forward speed sensor

Drive the tractor
- Above 10 kph, the shifting of Tortoise to Hare is
impossible.
- Above 6 kph, the shifting of Hare to Tortoise is
impossible
- With the differential lock engaged: when the speed is
greater than 14 kph, the differential lock is disengaged.
- With the front axle engaged: when the speed is greater
Issue 1
May 2001
than 14 kph the front axle disengages.

- the forward speed sensor is functioning.
Note concerning checking sensors: The above tests

show that the sensors are present, correctly wired
and function. These tests do not show whether the
sensors are correctly adjusted. The only way to
check this is to carry out a re-adjustment:
- screw the sensor in without forcing it until it
touches the teeth of the pinion.
- unscrew it - to - of a turn.
- moderately tighten the locking nut - 20 Nm
maximum.
11 . Dynashift
Engine idling, tractor stopped, temperature above
0 C
- Move the Dynashift lever from A to D.
- Check that the four Dynashift indicator lamps light in
each corresponding position of the lever.
Tractor moving
- Select each Dynashift ratio one by one and check that
the speed increases or decreases.
- the lever is correctly wired and that its supply is correct
- the indicator lamps are connected correctly
- the temperature sensor is connected
- the solenoid valves are correctly connected and that
the Autotronic unit is reacting correctly.
If only the D ratio can be obtained, check the supply to
the lever.
11A02.5
Temperature sensor Test carried out above 0 C

If test 11 is correct, stop the engine.
- Wait until the TCU returns to Standby mode (all
indicator lamps out).
- Disconnect the temperature sensor fitted on the gear
selector cover.
- Start the engine.
- Indicator lamps A and D should flash.
- Reconnect the sensor.
- According to the position of the lever, the
corresponding range is engaged or indicator lamps AB
CD flash alternatively.
- There is not a short circuit on the sensor wiring.
The oil temperature is below 0 C
If the temperature is less than 0 C, the TCU automatically
puts the Dynashift into D and on starting the indicator
lamps A and D flash together.
As soon as the temperature is above 0C, and according
to the position of the lever, the corresponding range is
engaged or the indicator lamps AB - CD flash alternately.
Issue 1
May 2001
11A02.6
B . Analysis of possible faults

The aim of this paragraph is analyse the cause of a failure without using a tester.
VERY IMPORTANT: The first operation to carry out is to check that the supply to the Autotronic and the
hydraulic pressure is correct. Therefore, in all cases, begin with the tests described under Power Supply
and Hydraulic Pressure.
The tests are carried out on the Autotronic wiring harness connectors.
After each operation, it is necessary to reconnect the connector that was used in order to carry out the followering
test.
Functions
Supply (1)
Igni- Engition
ne
switch runon ning
No
No
Operation to carry out
Disconnect connector F
(black)
Connect a 55W lamp
between:
Checks and results
Between F4 and F6, U = 9 VDC

mini
Entre F5 et F6, U = 9 VDC
mini
F4 and ground, the lamp lights
F5 and ground, the lamp lights
Hydraulic
pressure
(2)
No
No
Yes
No
Disconnect connector A
(black)
A22 and ground, U = 12 VDC

Disconnect connector D
(brown)
D7 and ground, R =
D7 and ground, R = 0
No
Yes
No
No
Disconnect connector C
(green)
C2 and + battery = diff lock

indicator lights
Switch
Yes
No
Disconnect connector B
(grey)
B2 and ground, U = 0 V, switch

released
pressed
Solenoid
valve
Yes
Yes
Disconnect solenoid valve

Measure between two
terminals of connector
U = 0 V, switch released
U = 12 V, switch pressed
Stop
light switch
(4)
Yes
No
Unlatch brake pedals
Issue 1
If value incorrect
check 15A fuse
(battery)
A22 and ground, U = 0 VDC
No
No
Differential
lock
(3)
Indicator
lamp
Remarks
pedals connector A
(black) and F (black)
If value incorrect
check fuse F10
A17 and ground, U = 0 V, pedal 1 If value incorrect

up
check fuse F14
A17 and ground, U = 12 V, pedal 1
down
F7 and ground, U = 0 V, pedal 2
up
F7 and ground, U = 12 V, pedal 2
down
May 2001

Functions
Igni- Engition
ne
switch runon
ning
Checks and results
4 WD (5)
Indicator
lamp
No
No
(black)
A5 and + battery = 4 WD
indicator lamp lights
Switch
Yes
No
(grey)

pressed
released
Solenoid
valve
Yes
Yes
Disconnect solenoid ,
valve, connect 55 W
to the connector.
Engage and disengage
the 4 WD
4 RM engaged: lamp out

4 RM disengaged: lamp lit
Lifting
/ Lowering
linkage
control
switch (6)
Yes
Yes
(grey)

in Lift position
in Neutral or Lowering
position
No
No
(green)
C4 and + battery = Hare

range indicator lamp
Switch
Yes
No
(green)
C1 and ground, U =12 V, lever

held in range shift position
C1 and ground, U = 0 V, lever
held in range position
Solenoid
valve
Yes
Yes
Disconnect the Hare /

Tortoise solenoid valve,
measure between two contacts
of connector
Hare, U = 12 V, Hare indicator

lamp lit
Tortoise, U = 0 V, Hare indicator
lamp off
No
No
(black)
A10 and + battery = PTO

indicator lamp lit if PTO
switch on 540 or 750
A10 and + battery = PTO
1000 rpm indicator lamp
lit if PTO switch on 1000
Yes
No
(grey)
B6 and ground, U = 0 V, PTO

de-clutched
B6 and ground, U = 12 V, PTO
engaged
Hare/
Tortoise(7)
Indicator
lamp
Power takeoff(8)
Indicator
lamp
Switch
Issue 1
11A02.7
Remarks
If value incorrect,
check fuse F10
If value incorrect
check fuse F12
If value incorrect
check fuse F12
May 2001
11A02.8
Functions
Power
take-off (8)
PTO Stop
switch
Igni- Engition
ne
switch runon
ning
Checks and results
Yes
No
(grey)
B3 and ground, U = 12 V
switch released
B3 and ground, U = 0 V,
switch pressed
Yes
Yes
Disconnect solenoid valve

Measure between the two
terminals of the connector
U = 0 V, PTO de-clutched
U = 12 V, PTO engaged
No
No
(maroon)
between D1 & D2, R = 450
Forward
speed
No
No
(maroon)
Engine
No
No
(maroon)
No
No
(black)
Yes
No
(black)
Place lever in range to be
checked and check voltage
between A19 then A21
and ground
Electrovalve
Speed
sensor (9)
Power
take-off
Dynashift
(10)
Indicator
lamp
Lever
Solenoid
valve
Yes
Tempe
rature
sensor
No
Issue 1
Yes
No
Disconnect solenoid valves

Dynashift EV1 and EV2
Measure between terminals
of connector
Disconnect connector F
(black)
May 2001
Remarks
A1 and + battery = range A

indicator lamp lit
A2 and + battery = range B
indicator lamp lit
A3 and + battery = range C
indicator lamp lit
A4 and + battery = range D
indicator lamp lit
A
B
C
D
A19
0V
12 V
12 V
12 V
A20
12 V
12 V
0V
0V
A
B
C
D
EV1
12 V
12 V
0V
0V
EV2
0V
12 V
12 V
0V
A21
0V
12 V
12 V
0V
between F2 & F3 :
- R < 10 K if temp > 0C
- R < 10 K if temp < 0C
If voltage = 0V
in all lever positions,
check power supply
to lever (orange wire,
fuse F8)
EV1 : vertical solenoid

valve (ivory wire)
EV2 : horizontal
solenoid valve
(green wire)
11A03.1
11 A03 Description
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________
B.
Autotronic 3 status flowcharts ___________________
C.
Automatic responses of the Autotronic 3 _________
D.
Operating principle of the Autotronic Dynashift ___
14
E.
Calibration of throttle pedal potentiometer _______
18
F.
Power Shuttle principles ________________________
19
G.
Calibration of the Power Shuttle _________________
21
H.
Power Shuttle error codes _______________________
25
I.
Disassembly, reassembly of the Power Shuttle

lever ___________________________________________
29
J.
Adjustment of the clutch pedal __________________
31
K.
Electrical diagram _______________________________
32
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.2
A . General
B . Autotronic 3 status flowcharts
The Autotronic 3 is the transmission controller fitted to

8200 series tractors.
The Autotronic 3 controls the automatic functions of the
transmission according to the drivers actions and
information from the various sensors.
The Autotronic 3, to operate correctly, must receive

safety information allowing it to manage its automatic
functions. The Autotronic 3 has a different status depending
on the information it receives.
The Autotronic 3 controls:

- Hare / Tortoise range
- 4 WD
- Differential lock
- Power take-off
- Dynashift or Speedshift
- Power Shuttle
- Creeper unit
The Autotronic 3 can be :
- programmed: updating of functions control
- parameterised: identified by a 12-digit code indicating
the model of the tractor it is fitted to.
- tested: testing the Autotronic 3 inputs, outputs and
functioning.
The Autotronic 3 unit is mounted beneath the external
flooring on tractors with a cab. Otherwise it is mounted
on the inside of the right wing.
The Autotronic 3 is easily identified by its label (Fig. 1) and
possesses only two 36-pin connectors.
Parst list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Autotronic 3 item number

Motherboard reference
Program version
Autotronic 3 serial number
1
2
3
P/N : 3791899F91
N/Y : 3 7M 700 FM
S/Y : 3 7M 701 FM
SERIAL N : 10000001
TESTER
B4 397
MADE IN UK
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2002
Note : Whatever the mode, if the battery tension is upper than 16 V, the Autotronic 3 functions are lock,
only the power shuttle is working.
11A03.3
AUTOTRONIC 3 OFF
+ AC = 0
- + AC = 0
- engine speed = 0
- low pressure = 0
<
TCU 6
+ AC = 12 V wrong parameters
<
STANDBY MODE
Indicator lamps
AC / BD
flash alternately
<
+ AC = 12 V
clutch pedal low
switch signal
<
<
+AC = 12 V
and parameters
OK
<
TCU 1
<
ALARM MODE
<
Alarm delay
of
6 seconds
Low pressure < 9 bar 1 and

engine speed < 200 rpm
No functions apart from Power Shuttle if low

pressure less than 9 bar 1 or engine speed
engine speed lower than 200 rpm
Low pressure > 9 bar 1
PTO Alarm
all functions
locked except
Power Shuttle

and engine speed < 200 rpm
TCU 0
engine speed > 200 rpm
Low pressure < 9 bar 1

and engine speed > 200 rpm
TCU 5
<
<
<

and engine speed > 200 rpm
Low pressure < 9 bar 1
<
engine speed < 200 rpm
WORKING MODE
<

PTO delay
for
0.5 seconds
All functions active

TCU 2
<
<
TCU 3
and engine speed < 200 rpm
Issue 1
<
Work delay
of
4 seconds
May 2002
TCU 4

11A03.4
Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.5
C . Automatic responses of the

Autotronic 3
Note: The Autotronic 3 can only control its functions
in Working mode (see B).
Functions
Hare / Tortoise (Hi / Lo)
Driver action
Automatic response of the Autotronic 3
Wants to change range using gear

lever switch
On passing into Working mode, it selects

the range engaged when placed on standby.
Prohibits shifting Hare to Tortoise range
above 8 kph, and Tortoise to Hare above 10
kph (synchro version)
Creeper unit
Selects a creeper speed with the

Hare range engaged
Flashes the Hare indicator lamp indicating

that it is shifting to Tortoise range
Selects a creeper speed with

Tortoise range engaged
Locks the gearbox in Tortoise range

(impossible to shift to Hare range).
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.6
Functions
Driver action
4 WD
On passing into Working mode, it selects

the range engaged when placed on standby.
4 WD:
- indicator lamp lit
- solenoid valve = 0 V
2 WD:
- indicator lamp not lit
Presses 4 WD switch when speed
is less than 14 kph.
If 2 WD, shifts to 4 WD automatically

If 4 WD shifts to 2 WD
In 4 WD, if forward speed greater than 14
km/h, shifts to 2 WD and returns to 4 WD as
soon as the speed drops below 14 kph.
Presses the 4 WD switch for more

than 2 seconds and with speed less
than 14 kph.
Engages 4 WD manual definitively.
Presses both
simultaneously.
Engages 4 WD whatever the forward speed,

returns to previous state when pedals are
released.
brake
pedals
Presses one or other of the unlatched

brake pedals
Issue 1
May 2002
Does not engage the 4 WD.
Functions
Driver action
11A03.7
Differential lock
On passing into Working mode, the

differential lock is disengaged:
- indicator lamp not lit
Presses the differential lock switch
Engages the 4 WD if the tractor is in 2 WD

- Lights the differential lock indicator lamp
- Differential solenoid valve = 12 V
Drives at more than 14 kph.
Disengages the differential lock.

Does not re-engage automatically when the
forward speed is less than 14 kph.
Puts the ELC into the Up or Transport

position.
Disengages the differential lock.

Re-engages the differential lock when the
ELC is placed in the Working position.
Note: Manual control of the differential
has priority
Presses one or other of the unlatched

brake pedals.
Definitively disengages the differential lock

unless temporarily disengaged by the ELC.
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.8
Functions
Driver action
Dynashift
On passing into Working mode, it selects the

range memorised when placed on standby or
indicated by the position of the lever.
Normale
version
Lamp
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
EV1
12 V
12 V
0V
0V
EV2
0V
12 V
12 V
0V
Selects a Dynashift ratio.
Automatic time control of ratio shifting (every

0.6 seconds).
De-clutches and selects Dynashift

ratio.
If forward speed equals 0, direct shifting into

ratio requested.
If forward speed greater than 1kph the request
is memorised and carried out during declutching.
Requests go slower ("-") with engine

speed above 2400 rpm.
The request is not executed and is memorised.

The indicator lamp of the selected ratio flashes.
The down shift is made when the engine
speed is less than 2400 rpm.
Requests go faster ("+")and drop in

engine speed exceeds 12%.
Reaches authorised speed.
The request is not executed and is memorised.

The indicator lamp of the engaged ratio flashes.
The up shift is made when the engine speed
has recovered the 12% difference.
At 28 kph, the indicator lamp of the engaged
ration flashes.
At 30 kph or 33 kph, the A, B, C and D indicator
lamps flash.
At 32 kph or 35 kph, shifts to lower ratio, D to
C or C to B.
Note: With a Dynashift lever with position

hold, the shifting of ratios is only
authorised after synchronising the lever
position with the indicator lamps.
Transmission temperature measured

when passing into Working mode. If
temperature is less than 5 C.
Issue 1
May 2002
Flashes indicator lamps A and D, the Dynashift

remains in the D ratio unless the tractor is
moving and reaches the authorised speed.
Functions
Dynashift (continued)
Normale
version
Driver action
11A03.9
When the temperature is above

5 C.
Power Shuttle type lever: selects the Dynashift

ratio engaged and lights the corresponding
indicator lamp.
Lever with position hold:
- if engaged ratio equals ratio selected by
lever, the ratio indicator lamp is lit.
- if engaged ration is different from that
selected by lever, AB and CD flash alternately.
Move the position of the lever to correspond
with engaged ratio.
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.10
Functions
Driver
actions
Automatic response
of Autotronic 3
Problems and
possible causes
Speed Matching
version
Switch in OFF
position
Switch in ON
position
Issue 1
The Autotronic 3 operates

in normal Dynashift
Changes the mechanical gear or speed

range
The Autotronic 3 selects

the Dynashift gear most
appropriate to the actual
speed of the vehicle
when declutching
Select a Dynashift
speed
The Autotronic 3
operates in normal
Dynashift
Select a creeper speed
Autotronic Dynashift
deactived (operation in
Normal mode
May 2002
The Autotronic function

does not work : using
Wintest chek the :
- status of ON / OFF switch
- clutch speed sensor
- forward speed sensor
- BOC top and bottom
switches
- Autotronic 3 program
version and parameters
- Dynashift unit solenoid
valve supply
Functions
Driver
actions
Automatic response
of Autotronic 3
11A03.11
Problems and
possible causes
Autodrive version
Switch in OFF
position
Switch in ON 1
Power Mode
position
Switch in ON 2
Eco Mode
postion
For all mode

in Speed Matching
Changes the engine

speed in forward or
reverse
Speed of tractor above

1 Kph : Automatic
changing of Dynashift
speeds to maintain
constant engine speed or
torque
Changes the engine

speed in forward or
reverse
Speed of tractor above

1 Kph : Automatic
changing of Dynashift
speeds if necessary
Selects a Dynashift
speed

in normal Dynashift
Selects a creeper
speed
Automatic Dynashift
deactivated (operation in
Normal mode)
Issue 1
The automatic functions

does not work : using
Wintest, check the :
- status of ON / OFF switch
- engine speed sensor
- accelerator potentiometer
- Autotronic 3 program
version and parameters
- Dynashift unit solenoid
valve supply
May 2002

11A03.12
Functions
Driver action
Power take-off (PTO)
Starts tractor with the PTO engaged.
On passing into Working mode:

- solenoid valve = 0 V if the cab control is
engaged or one of the emergency stop
controls is activated.
The PTO indicator lamp flashes.
Starts the PTO
Handles the start-up progressiveness in

relation to the engine speed and the
acceleration of the PTO.
PTO indicator lamp flashes slowly.
PTO solenoid valve pulsed.
PTO clutch in:
- if PTO speed higher than 98% engine
speed
. indicator lamp stays lit
. solenoid valve = 12 V
- if PTO signal equals 0, maximum
progressiveness (sensor supposed to be
defective).
PTO de-clutched
- if engine speed drops more than 50%
- if clutch slips
. indicator lamp flashes rapidly
. solenoid valve = 0 V.
Starts economic PTO
Cuts the PTO if engine speed above 1900

rpm
- indicator lamp flashes rapidly
Presses emergency stop button.
Immediately stops the PTO.

Restart PTO using cab switch.
Issue 1
May 2002
Functions
Power Shuttle
11A03.13
Driver action
De-clutches and starts engine

(activates bottom of clutch switch).
Unlocks and conforms to position of lever if

Autotronic 3 receives at least a 17 bar low
pressure signal or engine speed is above 200
rpm.
Selects a Power Shuttle position:

- Forward
- Neutral
- Reverse
without action on the clutch pedal.
Automatically handles the progressiveness of

the Power Shuttle.
Selects a Power Shuttle position and

lets out clutch using clutch pedal.
Handles the progressiveness of the clutch in

relation to the pedal potentiometer value.
Supply to indicator lamps and solenoid
valves
Forward:
- forward indicator lamp = 12 V
- forward solenoid valve = 12 V
Neutral:
- forward & reverse indicator lamps = 0 V
- forward & reverse solenoid valve = 0 V
Reverse:
- reverse indicator lamp = 12 V
- reverse solenoid valve = 12 V
Power Shuttle locked:
- forward or reverse indicator lamp flashes
- solenoid valve = 0 V.
Note: The Power Shuttle continues to

operate with a low pressure or engine
speed fault, or battery voltage above 16 V.
Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.14
D . Operating principle of the Automatic Dynashift

The Automatic Dynashift available on all tractors with
Power Shuttle provides an automatic changing of
Dynashift speeds in relation to information received by
the various sensors and the commands given by the
driver.
The two versions of Automatic Dynashift are available
solely on tractors fitted with the Autotronic 3 :
- Series: Speed Matching
- Optional: Autodrive
Block diagram
9
10
5
1
7
Parts list
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1) Switch
- two position for Speed Matching
- three position for Autodrive
(2) Accelerator pedal potentiometer
(3) Dashboard indicator lamps
(4) Autotronic 3
(5) Speed sensors:
. progressive speed
. forward speed
. effective engine speed
Issue 1
Dyna 1 solenoid valve

Dyna 2 solenoid valve
Dynashift
Forward movement solenoid valve
Reverse movement solenoid valve
Fig. 2
May 2002
11A03.15
Operation of Speed Matching

The Speed Matching version of the Autotronic 3 handles
the automatic changing of Dynashift speeds during a
mechanical gear or range shift.
The driver activates or deactivates the Speed Matching
function using the 2-position switch located on the righthand armrest (Fig. 3).
AUTO
Parts list
(1) Indicator lamps
(2) OFF position: no automation, both indicator lamps
are out. The Dynashift operates in Normal mode.
(3) ON position: the Dynashift operates in Speed
Matching mode, both indicator lamps are lit.
1
2
To provide the Speed Matching function, the Autotronic

3 requires information from:
- the clutch speed sensor (Ve) located at the gearbox inlet
- the forward speed sensor (Vr) located on the rear axle
(speed measurement of design bevel gear forward
speed)
- the current values of the Power Shuttle solenoid valves.
Fig. 3
The Autotronic 3 samples the Ve and Vr speed values

every 16 milliseconds. During the clutching / de-clutching
phase, signalled via the value of the forward or reverse
solenoid valves current, the two ratios are memorised by
the Autotronic 3:
- R = Ve / Vr : calculation carried out before full de1
clutching (detection of non-supplied solenoid valve)
- R = Ve / Vr: calculation carried out when start of
2
clutching phase is complete (detection of supplied
solenoid valve)
The comparison between R and R allows the Autotronic
1
2
to control the automatic changing of Dynashift speeds.
User action
Autotronic 3 control
parameter
Autotronic 3 action
on the Dynashift ratio
Change gear or range to a lower ratio
Change gear or range to a highter ratio
R1<R2
R1>R2
Speed Vr
decrease
Speed Vr
stable
Speed Vr
increase
Or
Speed Vr
decrease
Speed Vr
stable
Speed Vr
increase
Or
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.16
Operation of Autodrive
The Autodrive version of the Autotronic 3 handles the
automatic changing of Dynashift speeds during engine
gear shifts. Two operating modes are available: the
Power mode and the Eco mode. In Eco mode the
changing of Dynashift speeds is carried out at engine
speeds lower than those of the Power mode.
The Autodrive version is controlled by the three-position
switch located on the right-hand armrest (Fig. 4)
5
2
AUTO
Parts list
(1) Indicator lamp 1 (Autodrive Power mode)
(2) Indicator lamp 2 (Autodrive Eco mode)
(3) OFF position: Speed Matching operation, both indicator lamps are out.
(4) ON 1 position: Autodrive Power mode, indicator
lamp 1 is lit
(5) ON 2 position: Autodrive Eco mode, indicator lamp
2 is lit
The Autodrive operates with information from:
- the real engine speed sensor located on the right-hand
side hydraulic cover
- the potentiometer located beneath the acceleration
pedal, its data permits a calculation of the design
engine speed.
Note. In Autodrive mode, the Speed Matching function is always active and overrides the Autodrive
function as soon as a mechanical gear change is
made.
Issue 1
May 2002
1
3
Fig. 4
Increase in
Dynashift
ratios
+
Decrease in
Dynashift
ratios
-
11A03.17
Decrease in
Dynashift
ratios
Vmr < 0,8 Vmt
1200 < Vmt
Vmt > 2100
< 2100
Vmr < 1680
0,8 Vmt < Vmr

Vmt < 1200
Vmt > 2100
Vmr
>
2100
Vmr < 1800
Vmr > 2100
2400
2200
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
800
800
Vmr
1000
Increase in
Dynashift
ratios
+
1200
1400
1600
1800
Decrease in
Dynashift
ratios
-
2000
2200
2400
Decrease in
Dynashift
ratios
-
0,8 Vmt < Vmr

Vmt < 1200
Vmt > 1680
Vmr < 1400
Vmr > 1680
Vmr < 0,8 Vmt

1200 < Vmt
Vmt > 1680
< 1680
Vmr < 1350
2400
2200
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
800
800
Vmr
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Issue 1
2000
2200
2400
May 2002

11A03.18
E . Calibration of throttle pedal

potentiometer
The calibration of the throttle pedal potentiometer must
be carried out each time that one of the following
elements is replaced or modified :
- throttle potentiometer
- throttle cable
- injection pump
- Autotronic 3
1. Start the engine. Put on the handbrake.
2. Place the gear and reverse shuttle levers in neutral
position.
3. The power take off must be disengaged.
Calibration
The calibration is carried out in two successive steps so
as to determine the minimum and maximum engine
speeds in relation to the pedal.
4. Set the engine speed to 1200 rpm 100 rpm using the
hand throttle.
5. Press and hold down the differential lock switch.
The buzzer sounds (after approximately 2 seconds)
indicating the end of the first calibration phase. Release the differential lock switch.
6. Increase the engine speed to 2100 rpm 100 rpm
using the hand throttle.
7. Press and hold down the differential lock switch.
The buzzer sounds (after approximately 2 seconds)
indicating the end of the second calibration phase.
Release the differential lock switch.
Issue 1
May 2002
Potentiometer errors
In the case of a potentiometer fault, short circuit or open
circuit, the Autotronic 3 locks the operation of the AutoDrive and flashes the Dynashift indicator lamp.
If the engine speed is less than 1200 rpm :
- the Dynashift indicator lamp corresponding to the ratio
lower than the one engaged flashes (example: B range
engaged, indicator lamp B is lit and indicator lamp A
flashes).
If the engine speed is greater than 2100 rpm :
- the Dynashift indicator lamp corresponding to the ratio
higher than the one engaged flashes (example: B range
engaged, indicator lamp B is lit and indicator lamp C
flashes).
11A03.19
F . Power Shuttle principles

Block diagram
4
Fig. 5
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Power Shuttle 3-position analog shift lever (see G).

Top and bottom clutch pedal potentiometers
Dashboard indicator lamps (Forward and Reverse)
Autotronic 3
Speed sensors
- gearbox input
- forward speed
(6) Forward solenoid valve
(7) Reverse solenoid valve
The continual autodiagnostics carried out by the system

in relation to the Power Shuttle permit an idea of any fault
to be indicated by the flashing of the indicator lamps on
the dashboard (see F). The Wintest software allows
the precise error code to be displayed (see section
11F03).
Operating modes of the Power Shuttle

Note: The user does not choose the mode of operation
The information received by the Autotronic 3 allows it to
automatically select one of the two operating modes.
The Autotronic 3 automatically controls the Power Shuttle

in relation to information received from various sensors
and the commands given by the driver.
Several mechanical, hydraulic and electrical components
intervene for the operation of the Power Shuttle; it may
be necessary to carry out clutch calibration (see E)
during replacement of one of them.
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.20
USE
- Start-up
and / or
- Power Shuttle shifting
- Manual shifting using the pedal or lever
OPERATING CONDITIONS
- Speed below 2 kph
- Speed above 2 kph

and
- Previous clutch pressure was at least 10 bar.
AUTOTRONIC 3 ACTIONS
Without pedal signal
- Automatic pressure increase in clutch limited to 3
bar
Without pedal signal but with lever signal

- Automatic pressure increase in clutch limited to 7.5
bar
With pedal signal

- Pressure increase in the clutch determined by
position of the pedal and limited to 3 bar
With pedal signal but no lever signal

position of the pedal and limited to 10 bar
With pedal and lever signals
position of the pedal and limited to 7.5 bar
Issue 1
May 2002
G . Calibration of the Power Shuttle
Note: The calibration of the Power Shuttle is essential
where the following components are changed:
- a Power Shuttle solenoid valve or its terminals
- the Power Shuttle hydraulic control unit
- the Power Shuttle unit or one of its components
- the Autotronic 3 unit
11A03.21
Legend
A
Indicator lamp out
Indicator lamp on
Indicator lamp flashes
Note: To authorise entry into calibration mode, the
transmission oil temperature must be:
- 35 C / 45 C: the temperature is measured by the
gearbox cover sensor and can be read using Wintest or
by a direct reading of a specific dashboard display.
The direct display of the temperature on the dashboard is
carried out by reading a code from the A, B, C and D
indicator lamps of the Dynashift or Speedshift.
To enter direct read mode:
- start the engine
- place the Power Shuttle lever in neutral
- Simultaneously move the gear lever (to activate the
Hare / Tortoise switch) and the differential lock switch
- The A, B, C, D indicator lamps show the temperature
as shown in the following table.
Exiting direct read mode is only completed after the
complete shut down of the engine accompanied by the
subsequent drop of the 17 bar low pressure, or by entry
into calibration mode.
Note: The direct read mode of the temperature

permits the tractor to be driven and the Dynashift /
Speedshift ratios to be used, however the display of
indicator lamps A, B, C, D only correspond to the
temperature reading.
- 45 / 55 C: measurement carried out in the gauge hole
on the rear axle using a thermometer.
Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.22
Direct reading of temperature for preparing calibration

Dynashift / Speedshift indicator lamps
Temperature displayed by
Wintest
D
10 C
17 C
22 C
27 C
31 C
36 C
Calibration authorised
39 C
The calibration may

be carried out
Optimal calibration
44 C
Calibration authorised
46 C
51 C
54 C
57 C
60 C
63 C
Issue 1
May 2002
1. Bring the tractor up to temperature
Tractor stationary
- Run the engine, gear lever and Power Shuttle levers
in neutral, PTO clutch in.
- Then, move the Power Shuttle lever 10 times in
each direction, leaving the lever 5 to 10 seconds in
each position in order to bring the control unit and
solenoid valves up to the temperature of the
transmission.
- Measure and note the temperature.
Tractor moving
- Carry out Power Shuttle maneuvers every 5 to 10
seconds, in Hare range 2nd gear.
- Measure and note the temperature.
2. Place the tractor on a hard even surface, free of
obstacles for at least 3 metres.
3. The tractor must be free of any implements.
4. Stop the PTO, disengage the front axle.
5. Stop the engine.
6. Extinguish any work lights / road lights.
7. Put the gear lever and Power Shuttle lever into
neutral.
11A03.23
17. De-clutch using the pedal to complete and validate

the calibration of the Power Shuttle. The direction
indicator lamp remains lit.
Note: During the entire calibration phase, the
Forward and Reverse indicator lamps flash
simultaneously and the buzzer sounds.
Automatic calibration
Note : A manual calibration may be carried out using
Wintest (see section 11F03).
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Engage the handbrake.

Start the engine.
Release the clutch pedal.
Increase the engine speed to 1500 rpm 100 (or to
PTO 400 / 410 rpm in the PTO 540 rpm position) using
the hand throttle.
Shift into the Tortoise range without de-clutching.
Place the Power Shuttle lever in Forward to re-arm
the system and then leave it in this position.
Note: Access to Automatic calibration mode
takes place immediately following the above
described maneuvers.
Simultaneously, and at least for 4 seconds, activate:
- the gear lever to activate the Hare / Tortoise range
switch (tractor shifts to Hare range),
- the differential lock switch.
The access to Automatic calibration mode is indicated
by the extinction of the A, B, C, D indicator lamps,
the two Power Shuttle indicator lamps flash at the
same time and the buzzer sounds. Release the
range and differential lock switches.
The tractor don't move and the calibration could take
5 minutes.
Automatic calibration is finish when the buzzer stop
and the selected direction (forward) indicator lamp
flashes. The selected Dynashift or Speedshift ratio
remains lit.
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.24
Validation
Immediate validation after calibration
18. Without stopping the engine, set the engine speed to
1500 rpm, engage 4th gear in the Tortoise range,
Dynashift in range A or Speedshift in range C.
19. Carry out 10 Power Shuttle maneuvers, forwards /
reverse.
20. Carry out 10 Power Shuttle maneuvers, neutral to
forward and neutral to reverse.
21. Judge the quality of the shuttling which should be
deft and smooth.
Validation of an already calibrated tractor
Note: The transmission temperature must be above
20 C.
22. Put the gear lever in neutral, the power take-off must
be de-clutched, the front axle disengaged.
23. Put the Power Shuttle lever in Forward for at least 1
minute, then at least 1 minute in the Reverse
position.
24. Put the Power Shuttle lever back into neutral.
25. Engage 4th Tortoise, Dynashift in A or Speedshift in
C, with an engine speed of 1500 rpm.
26. Carry out 10 Power Shuttle forward / reverse
maneuvers.
27. Carry out 10 Power Shuttle neutral /forward and
neutral / reverse maneuvers.
28. Judge the quality of the shuttling which should be
deft and smooth.
Note: An abrupt reaction on the 1st maneuver is
normal.
Calibration faults
Note: A fault due to the non-compliance of the
conditions required to access to or to maintain the
calibration mode is signalled by an alternate flashing
of the A, B, C, D indicator lamps.
Access to calibration mode is not provided if:
- The transmission temperature is not correct
- The engine speed is other than 1500 rpm 100
- The Tortoise range has not been engaged before
accessing calibration mode
- The Power Shuttle lever has not been positioned in the
Forward position.
29. Check that the access to calibration conditions in
operation 1 to 13 have been met.
30. Check the connections of the solenoid valves and
the tightness of the coils (tightening torque 5.4 - 8.1
Nm).
31. Check that TOC (top clutch pedal switch) is connected and correctly adjusted (see H).
Issue 1
May 2002
Calibration mode is quit if:

- The engine speed changes from 1500 rpm 100
- The gear lever is not engaged in 1st during phase 1
- The Power Shuttle lever is placed in neutral.
Note: In the case of a calibration failure, the previously
memorised parameters are used by the system or
the default parameters in the case of a new Autotronic
3 unit.
Adjustment of the calibration parameters

- Once the calibration has been correctly carried out, it is
possible to adjust the calibration parameters to obtain
faster or slower Power Shuttle reactions.
- The Autotronic authorises 5 adjustment procedures in
each direction and that can be reinitialised after a new
calibration.
Adjustment Procedure
Note: During the procedure, if the Power Shuttle
lever is placed in neutral or the ignition cut, the
modifications are not memorised.
32. Engine stopped, turn it on and wait for the A, B, C,
D Hare / Tortoise range indicator lamps to go out.
Note: Do not press the clutch pedal.
33. Maintain the Power Shuttle lever in the manual declutched position and press on the differential lock
switch for at least 4 seconds.
The A, B, C and D indicator lamps must light and
remain lit to indicate access to the Adjustment
mode. Release the differential lock switch.
34. Select the clutch whose parameters require
modification by placing the Power Shuttle lever in the
Forward or Reverse position.
After approximately 4 seconds, the Forward and
Reverse indicator lamps light and remain lit.
35. Choose to increase or decrease the progressiveness
of the selected clutch by pressing on the differential
switch. With each press, a direction indicator lamp
remains lit. Forward to obtain a faster reaction,
Reverse to obtain a slower reaction.
Note: Only a single increase or decrease operation
of calibration parameters is authorised on each
access to adjustment mode.
A sixth access to adjustment mode is impossible;
it is necessary to recalibrate the Power Shuttle.
11A03.25
36. To modify the opposite clutch, change the position of

the lever and carry out operations 45 and 46 again.
37. To validate your modifications, place the Power
Shuttle lever in the manual de-clutched position for
at least 4 seconds. The reset of the Autotronic is
shown by the extinction of all the indicator lamps,
then the Dynashift or Speedshift indicator lamps
should light.
Note: If, before the validation time of 4 seconds
has passed, the Power Shuttle lever is returned
to:
- neutral, the modifications are ignored.
- Forward or Reverse, the modifications remain
to be carried out from operation 45 on.
H . Power Shuttle error codes

The Autotronic 3 carries out constant checks on the
Power Shuttle function.
The driver is informed of a possible fault in a function by
an autodiagnostic indicator lamp located on the dashboard
and by the sounding of a buzzer.
The use of Wintest (see section 11F03) allows a much
more precise diagnosis.
The error codes are divided into 3 classes according to
their importance. Each class is characterised by the
different functioning of the indicator lamps and buzzer.
Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.26
Fault
class
Error
code
number
Autotronic 3
action on the
transmission
Forward /
Reverse
indicator
lamp
Diagnostic
indicator
lamp
Buzzer
Power Shuttle
reset after the
fault has been
cancelled
Class I
1-2
Out
Out
Lit and
remains
Sounds
Stop the engine

and wit for
Autotronic 3
standby mode (17
bar pressure
equals 0) (engine
speed equals 0)
Restard the
engine
Class II
7-8-910 - 23*
Forward or Reverse lit

depending on direction
selected.
Out if Power Shuttle is
in neutral
Forward or
Flashes
Reverse lit
rapidly
depending
on direction
selected.
Out if Power
Shuttle is in
neutral
Sounds
De-clutch
Stops
Place lever in
neutral
* Non direct
in Neutral
Class III
Issue 1
3 - 4 - 5 - Forward or Reverse
6 - 15 - 16 depending on direction
17 - 18 19 - 20 21 - 22
Forward or
Reverse
depending
on direction
selected.
May 2002
Flashes
slowly
11A03.27
Errors code
Class
Error number
displayed by
Wintest
Fault
Short circuit to + 12 V on Forward solenoid valve
Short circuit to + 12 V on Reverse solenoid valve
II
107
Open circuit on + supply of analog lever
II
108
Open circuit on ground supply of analog lever
II
109
Open circuit on signal coming from analog lever
II
110
Short circuit to + 12 V on analog lever
II
123
Default in lever Reed switches
III
203
Short circuit to ground on Forward solenoid valve
III
204
Short circuit to ground on Reverse solenoid valve
III
205
Open circuit on Forward solenoid valve
III
206
Open circuit on Reverse solenoid valve
III
215
Open circuit or short circuit to ground on clutch pedal potentiometer
III
216
Short circuit to + 5 V on pedal potentiometer
III
217
Open circuit or short circuit to ground on bottom clutch pedal switch (BOC)
III
218
Short circuit to + 12 V on bottom clutch pedal switch (BOC)
III
219
Open circuit or short circuit to ground on top clutch pedal switch (TOC)
III
220
Short circuit to + 12 V on top clutch pedal switch (TOC) integrated in

potentiometer
III
221
Gearbox input speed sensor fault
III
222
Open + 12 V solenoid driver due to BOC and/or lever neutral switches

blocked in closed position
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.28
Issue 1
May 2002
Signal
Lever position
11A03.29
I . Disassembling, reassembling the

Power Shuttle lever
Parts list
Cap
Circlip
Washer
Housing
Bearing
Upper spindle
Compression spring
Pin 4 x 28
Magnet support
Left torsion spring
Right torsion spring
Sliding part
Compression spring
Ferrule
Neutral switch
Printed circuit
Rubber shim
Bottom cover
M4 x 14 bolt
Washer dia. 4
Water tight cap
Plastic washer
Screw 2 x 0.5
Lever
Screw HN 4
Grower washer dia. 4
Bolt CHC H4 x 18
Pin 3 x 15
O-ring and washer
Knob
1KOhm
1KOhm
S1
24KOhm
Signal
voltage (Volts)
Up (de-clutched)
Aucun
2,5
Forward +
S1 + S2 + S3
Forward
S1 + S2
3,5
Forward -
S1 + S2 + S4
Neutral
S7
0,5
Reverse -
S5 + S6 + S4
Reverse
S5 + S6
1,5
Reverse +
S5 + S6 + S3
S2
36KOhm
2.55KOhm
10KOhm
2.4KOhm
2KOhm
S3
5
15,8KOhm
2
100KOhm
S7
2KOhm
S4
560Ohm
10KOhm
2.55KOhm
S5
2.4KOhm
1.5KOhm
12
10
11
16
13
17
14
24KOhm
34KOhm
S6
1KOhm
18
15
20
5
6
6 5 4 3 2 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
Connector functions
Terminal
19
28
30
21
+ 5 Volts
Signal
Ground
Normally closed Neutral
22
29
23
25
26
27
24
Designation
switch
5
+ 12 V input to Neutral switch
Normally open Neutral

switch
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.30
Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.31
0,7/1,2 mm
J . Operation of the manoeuvring

pedal
Manoeuvring pedal assembly (Fig. 7)

Top of clutch switch (TOC)
Bottom of clutch switch (BOC)
Starter safety switch
Pedal pressed adjustment screw
Pedal released adjustment screw
10,9
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
2,6/3,6 mm
- The manoeuvring pedal differs from the clutch pedal

fitted to mechanical gearboxes. It is only used when
manoeuvring in very tight spaces or when hitching an
implement.
- It is not necessary to use this pedal either when
engaging a gear from neutral, when changing gears or
when reversing the direction of travel.
- The position of the manoeuvring pedal is transmitted to
the DCC by the TOC (1) and by the BOC (2).
3
4
Adjustment of the potentiometer / TOC

- With the manoeuvring pedal fully pressed, adjust the
position of screw (4) to provide a clearance of 2.6 mm
to 3.6 mm between the head of the screw and the TOC
plunger.
- With the pedal released, act upon screw (5) to provide
a clearance of 0.7 mm to 1.2 mm between screw (4)
and the body of the TOC (Fig. 21).
- Tighten the lock nut of the TOC to a torque of 23 - 33 Nm.
- After these adjustments, check the pedal travel. It
must be between 130 mm to 150 mm.
5
0,3/1,0 mm
BOC adjustment
- Screw the switch so that the end of its threaded cylinder
is recessed 0.3 mm to 1 mm in its support (Fig. 7).
- Tighten the lock nut to a torque of 6 - 9 Nm.
150
130
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.32
K . Electrical diagram
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Gearbox input speed sensor
Power take off speed sensor
Hare / Tortoise range switch
Low-pressure pressure switch (17 bar green dot)
Not used
4WD switch (connected to rep. 15)
Eco power take off switch
Power take off stop
Differential lock switch (connected to rep. 12)
Creeper unit switch
Power take off switch
Analog shuttle and Dynashift or SpeedShift switch
(depending on options)
Top of clutch switch (TOC) (connected to rep. 22)
Engine start safety switch
Clutch pedal potentiometer (connected to rep. 19)
Proportional PTO shunt
Power shuttle buzzer
Power take off solenoid valve
Reverse solenoid valve
4 WD solenoid valve
EV1 Dynashift solenoid valve
EV2 Dynashift or SpeedShift solenoid valve
(depending on option)
Forward solenoid valve
Reverse indicator lamp
Forward indicator lamp
Ratio A indicator lamp
Ratio B indicator lamp
Ratio C indicator lamp
Ratio D indicator lamp
4 WD indicator lamp
Creeper unit indicator lamp
Self-diagnostics indicator lamp
Hare range indicator lamp
540 or 1000 rpm power take off indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
1 clock hour = 1 hour of hourmeter from reception
of engine speed signal on
(47) Dashboard displays
(48) Speed signals to lift control harness
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(51) Ignition key switch
(52) Power take off brake switch
(53) Power take off brake solenoid valve
(54) Gear lever neutral sensor
(55) Parking brake lever switch
(56) Parking brake indicator lamp
(58) 15 micron filter clogging switch
(59) 150 micron strainer clogging switch (open centre)
5 bar booster pressure switch (closed centre)
(60) Filter clogging or low pressure switch
(61) 540 or 1000 rpm power take off dashboard display
selector (fitted if (62) and (63) are absent)
(62) 540 or 1000 rpm power take off
and dashboard display
(63) switch (fitted with selector lever in cab)
(64) CAN connector to lift control, 16-way plug
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
(67) Supply switch (12) and (15)
(68) Dynashift armrest lever (North American version
only)
(69) Ignition switch
(70) Lighting switch
(71) Throttle pedal switch
(72) Autodrive or Speed Matching switch (according
to option)
(73) Dasboard power supply
Designation of connectors
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :
Engine harness / dashboard harness junction

Lighting harness / dashboard harness junction
Autotronic 3 harness / dashboard harness junction
Deutsch connector on Autotronic 3 harness side
Deutsch connector on transmission harness side
Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark
Note: The Autotronic 3 has two components :

- J1 : black connector
- J2 : red connector
Each connector has 36 pins.
Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.33
52
R
CD4A
CD4T
23
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
53
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.34
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.35
Sensor / Switch on gearbox
51
1
CD4A
CD3
CD4T
6
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.36
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.37
Parking brake and gearbox neutral safety
CD4T
CD4A
51
54
56
55
CD3
Hydraulic circuit information

CD4T
CD4A
60
CD3
57
58
59
Issue 1
Fig. 10
May 2002

11A03.38
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.39
Dashboard indicator lamp
62
63
61
CD3
45
45
1000
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
R
37
36
35
34
33
24
CD3
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.40
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.41
Dashboard information
R
46
CD3
47
48
Power supply
51
73
CD3
R
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.42
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.43
CAN
V
M
B
P09
P10
P08
J1-36
J1-34
EHR-C
J1-35
64
Clutch pedal potentiometer
J1-04
J1-01
J1-03
BL.F
M
R
P07
P03
P24
P07
P03
P24
BL.F
M
R
P03
P25
P24
M
B
R
Cnc-B
Cnc-C
Cnc-A
22
Reverse shuttle lever potentiometer
J1-01
J1-03
J1-02
P03
P25
P24
Issue 1
May 2002
Cnc-3
Cnc-2
Cnc-1
18
Fig. 13

11A03.44
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.45
Lever neutral information / BOC / Ignition switch
20
73
51
R
CD3
Starting
N
CD1C
66
CD1M
50
69
51
49
65
Issue 1
Fig. 14
May 2002

11A03.46
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.47
Cab switch
12 / 15
70
51
61
13
16
CD3
17
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.48
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.49
Dynashift Automatic control
68
51
71
CD3
Brake information
51
11
10
Fig. 16
CD3
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.50
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.51
TOC information
51
N
19
CD3
PTO stop information

N
51
CD3
CD 2
Fig. 17
14
Issue 1
May 2002

11A03.52
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
Autotronic 3
Temperature sensor
Engine speed sensor
Not used
Power take off stop
Creeper unit switch
4 WD solenoid valve
4 WD indicator lamp
(46) Hourmeter
(49) Battery
(50) Starter motor
(65) Alternator
(66) Starter relay
only)
to option)
CD1C :
CD1M :
CD2 :
CD3 :
CD4A :
CD4T :

Colour codes
B
BL
BE
G
J
M
N
O
R
RO
V
Vi
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
Blue
Beige
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Orange
Red
Pink
Green
Violet
C
F
: Light
: Dark

Issue 1
May 2002
11A03.53
Dynashift control for mechanical reverse shuttle
F7
51
74
D
J1
N
C5
J1-14
J1-16J1-15
B
A
N
M
R
P26
P27
P28
P26
P27
P28
N
M
R
CD3
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2002
DCC / TC - Description
11B01.1
11 B01 Description and operation
CONTENTS
A.
Description ___________________________________
B.
DCC dashboard ________________________________
C.
Status of DCC switches ________________________
14
D.
Characteristics of DCC sensor input signals _____
18
E.
Transmission Controller (TC) ___________________
21
F.
Operation of solenoid valves and test procedures
35
G.
Input signals to TC sensors / switches __________
36
H.
Operation of the manoeuvring pedal ____________
41
I.
Operation of the armrest gear selector switch ___
42
J.
Steering wheel gear shift lever _________________
43
K.
Use of the backup harness _____________________
45
L.
Location of sensors ____________________________
46
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.2
11
12
13
10
14
15
10 15
8
5
20
16
25
17
RPM x 100
KPH
% RPM
MPH
1/MIN
18
GNO
SL IP
PTO
ENG
ENG
FIELD
SPO
RPM
RPM
HRS
AREA
19
20
21
22
3
23
24
38
39
40
25
37
26
A
36
35
27
28
34
29
C
33
32
30
31
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
A . Description
The transmission control circuit is made up of three main
components. A digital dashboard display (Display Cab
Controller, DCC), a transmission controller (Transmission Controller, TC) and a CAN network (Communications Area Network). These components are connected
via harnesses, switches, potentiometers, sensors and
solenoid valves.
The transmission electronic control circuit

(Fig. 1)
(1) DCC
(2) TC
(3) CAN
DCC input signals

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
Manoeuvring pedal
Gear shift lever
Turbocharging sensor
Membrane key switches
Parking brake
Front axle switch (4WD)
Differential lock switch
Fuel gauge
Coolant liquid sensors
Brake switches
Engine oil pressure
Radar
Instrument status
Headlights
11B01.3
Input signals to the TC

(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
Engine speed
Shaft speed / power take off clutch
Forward speed
Transmission temperature
Gearbox hydraulic pressure
Lubricating pressure
Hydraulic pressure (17 bar)
Hydraulic filter
Calibration speed
Park Lock switch
35)
Creeper unit switch
TC output signals
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
Gearbox solenoid valves

4WD solenoid valve
Power take off / PTO brake solenoid valves
Output signals from the DCC to the operator

(19) Liquid crystal display
(20) Signal lamps
(21) Alarm warning
Other CAN network connections

(22) Diagnostic connector
(23) Electronic linkage control (ELC)
(24) Datatronic
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.4
The DCC and TC are two separate micro controllers that

each contain sophisticated software designed to handle
the functions of the tractors transmission and the Full
Powershift gearbox. Both of them can be programmed
and parameterised by qualified personnel in order to
adapt them to different tractors, depending on the type of
the transmission and the specific operating features
required.
The DCC and TC both contain a self-diagnostic function
intended to warn the operator when the circuit of one of
the components is defective or disconnected. The diagnostic codes guide qualified personnel when troubleshooting the various control components. These codes
are displayed on the DCC and may, depending on the
seriousness of the breakdown, place the transmission in
neutral or allow it to continue functioning. Some codes
are stored in memory and can be later displayed by
qualified personnel to troubleshoot intermittent problems.
The DCC controls the functions of the tractor and supplies information to the operator via a digital display,
instruments and analog warning lamps. It also communicates with the TC via the CAN network to provide it with
electric signals from the functions activated by the
operator, such as manoeuvring pedal or gear shift lever
positions, or the status of the parking brake, power take
off, differential lock or 4WD switch, as well as the
information such as turbocharging pressure and engine
torque.
The TC receives input signals generated by the operators actions and from signals coming from the DCC
sensors via the CAN network. It likewise receives direct
input signals from other sensors, for parameters such as
engine speed, transmission output speed, power take off
speed, transmission temperature, as well as information
from lubrication and transmission pressure switches.
The status of the sensors and switches is transmitted to
the DCC via the CAN network and is used by the TC to
activate the transmission solenoid valves, 4WD, power
take off, Park Lock and differential lock.
Issue 1
May 2001
The CAN network provides a highly efficient means of

communication between a number of components controlled by the micro controller, these include the DCC, TC
and ELS (electronic linkage), Datatronic and diagnostics
socket. These components are all linked by cable having
two lead wires and a ground and through which all
communications are received or dispatched at a speed
of 250 kbits / second. The external diagnostics socket
located in the cab provides for connection to a PC or
similar device in order to program, parameterise and / or
test the operation of the various elements in order to
diagnose and resolve breakdowns.
11B01.5
10 15
5
20
25
RPM x 100
KPH
% RPM
MPH
1/MIN
4
GNO
SL IP
PTO
ENG
ENG
FIELD
SPO
RPM
RPM
HRS
AREA
1
2
SELECT WIDTH
SET
6
Fig. 2
B . DCC dashboard
Dashboard (Fig. 2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Gauges
Liquid crystal display
Tachometer
Membrane keys
Signal lamps
Fixing screws
Only those functions linked to transmission control are

treated in this section. For further information concerning
lighting, engine and cab, etc., see section 10A01 or
10A02, depending on the version.
The DCC receives and displays the tractor functions and

supplies this information to the operator. It also receives
information concerning turbocharging pressure, manoeuvring pedal position, gear shift lever and parking brake
position, and status information of the 4WD, power take
off and differential lock switches. These sensor input
signals and certain other switch signals are transmitted
to the TC via the CAN network.
There are six connectors at the rear of the DCC, these are
marked with the letters A, B, C, D, E and F. Each pin of
the different connectors are further marked with the
letters A to K. The input / output signals of the connectors
are shown overleaf.
The DCC is held by four screws on the steering column

assembly. Only the bulbs used by the signal lamps and
backlighting may be replaced. If the DCC or one of its
components fails, it must be completely replaced by
another unit. In the case of such replacement ,the new
unit must then be programmed and parameterised, see
section 11F04.
Issue 2
May 2002

11B01.6
K
J
H
G
F
K
J
H
G
F
A
B
C
D
E
Connector "A"
Connector "B"
Connector "C"
Connector "D"
Connector "E"
Connector "F"
A
B
C
D
E
K
J
H
G
F
A
B
C
D
E
K
J
H
G
F
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
A
B
C
D
E
DCC connectors (Fig. 3) and pin layout (Fig.

4)
C
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
K
J
H
G
F
A
B
C
D
E
K
J
H
G
F
Fig. 3
A
B
C
D
E
K
J
H
G
F
Fig. 4
Issue 2
May 2002
Connector A
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Connector C
Description
Battery ground
+ 12 V after contact
Signal to coolant level sensor (depending on options)
Turbocharging pressure sensor ground
Turbocharging pressure sensor + 5 V supply
Turbocharging pressure sensor input signal 0.8 V - 4.2 V
Not used
Not used
Not used
+ 12 V battery
F
G
H
J
K
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Connector E
Description
Not used
Not used
12 V left brake switch input
12 V right brake switch input
Input signal to fuel level sensor, 0 V - 12 V
Input signal to coolant liquid temperature, 0 V - 12 V
Rear power take off switch input, 12 V
Rear power take off brake switch input, 12 V
Wing-mounted power take off emergency stop switch input, 12 V
Not used
Connector D
Connector B
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
11B01.7
Description
5 V supply to clutch potentiometer
Input signal to clutch potentiometer, 0.8 V - 4.2 V
5 V supply to armrest speed Up / Down potentiometer
5 V supply to steering wheel lever potentiometer
Input signal to steering wheel gear shift lever potentiometer
(0.8 V - 4.2 V)
Ground for steering wheel gear shift lever potentiometer
Pressure switch (0 V - 12 V)
Input signal to armrest speed Up / Down potentiometer (0.8 V
- 4.2 V)
Ground for armrest speed Up / Down potentiometer
Ground for top-of-clutch (TOC) potentiometer
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Description
12 V differential lock switch input
12V 4WD switch momentary input
12 V parking brake switch input
Buzzer output signal, 12 V
Not used
Not used
Not used
Input to N.C. terminal of steering wheel Neutral lever switch
Input to N.O. terminal of steering wheel Neutral lever switch
Input to headlight selector, 12 V
Connector F
Description
CAN signal (Hi)
CAN network ground
Input to N.O. terminal of armrest Neutral switch, 12 V
Input to top-of-clutch switch (TOC) 12 V
Radar input signal
Input to N.O. terminal of bottom-of-clutch switch (BOC) 12 V
Input to N.C. terminal of bottom-of-clutch switch (BOC) 12 V
Not used
Input to N.C. terminal of armrest Neutral switch, 12 V
CAN signal (Low)
Note :
- N.O. = Normally open
- N.C. = Normally closed
Issue 1
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
May 2001
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Description
12 V main beam switch input
12 V left direction indicator switch input
12 V right direction indicator switch input
12 V 1st trailer switch input V
12 V 2nd trailer switch input
open / grounded air filter switch input
Not used
Not used
12 V linkage position switch input
12 V linkage position switch input

11B01.8
DCC wiring diagram (Fig. 5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
Battery
Electronic linkage supply
Steering wheel Neutral switch
To alternator
Starter
Cab relay
To cab harness
Electronic linkage - Supply
Armrest Neutral switch
Park Lock switch
Not used
Linkage harness connector
Power take off emergency stop switch (on rear
wing)
Creeper unit switch
4WD and differential lock switch
Armrest lighting
Speeds Up / Down armrest potentiometer
To water temperature sensor
Rear power take off switch
Turbocharging pressure sensor
DCC dashboard
Radiator water level sensor (8270 - 8280)
Fuel gauge
Lighting signal lamps
Lighting switch
To main beam / dipped beam toggle
To connector C60
To dashboard switch
To work lights relay
To connector C2
Buzzer
- continuous: parking brake on
- intermittent: warning / fault
CAN network plug
Top of clutch switch (TOC) and potentiometer
Forward / Reverse potentiometer on steering wheel
Safety switch
Starter switch
Not used
Right brake switch
Left brake switch
BOC clutch switch
To stop lights
Time delay relay (if not fitted is replaced by 15 A
fuse)
Electronic transmission control unit (TC)
(93) Connector C5 - Dashboard connector

A : + 12 V Park Lock supply
B : + 12 V BOC and neutral switch supply
C : + 12 V after contact supply
D : Ground
E : CAN (High)
F : CAN (Low)
G : Creeper unit control
H : Not used
(94) Transmission oil temperature sensor
(95) Gearbox oil 17-bar pressure switch
(96) Rear axle 17 bar pressure switch
(97) Booster pressure 5-bar pressure switch
(99) Power take off clutch output speed sensor
(100) Forward speed sensor (gearbox output)
(101) Engine speed sensor (gearbox input)
(102) Power take off clutch speed sensor
(103) Intermediate gearbox speed sensor (used during
calibration)
(104) Connection to be modified during calibration:
- normal position: power take off speed sensor
(brown / brown wires)
- calibration position: intermediate speed sensor
(brown / red wires)
Dashboard signal lamps
Colour code
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(53)
B
BE
BL
G
J
M
N
R
Ro
S
V
VI
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
C
F
= Light
= Dark
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
Left direction indicator (green lamp)

Right direction indicator (green lamp)
Air filter clogging (yellow lamp)
Rear power take off (yellow lamp)
Transmission oil pressure linked to gearbox 17-bar
pressure switch (red lamp)
Warning (red lamp)
Differential lock (yellow lamp)
First trailer direction indicator (green lamp)
Second trailer direction indicator (green lamp)
Battery charge lamp (red lamp)
Engine oil pressure (red lamp)
Radiator water level (red lamp, 8270 - 8280 only)
Lubrication pressure linked to 5 bar booster pressure switch
Hydraulic pressure linked to rear axle 17 bar pressure switch (red lamp)
Hydraulic filter linked to 15-micron filter clogging
pressure switch (yellow lamp)
Gearbox oil temperature (red lamp)
Main beam (blue lamp)
Parking brake (red lamp)
4WD (green lamp)
Solenoid valves
(79)
(80)
(81)
(82)
(83)
(84)
(85)
(86)
(87)
(88)
(89)
(90)
(91)
(92)
Clutch solenoid valve A

Clutch solenoid valve C
Clutch solenoid valve R
Clutch solenoid valve 2
Clutch solenoid valve 1
Clutch solenoid valve M
Clutch solenoid valve L
Clutch solenoid valve H
4WD clutch solenoid valve (mechanically engaged)
Clutch solenoid valve B
Power take off clutch solenoid valve
Differential lock clutch solenoid valve
Rear power take off clutch solenoid valve
Park Lock clutch solenoid valve (mechanically
engaged)
Issue 1
May 2001
White
Beige
Blue
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Red
Pink
Salmon
Green
Violet
emb. = End
10
11B01.9
16
9
14
17
15
5
2
18
4
11
19
12
47
48
49
50
20
13
21
53
54
23
55
56
57
58
59
36
44
41
45
37
42
35
24
61
62
22
63
64
65
66
67
43
34
25
68
33
26
38
31
30
29
39
40
28
27
32
Fig. 5
46
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.10
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.11
DCC signal lamps (Fig. 6)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Engine oil pressure

Air filter clogging
Gearbox 17 bar pressure
Rear axle 17 bar pressure
4WD
Differential lock
Battery
Coolant liquid level
5 bar booster pressure
Rear axle hydraulic filter clogging
Hydraulic oil temperature
Main warning signal lamp
Power take off
Parking brake / Park Lock
1
2
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 6
The DCC activates all the signal lamps and display

segments for three seconds after the ignition switch is
activated. Once ignition switch contact is made, before
the engine is started, the hourmeter displays total engine
hours until the engine is started. When the BOC switch
is activated, the digital display shows the forward speed
and the pre-selected speed range. The DCC must
receive a signal from the bottom-of-clutch pedal switch
(BOC) for at least 1 second before it will activate the
other tractor functions.
If the clutch pedal has not been pressed and the ignition
is turned on, the DCC displays the versions of the
program. The DCC program version is displayed in front
of the TC version. Example: diSP then 2.14 then trAN
then 2.14. In order to drive the tractor, press the clutch
pedal to remove the programmes versions display.
Issue 2
May 2002

11B01.12
Liquid crystal display (Fig. 7)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Ratio selected
Creeper unit signal lamp
Pre-selected ratios
Automatic 4WD signal lamp
Direction of movement:
F : Forward
R : Reverse
N : Neutral
P : Park Lock
(6) Display of DCC / TC information (program versions,
error codes)
(7) Display of:
- forward speed
- wheel slippage
- power take off speed
- engine speed
- total engine hours
- worked area
- diagnostics functions
The DCC digital display comprises two parts. The upper
part displays the data relating to the changing of speeds,
error data / parameters / diagnostics, 4WD and creeper
unit status.
The lower part displays the engine speed, the power take
off, the percentage of wheel slip, the forward speed, total
engine hours, the worked area and error data / diagnostics / parameters. The digital display cannot be repaired
and must be replaced as an entire unit along with the
DCC.
Issue 2
May 2002
KPH
RPM
% MPH
1/MIN
Fig. 7
11B01.13
DCC dials and gauges (Fig. 8)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Fuel gauge
Engine oil pressure
Engine temperature
Tachometer
The DCC has four analog dials displaying engine oil

pressure, coolant liquid temperature, fuel level and engine speed. These dials cannot be repaired separately
and the whole DCC unit must be replaced. See section
11B02 for the checking of dial functions.
10 15
5
20
25
RPM x 100
KPH
% RPM
MPH
L/MIN
GNO
SL IP
PTO
ENG
ENG
FIELD
SPO
RPM
RPM
HRS
AREA
Warning buzzer
The DCC contains a warning buzzer that emits a sound

whenever certain error conditions are detected. The
buzzer operates under the following circumstances:
- engine temperature greater than 105C
- engine pressure less than 1 bar (15 psi) when the engine
speed is less than 1000 rpm
- engine oil pressure less than 2.1 bar when the engine
speed is greater than 1000 rpm
- parking brake on when the transmission is in drive
- low engine coolant level
- transmission pressure lower than 9.1 bar
- hydraulic temperature greater than 105C
SELECT WIDTH
SET
Fig. 8
The warning signal lamp lights whenever the above

described conditions are detected, or if the battery
voltage drops below 11 V or exceeds 16,5 V, or if the
clutch pedal is pressed while the handbrake is on.
Issue 2
May 2002

11B01.14
The bottom of clutch switch (BOC)
C . Status of DCC switches

The DCC receives the status of the following switches:
The differential lock switch is a momentary

contact type, normally open switch. The DCC maintains
the differential locked until the operator places the switch
in the closed position. The differential lock solenoid valve
is then activated by the TC via a signal emitted by the
DCC. When the differential lock is activated, the corresponding signal lamp on the DCC is lit.
The 4WD switch is a momentary contact type,

normally open switch. The DCC maintains the status of
the 4WD until the operator places the switch in the closed
position. The 4WD solenoid valve is then activated by the
TC via a signal emitted by the DCC that indicates the
status of the 4WD. When 4WD is engaged, the 4WD
solenoid valve is no longer supplied with power and the
4WD signal lamp on the DCC is lit.
The left and right-hand side brake switches

are normally open type switches as long as the brake
pedals are up. Any pressure exerted on one or other of the
pedals closes the relevant set of contacts. If the differential lock is activated, any pressure on either brake
switches leads to a de-activation of the differential lock.
The top of clutch switch (TOC) is integrated into

the clutch pedal potentiometer. It is a normally open
switch as long as the clutch pedal is pressed. It closes
when the clutch pedal is fully released (clutch in).
Issue 2
May 2002
There are two bottom of clutch switches, both of the

normally open type (as long as the clutch pedal is not fully
pressed). They close when the clutch pedal is fully
pressed.
The upper BOC switch is linked to the DCC and has two
contacts:
- the first is of the normally open type and closes when
the clutch pedal is pressed. It informs the DCC of the
fully de-clutched position of the pedal.
- the second is of the normally closed type and opens
when the clutch pedal is pressed. It permits the
gearbox solenoid valves to be supplied with current.
The lower switch (safety switch) forms part of the starter
electrical circuit.
11B01.15
The Neutral position switches

Two switches are connected in series:
- the first is located in the gear shift lever armrest
assembly
- the second is located in the steering wheel control
lever.
1
NF
NO
NF
NO
Fig. 8A
TC : B/B
DCC : D/J
Neutral switch connections (Fig. 8A)

(1) Steering wheel Neutral switch
(2) Armrest Neutral lever switch
DCC : D/C
DCC : E/H
DCC : D/G
The N.O. position of the switches corresponds to the

Neutral position of the levers.
The N.C. position of the switches corresponds to the Non
Neutral position of the levers.
DCC : E/J
BOC
NO NF
+ 12 V
The supply to the Neutral switches is effected via the

upper BOC switch. The Neutral position of the steering
wheel lever has priority over the armrest lever.
With the clutch pedal released, the N.C. switch of BOC

must be closed.
The inputs to the DCC of the Neutral switches in relation

to their position are:
- armrest lever and steering wheel lever in Neutral
. 12 V input to
DCC E/J
- armrest lever in Neutral and steering wheel lever in Non
Neutral:
. 12 V input to
DCC E/H
DCC D/C
- armrest lever in Non Neutral and steering wheel lever in
Neutral:
. 12 V input to
DCC E/J
- armrest lever in Non Neutral and steering wheel lever in
Non Neutral:
. 12 V input to
DCCE/H
DCC D/J
TC B/B
Note: When the clutch pedal is fully pressed (disengaged position), the power supply to the Neutral
switches is cut and the DCC D/G input is 0 V.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.16
The Park Lock switch is located at the rear of the
The air filter clogging switch is located in the
Park Lock lever. This switch is activated when the lever

is placed in the brake engaged position.
Important: The tractor may be in drive and move
when the Park Lock is engaged. In such an event, the
Park Lock signal lamp lights and the warning buzzer
sounds. Do not operate the tractor with the Park
Lock engaged.
engine air intake pipe between the air filter and the inlet
manifold. It is a normally closed type switch that opens
when air filter clogging creates a vacuum of 635 mm of
water, this lights the air filter clogging signal lamp.
The power take off switch has three positions

(brake, neutral and on) and is located in the cab on the
right-hand side console:
- in the On position, the power take off solenoid valve is
supplied with current from the TC via a signal from the
DCC.
- in the Brake position, electrical current is supplied to the
power take off brake solenoid valve from the TC via a
signal from the DCC.
- in the Neutral position, the switch circuit of the power
take off to the DCC is open and the TC supplies neither
the power take off nor the power take off brake. When
the power take off is activated, the DCC lights the
corresponding signal lamp.
The power take off emergency stop switch
is located on the rear wings.
It is normally closed and supplies the C/J input to the
DCC with 12 V.
When the switch is opened, the C/J input to the DCC
drops to 0 V, the power take off solenoid valve is no
longer supplied with current and the signal lamp flashes.
To re-engage the power take off, first place the power
take off switch in the cab to the Neutral position, then to
On.
The MoveUp / MoveDown switch indicates to

the DCC whether or not the implement is in the Work
position. This signal is used to calculate the worked area.
The switch is closed when the implement is raised and
opens when the implement is in the Work position.
Issue 1
May 2001
The DCC is equipped with six membrane keys. Three of
them are used by the operator to select the different
display modes and the three others allow qualified
personnel to carry out calibration and diagnostics operations.
Membrane key pad (Fig. 9)
Key (3)
- Select total engine hours or worked area
- Modify a selected number
- Delete the worked area data
Key (4)
- Select the different calibration values available
Key (5)
- Display the current calibration value
- Select Diagnostics mode
Key (6)
- Decrement one level in the current calculator value
- Exit the calibration level
GNO
SL IP
PTO
ENG
ENG
FIELD
SPO
RPM
RPM
HRS
AREA
SELECT WIDTH
The six membrane keys are used to select the following:

Key (1)
- Select forward speed or wheel slippage ratio
- Select a number in order to modify it
- Enter the radar forward speed calibration value
Key (2)
- Select the PTO speed or engine speed
- Save a modified constant
- Confirm the tool width parameter
11B01.17
SET
Fig. 9
Keys (4) and (5)
- Enter level 1 calibration
. transmission calibration
. turbocharging pressure calibration
Keys (5) and (6)
. gear shift lever calibration
. display DCC / TC constants
. delete saved error codes
Keys (4) and (6)
. modify DCC / TC constants.
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.18
D . Characteristics of DCC sensor

input signals
The turbocharging pressure sensor is located
behind the engine, on the left-hand side of the tractor. It
detects pressure via a tube connected to the engine inlet
manifold. Faults with the pressure sensor can be identified using the turbocharging pressure diagnostics function.
The turbocharging pressure sensor can be checked by
injecting controlled compressed air (not exceeding 1.7
bar) into the sensor tube.
The engine oil pressure sensor is of the variable

resistance type located in the engine lubricating channel.
The sensor supplies the TC with the information necessary for the functioning of the pressure gauge and oil
pressure light. The values shown in the table below allow
the sensor to be checked for correct operation.
Oil pressure
0
1 bar (15 psi)
3 bar (45 psi)
5 bar (75 psi)
Resistance
10 3
47 4
116.5 5
183 7
In diagnostics mode, the DCC displays the pressure

measured by the sensor.
There are 2 fuel level sensors, one in the main tank and
one in the auxiliary tank. Once they have been removed
from the tanks the sensors can be checked using a digital
multimeter. The values shown in the table below allow
checking of the accuracy of the sensors.
Two tanks
Upper tank
sensor
Lower tank
sensor
Resistance in position
High
Low
Resistance in position
High
Low
1-16
220-240
1-16
110-130
One tank only

Top resistance
1-16
Bottom resistance
340-360
Also check that continuity is maintained throughout the

full travel of the sensors.
Issue 1
May 2001
If the engine oil pressure is less than 1 bar when the

engine speed is less than 1000 rpm, or less than 2 bar
when the engine speed is greater than 1000 rpm, the
engine oil pressure lamp and fault warning lamp light and
the buzzer sounds.
The right-hand side speed lever
potentiometer is located in the armrest. It controls
the changing up and changing down of the ratios. Its
resistance varies between 5.40 and 3.70 from
terminal E and G of the black connector, 10 wires,
located in the armrest.
11B01.19
On the largest tractors, the coolant liquid level sensor is

mounted on the expansion tank. The switch opens when
the coolant liquid temperature drops below the recommended level and closes when the level is sufficient. If
the coolant liquid level drops below the recommended
level, the buzzer is sounded and both the coolant liquid
temperature signal lamp and the warning signal lamp
light.
The steering wheel speed lever integrates a

series of resistances that allow the DCC input voltage to
vary in order to obtain Neutral, Forward or Reverse and
changing Up or Down through the engaged ratios.
The TOC comprises a top of clutch potentiometer and

a switch integrated into the same component. A pin in
contact with the clutch pedal indicates its position to the
DCC.
The resistance of the potentiometer between terminals
1 and 3 is around 5 k.
The resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the sensor
range from 3 k to 8 k depending on the movement
of the pedal.
The engine temperature sensor is a variable

resistance sensor located near the temperature switch
unit or in the upper front part of the cylinder head. The
sensor provides the DCC with the necessary information
for the gauge and the engine temperature signal lamp.
The values shown in the table below enable the sensor
to be checked.
Temperature
25 C
100 C
125 C
Resistance
282 5 %
180 2.5 %
89 3 %
When the engine temperature reaches 105 C (221 F),

the warning signal lamp lights and the buzzer sounds.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.20
Turbocharger check
The DCC controls and handles the turbocharging pressure inputs in order to calculate the degree of
turbocharging. The turbocharging pressure is detected by
the relevant sensor mounted on the engine inlet manifold. The DCC uses the signal from the sensor along with
engine speed to determine the engine charging, this is
based on a three dimensional torque table stored in
memory via the DCC program.
Each type of engine has different turbo charging characteristics. It is therefore essential that calibration of the
engine and turbocharger parameters are correctly carried
out in order to guarantee a continuous quality of gear
shifting. For parameterisation and calibration procedures,
see section 11B02.
Adaptation to the forward speed

To limit clutch wear and avoid major gear changes during
declutching operations or during transitions to neutral or
a re-taking up of the drive, the DCC automatically
changes ratios, under certain conditions, so that the
ratios continuously correspond to the forward speed.
The highest ratio that can be selected from neutral when
the tractor is stopped is 13 F (13th forward) or 5 R (5th
reverse). In such cases where the tractor is actually
moving while in neutral, it is recommended that the ratio
most suited to the forward speed be selected.
When the 13 F (13th forward) to 18 F (18th forward) ratios
are engaged and the gear shift lever is in neutral, the DCC
checks the transmission input and output shafts via the
TC and determines the gear ratio that corresponds best
to the current output speed of the transmission. This ratio
then becomes the current ratio so that when the gear
shift lever is placed in the forward position, the forward
speed changes very little. If the forward speed of the
tractor falls until it corresponds to ratio lower than 13 F,
this lower ratio becomes the current one.
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.21
F
G
H
J
K
E
D
C
B
A
K
J
H
G
F
K
J
H
G
F
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
C
F
G
H
J
K
Via the CAN network, the DCC transmits to the TC the

input signals from sensors and the operators commands. It also directly receives the following information:
- engine speed (gearbox input)
- forward speed (gearbox output)
- power take off clutch output speed or calibration speed
- transmission oil temperature
- 15 micron filter clogging pressure switch status (on rear
axle)
- booster pressure 5 bar pressure switch status
- rear axle 17 bar oil pressure switch status
- gearbox 17 bar oil pressure switch status
- Park Lock switch position (on rear axle)
A
B
C
D
E
E . Transmission Controller (TC)
Fig. 10
The status of these switches and sensors it transmitted
to the DCC via the CAN network and used by the TC to
activate the gearbox, 4WD, power take off, Park Lock
and differential lock solenoid valves. The TC compensates for changes in hydraulic temperature, engine load
and engine speed in order to guarantee gear shifting of
continuous quality.
A
B
C
D
E
The TC is mounted on a silent block, on the right-hand

side of the chassis below the cab. The TC can be
programmed and parameterised using Wintest (see
section 11F04). If the TC has been replaced, it must be
calibrated according to the procedures described in
11B02.
TC (Fig. 10) and TC connector (Fig. 11)
K
J
H
G
F
Fig. 11
The TC is linked to the switches, sensors, solenoid

valves and DCC by 5 connectors. The five TC connectors
are marked A, B, C, D and E. The TC has a sixth
connection port F that is blocked off and not used. Each
of the pins of the connectors is marked from A through
to K. The inputs / outputs of the connectors are as
follows:
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.22
Issue 1
May 2001
Description of connectors
Connector A
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Connector E
Connector C
Description
Solenoid valve C (+ 12 V) supply
Solenoid valve A (+ 12 V) supply
Solenoid valve B (+ 12 V) supply
Differential lock solenoid valve (+ 12 V) supply
Solenoid valve H (+ 12 V) supply
Solenoid valve L (+ 12 V) supply
Solenoid valve M (+ 12 V) supply
Solenoid valve 1 (+ 12 V) supply
Solenoid valve 2 (+ 12 V) supply
Solenoid valve R (+ 12 V) supply
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Connector B
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
11B01.23
Description
Solenoid valve C ( - ) ground return
Solenoid valve A ( - ) ground return
Solenoid valve B ( - ) ground return
Solenoid valve 1 ( - ) ground return
Solenoid valve H ( - ) ground return
Solenoid valve L ( - ) ground return
Solenoid valve M ( - )ground return
Solenoid valve 2 ( - ) ground return
Solenoid valve R ( - ) ground return
Differential solenoid valve ( - ) ground return
Connector D
Description
Ground ( - )
+ 12 V Neutral and BOC switches return supply
Park Lock solenoid valve (+ 12 V) supply
Rear power take off solenoid valve ( - ) ground return
Park Lock solenoid valve ( - ) ground return
Power take off brake solenoid valve (+ 12 V) supply
Rear power take off solenoid valve (+ 12 V) supply
4WD solenoid valve (+ 12 V) supply
+ after contact
Ground ( - )
Issue 1
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Description
CAN signal (Hi)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Park Lock switch input on rear axle
Transmission temperature and CAN (ground)
Not used
Transmission temperature input signal
CAN signal (Low)
May 2001
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Description
Rear axle 17 bar pressure
Gearbox 17 bar pressure
Creeper unit switch input
Input to calibration or rear PTO clutch output
Engine speed input
Forward speed input
Not used
Speed sensors common ground
15 micron filter clogging pressure switch on rear axle input
5 bar booster pressure switch input

11B01.24
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
Battery
Electronic linkage supply
Steering wheel Neutral switch
To alternator
Starter
Cab relay
To cab harness
Electronic linkage - Supply
Armrest Neutral switch
Park Lock switch
Not used
Linkage harness connector
Power take off emergency stop switch (on rear
wing)
Creeper unit switch
4WD and differential lock switch
Armrest lighting
Speeds Up / Down armrest potentiometer
To water temperature sensor
Rear power take off switch
Turbo charger pressure sensor
DCC dashboard
Radiator water level sensor (8270 8280)
Fuel gauge
Lighting signal lamps
Lighting switch
To main beam / dipped beam toggle
To connector C60
To dashboard switch
To work lights relay
To connector C2
Buzzer
- continuous: parking brake on
- intermittent: warning / fault
CAN network plug
Top of clutch switch (TOC) and potentiometer
Forward / Reverse potentiometer on steering wheel
Safety switch
Starter switch
Not used
Right brake switch
Left brake switch
BOC clutch switch
To stop lights
Time delay relay (if not fitted is replaced by 15 A
fuse)
Electronic transmission control unit (TC)
(93) Connector C5 Dashboard connector

A : + 12 V Park Lock supply
B : + 12 V BOC and neutral switch supply
C : + 12 V after contact supply
D : Ground
E : CAN (High)
F : CAN (Low)
G : Creeper unit control
H : Not used
(94) Transmission oil temperature sensor
(95) Gearbox oil 17-bar pressure switch
(96) Rear axle 17 bar pressure switch
(97) Booster pressure 5-bar pressure switch
(99) Power take off clutch output speed sensor
(100) Forward speed sensor (gearbox output)
(101) Engine speed sensor (gearbox input)
(102) Power take off clutch speed sensor
(103) Intermediate gearbox speed sensor (used during
calibration)
(104) Connection to modify during calibration:
- normal position: power take off speed sensor
(brown / brown wires)
- calibration position: intermediate speed sensor
(brown / red wires)
Colour code
Dashboard signal lamps

(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
Left direction indicator (green lamp)

Right direction indicator (green lamp)
Air filter clogging (yellow lamp)
Rear power take off (yellow lamp)
Transmission oil pressure linked to gearbox 17 bar
pressure switch (red lamp)
Warning (red lamp)
Differential lock (yellow lamp)
First trailer direction indicator (green lamp)
Second trailer direction indicator (green lamp)
Battery charge lamp (red lamp)
Engine oil pressure (red lamp)
Radiator water level (red lamp, 8270 - 8280 only)
Lubricating pressure linked to 5 bar booster pressure switch
Hydraulic pressure linked to rear axle 17 bar pressure switch (red lamp)
Hydraulic filter linked to 15-micron filter clogging
pressure switch (yellow lamp)
Gearbox oil temperature (red lamp)
Main beam (blue lamp)
Parking brake (red lamp)
4WD (green lamp)
Solenoid valves
(79)
(80)
(81)
(82)
(83)
(84)
(85)
(86)
(87)
(88)
(89)
(90)
(91)
(92)
Clutch solenoid valve "A"

Clutch solenoid valve "C"
Clutch solenoid valve "R"
Clutch solenoid valve "2"
Clutch solenoid valve "M"
Clutch solenoid valve "L"
Clutch solenoid valve "H"
4WD clutch solenoid valve (mechanically engaged)
Clutch solenoid valve "B"
"Power take off" clutch solenoid valve
"Differential lock" clutch solenoid valve
"Rear power take off" clutch solenoid valve
"Park Lock" clutch solenoid valve (mechanically
engaged)
Issue 1
May 2001
B
BE
BL
G
J
M
N
R
Ro
S
V
VI
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
White
Beige
Blue
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Red
Pink
Salmon
Green
Violet
C
F
= Light
= Dark
emb. = End
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
11B01.25
86
87
88
90
89
91
92
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
93
94
10
46
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.26
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.27
Calculator Neutral
The TC places itself in calculator Neutral and displays an
error code when certain faults are detected. This action
is designed to protect the tractor and its driver from the
consequences of certain breakdown conditions. The
following conditions lead to the TC activating calculator
Neutral:
1. Open circuit or short circuit to ground of the solenoid
valves of gearbox clutches
2. Power supply short circuit of the solenoid valves of
gearbox clutches
3. Error between the presumed current and the measured current on a gearbox clutch
4. Failure of the CAN network communications between the DCC and TC
5. Attempted re-programming while the engine is running
6. Problem in an internal circuit (protection transistor
remains open)
7. Short circuit to + 12 V on the power take off solenoid
valve
8. Park Lock engagement error
9. Problem with electrical signals from steering wheel
or armrest shuttle lever
10. Short circuit to + 12 V in lower clutch pedal switch
(BOC)
11. Fault in the parameter table
12. Neutral lever switch fault on the analog shuttle lever
13. Neutral switch fault on the armrest lever
Fig. 13
Pulse modulation diagram (Fig. 13)
V = Voltage
T = Time
A = Average voltage
Note:
- The details of each error code is explained in
section 11B03.
- To remove calculator Neutral, first correct the fault.
Then place the gear shift levers in neutral and fully
press the clutch pedal.
Solenoid valve control

The TC controls 14 solenoid valves operating the gearbox, power take off, power take off brake, Park Lock,
4WD and differential lock. The 9 solenoid valves of the
gearbox and the control solenoid valve of the power take
off clutch are of the proportional type, activated by pulse
width modulation (PWM). The solenoid valves that
control the differential lock, 4WD, power take off brake
and Park Lock are of the On / Off type and operate without
modulation.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.28
Pulse modulation allows the current supplying all the

solenoid valves of the gearbox to be controlled. The value
of the current supplied by the TC is obtained by the
successive opening and closing of the solenoid valve
supply circuit. The ratio of the duration of this closing over
the duration of the opening of the circuit determines the
average value of the current supplied to the solenoid
valve. The usage factor (duration: on / off) varies proportionally in relation to the desired and required average
current to produce a desired hydraulic pressure in the
clutch. The TC monitors the current when the control
relay is activated and periodically adjusts the usage
factor in function of the measured current quantity in
relation to the required quantity.
The TC is capable of determining if the pulse modulation
circuit is open, short circuited to battery or short circuited
to ground. It can also determine whether there is an open
circuit, short circuit to battery or a grounding of the ON /
OFF type solenoid valves. If this is the case, the TC
transmits an error code to the DC that then displays it.
The TC used two types of current to control the solenoid
valves:
- the first type supplies current to the solenoid valves L,
M, H via a control circuit activated by BOC and the lever
Neutral switches. When the circuit is open, the supply
to the L, M, and H solenoid valves is interrupted.
- the second type supplies current to the other solenoid
valves via a separate line.
The following table indicates the solenoid valves that are
activated and the clutches engaged for any given selected ratio.
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.29
Table showing the clutches engaged and solenoid valves activated

1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F6
X
X
F8
F10
F12
F14
F18
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
* R7
* R8
R1
X
X
F17
F13
F16
X
X
F9
F11
X
X
F7
F5
F15
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
* Indicates ratios that are only available in certain countries.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.30
Right-hand side of transmission (Fig. 14)
Fig. 14
AG 150
(1) Clutch solenoid valve "A"
(2) Clutch solenoid valve "2"
(3) Clutch solenoid valve "M"
(4) Clutch solenoid valve "H"
AG 250
(1) Clutch solenoid valve "A"
(2) Clutch solenoid valve "2"
(3) Clutch solenoid valve "M"
(4) Clutch solenoid valve "H"
Left-hand side of transmission (Fig. 15)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Clutch solenoid valve "R"

Clutch solenoid valve "B"
Clutch solenoid valve "C"
Clutch solenoid valve "L"
2
4
Tightening torque
- Nut holding solenoid on the spool valves: 1.7 - 2.8 Nm
- Spool valve on housing: 15 - 20 Nm
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 15
Power take off control
On request from the operator the TC engages and
disengages the power take off via the DCC and the CAN
network. It also controls the engagement of the power
take off and transmits this information to the DCC which
then displays the speed and lights the power take off
signal lamp.
The TC handles the progressive engagement of the
power take off, regardless of engine speed and the load
on the output shaft. It controls a proportional solenoid
valve via pulse width modulation (PWM) in order to
obtain a linear speeding-up and down ramp right up until
full engagement.
The TC detects two power take off speed inputs, one
represents the input speed of the power take off clutch
(engine speed) and the other corresponds to the power
take off clutch output speed. These speeds are used to
determine faults in the power take off circuit.
The safety functions aimed at protecting the tractor and
the implement are as follows:
1. If the main power take off switch is active when the
engine starts, the power take off is not engaged and
the power take off signal lamp on the DCC flashes. No
error code is transmitted or displayed. To start up the
power take off, the power take off switch must first be
turned to the Off position, then placed in the On
position.
2. Protection against excessive power take off clutch
slip.
If excessive clutch slip takes place, the TC cuts the
power supply to the power take off solenoid valve and
transmits an error code 93 via the CAN network. This
leads to a flashing of the power take off signal lamp
on the DCC. Maximum permitted clutch slip is 2% for
a period of 5 minutes.
11B01.31
4. Power take off emergency stop button on wings

When an operator presses one of the emergency stop
buttons mounted on the rear wings, the TC cuts off the
solenoid valve power supply and the power take off
signal lamp flashes. To re-engage the power take off,
first place the main switch in the Stop position and
then move it to On.
If the TC detects the following faults, the operation of the
power take off will be affected in the following manner:
1. Engagement while the power take off clutch speed
sensor is defective. In such cases, the TC controls the
solenoid valve and increases the pressure in the
clutch in a linear manner so that it reaches 17 bar at
the end of 10 seconds, it transmits an error code 90 via
the CAN network, this leads to the power take off
signal lamp flashing at 5 second intervals on the DCC.
2. Engagement when the transmission input speed sensor is defective.
In such cases, the TC controls the solenoid valve so
as to obtain a linear increase in pressure and to obtain
a clutch output speed of 1500 rpm at the end of 5
seconds. It transmits an error code 91 via the CAN
network, this leads to the flashing of the power take
off signal lamp on the DCC at 5 second intervals.
3. Power take off brake fault detected. If, after the brake
has been operated, the speed of the power take off
shaft does not equal 0 after 3 minutes, the TC cuts the
power supply to the power take off brake and transmits an error code 94 via the CAN network to the DCC.
3. Protection against jammed power implements

Protection against engine stalling if the engagement of
the power take off leads to a drop of more than 50%
of speed below initial engine speed. In such cases the
TC cuts off the power supply to the power take off
solenoid valve and transmits an error code 92 via the
CAN network, this leads to a flashing of the power
take off signal lamp on the DCC.
Issue 2
May 2002

11B01.32
Front axle control (4WD)

On request from the DCC, via the CAN network, the TC
can engage or disengage 4WD. The TC indicates the
status of the 4WD and transmits the information to the
DCC via the CAN network so that the 4WD signal lamp
can be lit or extinguished. To activate 4WD, the TC
activates a solenoid valve of the ON / OFF type. 4WD is
engaged when the solenoid valve is de-activated and
disengaged when the solenoid valve is activated.
The status of the 4WD system is stored during the time
the engine is stopped and restored when the engine is
started again. If the engine is cut when the 4WD is
engaged it will be engaged when the tractor is started
again. If the 4WD is not engaged when the engine is cut
it will not be engaged when the tractor is started again.
If the tractor is stopped and the front axle disengaged, the
solenoid valve is supplied with 12 V.
KPH
RPM
% MPH
L/MIN
Fig. 16
The 4WD can be activated either automatically or manually. These modes are as follows:
4WD Auto signal lamp (Fig. 16)
Automatic mode
- On starting up the tractor, the 4WD is in automatic
mode. "A" is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of
the display. If the speed exceeds 14 kph when 4WD is
engaged then the TC disengages it. It re-engages it
when the speed drops below 13.5 kph.
The normal operating conditions of the 4WD are as

follows:
1. If both brake pedals are pressed, the 4WD is engaged
to ensure braking of all four wheels regardless of the
forward speed.
2. The 4WD is engaged as soon as the differential lock
is activated but it may be disengaged if desired.
3. The 4WD remains disengaged and its signal lamp
extinguished even if the tractor is stationary.
Manual mode
- To leave automatic mode and enter manual mode
when the speed is less than the above described limit,
press the 4WD switch and maintain it pressed for a
period of at least 2 seconds. If the forward speed is
greater than the 4WD speed limit, pressing the 4WD
switch temporarily places the circuit in manual mode.
- When the 4WD is in manual mode it is then permanently engaged regardless of the forward speed. Simply pressing on the 4WD switch disengages the 4WD
and re-pressing it engages the 4WD again.
US mode (depending on the country)
- When the 4WD switch is pressed for a long time (15
seconds), the front axle switches to US mode. In this
case, the front axle symbol (1) on the DCC flashes.
- In this mode, the front axle only disengages when a
brake pedal is pressed. It reengages when the pedal is
released.
Issue 2
May 2002
(1) Automatic 4WD signal lamp
11B01.33
Differential lock control

The TC can engage or disengage the differential lock on
request from the DCC via the CAN network. It indicates
the status of the differential lock and transmits this
information to the DCC via the CAN network so that it
lights the corresponding signal lamp. The TC activates an
ON / OFF type solenoid valve to engage or disengage the
differential lock.
On starting the engine, the differential lock is disengaged. Pressing the differential lock switch engages the
rear differential lock, the front differential lock (depending
on options) and the 4WD, if the latter is not engaged.
Pressing the switch again disengages the differential
lock while leaving the 4WD engaged.
The differential lock also operates as follows:
1. The differential lock definitively disengages when the
forward speed is greater than 14 kph.
2. The differential lock disengages when the linkage
MoveUp / MoveDown switch is in the MoveUp
position. It re-engages when the switch is placed in
the Neutral or Lower position.
3. The differential lock disengages when either of the
brake pedals is pressed, and is only re-engaged when
the brakes are released.
Park Lock control

The TC can engage or disengage the Park Lock on
request from the operator via the Park Lock switch on the
armrest mounted gear shift lever. It indicates the Park
Lock position via a position sensor on the control shaft
located on the left-hand side of the intermediate housing.
This data is transmitted via the CAN network to the DCC
so that it lights the corresponding signal lamp and places
the gearbox in Neutral. The TC activates an ON / OFF type
solenoid valve to engage or disengage the Park Lock. The
Park Lock is engaged when the solenoid valve is deactivated.
Warning: The tractor cannot be towed unless the Park Lock solenoid valve is activated and supplied with hydraulic pressure or towed
without the Park Lock being manually removed.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.34
To manually remove the Park Lock when the engine is

not running, screw in the special bolt located on the Park
Lock solenoid valve block (see section 6F01).
The TC prevents the operator from engaging the Park

Lock if the forward speed is greater than 1 kph and
prevents engaging any gear on start up if the Park Lock
is activated. When the tractor is started, if the operator
attempts to engage a gear while the Park Lock is fully or
partially engaged, the TC holds the tractor in neutral and
transmits error code 99 via the CAN network. If the gear
shift lever is not in the neutral position, the DCC displays
"P" and the buzzer sounds.
If the tractor is moving at more than 1 kph, the TC

activates the Park Lock solenoid valve in order to
maintain the Park Lock disengaged, regardless of the
position of the Park Lock switch on the armrest. If the
forward speed drops below this limit and the operator
requests the Park Lock, the TC places the gearbox in
neutral and cuts the power supply to the Park Lock
solenoid valve in order to engage the Park Lock.
If during movement, the TC detects that the Park Lock is

not fully disengaged, it transmits error code 98 to the
DCC and maintains the Park Lock disengaged for as long
as the forward speed is greater than the limit. In this
case, the operator may change gear but, when the
forward speed drops below the limit, the TC places the
gearbox in neutral and cuts the power supply to the Park
Lock solenoid valve to engage the Park Lock.
Issue 1
May 2001
F . Operation of solenoid valves and
test procedures
Gearbox clutch and power take off clutch
solenoid valves
The solenoids of the nine solenoid valves on the Full
Powershift gearbox and that on the power take off clutch
are identical.
These solenoids operate the proportional valves that
supply hydraulic pressure to the gearbox and the power
take off clutch in response to the supply current.
The proportional valves of the gearbox and power take off
are different.
11B01.35

The Park Lock solenoid valve is of the ON / OFF type but
differs from the previously described ones.
The Park Lock is engaged when the solenoid valve is deactivated.
Characteristics of the Park Lock solenoid valve

Voltage .......................................
12 V DC
Resistance ................................. 8.3W 2 % at 20C
Diode .........................................
No
Note: Tightening torque

- Nut holding coils on spool valves: 1.7 to 2.8 Nm
- Spool valve on the housing: 15 20 Nm.
Characteristics of the gearbox / power take off

solenoids
Voltage .............................................
12 V DC
Consumption .................................... 9 watt maximum
Resistance ....................................... 10.1 at 20 C
Diode ...............................................
No
If a problem is suspected with a gearbox / power take off
solenoid valve, check the resistance of the solenoid. It
must be 10.1 3%. Equally check the resistance
between the solenoid valve body and each pin. The
resistance must be greater than 50 k. Note that the
solenoid valves mounted on the gearbox / power take off
are not connected to diodes.
ON / OFF solenoid valves

The 4WD, differential lock and power take off solenoid
valves are identical and are of the ON / OFF type.
Characteristics of the 4WD, differential lock and

power take off solenoid valves
Voltage .......................................
12 V DC
Consumption .............................. 14.8 watt maximum
Resistance ................................. 9.7 10 % at 20C
Diode .........................................
No
If a problem is suspected in a 4WD, differential lock or
power take off solenoid valve, check the resistance of
the solenoid. It must be 9.7 10%.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.36
G . Input signals of TC sensors / switches

Speed sensors
The TC controls speed inputs through five different
sensors: engine speed, forward speed, gearbox calibration speed, power take off clutch speed and power take
off shaft output sensors.
The engine speed, gearbox, calibration and power take
off sensors are all of the magnetic type having two leads
(signal and ground). A magnetic sensor consists of a
permanent magnet surrounded by a coil that creates a
magnetic field. An alternating frequency is generated
when the rotation of nearby pinion teeth disturbs the
magnetic field created by the magnet. A sinusoidal wave
results (frequency). This is received by the TC which then
uses the information to control the various elements and
transmits information to the DCC via the CAN network.
1
Fig. 17
Right-hand side of the gearbox (Fig. 17)

(1) Forward speed sensor
The gearbox forward speed sensor is fitted on the righthand rear side of the gearbox housing. The output speed
is detected using the 7th stage transmission pinion that
is permanently engaged with the output shaft pinion.
Left-hand side of the gearbox (Fig. 18)

(1) Engine speed sensor
(2) Calibration speed sensor
The engine speed sensor is fitted on the rear left gearbox
housing. The engine speed is detected via the 4th stage
transmission pinion that is permanently engaged with
the input shaft pinion.
The gearbox calibration speed sensor is located on the
front housing, on the upper left of the gearbox. The
calibration speed is detected via the hub of the clutch on
the 5th stage shaft.
The engine speed, forward speed and calibration speed
sensors are identical. They are of the inductive type and
require no adjustment. Screw in the sensor and tighten
to a maximum torque of 14 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 18
These sensors can be checked using a digital multimeter.

The resistance between the terminals must be 500
10%.
11B01.37
Power take off speed sensors (Fig. 19)

(1)
(2)
Clutch output speed sensor

Output shaft speed sensor
1
The clutch output speed sensor (1) is located on the

right-hand side of the power take off housing, near the
linkage ram. It must be adjusted when installed. Screw
in the sensor until it touches the power take off pinion,
then unscrew it by 1/2 to 3/4 turn. Tighten the lock nut to
14 Nm. Its correct adjustment for proper functioning is
essential.
The speed sensor can be checked using a digital
multimeter. The resistance across the terminals of the
sensor must be 450 10%. The sensor can also be
checked by checking the voltage across the terminals
with the power take off engaged and the engine at idle
speed. Check using a voltmeter that the sensor emits
pulses, the display must change rapidly. The voltage
should be around 6 V when the power take off is engaged
at idle speed.
The output shaft speed sensor (2) is a Hall effect type

sensor. It is located in an indent on the right-hand side of
the power take off housing, near the linkage ram. This
sensor generates an alternating digital frequency when
the teeth of the pinion cross through its magnetic field. It
has three leads:
- supply + 12 V
- signal
- ground
2
Fig. 19
This sensor cannot be adjusted. It is held by a single bolt
and oil tightness is provided by an Oring.
This sensor can be checked using a digital multimeter.
The resistance values across the terminals of the sensor
must correspond to the values indicated in the table
below:
Digital
multimeter
connection
+
Sensor
terminal
1
value
Digital
multimeter
connection
+
Sensor
terminal
value
0.L
0.L
0.L
4.1M
14.3M
0.L
Note: O.L = infinite resistance
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.38
The Park Lock switch

This is located in the armrest gear shift lever and
indicates the position of the lever to the TC.
This switch has two positions:
- normally closed; this supplies the Park Lock solenoid
valve with 12 V when the armrest lever is in the Neutral
or On position
- normally open; this supplies the DCC E/C input with
12 V. The DCC informs the TC via the CAN network that
the solenoid valve is no longer supplied with power and
that the Park Lock must be engaged.
If the forward speed exceeds 1 km/h, the TC controls the
Park Lock solenoid valve until the speed decreases
below that value.
The Park Lock position sensor

This is located on the left-hand side of the intermediate
housing. It is normally open when the Park Lock is
engaged.
It closes and sends a ground signal to the TC D/F input
when the Park Lock is disengaged.
The TC uses this sensor to validate the position of the
Park Lock. It transmits this information to the DCC via
the CAN network in order to compare it with the information from the armrest lever switch and then displays the
corresponding signal lamps.
The creeper unit switch (optional)

This is located on the creeper unit selection lever.
It signals to the TC that the creeper unit is engaged. The
TC calculates the forward speed in relation to
demultiplication data stored in memory and sends this
information to the DCC in order to display the speed. The
DCC then lights the creeper unit signal lamp and displays
the forward speed as received from the TC. The creeper
unit switch is a normally open switch that closes when
the creeper unit is engaged. It supplies a ground signal to
the TC E/C input.
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.39
The transmission temperature sensor

This is located on the left-hand side of the gearbox on the
front housing. This sensor supplies information used by
the TC to control the gear shifting and for calibration
procedures. This information is also transmitted to the
DCC in order that it lights the corresponding signal lamp.
The sensor can be checked using the values below
(Fig. 20):
Temperature
25 C (77F)
100 C (212F)
125 C (257F)
Resistance
2820 5 %
180 2.5 %
89 3 %
When the hydraulic oil temperature exceeds 105 C

(221 F), the hydraulic oil temperature signal lamp and
the warning signal lamp are lit and the buzzer sounds.
Fig. 20
The booster pressure switch

Gearbox 17 bar pressure switch
This pressure switch is placed beneath the cab floor on
top of the front gearbox housing. It is of the normally open
type.
If the pressure drops below 9 bar 1 bar, the pressure
switch is open. If the pressure exceeds 9 bar 1 bar the
pressure switch closes and sends a ground signal to the
TC E/B input.
The status of the pressure switch is transmitted to the
DCC via the CAN network.
If the pressure is lower than 9 bar 1 bar, the DCC
activates the corresponding signal lamp and the buzzer.
This pressure switch is identical to the rear axle 17 bar
pressure switch.
This pressure switch is located below the right-hand side

hydraulic cover, behind the 15 micron hydraulic filter.
It is the normally closed type.
If the pressure is lower than 1.5 bar 0.2, the pressure
is closed and sends a ground signal to the TC E/K input.
The DCC activates the corresponding signal lamps and
the buzzer.
If the pressure is greater than 1.5 bar 0.2, the pressure
switch is open.
This pressure switch is identified by a green mark.
The 15 micron hydraulic filter clogging pressure switch

The main circuit 17 bar pressure switch
This pressure switch is located beneath the right-hand
side hydraulic cover. It is of the normally open type.
If the pressure is less than 9 bar 1 bar, the pressure
switch is open. If the pressure is greater than 9 bar 1
bar, the pressure switch closes and sends a ground
signal to the TC E/A input.
If the pressure is less than 9 bar 1 bar, the DCC
activates the corresponding signal lamps and the buzzer.
This pressure switch is identical to the 17 bar gearbox
pressure switch.
This pressure switch is placed on top of the 15 micron

hydraulic filter located on the right-hand side hydraulic
cover. It is of the normally open type.
If the difference between the input and output pressure
of the filter exceeds 2.4 bar 0.3, the pressure switch is
closed and transmits a ground signal to the TC E/J input.
The DCC activates the hydraulic filter clogging signal
lamp.
To deactivate the signal lamp, the pressure difference
must be lower than 1.8 bar 0.3.
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.40
0,7/1,2 mm
10,9
2,6/3,6 mm
2
3
4
5
0,3/1,0 mm
150
130
Fig. 21
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.41
H . Operation of the manoeuvring

pedal
Manoeuvring pedal assembly (Fig. 21)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Top of clutch switch (TOC)

Starter safety switch
Pedal pressed adjustment screw
Pedal released adjustment screw
- The manoeuvring pedal differs from the clutch pedal

fitted to mechanical gearboxes. It is only used when
manoeuvring in very tight spaces or when hitching an
implement.
- It is not necessary to use this pedal either when
engaging a gear from neutral, when changing gears or
when reversing the direction of travel.
- The position of the manoeuvring pedal is transmitted to
the DCC by the TOC (1) and by the BOC (2).
Adjustment of the potentiometer / TOC

- With the manoeuvring pedal fully pressed, adjust the
position of screw (4) to provide a clearance of 2.6 mm
to 3.6 mm between the head of the screw and the TOC
plunger.
- With the pedal released, act upon screw (5) to provide
a clearance of 0.7 mm to 1.2 mm between screw (4)
and the body of the TOC (Fig. 21).
- Tighten the lock nut of the TOC to a torque of 23 - 33 Nm.
- After these adjustments, check the pedal travel. It
must be between 130 mm to 150 mm.
BOC adjustment
- Screw the switch so that the end of its threaded cylinder
is recessed 0.3 mm to 1 mm in its support (Fig. 21).
- Tighten the lock nut to a torque of 6 - 9 Nm.
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.42
I . Operation of the armrest gear

selector switch assembly (Fig. 22)
Gear selector switch assembly
(1) Location of the electronic linkage MoveUp /
MoveDown switch
(2) Depth / lift height potentiometer
(3) Neutral switch
(4) Park Lock switch
(5) Park Lock ratchet
(6) Selection potentiometer
(7) Neutral / Change up / Change down ratio ratchet
(8) Mechanical lock
- The selector switch assembly is fitted with a mechanical locking device beneath the control button. This must
be held in position in order to move the switch from the
Park Lock position into Neutral or from Neutral into On.
- The gear shift selector switch assembly comprises:
. a selection mechanism that operates the Park Lock
. a Neutral switch
. a selection potentiometer
- It also incorporates the differential lock / 4WD switch
and the electronic linkage controls.
- If the gear shift selector switch assembly must be
disassembled, it is necessary to carry out a new
calibration of the selection potentiometer after
reassembly.
- The right-hand gear selector switch assembly allows

for selection of the Park Lock, the Neutral position, the
On position and the changing up and down of gear
ratios.
- The changing of gears is carried out either:
. by pulses, by momentarily pushing the switch to the
Up (+) or Down (-) position
. or in a continuous manner, by maintaining the switch
in the Up (+) or Down (-) position
Fig. 22
Issue 1
May 2001
Signal
Lever position
11B01.43
J . Steering wheel gear shift lever

It is located on the steering column to the right and
permits:
- selecting of the gearbox Neutral position
- forward or reverse operation
- changing up or changing down through the gears
1KOhm
1KOhm
S1
24KOhm
S2
36KOhm
2.55KOhm
10KOhm
This lever comprises a series of resistors and flexible

contact switches that depends on the position of the
lever, send different analog signals to the DCC.
Signal
voltage
(Volts)
High (declutched)
Non
2,5
Forward +
S1 + S2 + S3
Forward
S1 + S2
3,5
Forward -
S1 + S2 + S4 + S7
Neutral
S7
0,5
Reverse -
S5 + S6 +S4
Reverse
S5 + S6
1,5
Reverse +
S5 + S6 + S3
2.4KOhm
2KOhm
S3
15,8KOhm
2
100KOhm
Parts list
S7
2KOhm
S4
560Ohm
Cap
Circlips
Washer
Top cover
Bearing
Upper pin
Compression spring
4 x 28 pin
Magnet support
Left torsion spring
Right torsion spring
Moulding
Compression spring
Cups
Neutral switch
Printed circuit
Rubber wedge
Bottom cover
M4 x 14 bolt
Washer dia. 4
Water tight cap
Plastic washer
Bolt No. 2 x 0.5
Lever
Nut HN 4
Grower washer dia. 4
Bolt CHC H 4 x 18
Oring and washer
Pommel
10KOhm
2.55KOhm
S5
2.4KOhm
1.5KOhm
24KOhm
34KOhm
S6
1KOhm
4
5
6
6 5 4 3 2 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(29)
(30)
Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
Connector functions
Terminal
Designation
+ 5 Volts
Signal
Ground
Normally closed Neutral switch output

Closed
Fig. 22A
Issue 1
May 2001
Switch Neutre entre + 12 V
Normally open Neutral switch output

Open

11B01.44
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.45
K . Use of the Backup Harness

- In the unlikely event of a DCC / TC failure that immobilises the tractor, it is still possible to move the tractor
by using a backup harness.
- The breakdown backup mode allows the operator to
manually select the F3 ratios (3rd forward) and R2 (2nd
reverse).
Important: The Breakdown Backup mode is not
designed for normal working conditions.
- In Breakdown Backup mode, there is no clutch modulation. The tractor starts to move as soon as the
manoeuvring pedal frees the BOC switch.
- To install the breakdown backup harness, the operator
must first take the protection cover off the transmission
controller (TC) in order to gain access to the harness
connectors.
Fig. 23
Connection of the Backup Harness (Fig. 23

- 24)
1. Remove connectors A, B and C from the TC harness.
2. Connect connectors A, B and C of the backup harness
in to their corresponding connectors of the TC harness.
3. The end of the harness with the individual connectors
remains in the cab.
The connection of the female connector with the male
connector having a salmon lead provides the F3
forward gear.
The connection of the female connector with the male
connector having a violet lead provides the R2 reverse
gear.
To modify the direction of movement, the operator
must change this connection.
Fig. 24
- The solenoids are supplied from the Neutral switches of

the gear shift selector switches and the BOC. To be
able to move the tractor, the gear shift selector switches
must be placed elsewhere than the Neutral position.
- The direction of advance depends upon the connection
of the connectors in the cab and not the position of the
gear shift selector switches.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B01.46
L . Location of sensors (Fig. 25 - 26)

Parts list
(1) Linkage position sensor
(2) Forward speed sensor on the crownwheel (fitted
with Datatronic option only)
(3) Rear axle 17 bar pressure switch (red sticker, black
/ beige lead)
(4) PTO solenoid valve (black / green)
(5) PTO brake solenoid valve (black / white)
(6) Differential lock solenoid valve (black / blue)
(7) TC transmission calculator
(8) Gearbox 17 bar pressure switch (red sticker, black /
red leads)
(9) Clutch A solenoid valve (black / beige)
(10) Clutch 2 solenoid valve (black / green)
(11) Clutch M solenoid valve - AG 150 gearbox (black /
brown)
Clutch solenoid valve H - AG 250 gearbox
(12) Clutch H solenoid valve - AG 250 gearbox (black /
red)
Clutch M solenoid valve - AG 250 gearbox
(13) Forward speed sensor (black / grey)
(14) Temperature switch (black)
(15) Booster 5 bar pressure switch (white / black)
(16) Park Lock solenoid valve (black / grey)
(17) Front axle solenoid valve (black / yellow)
(18) 15 micron clogging pressure switch (black / blue)
(19) Linkage draft sensor
(20) PTO output shaft speed sensor (black / red / green)
(21) PTO clutch output speed (black / brown)
(22) Clutch solenoid 1 (black / salmon)
(23) Clutch solenoid C (black / blue)
(24) Clutch solenoid R (black / violet)
(25) Clutch solenoid B (black / white)
(26) Intermediate speed sensor (black / red)
(27) Engine speed sensor (black / yellow)
(28) Park Lock switch (black / pink)
Issue 1
May 2001
11B01.47
21
10
11
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
Fig. 25
Issue 1
May 2001
8200 SERIES TRACTORS8200 SERIES TRACTORS

11B01.48
Parts list
(1) Linkage position sensor
(2) Forward speed sensor on crownwheel (fitted with
Datatronic option only)
(3) Rear axle 17 bar pressure switch (red sticker,
black / beige leads)
(4) PTO solenoid valve (black / green)
(5) PTO brake solenoid valve (black / white)
(6) Differential lock solenoid valve (black / blue)
(7) TC transmission calculator
(8) Gearbox 17 bar pressure switch (red sticker, black
/ pink leads)
(9) Clutch A solenoid valve (black / beige)
(10) Clutch 2 solenoid valve (black / green)
(11) Clutch M solenoid valve - AG 150 gearbox (black
/ brown)
Clutch H solenoid valve - AG 250 gearbox
(12) Clutch H solenoid valve - AG 150 gearbox (black
/ red)
Clutch M solenoid valve - AG 250 gearbox
(13) Forward speed sensor (black / grey)
(14) Temperature switch (black)
(15) 5-bar booster pressure switch (white / black)
(16) Park Lock solenoid valve (black / grey)
(17) Front axle solenoid valve (black / yellow)
(18) 15 micron filter clogging pressure switch (black /
blue)
(19) Linkage draft sensor
(20) PTO output shaft speed sensor (black / green / red)
(21) PTO clutch output speed sensor (black / brown)
(22) Clutch 1 solenoid valve (black / salmon)
(23) Clutch C solenoid valve (black / blue)
(24) Clutch R solenoid valve (black / violet)
(25) Clutch B solenoid valve (black / white)
(26) Intermediate speed sensor (black / red)
(27) Engine speed sensor (black / yellow)
(28) Park Lock switch (black / pink)
(29) Clutch L solenoid valve (black / pink)
(30)
Transmission oil temperature sensor
Issue 1
May 2001
24
25
26
11B01.49
27
23
22
30
29
19
28
Fig. 26
Issue 1
May 2001
DCC / TC - Calibration
11B02.1
11B02 Calibration
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Level 0 _________________________________________________
C.
Level 1 _________________________________________________
D.
Level 2 _________________________________________________
E.
Level 3 _________________________________________________
17
F.
Adjust the shifting ______________________________________
18
G.
Diagnostic modes _______________________________________
19
Issue 1
May 2001

11B02.2
A.
General
Each time an electrical component is removed or replaced, this component must be recalibrated. If this
calibration is not carried out the DCC may display an error
message indicating a condition that falls outside the
tolerances or indicating that the component has not been
calibrated. The elements that particularly require calibration are the DCC and the TC, the turbo boost pressure, the
gearbox, the gear shift potentiometers, the forward
speed sensor and the implement width.
The procedures for calibrating the DCC and TC are
divided into 4 maintenance levels numbered from 0 to 3.
6
Level 0
These calibration functions are designed for use by the
operator during normal functioning of the vehicle. They
use the membrane keys 1, 2 and 3. The 0 level calibrations include the following: forward speed, wheel slip
ratio, engine speed, PTO speed, area worked, total
engine hours, calibration of the forward speed, adjustment of the implement width and deleting of the worked
area.
Level 1
These calculation functions are designed to be used by
the operator during normal maintenance operations.
Level 1 includes calibration of the gearbox and turbo
boost pressure.
Level 2
These calibration functions are used by qualified personnel during maintenance and repairs. The level 2 calibrations include the display of DCC and TC constants, and
calibration of the armrest gear shift lever.
Level 3
These calibration functions concern factory calibration.
They are used by qualified personnel when replacing the
DCC or TC. These calibration functions include the type
of engine, gear locking, the choice of the measurement
units system, the selection of the type of gear shift lever
and modification of constants of the DCC and TC.
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 1
B . Level 0
11B02.3
2
Direct selections (Fig. 1)

GNO
SL IP
SPO
- Press
to select ground speed or percent slip.

PTO
ENG
RPM
RPM
ENG
FIELD
HRS
AREA
- Press
to select Engine rpm or PTO rpm.
- Press
to select Field area or engine hours.
Ground speed calibration (tractors fitted with

a radar)
This calibration is to set with the maximun accuracy for
the radar input.
1. Mark out a 100 meter (400 ft) course according to units
selected, on a firm surface.
GNO
SL IP
SPO
2. Press and hold
6
4
Fig. 1
for 4 seconds.
3. "CAL"will be dispayed on the display (Fig. 2).

4. Drive the tractor at normal operating speed along the
100 m (400 ft) course.
PTO
ENG
RPM
RPM
5. Press
when passing over the course start point

ENG
FIELD
HRS
AREA
6. Press
when crossing the end point of the couse
The DCC will calculate a new ground speed constant and

a radar constant.
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.4
Implement width setting
The width of the implement must be entered into the DCC

to obtain an accurate measurement of the fiel area.
PTO
ENG
RPM
RPM
7. Press and hold
for 4 seconds.
8. The implement width which has just been stored

must be displayed on the screen (Fig. 3) with the
selected digit flashing.The upper display will read
"FEEt" or "SI" according to unit selected.
ENG
FIELD
HRS
AREA
GNO
SL IP
SPO
PTO
ENG
RPM
RPM
9. Press
to increment the flashing digit.
10. Press
to select a different digit.
11. press
to memorise and leave the mode.

Fig. 3
Clear the area covered

ENG
FIELD
HRS
AREA
12. Press and hold
for 4 seconds.
13. The area is cleared when "0000" appears on the

lower display for three seconds (Fig. 4).
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.5
C . Level 1
Condition to enter calibration level 1
GNO
SL IP
PTO
ENG
ENG
FIELD
SPO
RPM
RPM
HRS
AREA
SELECT WIDTH
14. Press slowly the clutch pedal, wait the complete

illumination of the DCC. Start the engine and before
20 seconds
15. Press and hold
- Engine temperature > 80 C for Turbo boost calibration

- Gearbox temperature between 50 C and 60 C for
gearbox calibration (select all the solenoid valves to
ensure they are at correct temperature)
- Tractor must be placed on a flat area without obstacle
- Put the handbrake on
- Put the two shift levers in neutral position
- Stop all the lights
- Stop the engine
SET
6
Fig. 5
for 5 seconds (Fig.5)
16. "CAL1" will be appear on the lower display (Fig. 6)

17. Select by press
the turbo boost calibration
"tb14" and "tb20" or the transmission calibration

"trnc"
Note : Automatic exit of calibration occurs if :

- gearbox temperature is too cold, it displayed on the
lower sceen "trAn COld" or error code 21.
- engine speed is out of range, it displayed on the
lower screen "Spd FAIL" or error code 22, 23, 24.
Transmission calibration "trnc" (Fig. 5)

Note : Before starting the transmission calibration,
connect the calibration speed sensor (red single
wire) to PTO wire (brown single wire, near the TC
connector E). This operation is done by removing the
TC shield.
Fig. 6
18. Select "trnc" (see operations 14 to 17)

19. Set the engine speed at 1300 rpm.
20. Press
then "St0" is displayed (Fig. 7) in the
lower screen and in middle screen"trAn" and "CAL"

are flashing alternately
21. First put the armrest lever in forward position and
after words the steering column lever in forward
position.
Note : For tractor fitted with shift lever NAO type
(single lever NAO type 8170/8180), put it in
forward position.
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

11B02.6
Clutches
activated
St0
Calibration of solenoid valve current (arround 15 s)
St1
Check the correct speed of the gearbox shaft
R-C
St2
Check the correct speed of the gearbox shaft
2-C
St3
Check the correct speed of the gearbox t shaft
2-B
St4
Calibration of low pressure for clutch 1
1-R-C
St5
Calibration of low pressure for clutch 2
2-R-C
St6
Calibration of low pressure for clutch R
2-R-C
St7
Calibration of low pressure for clutch A
2-A-C
St8
Calibration of low pressure for clutch B
B-2-C
St9
Calibration of low pressure for clutch C
B-2-C
St10
Calibration of low pressure for clutch L
L-2-C
St11
Calibration of low pressure for clutch M
M-2-C
St12
Calibration of low pressure for clutch H
H-2-C
St13
Calibration of clutch 1 filling time
H-1-C
St14
Calibration of clutch 2 filling time
H-2-C
St15
Calibration of clutch R filling time
H-R-C
St16
Calibration of clutch A filling time
H-2-A
St17
Calibration of clutch B filling time
H-B-2
St18
Calibration of clutch C filling time
H-2-C
St19
Calibration of clutch L filling time
L-B-2
St20
Calibration of clutch M filling time
M-B-2
St21
Calibration of clutch H filling time)
H-B-2
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.7
22. The calibration is starting.

The lower screen displays the stages of the calibration (see after table).
23. When the calibration is finish "donE" is display on the
lower screen (Fig. 8)
24. Put the two shift levers in neutral (or one lever for
NAO type 8170 / 8180)
25. Stop the engine (this is mandatory, otherwise the
calibration process restarts.)
26. Reconnect the PTO speed sensor (brown to brown)
Note :
- Wait 30 seconds, due to the park lock relay, before
starting the engine again. If not waiting, error code
could appear.
- If an error code 101 to 109 and 111 to 119 appear
during the calibration, you should restart it.
Fig. 8
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.8
Turbo boost calibration
27. Repeat operation 14 to 17 and select "tb14" (Fig. 9)

28. Set engine speed at 1400 rpm.
29. Press
to start the calibration :
- 'tb14" disappears on the lower screen.

- the old value is display during 3 seconds.
- then the new value is display during 3 seconds.
- automatic exit of the calibration and return to
normal screen
- stop the engine
30. Repeat operation 14 to 17 and select "tb20" (Fig. 10)
31. Set engine speed at 2000 rpm.
32. Press
5 , to start the calibration :
- "tb20" disappears on the lower screen.

- the old value is display during 3 seconds.
- then the new value is display during 3 seconds.
- automatic exit of the calibration and return to
normal screen
- stop the engine
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.9
D . Level 2
33. Put the ignition on. Do not start the engine.
6 for 5
34. Before 20 seconds, press and hold 5
seconds
35. "CAL2" will be apprear on the lower display (Fig. 11)
36. Press 4
to select the fonction to control
Available fonction functions

SnA
Analogic lever calibration (NAO, type 8170/

8180)
ErS
Analogic levers calibration type 8200 (lever

on armrest and lever on the steering lever)
dcon
Display DCC constants
tcon
Display TC constants
CLEd
Clear DCC stored error codes
CLEt
Clear TC stored error codes
Note : In anytime, press
Fig. 11
to exit menu or cali-
bration
8200 levers calibration

37. Select "ErS" to do the 8200 levers calibration.
38. Put the steering column lever in forward position
39. The armrest lever should be put in neutral position
before 5 seconds
40. Press
Fig. 12
to start calibration.
41. "nEU" will appear in the middle screen (Fig. 12)

Note : If the armrest lever is not in neutral
position, the buzzer is activate and the DCC
cleared the calibration mode after 10 seconds.
GNO
SL IP
SPO
42. After the buzzer activation press
before 10
seconds
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.10
43. "FOr" will be appear in the middle screen (Fig. 13) put
the armrest lever in forward position before 10
seconds
GNO
SL IP
SPO
before 10
seconds.
The calibration is finish, the normal display appear.
Note : If an error appear during the calibration,
"CAL" will be appear and the error code is
display on the lower screen.
NAO8170/8180 lever calibration

45. Repeat operation 33 to 36
46. Select "SnA" to do the NAO 8170/8180 lever calibration.
47. Put the lever in neutral position
48. Press 5
Fig. 13
to start calibration
49. "nEU" will appear in the middle screen (Fig. 12) and
the lever should be put in neutral position before 5
seconds
Note : If the lever is not in neutral position, the
buzzer is activate and the DCC cleared the calibration mode after 10 seconds.
GNO
SL IP
SPO
before 10
seconds
51. "FOr" will be appear in the middle screen (Fig. 15) put
the lever in forward position before 10 seconds
GNO
SL IP
SPO
before 10
seconds
53. "rEu" will be appear in the middle screen (Fig. 14) put
the lever in reverse position before 10 seconds
GNO
Fig. 14
SL IP
before 10
SPO
seconds.
The calibration is finish, the normal display appear.
Note : If an error appear during the calibration,
"CAL" will be appear and the error code is
display on the lower screen.
Issue 1
May 2001
Display DCC constants
57. Press 5

56. Select "dcon" to see DCC constants.
58. Press one time
11B02.11
to select the parameter
6 to return to the menu and two
time to return to the working screen.

Display
Code
Parameter
Parameter Options
Default
Value
50 = White 8810 / DT225

51 = Allis 9785
52 = MF 8180 / 8280
53 = White 8710 / DT200
54 = Allis 9775
55 = MF 8170 / 8270
56 = White 8610 / DT 180
57 = Allis 9765
58 = MF 8260 up to K066009
59 = White 8510 / DT 160
60 = Allis 9755
61 = MF 8250
62 = White 8410 /RT145
63 = Allis 9745
64 = MF 8220
65 = White 8310
66 = Allis 9735
67 = MF 8210
68 = MF 8240
70 = MF 8245
71 = MF 8260 from K066010
77 = RT130
trAc
Tractor code (model)
55
tESt
Tester code
01001 to 99999 tester serial number
trAn
Transmission Type
1 = AG 150
2 = AG 250
cntr
Control type
1 = NAO lever (8170 / 8180 type)

2 = European Levers (8200type)
ShUt
Shuttle type
4 = Powershuttle
PLOt
Park lock type
0 = None
2 = Electrohydraulic
3 = Electrohydraulc and park brake
3Pth
3 point hitch type
0 = None
1 = EHRC
2 = EHRB
bStS
Boost sensor type
0 = None
1 = Lucas 92VB
EtSt
Engine Temp sensor
0 = None
1 = Funk temperature sensor
PPSt
Pedal position sensor
0 = None
3 = Bourns 1
rAdr
Radar Horn
273
unit
Units
0 = without
base = 273 Hertz per 10 kph
0 = USA
1 = English
2 = Metric
Issue 21
December
2000
May 2002
11B02.12
Display
Code
Parameter
Default
Value
EOSP
Engine overspeed
protection
En9S
Engine overspeed
parameter
2600
Preset forward gear
Preset forward speed
Preset reverse gear
Preset reverse speed
9rPr
Gear preselection
memorization
0 = Disabled
1 = Enable
Forward speed
selection
13
Gear engaged when start again
HSGF
PF9S
Pr9S
Parameter Options
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Maximun engine speed value
StLL
Not used
StrL
Not used
ASFC
Shift forward calibration

parameter
719
ASnC
Shift neutral calibration

parameter
496
ASrC
Shift reverse calibration

parameter
282
PPUC
Clutch pedal upper

calibration parameter
980
PPLC
Clutch pedal lower

30
9SPd
Ground speed
constant
6100
ESnC
Euro shift neutral

ES9C
Euro shift move

FSPd
Maximum forward
speed allowed.
18
Front PTO installed
FPt0
Issue 2
1
Lever forward calibration value

Lever neutral calibration value
Lever reverse calibration value
Value in high position
Value in low position
According to calibration level 0
Neutral position
Forward position
Maximum forward speed
18 = 40 Kph
17 = 30 Kph
16 = 25 Kph
0 = without
1 = with
May 2002
December
Parameter Options
Display
Code
Parameter
Default
Value
Eur9
Maxi reverse speed

selection
0 = R6 USA
1 = R8 Europe
PtLt
Engine load to start

correction with PTO
Used only with PTO if hard shifting
Value to take away

from the load when
using PTO
Used only with PTO if hard shifting
LOAd
Always 0
tb14
Turbo calibration at
1400 rpm
Calibration value level 1
Turbo calibration at
2000 rpm
Calibration value level 1
PtLd
tb20
11B02.13
Issue21
Issue
December
2000
May 2002
11B02.14
Display TC constants
62. Press one time

60. Select "tcon" to see DCC constants.
61. Press 5
to select the parameter
Display
Code
Parameter
Default
Value
Parameter Options
50 = White 8810 / DT225
51 = Allis 9785
52 = MF 8180 / 8280
53 = White 8710 / DT200
54 = Allis 9775
55 = MF 8170 / 8270
56 = White 8610 / DT 180
57 = Allis 9765
58 = MF 8260 up to K066009
59 = White 8510 / DT 160
60 = Allis 9755
61 = MF 8250
62 = White 8410 /RT145
63 = Allis 9745
64 = MF 8220
65 = White 8310
66 = Allis 9735
67 = MF 8210
68 = MF 8240
70 = MF 8245
71 = MF 8260 from K066010
77 = RT130
trAc
Tractor code (model)
55
tESt
Tester code
01001 to 99999 tester serial number
trAn
Transmission Type
1 = AG 150
2 = AG 250
cntr
Control type
1 = NAO lever (8170 / 8180 type)

2 = European Levers (8200 type)
ShUt
Shuttle type
4 = Powershuttle
ttSt
Transmission
temperature sensor
1 = Funk temperature sensor
PFA
Front axle
0 = 2 WD
1 = 4 WD
dloc
Differential lock
0 = None
1 = installed
rPto
Rear PTOr
0 = None
1 = 8170, White and Allis type
2 = 8200 Type
PLCt
Park lock type
0 = None
2 = Electrical command
rPPr
Number of pulses for

rear PTO clutch output
44
Number of pulses per revolution of rear PTO cluth

output
Issue 21
Issue
December
2002
May 2002
Display
Code
FPPr
Parameter
Number of pulses for
rear PTO output shaft
Default
Value
11B02.15
Parameter Options
18
Number of pulses per revolution of rear PTO output

shaft
LPtO
Low speed PTO ratio
Low speed PTO ratio
EPPr
Number of pulses per

engine revolution
32
32 = AG 150
38 = AG 250
TPPr
Number of pulses per

transmission revolution
72
72 = AG 150
81 = AG 250
CrPr
Creeper ratio
Creeper ratio
Pto1
PTO parameter 1
PTO parameter 1
Pto2
PTO parameter 2
PTO parameter 2
Pto3
PTO parameter 3
24
PTO parameter 3
Pto4
PTO parameter 4
200
PTO parameter 4
FP1
Clutch 1 base
128
Clutch 1 base calibration value
FP2
Clutch 2 base
128
Clutch 2 base calibration value
FP3
Clutch R base
128
Clutch R base calibration value
FP4
Clutch A base
128
Clutch A base calibration value
FP5
Clutch B base
128
ClutchB base calibration value
FP6
Clutch C base
128
Clutch C base calibration value
FP7
Clutch L base
128
Clutch L base calibration value
FP8
Clutch M base
128
Clutch M base calibration value
FP9
Clutch H base
128
Clutch H base calibration value
FP10
Clutch 1 fill
19
Clutch 1fill time calibration
FP11
Clutch 2 fill
19
Clutch 2fill time calibration
FP12
Clutch R fill
19
Clutch R fill time calibration
FP13
Clutch A fill
19
Clutch A fill time calibration
FP14
Clutch B fill
19
ClutchB fill time calibration
FP15
Clutch C fill
19
Clutch C fill time calibration
FP16
Clutch L fill
19
Clutch Lfill time calibration
FP17
Clutch M fill
19
Clutch Mfill time calibration
FP18
Clutch H fill
19
Clutch Hfill time calibration
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.16
Clear DCC stored code
64. Select "CLEd"
65. Press
to enter. "9999" will be appear in the

ENG
FIELD
HRS
AREA
66. Press
to clear the error code. "0000" will appear
during 10 seconds.
67. Press one time
Clear TC stored code

Fig. 15

69. Select "CLEt"
70. Press
to enter. "9999" will be appear in the

ENG
FIELD
HRS
AREA
71. Press
to clear the error code. "0000" will appear
during 10 seconds.
72. Press one time
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.17
E . Level 3
With level 3 calibration, the qualified personnel can
modify the DCC and TC parameters.
73. Put the ignition on.
Note : You must not press the clutch pedal
74. Before 20 seconds, press and hold 4
6 for 5
seconds
75. "CAL3" will be apprear on the lower display (Fig. 17)
5
76. Press
to select the fonction to control
Available fonctions functions :

Display Readout
Fig. 17
Calibration function
dCnt
Edit DCC constants
tCnt
Edit TC constants
Check the DCC and TC constant in calibration level 2

(pages before).
77. After selected the constants to edit, select the
parameter by press
78. When the parameter to change is selected, press

GNO
SL IP
SPO
to select the digit. The digit selected is flashing

(Fig. 17).
ENG
FIELD
HRS
AREA
PTO
ENG
RPM
RPM
79. Press
to increment the digit selected.
80. Press
81. Press
to stock the parameter.

6
to exit calibration mode.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B02.18
F . Adjust the shifting

If you have a bad shifting only when using PTO implements, it is possible to adjust the shifting of the gearbox.
82. Work normally with the tractor with the power take
off engaged. Check and note the LoAd value in
diagnostic mode A.
83. If the implement can be used without engaging the
power take off, carry out a pass with the power take
off disengaged. Note the new value of LoAd B.
84. Stop the engine and go to Level 3 calibration (see E).
85. Select PtLt.
86. Enter value B noted during operation 83 and store it.
Note: The higher the value, the higher the correction with a high engine load.
87. Select PtLd.
88. Input a constant value equal to A B and store this
constant.
Note: The higher the value the more flexible the
gear shifting up until a downgrade limit value.
89. If the implement cannot be used without engaging
the power take off, input an estimated B value for
PtLt, for example half the value of A, then input
the value of A B for PtLd.
90. Return to the normal screen
91. Carry out field test with PTO implement and ajust the
value to obtain good shifting.
Note : This system is working only if the PTO is
ON and the "LoAd" value above the "PtLt" value.
Issue 1
May 2001
Examples
- If the torque on the PTO shaft is high and the wheel
torque is low (stone crusher, rotary cultivator), enter a
high PtLd value. Example: during use of a Rotary
cultivator to prepare potatoes or rice, the values read
and entered to obtain the correct gear shifting for the
customer are:
. LoAd ......... 358
. PtLt ........... 178
. PtLd ........... 248
- If the torque on the PTO shaft is low and the wheel torque
is high, enter a low PtLd value. Example: during use of
a combined implement, seeder plus rotary harrow, the
values read and entered to obtain the correct gear
shifting for the customer are:
. LoAd .......... 500
. PtLt ............ 250
. PtLd ........... 138
11B02.19
G . Diagnostic modes
The diagnostic functions are used by service personnel
to test and monitor the functions of the tractor electronics. The diagnostics system uses the same type of
menu system as calibration levels 1 through 3.
The diagnostic menu may be entered at any time using
the following process.
92. Press and hold switch
for 5 seconds.
93. Once the diagnostics mode has been entered, "dIA9"

will be displayed on the lower section of the LCD
(Fig. 18).
94. After entering the diagnostic mode the operator
should press switch 4
to cycle through the list
Fig. 18
of diagnostic functions.
95. To start the diagnostic function currently displayed
press switch
5 .
96. To back out of the diagnostic menus press switch
When monitoring switch states, A/D (analog/digital)

inputs and stored error codes press switch 5
to
toggle between the different parameters, and switch

6
to leave the diagnostics function.
Upper display
Lower display
Diagnostic function
dAtA
trAc
System data DCC
dbin
dcc
DCC switch states
dAdc
dcc
DCC A/D inputs
dErr
dcc
DCC stored error codes
dLPS
dcc
DCC lamp check
9AU9
dcc
DCC gauge check
tbin
tad
TC switch states
tAdc
tad
TC A/D frequency inputs
tErr
tad
TC stored error codes
Issue 1
May 2001

11B02.20
System data diagnostics "dAtA"

97. Repeat operation 92 to 94 to display "dAtA" (Fig. 19).
98. To cycle through this diagnostic function press
switch
5 . To leave it press switch
6 .
99. Readings values should be within the following units

to have good operations.
Fig. 19
Display code
Issue 1
Parameters
Units
E9tP
Engine temperature
50 - 120 C
122 - 248 F
LoAd
Engine torque
Ft / lbs
trtP
Transmission temperature
0 - 120 C
32 - 248 F
CPPS
Clutch pedal percent
0 - 100 %
bStP
Turbo boost pressure
0 - 1,72 bar
0 - 25 psi
bAtF
Filtered battery voltage
0 - 16 volts
OILP
Engine oil pressure
0 - 6,2 bar
0 - 92 psi
FUEL
Percent fuel left
0 - 100 %
ACCL
Accelerator potentiometer pedal value

Navistar engine
Not used
rAdr
Radar frequency
Hz
May 2001
11B02.21
DCC Switch State Diagnostics dbin

100. Repeat operation 92 to 94 to display "dbin" function
(Fig. 22).
101. To cycle through this diagnostic function, press
5 . To leave it press
6 .
102. The "dbin" function is used to check the DCC

switch inputs.Switch states are displayed as "0" or
"1" according to position.
Fig. 20
Display code
Parameters
PFA
4 WD switch
LbrA
Left brake switch
rbrA
Right brake switch
rPtO
Rear PTO switch
FPtO
PTO brake switch
SPtO
PTO stop switch on the fender
dIFF
Differential lock switch
IPS
High position for trailed implement if switch enter
L9ht
Headlights
AUtS
Not used
Prbr
Park brake and Park lock
LinS
Not used
bclt
Bottom of clutch (BOC)
tclt
Top of clutch (TOC)
RlnO
Armrest neutral switch normally open (NO)
RInC
Armrest neutral switch normally closed (NC)
StOp
Not used
NErr
Not used
LLnC
Neutral normally closed on steering column
LLnO
Neutral normally open on steering column
Brlu
Not used
Airl
Not used
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.22
DCC A / D input diagnostics "dAdC"

103. Repeat operation 92 to 94 to display "dAdC" function
(Fig. 21).
104. To cycle through this diagnostic function, press
5 . To leave it, press
6 .
105. The "dAdC" function is used to check analogic

inputs (value in point at 20).
Fig. 21
Display code
Issue 1
Parameters
A / D value
ShrL
Armrest shifter
Forward +
Forward
Forward Neutral
Reverse Reverse
Reverse +
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
802
731
666
525
370 As a reminder
295 NAO type lever
208 8170 / 8180
SFnr
Steering column shifter
Forward +
Forward
Forward Neutral
Reverse Reverse
Reverse +
Declutch
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
800
693
604
100
415
312
221
486
StEr
Not used
bAtr
Rax battery voltage
11 V
15,5 V
=
=
314
442
FUEL
Fuel level sensors
Empty
Full
=
=
890
25
OILP
Engine oil pressure
37 to 610
bAtF
Filtered battery volts
12 V
350
May 2001
11B02.23
DCC stored error codes "dErr"

106. Repeat operation 92 to 94 to display "dErr" function
(Fig. 22).
107. To cycle through the error code, press
leave it, press
5 . To
6 .
108. The "dErr" function is used to check the error code

in DCC memory. The DCC could stock 16 error
codes. The first value is the error code number. The
second value is the number of time of the error code
occured.
Fig. 22
Display code
Parameters
Err1
Number of the 1st error code
tEr1
Number of time of the 1st error code occured
......
Err16
Number of the 16th error code
tEr16
Number of time of the 16th error code occured
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.24
DCC lamp check "dLPS"
109. Repeat operation 92 to 94 to display "dLPS" function

(Fig. 23).
110. Press 5
to display each lamp during 5 seconds.
When the indicator light is "ON", the lower display

will read "ON".
When the indicator light is "OFF", the lower display
will read "OFF"
111. To leave this diagnostic function, press
6 .
Fig. 23
DCC analog gauge check "9AU9"

112. Repeat operation 92 to 94 to display "9AU9" function
(Fig. 24).
113. Press 5
114. Press
to display the gauge at middle position.
to display the gauge at maximum
to display the gauge at minimum
position.
115. Press
position
116. To leave this diagnostic function, press
6 .
Fig. 24
Display code
Issue 1
Parameters
CEnt
Middle position
HI9H
Maximum position
LO
Minimum position
May 2001
11B02.25
TC switch state diagnostics "tbin"

117. Repeat operation 92 to 94 to display "tbin" function
(Fig. 25).
leave it, press
5 . To
6 .
119. The "tbin" function is used to check the TC switch

inputs. The switch states are displayed as "0" or "1"
according to position
Fig. 25
Display code
Parameters
hPrS
Rear axle hydraulic pressure (17 bar)
hFLt
Clogging switch hydraulic filter (15 )
tPrS
Gearbox transmission pressure (17 bar)
LUbE
Rear axle lubrication switch (5 bar)
CrEP
Not used
PrLc
Park lock switch on the rear axle
Issue 1
May 2001
11B02.26
TC A / D input diagnostics "tAdc"

120. Repeat operation 92 to 94 to display "tAdc" function
(Fig. 26).
leave it, press
5 . To
6 .
122. The "tAdc" function is used to check analogic

inputs and frequencies on the TC.
Fig. 26
Code affich
Issue 1
Parameters
En9S
Engine speed sensor
trnS
Transmission output speed sensor
FPtO
PTO clutch output speed sensor
rPtO
Rear PTO shaft sensor
May 2001
11B02.27
TC stored error codes "tErr"

123. Repeat operation 92 to 94 to display "tErr" function
(Fig. 27).
leave it, press
5 . To
6 .
125. The "tErr" function is used to check the error codes

in TC memory. The TC could stock 20 error codes.
The first value is the error code number. The second
value is the number of time of the error code
occured.
Fig. 27
Display code
Parameters
Err1
Number of the 1st error code
tEr1
Number of time of the 1st error code occured
......
Err20
Number of the 20th error code
tEr20
Number of time of the 20th error code occured
Issue 1
May 2001
DCC / TC - Error codes
11B03.1
11B03 Error codes
CONTENTS
A.
General ___________________________________________
B.
List of TC and DCC error codes _____________________
- TC error codes ____________________________________
- DCC error codes __________________________________
TC and DCC error codes analysis ____________________
C.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B03.2
A . General
B . List of TC and DCC error codes
The TC (Transmission Controller) and the DCC (Display

Cab Controller) form the transmission control system for
tractors fitted with the Full Powershift gearbox.
All error codes of the TC and DCC are displayed on the

LCD screen of the DCC.
These 2 electronic units control all the automatic functions of the transmission according to the driver's actions and the information received from various sensors.
According to the severity of the Error Code, one of the

following may occur:
- the tractor is placed in computer Neutral (C.N.)
- the buzzer sounds on certain DCC errors (123 / 124 / 125
/ 126 / 156)
- the Error Code may be stored according to a pre-set
option that is programmed in the factory.
The TC and DCC control :

- the Full Powershift gearbox
- the front axle
- the front and rear differential locks
- the power take-off
The TC and DCC can be :
- programmed : to improve the control of functions
- parameterised : identified by a 12-digit code indicating
the model and options of the tractor both units are
mounted on
- tests : Check the operation of the functions
The TC and DCC are located :
- the TC is mounted on the right-hand side of the gearbox
- the DCC is mounted in the cab and replaces the
dashboard
The TC and DCC has self-diagnostic modes :
- the reading of Error codes can be carried out in 2 ways:
. by the direct reading of the Error Code on the DCC
. by direct reading of the error code using Wintest
Certain TC and DCC error codes are stored in the DCC
and can be displayed at any time providing a reset has
not been carried out.
Issue 1
If an intermittent Error Code is encountered, it can be

displayed by using the diagnostics function providing it is
set to store such errors.
May 2001
Error codes 2 to 119 correspond to TC failures.

Error codes 121 to 162 correspond to DCC failures.
11B03.3
TC error codes
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Not used
Not used
Clutch L electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to earth)
Clutch L electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
Clutch M electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to earth)
Clutch M electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
Clutch H electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to earth)
Clutch H electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
Clutch 1 electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to earth)
Clutch 1 electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
Clutch 2 electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to earth)
Clutch 2 electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
Clutch R electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to earth)
Clutch R electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
Clutch A electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to earth)
Clutch A electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
Clutch B electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to earth)
Clutch B electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
Clutch C electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to earth)
Clutch C electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
Incorrect gear requested by DCC
Temperature of transmission oil for calibration less than 50C
Engine speed above the calibration limit (1800 rpm)
Engine speed below the calibration limit (1250 rpm)
Gearbox output speed above calibration limit
Default calibration values used
Wrong parameter for number of pulses per PTO rev
No speed sensor signal at calibration
Incorrect Forward speed sensor signal at calibration
Incorrect Reverse speed sensor signal at calibration
Speed sensor signal at calibration does not drop
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Engaging pressure higher than 5.1 bar

Clutch 1 filling fault (above 300ms)
Clutch 2 filling fault (above 300ms)
Clutch R filling fault (above 300ms)
Clutch A filling fault (above 300ms)
Clutch B filling fault (above 300ms)
Clutch C filling fault (above 300ms)
Clutch L filling fault (above 300ms)
Clutch M filling fault (above 300ms)
Clutch H filling fault (above 300ms)
Detection of transmission slip
Not used
Error Not Stored C.N.

Error Not StoredC.N.
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Stored
Issue
Issue 2
1
May 2002
December
2000

11B03.4
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
Not used
Not used
High alternator regulator voltage (filtered battery signal)
Low alternator regulator voltage (filtered battery signal)
Not used
Not used
High transmission temperature sensor signal
Low transmission temperature sensor signal
Not used
Not used
High PTO solenoid valve current
Low PTO solenoid valve current
High PTO brake solenoid valve current
Low PTO brake solenoid valve current
High clutch C solenoid valve current
Low clutch C solenoid valve current
High clutch R solenoid valve current
Low clutch R solenoid valve current
High clutch A solenoid valve current
Low clutch A solenoid valve current
High clutch 2 solenoid valve current
Low clutch 2 solenoid valve current
High clutch B solenoid valve current
Low clutch B solenoid valve current
High clutch 1 solenoid valve current
Low clutch 1 solenoid valve current
High differential lock solenoid valve current
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
70 Low differential lock solenoid valve current

71 High clutch M solenoid valve current
Error Stored
Error Stored
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Low clutch M solenoid valve current

High clutch H solenoid valve current
Low clutch H solenoid valve current
High clutch L solenoid valve current
Low clutch L solenoid valve current
CAN message lost
CAN network deactivated
No CAN message from the DCC
Minor Checksum Error in serial EEPROM (Table Of Contents)
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored C.N. Special
Error Stored
81
82
83
84
85
86
Fatal Checksum Error in serial EEPROM (resets default values)

Minor fault in transmission service hours counter (internal to TC)
Major fault in transmission service hours counter (internal to TC)
Minor fault in transmission tenths of service hours counter (internal to TC)
Major fault in transmission tenths of service hours counter (internal to TC)
Gearbox 17 bar pressure switch fault
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Issue
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002

87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
Lubrication 3 bar pressure switch fault

Attempt to reprogram with engine running
TC internal circuit (protection transistor stuck open)
No electrical signal from PTO speed sensor
No electrical signal from engine speed sensor
Engine speed drop with engine stalling
PTO clutch slip
PTO brake failure
Short circuit on +12V AC of PTO clutch solenoid valve
Over voltage detected on PTO clutch solenoid valve
Park lock engagement error
Park lock move error
Front axle solenoid valve failure
Clutch 1 engaging pressure calibration fault
Clutch 2 engaging pressure calibration fault
Clutch R engaging pressure calibration fault
Clutch A engaging pressure calibration fault
Clutch B engaging pressure calibration fault
Clutch C engaging pressure calibration fault
Clutch L engaging pressure calibration fault
Clutch M engaging pressure calibration fault
Clutch H engaging pressure calibration fault
TC internal circuit (protection transistor stuck closed)
Fault between specified and measured current on clutch 1
Fault between specified and measured current on clutch 2
Fault between specified and measured current on clutch R
Fault between specified and measured current on clutch A
Fault between specified and measured current on clutch B
Fault between specified and measured current on clutch C
Fault between specified and measured current on clutch L
Fault between specified and measured current on clutch M
119 Fault between specified and measured current on clutch H
Issue 12
11B03.5
Error Stored
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
May 2000
2002
December

11B03.6
DCC error codes

121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146

High engine oil pressure sensor electrical signal
Low engine oil pressure sensor electrical signal
High engine temperature sensor signal
Low engine temperature sensor signal
High fuel gauge electrical signal
Low fuel gauge electrical signal
High battery voltage (non filtered battery signal)
Low battery voltage (non filtered battery signal)
Boost sensor too high
Boost sensor too low
Not used
Not used
Analogue reverse/forward lever sensor too high
Analog reverse/forward lever sensor too low
Armrest lever sensor too high
Armrest lever sensor too low
Clutch pedal potentiometer too high
Clutch pedal potentiometer too low
Engine speed out of range
Top of clutch (TOC) short circuited to + 12 V AC
Bottom of clutch (BOC) short-circuited to +12 V AC
NAO shuttle lever neutral switch normally open failed - high
NAO shuttle lever neutral switch normally open failed - low
NAO shuttle lever neutral switch normally closed failed - high
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored C.N.

Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
147 NAO shuttle lever neutral switch normally closed failed - low
148 Attempt to reprogram with engine running
Error Stored
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
CAN bus off

CAN bus off error
Gearbox output speed out of range
Major fault on engine service hours counter
Parameter table fault
Normal CAN communication with TC has failed
Incorrect tractor code selected
Clutch pedal top switch (TOC) stuck open
Engine sensor off
Error Stored
Error Stored
Error Not Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored C.N. Special
Error Not Stored
Error Stored
Error Stored
158
159
160
161
162
Armrest lever calibration error

Analog reverse/forward lever neutral switch failure in neutral
Analog reverse/forward lever neutral switch failure outside neutral
Armrest lever neutral switch failure in neutral position
Armrest lever neutral switch failure in non neutral position
Error Not Stored

Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Error Stored C.N.
Issue
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002

C . TC and DCC error codes analysis
Error Codes 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 and 18
Clutch electrical fault (open circuit or short circuit to
earth)
- Possible causes : The maximum supply current to the
solenoid valve has been reached by the TC due to an
open circuit, or short circuit to earth on the positive or
negative leads in the solenoid valve harness, or the
resistance of the solenoid in the solenoid valve is
excessive.
- Tests : Check continuity in the harness between the TC
and the solenoid valve to detect any open circuit, or
short circuit to the frame / earth. Check the resistance
of the solenoid in the solenoid valve.
Error Codes 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17 and 19
Clutch electrical fault (short circuit on + 12 AC)
- Possible causes: The minimum supply current for the
clutch solenoid valve has been reached by the TC due
to a short circuit on the supply on the positive, or
negative leads in the solenoid valve harness.
- Tests: Check the supply to the leads of the solenoid
valve harness with the ignition key turned, engine not
running. Test the harness to detect any 12-volt short
circuit in the harness.
11B03.7
Error Code 22
Engine speed above the calibration limit (1800-rpm).
- Possible causes: The calibration of the transmission
has been undertaken with the engine speed above 1800
rpm. Calibration must be carried out at 1300-rpm +/-50.
Speed sensor or wiring defective.
- Tests : Reduce the engine speed and carry out calibration again. Check the speed sensor and test the wiring
for any open circuit or short circuit.
Error Code 23
Engine speed below the calibration limit (1250 rpm).
was undertaken with an engine speed of less than 1150
rpm. Speed sensor or wiring defective.
- Tests: Increase engine speed and recalibrate. Check
the speed sensor and test wiring for any open circuit.
Error Code 24
Gearbox output speed above the calibration limit.
was undertaken at an output speed greater than 100
rpm. The tractor has moved because the parking brake
was not on. Output speed sensor or wiring defective.
- Tests : Check that the parking brake is on. Check the
output speed sensor and test the circuit for any open
circuit or a short circuit in the wiring.
Error Code 20
Incorrect gear requested by DCC
- Possible cause: The TC has received a request for a
gear change from the DCC which is not defined in the
programming of the TC.
- Test: Check DCC/TC constants and calibration of the
gear lever.
Error Code 25
Default calibration values used.
- Possible causes: The TC is using the default values for
the calibration. The transmission has not been calibrated. The TC memory is damaged or the TC is
defective.
- Tests: Calibrate the transmission. Replace the TC.
Error Code 21
Temperature of transmission oil for calibration less than
50C.
- Possible cause: The calibration of the transmission has
been undertaken with the transmission oil below the
specified calibration temperature of 50C (120F).
- Tests: Heat the transmission oil. Then check the
correct operation of the temperature sensors and the
wiring.
Error Code 26
Wrong parameter for number of pulses per PTO rev.
- Possible causes: Incorrect parameter input, enter new
parameters for the tractor.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B03.8
Error Code 27
No speed sensor signal at calibration
- Possible causes: The speed of the shaft (gearbox 5th
stage) was zero during calibration phases 1, 2 or 3 due
to an incorrect conversion parameter in the TC; wiring
defect on the calibration speed sensor; partial failure of
the TC; low clutch pressure; defective solenoid valve or
mechanical failure in the transmission.
- Tests: Check that the calibration speed sensor is
connected and test the wiring to detect any open circuit
or short circuit. Check the pressure in the clutch circuit
and the correct operation of the solenoid valves
(clutches R, C, 2 and B). Replace the TC.
Error Code 31
Engaging pressure greater than 5.1 bar.
- Possible causes: A pressure in the clutch engaging
was greater than 5.1 bar (75 psi) during one of the calibration steps (4 to 12) due to high pressure in the circuit;
failure of a solenoid valve; failure in the transmission or
failure of the TC.
- Tests: Check the pressure in the clutch circuit, check
whether a solenoid valve corresponding to the stage
being calibrated is stuck or defective. Check whether
there is a mechanical failure in the transmission or in
the TC.
Error Code 28
Incorrect Forward speed sensor signal at calibration
stage) was not within admissible limits during phases
2 or 3 of the calibration due to an incorrect conversion
parameter in the TC; calibration speed sensor wiring
fault; partial failure of the TC; low clutch pressure;
defective solenoid valve or mechanical failure in the
transmission.
connected and test the wiring for any open circuit or
short circuit. Check the pressure in the clutch circuit
(clutches 2, C and B). Replace the TC.
Error Codes 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40
Clutch filling fault (above 300 ms)
- Possible causes: Clutch filling time too slow (greater
than 300 milliseconds) due to low circuit pressure;
failure of a solenoid valve; partial failure of the TC or a
mechanical failure in the gearbox.
- Tests: Check clutch circuit pressure. Check whether a
stuck or defective solenoid valve is linked to the error
code. Check for mechanical failure in the gearbox or a
failure in the TC.
Error Code 29
Incorrect Reverse speed sensor calibration signal
stage) was not within admissible limits during phase 1
of the calibration due to an incorrect conversion parameter in the TC; a wiring fault on the calibration speed
sensor; partial failure of the TC; low clutch pressure;
defective solenoid valve or mechanical failure in the
transmission.
connected and test the wiring for any open circuit or
short circuit. Check the pressure in the clutch circuit
(clutches R and C). Replace the TC.
Error Code 30
Speed sensor signal at calibration doesnt drop.
stage) did not drop during one of the pressure maintenance calibration phases (4 to 12) due to a solenoid
valve failure; partial failure of the TC or mechanical
failure in the transmission.
- Tests: Check whether the solenoid valve corresponding to the stage being calibrated is stuck or defective;
or whether there is a failure in the transmission or the
TC.
Issue 1
May 2001
Error Code 41
Detection of transmission slip
- Possible causes: The engaging of the gearbox clutches
remained 10% below total engagement for a period of
10 seconds with the clutch pedal positioned at more
than 40% of its total travel; or during 30 seconds with
the pedal at less than 40% of its travel. This may be due
to prolonged overuse of the clutch pedal; starting in too
high a gear for the load; low pressure in the circuit;
failure of a solenoid valve or a mechanical failure in the
transmission.
- Tests: Start in a lower gear. Check pressure in the
clutch circuit. Check if one of the solenoid valves linked
to the gear indicating the fault is stuck or defective; or
whether there is a mechanical failure in the transmission. Avoid slipping the clutch with the clutch pedal.
Error Code 45
High alternator regulator voltage (filtered battery signal).
- Possible causes: The filtered battery voltage, terminal
B - J, at the TC is higher than 16.5 V. The alternator is
providing too high a charge.
- Tests: Check voltage at terminal B - J and the alternator
output current.

Error Code 46
Low alternator regulator voltage (filtered battery signal).
- Possible causes: The filtered battery voltage, terminal
B - J, at the TC is less than 11 V. The alternator is not
charging enough.
- Tests: Check the voltage at terminal B - J of the TC. If
the voltage is low, check whether the alternator output
is low or whether there is an open circuit or short circuit
in the wiring harness.
Error Code 49
High transmission temperature sensor signal.
- Possible causes: The earth circuit of the temperature
sensor between terminal D - G of the TC and the sensor
is open; or the signalling circuit between terminal D - J
of the TC and the sensor is open or short circuited to
12 V.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal D-G of the
TC and the sensor to detect any open circuit. Check the
circuit between terminal D-J of the TC and the sensor
to detect any open circuit or short circuit to system
voltage.
Error Code 50
Low transmission temperature sensor signal.
- Possible cause: The temperature sensor signalling
circuit between terminal D - J of the TC and the sensor
is short-circuited to earth.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal D - J of the
TC and the sensor for any short-circuiting to earth.
Error Code 53
High PTO solenoid valve current .
- Possible causes: The fine control circuit of the rear PTO
solenoid valve is defective following a short circuit to
12 V in the return circuit, or a TC failure.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal B - D of the
TC and the rear PTO solenoid valve to detect any short
circuit to 12 V. Replace the TC.
Error Code 54
Low PTO solenoid valve current.
- Possible causes: The fine control circuit of the rear PTO
solenoid valve is defective following a short circuit to
earth in the return circuit, or due to a TC failure
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal B - D of the
TC and the rear PTO solenoid valve to detect any short
circuit to earth. Replace the TC.
11B03.9
Error Code 55
High PTO brake solenoid valve current.
- Possible causes: The fine control circuit of the PTO
brake solenoid valve is defective following a short
circuit to 12 V in the return circuit, or due to a TC failure.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal B - E of the
TC and the PTO brake solenoid valve to detect any short
Error Code 56
Low PTO brake solenoid valve current.
- Possible causes: The fine control circuit of the PTO
brake solenoid valve is defective following a short
circuit to earth in the return circuit, or due to a TC failure
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal B - E of the
TC and the PTO brake solenoid valve to detect any short
Error Code 57
High clutch "C" solenoid valve current.
- Possible causes: The fine control circuit of the solenoid
valve of clutch "C" is defective due to a short circuit to
12 V in the return circuit, or due to a TC failure.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - A of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch 'C' to detect any
short circuit to 12 V. Replace the TC.
Error Code 58
Low clutch "C" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "C" is defective due to a short circuit to
earth in the return circuit, or due to a TC failure.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C-A of the TC
and the solenoid valve of clutch "C" to detect any short
Error Code 59
High clutch "R" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "R" is defective due to a short circuit to
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - J of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "R" to detect any
Issue 1
May 2001

11B03.10
Error Code 60
Low clutch "R" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "R" is defective due to a short circuit to
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - J of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "R" to detect any
short circuit to earth. Replace the TC.
Error Code 66
Low clutch "B" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "B" is defective due to a short circuit to
earth in the return circuit or due to a TC failure.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - C of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "B" to detect any
Error Code 61
High clutch "A" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "A" is defective due to a short circuit to
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - B of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "A" to detect any
Error Code 67
High clutch "1" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "1" is defective due to a short circuit to
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C-D of the TC
and the solenoid valve of clutch "1" to detect any short
Error Code 62
Low clutch "A" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "A" is defective due to a short circuit to
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - B of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "A" to detect any
Error Code 68
Low clutch "1" solenoid valve current.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - D of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "1" to detect any
Error Code 63
High clutch "2" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch 2 is defective due to a short circuit to
Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C-H of the TC
and the solenoid valve of clutch 2 to detect any short
Error Code 69
High differential lock solenoid valve current.
- Possible causes: The fine control circuit of the differential lock solenoid valve is defective due to a short circuit
to 12 V in the return circuit, or due to a TC failure.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - K of the
TC and the differential lock solenoid valve to detect any
Error Code 64
Low clutch 2 solenoid valve current.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C-H of the TC
and the solenoid valve of clutch "2" to detect any short
Error Code 70
Low differential lock solenoid valve current.
- Possible causes: The fine control circuit of the differential lock solenoid valve is defective due to a short circuit
to earth in the return circuit, or due to a TC failure..
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - K of the
TC and the differential lock solenoid valve to detect any
Error Code 65
High clutch "B" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "B" is defective due to a short circuit to
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - C of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "B" to detect any
Error Code 71
High clutch "M" solenoid valve current
valve of clutch "M" is defective due to a short circuit to
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - G of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "M" to detect any
Issue 1
May 2001
11B03.11
Error Code 72
Low clutch "M" solenoid valve current
valve of clutch "M" is defective due to a short circuit to
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - G of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "M" to detect any
Error Code 78
CAN network deactivated
- Possible causes: Hardware failure either in the DCC or
in the 3 CAN network cables linking the systems.
- Tests: Check the continuity of the 3 CAN cables
between terminals D - A, D - B and D - K of the DCC and
terminals D - A, D - G and D - K of the TC. Replace the
DCC.
Error Code 73
High clutch "H" solenoid valve current
valve of clutch "H" is defective due to a short circuit to
12 V in the return circuit or due to a TC failure.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - E of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "H" to detect any
Error Code 79
No CAN message from the DCC
- Possible causes: Open circuit or short circuit in the 3
CAN network cables linking the DCC and TC.
terminals D - A, D - G and D - K of the TC.
Note: Computer Neutral Special = gearbox will not
go any more to neutral but PTO will be shut off,
4WD will be engaged and Diff.lock will be disengaged. The error code 79 will be displayed on the
DCC but the tractor can still move in the selected
gear until the clutch pedal is depressed (BOC
switch activated) or one of the gear lever is moved
to neutral position (neutral switch activated).
Error Code 74
Low clutch "H" solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "H" is defective due to a short circuit to
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "H" to detect any
Error Code 75
High L clutch solenoid valve current
valve of clutch "L" is defective due to a short circuit to
12 V in the return circuit or due to a TC failure.
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - F of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "L" to detect any
Error Code 76
Low L clutch solenoid valve current.
valve of clutch "L" is defective due to a short circuit to
- Tests: Check the circuit between terminal C - F of the
TC and the solenoid valve of clutch "L" to detect any
Error Code 80
Minor Checksum Error in serial EEPROM (Table Of
Contents)
- Possible cause: An error was generated while saving
the parameter in the TC. The system will delete the error
after one or two ignition cycles, but the parameter may
not have been saved and the default parameters will be
used.
- Tests: Check the "dcon" and "tcon" parameters.
Error Code 81
Fatal Checksum Error in serial EEPROM (resets default
values)
- Possible cause: The operating parameters have been
lost.
- Tests: Check and re-enter the correct parameters for
the tractor.
Error Code 77
Loss of CAN message
- Possible causes: Hardware failure either in the DCC or
in the 3 CAN network cables linking the systems.
terminals D - A, D - G and D - K of the TC. Replace the
DCC.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B03.12
Error Code 82
Minor fault in transmission service hours counter (internal to TC)
- Possible cause: The transmission service hours are
stored in 3 different places. If one of the values differs
from the other two, these two values will be copied to
replace the wrong value. If the three values are different, there is no majority and the real number of transmission service hours are lost. To delete this error, turn
the key to OFF position, then to ON again.
Error Code 83
Major fault in transmission service hours counter (internal to TC)
- Possible cause: The transmission service hours are
stored in 3 different places. If the three places contain
different values, the real number of transmission service hours are lost. Certain figures will be stored as hours
but they will not be correct. To delete this error, turn the
key to OFF position, then to ON again.
Error Code 84
Minor fault in transmission tenths of service hours
counter (internal to TC)
- Possible cause: The tenths of transmission service
hours are stored in 3 different places. If one of the
values differs from the other two, these two values will
be copied to replace the wrong value. If the three values
are different, there is no majority and the real number of
tenths of transmission service hours are lost. To delete
this error, turn the key to OFF position, then to ON again.
Error Code 85
Major fault in transmission tenths of service hours
counter (internal to TC)
- Possible cause: The tenths of transmission service
hours are stored in 3 different places. If the three places
contain different values, the real number of tenths of
transmission service hours are lost. Certain figures will
be stored as tenths of hours but they will not be correct.
To delete this error, turn the key to OFF position, then
to ON again.
Error Code 86
Gearbox 17 bar pressure switch fault
- Possible causes: The circuit between the oil pressure
switch and terminal E - B of the TC is short-circuited to
earth. The oil pressure switch contacts are shorted
together. The transmission oil pressure is not reaching
the minimum required pressure.
- Tests: Check that the transmission oil pressure is
above the specified minimum. Test the circuit between
the oil pressure switch and terminal E - B of the TC to
detect any short circuit to earth. Check that the oil
pressure switch itself is not short-circuited.
Issue 1
May 2001
Error Code 87
Lubrication 3 bar pressure switch fault
- Possible causes: The circuit between the oil pressure
switch and terminal E - A of the TC is short-circuited to
earth. The contacts of the oil pressure switch are
shorting together. The hydraulic pressure has not
reached the minimum required.
- Tests: Check that the hydraulic oil pressure is above the
specified minimum. Test the circuit between the oil
pressure switch and terminal E - A of the TC to detect
any short circuit to earth. Check that the oil pressure
switch itself is not short-circuiting.
Error Code 88
Attempt to reprogram with engine running
- Possible cause: An attempt has been made to
download new software while the engine was running.
- Tests: To download new software, the ignition key
switch must be on but the engine must be stopped.
Note: This is an additional safety as Wintest
system normally does not allow reprogramming
with engine running.
Error Code 89
TC internal circuit (protection transistor stuck open)
- Possible cause: TC failure
- Tests: Replace the TC
Error Code 90
No electrical signal from PTO speed sensor
- Possible causes: The PTO operates but the TC is
receiving no input from the sensor. The sensor is
defective or one of the two sensor wires is short
circuited or broken.
- Tests: Check for breaks in the two wires running from
the sensor to the TC. Test the wiring from terminal E H of the TC to detect any short circuit to 12 V. Test the
wiring from terminal E - D of the TC to detect any short
circuit to 12 V or earth. Replace the sensor.
Note: After a gearbox calibration, if the PTO speed
sensor has not been reconnected (brown wire on
brown wire near the TC) this error code can occur
when using PTO.

Error Code 91
No electrical signal from engine speed sensor
- Possible causes: The engine is running but the TC is
receiving no input from the engine speed sensor. The
sensor is defective or the circuit to the sensor is open
or short-circuited. Mechanical failure of the input gear
train.
- Tests: Check wiring between the engine speed sensor
and terminals E - E and E - H of the TC to detect any open
circuit. Test the wiring from terminal E - H of the TC to
detect any short circuit to 12 V. Test the wiring between
the engine speed sensor and terminal E - E of the TC to
detect any short circuit to earth or 12 V. Remove the
sensor and check that the pinions are turning. Replace
the sensor.
Error Code 92
Engine speed with engine stalling
- Possible causes: The engine speed dropped more than
50% of its initial speed when the PTO was engaged.
Attempt at starting with too high a load on the PTO. PTO
speed sensor incorrectly adjusted. Low clutch pressure
or mechanical failure.
- Tests: Reduce the load on the PTO before engaging it;
check that the tool driven by the PTO has not seized up
or jammed. Check the adjustment of the PTO speed
sensor; the clutch pressure and whether there is a
mechanical failure. Check continuity in the harness
between the speed sensors and the corresponding TC
terminals.
Error Code 93
PTO clutch slip
- Possible causes: The TC monitors the input and output
speeds of the PTO clutch and detects any clutch slip.
This may be caused by too high a load; poor adjustment
of the PTO speed sensor or a lack of clutch pressure due
to a mechanical failure.
- Tests: Reduce the load on the PTO. Check the adjustment of the PTO speed sensor. Check the clutch pressure. Check continuity in the wiring harness between
the speed sensors and corresponding terminals of the
TC.
Note: After a gearbox calibration, if the PTO speed
sensor has not been reconnected (brown wire on
brown wire near the TC) this error code can occur
when using PTO.
11B03.13
Error Code 94
PTO brake failure
- Possible causes: The TC has deactivated the PTO and
activated the PTO brake but detects that the PTO shaft
is still turning. Mechanical failure of the PTO brake.
- Tests: Check pressure in the PTO clutch and PTO
brake. If the pressure is correct, there is a mechanical
failure in the brake itself. If the pressure is not within
specified limits, check whether the PTO brake or clutch
solenoid valves are jammed.
Error Code 95
- Possible cause: Hydraulic pressure was lower than 12
bar (176 psi) for more than 2 seconds. This puts all
transmission and rear axle solenoid valves out of
service.
- Tests: Connect a pressure-gauge and check the lowpressure hydraulic circuit. Check the correct operation
of the low-pressure switch. Check the wiring between
the pressure switch and terminal E - A of the TC.
Error Code 96
Short circuit on +12V AC of PTO clutch solenoid valve
- Possible cause: The current still reaches the PTO
solenoid valve when the TC has deactivated the PTO.
Due to a short circuit to +12 V AC in the wiring harness
or a TC failure.
- Tests: Disconnect connector B of the TC and check for
the presence of voltage on terminal C towards the earth
and on terminal G towards the earth. With the ignition
key switch on, if a voltage is present, the harness is
faulty. Repair the harness. If no voltage is measured,
replace the TC.
Error Code 97
Over voltage detected on PTO clutch solenoid valve
- Possible causes: The filtered battery voltage is above
16.5 V. This may be due to an alternator failure.
- Tests: Check that the output of the alternator is correct.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B03.14
Error Code 98
Park lock engagement error.
- Possible cause: The Park lock switch on the left-hand
side of the transmission / axle unit is signalling that the
Park lock is engaged although the TC has disengaged
the Park lock.
- Tests: Check the correct operation of the Park lock
switch on the left-hand side of the transmission / axle
unit. Test the wiring from the Park lock switch to the TC
to detect any open circuit or short circuit (terminals D F of the TC). Check the solenoid valve wiring. Check the
solenoid valve itself.
Error Code 99
Park-lock movement error
- Possible cause: The status of the Park-lock switch on
the left-hand side of the transmission / axle unit does
not change during the disengagement of the Park-lock
or the handbrake is still engaged.
- Tests: Check the correct operation of the Park-lock
switch on the left-hand side of the transmission / axle
unit. Test the wiring from the Park-lock switch to the
TC to detect any open circuit or short circuit (terminals
D - F of the TC). Disengage the handbrake.
Error Code 100
Front axle solenoid valve failure
- Possible causes: The 4WD actuator has detected an
error. Perhaps a short circuit or a break in the 4WD
solenoid valve circuit.
- Tests: Check the 4WD solenoid valve circuit to detect
any open circuit or short circuit. Check the wiring
harness between the solenoid valve connector and
terminals B - H and C - K of the TC to detect any short
circuit, short to earth or 12 V.
Error Codes 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, and
109
Clutch engaging pressure calibration fa ult
- Possible causes: The calibration has failed due to low
pressure in the circuit; a solenoid valve failure; partial
failure of the TC or a mechanical failure in the transmission.
- Tests: Check the circuit pressure. Check whether the
solenoid valve corresponding to the Error Code is
jammed, has failed or has defective O-rings. Check for
a mechanical failure in the transmission.
Issue 1
May 2001
Error Code 110

TC internal circuit (protection transistor stuck closed)
- Possible cause: Short circuit to earth on one of the
solenoid outputs of the TC or TC failure.
- Tests: Check all solenoid circuits to detect any wiring
harness damage. Replace the TC.
Error Code 111
Fault between specified and measured current on clutch
1.
- Possible cause: If this error code occurs when starting
a gearbox calibration check that the software program
numbers are not displayed any more on the DCC, if they
are still displayed depress the clutch pedal fully with
one of the gear levers in neutral position.
Clutch 1 solenoid coil resistance not adequate. TC
battery voltage too low or too high. Bad earth on TC.
Internal TC problem.
- Tests: Check coil resistance and harness (change if
necessary). Do complete wiring and connectors checklist. Change TC.
Error Code 112
2.
Clutch 2 solenoid coil resistance not adequate. TC
necessary). Do complete wiring and connectors
checklist.Change TC.
Error Code 113
R.
Clutch R solenoid coil resistance not adequate. TC

Error Code 114
A.
Clutch A solenoid coil resistance not adequate. TC
Error Code 115
B.
Clutch B solenoid coil resistance not adequate. TC
Error Code 116
C.
Clutch C solenoid coil resistance not adequate. TC
11B03.15
Error Code 117

L.
Clutch L solenoid coil resistance not adequate. TC
necessary). Do complete wiring and connectors checklist. Check the correct operation of the BOC switch.
Change TC.
Error Code 118
M.
Clutch M solenoid coil resistance not adequate. TC
Change TC.
Error Code 119
H.
Clutch H solenoid coil resistance not adequate. TC
Change TC.
Issue 1
December 2000

11B03.16
Error Code 121

- Possible causes: The filtered battery supply voltage,
terminal A - K, going to the DCC is above 15.5 V. The
alternator is over charging.
- Tests: Check the voltage at terminal A - K and the power
output of the alternator.
Error Code 122
- Possible cause: The voltage from the regulator, terminal A - K, reaching the DCC is below 11 V.
- Tests: Measure the voltage at terminal A - K of the DCC.
If the voltage is low, check whether the power output
of the alternator is low or whether there is an open
circuit or short circuit in the harness.
Error Code 123
High engine oil pressure sensor signal
- Possible causes: The circuit between terminal B - G of
the DCC and the sensor is open, or the sensor is not
sufficiently earthed.
- Tests: Check wiring between terminal B - G and the
sensor to detect any open circuit and to check that the
sensor housing is properly earthed.
Error Code 124
Low engine oil pressure sensor signal.Only recorded 8
seconds after start-up.
- Possible cause: The circuit between terminal B - G of
the DCC and the sensor is short-circuited to earth.
- Tests: Check wiring between terminal B - G and the
earth to detect any short circuit.
Error Code 125
High engine temperature sensor signal
- Possible causes: The circuit between terminal C - F of
the DCC and the sensor is open or short-circuited to >5
V or the earth return circuit is open.
- Tests: Check the wire between terminal C - F and the
sensor to detect any open or short circuit to >5 V and
check the sensor is correctly earthed.
Error Code 126
Low engine temperature sensor signal
- Possible causes: The circuit between terminal C - F of
the DCC and the sensor is short circuited to earth or the
circuit from terminal C - A of the DCC has a reference
voltage lower than 5 V.
- Tests: Check the wire from terminal C - F to detect any
short circuit to earth. Check the voltage at terminal C -
Issue
Issue 12
December
May 2000
2002
A of DCC; the reference voltage must be 5 V.

Error Code 127
High fuel gauge signal
- Possible causes: The circuit between terminal C - E of
the DCC and the fuel gauge is open or the return circuit
to earth is open.
DCC and the fuel gauge to detect any open circuit and
check the wiring between the fuel gauge and the earth
to detect any open circuit. Check whether the fuel level
sensor is defective.
Error Code 128
Low fuel gauge signal
- Possible cause: The circuit from terminal C - E of the
DCC is short-circuited to earth.
- Tests: Check the wiring from terminal C - E of the DCC
to detect any short circuit to earth. Check whether the
fuel level sensor is defective.
Error Code 129
High battery voltage (non filtered battery signal)
- Possible causes: The supply voltage of the battery,
terminal A - K, to the DCC is above 15.5 V or the
alternator is over charging.
- Tests: Check the voltage at terminal A - K and the power
output of the alternator.
Error Code 130
Low battery voltage (non filtered battery signal)
- Possible cause: The supply voltage of the battery,
terminal A - K, to the DCC is less than 11 V.
- Tests: Check the voltage at terminal A - K. If the voltage
is low, check whether the power output of the alternator
is low or whether there is an open circuit or short circuit.
Error Code 131
Boost sensor too high
- Possible causes: The supply between terminal A - F of
the DCC and terminal B of the sensor is >5 V or the
reference earth circuit between terminal A - D of the
DCC and terminal A of the sensor is open.
- Tests: Check the supply line between terminal A - F of
the DCC and terminal B of the sensor to detect any short
circuit to 12 V. Test the earth between terminal A of the
sensor and terminal A - D of the DCC to detect any open
circuit.

Error Code 132
Boost sensor too low
- Possible causes: The reference voltage between A - E
of the DCC and terminal C of the sensor is open circuit;
the supply circuit between terminal A - F of the DCC and
terminal B of the sensor is open circuit; or the supply
line of the potentiometer from terminal A - F of the DCC
is short circuited to earth.
- Tests: Check the line between terminal A - E of the DCC
and terminal C of the sensor to detect any open circuit.
Check whether the circuit between terminal A - F of the
DCC and terminal B of the sensor is open. Test the line
from terminal C - B of the DCC to detect any short circuit
to earth.
Error Code 135
Analog reverse/forward lever sensor too high
- Possible causes: One internal reed switches damaged
or DCC internal problem.
- Tests: Check power supply lines positive and negative
to lever and check output voltage in each lever position.
If problem change DCC or lever.
Error Code 136
Analog reverse/forward lever sensor too low.
- Possible causes: One internal reed switches damaged
or DCC internal problem.
- Tests: Check power supply lines positive and negative
to lever and check output voltage in each lever position.
If problem change DCC or lever.
Error Code 137
Armrest lever sensor too high
- Possible causes: The potentiometer supply between
terminal B - H of the DCC and the sensor is >5 V or the
reference earth circuit between terminal B - J of the
DCC and the sensor is open.
- Tests: Check the line between terminal B - H of the DCC
and the sensor to detect any short circuit to 12 V. Check
the line between terminal B - J of the DCC and the sensor to detect any open circuit.
Error Code 138
Armrest lever sensor too low
- Possible causes: The reference voltage between terminal B - C of the DCC and the sensor is in open circuit;
or the supply line to the potentiometer between terminal
B - H of the DCC and the sensor is in open circuit; or the
supply between terminal G - H of the DCC and the
sensor is short circuited to earth.
- Tests: Check the line between terminal B - C of the DCC
and the sensor to detect any open circuit. Check the
line between terminal B - E of the DCC and the sensor
to detect any open circuit or short circuit to earth.
11B03.17
Error Code 139

Clutch pedal potentiometer too high
- Possible causes: The potentiometer supply line between terminal B - B of the DCC and the sensor is >5
V or the reference earth circuit between terminal B - K
of the DCC and the sensor is in open circuit.
- Tests: Check the line between terminal B - B of the DCC
and the sensor to detect any short circuit to 12 V. Test
the line between terminal B - K of the DCC and the
sensor to detect any open circuit.
Error Code 140
Clutch pedal potentiometer too low
- Possible causes: The reference voltage between terminal B - A of the DCC and the sensor is in open circuit;
or the supply line of the potentiometer between terminal
B - B of the DCC and the sensor is in open circuit; or the
supply line of the potentiometer between terminal B - B
of the DCC and the sensor is short circuited to earth.
- Tests: Check the line between terminal B - A of the DCC
and the sensor to detect any open circuit. Test the line
between terminal B - B of the DCC and the sensor to
detect any open circuit or short circuit to earth.
Error Code 141
Engine speed out of range
- Possible cause: The DCC is detecting that the TC is
transmitting an unrealistic engine speed.
- Tests: Check that the engine speed sensor is correctly
connected and is not defective. Partial TC failure.
Error Code 142
Top of clutch (TOC) short circuited to + 12 V AC
- Possible causes: Input line at terminal D - D of the DCC
is short circuited to 12 V or TOC switch is defective or
wrongly adjusted.
- Tests: Check the input line at terminal D - D to detect
any short circuit to 12 V. Check whether the TOC switch
is incorrectly adjusted or defective.
Error Code 143
Bottom of clutch (BOC) short-circuited to +12 V AC.
- Possible causes: The input line to terminal D - F of the
DCC is short circuited to 12 V or the BOC switch is
defective or incorrectly adjusted.
- Tests: Check the input line to terminal D - F of the DCC
to detect any short circuit to 12 V. Check whether the
BOC switch is incorrectly adjusted or defective.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B03.18
Error Code 144

NAO shuttle lever neutral switch normally open failed high
- Possible causes: The input line to terminal D - C of the
DCC is short circuited to 12 V or the neutral safety
switch is defective or incorrectly adjusted.
- Tests: Check the input line to terminal D - C of the DCC
to detect any short circuit. Check if the neutral safety
Note: This error code is no more used since version
2.02 of software program.
Error Code 145
NAO shuttle lever neutral switch normally open failed low
- Possible causes: The input line to terminal D - C of the
DCC is short-circuited to earth or the neutral safety
- Tests: Check the input line to terminal D - C of the DCC
neutral safety switch is defective or incorrectly adjusted.
Error Code 146
NAO shuttle lever neutral switch normally closed failed
high
- Possible causes: The input line to terminal D-J of the
DCC is short circuited to 12 V or the neutral safety
- Tests: Check the input line to terminal D-J of the DCC
to detect any short circuit to 12 V. Check whether the
Error Code 147
NAO shuttle lever neutral switch normally closed failed
low
- Possible causes: : The input line to terminal D-J of the
DCC is short-circuited to earth or the neutral safety
- Tests: Check the input line to terminal D-J of the DCC
Issue 1
May 2001
Error Code 148

Attempt to reprogram with engine running.
- Possible cause: An attempt to download new software
while the engine was running.
- Tests: To download new software, the ignition key
switch must be on but the engine must be stopped.
Note: This is an additional safety as Wintest system normally does not allow reprogramming with
engine running.
Error Code 149
CAN bus off.
- Possible causes: Hardware error either in the TC or DCC
or in CAN network (3) wire linking the systems.
- Tests: Check the continuity of the CAN wires (3)
the terminals D - A, D - G and D - K of the TC. Replace
the TC and/or DCC.
Error Code 150
CAN bus off error
- Possible causes: Hardware error either in the TC or DCC
or in CAN network (3) wire linking the systems.
- Tests: Check the continuity of the CAN wires (3)
the terminals D - A, D - G and D - K of the TC. Replace
the TC and/or DCC.
Error Code 151
Gearbox output speed out of range
- Possible causes: Incorrect gearbox type selected
AG150/AG250 or incorrect constants loaded in TC.
- Tests: Check that gearbox type and selection is correct
using the "dcon" and "tcon" calibration procedure, check
the following parameters: "trAn" and "tPPr".
Error Code 152
Major fault on engine service hours counter
- Possible causes: Engine hours are saved in 3 different
places and if ever 1 value is different from the other 2
then the value saved in the 2 places will be copied over
the bad value. If ever all 3 locations have different
values then there is no majority and the true engine
hours are lost. Turning key OFF then ON will clear this
error.

Error Code 153
Parameter table fault
- Possible causes: An error occurred in saving a parameter to the DCC due to incorrect power down sequence,
or connector A removed prior to parameter being
updated. The system will eventual clear the error after
a couple of ignition cycles but the parameter being
saved may or may not have been saved and default
parameters will be used.
- Tests: Check "dcon" and "tcon" parameters.
Error Code 154
Normal CAN communication with TC has failed
- Possible causes: CAN connection problem between
TC and DCC. TC is off.
- Tests: Check the 3 CAN lines between TC terminals DA, D - G, D - K and DCC terminals D - A, D - B, D - K.
Check TC power supply lines to terminal B-J of the TC
and fuse including Park Lock temporisation relay, 30
Amps fuse located near the starter motor, 15 Amps
fuse located near the relay below the cab right hand side
console panel and fuse F12. Check TC itself.
Note: Computer Neutral Special = gearbox will not
go any more to neutral but PTO will be shut off,
4WD will be engaged and Diff.lock will be disengaged. The error code 154 will be displayed on the
DCC but the tractor can still move in the selected
gear until the clutch pedal is depressed (BOC
switch activated) or one of the gear lever is moved
to neutral position (neutral switch activated).
11B03.19
Error Code 157

Engine sensor off
- Possible causes: Engine oil pressure detected with no
engine speed due to failed speed sensor or failed wiring
to TC or TC is off (E154 should be displayed too).
- Tests: Check the resistance of the speed sensor and
continuity to TC input. Check TC power supply lines to
terminal B - J of the TC including Park Lock temporisation relay, 30 Amps fuse located near the starter motor,
15 Amps fuse located near the relay below the cab right
hand side console panel and fuse F12. Check TC itself.
Error Code 158
Armrest lever calibration error
- Possible causes: The calibration of the lever is incorrect
since it is out of the range of specified parameters.
- Tests: Enter DCC diagnostic mode (dAdc) and check
that the "ShrL" parameters are within the limits
. Neutral position : from 350 to 600
. Forward position : from 600 to 900
. Reverse position : from 100 to 400 (NAO lever type
only. ex: 8170)
If the calibration values are not within these limits,
check the lever potentiometer and its harness and
recalibrate the lever.
Error Code 155

Incorrect tractor code selected
- Tests: Download new parameter.
Error Code 156
Top of clutch stuck open (TOC)
- Possible causes: Circuit providing 12V to switch is
open or TOC switch is out of mechanical adjustment or
switch has failed.
- Tests: Check for 12V at red wire to TOC switch. If no
voltage check for open in the supply line to TOC switch.
Check TOC switch for out of adjustment condition or
failed switch.
Issue 1
May 2001

11B03.20
Error Code 159

Analog reverse/forward lever neutral switch failure in
neutral (EUROPE model)
- Possible causes: Neutral switch failure in left-hand
lever. The error comes from the two contacts of the
Neutral switch which are both open or closed when in
fact one should be open and the other closed when the
lever is in the Neutral position.
- Tests with Wintest: Compare the status of the shuttle
lever switches in Wintest when changing the lever
position.
If the Wintest result does not correspond to the position
of the lever, check that contacts are not stuck; check
the switch harness Neutral to the DCC for an open
circuit or short circuit. Replace the switch.
- Tests without Wintest: Enter the diagnostic mode of the
DCC (dbin) and check the status of the Neutral switch
with "LLnC" and "LLnO" :
Lever in the Neutral position: LLnC = 1 and LLnO = 0
Lever in the Forward or Reverse position: LLnC = 0 and
LLnO = 1
If the values do not correspond, check that contacts are
not stuck; check the Neutral switch harness to the DCC
for an open circuit or short circuit. Replace the switch.
Error Code 160

Analog reverse/forward lever neutral switch failure outside neutral (EUROPE model)
- Possible causes: Neutral switch failure in left-hand
lever is in the Forward or Reverse position.
- Tests with Wintest: Compare the status of the shuttle
position
with "LLnC" and "LLnO" :
Lever in the Neutral position: LLnC = 1 and LLnO = 0
Lever in the Forward or Reverse position: LLnC = 0 and
LLnO = 1
Issue 1
May 2001
Error Code 161

Armrest lever neutral switch failure in neutral position
- Possible causes: Neutral switch failure in armrest
lever is in the Neutral position.
- Tests with Wintest: Compare the status of the armrest
position
with "rLnC" and "rLnO" :
Lever in the Neutral position: rLnC = 1 and rLnO = 0
Lever in the Forward position: rLnC = 0 and rLnO = 1
Lever in the Reverse position: rLnC = 0 and rLnO = 1
(NAO lever type only. ex: 8170)
11B03.21
Error Code 162

Armrest lever neutral switch failure in non neutral position
- Possible causes: Neutral switch failure in armrest
lever. The error comes from the 2 contacts of the
lever is in the Forward or Reverse position.
- Tests with Wintest: Compare the status of the armrest
position
with "rLnC" and "rLnO" :
Lever in the Neutral position: rLnC = 1 and rLnO = 0
Lever in the Forward position: rLnC = 0 and rLnO = 1
Lever in the Reverse position: rLnC = 0 and rLnO = 1
(NAO lever type only. ex: 8170)
Issue 1
May 2001
Electronic linkage - Description

Tractor with cab
11C01.1
11 C01 Description of electronic linkage
CONTENTS
A.
Description _________________________________
B.
Console _____________________________________
C.
Diagram ____________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

11C01.2

Tractor with cab
A . Description
The electronic linkage system (Fig. 1) is composed of
the following components:
- A control console (1)
- A digital or electronic calculator (2)
- A position sensor (3)
- A depth button (4)
- A Lifting / Working selector with neutral position (5)
- Two draft sensors (6)
- A wiring harness (7)
- An electro-hydraulic proportional control solenoid
valve (8)
- Four or six external control switches depending on
option (9)
- A 3 A fuse (10) fitted beneath the right-hand side of the
linkage control console
- A button for quick soil engagement (11) fitted on the
right-hand side of the control armrest.
Issue 2
1
May 2002
2001

Tractor with cab
11C01.3
10
3
11
B
E
A
F
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001

11C01.4

Tractor with cab
(1) Control console
(5) Selector
On the right-hand side inside the cab, it comprises:

- three potentiometers
- a push button
- five indicator lamps
This is located at the front of the control armrest. It

permits the selection of the Lifting, Lowering, Neutral
and Working functions.
(6) Draft sensors
(2) Digital ot electronic calculator

It is fitted on the right-hand side in the cab beneath the
linkage control console.
The calculator records the signals sent from the different
console controls and compares them with the signals
transmitted by the sensors. If the two signals have
different values, the calculator sends its own signals to
the coils of the lift control valve. This permits the raising
or lowering of the lifting arms until the values displayed
on the console equal those of the sensors.
When the tractor is working, corrections are constantly
carried out, permitting an optimal work quality.
Safety
In order to avoid the electronic system remaining active
when the engine is stopped, a safety system is installed.
When the ignition switch is turned on, the calculator
receives 12 volts from the switch. This lights the three
indicator lamps "I", "J" and "K".
"K" and "J" light up for 0.5 seconds.
"I" remains lit until an "engine running" signal is received
from the engine speed sensor and the Lifting / Lowering
selector is placed in the position 1 then Lowering 2.
Caution, turn knob "B" to 1 to control the position.
(3) Position sensor

The position sensor is fitted at the rear of the tractor, in
front of the right bearing of the linkage shaft. It is
connected to a cam fixed onto the shaft.
The sensor records the angular position of the linkage
arm and sends the information to the electronic linkage
calculator.
(4) Tillage height and depth adjustment

button
This is located at the rear of the control armrest.
Issue 2
1
May 2002
2001
These two sensors are fitted to the shaft of the lower

arms of the hitch linkage. They transform the forces
applied to the hitch linkage during tillage into signals.
These are then transmitted to the ELC calculator.
(7) Electrical harness linking the various

components
(8) Electro-hydraulic solenoid valve
The electrohydraulic spool valve is fixed with the auxiliary
spool valves.
Its function is to regulate the oil flow to lift or lower the
lifting arms according to the signals sent by the ELC to
the two solenoid valves. The spool valve is fitted to the
high pressure (high flow rate) hydraulic circuit.
(9) External control switches

These are fixed on the wings or in the cab depending on
the specifications. Their aim is to simplify the hitching of
certain equipment by allowing the operator to control
the height of the implement.
These switches can be used if the control console is
activated and the Lifting / Neutral / Lowering selector is
in the neutral or lowering position. For safety reasons,
the linkage controls in the cab are automatically isolated
when the external buttons are being used.
To regain control of the linkage on the control console,
it is necessary to turn the selector "E" to the "Lifting"
position.

Tractor with cab
11C01.5
(10) Fuses
7.5 Amp fuse for battery + 12 V
- it is located above the batteries and protects battery
+ 12 V to the ELC
25 Amp fuse for battery + 12 V AC
- it is located in the fuse box and protects all tractor +
12 V AC supplies
3 Amp fuse for battery + 12 V AC (10)
- it is located under the linkage control console and
protects the + 12 V AC supply to the ELC.
(11) Quick soil engagement

It is located on the right-hand side of the armrest and
during its use it cancels the command of the depth
button.
The quick soil engagement only functions when the
selector (5) is in the Working position.
Issue 1
May 2001

Tractor with cab
11C01.6
JA
Fig. 2
B . Console
List of controls
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
Height / depth adjustment

Function selector (Draft, Intermix, Position)
Maximum lift limiter (high position adjustment)
Adjustment of manual and automatic lowering
speed and locked position (padlock symbol) or
automatic control
Lifting / Working selector with Neutral position
Button for the Transport Damper
Issue 1
May 2001
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
(K)
(L)
Lifting arms lifting indicator lamp

Lifting arms lowering indicator lamp
Console locking and error diagnostic indicator lamp
Transport Damper indicator lamp
Lifting arms lifting / lowering automatic control
indicator lamp
Quick soil engagement button

Tractor with cab
Description of controls
A. Height / depth adjustment potentiometer
The potentiometer "A" must be used to adjust the depth
(or height) of the implement after a selection has been
made on function selector "B".
In position control, the potentiometer travel is maximum.
The maximum high position is slightly higher when
using the external controls instead of potentiometer "A".
A floating position can be obtained by positioning
potentiometer "A" on position 9. In this case, the Lowering
indicator lamp remains lit.
B. Function selector potentiometer (Draft /

Intermix / Position)
This potentiometer must be adjusted in relation to the
work being carried out:
- Position control: used with transported implements
- Draft control: used with soil penetrating implements
(rarely 100% control).
- Intermix: used with soil penetrating implements, in
order to control the maximum force while keeping a
regular depth (most commonly used position for
ploughing, subsoiling, etc.).
C. High position potentiometer

This potentiometer is used to adjust the maximum
height of the lifting arm.
When the switch "E" is toggled to the Lifting position, the
lifting arm raises until it reaches the adjustment value
selected on the high position potentiometer "C".
D. Lowering speed potentiometer

This potentiometer is used to adjust the Lowering
speed of the implement according to its weight and
when switch "E" is in the Working position.
The potentiometer functions in the following three
modes:
- Locked position: when the potentiometer is in the
maximum anti-clockwise position, the lowering of the
linkage is impossible (transport safety function).
11C01.7
- Automatic speed position (yellow sector): when the

potentiometer is in the maximum position, the speed
is automatically adjusted according to the weight of
the implement (measured by the draft sensors in the
high position) and the forward speed of the tractor
(measured by the forward speed sensor connected to
the Autotronic or to the TC units, depending on the
version).
When the automatic speed mode is selected, the "K"
indicator lamp is lit.
- Manual speed position (red sector): when the
potentiometer is in the red sector, the operator adjusts
the lowering speed in relation to the weight of the
implement.
E. Lifting / Working / Neutral selector
This switch allows work to be carried out in the following
modes:
- Lifting position: the implement raises until it attains
the maximum position as selected by potentiometer
"C".
- Neutral position: the implement is locked in its position.
This position must not be used for the work phase.
- Working position: the implement lowers until it reaches
the position selected by the depth potentiometer "A"
and the function selector potentiometer "B".
- Note: On starting or after having used the external
controls, the switch "E" must be toggled to the
Lifting position in order to activate the system.
F. Selector button for the Transport Damper
This button must be pressed once when switch "E" is in
the Lifting position in order to be activated. In this case,
each time that switch "E" is placed in the Lifting position,
the ELC sends current to the coils of the lift control valve
in order to keep the implement stable, whatever the
speed of the tractor.
The system is automatically disengaged when switch
"E" is in the Neutral or Working position.
The indicator lamp "J" is lit whenever the system is in the
active Transport position.
To deactivate this function, place the lifting arms in the
Lifting position and press the button "F" once.
Issue 1
May 2001

11C01.8

Tractor with cab
G - H. Lifting arms lifting and lowering indicator

lamps
The indicator lamps are lit at the same time as the
solenoid valves receive the current and indicate the
correct functioning of the system.
Their status changes continually when the linkage is
used in Draft and Slippage control.
I - J - K. Indicator lamps for corresponding

functions
L. Quick soil engagement button

Place selector "E" in the Working position. Press and
maintain the switch "L" to activate quick soil engagement.
The commands given by potentiometers "A" and "B" are
cancelled and the implement penetrates the soil more
rapidly. Release switch "L" and the linkage assumes its
working position as given by the potentiometers "A" and
"B".
Issue 1
May 2001

Tractor with cab
11C01.9
C . Diagram
Description
The electrical circuit is made up of the following elements:
1. Ignition switch
2. Linkage control console lighting
3. Battery
4. Radar (if fitted)
5. Onboard computer (if fitted)
6. Engine speed sensor (Autotronic or TC speed
output)
7. Forward speed sensor (Autotronic or TC speed
output)
8. Lift control valve
9. Left draft sensor
10. Right draft sensor
11. Position sensor
12. External control buttons
13. External control buttons
14. 3rd set of external controls for automatic coupling
15. Linkage control console
16. Lifting / Working selector with Neutral position
17. Quick soil engagement button
18. Electronic linkage calculator
19. Depth / height potentiometer
Issue 1
May 2001

11C01.10

Tractor with cab
Identification of terminals and connectors

Item
Connector colour
Wires
Description
Pins
Wire colour
White
General supply to
connector C14
1. + battery
2. battery
3. + 12 V lighting
4. not used
5. + 12 V AC
Red
Black
Orange
Violet
Red
Black
CAN network
1. CAN lo
2. CAN hi
3. CAN ground
Brown
Green
Red
Black
Signals to 16-pin
diagnostics connector
1. CAN lo
2. CAN hi
3. CAN ground
4. drawn implement
signal
5. + 12 V AC
6. battery ground
7. not used
Brown
Green
White
Violet
1. Wheel speed signal

2. Slippage control signal
3. Engine speed signal
4. Radar speed signal
5. Radar supply (+ 12 V
AC)
6. not used
7. PTO speed signal
Violet
Orange
Brown
White
Grey
1. Wheel speed signal

4. Radar presence (+ 12
V AC)
5. PTO speed signal
Violet
Brown
White
Grey
Black
Black
Speed signals for

Datatronic
Speed signals
Black
Black
Not used
Not used
Pink
Pink
Brown
Lower solenoid valve

supply
1. + 6 V for control
2. Ground
Red
Red / White
Black
Lift solenoid valve supply
1. + 6 V for control
2. Ground
Light green
Red / White
Grey
Left draft sensor
1. Ground
2. Sensor signal
3. + 9.5 V from calculator
Black / White
Yellow
Brown /
Yellow
Grey
Right draft sensor
1. Ground
2. Sensor signal
Black / White
Yellow
Brown /
Yellow
Issue 1
May 2001

Tractor with cab
Item
Connector colour
Wires
Description
Pins
11C01.11
Wire colour
Black
Position sensor
1. Ground
2. Sensor signal
3. + 9 V from calculator
Black / White
Dark green
Brown / Yellow
Black
External controls
1. Lift control supply

2. Lift or Lower control
signal
3. Lower control supply
Yellow
Dark blue

signal
Yellow
Dark blue
K1
Black
External controls
Orange
Orange
Yellow
K2
K3
K4
K5
Black
Black
Black
Black
Round black
16
External controls

signal
External controls
External controls
External controls
Linkage control console
Issue 1
Dark blue
Orange

signal
Yellow
Dark blue

signal
Yellow
Dark blue

signal
Yellow
Dark blue
1. Intermix signal
3. Ground from calculator
4. Lowering speed signal
Yellow
Grey / Red
Black / Grey
Grey
Orange
Orange
Orange
May 2001

11C01.12
Item
L
Issue 1

Tractor with cab
Connector colour
Round black
Black
Black
Wires
16
10
Description
Linkage control console
Right armrest
Right armrest
May 2001
Pins
5. High position signal
6. Diagnostic LED supply
7. Automatic lowering
LED supply
8. Transport damper LED
supply
9. Transport damper ON /
OFF signal
10. Lift solenoid valve
supply
11. Lower solenoid valve
supply
12. Battery ground
13. D+ alternator
14. External linkage control
supply
15. External control signal
16. External lower control
supply
Wire colour
Dark green
Pink
Dark green
Brown
Dark green
Light green
Red
Black
Violet
Yellow
Dark blue
Orange
A. not involved with

linkage
B. not involved with
linkage
C. not involved with
linkage
D. not involved with
linkage
E. Depth control
F. Ground
G. + 9.5 V from calculator
H. Lifting / Working toggle
switch
1. Radar signal
2. Drawn implement
signal
3. Lifting / Neutral /
Working toggle switch
4. Ground
6. Depth control
7. Not used
White
Violet
Green
Blue
Orange
Pink
Green
Blue
Orange
White
Not used

Tractor with cab
Item
P
Connector colour Wires

Black
55
Description
ELC connector
Issue 1
11C01.13
Pins
1. Sensors ground
2. Sensors supply 9.5 V
4. Slippage control signal
5. Not used
6. + 12 V AC
7. Position sensor signal
8. Depth potentiometer
signal
9. Battery ground
10. Battery + 12 V
11. Not used
12. Lighting + 12 V
13. Automatic lowering
indicator lamp
14. CAN H (linked to 15)
15. CAN H
16. Engine running signal
17. Not used
18. Not used
19. Lower coil supply
20. Linkage console
ground
21. Signal for mounting
Load Sensing
22. Ground
24. Theoretical forward
speed signal
25. Right force signal
26. Intermix
27. Lowering speed
28. External Lift / Lower
controls
29. Not used
30. Not used
31. Not used
32. Transport damper
indicator lamp
33. CAN L (linked to 34)
34. CAN L
35. CAN network ground
36. Not used
37. Not used
38. Not used
39. Console 9.5 V supply
Wire colour
-
May 2001

11C01.14
Item
P
Issue 1

Tractor with cab
Connector colour Wires

Black
Black
55
Description
ELC connector
Closed centre lift control

valve
May 2001
Pins
40. Not used
41. Ground
42. Ground
43. Left draft signal
44. High position signal
45. Battery ground
46. Lifting / Neutral /
Lowering selector
47. Battery + 12 V
48. Not used
49. Diagnostics indicator
lamp
50. Not used
51. Transport damper
switch
52. Not used
53. Coils ground
54. Not used
55. Lift coil supply
1. Ground
2. Signal or lack of signal
of the presence of the
closed centre lift
control valve
Wire colour
-
Orange
Grey / Black
Electronics Linkage
Tractor with cab
11C01.15
14
16
K4
K2
13
55
K3
12
17
15
K1
19
L
11
I
10
H
9
G
P
E
18
7
6
D
5
4
C
B
B
Q
A
2
1
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 3
Electronic linkage - Auto-diagnostics

Tractor with cab
11C02.1
11 C02 Linkage auto-diagnostics
CONTENTS
A.
Operation ___________________________________
Issue 1
May 2001

Tractor with cab
11C02.2
A . Operation
The electronic linkage calculator is capable of detecting
certain faults in the wiring harness or lifting components.
Code
Fault
When a fault is identified, the driver is informed by an

error code on display I on the linkage console.
The first figure of the code indicates the severity level of
the fault ( 1 = major, 2 = medium, 3 = minor ).
Reaction of the system
Action required
1-1
Lift or Lower solenoid valvel

disconnected
Stops supplying the lift

control valve.
No lift authorised
Cut supply. Repair fault.

Re-supply and reactivate
the system.
1-2
Short circuit on Lift solenoid valve
Idem
Idem
1-3
Short circuit on Lower solenoid valve
Idem
Idem
1-5
Problem on external controls
Idem
Idem
1-6
Supply exceeds 18 V
Idem
Idem
1-7
Short circuit on 9.5 V line
Idem
Idem
1-8
Problem on Lifting / Neutral /

Lowering selector
Idem
Idem
2-2
Problem on position sensor
Linkage console locked
Repair the fault. Reset

the console by toggling
Lifting / Neutral /
Lowering selector to Lift
2-3
Problem on depth / height adjustment

potentiometer
Idem
Idem
2-4
Problem on high position

potentiometer
Idem
Idem
Issue 1
May 2001

Tractor with cab
Code
Fault
Reaction of the system
11C02.3
Action required
2-7
Supply less than 10 V
Idem
Idem
3-1
Problem on right draft sensor
The system operates but

the diagnostics indicator
lamp flashes.
Idem
3-2
Problem on left draft sensor
Idem
Idem
3-3
Problem on drawn implement draft

sensor (if option fitted)
Idem
Idem
3-4
Problem on lowering speed

potentiometer

lamp flashes.
The automatic lowering
speed is selected.
Idem
3-6
Problem on function selector

potentiometer (Draft, Intermix,
Position)

lamp flashes.
Idem
3-8
Tractor parameters are lost
Selection of defaut AA
parameters pertaining to
the transmission calculator.
The electronic linkage
control operates with the
wrong parameters. The
diagnostic lamp flashes.
Set calculator parameter

If the problem persist,
replace the calculator
Issue 21
2001
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - Description
11D01.1
11 D01 Datatronic
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Activating the basic data ________________________________
C.
The "Working" key ______________________________________
D.
The "Implement Width" key ______________________________
10
E.
The "Screen Contrast" key _______________________________
10
F.
The "Wheel Slip Control" key ____________________________
11
G.
"Memory" keys _________________________________________
12
H.
Comparative mode ______________________________________
16
I.
Flowmeter fitting _______________________________________
18
J.
Diagram ________________________________________________
24
Issue 1
May 2001
11D01.2
A . General
The Datatronic is a measurement instrument that permits the optimisation of tractor functions. It is located on
the right-hand side upright in the cab.
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Description of the Datatronic

Reading of data (Fig. 1)
(1) Liquid crystal display split in two parts
(2) Selection key for upper screen
(3) Selection key for lower screen
(4) Lower screen selection lamp
(5) Upper screen selection lamp
Key selection of four memories

Key to activate working position
Key to activate wheel slip control
Active wheel slip control signal lamp
Rotating knob for:
- selecting functions within the menus
- modifying contrast after pressing key (9)
- modifying tool width, cumulated values, time,
date after pressing key (6)
- modifying the title of the displayed memory
Function keys (Fig. 1)

(6) Keys to modify data to be stored
(7) Key to adjust implement width
(8) Reset cumulated and stored data
(9) Screen contrast key for both screens (1)
4 . PLOUGH
1
1000
9 8 0
A
n/min
RP/M
1 8 5 0
2
3
6
10
7
11
8
B
12
14
13
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2001
Description of menu functions and symbols
n/min
11D01.3
AREA: total area worked since last

reset or adjustment
ENGINE SPEED: instantaneous engine speed in rpm

DISTANCE : indicates work distance
covered
PTO : power take off speed in rpm
HOURS WORKED : total time with
engine speed above 1000 rpm
SPEED: actual forward speed of the

tractor
- if the speed is less than 1 kph, the Datatronic displays
0 kph,
- if the speed is between 1 kph and 20 kph, the radar
provides the information,
- if the speed is greater than 20 kph the forward speed
sensor provides the information.
The zero wheel slip function is automatically calibrated
each time that the tractor exceeds 20 kph.
WHEEL SLIP: actual wheel slip
COUNTER : totals and stores the

number of work units for an implement
(e.g. counting of bales)
COMPARE : displays and stores an instantaneous value

used as a reference.
After modification of tractor adjustments, compares
stored value with displayed value
TEMPERATURE : displays outside

temperature (sensor mounted beneath cab roof)
MAX SLIP: maximum limit of wheel

slip accepted by the operator
AREA/HR: instantaneous area

worked per hour
TIME : clock (H.M.S)
FUEL/HR: instantaneous hourly consumption

DATE : date of the day (D.M.Y)
FUEL/HECT: instantaneous hourly
consumption per unit of worked area
COUT/HECT: instantaneous cost per

unit of worked area
SERVICE : indicates number of hours

before next servicing. When the
number of hours have been reached or
exceeded, the maintenance function automatically displays every time the Datatronic is turned on.
FUEL: total consumption since last

reset or adjustment
Issue 1
May 2001

11D01.4
COST/L: local cost of one litre of fuel;
stored in memory
COST/HR: local hourly cost of operation; stored in memory
UNITS: Choice of measurement units

- metric = litre, hectare, metre, kilometre, currency
symbol: Franc
- USA = US gallon, acre, yard, mile, currency symbol:
Dollar
- UK = imperial gallon, acre, yard, mile, currency symbol: Pound Sterling
Depending on the country it is necessary to select the
appropriate units of measurement. The currency is only
provided as an indication, the Datatronic does not convert between currencies.
DUAL CTRL: option to automatically

handle plough furrows in and out motions on a semi-mounted plough.
REGL. DUAL : adjusts plough furrows

in and out motions for the Dual Control
option.
Issue 1
May 2001
TOWED IMPL: option to improve performance of towed implements
ADJUST TOW: adjusts parameters of

Towed Implement option
MENU
UNITS
Metric
USA
English
FUNCTION
11D01.5
RESET
OR
ADJUST
WORKING
POSITION
REQUIRED
DISPLAY
INCREMENT
MINIMUM
VALUE
DISPLAYED
COMPARE
MODE
Engine speed
Engine speed
rpm
no
no
10 rpm
100 rpm
yes
PTO
PTO speed
rpm
no
no
5 rpm
50 rpm
yes
SPEED
Forward speed
kph or mph
no
no
0.1 kph
1 km/h
yes
WHEEL SLIP
Actual wheel slip
no
no
1%
0%
yes
MAX. WHEEL SLIP
Wheel slip limit
yes
1%
0%
no
AREA/HR
Instantaneous area
worked per hour
hect/h or acre/h
no
yes
1.0 hect/h or 0.1 acre/h
yes
FUEL/HR
Instantaneous hourly
consumption
l/hr or gal/hr
no
no
0.5 litre/hr or 0.5 gal/hr
yes
FUEL/HECT
Instantaneous hourly
consumption per unit
of worked area
l/hr or gal/hr
no
yes
0.5 litre/hr or 0.5 gal/hr
yes
COST/HECT
Instantaneous cost per

unit of worked area
currency unit
no
yes
0.01
yes
FUEL
Fuel consumed
litre
yes or adjust
no
1 litre
no
AREA
Area worked
hect or acre
yes
yes
0.1 hectare or 0.1 acre
no
DISTANCE
Distance covered
metre or mile
yes
yes
1 metre or 1 mile
no
HOURS WORKED
Hours worked
hour
yes
yes
0.1 hour
no
COUNTER
Counter
none
yes
yes
no
COMPARE
Comparative mode
TEMPERATURE
Temperature
C ou F
no
no
1 C or 1 F
-35 C or -31 F
no
Issue 1
May 2001

11D01.6
MENU
FUNCTION
UNITS
Metric
USA
English
RESET
OR
ADJUST
WORKING
POSITION
REQUIRED
DISPLAY
INCREMENT
MINIMUM
VALUE
DISPLAYED
COMPARE
MODE
HOUR
Hour
H.min.sec
yes
no
1 second
00.00.00
no
DATE
Date
J,M,A
yes
no
1 day
00.00.00
no
SERVICE
Service
Hour
yes; 250 hr or adjust
no
1 hour
no
COST/L
Cost of fuel
currency unit
adjust
no
0.01
no
COST/HR
Hourly cost
currency unit
adjust
no
0.01
no
UNITS
Choice of units
DUAL CTRL
Work screen
ADJUST DUAL
Adjustment of
semi-mounted implements
TOWED IMPLEMENT
Work screen
ADJUST TOWED IMPLEMENT
Adjustment of towed
implements
ICON
Implement width
adjust
no
0.1 metre or 0.1 yard
no
Metric, USA or UK
Metre or yard
Issue 1
May 2001
11D01.7
B . Activating the basic data

Adjusting the clock (Fig. 2)
FUEL USED
AREAWORKED
DISTANCE
HRS WORKED
COUNTER
COMP.MODE
EXT.TEMP.
TIME
DATE
SERVICE
FUEL/COST
COST/HOUR
METRIC/IMP
- Press key (2) or (3) to display the list of functions.

- Select TIME and press again key (2) or (3), the display
appears in the selected window with signal lamp (4) or
(5) lit.
- Press one of the keys (6) that correspond to the digit you
wish to modify, then turn knob (14) to change the digit.
Adjusting the date (Fig. 2)

- Using the function DATE, proceed in the same way in
order to adjust the clock date.
4 . PLOUGH
D
2 1 0 2 9 5
H
1 6 1 3 2 5
14
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2001

11D01.8
Entering the costs (Fig. 3)

Hourly cost
- Press key (2) or (3) to bring up the functions menu.
- Select COST/HR, then using button (14) again press
key (2) or (3), the display appears in the selected
window with indicator lamp (4) or (5) lit.
- Press one of the keys (6) corresponding to the digit you
wish to modify, then turn knob (14) to increase or
decrease the value of the selected digit. Carry out this
operation for each of the digits to be modified, taking the
decimal place into account.
Note: The hourly cost value must correspond to the
actual operating costs of the tractor.
FUEL USED
AREAWORKED
DISTANCE
HRS WORKED
COUNTER
COMP.MODE
EXT.TEMP.
TIME
DATE
SERVICE
FUEL/COST
COST/HOUR
METRIC/IMP
4 . PLOUGH
Cost of fuel per litre

- Proceed in the same way as when adjusting the hourly
cost, but this time select the COST/L function.
Note: COST/L is entered in relation to the cost of
fuel in each country.
/HR
200.00
H
1 6 1 3 2 5
Servicing (Fig. 2)
Adjustment of service to a period other than 250
hours:
. Proceed in the same way as with the hourly cost but by
first selecting the SERVICE function.
-The default servicing period is 250 hours:
. Press key (2) or (3) to display the list of functions
. Select SERVICE and press key (2) or (3) so that it
appears in the selected window with indicator lamp
(4) or (5) lit.
.Press and hold down the "Reset" key
. 250 hours is automatically displayed on screen.
Issue 1
May 2001
14
Fig. 3
11D01.9
C . The "Working" key (Fig. 4)

4 . PLOUGH
Once the "Working" function has been selected it must

be validated by one of three entries available so that the
Datatronic can calculate or indicate the selected values,
either the:
- MoveUp / MoveDown switch
- PTO speed signal
- or, signal from the 16-way connector (for example, for
towed implements).
1000
9 8 0
M
2.5
11
The "Working" function is active when diode (15) is lit

(Fig. 4).
15
The "Working" position acts upon the following functions
even when they are not displayed on the screen:
- AREA/HR
- FUEL/HECT
- COST/HECT
- AREA
- DISTANCE
- HOURS WORKED
- COUNTER
Fig. 4
Important: To calculate all the functions in relation

to area worked, remember to correctly adjust the
implement width.
Issue 1
May 2001

11D01.10
D . The "Implement Width" key (7)

(Fig. 5)
To calculate all functions in relation to the area worked,
it is necessary to adjust the implement width:
- Press IMPLEMENT WIDTH, the implement width is
displayed in the lower part of the screen.
- Press one of the keys (6) corresponding to the digit to
modify, then turn knob (14) to increase or decrease the
value. Carry this out for each digit to be modified, taking
into account the decimal place.
- Press on IMPLEMENT WIDTH again to return to the
original screen.
4 . PLOUGH
1000
9 8 0
14
2.5
6
7
Fig. 5
E . The "Screen Contrast" key (9)

(Fig. 6)
The screen contrast can be modified at any time:
- Press key (9), both indicator lamps (4) and (5) then light.
- Adjust the contrast by turning the knob (14).
- Press key (9) again to return to the original screen.
Note: Screen contrast may vary in relation to the
ambient temperature and lighting.
4 . PLOUGH
n/min
RP/M
1 8 5 0
n/min
RP/M
1 5 0 0
9
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2001
F . The "Wheel Slip Control" key
(Fig. 7)
Principle
- This mode of operation allows optimisation of the
tractors performance by avoiding excessive wheel
slip.
- In relation to the actual wheel slip, calculated by the
difference between the design speed provided by the
forward speed sensor and the actual speed provided by
the radar, the operator determines and displays the
limit of wheel slip that should not be exceeded during
the working session.
- As soon as actual wheel slip exceeds the wheel slip
limit determined by the operator, the Datatronic acts
upon the linkage and raises the implement as long as
the wheel slip exceeds this limit.
11D01.11
- Press any of the keys (6) to modify the digits and turn
knob (14) to increase or decrease the selected digit.
Carry out the same operation with the other digits to be
modified.
The wheel slip value must be greater than 5% of the
actual wheel slip in order to obtain efficient control.
- Press key (2) or (3) again to return to the original screen.
Activating "wheel slip control" function

- Press key (12) to activate wheel slip control, the
corresponding LED lights.
Adjustment of the wheel slip limit

- Select the two functions: WHEEL SLIP and MAX. SLIP
from the menu in order to display them on screen.
- Note the actual wheel slip displayed in the WHEEL
SLIP half screen in order to determine the actual wheel
slip value.
- Press key (2) or (3) corresponding to the MAX. SLIP
function.
4 . PLOUGH
ENGINE RPM
PTO
FWD SPEED
WHEEL SLIP
SLIP LIMIT
AREA/HOUR
FUEL/HOUR
FUEL/AREA
COST/AREA
FUEL USED
AREAWORKED
DISTANCE
n/min
RP/M
1 8 5 0
2 5
5
6
12
14
13
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2001

11D01.12
Fonctionnement
- When the actual percentage of slippage exceeds the
limit of slip fixed by the operator, LED (13) corresponding to the ACTIVE SLIP CONTROL button, lights.
- At the same time, the linkage rises and the LED lights.
- As the traction load reduces, the slip value drops until
it reaches the limit set by the operator.
- As soon as the actual wheel slip is less than the slip
limit, LED (13) and the MoveUp LED go off, the
MoveDown LED lights and the linkage lowers until the
implement reaches its initial position.
- The wheel slippage control acts in exactly the same
manner as an operator who is constantly modifying the
adjustment of the height / depth control on the linkage
console.
1 . SEED DRILL
2 . SEMOIR.
3 . SEMOIR.
41.8 HA
4 . SEMOIR.
41.8 HA
132.3 L
HA
41.8132.3
L H
L 6.0
132.3 6.0
H KM
123.7
H
6.0123.5
KM
KM2.5 M M
123.5 2.5
5 >999<
2.5 5 M
>999<
5 >999<
ON1ON21 321432 43 4
ON
ON 1 2 3 4
Fig. 8
G . "Memory" keys
The Datatronic allows working with four independent
memories (Fig. 8)
The functions taken into account are:
. the total worked area
. the quantity of fuel consumed
. the total work time
. the total distance run
. the implement width
. the counter
These four memories can be used at any time.
Issue 1
May 2001
11D01.13
Creating a memory entry (Fig. 9)

-
Turn on the ignition switch.

Press the MEMORY key (10)
The presently active memory is displayed on screen.
Select the desired memory by pressing the keys (6) that
correspond to memories 1, 2, 3 or 4. The selected
number is highlighted.
Press key (2) to display the memory contents in the
upper screen with its number highlighted.
Press key (2) again to move the highlight to the first
letter of the memory name.
Turn knob (14) to modify the highlighted letter.
With the first letter now correctly displayed, press key
(2) again to place the highlight on the second letter.
Repeat this operation in order to enter all the letters in
the name (8 characters maximum).
Once the correct name has been entered, press key
(10) to store the new memory name.
Adjust the implement width (see D) in the selected
memory.
Once the operation is completed, the memory is
correctly configured.
1 . SEED DRILL
41.8
132.3
6.0
123.7
2.5
5
4 . PLOUGH
HA
L
H
KM
M
41.8
132.3
6.0
123.7
2.5
5
>999<
ON 1 2 3 4
HA
L
H
KM
M
>999<
14
ON 1 2 3 4
10
Fig. 9
Issue 1
May 2001
11D01.14
To activate data recording in a memory (Fig.

10)
MEMORY OFF
- Only one memory can record data during a working

session.
- Press the MEMORY (10) key in order to select the
desired memory number and press one of keys (6)
corresponding to memory 1, 2, 3 or 4. The number of the
selected memory is highlighted.
- Press the MEMORY (10) key again. The memory name
and its number are displayed at the top of the screen
and the MEMORY (10) key is lit.
- Do not forget to enter the correct implement width.
- Press the WORKING POSITION (11) key to begin
recording working data (Fig. 4).
Note: By default, one of the four memories is
always active.
41.8
132.3
6.0
123.7
2.5
5
HA
L
H
KM
M
>999<
OFF 1 2 3 4
16
10
Fig. 11
To deactivate working data recording (Fig.

11)
- Press the MEMORY (10) key, then press key (16).
- OFF appears at the lower left corner of the screen.
- Press the MEMORY (10) key again to return to the initial
screen.
- MEMORY OFF appears at the top of the screen.
- All four memories are now deactivated.
1 . SEED DRILL
1000
9 8 0
n/min
RP/M
1 8 5 0
4 . PLOUGH
4 . PLOUGH
41.8
132.3
6.0
123.7
2.5
5
HA
L
H
KM
M
1000
9 8 0
n/min
>999<
ON 1 2 3 4
10
RP/M
1 8 5 0
10
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2001
11D01.15
To reset the data in one or more memories

(Fig. 12)
- Press the MEMORY (10) key, then select the number
of the memory you desire by pressing on one of keys
(6) that correspond to memory 1, 2, 3 or 4. The number
of the selected memory is highlighted.
- Press twice the RESET (8) key to reset the data.
- Press the MEMORY (10) key again to return to the initial
screen.
4 . PLOUGH
41.8
132.3
6.0
123.7
2.5
5
HA
L
H
KM
M
>999<
ON 1 2 3 4
8
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2001

11D01.16
H . Comparative mode
This mode of operation allows the tractors performance
to be optimised by comparing reference working values
to the new values that the operator varies and acts upon
while driving the tractor.
In relation to the new values obtained, the operator can
judge whether or not they improve the economic performance of the tractor.
If the new adjustments correspond to the operators
economic performance criteria, they can be retained.
The variables in this mode of operation are:
- engine speed
- PTO speed
- forward speed
- wheel slip
- cost / hectare
- fuel / hour
- fuel / hectare
FUEL USED
AREAWORKED
DISTANCE
HRS WORKED
COUNTER
COMP.MODE
EXT.TEMP.
TIME
DATE
SERVICE
FUEL/COST
COST/HOUR
METRIC/IMP
ENGINE RPM
PTO
FWD SPEED
WHEEL SLIP
SLIP LIMIT
AREA/HOUR
FUEL/HOUR
FUEL/AREA
COST/AREA
FUEL USED
AREAWORKED
DISTANCE
2
3
14
4 . PLOUGH
Starting comparative mode (Fig. 13)

- Press twice key (2) or (3) to display the function menu.
- Select COMPARE using knob (14).
- Press key (2) or (3) to display the comparative mode
menu.
- Select the function to be compared using knob (14)
- Press key (2) or (3) to confirm it and display the screen
showing the compared function.
Use (Fig. 13)

- The upper part of the screen displays the reference
value of the function when the operator selects it.
The lower part of the screen displays the value of the
function presently in use.
- Modify one or more of the conditions in order to
appreciate the gain obtained.
- If the gain obtained is satisfactory, the operator can
continue to use the new adjustment parameters for this
type of work.
- If the gain is not satisfactory, the operator modifies
again one or more of the parameters to obtain a
satisfactory gain.
Issue 1
May 2001
n/min
RP/M
1 8 5 0
n/min
RP/M
1 5 0 0
10
Fig. 13
11D01.17
To modify the REFERENCE VALUE

- Press the MEMORY (10) key if you wish to record a
different reference value during the working session.
ENGINE RPM
PTO
FWD SPEED
WHEEL SLIP
SLIP LIMIT
AREA/HOUR
FUEL/HOUR
FUEL/AREA
COST/AREA
FIN
To exit COMPARATIVE MODE (Fig. 14)

- Press key (2) or (3) to display the comparative mode.
- Select END.
- Press key (2) to return to the initial screen.
To load a reference function

- Proceed in the same way as when leaving comparative
mode but instead of exiting, select the function to be
used.
14
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2001
11D01.18
I . Flowmeter fitting (Figs. 15 - 20)

Parts list
(1) Flowmeter
- inlets:
. EA: decanting device inlet

. EA: leak return
- outlets: . A: to feed pump
. R: to tank
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Injectors
Filters
Injection pump
Tank return
Tank inlet
Cooler
(2) Decanting device

(3) Feed pump
8210 - 8220 Dynashift
8
2
Fig. 15
Issue 1
May 2001
Parts list
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Flowmeter
- inlets: . EA: decanting device inlet
. EA: leak return
. R: to tank
11D01.19
Injectors
Filters
Injection pump
Tank return
Tank inlet
Cooler

(3) Feed pump
8210 - 8220 Full Powershift
8
2
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2001
11D01.20
Parts list
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Flowmeter
- inlets:

. EA: leak return
. R: to tank
Injectors
Filters
Injection pump
Tank return
Tank inlet
Cooler

(3) Feed pump
8240 Dynashift
8
2
3
7
Issue 1
Fig. 17
May 2001
Parts list
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Flowmeter
- inlets:

. EA: leak return
. R: to tank
11D01.21
Injectors
Filters
Injection pump
Tank return
Tank inlet
Cooler

(3) Feed pump
8240 Full Powershift
9
1
8
2
Fig. 18
Issue 1
May 2001

11D01.22
Parts list
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Flowmeter
- inlets:

. EA: leak return
. R: to tank
Injectors
Filters
Injection pump
Tank return
Tank inlet
Cooler

(3) Feed pump
8250 Dynashift
8
2
Fig. 19
Issue 1
May 2001
Parts list
(1) Flowmeter
- inlets:

. EA: leak return
. R: to tank
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
11D01.23
Injectors
Filters
Injection pump
Tank return
Tank inlet
Cooler

(3) Feed pump
8250 - 8260 - 8270 - 8280 Full Powershift
1
8
2
Fig. 20
Issue 1
May 2001

11D01.24
J . Diagram
(1) Datatronic 2
(2) Connectors on Datatronic 2
1. Engine / radar programmable frequency output
2. PTO / design forward speed programmable
frequency output
3. Max. wheel slip frequency output
6. PTO input speed
7. Fuel output flowrate frequency input
8. Fuel return flowrate frequency input
9. Ground
10. + 9.5 V sensor supply
11. CAN network (low)
12. Not used
13. Not used
14. Design forward speed input
15. Ground
16. Towed implement working position information
input
17. Counter information input
18. Analog signal input
19. Not used
20. CAN network (high)
21. Not used
22. Not used
23. Ground
24. Radar signal input
25. Not used
26. Linkage position signal input
27. + 12 V after contact
28. Not used
29. Air temperature sensor
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Air temperature sensor

Radar
Flowmeter
Datatronic 2 supply (connector C14)
1. + 12 V battery
2. Chassis ground
3. + 12 V lighting
4. + engine running
5. + 12 V AC
(7) Linkage CAN network connection

3. CAN network (ground)
4. Towed implement working position input
5. Not used
6. Not used
7. Not used
Issue 1
May 2001
(8) Cab 16-way connector

1. + 12 V AC
2. Ground
3. Not used
4. Not used
5. Analog signal input
6. Ground
7. Counter input
8. Towed implement working position input
9. Engine / radar programmable frequency output
10. PTO / theoretical forward speed programmable
frequency output
11. + 9.5 V analog sensor supply
12. Not used
13. Not used
15. CAN network (ground)
(9) Linkage connection
1. Forward speed signal
2. Wheel slip instruction signal
5. Radar supply (+ 12 V AC)
6. Not used
7. PTO speed signal
Colour code
B
BE
BL
G
J
M
N
R
Ro
S
V
Vi
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
White
Beige
Blue
Grey
Yellow
Brown
Black
Red
Pink
Salmon
Green
Violet
C
F
= Light
= Dark
Fig. 21
11D01.25
10
20
29
19
11
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
3
7
11
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
6
10
14
16
6
7
1
3 4
7
1
4
3
5
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
4
5
3
5
1
4
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2001
Fig. 21
Datatronic 2 - Dual Control
11D02.1
11 D02 Front Dual Control
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Block diagram __________________________________________
C.
Description of the Adjustment screen _____________________
D.
Adjustments ____________________________________________
E.
Use ____________________________________________________
F.
Error codes _____________________________________________
G.
Assembly of the additional lever _________________________
Issue 1
May 2002

11D02.2
A . General
In addition to the basic electronic linkage functions, the
ELC calculator is allocated new functions such as Dual
Control.
With this system, when the front plough is to be used, it
is possible to lower the front plough in relation to the rear
and vice versa, depending on the selected mode (Furrow
start or Furrow end).
Since mid January 2001, this system is available on the
6200 and 8200 series with at least two electro-hydraulic
spool valves and the Joystick. It is however possible to
have a third electro-hydraulic spool valve controlled by an
additional lever.
The Dual Control can be used either manually via the
Joystick or additional lever, or automatically after having
entered data into the Datatronic.
The ELC calculator serves as an interface between the
control switches, the potentiometers, sensors,
Datatronic, solenoid valves, etc.
All this information transits via the BUS CAN, which cuts
out the need for a great deal of wiring.
Note:
- The calculator is the same model on all tractors
and can operate Rear Dual Control, Front Dual
Control and the TIC, but only one of these functions may be used at any one time. It is however
possible to have all three functions on the same
tractor.
Dual Control is available with the Joystick and therefore
two electro-hydraulic spool valves. In this case, one of
the two spool valves is used for the Dual function. The
manual control is carried out through action on the
Joystick along the red coloured Y axis.
If there is Front Dual Control then there is also Rear Dual
Control.
Issue 1
May 2002
11D02.3
B . Block diagram
With the front Dual Control, the rear implement enters the
earth at the precise spot where the forward implement
entered the ground.
To do this, the system needs to take into account all the
functions and parameters shown below, in order to
provide optimum operation.
+ 9,5 V
Lever
or Joystick
+ 9,5 V
Position sensor on
front lift control
system
E
BATTERY
L
C
+ 12 V
Solenoid valve
control system
+ 12 V
Spool valve
control valve
Ground
LED diagnostic on
solenoid valve
12 V +AC
Lift control external

button
CAN BUS
Engine speed
and forward speed,
Auto 3 to Dynashift
or TC to PowerShift
FRONT
DUAL
CONTROL
A
L
C
U
ACTIVATION
BUTTON
L
A
T
O
R
Potentiometers
and lift control switch
+ 9,5 V
CAN BUS
Issue 1
Datatronic
May 2002
11D02.4
Composition of the Front Dual Control system
Parts list (Fig. 1)

See section 11D01 - General
ELC calculator
- the calculator is the same on all models, only one
reference is available.
- this calculator allows parameterisation, see section
11C01 - Operation of the calculator.
Components of the Front Dual Control
- 12 V supply to the calculator.
Note:
- If the front external control button is pushed, the
Spool valve Management System (SMS) and the
rear lift are secured. To unlock them, press on the
Joystick activation switch and the lift control
switch (in lift raise position).
- If the rear external control button is pushed, only
the rear lift will be secured.
5
3
10
7
11
8
12
14
13
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2002

Datatronic
The Datatronic is the interface between the driver and the
calculator:
- on one hand, it allows initial adjustments to be made to
the Front Dual Control
- on the other hand, it controls the operation of the Front
Dual Control.
Communication between the calculator and the Datatronic
is carried out via the CAN BUS.
11D02.5
Parts list (Fig. 2)

(1) Datatronic
(2) Radar
(3) Engine and forward speed sensors
(4) Front lift position sensor
(5) Position sensor on control lever or Joystick controlling the Dual Control electro-hydraulic spool valve
(6) Draft sensor
(7) Dual Control electro-hydraulic spool valve
(8) Lift control electro-hydraulic spool valve
(9) ELC calculator
2
9
3
CAN
8
4
5
7
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002
11D02.6
C . Description of the Adjustment

screen
To find the Front Dual Control menu in the Datatronic,
enter the main menu (press key (2) or (3), select FRONT
ADJ. by turning knob (14), press key (2) or (3) to display
the menu (Fig. 3).
Adjustment of Front Dual Control (Fig. 4)

-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
:
:
:
:
:
Maximum height of front linkage

Maximum height of rear linkage
Maximum depth of front linkage
Maximum depth of rear linkage
Distance between the last front plough share and
the first rear share at the Furrow start phase
- 6 : Distance between the last front plough share and
the first rear share at the Furrow end phase
EXT.TEMP.
TIME
DATE
SERVICE
FUEL/COST
COST/HOUR
METRIC/IMP
JOYSTICK
MAX FLOW
KICK OUT
TRAILED
TRAIL. ADJ
DUAL CTRL
REAR ADJ
REAR CTRL
FRONT ADJ
FRONT CTRL
3
14
Fig. 3
Use of Front Dual Control (Fig. 5)

In the main menu: DUAL FRONT ADJ.
(1) High position of front implement, between 0 and 99
(2) High position of rear implement, between 0 and 99
(3) Rear implement raise or lower indicator lamp
(4) Console status
(5) Front Dual Control function status (in this case
active)
(6) Front implement raise or lower indicator lamp
Note: Each time the tractor is started, the system is

de-activated. OFF appears instead of ON and the
padlock symbol appears. To unlock the system,
place the lift control switch in the Raise position.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
M
N
5
2
6
1
50
50
ON
10
5
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 4

D . Adjustments
Front lift control position sensor adjustment
- The Dual Control is OFF and the front lift must be raised
to the maximum
- To adjust the potentiometer (Hall effect type sensor), it
is necessary to separate the link from the sensor, to
turn the sensor until the maximum value of between
200 and 210 can be read on the Datatronic.
- Then retighten the link / sensor fixing.
11D02.7
J : Length between the front and rear programmable in

the Furrow start phase (value between 0 and 100).
K : Length between the front and rear stored in the
Furrow start phase (value between 0 and 100).
L : Length between the front and rear programmable in
the Furrow end phase (value between 0 and 100).
Note: Values I, J, K and L between 0 and 100 are

points and each point equals 25 cm, therefore the
distance may be between 0 cm and 250 m.
Datatronic adjustment of Front Dual Control parameters (Fig. 6)

- To access this menu, see C.
- To adjust the Front Dual Control parameters, it must be
de-activated and in the OFF position.
- To move from one symbol to the other, use the arrows
(6.1) and (6.2).
- To store, press the STORE key (10).
A : Height of the front implement stored (value between
0 and 255)
B : Actual height of the front implement (value between
0 and 255)
C : Height of the rear implement stored (value between
0 and 255)
D : Actual height of the rear implement (value between
0 and 255)
E : Depth of the front implement stored (value between
0 and 255)
F : Actual depth of the front implement (value between
0 and 255)
G : Depth of the rear implement stored (value between
0 and 255)
H : Actual depth of the rear implement (value between
0 and 255)
I : Length between the front and rear and stored in the
Furrow start phase (value between 0 and 100).
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
M
N
5
2
10
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002

11D02.8

Furrow start
E . Use
- The screen shown in Fig. 7 is displayed to the driver
when he uses the Front Dual Control.
- To activate the Front Dual Control, press key 6 - 5 (OFF/
ON transition on Datatronic).
- To remove the padlock symbol on the Datatronic
screen, move the lift control switch to the Raise
position.
- When the system detects a Transport / Work transition

via movement of the lift control switch, the sequence
is:
. Lowering of the front lift to the pre-adjusted depth
. Lowering of the rear lift when the distance travelled by
the tractor equals the programmed distance (front
implement and rear implement).
Safety delay
Working mode
- When Front Dual Control is in Working mode, the front
lift reproduces the movements of the rear lift.
- In this mode, the position of the front lift can be
corrected by manual action on the Joystick or the
additional lever.
- This correction is stored in this mode as long as the
function is ON and the mode has not been changed.
Example:
Value
. Furrow start mode
25
. Working mode (action on lever)
35
. Headland furrow mode
235
. then Furrow start mode again
25
In this case, the Datatronic will not have stored the
Working mode height, only the height pre-programmed
in the Datatronic (the above values are the values given
by the Datatronic to the driver).
- When one of the Furrow start or Furrow end phases has

begun, a countdown of 8 seconds begins; if the Working mode or Headland furrow mode has not been
reached after this time, the system is forced into the
position that it should be in, i.e., Working mode with
Dual and ELC adjustments.
Furrow end
- In Working mode, if the system detects a Work /
Transport transition, the system goes into Furrow end
mode.
- The sequence that is then carried out is:
. The front lift raises to the pre-adjusted height
. When the distance travelled by the tractor is identical to
the programmed distance between front implement
and rear implement, the rear lift raises to the preadjusted height set in the Datatronic.
Note: When the front implement is raised, the rear
implement can continue to work normally with the
pre-defined settings.
Headland furrow mode

- The front lift and the rear lift are raised to the maximum
of the pre-adjusted height. The height can be adjusted
using the lever.
- But this setting will not be stored and the next time that
Headland furrow mode is used the tool will raise to the
pre-adjusted height.
50
50
ON
6
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2002
11D02.9
F . Error codes
Front Dual Control errors that may appear
on the Datatronic screen
E-60 :
E-61 :
E-62 :
E-63 :
E-65 :
E-66 :
E-67 :
E-68 :
E-69 :
Position sensor disconnected

Position sensor height limit exceeded
Position sensor depth limit exceeded
Manual lever sensor disconnected
Depth limit by the manual lever sensor exceeded
Raise solenoid valve disconnected
Lower solenoid valve disconnected
Raise solenoid valve short-circuited
Lower solenoid valve short-circuited
For errors relating to solenoid valves, see section 11H01

- Description of the SMS system.
G . Assembly of the additional lever

See section 11D04G
Issue 1
May 2002
11D03.1
11 D03 Dual Control for Semi-mounted implement
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Block diagram __________________________________________
C.
Description of the Adjustment screen _____________________
D.
Adjustments ____________________________________________
E.
Use ____________________________________________________
F.
Error codes _____________________________________________
11
G.
Assembly of the additional lever _________________________
11
Issue 1
May 2002

11D03.2
A . General
In addition to the basic electronic linkage functions, the
ELC calculator is allocated new functions such as
handling Rear Dual Control.
With this system, when the driver uses a semi-mounted
plough, he only has to operate the lift.
For example, during the Furrow start phase, press on the
lift control switch:
the lift lowers and the wheel partially lowers
then the wheel support completely lowers when it
reaches the level of the furrow start of the first plough
share (automatically).
Since mid January 2001, this system is available on the
6200 and 8200 series with at least two electro-hydraulic
spool valves and the Joystick. It is however possible to
additional lever.
Before January 2001, the Rear Dual Control was offered
with:
- an additional electric lever
- an electro-hydraulic spool valve controlled by 17 bar
pressure. Nowadays, the spool valves use 22 bar
pressure.
The Dual Control can be used either manually via the
Joystick or additional lever, or automatically after having
entered data into the Datatronic.
The calculator serves as an interface between the control
switches, potentiometers, sensors, Datatronic, spool
valves, etc.
All this information is transmitted via a CAN BUS which
cuts off the need for a great deal of wiring.
Note: The calculator is the same on all tractors and

can control the Rear Dual Control, Front Dual Control and TIC. But only one of the three functions can
be used at any one time. Nevertheless, it is possible
to have all three systems on the same tractor.
If there is Front Dual Control then there is also Rear
Dual Control.
Issue 1
May 2002
11D03.3
For optimum operation of the system, it is necessary to

take into account all these functions and parameters.
B . Block diagram
The Rear Dual Control is generally used on Semi-mounted
ploughs in order to enter both parts of the plough on the
same line, to produce headland furrows that are as short
as possible.
Lever
or Joystick
+ 9,5 V
+ 9,5 V
Position sensor on
semi-mounted plough
E
BATTERY
L
C
+ 12 V
Solenoid valve
control system
+ 12 V
Spool valve
control valve
Ground
LED diagnostic on
solenoid valve
12 V +AC
Lift control external

button
CAN BUS
Engine speed
and forward speed,
Auto 3 to Dynashift
or TC to PowerShift
REAR
DUAL
CONTROL
A
L
C
U
ACTIVATION
BUTTON
L
A
T
O
R
Potentiometers
and lift control
switch
+ 9,5 V
CAN BUS
Issue 1
Datatronic
May 2002
11D03.4
Composition of the Rear Dual Control system

ELC calculator
- The calculator is the same on all models, only one
reference is available.
- This calculator allows parameterisation, see section
11C01- Operation of the calculator.
Components of the Rear Dual Control
- 12 V supply to the calculator.
Note:
- If the front external control button is pushed, the
Spool valve Management System (SMS) and the
rear lift are secured. To unlock them, press on the
activation switch on the Joystick and the lift control switch (in lift raise position).
- If the rear external control button is pushed, only
the rear lift will be secured
5
3
10
7
11
8
12
14
13
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2002

Datatronic
The Datatronic is the interface between the driver and the
calculator:
- on one hand, it permits initial adjustments to be made
to the Rear Dual Control
- on the other, it controls the operation of the Rear Dual
Control.
Communication between the calculator and the Datatronic
is carried out via the CAN BUS.
11D03.5
Parts list (Fig. 2)

(1) Datatronic
(2) Radar
(3) Engine and forward speed sensors
(4) Rear implement position sensor
(5) Position sensor on control lever or Joystick controlling the Dual Control electro-hydraulic spool valve
(6) Draft sensor
(7) Dual Control electro-hydraulic spool valve
(8) Lift control electro-hydraulic spool valve
(9) ELC calculator
2
9
3
BUS CAN
8
4
5
7
6
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002

11D03.6
C . Description of the Adjustment

screen
EXT.TEMP.
TIME
DATE
SERVICE
FUEL/COST
COST/HOUR
METRIC/IMP
JOYSTICK
MAX FLOW
KICK OUT
TRAILED
TRAIL. ADJ
DUAL CTRL
REAR ADJJ
REAR CTRL
FRONT ADJ
FRONT CTRL
To find the Rear Dual Control menu in the Datatronic,

enter the main menu (press key (2) or (3), select REAR
ADJ. by turning knob (14), press key (2) or (3) to display
the menu (Fig. 3).
Adjustment of Rear Dual Control (Fig. 4)

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
: High lift stored position

: High wheel support stored position
: Actual lift height
: Actual height of wheel support
: Stored lift depth
: Actual lift depth
: Stored depth of wheel support
: Actual depth of wheel support
: Stored distance between lift and wheel support in
furrow start phase
: Actual distance between lift and wheel support
: Partial height stored in furrow start phase
: Actual partial height
: Distance stored between lift and wheel support in
Furrow end phase
: Actual distance between lift and wheel support
: Partial height stored Furrow end phase
: Actual height of wheel support
3
14
Fig. 3
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Rear Dual Control use screen (Fig. 5)

In the main DUAL menu, select REAR CTRL.
(1) Position of wheel support
(2) to (6)
Correction of plough length in relation to type of
headland furrow (point headland furrow, straight
headland furrow)
(3) Automatic phase control indicator
(4) Plough length time delay
(5) Dual Control Stop / Start function. Each time the
tractor is started 5 is de-activated for safety reasons.
Fig. 4
4 . CHARRUE
D MY
2 1 0 2 9 5
Note: Each time the tractor is started, the system is

de-activated. OFF appears instead of ON and the
padlock symbol appears. To unlock the system,
place the lift control switch in the Raise position.
25
-10
-10
ON
4
5
14
Fig. 5
Issue 1
May 2002

D . Adjustments
11D03.7
Adjustment of the position sensor on the

rear implement (Fig. 6)
- With the Rear Dual Control OFF, vary the height of the
implement for manual adjustment:
ram completely retracted with a clearance of 4 mm,
the Datatronic indicates 23 points on the scale from 0
to 255 and the sensor must provide 0.94 V for a supply
of 9.59 V.
ram completely extended with a clearance of 11 mm,
the Datatronic indicates 215 points on the scale from
0 to 255 and the sensor must provide 3.25 V for a
supply of 9.59 V. The clearance is the space between
the sensor, here on the rear implement, and the
chassis of the same implement.
A = 11 mm
B = 04 mm
Fig. 6
Adjustment of Dual Control parameters in

the Datatronic (Fig. 7)
A to D: Horizontality when the tractor lift and the plough
wheel support are in high position:
- set the plough horizontal in the high position by using the
following controls:
set selector "Q" to lower position and height/depth
adjustment knob to high position
select manual control of the spool valve for the wheel
support part
- store the values using key (10) for each of the windows
concerned (see Description of Screen for correspondence with the following):
A : 0 to 255
B : 0 to 255
C : 0 to 255
D : 0 to 255
E to H: Horizontality when the tractor lift and of the plough
wheel support are in low position:
- set the lift and the wheel support horizontally in the low
position and if possible at the mechanical stop position,
using the following controls:
set selector "Q" to lower position and height / depth
adjustment knob "R"
select manual control of the spool valve for the wheel
support part
- store the values by pressing key (10) for each of the
windows concerned (see Description of Screen for
correspondence with the following):
E : 0 to 255
F : 0 to 255
G : 0 to 255
H : 0 to 255.
1234
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2002

11D03.8
I to L: Adjusting the plough length and the partial lowering

of the wheel support at the furrow start:
- to obtain the correct adjustment, proceed in consecutive steps until the optimum adjustment is obtained by
selecting functions one after the other using keys 6.1,
6.2 and knob (14). Then store the values using key (10)
(see Description of Screen for correspondence with the
following):
I : 0 to 100
J : 0 to 100
K : 0 to 100
L : 0 to 100
M to P: Adjusting the plough length and partial lifting for
the furrow end:
- to obtain the correct adjustment, proceed in the same
way as I to L
M : 0 to 255
N : 0 to 255
O : 0 to 255
P : 0 to 255
Note:
- The adjustment phases I to P are extremely important and affect the performance of the system.
- The values I, J, K and L between 0 and 100 are points
and each point equals 25 cm, therefore the distance
may be between 0 cm and 250 m.
Furrow start and furrow end adjustments

(Fig. 8)
- The reference numbers (16) (17) indicate the correction
of the plough length applicable to the next furrow start
and furrow end.
- To modify the values, select the window using keys 6.1
or 6.2 and turn knob (14).
Examples:
correction (- 0) at the start of the field (straight
headland furrow)
correction (+ 15) at the end of the field (point headland
furrow).
The values (+) are placed at each end of field after lifting
the plough (on the headland).
In the Working position, the reference numbers (16) (17)
are automatically activated at the end of the field.
Note: If the field is rectangular, the correction
values for reference numbers (16) (17) must be set
to zero.
Issue 1
May 2002
-15
-15
-0
-0
16
17
+15
ON
2
14
Fig. 8
11D03.9
E . Use
4 - PLOUGH
- Each time the tractor is started, for safety reasons, OFF

appears at the bottom left of the screen.
- Each time it is necessary, re-activate it using key 6.5
in the REAR CTRL. menu so that ON appears (Fig. 9)
D MY
2 1 0 2 9 5
25
Working mode
-10
- When Rear Dual Control is in this mode, the plough

wheel support reproduces the movements of the lift
while respecting amplitude and the phase of the lift
movements.
- It is possible to correct the position of the wheel support
by activating the manual spool valve control.
-10
ON
Furrow end (Fig. 10)
Fig. 9
- As soon as a Work / Transport transition is carried out,

the system changes to furrow end mode.
- The following steps then succeed each other:
(24): the lift raises and the wheel support raises partially
to reach the adjusted and stored value.
(25) and (26): the lift keeps on raising, the plough wheel
support does not move as long as the equivalent
distance travelled by the tractor is less than the adjusted and stored value called furrow start plough
length.
20
21
22
23
25
26
24
X
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2002

11D03.10
Headland Furrow Mode

- The lift is in the maximum high position (value set by the
high position potentiometer), the plough wheel support
is at the stored high position.
Furrow start (Fig. 10)

- When the system detects a Work / Transport transition
through action on the lift control switch, the sequence
is:
(21): the lift lowers and the wheel support lowers
partially to pre-adjusted height.
(22) and (23): when the distance travelled by the
tractor is equal to the programmed distance (first
ploughshare to wheel support), the wheel support
lowers completely and the plough operates fully.
Plough length
- This data represents a value from the distance of the
tractor rear wheel axis to the plough wheel support axis.
- This adjustment affects the time delay for the partial
lowering or raising of the plough wheel support.
Optimum adjustment
- Adjustment obtained by search for best plough length
values providing entry into the earth of the first and last
share on a same furrow start line.
Safety time delay

- When one of the Furrow start or Furrow end phases has
begun, a countdown of 8 seconds begins; if the Working mode or Headland furrow mode has not been
reached after this time, the system is forced into the
position that it should be in, i.e., Working mode with
Dual and ELC adjustments.
Issue 1
May 2002
11D03.11
F . Error codes
Dual Control error codes that may appear
on the Datatronic screen
E-60 :
E-61 :
E-62 :
E-63 :
E-65 :
E-66 :
E-67 :
E-68 :
E-69 :
Position sensor disconnected

Position sensor height limit exceeded
Position sensor depth limit exceeded
Manual lever sensor disconnected
Depth limit by the manual lever sensor exceeded
Raise solenoid valve disconnected
Lower solenoid valve disconnected
Raise solenoid valve short-circuited
Lower solenoid valve short-circuited
For errors relating to solenoid valves, see section 11H01

- Description of the SMS system.
G . Assembly of the additional lever

See section 11D04 G.
Issue 1
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
11D04.1
11 D04 TIC for semi-mounted implements
CONTENTS
A.
General ________________________________________________
B.
Block diagram __________________________________________
C.
Description of the adjustment screen _____________________
D.
Adjustments ____________________________________________
E.
Using __________________________________________________
12
F.
Error codes _____________________________________________
12
G.
Lever and electro-hydraulic spool valve assembly __________
13
Issue 1
May 2002

11D04.2
Issue 1
Datatronic 2 - TIC
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
11D04.3
A . General
The TIC (Trailed Implement Control) is a digital control
system ensuring the automatic steering of trailed implements through the ELC console. The information required
for system operation is gathered by the sensors. This
information is processed by Datatronic. The ELC calculator ensures the control of the trailed implement through
an electro-hydraulic spool valve.
Since January 2001, this system is available for 6200
and 8200 tractors with at least two electro-hydraulic
spool valves and a joystick. However, it is possible to
extra lever. The wheel slip control comes with the basic
equipment, the drawbar draft control is an option available on 8200 tractors but not on 6200.
Before January 2001, the TIC was already proposed
(only on 8200) with:
- an extra electronic lever
- an electro-hydraulic spool valve controlled with 17 bar
pressure whereas today the spool valve is controlled
under 22 bar pressure.
Electronic information circulates through a CAN bus
system, which helps reduce the number of wires.
Note: The calculator is the same for all tractors; it

can manage the rear and front Dual Controls and the
TIC, but only one of these three functions can be
used at a time.
However, it is perfectly possible to have all three
functions on the same tractor.
Issue 1
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
11D04.4
B . Block Diagram
To allow the control of the trailed implement according to
the effort provided by the tractor, different protection
components and sensors should be taken into account,
so that an optimal operation of the system is achieved.
+ 9,5 V
+ 9,5 V
E
BATTERY
Lever or
Joystick
Position sensor on
Semi-mounted
implement
+ 12 V
Solenoid valve
management system
+ 12 V
Control valve of
spool valve
L
C
TIC
C
+ 9, 5 V
Draft sensor on
the drawbar
A
L
Masse
Diagnostic LED on the

solenoid valve
C
ACTIVATION
BUTTON
12 V +AC
External linkage
button
BUS CAN
Engine speed and

Auto 3
Forward speed
+ 9,5 V
Potentiometers and
ELC switch
L
A
T
O
R
BUS CAN
Issue 1
May 2002
Datatronic
Datatronic 2 - TIC
Description of the TIC System
ELC calculator
- The calculator is the same for all, only one reference is
available.
- This calculator allows parameter setting. See section
11F05 for calculator operation.
TIC components
- The extra lever fed with +9.5V supply
- The position sensor fitted on the implement
Note:
- If the Front linkage external control button is
pressed, the SMS and the rear linkage are blocked.
To release it, press the activation switch of the
Joystick and the ELC switch (in raise position).
- If the rear linkage controls are pressed, only the
rear linkage will be blocked.
11D04.5
(2) Upper screen selection key

(3) Lower screen selection key
(4) Lower screen selector light
(5) Upper screen selector light
Function keys
(6) Keys for modifying data to be stored
(7) Work width adjusting key
(8) Reset cumulated values and stored data key
(9) Screen Contrast key for the two half screens (1)
(10) Four memories recall key
(11) Lower screen selector light
(12) Wheel slip control selector light
(13) Active wheel slip control indicator lamp
(14) Rotary knob for:
- selecting functions from the menu
- modifying contrast after pressing key (9)
- modifying implement width, cumulated values,
date, hour etc. after pressing keys (6)
- modifying displayed memory title
Parts list (Fig.1)

Reading of data
(1) A two-part liquid crystal display screen
Issue 1
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
11D04.6
5
3
10
7
11
8
12
14
13
Parts list
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 1
Datatronic 2 - TIC
Datatronic
The ELC calculator is connected with Datatronic through
the CAN bus.
Datatronic receives information from the TIC system
(error codes, position sensor on the extra implement lever)
and sends radar speed, wheel slip required value. Datatronic
allows to adjust the implement height to its maximum and
minimum, and to activate the TIC function.
11D04.7
Parts list (Fig. 2)

(1) Datatronic
(2) Radar
(3) Engine speed and forward speed sensors
(4) TIC draft sensor
(5) Inductive position sensor
(6) Position sensor on the control lever
(7) ELC draft sensor
(8) TIC electro-hydraulic spool valve
(9) ELC calculator
2
9
3
CAN
4
6
8
7
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002

11D04.8
Datatronic 2 - TIC
C . Description of the screen

To access the TIC menu (Fig. 3) press on (2) or (3). In the
main menu select TRAIL ADJ after scrolling down with
the wheel (14). Click again on (2) or (3) and another
window appears (Fig. 4).
A : Height of the memorised implement
B : Present height of the implement
C : Depth of the memorised implement
D : Present depth of the implement
COST / HOUR
UNITS
TRAILED
TRAIL. ADJ
.... DUAL ....
FRONT CTRL
REAR CTRL
FRONT ADJ
REAR ADJ
.. JOYSTICK ..
Once the parameters have been set (see D), press (2)
or (3) and another window appears; it will be used for
work (Fig.5) settings.
(1) indicates (Transport or Work) function
(2) indicates position of the implement in %:
- Low position = 0 %
- High position = 99 %
(3) indicates whether the implement is raised or lowered
(4) the padlock indicates whether the ELC console is
locked or open
(5) indicates whether the TIC function is ON or OFF
Fig. 3
0
0
0
0
Note : Every time the tractor starts, the system is

deactivated, OFF appears instead of ON, and the
padlock is displayed. To unlock, press the ELC
switch to raise.
C
D
5
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
1
2
50
5
ON
5
4
Issue 1
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
D . Settings
11D04.9
Setting the position sensor on the rear implement (Fig. 6)

The position sensor mounted on the implement should
have a gap of 11 mm in the high position and 4 mm in the
low position.
The calculator feeds the sensor with a electric supply of
9.5 V DC
- 4 mm should correspond to 23 on the Datatronic
adjustment screen, 0.94 V on the sensor output
- 11 mm corresponds to 215 on the Datatronic adjustment screen (0 to 255), 3.25 V on the sensor output
- if the sensor is disconnected, the display shows 0.
A = 11 mm
B = 04 mm
Fig. 6
Sensor
disconnected
Sensor
adjustment
limit
Sensor
in low
position
Sensor
in raise
position
Sensor
adjustment
limit
23
215
250
255
Setting the TIC parameters in Datatronic

(Fig. 7)
Important: The TIC should be turned OFF.
- To access this menu, see C.
- Start the tractor, press Datatronic key (2) or (3) to come
to the main menu.
- Select TRAIL ADJ in the main menu using the scrolling
wheel (14) then validate with (2) or (3).
- With the 6.1 key you can switch from B to D and with
the 6.2 key from D to B.
- Once on B, adjust the desired maximum height with the
manual control lever. Press key (10) to store the value
of B appearing in the window A.
- Then, pass on to C and adjust the desired maximum
work depth.
217
217
37
37
A : Programmed height
B : Present height
C : Programmed depth
D : Present depth
A
B
C
D
Fig. 7
Issue 1
May 2002

11D04.10
Datatronic 2 - TIC
The draft sensor

This sensor is different from the one used for the lift
function. This 150 KN sensor is fed with 9.5 V. It supplies
a signal equal to 50% of the supply voltage at rest, 25%
of this voltage when it is subjected to a traction of 150 KN
and 75% of this voltage when subject to a compression
of 150 KN (Fig. 8).
Parts list (Fig. 8)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
Bar
Pin
Screw
Pin
Ring
Bearing
Screw
Plate
Retainer
Shackle
Washer
Pin
Lever
Cotter pin
Clevis
Bar
Screw
Ring
Lock plate
Screw
Washer
Draft sensor
Connector
Screw
Plate
Guard
Screw
Guard
Clevis
Washer
Issue 1
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
11D04.11
25
2
23
24
21
22
18
3
27
28
29
30
12
26
5
13
7
8
19
4
9
1
21
14
15
20
16
10
11
17
Parts list
Issue 1
Fig. 8
May 2002

11D04.12
Datatronic 2 - TIC
E . Using
The user interface consists of a Datatronic half-screen.
Each time the tractor is stopped, the TIC function is
disabled for safety reasons, and OFF is displayed on the
screen.
To activate the function, press the ELC switch to raise
position, then on TIC user screen press the 6-5 key (Fig.
9).
50
ON
Working mode
- when the TIC is in this mode, the height of the
implement can be adjusted with the lift height adjustment potentiometer situated beside the armrest.
- To change the implement from the working mode to
headland furrow mode, press the lift button.
With the draft sensor

- The system adjusts the implement position as any
traditional lift system i.e. draft sensor, lowering speed
and wheel slip control.
Headland furrow mode

- In this mode the implement is raised to the maximum.
E-69 : Lower solenoid valve short-circuited

E-70 : Implement sensor disconnected
E-71 : Upper limit of implement position sensor exceeded
E-72 : Lower limit of implement position sensor exceeded
E-73 : Spool valve control sensor disconnected
E-74 : Upper limit of spool valve control sensor exceeded
E-75 : Lower limit of spool valve control sensor exceeded
E-76 : Draft sensor disconnected
E-77 : Upper or lower limit of the draft sensor exceeded
Faults due to solenoid valves are dealt with in chapter
11H01 - Description of the SMS.
F . Error codes
TIC errors that may be displayed on the
Datatronic screen
E-60 : Position sensor disconnected
E-61 : Upper limit of implement position sensor
ceeded
E-62 : Lower limit of implement position sensor
ceeded
E-63 : Spool valve control sensor disconnected
E-64 : Upper limit of spool valve control sensor
ceeded
E-65 : Lower limit of spool valve control sensor
ceeded
E-66 : Raise solenoid valve disconnected
E-67 : Lower solenoid valve disconnected
E-68 : Raise solenoid valve short-circuited
Issue 1
Fig. 9
exex-
exex-
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
11D04.13
G . Lever and electro-hydraulic spool

valve assembly
3
2
23
1 . Lever assembly
19
- It is possible to control the front / rear Dual Control and

the TIC through an extra lever even though you have a
joystick or compulsorily if you have bought your tractor
before February 2001.
- In principle the lever controls a potentiometer that
informs the ELC calculator of its position.
- The voltage signal from the potentiometer allows the
ELC calculator to control the electro-hydraulic spool
valve. Therefore, it is necessary to set the potentiometer
correctly to obtain optimal performance of the spool
valve.
- The neutral point is adjusted with Wintest (see section
11F05) :
. neutral point: 144 points (voltage between signal and
ground is = 5.16 V)
. lower limit reached: 20 points (voltage between
signal and ground is = 0.84 V)
. upper limit reached: 240 points (voltage between
. sensor disconnected: 252 points (voltage between
- The digital values corresponding to sensor data and to
the information controlling the spool valve are available
through the CAN network.
DUAL
30
11
13
31
7
12
6
35
14
51
50
16
33
47
10
34
42
11
46
28
27
10
12
45
46
49
4
48
44
52
38
43
Note: The electro-hydraulic spool valves are different for the periods before and after February 2001
(see below)
- Rexroth MP18 type before January 2001, current
adjustments to be carried out with Wintest (see
section11F05)
- Bosch SB23 type after January 2001, valve parameter settings to be carried out with Wintest (see
section 11F07)
21
24
32
25
53
22
41
25
17
For assembly and disassembly of this lever with:

- two mechanical spool valves plus an electro-hydraulic
spool valve (Fig. 10).
37
26
36
18
17
15
29
39
40
Issue 1
May 2002
27
Fig. 10

11D04.14
For assembly and disassembly of this lever with:

- two mechanical spool valves plus an electro-hydraulic spool valve (Fig. 11).
- Overall assembled view (Fig. 12)
3
2
23
19
DUAL
Datatronic 2 - TIC
30
35
11
13
31
1
12
14
6
8
46
16
51
50
33
47
10
34
42
11
12
28
27
10
31
13
46
45
12
4
44
48
49
52
38
21
24
32
25
53
28
27
43
22
41
25
17
37
26
36
18
17
15
29
39
40
27
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
Issue 1
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
2. Assembly of the Dual Control electrohydraulic spool valves before January 2001
- Rexroth MP18
11D04.15
Fig. 13
- Electro-hydraulic spool valves

. uncouple the spool valves by removing the three nuts
on part 2 (Fig. 14).
. depending on the number of spool valves stacked, the
threaded rods are modified.
. put the electro-hydraulic spool valve at the bottom of
the stack and lift the whole. Make sure to put the setwashers.
. tightening torque 27 Nm (see section 9D01).
- The control circuit for this spool valve is electrohydraulic, therefore it is necessary to have :
. electric current supplied by two terminals: black
connector for lifting (output 18 (+) and 54 (-) of the ELC,
and a brown connector for lowering (output 36 (+) and
17 (-) of the ELC)
. hydraulic pressure, in this case a 17 bar pressure
taken from the priority block outlet (see 9B01 or Fig.
15 and 17) and by connecting the priority block to the
hose with a T union (Fig. 13).
Parts list
(1) Priority block
(2) Electro-hydraulic spool valve
(3) T union
Issue 1
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
11D04.16
Spool valves disassembly
x3
3
6
7
11
12
16
15
14
13
17
5
10
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 14
Datatronic 2 - TIC
17 bar pressure connector for

Dual Control - Before
January 2001
18
17
19
20
11D04.17
14
15
16
11
3
18
1
2
23
22
21
12
9
6
12
13
10
8
7
7
21
22
23
15
12
10
12
10
19
18
16
20
17
21
26
13
11
25
24
7
10
12
10
13
6
8
9
13
10
9
13
14
Issue 1
13
Fig. 15
May 2002

11D04.18
Issue 1
Datatronic 2 - TIC
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
3. Assembly of the spool valves since January 2001 - Bosch SB23
- The differences compared to Rexroth are the following:
. a different electrical diagram (Fig. 16 and 17), different
connections, use of the CAN bus
. spool valve control hydraulic supply is now 22 bar
instead of 17 bar. To obtain this pressure it was
necessary to install an end plate containing a pressure
reducing valve, which by dividing the main hydraulic
flow allows to obtain a 22 bar pressure to control
electro-hydraulic spool valves. This end plate also
contains a solenoid valve that blocks oil flow in case
a problem is detected by the ELC and the internal
management system of the spool valves.
Parts list of the electrical diagram SB 23 (Fig. 16)
(20) SB23 Dual Control spool valve
(21) Manual control lever
(22) Position sensor fitted on the implement
(24) Position sensor
(25) Front linkage external controls
Parts list of the different connections

R - Control connections of the external linkage
- channels : 5
- colour : Black with red mark
- pins :
1 : raise signal (violet wire)
2 : not used (pink wire)
3 : lower signal (yellow wire)
4 : ground (orange wire)
5 : electric supply + 12 V after contact (red wire)
11D04.19
U - Position sensor and ELC connector intermediary

cable
- channels : 3
- colour : Black
- pins :
1 : ground (blue wire)
2 : implement position signal (black wire)
3 : + 9.5 V (brown wire)
V - Draft sensor connections
- channels : 3
- colour : Black
- pins :
1 : ground (black/white wire)
2 : draft sensor signal (blue wire)
3 : + 9.5 V (brown/yellow wire)
W - Front position sensor and ELC connector inter
mediary cable
- channels : 3
- colour : Black
- pins :
2 : output voltage (black wire)
3 : electric supply (brown wire)
X - Dual Control spool valve connector
- channels : 4
- colour : Black
- pins :
1 : 12 V after contact (red wire)
2 : CAN low (brown wire)
3 : CAN high (green wire)
4 : ground (black wire)
S - Control lever connections

- channels : 3
- colour : Black
- pins :
2 : lever sensor signal (pink wire)
T - Position sensor cable connection
- channels : 3
- colour : Black
- pins :
2 : implement position signal (dark green wire)
Issue 1
May 2002

11D04.20
Datatronic 2 - TIC
Parts list of the Rexroth spool valves before January

2001 (Fig. 17)
(1) Dual Control manual control lever
(2) Position sensor fitted on the implement
(4) Dual Control spool valve
Parts list of the different connections

R - Dual Lowering solenoid valve
- channels : 2
- colour : Brown
- pins :
1 : lower solenoid valve(red wire)
2 : lower solenoid valve code (black wire)
R (bis) - Dual Raise solenoid valve

- channels : 2
- colour : Black
- pins :
1 : raise solenoid valve(red wire)
2 : lower solenoid valve code (black wire)
S - Dual manual lever sensor
- channels : 3
- colour : Black
- pins :
2 : lever sensor signal (pink wire)
T - Position sensor cable connections
- channels : 3
- colour : Black
- pins :
2 : implement position signal (dark green wire)
U - Position sensor and ELC connector intermediary
cable
- channels : 3
- colour : Black
- pins :
2 : implement position signal (black wire)
3 : + 9.5 V (brown wire)
V - Draft sensor connector
- channels : 3
- colour : Black
- pins :
2 : draft sensor signal (blue wire)
Issue 1
May 2002
Datatronic 2 - TIC
11D04.21
14
16
N
BF
K3
15
K5
19
13
12
K1
17
L
M/J
N
VF
11
N/B
Ro
10
H
G
9
G
VC
F
J
R/B
E
Vi
7
M
Ro
D
5
Vi
O
M
B
4
C
Q
23
B
N/G
O
A
N
R
O
21
S
N
N
R
M
R bis
R
Issue 1
22
20
Vi
R
2
1
Fig. 16
May 2002
SERIES 6200 / 8200 TRACTORS
Electronics - Wintest
11F01.1
11 F01 Wintest General
CONTENTS
A.
General Description ______________________________
B.
Installing Wintest on the PC's hard drive _____________
C.
Updating Wintest software _________________________
D.
Connections _______________________________________
E.
Access to the Wintest main menu ___________________
F.
Wintest version ____________________________________
13
Issue 2
May 2002

11F01.2
Issue 2
May 2002
A . General - Description
Wintest software allows to:
- program Autotronic 2, Autotronic 3, TC, DCC and
Datatronic during part replacement, or following the
issue of a new and improved program
- change the parameters of Autotronic 2, Autotronic 3,
TC, DCC, ELC, SMS system and Datatronic according
to the options fitted to the tractor and its features
- display the operation of Autotronic 2, Autotronic 3, TC,
DCC and Datatronic and linkage and to detect any
malfunction.
Its use with each device is described in the following
sections:
- Autotronic 2 ................................................. 11 F02
- Autotronic 3 ................................................. 11 F03
- TC / DCC ..................................................... 11 F04
- Electronic linkage ........................................ 11 F05
- Datatronic .................................................... 11 F06
- SMS ............................................................ 11 F07
- Autotronic 3 towards Autotronic Kit ............. 11 F08
- Autotronic kit towards Autotronic 3 .............. 11 F09
11F01.3
Tested PCs
- Toshiba Satellite 2520 CDT
. AMD K6 microprocessor
. 300 MHz
. 64 MB SDRAM
. 4.1 GB hard drive
. CD-ROM and floppy drive
. 12.1 inch colour monitor
. Windows 98 OS
. Optional: 12V cigar lighter power supply
- Dell Latitude Cpi
. Pentium II microprocessor
. 233 MHz
. 32 MB SDRAM, extendable to 128 MB
. 4.1 GB hard drive
. 12.1 inch colour monitor
. Windows 95 or Windows 98 OS
. Optional: 12V cigar lighter power supply
Both these PCs have been tested with the Wintest
software. It is recommended that you check the guarantee and breakdown service conditions with your local
dealer.
To use Wintest, it is necessary to have:

- A locally supplied PC with the following minimum
configuration:
. A 386 microprocessor
. 25 MHz
. 4 MB SDRAM minimum
. 10 MB hard drive minimum
. preferably a colour screen
. Windows 3.11, Windows 95 or Windows 98 OS
. 12V cigar lighter power supply (for portables).
The PC must be fitted with the following service tools
(supplied by Beauvais):
- a CAN BOX interface, ref. 3378243 M1
- a type A harness, ref. 3378244 M1, with round 4-pin
connector for tractors not having the 16-pin connector
at the rear right hand side of the cab. To be connected
on harness, ref. 3378245 M1.
- a type B harness, ref. 3378245 M1, with round 16-pin
connector for tractors having the 16-pin connector at
the rear right hand side of the cab
- the latest version of Wintest comprising a CD.
- an extension wire (10 cm) between the PC and the
CAN BOX, ref. 3378246M1.
Note: The CAN BOX interface and Wintest software

cannot be supplied separately.
Issue 2
May 2002

11F01.4
B . Installing Wintest on the PCs

hard drive
To use Wintest it is first necessary to install it on the hard
drive from the diskettes provided.
Wintest runs only under Windows 3.11, Windows 95 or
Windows 98. Depending on the version of the OS, the
installation operations differ slightly (details follow).
Installation procedure
- Boot the PC so that the desktop is displayed.
Windows 3.11
. Click on the "File" menu
. Click on "Run"
Windows 95 or 98
. Click on the "Start" menu
. Click on "Run"
Insert the CD in your CD-Rom reader

- click on "Start" then on "Run"
- Type: d:\DISK1\Setup (d = your CD-Rom reader address)
- Click on "OK"
- Select your language
- Click on "OK"
- Follow the Wintest installation instructions
- Type your name and your company name in capitals,
then type the Wintest serial number (serial number
given on CD box)
- Follow the Wintest installation instructions
Wintest is automatically installed on your PC in:
- c:\programf\wintest
If you wish to rapidly access Wintest, create a shortcut
and place it on the desktop.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F01.5
C . Updating Wintest software

Updating is necessary:
- when a new version of the program is available for one
or more electronic devices
- when improvements to one or more functions have
been made via their parameters
- when improvements have been made to the Wintest
software.
- After having started the Wintest software, click on
"Options", then "Update"
Wintest
Test
Options
Update
Help
GO!
Help
WGE-1
The following screen is displayed:
Update
Insert update disk in drive A
OK
Yes
Cancel
WGE-2
Insert the update diskette in the drive

Click on "OK"
Wait approximately 1 minute
Check the Wintest version number (see F).
Issue 2
May 2002
11F01.6
D. Connections
- Connect the CAN BOX interface to the laptop.

- According to version, connect the 16 pins or 4 pins
connector to the tractor.
Important :
- Never directly connect the PC to the 16-pin connector without the CAN BOX interface
- Battery voltage must be 12.5V minimum.
Oprations could be done according to the

connection
Connection
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Auto 2
Programing
Setting
Test
Setting parameters
Test
Setting parameters
Test
Auto 3
TC/DCC
Connectors used
E on Auto 2 and C33
Programming
Program
Setting parameters Setting parameter
Test
Test
Power Shuttle
manal calibration
Cab 16 pin
connector
E and C33 and C35
Connection
Linkage
Data 2
SMS
Connectors used
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Setting parameters
Test
Fig. 3
Test
Issue 2
Programming
Joystick
calibration
Setting parameters Setting valve
Test
parameters
Test
-
May 2002
Cab 16 pin
connector
E and C33 and C35
11F01.7
Connection with type A harness, ref. 33780244 M1

3378246M1
3378243M1
3378245M1
CAN BOX
AGCO
Ref : 3 378 243 M1
E
3378244M1
3714779M1
C33
Fig. 1
Connection with type B harness, ref. 3378245 M1

3378245M1
3378246M1
3378243M1
CAN BOX
AGCO
Ref : 3 378 243 M1
Fig. 2
Issue 2
May 2002
11F01.8
Linkage test on tractor without 16 pin connector in the cab
3378246M1
3378243M1
CAN BOX
AGCO
Ref : 3 378 243 M1
3378245M1
C35
3715767M1
C33
3714779M1
3378244M1
Fig. 3
Issue 2
May 2002
11F01.9
E . Accessing the Wintest main

menu
Wintest
File
With the Wintest window visible on the Windows desktop:

- Turn the ignition key on.
- Double click on the Wintest icon.
Edit
Display
WIN
TEST
Wintest
1 objects
652 octets
bytes
WGE-3
The following screen is displayed :
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
WinTest V1.10.06
B00AA03001456
M. ROCHEFOUCAULT
AGCO
TC
D CC
TCU 0 92
TCU 0 93
D ATA 2
AUTO3
KIT AUT OTRO NIC
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.14
2.14
R
C
D 001208
B11
X32
WGE-4
- Wintest software version ........ V1.10.06

- Serial number and name of Wintest owner
- Calculators software include in Wintest
- Click on "GO" to access the Wintest main menu
- Click on
to return to the Windows desktop and exit Wintest
- Click on "Help" to access the Wintest Help files.
Issue 2
May 2002

11F01.10
Setup
Auto
Auto 32Kit Autotronic
Auto 3
OK
Autotronic 2
TC-DCC
Cancel
Autotronic 3
Help
Datatronic 2
Linkage
Joystick
WGE-5
Depending on the type of tractor, select the type of

transmission controller :
- Kit Autotronic 3 towards Autotronic
- Autotronic 2
- TC / DCC
- Autotronic 3
Then according to the other functions available, select:
- Datatronic 2
- Linkage
- Joystick
When the transmission controller and the various options
are selected, click on "OK".
Note: The description of Wintest operation with the

different calculators is explained in the following
sections.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F01.11
One or more error messages may be displayed:
Programming TC
Check the connections
Turn the ignition key
Retry
Cancel
- Turn the ignition key on and check the connections

between the PC and the 16-pin connector, then click on
"Retry"
CAN error
Initialization of CAN BOX not
possible
OK
WGE-7
- Check the connections between the PC and the 16-pin
connector, then click on "OK".
Issue 2
May 2002
11F01.12
- If there are no error messages, the main menu is

displayed.
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Tester
OK
Help
DATA : D960500
TCU : R
9:25
NUM
WGE-8
Note: A status bar at the bottom of the screen

displays the versions of the electronic devices fitted
to the tractor.
Example:
Issue 2
Datatronic ..............
Autotronic 2 ...........
DATA: D960500
TCU: R
May 2002
11F01.13
F . Wintest version
- Click on "Help", then "About Wintest" to display the
software version and the programmes in the various
electronic devices.
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Index
How to use Help
About Wintest...
Help
WGE-9
Wintest
Option
Tester
Aide
GO!
H elp
Abou t teste
r
WinTest
WinTest Version 18016
C opyright ' 1995. A llR ights R eserved
TC
D CC
D A TA 2
TC U 092
TC U 093
A U TO 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.08
2.13
D 001208
R
C
B 09
M . R O C H EFO U C A U LT.
A G C O FR A N C E B eauvais
B 00AA 03001456
OK
WGE-10
-
Wintest software version .................

TC version .......................................
DCC version ....................................
Datatronic 2 version .........................
Autotronic 2 version .........................
Autotronic 3 version .........................
V1.10.06
2.14
2.14
D001208
R or C
B11
- Software serial number and name of Wintest CD

owner.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.1
11 F02 Autotronic 2 with Wintest
CONTENTS
A.
Using Autotronic 2 with Wintest ____________________
B.
Programming and Setting parameters _______________
C.
Setting parameters _________________________________
19
D.
Tests and diagnostics

- "Safety" function _________________________________
31
- "Gearbox" function _______________________________
33
- "Front axle" function ______________________________
37
- "Differential lock" function _________________________
40
- "Power take-off" function __________________________
43
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.2
Autotronic 2 status
A. Using Autotronic 2 with Wintest

Description
The Wintest software allows to program and set the
parameters of Autotronic 2 as well as to display and
detect faults within its various functions.
To carry out testing with Wintest, the status of a
function on the tractor is modified and compared with
status displayed on the screen of the PC.
- If the icon corresponding to the function is displayed
in reverse video, this indicates that 12V is present.
in normal video, this indicates that 12V is absent.
- If no there is no change whatsoever, check the
connectors, the ignition switch and test the wiring
corresponding to the relevant function.
Where the function being tested seems defective, click
on the icon that represents it:
- a window is displayed showing the identity of the
connector terminals and the colour of the
corresponding wires.
Example: The icon corresponding to the Hare /
Tortoise range switch has been selected. Information
concerning it is displayed in a window:
J1 32 = Switch J1 of Autotronic 3, terminal No. 32,
wire colour white.
The Autotronic 2 operates via 12 main states. The

status of the Autotronic 2 is displayed at the bottom of
each test screen.
List of statuses
- TCU 0:
Autotronic in standby mode
- TCU 1:
No program
- TCU 2:
17 bar pressure lower than 9.5 bar and
engine speed lower than 200 rpm
- TCU 3:
17 bar pressure lower than 9.5 bar and
engine speed lower than 200 rpm for at
least 6 seconds
- TCU 4:
17 bar pressure correct and engine speed
above 200 rpm
- TCU 5:
17 bar pressure drop for less than
4 seconds
- TCU 6:
engine speed down for less than
0.5 seconds
- TCU 7:
engine speed down for greater than
0.5 seconds
- TCU 8:
not used
- TCU 9 -10: incorrect parameters
- TCU 11: battery voltage above 16 V
Wintest
Test
Testing the gearbox
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
4.1
0.0 Amps
Off
0.0 Amps
Off
100 %
280
280
Range
switch
Err : 0
Connector: J1-32
Colour: White
Off
Switch black --> Range switched
OK
TCU 2
EV1
On
EV2
Off
OK
Help
WA2-1
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.3
B. Programming and Setting

parameters
Programming
- Turn the ignition key on and start the engine to carry
out this operation. The voltage must be at least 12.5 V.
- The programming of the Autotronic 2 is necessary:
. when the former Autotronic 2 has been replaced by
a new one
. when a new program becomes available to improve
the product
Note: It is necessary to set the Autotronic
2 parameters again after programming.
Wintest recognises two versions of the Autotronic 2
program:
- TCU R: for tractors without a proportional PTO
solenoid valve
- TCU C: for tractors with a proportional PTO solenoid
valve
The choice of program is made according to the AA
parameter code. If Wintest cannot read the AA code,
the following screen is displayed.
Enter the AA code according the tractor type (see
parameter table).
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Version of Auto2 unknown

Enter the tractor code (AA)
Tractor code
19
OK
WA2-2
Issue 2
May 2002

11F02.4
Programming / Reprogramming
The software of Autotronic 2 will be incorrect for
tractor where it should be fitted.
To modify the Autotronic 2 software:
1. Connect the PC with Wintest to the tractor fitted
with the Autotronic 2 (Fig. 1).
2. Disconnect the "E" CAN harness between the
Autotronic 2 and the testing equipment (Fig. 1).
3378246M1
3378243M1
3378245M1
CAN BOX
AGCO
Ref : 3 378 243 M1
E
3378244M1
3714779M1
C33
Fig. 1
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.5
3. Start Wintest.
4. Click on "GO" to access the main menu.
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
WA2-3
5. Select "Autotronic 2".

Click on "OK" to valid.
Setup
Auto 2
Auto 3
OK
Autotronic 2
TC-DCC
Cancel
Autotronic 3
Help
Datatronic 2
Linkage
Joystick
WA2-4
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.6
6. The following screen is display.
Click on "Cancel".
Depress the clutch pedal

fully
Retry
Cancel
WA2-5
7. The following screen is display.

Note : The screen is display when Wintest cannot
read the code AA (ex : Autotronic 2 without
software)
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Version of Auto2 unknown

Enter the tractor code (AA)
Tractor code
19
OK
WA2-6
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.7
8. Reconnect the CAN "E" connector if disconnect

(Fig. 1).
9. Enter the "AA" code for your tractor using the digital
keys of your PC keyboard.
10. Click on "OK" to valid.
11. The following screen is displayed.
Click on "Tool" icon and "programming Autotronic 2".
Winest
Options
Test
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameters ......
Autotronic 2 parameters
Programming Autotronic 2
OK
Help
TCU : O FF
9:25
NUM
WA2-7
Nota :
- The software version "R" or "C" is automatically
selected by Wintest according to the "AA" code
entered at the operation 9 or read when you start
Wintest.
- To program, put the ignition on and start the
engine. The voltage must be at least 12,5 V.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.8
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Are you sure?
Yes
No
OK
Help
WA2-4
- Click on: YES to carry out programming

NO to cancel programming
Issue 2
May 2002
During programming, several error messages
may be displayed:
1. Stop the engine
2. Battery voltage too low
3. Unable to enter Programming mode
4. Unable to begin Boot programming
5. Unable to leave Programming mode
6. Unable to delete program
7. Unable to change page
8. Unable to program line
9. Cannot program a byte
10. Programming impossible
11. Unable to open source file
11F02.9
Correction method
Message 1: Stop the engine
Message 2: Check battery voltage
Messages 3 - 4 - 5: Check connection of the CAN BOX
interface and turn the ignition key off
Messages 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 10: The Autotronic 2 is defective
Message 11: Hard drive problem. Re-install the
WINTEST software on your PC.
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Error message
Battery voltage too low
OK
Help
Retry
Cancel
WA2-5
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.10
After correction, or if no error messages are displayed,

the following screen appears:
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Start the engine
OK
Help
OK
WA2-6
- Start the engine.
- Click on OK
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.11
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
Wintest
Remove connector F
OK
OK
Help
WA2-7
- Remove connector F
- Click on OK
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.12
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
Wintest
Connect connector F
OK
OK
Help
WA2-8
- Connect connector F
- Click on OK
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.13
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Depress the clutch pedal fully
OK
OK
Help
WA2-9
- Fully depress the clutch pedal, then release it
- Click on OK
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.14
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
100 %
OK
Help
WA2-10
- A gauge indicates the progression of the

programming.
Note: The indicator gauge may take 1 or 2 minutes
to be displayed.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.15
- When the programming is completed, the following

screen is displayed:
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Programming completed
Programming
Autotronic
2 2
Programmation
Autotronic
100 %
OK
Yes
No
Help
WA2-11
- Click on OK
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.16
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
Wintest
Remove connector F
OK
OK
Help
WA2-12
- Disconnect connector F
- Click on "OK"
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.17
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
Wintest
Connect connector F
OK
OK
Help
WA2-13
- Connect connector F
- Click on OK
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.18
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Depress the clutch pedal fully
OK
OK
Help
WA2-14
- Fully depress the clutch pedal, then release it

- Click on OK
Note: It is necessary to set the Autotronic2 parameters again after programming (see C)
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.19
Setting parameters
- Turn the ignition key on to carry out this operation. The
voltage must be 12.5 V minimum.
- It is necessary to change the parameters:
. if the Autotronic 2 has been replaced by a new device
. if improvements have been made to one or more
functions by changing the parameters
. if programming has been carried out
The parameter code is found on a label on the left hand
side dashboard support near the fuse box. This code
has 12 figures and corresponds to the 11 parameters
whose meaning is shown below.
Important: Discard all letters and numbers before

the serial number H099011.
Parameter code
AA
Example of setting
72
Code AA = 72 = 6280 open centre

Code B = 3 = 4 WD memory
Code C = 1 = with Hare / Tortoise synchro
Code D = 1 = with 4 x 2 gearbox
Code
E = 2 = speed limited to 40 Kph
Code
F = 0 = without Speedshift
Code G = 1 = Dynashift with steering wheel lever
Code H = 0 = mechanical shuttle
Code
I = 2 = for 6200 / 8200
Code
J = 0 = no creeper unit
Code
K = 0 = Autotronic 2 for 6200 PTO
Note: The Autotronic 2 does not control the creeper unit
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.20
Autotronic 2 parameter codes: 6100 - 8100 - 3000 - 3100 - 3600
CODE AA
MODEL
with
AUTOTRONIC 2
VERSION R
References
3715631M1
3792092M92
Open centre hydraulics

Non modified
flow rate
hydraulic pump
up to
No.D125026
Closed centre hydraulics
Increased flow rate hydraulic

pump from No.D125027
onwards
Speedshift
tractors with
30 Kph
mechanical
limitation or
Dynashift
Speedshift
tractors with
30 Kph
electronic speed
limitation from
No.G083035
onwards
Speedshift
tractors with
30 Kph
mechanical
limitation or
Dynashift
Speedshift
tractors with
30 Kph
electronic speed
limitation from
No.G083035
onwards
19
30
25
32
6110 - 6120
6130 - 6140
3050 - 3055
3060 - 3065
3065S
00
3070
01
6150 - 6160
6170
3075 - 3080
3085 - 3090
3095
02
20
31
26
33
6180
3115 - 3120
03
21
27
6190
3125 - 3140
04
22
28
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.21
MODEL
with AUTOTRONIC 2
Version R
References
3715631M1 / 3792092M92
PTO 540 / 1000 rpm
8110 - 8120 Normal Duty

05
12
8110 - 8120 Heavy Duty

06
13
8130 Normal Duty

07
14
8130 Heavy Duty

08
15

3680 Heavy Duty
09
16
8150 Double drive unit

10
17

11
18
8160 Heavy Duty

Reinforced Transmission
23
24
Issue 2
PTO 750 / 1000 rpm
May 2002
11F02.22
Code B
Front axle
1 = 2WD
2 = 4WD (a)
3 = 4WD memory (b)
Code C
Hare / Tortoise
0 = Non synchronised
1 = Synchronised
Code F: Speedshift
0 = No Speedshift
1 = Speedshift with button
control
2 = Speedshift with steering
wheel lever
Code D
Gearbox type
Code E
Maximum speed
0= 4x2
(without AB range)
2= 4x4
(with AB range)
1 = 30 kph
2 = 40 kph except 8160
Heavy Duty
Reinforced
3 = 33 kph (Japan)
4 = 40 kph for 8160 with
Heavy Duty
reinforced gearbox
Code G: Dynashift
0 = No Dynashift
1 = Dynashift with steering wheel
lever
2 = Dynashift with gear lever
button
3 = for AGCO Allis or White
Code H: Reverse shuttle

0 = Mechanical
1 = Pre-selection
with button
with MCB sensor (old
model)
2 = Pre-selection
with lever
model)
3 = Pre-selection
with lever
with Bosch sensor (new
model)
4 = Pre-selection
with button
model)
(a) Each time the engine is started, the 4WD indicator lamp is lit and the front axle engaged.
To disengage 4WD:
- press the brake pedal,
- press the 4WD switch.
The indicator lamp goes out.
The front axle is actually disengaged when the Autotronic receives a speed signal greater than 1 kph.
(b) Each time the engine is started, the 4WD is in the position stored when the engine was stopped. The 4WD
function may different according to the code (see (d)).
Issue 2
May 2002
Code I: Factory
0 = AGCO MF with Autotronic 371563M1 (c)
1 = Not used
2 = AGCO MF with Autotronic 3792092M92 (d)
11F02.23
Code I: Creeper unit
0 = None
Code K: PTO
0 = with PTO
(c) Code I = 0
- changing from 4WD to 2WD is actually carried out when the speed sensor sends a signal
- the 4WD engages if there is action on one of the two brake pedals above 5 kph
(d) Code I = 2
- changing from 4WD to 2WD when stopped is actually carried out without any received speed sensor signal
- 4WD engages if there is action on one of the two brake pedals above 5 kph
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.24
Autotronic 2 code parameters : 6200

CODE AA
MODEL
with
AUTOTRONIC 2
Version C
3792093M93
Open centre
hydraulic circuit
Closed centre
hydraulic circuit
6235 - 6245
70
74
6255 - 6260 - 6265 - 6270
71
75
6280
72
76
6290
73
77
Autotronic 2 code parameters : 8200

CODE AA
MODEL
with
AUTOTRONIC 2
Version C
3792093M93
Issue 2
PTO 540 - 1000 rpm
PTO 750 - 1000 rpm
8210 - 8220
Heavy Duty
34
79
8210 - 8220
Heavy Duty sealed
35
80
8240
Heavy Duty sealed
82
83
8240 - 8250
Double drive unit
36
81
May 2002
Code B
Front axle
1 = 2WD
2 = 4WD (a)
3 = 4WD with memory
(b)
Code C
Hare / Tortoise
1 = Synchronised
Code D
Gearbox type
1=4x2
(without AB range)
2=4x4
(with AB range)
11F02.25
Code E
Max. speed
1 = 30 kph
2 = 40 kph except 8160
Heavy Duty
Reinforced
3 = 33 kph (Japan)
4 = 40 kph for 8160 with
Heavy Duty
reinforced gearbox
To disengage 4WD:
- press the brake pedal,
- press the 4WD switch.
(b) Each time the engine is started, the 4WD is in the position memorised when the engine was stopped. The 4WD
function may differ according to the code I (see (d)).
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.26
Code F: Speedshift
0 = No Speedshift
1 = Speedshift with button
control
wheel lever
Code G: Dynashift
0 = No Dynashift
1 = Dynashift with steering
wheel lever
button
Code I: Factory

0 = Mechanical
1 = Pre-selection
with button
model)
2 = Pre-selection
with lever
model)
3 = Pre-selection
with lever
model)
4 = Pre-selection
with button
model)
Code J: Creeper unit
0 = AGCO MF old range

1 = Not used
2 = AGCO MF 6200 / 8200 (c)
0 = None
1 = With
Code K: PTO
0 = with PTO
(c) New ranges 6200 / 8200

Code I = 2
- changing from 4WD to 2WD when halted is actually carried out without any received speed sensor signal
- 4WD is engaged only if there is action on both brake pedals at whatever speed
- differential lock is definitively disengaged if there is action on a brake pedal
- PTO emergency stop switch located on fenders (if fitted)
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.27
- Click on the Tools icon and then on Parameters
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameter
Autotronic2 parameter...
Programming Autotronic2...
OK
Help
WA2-19
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.28
Wintest
Test
Help
Options
GO!
Help
Wintest
AA
7272 3
OK
Cancel
OK
Help
WA2-16
- Using the Tab key, select the code to modify, then
type in the new parameter.
- Confirm the code by clicking on OK
Note: If an Autotronic parameter is incorrect in

relation to the possible parameters, the parameter
is highlighted.
Enter the correct code and confirm it by clicking on
OK.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.29
- Another screen allows to display the values entered

during parameter setting.
- Click on the Tools icon and then on "Autotronic 2
parameter..."
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
H elp
Wintest
Parameter
Paramtrer
Autotronic 2 parameter ....
Programming Autotronic2...
OK
Help
WA2-20A
Issue 2
May 2002

11F02.30
The following screen is displayed
Tractor code
Extended display .....
Display all
Parameter
Parameter value
Synchro type
Front axle
Tester code
Pulse/10 kph
RPTO pulse/rev
PTO ECO ratio
Engine pulse/rev
Eng. Nominal speed
Max. PFA & Diff speed
Hi -> Lo max speed
Lo -> Hi max speed
Trans type
Dynashift
Speedshift
Shuttle type
Speed limit
C ratio (eng./Fwd *8)
D ratio (eng./Fwd *8)
Synchro
With front axle stored
!0
115
28
12917
77
2200
14
! 10
8
4*2 Transmission
Telma
None
Preselect Reverse Shuttle lever
0
112
128
OK
Cancel
Help
WA2-20B
- Select "Display all" to display all the parameters.
- The "Parameter" column defines the parameter.
- The "Parameter value" column gives the characteristics
of the parameter.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.31
D . Tests and diagnostics

Safety function
- Start the engine.
- Click on the Safety icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA2-21
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.32
Wintest
Test
Testing the Safety Function
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
14,3
OK
Help
TCU 4
WA2-22
Engine speed sensor value in rpm
Bottom clutch pedal switch
1064
17 bar hydraulic circuit Low Pressure indicator lamp
Battery voltage in volts.

Value between 11V and 15V
143
- if pressure is correct, it is displayed in normal video,

- if pressure is below 9 bar 1, it is displayed in reverse
video or red if the indicator lamp on the dashboard is
lit.
17 bar low pressure hydraulic circuit
pressure switch.
- if pressure is correct, it is displayed in reverse video.

- if pressure below 9 bar 1, it is displayed in normal
video.
Issue 2
May 2002
TCU 4
Autotronic 2 status.
11F02.33
"Gearbox" function
- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Gearbox" icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA2-19
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.34
Wintest
Test
Testing the gearbox
GO!
Help
Autotronic
Off
1064
Off
155
On
180
EV1
On
EV2
Off
OK
Help
TCU 4
WA2-20
Transmission oil temperature sensor value in

points

180
1064
- error at 255
Design forward speed indicated by forward
ground speed sensor in tenths of kph
0
Pre-selection shuttle fork value in

potentiometer points
17 bar low pressure hydraulic circuit pressure

switch.

- if pressure is below 9 bar 1, it is displayed in normal
video
155
- forward maximum: 160 points
- reverse maximum: 40 points
- difference between forward and reverse to be
between 70 and 110 points
Issue 2
May 2002

switch.
Pre-selection shuttle selector switches
- Forward
- if pressure is correct, it is displayed in normal video

- if pressure below 9 bar 1, it is displayed in reverse
video or red if the dashboard indicator lamp is lit
- Reverse
- contact = reverse video

- no contact = normal video
Dynashift selector switch
Dynashift range
11F02.35
Tortoise range indicator (no lamp on dashboard)
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
- ON = reverse video
- OFF = normal video
Dynashift or Speedshift indicator lamps
-A-B-C-D
Speedshift range switch
TCU 4
- C range = normal video

- D range = reverse video
Autotronic 2 status
Forward ON / OFF solenoid valve status
Off
OFF = solenoid valve deactivated
ON = solenoid valve activated
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.36
Reverse ON / OFF solenoid valve status

Off
Warning buzzer
Hare / Tortoise range solenoid valve status
- Tortoise = OFF = solenoid valve deactivated

- Hare
= ON = solenoid valve activated
EV1
Dynashift EV1 solenoid valve status

EV2
Dynashift or Speedshift EV2 solenoid valve

status

Dynashift range
Solenoid valve EV 1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Solenoid valve EV 2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Speedshift range
Solenoid valve EV2
ON
OFF
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.37
Front Axle function

- Start the engine.
- Click on the Front Axle icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA2-25
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.38
Wintest
Test
Testing the Front Axle
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
PFA
Off
OK
TCU 4
Help
WA2-22
Front axle pulse switch

ground speed sensor in kph
Left and right brake pedal switches
1064

switch.

video
Issue 2
May 2002
Front axle indicator lamp
11F02.39

switch.
- if pressure is correct, it is displayed in normal video.
- if pressure below 9 bar 1, displayed in reverse video
or red if the dashboard indicator lamp is lit.
Front axle overspeed
PFA
Front axle ON / OFF solenoid valve
Off
- ON = 2WD
- OFF = 4WD
TCU 4
Autotronic 2 status
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.40
Differential Lock function
- Start the engine.
- Click on the Differential Lock icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA2-23
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.41
Wintest
Test
Testing the differential lock
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
Diff
Off
OK
Help
TCU 4
WA2-24
Differential lock pulse switch

1064
Right and left brake pedal switches

0
17 bar low pressure hydraulic circuit pressure switch.
- if pressure is correct displayed in reverse video

- if pressure below 9 bar 1, displayed in normal video
Issue 2
May 2002

11F02.42
17 bar low pressure hydraulic circuit indicator

lamp
- if pressure correct, it is displayed in normal video.
lit.
Linkage 3-position switch
- only the up position and the work position are represented
Differential lock overspeed
Diff
Differential lock ON / OFF solenoid valve
Off
ON = Differential lock engaged
OFF = 4WD differential lock disengaged
TCU 4
Issue 2
Status of the Autotronic 2
May 2002
11F02.43
Power Take-Off function

- Start the engine.
- Click on the Power Take-Off icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA2-29
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.44
Wintest
Test
Testing the Power Take-Off
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
PTO
Off
OK
Help
TCU 4
WA2-30

switch.

1064

video
Power take-off clutch speed sensor in rpm
0
PTO clutch switch
- PTO sensor speed = engine speed

The comparison of these two speeds allows the detection of PTO clutch slip
1550 rpm economic PTO switch
Issue 2
May 2002
11F02.45
PTO emergency stop switch (fitted on rear

wing according to options)
- if switch not fitted = reverse video
PTO indicator lamp

- if pressure correct, it is displayed in normal video.
lit.
PTO
PTO solenoid valve
Off
ON = engaged
OFF = disengaged
TCU 4
Autotronic 2 status
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.1
11 F03 Autotronic 3 with Wintest
CONTENTS
A.
General ___________________________________________
B.
Using Autotronic 3 with Wintest ____________________
C.
Programming ______________________________________
D.
E.

- "Safety" function _________________________________
15
18
23
26
- "PTO" function ___________________________________
29
F.
Manual calibration of the power shuttle _____________
32
G.
List of error codes __________________________________
37
Issue 2
May 2002

11F03.2
A . General
Note: There are now several configurations for installing the Autotronic 3:
- Tractor with basic Autotronic 3 (CAN network
speed: 250 Kbits)
- Tractor with basic Autotronic 2 and now equipped
with an Autotronic Kit (CAN speed: 100 Kbits) (see
section 11F08)
- Tractor with basic Autotronic 1 and now equipped
with an Autotronic Kit (no CAN network) (see
section 11F08).
It is imperative to program an Autotronic 3 used as an
Autotronic Kit (CAN network speed 100 Kbits) to obtain
a 250 Kbit CAN network speed, when the Autotronic 3 is
to be installed on a tractor equipped with a basic
Autotronic 3.
For the above, refer to section 11F09 (Kit Autotronic
towards Autotronic 3).
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.3
Autotronic 3 status
B . Using Autotronic 3 with

Wintest
The Autotronic 3 operates using 9 main states. The

status of the Autotronic 3 is displayed at the bottom of
each test screen.
Description
parameters of Autotronic 2 as well as to display and
detect faults within its various functions.
- If no there is no change whatsoever, check the connectors, the ignition switch and test the wiring corresponding to the relevant function.
connector terminals and the colour of the corresponding wires.
Example: The icon corresponding to the Hare / Tortoise range switch has been selected. Information
J1 - 32 = Switch J1 of Autotronic 3, terminal No. 32,
wire colour white.
List of statuses
- TCU 0: ignition key turned on and parameters correct
or 17 bar pressure drop for more than
4 seconds
- TCU 1: 17 bar pressure lower than 9.5 bar and engine
speed lower than 200 rpm
- TCU 2: 17 bar pressure correct and engine speed
higher than 200 rpm
- TCU 3: 17 bar pressure drop for less than 4 seconds
- TCU 4: engine speed down for less than 0.5 seconds
- TCU 5: engine speed down for greater than
0.5 seconds
- TCU 6: 17 bar pressure lower than 9.5 bar and engine
speed lower than 200 rpm for at least
6 seconds
- TCU 7: ignition key turned on and incorrect parameters
- TCU 8: not used
- TCU 9: battery voltage above 16 V
Wintest
Test
Testing the gearboc
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
4.1
0.0 Amps
Off
0.0 Amps
Off
100 %
280
280
Range
switch
Err : 0
Connector: J1-32
Colour: White
Off
OK
EV1
On
EV2
Off
OK
Help
TCU 2
WA3-1
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.4
C . Programming

voltage must be at least 12.5 V.
- The programming of the Autotronic 3 is necessary:
. when the former Autotronic 3 has been replaced by
a new one
the product
Note: It is necessary to set the Autotronic 3 parameters after programming.
- Click on the "Tools" icon and then on "Programming
Autotronic 3".
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameter ......
Auto 3 parameter
List of error codes
OK
Help
WA3-2
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.5
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Are you sure?
Yes
No
OK
Help
WA3-3
- Click YES to carry out programming

NO to cancel programming.
- A gauge indicates the progress of the programming.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.6
During programming, several error messages

may be displayed:
1. Stop the engine
6. Unable to delete the program
8. Unable to program the line
9. Unable to program a byte
11. Unable to open the source file
Correction method
Messages 3 - 4 - 5: Check connection of the CAN BOX
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Error message
Stop the engine
OK
Help
Retry
Cancel
WA3-4
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.7
D . Setting parameters
Setting parameters
- It is necessary to change the parameters:
. if the Autotronic 3 has been replaced by a new device
functions by changing the parameters
. if programming has been carried out.
side of the dashboard near the fuse box. This code has
12 figures and corresponds to the 11 parameters
whose meaning is shown below.

Parameter code
AA
setting
39
Code AA = 39 = 6280
Code
B = 3 = 4 WD memory
Code
C = 1 = with Hare / Tortoise synchro
Code
D = 1 = with 4 x 2 gearbox
Code
E = 2 = forward speed not limited
Code
Code
G = 4 = Dynashift with power shuttle type lever control
Code
H = 5 = Power shuttle
Code
I = 2 = for 6200 / 8200
Code
J = 1 = with creeper unit
Code
K = 2 = 6200 PTO
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.8
Models with
Autotronic 3
AGCO
model
Hydraulic
pump
Open centre
Hydraulic
pump
Load sensing
RT 95
RT 115
540 rpm
PTO
RT 130
RT 145
750 rpm
PTO
RT 130
RT 145
MF
model
Type of
final drive unit
Control panel
switch N0 (*)
1 - 2 - 3 - 4 -5 - 6 - 7
AA Code
6235 -6245
1-1-1-0-1-0-0
37
6255 - 6260
6265 - 6270
0-1-1-0-1-0-0
38
6280
0-0-0-1-1-0-0
39
6290
1-1-1-0-1-0-0
40
6235 -6245
1-1-1-0-1-0-0
41
6255 - 6260
6265 - 6270
0-1-1-0-1-0-0
42
6280
0-0-0-1-1-0-0
43
6290
1-1-1-0-1-0-0
44
8210 - 8220
Heavy Duty
1-0-1-1-1-1-1
45
8210 - 8220
Heavy Duty sealed
0-0-1-1-1-1-1
46
8240 - 8250
Heavy Duty sealed
0-0-1-1-1-1-1
47
8240 - 8250
Composite
1-0-1-1-1-1-1
48
8210 - 8220
Heavy Duty
1-0-1-1-1-1-1
84
8210 - 8220
Heavy Duty sealed
0-0-1-1-1-1-1
85
8240 - 8250
Heavy Duty sealed
0-0-1-1-1-1-1
86
8240 - 8250
Composite
1-0-1-1-1-1-1
87
(*) Switch No. 8: 0 for miles

1 for km
Issue 2
May 2002
Code B
Front axle
1 = 2WD
2 = 4WD (a)
3 = 4WD with memory
(b)
5 = 4WD US mode (c)
Code C
Hare / Tortoise
1 = Synchronised
operated by
gear shift lever
2 = Synchronised
controlled by button
Code F: Speedshift
0 = No Speedshift
1 = Speedshift with button control
wheel lever
3 = Not used
4 = Speedshift with power shuttle
type lever
11F03.9
Code D
Gearbox type
Code E
Max. speed
1=4x2
(without AB range)
Code G: Dynashift
0 = No Dynashift
1 = Dynashift with steering wheel
lever
button
4 = Dynashift with power shuttle
type lever
5 = Dynashift with Power Shuttle
and DynashiftAuto2 (Autodrive)
6 = Dynashift with Power Shuttle
and DynashiftAuto1 (Speed
matching)
Code I: Factory
1 = 30 Kph
2 = 40 Kph except 8160
Heavy Duty reinforced
3 = 33 Kph (Japan)
4 = 40 kph for 8160
with Heavy Duty rein
forced gearbox
0 = Mechanical
5 = Power shuttle
Code J: Creeper unit
0 = AGCO MF old range (d)

1 = Not used
2 = MF 6200 / 8200 (e)
0 = None (f)
1 = With (f)
Code K : PTO
0 = without PTO
1 = PTO with ON / OFF solenoid valve
2 = PTO with proportional solenoid valve on MF 6200 and AGCO RT 95 - RT 115
3 = PTO with proportional solenoid valve on MF 8200 and AGCO RT 130 - RT 145
Issue 2
May 2002

11F03.10
To disengage 4WD:
- press the brake pedal
- press the 4WD switch
(b) Each time the engine is started, the 4WD is in the position stored when the engine was stopped. The 4WD function
may different according to the code I (see (e)).
(c) Operation identical as for code 3.

US Mode is activated by pressing for at least 5 seconds on the 4WD switch. In this mode, the front axle
disengages when a brake pedal is pressed. When the brake pedal is released it re-engages.
(d) Code I = 0
- 4WD is engaged if there is action on one of the two brake pedals above 5 kph
- changing from 4WD to 2WD is actually carried out when the forward ground speed sensor sends a signal
- the differential lock is disengaged and re-engaged by action on a brake pedal.
(e) New 6200 / 8200 ranges

Code I = 2
- the 4WD only engages if there is action on both pedals at whatever speed
- the changing from 4WD to 2WD when halted is actually carried out without a signal from the forward ground
speed sensor.
- the differential lock definitively disengages if there is action on a brake pedal
- the PTO emergency stop switch is located on the wings (if fitted)
(f) The creeper unit from now on is controlled by the Autotronic 3.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.11
- Click on the "Tools" icon and then on "Parameters"
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameters ......
Auto 3 parameters
List of error codes
OK
Help
WA3-5
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.12
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
Wintest
Autotronic 3 Parameters
AA
39
OK
Cancel
OK
Help
WA3-6
- Using the tab key, select the code to modify and then
- Confirm your modifications by clicking on "OK".
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.13
- Another screen allows to display the values entered

during parameter setting.
- Click on "Tools" icon and then on "Programming
Autotronic 3".
Wintest
Tester
Option
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameters....
Auto 3 parameters
List of error codes
OK
Help
WA3-6A
Issue 2
May 2002

11F03.14
Tractor code
Display all
Parameter
Parameter value
With synchro
With Front axle stored
0
146
44
10000
82
36
22
14
6
10
4*2 transmission
Analog with Power shuttle
None
Power shuttle analog lever
0
No creeper
Synchro
Front axle
Tester code
Wheel pulse ratio/10 kph
PTOPPR
LSPTO ratio
Pulse/engine rev
PPR Intermediate speed
Engine nominal speed/100
Max PFA and Diff speed
Hi -> Lo limit speed
Lo -> Hi limit speed
Trans type
Dynashift lever
Speedshift
Shuttle type
Speed limit
Creeper type
OK
Cancel
Help
WA3-6B
- Select "Display all" to display all parameters.
- The "Parameter" column defines the parameter.
- The "Parameter value" column gives the parameter
characteristics or the value entered during calibration.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.15
E . Tests and diagnostics

Note: The Autotronic 3 has a diagnostics mode for
the power shuttle and the error codes are displayed
on the Wintest diagnostic screens. The meaning of
the codes is given in section 11B01.
Safety functions
- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Safety" icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA3-7
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.16
Wintest
Test
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
14.3
Err : 0
OK
Help
TCU 2
WA3-8
Bottom of clutch pedal switch
1064
- pedal up: normal video
- pedal down: reverse video
Battery voltage in volts. Value between 11V
and 15V.
14,3
Power shuttle neutral switch

switch.
- if pressure is correct displayed in reverse video.

- if pressure below 9 bar 1, displayed in normal video.
Issue 2
May 2002
- if bottom of clutch pedal switch not closed: reverse

video
- if bottom of clutch pedal switch closed: normal video
11F03.17

- if pressure correct, displayed in normal video.
or red if the indicator lamp on the dashboard is lit.
Power present for Autotronic 3 internal electronic relays controlling shuttle solenoid
valves.
- If the shuttle lever is in de-clutched position and
bottom clutch pedal switch open: reverse video (relays powered).
- If the shuttle lever is in forward or reverse and the
bottom clutch pedal switch is open: reverse video
(relays powered).
- If the shuttle lever is in neutral and whatever the
position of the clutch pedal: normal video (relays not
powered).
- If the bottom clutch pedal switch is closed and whatever the position of the shuttle lever: normal video
(relays not powered).
Error warning buzzer
Flashing dashboard diagnostics error indicator lamp
Err : 0
Error code indicator
TCU 2
Autotronic 3 status
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.18
"Gearbox" function
- Start the engine.
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA3-9
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.19
Testing the gearbox
Calib
Autotronic
AUTO
0
0.0
0.0 Amps
Off
0.0 Amps
Off
0%
0.0
0
Err : 109
0.0
Off
-25.6
TCU 6
EV1
On
EV2
Off
OK
Help
WA3-10
Dynashift or Speedshift shuttle lever output

analog signal in volts:

0.5
1064
Gearbox input speed sensor value in rpm

280
- Dynashift = from 0 to 1 times the engine speed in D
range
- Speedshift = from 0 to 1.26 times the engine speed in
D range

high lever position (de-clutched) .......

FWD + ..............................................
FWD .................................................
FWD - ...............................................
N .......................................................
REV- ..................................................
REV ...................................................
REV+ .................................................
2,5 V
4V
3,5 V
3V
0,5 V
2V
1,5 V
1V
Transmission oil temperature sensor value in

C
21.4
Issue 2
May 2002

11F03.20

switch
Clutch pedal travel potentiometer value (in

volts)
4.1

AUTO
- clutch engaged
- mid way
- de-clutched
= 100% = 4.5V
= 50% = 2.3V
= 0% = 0.5V
Automatic Dynashift option selected
Bottom of clutch pedal switch
"Speed Matching" or "Auto Drive" Power

mode switch
- switch open (normal video): Dynashift normal or Auto
Drive Economic mode according to selected option and
switch position
- switch closed (reverse video): "Speed Matching" or
"Auto Drive" Power mode selected according to option.
Power shuttle shifting switches

. Forward
. Neutral
. Reverse
Auto Drive Economic mode switch
- switch open (normal video): Dynashift normal or Auto

Drive Power mode according to selected option and
switch position
- switch closed (reverse video): "Auto Drive" Economic
mode
- switch closed = reverse video

- switch open = normal video
"Auto Drive" throttle pedal potentiometer
Creeper unit switch
0.0
- the value in volts must vary between 0 and 5 V.
Note: For calibrating the potentiometer, see section
11B01.
Top of clutch pedal switch
Issue 2
May 2002
- engaged = reverse video

- disengaged = normal video
11F03.21
Dynashift or Speedshift selector switch
- with each gear change up = reverse video

- with each gear change down = reverse video
- if no action on the shuttle lever = normal video
Clutch pedal travel potentiometer value in

percent.
Value ranges from 0% = de-clutched to 100% fully
clutched.
Tortoise range indicator (no indicator lamp

on dashboard)
100 %
Forward proportional solenoid valve

current
lever in Neutral ............................
0.0A
lever in Forward ...........................
0.2 to 1.2A
lever in de-clutched position ........
0A
lever in Reverse ..........................
0.1A if reverse
gear engaged
0.0 Amps
Speedshift or Dynashift indicators
-A-B-C-D
Reverse proportional solenoid valve
current
lever in Neutral ............................
0.0A
lever in Reverse ..........................
0.2 to 1.2A
lever in de-clutched position ........
0A
lever in Forward ........................... 0.1A if Forward
gear engaged
0.0 Amps
-
TCU 2
This function allows a manual calibration of

the power shuttle.
For calibration procedure, see E.
CALIB

. if pressure correct, displayed in normal video.
. if pressure below 9 bar 1, displayed in reverse video,
or red if the indicator lamp on the dashboard is lit
Autotronic 3 status
Forward proportional solenoid valve status
Off
OFF = solenoid valve at rest
ON = solenoid valve open or fully open

Reverse proportional solenoid valve status
Off
Shuttle neutral indicator
ON = solenoid valve open or fully open
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.22
Dashboard diagnostic lamp indicating error

codes
ERR : 0
Error code indicator when fault develops
Status of Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve
- Tortoise =
- Hare
=
EV1
OFF =
ON =
solenoid valve at rest

solenoid valve activated

status

EV2

status

Dynashift range
Solenoid valve EV 1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Solenoid valve EV 2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Speedshift range
Solenoid valve EV2
ON
OFF
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.23
"Front Axle" function

- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Front Axle" icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA3-11
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.24
Wintest
Test
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
PFA
On
0
Err : 0
OK
TCU 2
Help
WA3-12
Front axle pulse switch

1064

switch

Issue 2
May 2002
Front axle indicator lamp
11F03.25

switch.
- if pressure is correct displayed in normal video.
or red if the dashboard indicator lamp is lit.
Front axle overspeed
PFA
Front axle ON / OFF solenoid valve
On
- ON = 2WD
- OFF = 4WD

codes
Err : 0
TCU 2
Autotronic 3 status
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.26
"Differential Lock" function
- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Differential Lock" icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA3-13
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.27
Wintest
Test
Testing the Differential Lock
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
Diff
Off
0
Err : 0
OK
TCU 2
Help
WA3-14
Differential lock pulse switch

1064
Right and left brake pedal switches

0
17 bar low pressure hydraulic circuit pressure switch

Issue 2
May 2002

11F03.28

- if pressure correct, displayed in normal video.
or red if the indicator lamp on the dashboard is lit.
3-position Linkage switch

3-position Linkage switch
Diff
Differential lock overspeed

Differential lock ON / OFF solenoid valve
Off
ON = Differential lock engaged
OFF = Differential lock disengaged

codes
Err : 0
TCU 2
Autotronic 3 status
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.29
"Power Take-Off" function

- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Power Take-Off" icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WA3-15
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.30
Wintest
Test
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
PTO
Off
Err : 0
OK
Help
TCU 2
WA3-16
17 bar low pressure hydraulic circuit pressure switch.
1064
- if pressure is correct displayed in reverse video.
Power take-off clutch speed sensor in rpm
0
PTO clutch switch
- PTO sensor speed = engine speed

The comparison of these two speeds allows the detection of PTO clutch slip
1550 rpm economic PTO switch
Issue 2
May 2002
wing according to options)
Err : 0
TCU 2
Autotronic 3 status
11F03.31
- if switch not fitted = reverse video
PTO indicator lamp
17 bar Low Pressure hydraulic circuit indicator lamp

- if pressure correct, displayed in normal video
or red if the indicator lamp on the dashboard is lit
PTO
PTO solenoid valve
Off
ON = engaged
OFF = disengaged

codes
Issue 2
May 2002

11F03.32
F . Manual calibration of the power

shuttle
Note: Calibration of the power shuttle is imperative
if any of the following are changed:
- a shuttle solenoid valve or its coil
- shuttle hydraulic control unit,
- shuttle housing or any of its components
- Autotronic 3 housing.
Note: For the automatic calibration procedure, see
section 11B01.
Note: To authorize entering into calibration mode,
the transmission oil temperature must be:
- 35/45C: temperature measured by the gearbox cover
probe and that can be read using Wintest or by
following the procedure for direct display of temperature
on the instrument panel.
Direct display of the temperature on the instrument panel
is through a light code provided by the Dynashift or
Speedshift A, B, C, D indicator lights.
Input in reading mode:
- start the engine
- place shuttle lever in neutral
- simultaneously activate the gear shift lever for at least
4 seconds in order to activate the Hare/Tortoise switch
and the differential lock switch.
- the A, B, C, D indicator lights show the temperature
according to the table below.
Exit from reading mode only takes place after the engine
has been stopped and the pressure in the 17 bar low
pressure circuit has dropped or if there is a shift to
calibration mode.
Note: Temperature reading mode makes it possible

to drive and use the Dynashift/Speedshift ratios, but
the display of A, B, C, D indicator lights corresponds
to the temperature.
- 45 / 55 C: measured with a thermometer at the rear
axle gauge hole.
Issue 2
May 2002
Legend
A
Light off
Light on, not flashing
Flashing light
11F03.33
Temperature display in readiness for calibration

Dynashift / Speedshift indicator light
Temperature displayed by
Wintest
D
10 C
17 C
22 C
27 C
31 C
36 C
Calibration authorized
39 C
Calibration can be
launched
Optimal calibration
44 C
Calibration authorized
46 C
51 C
54 C
57 C
60 C
63 C
Issue 2
May 2002

11F03.34
Manual calibration
- Start the engine.
- Start Wintest and select Autotronic 3.
- Click on
- Increase engine speed to 1500 rpm + (or 400/410 rpm

PTO speed on PTO 540 rpm position) using the lever.
- Shift into the Hare range (high position) without declutching
- Place the shuttle lever in forward position and leave it
there.
Issue 2
May 2002
- Click on the
CALIB
11F03.35
icon
- Click on icon
OK
- Engage the 1st gear.

- Manual calibration begins.
- After a few moments, when the tractor has moved 50
cm forward by itself, de-clutch pushing the pedal as far
as it will go and then release the pedal. Front clutch
calibration is complete.
- Do not touch the reversing or gear levers; after a few
seconds, the tractor will move in reverse by itself.
- Once the tractor has run 50 cm backwards, de-clutch
pushing the pedal as far as it will go and then release
the pedal. Rear clutch calibration is complete.
- A and B indicator lights get on without flashing, this
confirms the clutches have been calibrated.
- Place the gear shift lever back in neutral, the shuttle
lever must remain in forward position.
Important: the 50 cm automatic movement of the
tractor forward and in reverse is compulsory; it
allows the Autotronic 3 system to store the correct
clutch engaging pressure.
Issue 2
May 2002

11F03.36
Validation
Immediate validation after calibration
1. Without stopping the engine, set the engine speed at
1500 rpm, engage Tortoise range 4th gear, Dynashift
in range A or Speedshift in C.
2. Carry out ten forward/reverse shuttle maneuvers
3. Carry out ten neutral to forward and neutral to reverse
shuttle maneuvers
4. Assess shuttle quality, it should be a smooth reaction
without any jerks.
Validation of a tractor that has already been calibrated
Note: Transmission temperature must be higher
than 20C
5. Put the gear shift lever in neutral, the power take-off
must be de-clutched, the front axle disengaged.
7. Put the Power Shuttle lever in Forward for at least 1
minute, then at least 1 minute in the Reverse
position.
8. Put the Power Shuttle lever back into neutral.
9. Engage 4th Tortoise, Dynashift in A or Speedshift in
C, with an engine speed of 1500 rpm.
10. Carry out 10 Power Shuttle forward / reverse
maneuvers.
11. Carry out 10 Power Shuttle neutral / forward and
neutral / reverse maneuvers.
12. Assess shuttle quality, it should be a smooth reaction
without any jerks.
Note: An abrupt reaction on the 1st maneuver is
normal.
Calibration anomalies
Note: a defect due to the non-compliance of the
calibration input mode conditions or to failure to
maintain the calibration mode is indicated by
alternate flashing of the A, B, C and D indicator
lights.
Switching to calibration input mode does not occur if:
- transmission temperature is not correct,
- engine speed is other than 1500 rpm + 100
- the Tortoise range was not engaged before switching to
calibration input mode
- shuttle lever was not placed in forward mode
13. Check that operations 1 to 7 for calibration input
mode have been correctly carried out.
14. Check solenoid valve coil tightness and connections
(torque values 5.4 to 8.1 Nm).
15. Check that the TOC (Top Of Clutch pedal switch) is
correctly adjusted and connected.
Issue 2
May 2002
Calibration mode is not maintained if:

- engine speed varies from 1500 rpm + 100
- the gear shift lever is not switched to 1st position during
phase 1
- Shuttle lever is placed in neutral.
Note: If calibration fails, the system either takes into
account the previously stored parameters or, in the
case of a new Autotronic 3 unit, the default
parameters.
Adjusting the calibration parameters

- If calibration has proceeded correctly, it is possible to
correct the calibration parameters in order to obtain a
faster or slower shuttle reaction.
- The Autotronic allows five adjustment procedures to be
applied in each direction, which can be reinitialised after
a new calibration (see section 11B01).
11F03.37
G . List of error codes

- Wintest allows to display and erase error codes stored
by Autotronic 3.
- Click on the "Tools" icon and on "List of error codes."
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameters ......
Auto 3 parameters
List of error codes
OK
Help
WA3-17
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.38
Errors stored
215
109
OK
Help
Erase
WA3-18
- It enables display of all the error codes stored in the
memory.
- If you click on "Erase", all error codes will be deleted
from Autotronic 3 memory.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F03.39
There are three classes faults depending on degree of

importance. Each class is characterized by a different
indicator light or buzzer behavior.
Fault
class
Error
code
number
Autotronic 3
action on the
transmission
Forward /
Reverse
indicator
light
Diagnostic
indicator
light
Lit and
Sounds
remains on
Class I
1-2
Forced de-clutching,
power shuttle locked
Off
Class II
7-8-910 - 23*
None, but shuttle locked

if engine stops
Forward or
Light
Reverse lit
flashes
depending
rapidly
on direction
selected.
Out if Power
Shuttle is in
neutral
Buzzer
Shuttle reset
after the fault
has been
cancelled.
Stop the engine
and wait
Autotronic 3
standby mode (17
bar pressure
equals 0) (engine
speed equals 0).
Restard the
engine
Sounds
De-clutch
Stops
Place lever in
neutral
* Non direct
in Neutral
Class III
3 - 4 - 5 - None, normal
6 - 15 - 16 operation
17 - 18 19 - 20 21 - 22
Forward or
Reverse
depending
on direction
selected.
Issue 2
Light
flashes
slowly
May 2002
11F03.40
Errors code
Class
Error No.
displayed on
Wintest
Fault
Short circuit on + 12 V of forward solenoid valve
Short circuit on + 12 V of reverse solenoid valve
II
107
Open circuit on + of analog lever power supply
II
108
Open circuit on ground of analog lever power supply
II
109
Open circuit on analog lever signal
II
110
Short circuit on + 12V of analog lever
II
123
Fault on lever Reed switches (ILS)
III
203
Short circuit on forward solenoid valve ground
III
204
Short circuit on reverse solenoid valve ground
III
205
Open circuit on forward solenoid valve
III
206
Open circuit on reverse solenoid valve
III
215
Open circuit or short circuit on clutch pedal potentiometer ground
III
216
Short circuit on + 5V of pedal potentiometer
III
217
Open circuit or short circuit (BOC) switch ground
III
218
Short circuit on + 12 V of (BOC) switch
III
219
Open circuit or short circuit on ground of (TOC) switch integrated with

potentiometer
III
220
Short circuit to + 12 V on top of clutch pedal switch (TOC) integrated in

potentiometer
III
221
Gearbox input speed sensor fault
III
222
12 V open circuit on solenoids due to BOC and/or Neutral lever switches being
jammed in closed position.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.1
11 F04 TC and DCC with Wintest
CONTENTS
A.
General ___________________________________________
B.
Programming ______________________________________
C.
D.
Adjusting the restarting speeds _____________________
16
D.

- "Safety" function _________________________________
- "Power take-off" function __________________________
17
21
26
29
32
List of error codes __________________________________
36
E.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.2
A . General

in reverse video, this indicates that the switch is
activated.
in normal video, this indicates that the switch is not
activated.
Example: The icon corresponding to the gearbox input

speed has been selected. Information concerning it is
displayed in a window:
Ee TC = Connector E, terminal e of the TC, wire
colour: yellow.
Eh TC = Connector E, terminal h of the TC, wire
colour: black.

Wintest
Test
GO!
DCC
Help
TC
892
0
Engine Speed Sensor
Connector: Ee-TC Eh-TC
Colour: Yellow Black
P-Lck
OFF
OK
Error : 0
Error : 0
CAN
Request: No request
OK
Help
Response: No response
WTD-1
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.3
B . Programming
Programming the TC unit
- Programming of the TC is necessary:
. when the former TC unit has been replaced by a new
one
the product
Note: The version of the TC program is shown
alternately with the DCC program on the dashboard.
- Click on the "Tools" icon and then on "Programming TC".
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameter...
TC parameters
DCC parameters
Programming TC
Programming DCC
List of error codes
OK
Help
WTD-2
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.4
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Programming TC
Are you sure?
YES
No
OK
Help
WTD-3
- Click on "YES".
- A gauge indicates the progress of the programming.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.5
Several error messages may be displayed:
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Programming TC
Stop the engine

OK
Help
Retry
Cancel
WTD-4
Messages:
1. Stop the engine
Correction method
Messages 3 4 5: Check connection of the CAN BOX
interface and turn the ignition key off.
Messages 6 7 8 9 10: The TC unit is defective
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.6
Programming the DCC

- Programming of the DCC is necessary:
. when the former DCC unit has been replaced by a
new one
the product
Note: The version of the DCC program is shown
with the TC program on the dashboard.
- Click on the "Tools" icon and then on Programming
DCC.
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameter...
TC parameters
DCC parameters
Programming TC
Programming DCC
List of error codes
OK
Help
WTD-5
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.7

Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Programming DCC
Are you sure?
YES
No
OK
Help
WTD-6
- Click on "YES"
- A gauge indicates the progression of the programming.
Several error messages may be displayed:
1. Stop the engine
3. Unable to access Programming mode
Correction method
Messages 3 4 5: Check connection of the CAN BOX
interface and turn the ignition key off.
Messages 6 7 8 9 10: The DCC unit is defective
Issue 2
May 2002

11F04.8
C . Setting parameters
- Parameterisation is necessary:
. if the TC or DCC has been replaced by a new device
functions via the parameterisation
. if programming has been carried out.
side dashboard support near the fuse box. This code has
12 figures and corresponds to the 11 parameters whose
meaning is shown below.
Parameter code
AA
Example of setting
68
Code AA = 68 = 8240
Code B = 3 = 4 WD memory
Code C = 1 = with creeper unit
Code D = 3 = with Full Powershift gearbox
Code
Code
F = 2 = with Park Lock
Code G = 2 = metric units
Code H = 1 = with radar
Code
I = 2 = PTO stop on the fender
Code
J = 1 = with pre-selection memory
Code
K = 2 = with Europe type analog lever
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.9
Code parameters
Models
Code AA
Perkins
Cummins engine
Navistar
Valmet
MF 8210
67
MF 8220
64
MF 8240
68
MF 8250
61
MF 8260
58
MF 8170 / 8270
55
MF 8180 / 8280
52
DT225 / White 8810
50
Allis 9785
51
DT200 / White 8710
53
Allis 9775
54
DT180 / White 8610
56
Allis 9765
57
DT160 / White 8510
59
Allis 9755
60
RT145 / White 8410
62
Allis 9745
63
White 8310
65
Allis 9735
66
RT130
77
MF 8245
70
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.10
Code B
Front axle
Code C
Creeper unit
1 = 2WD
3 = 4WD memory (a)
5 = 4RM mode US (b)
0 = None
Code E
Max. speed
1 = 30 kph
2 = 40 kph
Code F
Park Lock
0 = None
2 = With Park Lock
Code I
0 = Without PTO stop

2 = With PTO stop on the fender
Issue 2
Code D
Gearbox
3 = Full Powershift
1 = With
Code G
Type of units
0 = U.S.
2 = Metric
Code J
Gear pre-selection
memory
0 = None
1 = With
May 2002
Code H
Radar
0 = None
1 = With
Code K
Type of lever
1 = N.A. analog (c)

2 = Euro analog (d)
11F04.11
(a) 4WD with memory

- the changing from 4WD to 2WD when halted is actually carried out without a signal from the forward ground
speed sensor.
- the 4WD only engages if the two brake pedals are simultaneously pressed whatever the speed.
- on starting the engine, the 4WD remains in the same configuration as when the engine was stopped.
(b) Operation identical as for code 3 for automatic Mode and manual Mode (see figure).
US Mode is activated by pressing for at least 5 seconds on the 4WD switch, in which case the front axle symbol
on the DCC flashes. In this mode, the front axle disengages when a brake pedal is pressed. When the brake pedal
is released it re-engages.
(c) the power shuttle shift lever is located on the right on the armrest
(d) the power shuttle shift lever is located on the left under the steering wheel
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.12
- Click on the "OK" icon and on "Parameters".
Wintest
Test
Help
Options
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameters...
TC parameters
DCC parameters
Programming TC
Programming DCC
List of error codes
OK
Help
WTD-7
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.13
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
Wintest
Autotronic 3 Parameters
AA
68
OK
Cancel
OK
Help
WTD-8
- Using the Tab key, select the code to modify, then

- Confirm the code by clicking on "OK".
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.14
- The following screen is displayed :
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameters...
TC parameters
DCC parameters
Programming TC
Programming DCC
List of error codes
OK
Help
- Two other screens display TC and DCC constants (see

8200 Workshop Service Manual, section 11B01).
- Click on the Tools icon and on TC parameters or
DCC parameters.
Issue 2
May 2002
WTD-8A
11F04.15
- The following screen is displayed :
TC parameters
Tractor code
Display all
Parameter
Parameter value
! - 17493
AG150
EUR dual type lever
Power Shuttle
Current sensor
4RM with Memo
Type1
Type2
Electrohydraulic
2
2
44
18
0
32
72
0
5
Tester
Transmission type
Lever type
Shuttle type
Temperature sensor
Front axle
Differential lock
Rear PTO
Park Lock type
Hi Lo limit speed range
Hi Hi limit speed range
RPTO inter Pulse/rev
RPTO output Pulse/rev
Eco PTO ratio (*10000)
Engine Pulse/rev
Pulse/rev at unit output
Creeper speed ratio
PTO para 1
OK
Cancel
Help
WTD-8B
- Select Display all to display all parameters.

- The Parameter column defines the parameter.
- The Parameter value column gives the parameter
characteristics or the value entered during calibration.
Issue 2
May 2002

11F04.16
D . Adjusting the restarting speed

With the 2.14 version of the TC/DCC programme, you
can adjust the forward restarting speed using the shuttle
lever.
By default, the maximum gear allowed is the 13th.
1st case: Changing to a restarting speed

lower than the present speed
1. Engine running
2. Armrest lever in forward position (engaged)
3. Place the lever in forward position
4. Press on the clutch pedal
5. Select the restarting speed with the shuttle lever
6. Raise the lever for 10 seconds and wait for the buzzer
(see figure)
7. The restarting speed is stored
2nd case: Resetting the restarting speed

1. Engine running
2. Armrest lever in forward position (engaged)
3. Place the lever in reverse position
4. Press on the clutch pedal
5. Raise the lever for 10 seconds and wait for the buzzer
(see figure)
6. The restarting speed is stored in 13th ratio
7. It is possible to repeat the 1st case operation
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.17
E . Tests and diagnostics

Note: The test screen is divided in two halves:
- left hand side for DCC functions
- right hand side for TC functions
"Safety" function
- Start the engine
- Click on the "Safety" icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WTD-9
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.18
Wintest
Test
GO!
DCC
Help
TC
892
0
N
P-Lck
OFF
Error: 0
Error: 0
CAN
Request: No request
OK
Help
WTD-10
Parking brake switch and/or Park Lock lever

switch
Steering wheel lever Neutral switch (the

position of the steering wheel lever overrides
the action of the armrest lever)
Steering wheel lever Neutral position

N
Faulty switch
Armrest lever Neutral switch

N
Armrest lever in Neutral or Park Lock position
Steering wheel lever non-Neutral position
Issue 2
May 2002
Armrest lever switch in Working mode
11F04.19
Low pressure hydraulic circuit pressure

switch (pressure in bar)
Faulty switch
Gearbox 15 filter clogging switch
DCC touch sensitive switches

- change to reverse video when pressed
Booster pump pressure switch (3 bar)
Fault
Transmission mechanism Park Lock switch
- if this icon is in reverse video with the N flashing on the

dashboard a fault has occurred. Click on the icon to
learn the nature of the fault.
Error: O
Displays the error code number if a fault

occurs in the DCC
P-Lck
Park Lock solenoid valve status
OFF
Request: No request
Not used in the safety tests
- ON: solenoid valve activated. Park Lock disengaged

- OFF: solenoid valve deactivated. Park Lock engaged
Gearbox input speed in rpm (equals engine

speed)
892
Fault

Gearbox output speed in rpm

0
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.20
Error: 0

occurs in the TC
Not used in the safety tests
CAN
Issue 2
Indicates the CAN link between the DCC

and the TC but no test is carried out, solely
used as information.
May 2002
11F04.21
"Gearbox" function
- Start the engine.
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WTD-11
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.22
Wintest
Test
Testing the Gearbox
GO!
DCC
Help
TC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
897
0.5
0
1: 0.00 Amps
2: 0.00 Amps
-2
1.41
R: 0.00 Amps
24
A: 0.00 Amps
B: 0.00 Amps
16
C: 0.00 Amps
L: 0.00 Amps
100 %
M: 0.00 Amps
H: 0.00 Amps
0.49
0.74
Error: 0
2.41
Error: 0
CAN
OK
Request: Neutral
Power shuttle type lever, gear change down

switch or armrest lever
- changes to reverse video when a lower gear is selected
Power shuttle type, Forward switch
- changes to reverse video when Forward speed is

selected
Issue 2
Response: Neutral Gear engaged
Power shuttle type lever, gear change up

switch or armrest lever
- changes to reverse video when a higher gear is

selected
Help
May 2002
WTD-12
Power shuttle type lever or armrest lever

neutral switch
- not active
Power shuttle type lever or armrest lever

Reverse switch
- changes to reverse video if Reverse is selected
Top clutch pedal switch
- pedal up: reverse video

- pedal down: normal video
11F04.23
Front axle and differential overspeed (14

kph)
Clutch pedal travel potentiometer value (in

volts)
0.74
- clutch engaged = 0.67V 0.20
- de-clutched = 3.82V 0.20
Error : 0
Displays the number of the error code if

a fault occurs in the DCC

- pedal up: normal video
- pedal down: reverse video
Requested: Neutral
Displays the requests made to the DCC or T
Display of speed requested by the DCC

Design ground speed relationship to real
speed (if radar is fitted)
0.5
Forward gear pre-selected

4
Turbocharger pressure value converted to
volts
1.41
Reverse gear pre-selected
-2
Engine load in points (engine speed / turbocharger pressure ratio)
16
Clutch pedal travel potentiometer in percentage
- value between 0 and 255.
100 %
- value between 0% = de-clutched
100% = clutch engaged
Fault

Issue 2
May 2002

11F04.24
Signal from gearbox oil pressure switch
(17 bar)
Analog lever value in volts

0.49
- left side
- 17 bar = switch in reverse video

- 0 bar = switch in normal video
- high lever position (de-clutched) .................
- FWD+ .........................................................
- FWD ...........................................................
- FWD- ..........................................................
- N .................................................................
- REV- ...........................................................
- REV ............................................................
- REV+ ..........................................................
2.5 V
4V
3,5 V
3V
0,5 V
2V
1,5 V
1V
Display of gear selected by the TC
Armrest lever potentiometer value in volts:

1 : 0.00 Amps
2.41
- Neutral ......
- Forward ......................
- Reverse ......................
Current value in Amps of the 9

solenoid valves corresponding to
the clutches:
2,2 to 2,8 V
3,8 to 4,4 V
0,6 to 1,6 V
H : 0.00 Amps
Gearbox input speed in rpm
0.0A = solenoid valve closed

- 0.0A to 0.7A = solenoid valve opening
0.7A = solenoid valve full ope
897
Fault
Gearbox output speed in 100th of kph
Transmission temperature sensor in C

Error: 0
24
Issue 2
May 2002

a fault occurs in the TC
11F04.25
Response: Neutral Gear engaged

Displays the responses of the TC to the requests made
by the DCC.
CAN
Shows the CAN link between the DCC and

the TC. No test is carried out, for information
only.
OFF
OFF
Status of the 9 proportional solenoid valves corresponding to the clutches:

- OFF = solenoid valve closed
- ON = solenoid valve opening or fully open.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.26
"Front Axle" function
- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Front Axle" icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WTD-13
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.27
Flgende skrmbillede fremkommer:

Wintest
Test
GO!
DCC
Help
TC
1.2
PFA
Error: 0
ON
Error: 0
CAN
Request: No request
OK
Help
Response: Front Axle Off
WTD-14
Fault
Left and right brake switches

learn the nature of the DCC fault.
4WD switch
Icon changes to reverse video during front
axle overspeed.
4WD indicator lamp (in automatic mode an A

is displayed, in manual mode the A disappears)
Error: 0
Issue 2

a fault occurs in the DCC.
May 2002

11F04.28
Actual ground speed given by radar
Error: 0

occurs in the TC
0.0
CAN

Value of the gearbox output speed sensor

corresponding to forward speed in 100th of
kph
Request: No request
switch pressure in bar
- if pressure correct = reverse video

- if pressure less than 9 bar 1 = normal video
Indicates request for engaging or disengaging of 4WD

by the DCC (only if the 4WD toggle is held down)
Response: Front Axle Off

Indicates the engaging or disengaging of 4WD by the
TC.
PFA
4WD solenoid valve status
ON
- ON = solenoid valve activated 4WD disengaged
- OFF = solenoid valve deactivated 4WD engaged
Fault

learn the nature of the TC fault.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.29
Differential Lock function

- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Differential Lock" icon.
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WTD-15
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.30
Wintest
Test
Testing the Differential lock
GO!
DCC
Help
TC
0.0
Diff: 0.0 Amps
Error: 0
Diff
OFF
Error: 0
CAN
OK
Request: No request
Help
Response: Differential Off
WTD-16
Fault

Differential lock switches
Icon changes to reverse video during differential lock overspeed
Error: 0
Issue 2
May 2002
Displays error code number if a fault

occurs in the DCC
Actual ground speed given by radar
Error: 0
11F04.31

occurs in the TC
0.0
Value of the gearbox output speed sensor

corresponding to forward speed in 100th of
kph
Diff
Differential lock ON / OFF switch
OFF
- ON = Differential lock engaged
- OFF = Differential lock disengaged

switch pressure in bar
CAN


Request: No request
Indicates the requests of the DCC toTC
Response: Differential Off

Diff : 0.00 Amps Value of supply current to differential lock solenoid valve
Indicates the response of the TC to the DCC request.
0.0A = solenoid valve deactivated

- 0.5A to 1.2A = solenoid valve activated
or
Lift control 3-position switch. Shows Work or Up position
Fault

Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.32
"Power Take-Off" function
- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Power Take-Off" icon.
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WTD-17
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.33
Wintest
Test
GO!
DCC
Help
TC
1102
0
PTO: 0.00 A
PTO
OFF
Stop
OFF
Stop: 0.00 A
Error: 0
Error: 0
CAN
Request: No request
OK
Help
Response: PTO Off
WTD-18

wing)
PTO switch
- PTO disengaged: normal video

- PTO engaged: reverse video
- emergency stop deactivated: circuit closed, icon in

reverse video
- emergency stop pressed: circuit open, icon in normal
video
- switch not fitted: reverse video
PTO brake switch
- brake off: normal video

- brake on: reverse video
PTO indicator lamp
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.34
Fault

Value of supply current to PTO
solenoid valve
PTO: 0.00 A
Fejl: 0

occurs in the DCC


STOP : 0.00 A
Value of supply current to PTO

brake solenoid valve
1102
PTO clutch output sensor value. The PTO
speed = engine speed
Fault
0
- Comparison of the two speeds permits detection of
PTO clutch slip.
PTO output shaft sensor value. Displays

PTO speed in rpm

Error: 0

occurs in the TC
0
- This value must correspond to that displayed by the
DCC
PTO
switch pressure, in bar
PTO solenoid valve
OFF
- ON = solenoid valve activated, PTO engaged
- OFF = solenoid valve deactivated, PTO disengaged.

Issue 2
May 2002
STOP
11F04.35
PTO brake solenoid valve
OFF
- ON = solenoid valve activated, brake on
- OFF = solenoid valve deactivated, brake off.
CAN

Request: No request
Indicates the requests of the DCC to TC
Response: PTO Off

Indicates the response of the TC to the DCC request.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.36
E . List of error codes
- Wintest allows you to display and erase the error codes

stored by the TC/DCC.
- Click on the "Tool" icon and on "List of Error codes"
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
H elp
Wintest
Parameters...
TC parameters
DCC parameters
Programming TC
Programming DCC
List of error codes
OK
Help
WTD-19
Issue 2
May 2002
11F04.37
Stored errors
81
80
136
138
140
156
x
x
x
x
x
x
00001
00001
00052
00052
00052
00032
OK
Help
Erase
WA3-20
- It enables you to see all the error codes that have been
stored and the number of times they have appeared.
- If you click on "Erase", all the error codes will be deleted
from the TC and DCC memory.
Note: For the list of error codes, see section 11B01 of

this manual.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.1
11 F05 Electronic linkage with Wintest
CONTENTS
A.
Using the Electronic linkage control with Wintest ____
B.
Tests and diagnostics ______________________________
C.
Error codes ________________________________________
D.
Adjusting the position sensor _______________________
10
E.
Setting the parameters _____________________________
12
F.
Dual control/TIC ___________________________________
19
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.2
A. Using the Electronic linkage

control with Wintest
Description
The Wintest software allows to display the functioning
of the electronic control linkage and to detect any
malfunction.
status displayed on the screen of the portable PC.
- If no there is no change whatsoever, check the
connectors, the ignition switch and test the wiring
corresponding to the relevant function.
connector terminals and the colour of the corresponding
wires.
Example: The icon corresponding to the Hare / Tortoise range switch has been selected. Information
J1 32 = Switch J1 of Autotronic 3, terminal No. 32,
wire colour white.
Wintest
Test
Wintest
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
4.1
0.0 Amps
Off
0.0 Amps
Off
100 %
280
280
Range
switch
Err : 0
Connector: J1-32
Colour: White
Off
Switch black--> Range switched
OK
TCU 2
EV1
On
EV2
Off
OK
Help
WRE-1
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.3
B. Tests and diagnostics

"Electronic control linkage" function
- Start the engine
- Toggle the 3-position selector at least once to the
Raise position to activate linkage control
- Click on the "Electronic Linkage Control" icon
ELECTRONIC LINKAGE CONTROL TEST
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WRE-2
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.4
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
Wintest
Testing the Electronic Linkage Control
215
240
18
159
159
41
140
--
1098
0.0
99
OK
Help
OK
Help
WRE-3
3-position selector position indicator - Lowered Position
Lowering speed potentiometer value in

points:
215
- lock position = 0
- red sector (manual control = from 0 to approximately
200)
- yellow sector (automatic control) = from approximately 200 to 250
- error at 255
3-position selector position indicator - Neutral Position
Lift arm height limit potentiometer, value in

points:
240
- maximum limit = 61
- minimum limit = 240
- error at 255
Solenoid valves activated indicator - No

3-position selector position indicator Raised Position
Issue 2
May 2002
Solenoid valves activated indicator - Raise

- -
Solenoid valves activated indicator - Lower

11F05.5
Display of error code in case of fault
Left draft sensor value in points

159
- no load approximately 165
- error at 255
Intermix potentiometer value in points

Right draft sensor value in points
0
- pure draft = 0
- pure position = 250
- error at 255
159
- no load approximately 165
- error at 255
Transport damper indicator lamp
- if transport damper is activated and 3-position switch

is in high position = reverse video
Transport damper pulse switch
Position sensor value in points

41
- high position = 235
- low position = 50
- correct adjustment = 235 1 point
Battery voltage value in points. A value

between 120 and 160
Depth potentiometer value in points
140
18
-
position 10 (low) = about 11

position 5 = about 125
position 0 (high) = about 236 approximately
error at about 255
Power supply to lift control computer safety

relay
- relay powered = reverse video
Error indicator
- this icon flashes according to the linkage error code
Issue 2
May 2002

11F05.6
External Lower control push button
1098
Ground speed provided by radar in tenths of

kph
Sidelights and headlights switch
0.0
Design ground speed provided by forward

speed sensor in tenths of kph
Autotronic 2 only
+ power supply engine running
- + present with engine running: reverse video
- + absent with engine running: normal video
"Tools" icon for adjustment of the position

sensor (see further on).
Wheel slip control value in Hertz
99
Required value
on Datatronic
display
Frequency
to be read
on ELC
0% slip
100 Hz
5% slip
150 Hz
10% slip
200 Hz
15% slip
250 Hz
20% slip
300 Hz
etc.
Note: To display the frequency in Wintest, activate

wheel slip control on the Datatronic.
External Raise control push button
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.7
C. Error codes
- The electronic linkage control computer is able to detect certain faults in the wiring harness or lift control components.
- When a fault is identified:
. the auto-diagnostic lamp on the lift control console flashes according to the error
. in Wintest, the error code is displayed
- The first figure of the error code denotes the gravity of the failure:
. 1 = serious
. 2 = medium
. 3 = minor
- The second figure of the error code indicates the fault.
Code
Fault
Effect
Action
1-1
Raise or Lower solenoid valve

disconnected
Supply cut to solenoids of lift valve.

No lift arm movements authorised.
Stop the
engine. Correct
the fault.
Restart the
engine. Reset
the console
1-2
Short circuit on Raise solenoid

valve
Cuts power to lift control valve

solenoids.
Stop the
engine. Correct
the fault.
Restart the
engine. Reset
the console
1-3
Short circuit on Lower solenoid

valve

solenoids.
Stop the
engine. Correct
the fault.
Restart the
engine. Reset
the console
1-5
External controls fault

solenoids.
Stop the
engine. Correct
the fault.
Restart the
engine. Reset
the console
1-6
Supply greater than 18V

solenoids.
Stop the
engine. Correct
the fault.
Restart the
engine. Reset
the console
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.8
Code
Fault
Effect
Action
1-7
Short circuit in internal 9.5V relay line

solenoids.
Stop the
engine.
Correct the
fault. Restart
the engine.
Reset the
console
1-8
Fault in 3-position switch

solenoids.
Stop the
engine. Correct
the fault.
Restart the
engine. Reset
the console
2-2
Fault in position sensor
ELC console locked
Repair fault.
Reset ELC
2-3
Fault in depth potentiometer
ELC console locked
Repair fault.
Reset ELC
2-4
Fault in height limit potentiometer
ELC console locked
Repair fault.
Reset ELC
2-7
Power supply below 10V
ELC console locked
Repair fault.
Reset ELC
3-1
Fault on right draft sensor
The ELC operates but the diagnostics

lamp flashes
Repair fault.
Reset ELC
3-2
Fault on left draft sensor

lamp flashes
Repair fault.
Reset ELC
Issue 2
May 2002
Code
Fault
Effect
11F05.9
Action
3-4
Fault in lowering speed

potentiometer

lamp flashes. The automatic lowering
speed is selected
Repair fault.
Reset ELC
3-6
Fault in intermix potentiometer

lamp flashes
Repair fault.
Reset ELC
3-8
Tractor parameters are lost
Selection of default AA parameters

in relation to the transmission calculator.
The electronic linkage control operates
with the wrong parameters. The diagnostic
lamp flashes.
Reset calculator
parameters. If
problem persists, replace
the calculator.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.10
D . Adjusting the position sensor

Selecting "Position sensor" selection
Wintest
Linkage Diagnostics
204
249
174
158
191
- -
00
184
170
130
118
255
OK
Help
OK
Help
Position sensor
Linkage .....
Linkage diagnostics
Dual Control parameters
Linkage parameters
Trailed implements parameters
WRE-4
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.11
Selecting "Position sensor" selection

- The following screen is displayed:
Wintest
Option
Tester
Aide
GO!
Help
Wintest
Linkage Diagnostics
252
240
16
162
163
46
140
Linkage Parameters
46
853
Visser Capteur Position
OK
Help
OK
Help
OK
Help
WRE-5
- Using the external controls, place the lift arms in the

maximum raised position.
- Screw the sensor in completely on the cam.
First method
- Mark the linkage cover and the upper lift arm.
- Lower the linkage 3 to 5 mm in relation to the mark.
Second method
- Measure the distance between the ground and the ball
joint of the lower arm.
- Lower the linkage about 35 to 45 mm in relation to the
1st measured value.
- Screw or unscrew the position sensor according to the
request displayed on screen in order to obtain a value
of 235 1 point.
- When the correct adjustment value is reached the
gauge colour changes to green.
Issue 2
May 2002
Testing the Electronic Linkage Control

11F05.12
E . Setting the parameters

Setting the linkage parameters
- When you select "Linkage parameters" the following
screen is displayed:
- Enter the AA and BB codes depending on the type of

tractor and options.
- Click on "OK" if you have modified a parameter to
validate the code.
- Click on "Cancel" if you have merely checked the
parameter code or if you want to quit this mode.
Note: The parameter code is printed on an adhesive

label beneath the fuse box.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.13
Parameter codes
AA CODE FOR MF TRACTORS LINKAGE CALCULATOR
Models
Hydraulic circuit
lift ram
AA Code
6235 to 6270
Open centre
66 mm
01
6270 / 6280 / 6290
Open centre
75 mm
02
6235 / 6245
CCLS 90 l
66 mm
05
6245
CCLS 90 l
75 mm
19
6255 6270
CCLS 105 l
66 mm
09
6270 / 6280 / 6290
CCLS 105 l
75 mm
10
8210 to 8250 Dynashift
CCLS 110 l
95 mm
11
8210 to 8250 Dynashift
CCLS 150 l
95 mm
13
8210 to 8250
Full Powershift
CCLS 110 l
95 mm
15
8260 to 8280
Full Powershift
CCLS 110 l
105 mm
16
8210 to 8250
Full Powershift
CCLS 150 l
95 mm
17
8260 to 8280
Full Powershift
CCLS 150 l
105 mm
18
Issue 2
May 2002

11F05.14
Parameter codes
AA CODE FOR AGCO TRACTORS LINKAGE CALCULATOR
Models
Hydraulic circuit
lift ram
AA Code
RT 95
CCLS 105 l
66 mm
09
RT 115
CCLS 105 l
75 mm
10
AGCO RT 130 / RT 145
CCLS 110 l
95 mm
11
AGCO RT 130 / RT 145
CCLS 150 l
95 mm
13
AGCO DT
CCLS 110 l
95 mm
15
AGCO DT
CCLS 110 l
105 mm
16
AGCO DT
CCLS 150 l
95 mm
17
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.15
BB CODE - LINKAGE CALCULATOR OPTIONS
No. of
electro
-hydraulic
spool valves
Joystick
Front
Dual
control
Rear
Dual
control
Front
linkage
capacity
Trailed
implement
control (TIC)
BB
code
01
02
04
05
With
Drawbar sensor
08
With and without

Drawbar sensor
09
With
Drawbar sensor
10
With and without

Drawbar sensor
11
13
14
With
Drawbar sensor
17
With and without

Drawbar sensor
18
Nota : 0 = Without option

1 = With option
* = Whatever the capacity
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.16
BB CODE - LINKAGE CALCULATOR OPTIONS
No. of
electro
-hydraulic
spool valves
Joystick
Front
Dual
control
Rear
Dual
control
Front
linkage
capacity
Trailed
implement
control (TIC)
BB
code
3,5 t
With
Drawbar sensor
25
5t
With
Drawbar sensor
26
2,2 t
With and without

Drawbar sensor
27
3,5 t
With and without

Drawbar sensor
28
5t
With and without

Drawbar sensor
29
Nota : 0 = Without option

1 = With option
* = Whatever the capacity
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.17
- Select "Linkage Diagnostics".

- The following screen is displayed:
Linkage Diagnostics
Tractor code
Display all
Parameter
Parameter value
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
16683
7
4
6
5
200
51
8
8
7
OK
Cancel
Help
Linkage Diagnostics
Tractor code
Display all
Parameter
Parameter value
P 55
P 56
P 57
P 58
P 59
P 60
P 61
P 62
P 63
P 64
P 65
P 66
P 67
P 68
P 69
DeadBandJoystick
K.O.
Seuilthreshold
K.O.
Pin sensing
9
10
5
74
34
64
20
14
7
2
4
5
6
2
1
10
80
60kN
OK
Cancel
Issue 2
Help
May 2002
11F05.18
Linkage Diagnostics
Tractor code
Extended display.
Display all
Parameter
Parameter value
Pin sensing
Drawbar
Trans. controller type
Position sensor type
Panel type
EH Dual valve
Dual pos. sensor
Front linkage pos. sensor
Ram type
Joystick
Front linkage
TIC
Dual
Lift control valve
Hydraulic pump
P 90
P 91
Programme version
60kN
150kN
TC
BOSCH
6200/8200
None
With
With
Diameter 95
Without
Without Front linkage
With TIC
With dual Ctrl
LS 110L
EHR23 LS100L
0
0
18
OK
- The values or option are displayed according to the

parameter code of the ELC calculator
Issue 2
May 2002
Cancel
Help
11F05.19
F . Dual Control/TIC
1. Test
The Dual Control icons and parameters can be
accessed to via the "Testing the Electronic Linkage
Control" screen.
Wintest
Linkage Diagnostics
Test du Relevage
204
249
174
158
191
- -
00
184
170
130
118
255
OK
Help
OK
Help
WRE-6
Spool valve control lever potentiometer,

value in points
144
-
Truck sensor value in points

188
lower limit: 20
neutral adjustment: 144
upper limit: 250
error at 255
- 4 mm truck fully down: 23

- 1 mm truck fully up: 215
Note: Unlock the ELC console to adjust the sensors
(TIC) drawbar draft sensor

255
- at no load: about 165
- default value : 255
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.20
2. Dual Control Parameters
- Click on the "Tools" icon and then "Dual Control

Parameters".
Wintest
Linkage Diagnostics
Test du Relevage
204
249
174
158
191
- -
00
184
170
130
118
255
OK
Help
OK
Help
Position sensor
Linkage .....
Linkage diagnostics
Dual Control parameters
Linkage parameters
Trailed implements parameters
WRE-7
Note: The "Trailed implements parameters" function

is not available.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F05.21
Wintest
Test
GO!
Options
Help
Help
ParaDual
Move Up
63
No Move
59
Move Down
OK
Cancel
WRE-8
63
Move Up current, value in points
t
- The aim of the parameter setting is to adjust the
beginning of the opening of the solenoid valves of the
electro hydraulic spool valves.
- Connect a 0 - 300 bar pressure gauge to the hydraulic
pump output connector.
- Bring the oil temperature up to between 50C and 60C.
- Nothing must be connected to the auxiliary spool
valves.
- On the ParaDual screen click on "Move Up". Increase
or reduce the value of the current by clicking on s or t
to obtain a pressure of 200 bar. Stop the control by
clicking on "No move".
- Click on "Move Down". Increase or reduce the value of
the current by clicking on s or t to obtain a pressure of
200 bar. Stop the control by clicking on "No Move".
59
More Down current, value in point.
t
- Disconnect the pressure gauge.
The adjustment is correct if the tool reacts at the same
time as the ELC. If the reactions are too abrupt, reduce
the value of the current. On the other hand, if they are too
slow, increase the current value.
Note:
- A value of 40 points corresponds to a slight opening and therefore a slight flow rate.
- A value of 100 points corresponds to full opening
and therefore the full flow rate.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F06.1
11 F06 Datatronic 2 with Wintest
CONTENTS
A.
Using the Datatronic 2 with Wintest ________________
B.

1. Testing the Datatronic ___________________________
2. Programming, setting parameters
and Selecting the language ______________________
3
3
Issue 2
May 2002
11F06.2
A . Using the Datatronic 2 with

Wintest
Description
Autotronic 2 parameters as well as to display and detect
any malfunction.
status displayed on the screen of the portable PC.
Example: The icon corresponding to the Hare / Tortoise
range switch has been selected. Information concerning it is displayed in a window:
J1 - 32 - Switch J1 of Autotronic 3, terminal No. 32, wire
colour: white.
Wintest
Test
Testing the gearbox
GO!
Help
Autotronic
1064
4.1
0.0 Amps
Off
0.0 Amps
Off
100 %
280
280
Range
switch
Err : 0
Connector: J1-32
Colour: White
Off
OK
TCU 2
EV1
On
EV2
Off
OK
Help
WDA-1
Issue 2
May 2002
11F06.3
B . Tests and diagnostics

Datatronic function
1. Testing the Datatronic
- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Datatronic" icon
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
OK
Help
WDA-2
Issue 2
May 2002
11F06.4
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Testing the Datatronic
273
113
0
1
21
188
166
OK
OK
Help
Help
WDA-3
273
Display of radar signal = 273 Hz for 10 kph

(fixed value).

0
Real ground speed (radar) in tenths of kph
Design or actual forward speed displayed by

the Datatronic in tenths of kph
0
- less than 1 kph = value is not reliable
113
Design forward speed value in Hertz (value

varies according to calibration):
- default value = 108 Hz for 10 kph

- calibration is automatically carried out each time the
tractor exceeds 20 kph
- depending upon tractor models, the calibration value
is between 100 Hz and 150 Hz.
Issue 2
May 2002
- if the tractor travels at a speed less than 1 kph = design

speed displayed
- if the tractor travels at a speed greater than 1 kph = real
ground speed displayed
- if design and real ground speeds are greater than 20
kph and there is a 10% difference between them =
design speed displayed.
1
11F06.5
Value of one cubic centimetre per flow meter turbine revolution (fixed value)
- value 1 = Perkins engine

- value 5 = Valmet engine
Fuel flow rate value at flow meter input in

tenths of litres/hour
188
Fuel flow rate value at flow meter output in

tenths of litres/hour
166
21
Fuel consumption value displayed on

Datatronic in tenths of litres/hour
- value displayed equals difference between flow meter input and output
"Tools" icon for programming, setting parameters and selecting the language.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F06.6
2. Programming, setting parameters and selecting

the language
- It is necessary to turn the ignition off after each
manipulation of the different menus.
Programming
- Turn off the ignition key
- Start the engine
- Click on "Tools" and then "Programming Datatronic 2"
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
273
115
0
17
192
176
OK
OK
Help
Help
Parameters
Programming Datatronic 2
WDA-4
Issue 2
May 2002
11F06.7

Wintest
Test
Option
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
273
115Datatronic
Testing the
0
Are you sure?
17
192
176
OK
Yes
No
OK
Help
Help
WDA-5
After each programming operation, it is

necessary to set the parameters and select
the desired language.
- Click on: YES to carry out the programming

NO to cancel the programming.
- Two successive gauges indicate the progression of
programming.
- After programming, check the CAN speed of the
Datatronic which must be:
. 100 for tractors fitted with Autotronic 2
. 250 for tractors fitted with Autotronic 3 or TC / DCC
- The CAN speed is displayed on the Datatronic screen
for 3 seconds after turning on the ignition.
- To modify the CAN network speed, carry out the
following:
- turn off the ignition key
- turn on the ignition key, you have 3 seconds to press
the Datatronic memory key (100 is in reverse video)
and to turn clockwise the Datatronic button to display
250 instead of 100.
- turn the ignition key off and then turn it on again to
check that SPEED 100 has changed to SPEED 250.
- turn off the ignition key.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F06.8
PARAMETERS
- Turn the ignition key on and restart the engine.
- Click on the "Tools" icon and on "Parameters", then on
"Programming Datatronic 2".
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
273
113
0
20
188
168
OK
OK
Help
Help
Parameters
Datatronic 2 Parameters
Translate Datatronic 2
WDA-6
Issue 2
May 2002
11F06.9

Wintest
Test
Option
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
273
115
Dual Control
0 Imp.
Trailed
39
0
0
10
1
9
17
192
100
176
OK
40
Help
Help
OK
OK
Cancel
Help
Trailed Imp.
Option not available
WDA-7
Setting the Datatronic parameters
The Datatronic parameter code is composed of 2 figures corresponding to the tractor code or AA code.
Dual Control
s
39
AA code (tractor model) found on

the tractors code label
t
- using the up or down arrow select the correct code
Dual Control option

- if the tractor has Dual Control, tick the box
- if the tractor does not have Dual Control, remove the
tick from the box
Issue 2
May 2002

11F06.10
Front Dual Control

- if the tractor has Front Dual Control, tick the box.
- if the tractor has no Front Dual Control, click on box to
remove tick.
Trailed Imp.
- if the tractor is fitted with the TIC function, tick the box.
- if the tractor is not fitted with the TIC function, click on
box to remove tick.
Joystick
- if the tractor is fitted with the Joystick function, tick
the box.
- if the tractor is not fitted with the Joystick function, click
on box to remove tick.
Click on the icon to show the frequency

selected for pin 10
Click on the icon to show the frequency

selected for pin 9
40
Gauge for adjusting the frequency of the PTO or engine

speed
- click on the pointer and drag it to the desired Y value
(figure displayed to right of gauge)
- possible adjustment of Y is between 40 and
60 Hz/rev/sec.
Issue 2
- Calculation of real and design speeds:

X = (f x 10) / V
where:
X is in Hz / 10 kph = Coefficient to be set on the
Datatronic 2
f is in Hz
= Desired output frequency on
the 16-pin connector
V is in kph
= Forward speed for the desired
frequency
- Calculation of engine speed and PTO frequencies:
Y = (f x 60) / M
where:
Y is in Hz / rev/sec = Coefficient to be set on the
Datatronic 2
f is in Hz
= Desired output frequency on
the 16-pin connector
M is in rev/min
= Rotational speed for the desired frequency
Example:
An implement manufacturer needs a 130 Hz m/s output
frequency in order to operate his electronic device from
the tractors radar.
1 m/s = 3.6 kph therefore 130 Hz / m/s =
130 Hz / 3.6 kph
100
Gauge for adjusting the frequency of the real or design

ground speed
- click on the pointer and drag it to the desired X value
(figure displayed to right of gauge)
- possible adjustment of X is between 100 and 400 Hz
/kph
Setting the frequency output parameters

- 2 frequency outputs are possible at the 16-pin connector:
- terminal 9: design forward speed (speed sensor) or
PTO speed frequency.
- terminal 10: real ground speed (radar) or engine speed
frequency.
May 2002
Using the formula: X = (f x 10) / V

X = (130 x 10) / 3.6
X = 361 Hz / 10 kph
- Adjust the output frequency using the gauge pointer
and set it to 361.
11F06.11
SELECTING THE LANGUAGE

- Turn off the ignition key.
- Start the engine.
- Click on "Tools", "Parameters" then "Translate
Datatronic 2".
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
273
113
0
20
188
168
OK
OK
Help
Help
Parameters
Translate Datatronic 2....
WDA-8
Issue 2
May 2002
11F06.12
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
273
115
0
FRANCAIS
ENGLISH UK
ENGLISH US
FUOMI
PORTUGUES
ITALIANO
17
192
SVENSKA
DEUTSCH
ESPAGNOL
OK
174
DANSK
NORGE
OK
HOLLANDS
Help
Help
Parameters
Translate Datatronic 2....
WDA-9
-
Click on the desired language

Turn off the ignition key
Turn on the ignition key
Check that the Datatronic is in the selected language.
Issue 2
May 2002
SERIES 6200/8200 TRACTORS
11F07.1
11 F07 Joystick with Wintest
SOMMAIRE
A.
Using the Joystick _________________________________
B.
C.
Joystick calibration ________________________________
D.
Valve parameters __________________________________
Issue 2
May 2002

11F07.2
Spool valve screen
A . Using the Joystick

The Joystick called SMS (Spool valve Management
System) controls two electro hydraulic proportional
spool valves.
The electric deplacement of the Joystick is check by the
ELC who controls the movement of the spool valve
according the informations received from the various
switchs or the Datatronic.
As an option, a button can be installed on the Joystick
pommel to control two additional spool valves.
Since this information is not transmitted through the CAN
network, it cannot be displayed by Wintest.
Description
The Joystick and SMS (Spool valve Management System) could be tested and the default functions could be
detected with Wintest software.
A self-diagnostics system generates error codes that are
displayed on the Wintest Test screen of the Datatronic (if
installed) and lights the indicator lamp located on the ON/
OFF switch (see GUF71).
To carry out testing with Wintest, the status of a function
on the tractor is modified and compared with status
displayed on the screen of the portable PC.
- If the icon corresponding to the function is displayed in
reverse video, this indicates that 12V is present.
- If the icon corresponding to the function is displayed in
normal video, this indicates that 12V is absent.
Issue 2
May 2002
- When starting Wintest, select tractor options to have

the Joystick screen.
11F07.3
B . Tests and diagnostics

The "Joystick" function
- Start the engine.
- Click on the "Joystick" icon
Wintest
OK
Help
WJO-1
Issue 2
May 2002
11F07.4
Joystick
Joystick
EHRC
Valve SB23
On
Up
Neutral
Down
M
X+:100%
X-:100%
Y+:100%
Y-:100%
CAN
CAN
1: -47 %
2:
0 %
47 %
Float
Err : 0
Up
Neutral
Down
0 %
Float
Err : 0
Ver :
2. 1
OK
Help
WJO-2
X+:100%
X-:100%
Y+:100%
Y-:100%
On
SMS ON / OFF switch
Stored flowrate values according to different

axes
- switch ON = reverse video
Indicator lamp situated in the middle of the

ON / OFF switch
Joystick positioning
- indicator lamp ON = reverse video

- The blue point shows the current position of the Joystick.
It remains at the centre when no manoeuvre is engaged.
- The 1st inner square corresponds to 80% of the flowrate.
- The 2nd square corresponds to 100% of the flowrate.
Beyond this range the position becomes floating.
M
Flowrate memory switch
- switch ON = reverse video
Issue 2
May 2002
1:0%
% value of the Joystick movement along the

X+ / X- axis
2:0%
% value of the Joystick movement along the

Y+ / Y- axis
11F07.5
Up
Neutra
Down
Each tick in box shows the lever position

(Up, Neutral, Down, Floating position)
Float
Err : 0
Shows SMS related error codes
- if an error code is displayed, see section 11H01
Displays the instantaneous valve flowrate in

%
47 %
CAN
Shows the CAN link between the

Joystick, the ELC calculator and
the valves
Tools icon for calibrating the Joystick and

setting valve parameters
Issue 2
May 2002
11F07.6
C . Joystick calibration
- Click on the "Tools" icon, then on "Joystick calibration"
Joystick
Joystick
EHRC
On
Up
Neutral
D own
M
X+:100%
X-:100%
Y+:100%
Y-:100%
CAN
1:
2:
CAN
0 %
0 %
0 %
Float
Err : 0
Up
Neutral
D own
0 %
Float
Err : 0
Ver :
2. 1
OK
Help
Joystick calibration
Valve parameters
WJO-3
Issue 2
May 2002
11F07.7
Joystick calibration
Joystick
EHRC
C AN
1:
2:
C AN
0 %
0 %
Move the Joystick

Stop
Ver :
2. 1
OK
Help
WJO-4
- The system will record the lever movement in each

direction. Therefore the lever should be moved to the
maximum in the four directions (X+ / X- / Y+ / Y-) till
the first hard spot (without going, in the floating position,
beyond the second dotted square).
Note : The blue point moves on the screen according

to the last calibration values. If the last values are
very small, it is possible not to see the point moving.
So don't care of the movement of the point.
- When you have moved the lever in the four directions,
click on "STOP" to stop the Joystick calibration.
- The calibration is then accepted. During the Joystick
movement the hard spot of the floating position should
be situated around the second square.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F07.8
D . Valve parameters
- Click on the "Valve parameters"
Valve parameters
Valve Type
DUAL
CONTROL
Longitudinal Joystick
OK
Valve
Retry
Cancel
Help
WJO-5
Note: If no valve is detected, no icons are displayed

in the left-side windows.
Tick the box for setting X valve

parameters
Green valve
Tick the box for setting Y valve
parameters
- valve configured along the X axis of the Joystick
Red valve
- valve configured along the Y axis of the Joystick
Black valve
- valve configured for Dual Control / TIC
Issue 2
May 2002
DUAL
CONTROL
Tick the box for setting Dual

Control valve / TIC valve parameters
11F07.9
The setting is done in three steps

- detection of the present spool valve.
- selection of the type of spool valve and its position .
- start the parametering .
Detection of the present spool valve

- The software programme should detect only one valve
at a time. Disconnect valves that do not need parameter
settings. Only the valve requiring parameter settings
should be connected.
- If all the valves are connected, when you parameter, all
the valves are going to work in the same way.
Exemple : The two valves are parameter in X position,
the system doesn't detect the Y valve and error 10 will
be flashing on the ON/OFF switch or diplayed on
theDataronic.
- At the opening of the parameter screen, the software
detects the type of valve connected on the CAN.
There are four possibilities:
. Joystick crosswise movement related spool valve
(Red).
. or Joystick fore and aft movement related spool valve
(Green).
. or DUAL spool valve (Black).
. or service exchange valves (White).
- When the software doesnt detect any spool valve the
message No detection, valve 100Khz or 29 bits
appears.
Check the connection of the concerned spool valve :
. if connected check out the harness, the ELC
parameter, The ELC calculator references.
. if not reconnect it and click on "RETRY".
Issue 2
May 2002
11F07.10
Select the type of valve and its position

- Before starting parametering, the type of valve and its
position needs to be selected on the right of the screen.
- Click the selected valve. Only one choice is possible.
If it is not done, the message No selection will
appear.
- There are three choices:
. Joystick crosswise movement related spool valve
(Green).
. or Joystick fore and aft movement related spool valve
(Red).
. or DUAL spool valve (Black).
- Click on OK to parameter the connected valve
Note : Parametering will be done correctly only if
the selected valve is different from the detected
valve.
Valve parameter
Valve Type
DUAL
CONTROL
Longitudinal Joystick
Valve
OK
Retry
Cancel
Help
WJO-6
- The types of valves are always (like the detection)

relative to a colour (see Detection of type of valve ).
Issue 2
May 2002
11F07.11
Starting parameter
- Once the spool valve has been detected and selected,
press "OK" to start the parametering.
- The software is sending instructions to the spool valve.
A few seconds is needed to send the parameters.
During this time, the message "Parametering" is written
in the bottom left corner of the screen.
- When done, another message appears, that can be
different depending of the results:
When the parametering is done right
- the message "Parameters OK" appears a few seconds.
When the parametering is not done right
. the valve keeps the original parameters (same state as
before the operation).
- In both cases, the software stops automatically the
function Parametering.
- Some error messages could be displayed:
. Selection = Detection: the selected spool valve is
the same as the detected spool valve.
. No Detection, valve 100Khz or 29 bits: no spool
valve detected (see Detection of the type of valve ).
. No Selection: No valve type selected (see Selection of
type of spool valve).
. Parameter error: The valve doesnt accepted the
parameters and kept the original ones.
Note : reset the Joystick menu to main menu to be

able to use it. Otherwise Joystick menu remains
locked.
Issue 2
May 2002
11F08.1
11 F08 Autotronic 3 to Kit Autotronic
CONTENTS
A.
Programming Autotronic 3 __________________________
B.
Accessing the Wintest main menu __________________
C.
Parameters ________________________________________
Issue 1
May 2002
11F08.2
A . Programming Autotronic 3
- Programming Autotronic 3 in Autotronic Kit is required
to :
. change the CAN network from 250 Kbits (Autotronic
3) over to 100 Kbits (Autotronic 2 type)
. integrate the X32 program in Autotronic 3
- Switch on the ignition key to carry out this operation. The
minimum voltage should be 12.5 Volts.
Note: It is necessary to set Autotronic 3 parameters

after programming.
- After accessing Wintest, click on Options then on
Auto 3 ---> Autotronic Kit.
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO! Autotronic kit ----> Auto3Help

Auto3 ----> Autotronic kit
Update
WinTest V1.10.06
B00003001456
M. ROCHEFOUCAULT
AGCO
TC
DCC
TCU 092
TCU 093
DATA2
AUTO3
KIT AUTOTRONIC
Issue 1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.14
2.14
R
C
D001208
B11
X32
May 2002
Important
- When programming Autotronic 3 as a replacement
to Autotronic 2, only the CAN network between the
PC and Autotronic 3 should be left connected
(disconnect the ELC calculator and Datatronic 2, if
installed).
- Use the harness ref. 3378244 M1.
11F08.3
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Are you sure?
Yes
No
OK
Help

Issue 1
May 2002
11F08.4
Wintest
Tester
Option
Aide
GO!
Help
WinTest V1.10.06
B00003001456
M. ROCHEFOUCAULT
AGCO
TC
DCC
TCU 092
TCU 093
DATA2
AUTO3
KIT AUTOTRONIC
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.14
2.14
R
C
D001208
B11
X32
AUTO3_100K
Note: The indicator gauge may take 1 or 2 minutes to

be displayed.
Issue 1
May 2002
During programming, several error messages may
be displayed:
1. Stop the engine
9. Unable to program data
11F08.5
Correction method
Message 3 : Autotronic 3 is already programmed in
Autotronic Kit
Messages 4 - 5: Check connection of the CAN BOX
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
WinTest V1.10.06
B00003001456
M. ROCHEFOUCAULT
AGCO
TC
DCC
TCU 092
TCU 093
DATA2
AUTO3
KIT AUTOTRONIC
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.14
2.14
R
C
D001208
B11
X32
AUTO3_100K
Impossible to enter in
programming mode
Retry
Issue 1
Cancel
May 2002
11F08.6
B . Accessing the Wintest main menu

- To access the Wintest main menu in Autotronic kit
mode, click on GO.
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
WinTest V1.10.06
B00003001456
M. ROCHEFOUCAULT
AGCO
TC
DCC
TCU 092
TCU 093
DATA2
AUTO3
KIT AUTOTRONIC
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.14
2.14
R
C
D001208
B11
X32
Setup
Kit Autotronic
OK
Autotronic 2
TC-DCC
Cancel
Autotronic 3
Help
Datatronic 2
Linkage
Joystick
- Select Autotronic Kit

- Select, according to functions available:
. Datatronic 2
. Linkage
- Click on OK.
Issue 1
May 2002
11F08.7
C . Parameters
side of the dashboard near the fuse box. This code has
12 figures and corresponds to the 11 parameters whose
meaning is shown below.

Parameter code
AA
Setting
27
Code AA = 27 = 6180 Dynashift hydraulic closed center

Code
B = 3 = 4 WD memory
Code
C = 1 = with Hare / Tortoise synchro
Code
D = 1 = with 4 x 2 gearbox
Code
Code
Code
G = 1 = Dynashift with steering wheel lever
Code
H = 4 = Preselect reverse shuttle
Code
I = 0 = 3000 - 3100 - 3600
Code
J = 0 = without creeper unit
Code
K = 1 = PTO with ON / OFF solenoid valve
Issue 1
May 2002
11F08.8
Parameter codes for Autotronic 1 and basic Autotronic 2 : 6100 - 3000 - 3100
CODE AA
MODEL
WITH
Non modified
flow rate
AUTOTRONIC 1 hydraulic pump
up to
OR
No.D125026
BASIC
AUTOTRONIC 2
Increased flow rate hydraulic

pump from No.D125027
onwards
Speedshift
tractors with
30 Kph
mechanical
limitation or
Dynashift
Speedshift
tractors with
30 Kph
electronic speed
limitation from
No.G083035
onwards
Speedshift
tractors with
30 Kph
mechanical
limitation or
Dynashift
Speedshift
tractors with
30 Kph
electronic speed
limitation from
No.G083035
onwards
19
30
25
32
6110 - 6120
6130 - 6140
3050 - 3055
3060 - 3065
3065S
00
3070
01
6150 - 6160
6170
3075 - 3080
3085 - 3090
3095
02
20
31
26
33
6180
3115 - 3120
03
21
27
6190
3125 - 3140
04
22
28
Issue 1
May 2002
11F08.9
Parameter codes for Autotronic 1 and basic Autotronic 2 : 8100 - 3600

MODEL
WITH AUTOTRONIC 1 OR
BASIC
AUTOTRONIC 2
PTO 540 / 1000 rpm
PTO 750 / 1000 rpm

05
12

06
13
8130 Normal Duty

07
14
8130 Heavy Duty

08
15

3680 Heavy Duty
09
16
8150 Double Reduction

10
17

11
18
8160 Heavy Duty

Reinforced Transmission
23
24
Parameter codes for basic Autotronic 2 : 6200

CODE AA
MODEL
WITH
BASIC
AUTOTRONIC 2
6235 - 6245
70
74
6255 - 6260 - 6265 - 6270
71
75
6280
72
76
6290
73
77
Issue 1
May 2002
11F08.10
Parameter code for basic Autotronic 2 : 8200

CODE AA
MODEL
WITH
BASIC
AUTOTRONIC 2
PTO 540 - 1000 rpm
PTO 750 - 1000 rpm
8210 - 8220
Heavy Duty
34
79
8210 - 8220
Heavy Duty with sealed
35
80
8240
Heavy Duty with seales
82
83
8240 - 8250
Double reduction
36
81
Parameter codes for basic Autotronic 2 : Allis - White

CODE AA
MODEL
WITH
BASIC
AUTOTRONIC 2
Issue 1
PTO ON / OFF
solenoid valve
PTO proportional
solenoid valve
Allis 9735 - 975

White 8310 - 8410
29
Allis 8775
White 6710
26
75
Allis 8785
White 6810
28
77
May 2002
Code B
Pont avant
Code C
Livre / Tortue
1 = 2 RM
0 = Non synchronis
2 = 4 RM (a)
1 = Synchronis
3 = 4 RM " mmoire" (b)
Code F : Speedshift (e)

0 = Sans Speedshift
1 = Commande Speedshift par
bouton
2 = Commande Speedshift par
levier au volant
Code D
Type bote de vitesses
1=4x2
(sans gammeAB)
2=4x4
(avec gamme AB)
Code G : Dynashift (e)

0 = Sans Dynashift
1 = Commande Dynashift par
levier au volant
2 = Commande Dynashift par
bouton sur levier de
vitesses
3 = pour AGCO Allis ou White
Code I : Usine
0 = MF 3000 / 3100 / 3600 / 6100 / 8100 (c)
1 = Non utilis
2 = MF 6200 / 8200 / AGCO Allis / White (d)
11F08.11
Code E
Vitesse maxi
1 = 30 Km/h
2 = 40 Km/h sauf 8160
Heavy Duty
renforce
3 = 33 Km/h (Japon)
4 = 40 Km/h pour
8160 avec bote de
vitesses Heavy Duty
renforce
Code H : Inverseur de marche

0 = Mcanique
1 = Pr-slection
avec bouton
avec capteur MCB (ancien
modle
2 = Pr-slection
avec levier
avec capteur MCB (ancien
modle
3 = Pr-slection
avec levier
avec capteur Bosch
(nouveau modle)
4 = Pr-slection
avec bouton
avec capteur Bosch
(nouveau modle)
Code J : Vitesse rampantes

0 = Non utilis sur tracteur Autotronic 1 et
Autotronic 2 de base
Code K : PDF
0 = sans PDF
1 = PDF avec lectrovalve ON / OFF
2 = PDF avec lectrovalve proportionnelle sur MF 6200 / AGCO White - Allis (6810/6710/8775/8785)
3 = PDF avec lectrovalve proportionnelle sur MF 8200 / AGCO White - Allis (8310/8410/9735/9745)
Issue 1
May 2002

11F08.12
(a) A chaque dmarrage du moteur, le tmoin de 4 RM est allum et le pont avant engag.
Pour dsengager le 4 RM :
- appuyer sur les freins,
- appuyer sur le contacteur de 4 RM.
Le tmoin s'teint.
Le pont avant est rellement dsengag lorsque le botier Autotronic reoit un signal de vitesse d'avancement
suprieur 1 km/h.
(b) A chaque dmarrage du moteur, le 4 RM se trouve dans la position mmorise lors de l'arrt du moteur.
La fonction 4 RM peut tre diffrente en fonction du code I (voir (d))
(c) Code I = 0
- le 4 RM sengage si action sur une des deux pdales de freins au dessus de 5 Km/h
- le passage de 4 RM en 2 RM seffectue rellement quand le capteur vitesse davancement envoie un signal
- le blocage diffrentiel se dsengage et se rengage aprs action sur une pdale de frein.
(d) 6200 / 8200 / White / Allis
Code I = 2
- le 4 RM sengage uniquement si action des deux pdales de freins quelque soit la vitesse
- le passage de 4 RM en 2 RM larrt seffectue rellement sans avoir le signal du capteur vitesse davancement
- le blocage diffrentiel se dsengage dfinitivement si action sur une pdale de frein
- contacteur d'arrt durgence PDF situ sur les ailes (si mont).
(e) Pour les tracteurs avec Autotronic 1 d'origine, mettre les codes F et G zro quelque soit le type de transmission.
Issue 1
May 2002
11F09.1
11 F09 Kit Autotronic to Autotronic 3
CONTENTS
Issue 1
A.
General ___________________________________________
B.
Reprogramming Autotronic 3 _______________________
May 2002

11F09.2
A . General
It is necessary to reprogramm an Autotronic 3 to fit on a
tractor with Autotronic 3 in base (250 Kbits), when the
Autotronic was fitted on a tractor with a kit Autotronic
(software X32 and CAN 100 Kbits).
Note: When programming is carried out on a tractor

equipped with a basic Autotronic 3, it is imperative
to disconnect the ELC calculator and the Datatronic
2 (if installed). The connection is to be re-established
after the programming is completed.
Issue 1
May 2002
11F09.3
B . Reprogramming Autotronic 3
- Switch on the ignition key to carry out this operation. The
minimum voltage should be 12.5 Volts.
Note: It is necessary to set Autotronic 3 parameters

after programming.
- After accessing Wintest, click on Options then on
Autotronic Kit ---> Auto 3.
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO! Kit Autotronic ----> Auto3Help

Auto3 ----> Kit Autotronic
Update
WinTest V1.10.06
B00003001456
M. ROCHEFOUCAULT
AGCO
TC
DCC
TCU 092
TCU 093
DATA2
AUTO3
KIT AUTOTRONIC
Issue 1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.14
2.14
R
C
D001208
B11
X32
May 2002
11F09.4
Wintest
Test
Options
GO!
Help
Help
Wintest
Are you sure?
Yes
No
OK
Help

Issue 1
May 2002
11F09.5
Wintest
Test
Options
Help
GO!
Help
WinTest V1.10.06
B00003001456
M. ROCHEFOUCAULT
AGCO
TC
DCC
TCU 092
TCU 093
DATA2
AUTO3
KIT AUTOTRONIC
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.14
2.14
R
C
D001208
B11
X32
AUTO3
Note: The indicator gauge may take 1 or 2 minutes to

be displayed.
Issue 1
May 2002
11F09.6
During programming, several error messages may

be displayed:
1. Stop the engine
9. Unable to program data
Correction method
Message 3 : Autotronic 3 is already programmed in
Autotronic 3
Messages 4 - 5: Check connection of the CAN BOX
Wintest
Test
Help
Options
GO!
Help
WinTest V1.10.06
B00003001456
M. ROCHEFOUCAULT
AGCO
TC
DCC
TCU 092
TCU 093
DATA2
AUTO3
KIT AUTOTRONIC
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.14
2.14
R
C
D001208
B11
X32
AUTO3
Impossible to enter in
programming mode
Retry
Issue 1
May 2002
Cancel
11G01.1
11G01 Carraro suspension
CONTENTS
-
General ____________________________________________________
A. Suspension control system __________________________________
B. Disassembling and assembling of the sensor __________________
C. Electronic control unit _______________________________________
D. Service tools _______________________________________________
10
Issue 1
May 2002

11G01.2
General
your axle, but the process is the same.
A. Suspension control system

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Position sensor
Suspension ram
Electro-hydraulic control unit
Electronics connecting plug
Hydraulic connection unit
3
2
A
LS
1
Fig. 1
Issue 1
May 2002

B . Disassembling and assembling
of the sensor
11G01.3
Disassembling of the sensor

1. Unscrew the cover B fastening screws A of the sensor wiring-in kit.
Disconnect the wiring-in kit connecting plug C from
the sensor (Fig.2)
Warning : Dont damage the electrical wires.
2. Unscrew and remove both fastening screws D of the
sensor E.
Only if needed, remove the connector cable and
collect the lower washer F (Fig.3).
3. Remove the rubber guide G of the sensor control pin
assembled on the position ring H.
Take a note of the relative sensor plate position of the
rubber position ring, then remove the position ring
from the plate housing (Fig.4)
Note : This is a destructive operation for the
position ring.
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
H
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 2002

11G01.4
Assembling of the sensor

4. Insert the position ring A in the sensor plate using the
special tool CA715362 (see D) (Fig.5).
Note : Respect the annotated position marked
during the disassembly phase.
5. Assemble the sensor rubber B in the positioning ring
with the text OUTSIDE on the outer side (Fig.6).
Note : The rubber outer boss must be inserted in
the hole on the positioning ring.
6. Insert the washer C on the sensor control pin.
Assemble the sensor D to the plate inserting the
control pin in their housing in the rubber.
Note : Respect the position given by the pin flat
surface.
Assemble, without tightening, the two sensor fastening screws E.
Connect the sensor to the wiring-in kit (Fig.7).
Note : Before assembling the sensor cover adjust
the sensor position.
90
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 7
11G01.5
7. In order to adjust the sensor position let down completely the axle arms, in a way that the pads leaned
on the axle body (Closed Axle) (Fig.8).
Note : If the axle is already assembled to the
vehicle, this position is reached putting down the
vehicle till the end of stroke is reached.
8. If the axle has been installed on the vehicle with all
accessories including the battery, disconnect the
connector between the sensor and the suspension
control unit, and use service tool ref. 3378322M1 to
connect up a milliammeter in order to measure the
intensity of the current absorbed (Fig. 9).
9. If the axle is on a workbench with equipment consisting of 12 V battery and a milliammeter connected to
the angle sensor measure the absorbed electric current intensity (Fig.10).
Fig. 8
Amp.
BATTERY 12V
Fig. 9
Amp.
-VB
+VB
BATTERY 12V
Fig. 10
Issue 1
May 2002

11G01.6
10. To adjust the sensor position loosen the screws and

rotate the sensor slowly until the electric current
intensity prescribed value IAC is shown on the measure instruments.
Lock the sensor tightening the fastening screws
with a dynamometric wrench to the requested torque
(see section 08A01 A) (Fig.11) :
- for 20.19 S and 20.22 S
IAC = 6.10 0.5 mA
- for 20.29 S
IAC = 7.0 0.5 mA
11. Lift completely the axle arms (Opened Axle) and
check that electric current intensity value is within
the prescribed range IAA, using the equipment previously described (Fig.12) :
- for 20.19 S et 20.22 S
IAA = 16,9 0.5 mA
- for 20.29 S
IAA = 17.5 0.5 mA
Note : if the axle is already assembled to the
vehicle, this position is reached putting up the
vehicle till the end of stroke is reached.
12. Assemble the sensor wiring-in kit cover F and
tighten the fastening screws G with a dynamometric
A) (Fig.13).
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Issue 1
May 2002

C. Electronic control unit (Fig.14)
Description
The axle active suspension system is electronically
controlled by means of special control unit that perform
some advanced functions.
Its strongly advisable to follow with attention all the
instructions about the electronic control unit, considering
the importance of this part for the function of all the
suspension system.
Definitions
Two different operation modes and one calibration mode
can be chosen.
- Blocked position : the suspension cylinder space is
emptied (Closed Axle) and the axle operates without
suspension.
- Automatic operation : the axle is automatically controlled in accordance with a set value (middle position)
independent of the load.
- Calibration : the end stops are calibrated in the control
unit.
Control system components

- Automatic Operation/Blocked Pos. Toggle key
. Automatic levelling into middle position T2
. Blocked position at cylinder stop T1 (Fig.14)
- Signal lamps
. L1 shines = Automatic Operations mode
. L2 shines = Blocked Position mode
. L1 flashes = Calibration mode
. L1 and L2 flash = operation mode is to be selected
(Fig.14)
- Sensor (inputs)
. angular sensor, analogue input WS1 for axle position
(Fig.14)
- Valves (outputs)
. in order to lower the vehicle WV2 is activated
. in order to lift the vehicle WV1 and WV2 are activated
(Fig.14)
11G01.7
Operational modes
When the system is started a sensor scans the axle
position. Depending upon the scanned actual value, the
electronics will assign an operation mode, which will
then be displayed with the help of the respective signal
lamp.
The possible operational modes are the following:
1. Axle is within the tolerance band of active suspension
level : Automatic Operation
2. Axle is within the tolerance band of the lower stop :
Blocked position
3. Axle is not in previous states : (L1) and (L2) (Fig.14)
flash, that is operational mode has to be selected by
mean of toggle key (valves are not activated)
- Blocked position
As soon as the toggle key for the operational mode
Blocked Position T1 is activated, the vehicle lowers,
the lamp L2 (Fig.14) shines.
By pressing the key Blocked Position T1 the valve WV2
(Fig.14) is activated for 15 seconds in order to release
pressure from the cylinder and from the accumulators.
- Automatic Operation
As soon as the toggle key is pressed in Automatic
Operation, signal lamp L1 (Fig.14) starts to shine and
the the axle to middle position.
In after 30 seconds the desired value has not been
reached, the control is deactivated for 30 seconds.
After 30 seconds the procedure is repeated for 30
seconds.
If three attempts fail, the control switches to the
operation mode Overload that is L1 and L2 (Fig.14)
flash and an operation mode has to be selected by
mean of the toggle key.
The operation mode Automatic Operation can be quit by
activating the operation mode Blocked Position.
Issue 1
May 2002

11G01.8
- Calibration
Calibration consists in determining the values of the
upper and lower cylinder stops.
If no calibration value has been recorded, the control
system automatically selects the Calibration mode
when the system is activated.
To manually select the Calibration mode, press on T2
Automatic Operation mode toggle key for 10 seconds.
Wait till the system changes to Calibration mode to
release the toggle key. This makes the suspension
manual control functions available.
Press on T1 key to manually lower the cylinders or on
T2 key to raise them.
When the cylinder stops have been adjusted, activate
the toggle key to leave the Calibration mode. The system immediately changes to Automatic Operation
mode.
If required, the cylinder stop adjustment can be modified. When a change is made the new values replace
the old ones.
If the stop values exceed the allowed limit values or
the cylinder travel is lower than the minimum fixed
value, the system remains in Calibration mode.
Calibration tolerances
- lower stop (axle closed) : 5 mA
- upper stop (axle open) : 19 mA
- minimum travel : 9.35 mA
- Error modes
The system recognizes the following error modes:
- position sensor error (position lower than 4 mA or
higher than 20 mA)
- overload or cable breaking at the level of the solenoid
valve.
When one of these error modes occurs, the L1 indicator light gets on with the relevant error code and the
solenoid valve is disabled. To validate the error mode,
switch off the system.
Error codes
21 WS1 angle sensor
31 VW1 and/or VW2 solenoid valve raised
32 VW2 solenoid valve lowered
33 No movement of the axle: overload or circuit breaking
41 T1 and T2 short-circuited
Issue 1
May 2002
11G01.9
UZ UB
T1
T2
L2
L1
8
1
GND
LGND
WV1
Green
WS1
S
J
WV2
Black
Carraro electronic box
Fig. 14
Issue 1
May 2002

11G01.10
D. Service tools
- CA 715362 - Sensor rubber positioning ring driver
(Fig.15).
- 3378322 M1 - front axle position sensor adjustment harness (Fig. 16)
Fig. 15
1
2
3
1
2
3
Fig. 16
Issue 1
May 2002
SMS System - Description
11H01.1
11H01 Description
CONTENTS
A.
General ___________________________________________________
B.
Description of SMS components ____________________________
C.
Operation and troubleshooting without a tester ______________
10
D.
SMS error codes ___________________________________________
12
E.
Disassembling, reassembling of the Joystick ________________
17
F.
Replacing of ON / OFF or Memory switches __________________
17
G.
Electrical diagram __________________________________________
18
Issue 1
May 2002

11H01.2
Issue 1
May 2002

A . General
The SMS (Spool valves Management System) controls
two proportional electro-hydraulically controlled spool
valves. It is available as an option on all 6200 series
tractors fitted with a closed centre hydraulics circuit.
Its functions are :
- the control of electro-hydraulically controlled proportional spool valve flowrates
- the memorising of selected flowrates
- the reinitialising of memorised flowrates
- the transition to Floating mode
- the Time Delay function (with the Datatronic option)
which allows for adjusting the valve supply time delay.
11H01.3
The ELC calculator transmits information received from

the user via the SMS or Datatronic 2 to the auxiliary spool
valves concerned. The communication takes place
across the CAN bus.
Parts list
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Joystick, ON / OFF switch and Memory switch

Datatronic 2
ELC calculator
Auxiliary spool valve X
Auxiliary spool valve Y
Outlet valves X- and X+
Outlet valves Y- and Y+
Safety solenoid valve
Block diagram (Fig. 1)

The control of the SMS is carried out via the Joystick and
connectors located at the end of the right-hand armrest.
The Datatronic displays the functions of the SMS with
accuracy.
7
Y- Y+
X- X+
5
4
1
+
+
8
3
Issue 1
Fig. 1
May 2002

11H01.4
B . Description of SMS components

(Fig. 2)
The SMS comprises the following elements:
- the Joystick (1)
- the ELC calculator (2)
- a switch (3) (additional function)
- an ON / OFF switch (4)
- an indicator lamp (5)
- a Memory switch (6)
- a harness (7)
- two electro-hydraulically controlled proportional spool
valves (8)
- a safety solenoid valve (9)
- the Datatronic (option) (10)
- possible connection for an additional function (11)
Issue 1
May 2002
11H01.5
5
3
1
4
6
ON
M
AUT
UTO
11
10
9
7
C52
C5
Fig. 2
Issue 1
May 2002

11H01.6
(1) Joystick
A
- The Joystick is the lever mounted on the right-hand

armrest that is used to control the auxiliary spool
valves. It comprises a knob A, having a switch 3, a dust
cover B, a plastic washer C, a control unit D, a support
E, and a cable F (Fig. 3).
B
C
- The travel of the lever determines the opening of the

main spool of the auxiliary spool valves. The flowrate
Q is proportional to the travel Dp of the lever (Fig. 4)
(example: if the lever is in the mid-position, Q equals
50% of the maximum available or memorised flowrate.
- The supply current for the various valves is determined
by the direction of movement of the lever (Fig. 5). The
directions X+, X-, Y+ or Y- allows the flowrate of each
valve to be controlled separately. The direction X- Y-, YX+, X+ Y+ or Y+ X- allows the simultaneous control of
the flowrates of the two mentioned valves.
- The "100%" circle corresponds to 100% of the available
flowrate (lever resistance on a hard spot)
- The "127%" circle corresponds to the Floating position
(overcoming of the hard spot).
- During movement of the lever, the electronic unit of the
joystick sends an electrical signal to the ELC calculator,
which then sends this information to the spool valve
concerned via the CAN bus.
F
D
Fig. 3
Q
100%
50%
Note:
- Any replacement or disassembly of the Joystick
requires calibration using Wintest
- This operation allows the 100% travel of the lever
across the X and Y-axes to be defined.
0
100%
50%
+ +
+ -+
Dp
++ -
Fig. 4
XX-/Y-
Y+/X%
127
%
100
+ +
Y+
X+/Y+
Y-/X+
X+
Issue 1
May 2002
Y-
Fig. 5
11H01.7
(2) ELC calculator

- The calculator receives signals from the various components of the SMS and the Datatronic controls and
then transmits this information to the auxiliary spool
valves via the CAN bus.
Note: For the SMS to operate, the ELC calculator

parameters must be correctly set (see section
11F05).
(3) SMS 3rd function switch

- This switch is used with an additional harness (Kit
reference 3788679 M11) to be mounted. This assembly
allows the functions of each electro-hydraulic spool
valve to be doubled by controlling another solenoid
valve located on the implement itself.
- For example, in the case of a front loader: the displacement along X allows the loader to be lifted or lowered,
whereas the displacement along Y controls the displacement of the bucket, or a third function such as a
claw or a bale clamp can be controlled by pressing the
switch.
(4) ON / OFF switch

- It is fitted above the Joystick on the right-hand armrest.
The ON / OFF switch activates and deactivates the
SMS.
(5) Indicator lamp

- An indicator lamp is located in the centre of the ON /
OFF switch. If:
- The indicator lamp is lit continuously: the system is not
active
- The indicator lamp is off: the system is active
- The indicator lamp flashes once to indicate the
reinitialising of the oil flowrates (see C).
- The indicator lamp flashes in a specific manner to
indicate various error codes (see D).
(6) Memory switch

- This switch is fitted between the Joystick and the ON
/ OFF switch. It memorises the flowrates selected with
the Joystick and reset them (example: a flowrate of 30
l/min is desired on X+. Move the lever to obtain the
desired flowrate. Press the Memory switch down for 1
second. The maximum flowrate for 100% travel is now
set to 30 l/min).
(7) Electrical harness linking various components
Issue 1
May 2002

11H01.8
(8) Electro-hydraulically operated proportional spool valves

- The spool valves are of the BOSCH SB23 type and are
electrically controlled. After contact they are supplied
with 12 V.
- They have an internal electronic circuit that decodes the
CAN signals sent by the ELC calculator to control the
main spool. The circuit also analyses the operation of
the spool valve and is able to generate error codes (see
D).
Note: To operate in the desired direction (X+, X-,
Y+, Y- or Dual), the spool valves parameters must
be set using Wintest whenever they have been
replaced or moved (see section 11F07 Joystick
with Wintest).
1
2
100
75
- This solenoid valve is located in the end plate of the

distribution block. It is of the On-Off type and is
controlled during activation of the SMS. The safety
valve cuts the pilot pressure to the distribution block for
all error codes above 40 and for error code 26 (see D).
Note: The safety valve remains supplied when the
SMS is placed in the OFF position. It cuts out when
the engine is stopped.
50
11
15
5
6
(9) Safety solenoid valve
10
ON
5 4 3 2 1
3
7
8
(10) Datatronic
- If fitted, the Datatronic displays the precise flowrates
memorised for each valve and allows the adjustment
of the spool valve opening time (Time Delay function).
It also displays the possible error codes (see D).
Note: To display the SMS windows, the Datatronic
parameters must be correctly set (see section
11F06)
Parts list (Fig. 6)
(1) Adjustment of oil flowrates
(2) Upper screen selection key
(3) Bottom screen selection key
(4) SMS activation indicator lamp
(5) ON / OFF time delay
(6) Floating mode
(7) Activation of Time Delay mode
(8) Selection keys
(9) Selection knob
(10) Y- and Y+ valves
(11) X- and X+ valves
Issue 1
May 2002
Fig. 6
The SMS is active when the padlock symbol (4) is absent
from the MAX FLOWRATE and TIME windows.
11H01.9
The maximum flowrate of each valve

1. In the Datatronic menu, select JOYSTICK then MAX
FLOWRATE. Window (1) is displayed.
2. Press keys (8.1) and (8.2) to select the maximum
flowrate to be modified. The value to be modified is
displayed in reverse video.
3. Turn knob (9) to change the selected flowrate (100 in
Fig. 6). The flowrate can be adjusted from 0 to 100%
in steps of 1%.
Example shown in Fig. 6
- X: 100% of available flowrate
- X+ : 0% of available flowrate
- Y: 75% of available flowrate
- Y+ : 50% of available flowrate
Note: Adjusting a valve to 100% is equivalent to
reinitialising the maximum flowrate.
Time delay mode
1. In the Datatronic menu, select JOYSTICK then TIME.
2. Press the key (8.5) to activate the Time Delay function. ON appears at (5) and the time delay memorised
during the last use of the tractor is displayed.
3. The horizontal and vertical double headed arrows (10)
and (11) (the Y axis, X axis respectively) refer to the
spool valves; press keys (8.1) and (8.2) to select
them.
4. Turn knob (9) to adjust the time from 0 to 60 seconds,
in steps of 1 second, or set to continuous (infinity
symbol ).
5. To launch the time delay, push the joystick above the
80% position, then release the lever.
During the Time Delay phase, the Datatronic displays
the clock symbol (7). It is possible to stop the time
delay by moving the lever 10% in the opposite control
direction.
Note: As long as the position of the lever is less
than 80%, the flowrate of the solenoid valve
concerned is proportional to its position. Above
80%, the flowrate is equal to 100% of the memorised flowrate.
Transition to Floating mode
- When the operator moves to Floating mode using the
Joystick, symbol (6) is displayed in the TIME screen of
the Datatronic.
Issue 1
May 2002

11H01.10
C . Operation and troubleshooting

without a tester
Functions
SMS activation
Reaction of SMS
SMS is
activated
Indicator lamp
Conditions :
of ON / OFF
- Engine has run
switch gets out
for more than
Padlocks on
2 seconds.
Datatronic TIME
- Joystick is in
and MAX
neutral
FLOWRATE
disappear
Safety valve
opens the
hydraulic circuit
Changing of
1. Operate the joystick Memorises the
maximum
to reach desired
new maximum
flowrate
flowrate
flowrate
2. Press Memory
switch for 1 second
3. Return Joystick to
neutral position
With Datatronic: :
Vary desired percentage
up to the flowrate
desired
Reinitialisation
1. Operate joystick in
Reinitialises
of a valve
desired direction
maximum
flowrate
2. Press for at least 3
flowrate of all
seconds on the
valves
Memory switch
ON / OFF
switch indicator
lamp flashes
once
With Datatronic:
vary desired flowrate up
to 100%
Reinitialisation
1. Joystick in neutral
- Reinitialises
of flowrate of all 2. Press for at least 3
maximum
valves
seconds on the
flowrate of all
Memory switch
valves
- ON / OFF
switch indicator
lamp flashes
once
With Datatronic:
vary all flowrates up to
100%
Issue 1
User actions
Press ON / OFF switch
with the joystick in
neutral
May 2002
Problem
No activation
Possible causes
Using Wintest
check:
ON / OFF switch
engine speed
sensor
ELC calculator
safety valve
reference of ELC
calculator
parameters of
ELC calculator
Maximum
flowrate
doesnt vary
Using Wintest,
check:
Memory switch
ELC calculator
Joystick
calibration
Set spool valves
parameters
Reinitialisation Using Wintest,

not carried out check:
Memory switch
ELC calculator
Reinitialisation Using Wintest,

not carried out check:
Memory switch
ELC calculator

Functions
Floating
User actions
Reaction of SMS
Problem
Push the Joystick
No transition
Transition to
beyond 100% position in
to Floating
Floating mode: 2
X- or Yspool valves (X or Y mode
depending on
choice) are linked
with return to
housing
~ displayed on
Datatronic TIME
screen
11H01.11
Possible causes
Using Wintest
check ELC
calculator
check operation of
spool valves
check valves
parameters
Recalibrate the
Joystick
Time delay
Time delay stop
Only with Datatronic:

Activation of Time
1. Activate TIME mode
delay mode
(ON displayed on
Clock symbol
screen)
displayed during
2. Select spool valve
time delay
3. Select time (0 to 60
seconds or infinity )
4. Push Joystick
beyond 80% position
1. Operate the Joystick Time delay stops
at least 10% in
opposite control
direction
Issue 1
Check that TIME

mode is OFF or at 0
No Time
Using Wintest:
delay mode Check Datatronic
parameters
May 2002
11H01.12
D . SMS error codes

Display of error codes
Different messages indicate errors occurring in the SMS:
1. ON / OFF indicator lamp
- If it is a Joystick error (error code 0 - 1 to 0 - 8) the
ON / OFF indicator lamp flashes in the following
sequence:
. A series of flashes every 14 seconds, the number
of flashes indicates the error code.
Example: error code 0 - 3
1s
2. The LED of the auxiliary spool valve concerned

flashes once every second:
- 1st series: 1st number of error code
- 2nd series: 2nd number of error code
3. The Datatronic indicates the error code in the TIME
window : letter E followed by error code (Fig. 7)
In the case of a three figure number, the first figure
represents the valve, and the second and third the
error code itself.
Note: In the case of error code 1 - 0, the Datatronic
displays E10 (no indication of the valve number
concerned) and in the case of error code 0 - 9 the
Datatronic displays E9.
4. Wintest indicates and identifies the error codes.
5s
2s
5s
2s
Note: The number associated with a valve is defined

by its parameters
Number 1 : Green valve X
Number 2 : Red valve Y
Number 3 : Black valve DUAL CONTROL/TIC
- If it is a valve error, the ON / OFF indicator lamp

flashes as follows:
. 1st flash: valve number
. 2nd flash: 1st number of error code
. 3rd flash: 2nd number of error code
Example: valve number 2, error code 3 - 1
1s
5s
2s
2s
5s
- The ELC calculator can diagnose error codes 0 9 or

1 - 0 on the electro-hydraulic spool valve system.
The ON / OFF indicator lamp flashes in the following
manner:
. Error code 0 - 9 : 3 series of 8 flashes
. Error code 1 - 0 :
1st series: valve number
2nd series: 3 flashes
3rd series: 3 flashes
Note: If two valves are concerned by error code
1 - 0, the ON / OFF indicator lamp indicates error
code 1 - 3 - 3.
Issue 1
May 2002
100
75
50
15
OFF
E231
Fig. 7

Error code
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
1-0
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
Flash on ON / OFF
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
8-8-8
1-3-3
2-3-3
3-3-3
1-1-1
2-1-1
3-1-1
1-1-2
2-1-2
3-1-2
1-1-3
2-1-3
3-1-3
1-1-4
2-1-4
3-1-4
1-1-5
2-1-5
3-1-5
1-1-6
2-1-6
3-1-6
1-1-7
2-1-7
3-1-7
1-2-1
2-2-1
3-2-1
1-2-2
2-2-2
3-2-2
1-2-3
2-2-3
3-2-3
1-2-4
2-2-4
3-2-4
1-2-5
2-2-5
3-2-5
11H01.13
Flash on spool valve
Datatronic display
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E 10
1-1
E 111
E 211
1-2
E 112
E 212
1-3
E 113
E 213
1-4
E 114
E 214
1-5
E 115
E 215
1-6
E 116
E 216
1-7
E 117
E 217
2-1
E 121
E 221
2-2
E 122
E 222
2-3
E 123
E 223
2-4
E 124
E 224
2-5
E 125
E 225
Issue 1
May 2002
11H01.14
Error code
2-6
3-1
3-2
4-1
4-2
4-3
8-1
8-2
Issue 1
Flash on ON / OFF
1-2-6
2-2-6
3-2-6
1-3-1
2-3-1
3-3-1
1-3-2
2-3-2
3-3-2
1-4-1
2-4-1
3-4-1
1-4-2
2-4-2
3-4-2
1-4-3
2-4-3
3-4-3
1-8-1
2-8-1
3-8-1
1-8-2
2-8-2
3-8-2
May 2002
Flash on spool valve

2-6
Datatronic display
E 126
E 226
3-1
E 131
E 231
3-2
E 132
E 232
4-1
E 141
E 241
4-2
E 142
E 242
4-3
E 143
E 243
8-1
E 181
E 281
8-2
E 182
E 282
11H01.15
Table of error codes
Error code
0-1
0-2
Detected by
ELC
calculator
Detected by Joystick electronic unit
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
Fault
Reaction of the
System
Analog input error 1
Function jammed, spool
(X+ position sensor)
valves in neutral
Analog input error 2 (X- Function jammed, spool
position sensor)
valves in neutral
Analog input error 3 (Y+ Function jammed, spool
position sensor)
valves in neutral
Analog input error 4 (Y- Function jammed, spool
position sensor)
valves in neutral
Joystick internal
calculator error
valves in neutral
EPROM error.
Too little difference
valves in neutral
between each position
X+ / centre / X- or Y+ /
centre / Y- of joystick
during calibration
0-7
Safety message on
CAN
0-8
9.5 V voltage error
0-9
No joystick detected
1-0
No valve detected
Action required
Test with Wintest and
replace joystick
replace joystick
replace joystick
replace joystick
replace joystick
Recalibrate or replace
joystick
Function jammed, spool Test with Wintest ,

valves in neutral
check harness and
replace joystick
Function jammed, spool Test with Wintest,
valves in neutral
check harness and
replace joystick
valves in neutral
check harness and
replace joystick
valves in neutral
check harness and
replace joystick
Issue 1
May 2002
11H01.16
Error code
CAN
1-1
errors
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
Fault
CAN message missing
CAN message missing
Wrong CAN message
Wrong CAN message
Spool valve internal
signal error (PWM)
Detected by electro-hydraulic spool valves
1-6 Valve EPROM problem

1-7 No error but return to
neutral necessary
Issue 1
Minor
errors
Major
errors
Reaction of the System

Valve returns to neutral.
Correct voltage received
within 4 seconds = valve
returns to previous position.
Error present after 4
seconds = valve remains in
neutral.
Valve returns to neutral
Displayed when return to
neutral not carried out after
1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 2-3, 2-4, 31 and 3 - 2 errors.
Error displayed but system
continues to operate.
2-1 Undervoltage: < 8.2 V

and > 8 V
2-2 Overvoltage: > 18 V and
< 36 V
2-3 Spool movement too
low
2-4 Spool movement too
Return of spool to neutral
great
2-5 Floating position not
reached
2-6 Manual control
Valve answers manual
control, electronic control
locked out.
Return of spool to neutral.
3-1 Voltage low: < 8 V
Correct voltage received
3-2 Voltage high: > 36 V
within 4 seconds = valve
returns to previous position.
Error present after 4
seconds = valve remains in
neutral.
4-1 Large over voltage: > 45 Valve returns to neutral.
V
Pressure relief valve cut
(OFF)
4-2 Valve power error
4-3 Position sensor error
8-1 Valve cant return to
Pressure relief valve cut
neutral
(OFF)
8-2 Valve spool not in
Valve remains in neutral.
neutral at power up
May 2002
Action required
Repair fault and / or
move control to neutral
to reinitialise.
Repair fault
Repair fault
Move control to neutral
to reinitialise.
Repair fault
Move control to neutral

to reinitialise.
Stop and restart tractor

engine.
engine.

engine.
11H01.17
E . Disassembly, reassembly of the

Joystick
Any Joystick breakdown requires its entire replacement.
Disassembly of Joystick
1. Disassemble the armrest by unscrewing the 6 bolts
linking the upper and lower parts.
2. Loosen the 3 bolts holding the Joystick support and
the internal armrest support.
3. Remove the plastic washer linking the Joystick dust
cover to the upper part of the armrest.
4. Remove the Joystick (Fig. 8).
Reassembly of the Joystick
Fig. 8
5. Put the joystick in place (Fig. 8)

6. Replace the plastic washer linking the dust cover to
the upper part of the armrest.
7. Replace the 3 bolts holding the Joystick support to the
armrest internal support.
8. Fit the armrest by replacing the 6 bolts holding the
upper and lower parts.
F . Replacement of ON / OFF or
Memory switches
If it is necessary to replace the ON / OFF or Memory
switches, separate the pin connector. During reassembly,
take care to respect the following connections:
Fig. 9
Memory switch (Fig. 9)

Way
Wire colour
Blue
Brown
ON
ON / OFF switch (Fig. 10)

Way
Wire colour
Brown
White
Green
Yellow
1
2
Issue 1
Fig. 10
May 2002
11H01.18
G . Electrical diagram (Fig. 11)
Item
AA
AB
AC
Colour
Grey
Black
Ways
7
Parts list
(26) Joystick
(27) Joystick function multiplier switch
(28) ON / OFF switch
(29) Memory switch
Description
Joystick / AE connector 1
2
Switch connected to
Joystick terminals
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
Activation switch and

status diode
1
2
AD
AE
10
3
4
Zero reset and Memory 1
switches
2
Calculator armrest
K
connection
J
B
F
E
D
AF
Issue 1
10
Dashboard armrest
connection
May 2002
A
H
C
G
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
Pins
12 V after contact
Signal to solenoid
valve
CAN high
CAN low
+9.5V
Ground
Not used
12 V after contact
Signal to solenoid
valve
12 V after contact
Joystick activation
signal
LED ON/OFF
Ground
12 V after contact
Signal for calculator
Towed implement
signal
Radar speed signal
Multiplier solenoid
valve control
Joystick LED
Joystick activation
signal
Memory
Zero reset signal.
+9.5V
Depth control
Ground
Raise / lower toggle
Not used
Not used
Not used
Radar speed
Not used
12 V after contact
CAN low
CAN high
CAN low
CAN high
Wires
Orange
Grey
Green
Brown
Red
Black
Blue
White
Orange
Blue
Green
Black
Orange
Yellow
Violet
White
Grey
Green
Blue
Yellow
Red
Green
Black
Pink
White
Orange
Brown
Green
Brown
Green

29
28
AC
26
27
11H01.19
AD
N
BF
AB
B
V
AA
G
M/J
R
VF
N/B
AF
AE
RO
M
V
VC
R
R/B
M
R
V
V
20
23
Ro
31
30
Vi
25
B
R
N/B
24
M/J
21
M
N
B
22
N
R
Fig. 11
Issue 1
May 2002
CHAPTER
UNDER
CONSTRUCTION
CHAPTER
UNDER
CONSTRUCTION
14 . SERVICE TOOLS
Contents
14 A01 SERVICE TOOLS
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.1
Designation
Reference
14 A01 Service tools
CONTENTS
Splitting the tractor ____________________________________________
Perkins engines _______________________________________________
Valmet engines ________________________________________________
Clutch ________________________________________________________
19
Gearbox ______________________________________________________
20
Rear axle ______________________________________________________
23
Power take off _________________________________________________
25
Front axle _____________________________________________________
26
Hydraulics ____________________________________________________
32
Electricity - Electronics _________________________________________
34
Cab and equipment ____________________________________________
41
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.2
Designation
Reference
Air conditioning plugs kit
3378152 M11
Uncoupling tools comprising

- 2 trolleys with adjustable axle stands
- 1 fixed axle stand
- 4 m rail
N
O
T
AV
AI
LA
BL
E
3376935 M1
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.3
Designation
Reference
MS.76 - 73B
Set of adjustable mills for valve seats
PD.1D
Valve guide removal / fitting tool (main tool)
PD.1D-1A
Adaptor for use with PD.1D
PD.1C-6
Adaptor for inlet valve for use with PD.1D and PD.1D-1A
PD.41D
Indicator gauge for measuring piston height, valve depth cylinder liner
collar: for use with PD.208
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.4
Designation
Reference
PD.145D
Crankshaft rear seal fitting tool
PD.150B
Cylinder liner removal / fitting tool (main tool)
PD.150B-17 A
Adaptors for use with PD.150B
PD.155C
Universal extractor
PD.155C-5
Adaptors for use with PD.155C
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
Designation
Reference
PD.170
14A01.5
Fitting tool for timing gear housing cover lip seal (main tool)
PD.170-1
Pressure plate for use with PD.170
PD.170-2
Sleeve for use with PD.170
PD.170-3
Attachment plate for use with PD.170
PD.170-4
Lip seal adaptor for use with PD.170
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.6
Designation
Reference
PD.206
Piston fitting tool
PD.208
Dial gauge for use with PD.41D
PD.221A
Piston position adjusting rod
PD.248
Adaptor for exhaust valve, for use with PD.1D and PD.1D-1A
PD.6118-7
Stud adaptor for use with 6118B
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.7
Designation
Reference
PD.6118-8
Locking adaptor bolt for use with 6118B
6118B
Valve spring compressor
3378242 M1
Perkins green engine timing tool for Lucas and Stanadyne pump
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.8
Designation
Reference
9020 01100
Piston fitting cone for 612 / 620 DS engines
9024 55800
Socket for crankshaft nut for 612 / 620 DS and 645 engines
9025 79200
Sleeve height gauge for 612 / 620 DS and 645 engines
9025 87400
Camshaft plug tool for 620 / 634 and 645 enginess
9025 98700
Locating pin insertion mandrel for 612 / 620 DS engines
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.9
Designation
Reference
9025 98800
Locating pin insertion mandrel for 612 / 620 DS engines
9025 98900
Crankshaft dust cover fitting mandrel for 612 / 620 DS engines
9025 99000
Injection timing socket for 612 / 620 DS engines
9030 15200
Crankshaft front seal fitting mandrel for 612 / 620 DS engines
9051 71300
Injector extractor for 612 / 620 DS engines
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.10
Service tools
Designation
Reference
9051 73100
Cylinder liner extractor for 612 / 620 DS engines
9051 79300
Water pump seal fitting tool for 612 / 620 DS engines
9052 46300
Crankshaft rear seal fitting mandrel for 612 / 620 DS engines
9052 46400
Centering ring for flywheel housing for 612 / 620 DS engines
9052 46620
Bearing cup plug mandrel ( 40 mm) for 620 DS and 645 engine
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.11
Designation
Reference
9052 46650
Bearing cup plug mandrel ( 16 mm) for 612 / 620 DS and 645 engines
9052 46660
Bearing cup plug mandrel ( 36 mm) for 612 / 620 DS and 645 engines
9052 46900
Piston ring pliers for 612 / 620 DS and 645 engines
9052 47200
Nut for valve spring compression lever for 612 / 620 DS and 645 engines
9052 47600
Injection timing pipe for 612 / 620 DS engines
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.12
Service tools
Designation
Reference
9052 47800
Test pressure gauge for injection pump valve for 612 / 620 DS engines
9052 48800
Crankshaft pinion extractor for 612 / 620 DS engines
9052 48900
Water pump hub and injection pump pinion extractor for 612 / 620 DS
and 645 engines
9101 65502
Exhaust valve seat mill for 620 DS and 645 engines
9101 65503
Exhaust valve seat mill for 620 DS and 645 engines
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.13
Designation
Reference
9101 65505
Inlet valve seat mill for 620 DS and 645 engines
9101 65506
Inlet valve seat mill for 620 DS and 645 engines
9101 65600
Reamer for sleeve housing for 620 / 634 engines
9101 65700
Crankshaft nut wrench for 620 / 634 engines
9101 65800
Valve guide removal mandrel for 620 DS and 645 engines
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.14
Service tools
Designation
Reference
9101 65900
Valve guide fitting mandrel for 620 DS and 645 engines
9101 66000
Mill for injector seat for 620 DS and 645 engines
9101 66100
Grip for 620 DS and 645 engines
9101 66200
Valve spring compression lever for 620 DS and 645 engines
9101 66300
Liner holding flange (2 parts) for 620 DS and 645 engines
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.15
Designation
Reference
9101 71100
Mill for exhaust valve seat for 620 DS and 645 engines
9101 75800
Mill for inlet valve seat for 620 DS and 645 engines
9101 93200
Water pump turbine extractor for 612 / 620 DS engines
9103 41000
Water pump shaft seal insertion tool for 645 engine
9103 41100
Water pump seal insertion tool for 645 engin
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.16
Service tools
Designation
Reference
9103 41300
Water pump bearings insertion tool for 645 engine
9103 94600
Crankshaft front seal insertion tool for 645 engine
9103 94700
Crankshaft pinion insertion tool for 645 engine
9103 94800
45 mm plug insertion tool for 645 engine
9103 94900
Crankshaft front oil deflector insertion tool for 645 engines
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.17
Designation
Reference
9104 05800
Conical piston fitting sleeve for 645 engine
9104 34600
Intermediate pinion centering tool for narrow timing gear housing on

645 engine
9104 51500
Sleeve extractor for 645 engine
9104 52000
Sleeve seat mill for 645 engine
9104 52600
Crankshaft rear seal insertion tool for 645 engine
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.18
Service tools
Designation
Reference
9104 52700
Engine flywheel housing centering tool for 645 engine
9104 52800
Injection advance check tool for 645 engine
9104 53300
Crankshaft hub extractor for 645 engine
9104 53700
Injector extractor for 645 engine
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.19
Designation
Reference
3378004 M1
Wet clutch special sleeve
3378012M2
Wet clutch seal protector
3378262 M1
Clutch shock absorber centering tool
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.20
Service tools
Designation
Reference
MF 391
Layshaft nut socket
MF 459
Front PTO shaft snap ring fitting tool
MF 460
Front PTO shaft snap ring removal tool
MF 462 A
Hare / Tortoise selector adjusting gauge
3376883 M1
Front unit removal and fitting sling
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,,,,,,,,,
,, ,,
14A01.21
Designation
Reference
3376887 M1
Dynashift centering tool
3376888 M1
Dynashift secondary crownwheel holding tool
3376920 M2
Dynashift compression tool
3378013 M1
Adaptation plate (for wet clutch)
3378059M1
Hydraulic accumulator test and load equipment
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.22
Service tools
Designation
Reference
3378263 M1
Layshaft bearings adjusting tool
ATP.3002
Clutch spring compression tool for Full Powershift gearbox (AG 150 /
AG 250)
ATP.3015
Full Powershift gearbox tool kit (AG 150 / AG 250)
ATP.3030
Full Powershift gearbox pinion extractor set (AG 150 / AG 250)
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.23
Designation
Reference
MS 550
Universal sleeve
3376885 M1
Seal protector (sealed compartment trumpet housing and double drive

unit)
3378116 M1
Rear differential sling
3378117 M1
Differential blocking tool
3378118 M1
Drive pinion holding wrench
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.24
Service tools
Designation
Reference
3378119 M1
Splined socket for drive pinion
3378123 M1
Lift control shaft protector
3378124 M1
Insertion tool for lift control shaft support seal, used with MS550
3378151 M1
Insertion tool for trumpet housing shaft cassette seal ( 110)
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.25
Designation
Reference
3378115 M1
Fitting tool for PTO cassette seal, used with MS550
3378135 M1
Compression tool for PTO clutch Belleville washer
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.26
Service tools
Designation
Reference
MF 195 C
Bearing cup removal / fitting tool (basic tool)
MF 451 B
Removal tool for 4WD swivel pins, used with MF 195 C
MF 451 B.2 (M14)
Replacement adaptor, used with MF 451 B
MF 451 B.3 (M18)
Replacement adaptor only

Replacement adaptor, used with MF 451 B
MF 471.A
4WD - differential lock spring compression tool
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.27
Designation
Reference
3378028 M1
Front axle special socket - AG 125 - 155 - 200
3378038M1
Hub extractor - AG front axles
AG 155H
AG 200H
3378039 M1
Fitting tool for Cassette seal and crownwheel (AG 125 - 155 - 200 axles)
A
D
3378051M1
Differential nut wrench (AG 155 - 200 axles)
3378056M1
Cassette seal fitting ring (AG 125 - 155 axles)
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.28
Service tools
Designation
Reference
3378057M1
Cassette seal fitting ring (AG 200 axles)
3378122 M1
Sleeve for extractor (AG 155H front axle)
3378275 M1
Nut wrench for AG 200CDH flanged front axle drive pinion
3378276 M1
Locking wrench for AG 200CDH flanged front axle drive pinion
5870 055 006
Insertion tool for ZF APL 5052 front axle final drive unit seal, used with
5870 260 00024
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.29
Designation
Reference
5870 055 019
Ring for lip seal insertion tool - ZF APL 5052 front axle
5870 055 073
Insertion tool used with 5870 905 004 and 5870 260 002 - ZF APL 5052
front axle
5870 058 026
Insertion tool for final drive unit ring, used with 5870 260 002 - ZF APL
5052 front axle
5870 204 016
Planetary gear carrier extracting bolt - ZF APL 5052 front axle
5870 240 002
Drive pinion plate holder - ZF APL 5052 front axle
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.30
Service tools
Designation
Reference
5870 260 002
Lip seal insertion tool grip - ZF APL 5052 front axle
5870 340 010
Drive pinion adjusting gauge - ZF APL 5052 front axle
5870 401 082
Crownwheel carrier nut socket - ZF APL 5052 front axle
5870 500 001
Conical distance adjustment tool, used with 5870 500 101 - ZF APL
5052 front axle
5870 500 010
ZF APL 5052 front axle - rings for conical distance adjustment tool used
with 5870 500 101
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
Designation
Reference
5870 905 004
14A01.31
ZF APL 5052 front axle - centering ring used with 5870 055 073 and
5870 260 002
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.32
Service tools
Designation
Reference
MF 3001
Hydraulic pressure test kit

1 = 0 - 10 bar
2 = 0 - 35 bar
1 = 0 - 420 bar
MF 3016
Hydraulic flowmeter
Q = 4 - 160 l/min
MF 3017
Hydraulic flowrate test equipment used with MF 3016
3376882 M91
Depollution kit
3378174 M1
Issue 1
Hose kit for testing Full Powershift gearbox
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.33
Designation
Reference
3378272 M1
Clutch 17 bar pressure connector - Full Powershift gearbox
3378273 M1
17 bar pump outlet pressure connector - Full Powershift gearbox
3378274 M1
Lubricating pressure connector - Full Powershift gearbox
3582045 M1
Female hydraulic coupler
3583550 M91
Hose piping for coupler
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.34
Designation
Reference
MF 3005
Multimeter for use with electronic test equipment
3378077 M1
Adaptor
3378207 M91
207
Datatronic programming harness
M91
3378
3378234 M1
16-way extension cable (10 m)

33
78
23
4M
3378243 M1
CANBOX and WINTEST software (chip 527) with user guide

Supersedes 3790726 H1
WINTEST
CAN BOX
AGCO
Issue 1
Ref : 3378243 M1
May 2001
Service tools
Designation
Reference
3378244 M1
14A01.35
Wintest type A harness with CAN 4-way connector for Autotronic 2

used with 337845M1
Wintest type B harness with CAN 16-way connector for cab upright
socket
3378245 M1
379
072
8H
3378246 M1
CANBOX / PC extension (L = 10 cm)
3378281 M1
2-way AMP junior timer female connector
1
2
3378282 M1
2-way AMP junior timer male connector
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.36
Designation
Reference
3378283 M1
1
2 3
3378284 M1
1
2
3
3378285 M1
1 2 3 4
5
3378286 M1
3378287 M1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.37
Designation
Reference
AMP 7-way AMP junior timer male connector
3378288 M1
Packar 2-way connector
3378290 M1
Packar grey 10-way AMP junior timer female connector
3378289 M1
Packar black 10-way AMP junior timer female connector
3378291 M1
Packar black 10-way AMP junior timer male connector
3378292 M1
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.38
Designation
Reference
Packar black 10-way AMP junior timer male connector
3378293 M1
3378296 M1
Proportional solenoid valve socket (Facom S29LA)
3378302 M12
Complete electrical / electronic service suitcase
3378304 M11
Empty electrical / electronic service suitcase
3580817M1
male connector extractor
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
14A01.39
Designation
Reference
3580818 M1
Clip extractor
3580820 M1
Circular connector contact extractor
3712723 M1
4 LED harness (Autotronic 2)
3714779M1
Adaptation harness for tester / programmer, included in tester kit
3715767 M1
Tester connection harness / Programmer on electronic linkage

connector
Issue 1
May 2001

14A01.40
Service tools
Designation
Reference
114 010
Deutsch extractor 2 mm2 (yellow)
0411-204-1605
Deutsch extractor 1.5 mm2 (blue)
0411-204-2005
Deutsch extractor 0.5 mm2 (red)
Issue 1
May 2001
Service tools
Designation
Reference
3376935 M1
14A01.41
Air conditioning plugs kit
Issue 1
May 2001

MF8200 Series SM 019640

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

MF8200 Series SM 019640

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Workshop service manual N 3378177 M1

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

Reading the manual

Instructions for putting the tractor in service

Locking compounds and sealants

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

The aim of this manual is to assist Distributors and

In certain countries, the legislation actually forbids the

Repair Times Schedule

The chapters in the Repair Times Schedule are identical

A . Reading the manual

At the bottom of the page is shown the issue number and

Using the manual

Repairs and replacement of parts

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

Air / Air intercooler

Rated power (ISO Kw)

At engine speed (rpm)

Maximum torque (ISO Nm)

Engine speed at maximum torque

Maximum power speed (rpm)

Maximum speed at no load (rpm)

Engine oil cooler

Injectors and nozzle holder

Injection and air filter

Two-stage air filter, a dry filter element with a filter-clogging indicator.

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

8270 / 8270 Xtra

8280 / 8280 Xtra

Air / Water intercooler

Air / Air intercooler

Engine speed at maximum torque

Maximum power speed (rpm)

Maximum speed at no load (rpm)

Rated power (ISO Kw)

Engine oil cooler

8260 / 8260 Xtra

8270 / 8270 Xtra

8280 / 8280 Xtra

Injection and air filter

Injectors and nozzle holder

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

12 volt, negative to ground

Thermostat controlled, open temperature: 82 C.

- wet clutch : 8210 / 8220 : 6 plates

- 1 x 60 micron suction strainer

Dynashift gearbox with power shuttle

8210 - 8220 power shuttle

8240 power shuttle

8250 power shuttle

- 1 x 60 micron suction strainer

8200 SERIES TRACTORS

Full Powershift gearbox :

- 17 or 18 forward speeds (depending on 30 km/h or 40 km/h version)

9 clutches controlled by solenoid valves

ratio creeper gearbox :

- 34 or 36 forward speeds (depending on 30 km/h or 40 km/h version)